Skip to main content

Full text of "South Africa: a study in colonial administration and development"

See other formats


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


i1- 


SOUTH    AFRICA 


B'F  P  HIT  wX       LAND    "     ' 


C       R      L     A    T 


\  IROTFOTORATE  T 


;   N*--!!**  land!  "'""«" ^^«       'J^  v*  s"«.  . 


<      \    r    I         i    a    i    ^f    \ 


SOUTH  AFRICA 

A  STUDY  IN  COLONIAL  ADMINISTRATION  AND 
DEVELOPMENT. 


BY 


W.     BASIL    WORSFOLD,     M.A. 

OF    UNIVERSITY   COLLEGE,    OXFORD  ;    AND   OF   THE    MIDDLE   TEMPLE, 
BARRISTER-AT-LA\V 


SECOND   EDITION,    REVISED 


METHUEN   &   CO. 

36   ESSEX   STREET,   W.C. 

LONDON 

1897 


PREFACE. 

In  these  pages  I  have  endeavoured  to  set  out  in  a 
connected  form  the  most  important  features  in  the  past 
history  and  present  circumstances  of  South  Africa. 

Additional  information,  with  extracts  from  authorities 
somewhat  difficult  of  access,  is  contained  in  the  Notes  ;  and 
I  have  added  a  Historical  Summary,  a  Statistical  Appendix, 
and  the  Text  of  the  Convention  of  London,  This  latter 
is  given  because  of  its  importance  (as  governing  to  a 
large  extent  the  present  relationships  of  England  to  the 
Transvaal),  and  also  because  the  Blue-book  which  contains 
it  is,  I  understand,  out  of  print. 

I  should  perhaps  say  that  I  have  been  able  to  bring 
information  acquired  during  a  residence  of  nearly  two  years 
in  the  Cape  Colony  and  Natal  to  bear  upon  the  treatment 
of  this  subject. 

W.  B.  W. 

Lamb  Building, 

/uue  loth,  1895. 


n 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION. 

The  rapid  march  of  events  in  South  Africa  has  made  it 
necessary  to  increase  the  original  contents  of  this  book  by 
two  additional  chapters,  which  deal  respectively  with  the 
recent  disturbances  in  the  Transvaal  and  the  insurrection 
of  the  natives  under  the  administration  of  the  Chartered 
Company. 

In  connection  with  these  chapters  I  desire  to  acknow- 
ledge my  indebtedness  to  Mr  Henry  Hess  for  his  courtesy 
in  permitting  me  to  embody  in  the  text  some  remarks  on 
the  Jameson  case  and  other  comments  taken  from  articles 
which  I  had  contributed  to  the  African  Critic. 

At  the  same  time  I  have  taken  the  opportunity  afforded 
by  the  issue  of  a  fresh  edition  to  bring  the  information 
contained  in  the  original  chapters  down  to  the  present 
date. 

I  have  also  added  three  notes,  which  refer  respectively 
to  the  Transvaal  Legislation  of  1896,  the  population  of 
Johannesburg,  and  the  Rinderpest. 

W.  B.  W. 

Lamb  Building,  Temim.k,  E.G., 
Deccviber  yh,   1896. 


Page 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  I. 

Early  History. 

Variety  of  political  and  social  conditions  of  South  Africa  makes 
its  history  specially  instructive — Connection  of  South-east 
Africa  with  trading  nations  of  antiquity — The  discovery  of  the 
maritime  route  to  India  causes  the  Cape  to  be  used  as  a  half- 
way-house by  the  Portuguese,  English,  and  Dutch  traders — 
A  station  established  in  1652  by  the  Dutch  East  India 
Company — The  station  becomes  a  settlement — Huguenot 
emigration — Relations  of  the  Company  to  the  natives,  and  to 
the  Franco-Dutch  settlers — Review  of  the  period  of  the 
Company's  government       .....  I 

CHAPTER  II. 

The  Kafir  Wars. 

Early  British  Government.  Introduction  of  English  element  by 
Albany  Settlement — The  expansion  of  the  Cape  Colony 
becomes  a  record  of  conflicts  between  the  %vhite  settlers  and 
the  Kafirs,  i.e.  military  Bantu — Emancipation  of  coloured 
races  within  the  colony — Colonial  frontier  policy  reversed  by 
Lord  Glenelg — Emigration  of  large  section  of  Franco-Dutch 
population — The  cost  of  the  Kafir  wars  determines  the 
British  Government  to  allow  the  dismemberment  of  the 
white  communities,  and  to  withdraw  from  the  administra- 
tion of  native  territories  outside  the  limits  of  the  Cape 
Colony  and  Natal — Independence  of  emigrant  farmers  in  the 
Transvaal  (1852),  and  in  the  Orange  River  Sovereignty 
(1854),  recognised — Grant  of  Representative  Government  to 
the  Cape  Colony — General  progress  of  the  Colony    .        ,  25 

CHAPTER  III. 

Sir  Bartle  Frere  and  Federation. 

Sir  George  Grey — Kafir  Policy — German  immigration — His 
condemnation  of  dismemberment  of  South  Africa,  and  pro- 
posals for  the  introduction  of  a  Federal   system — The  dis- 


viii  CONTENTS 


covery  of  diamonds  causes  the  reversal  of  the  policy  of  non- 
intervention— Resumption  of  British  authority  over  Griqua- 
land  West  (Kimberiey  district)  in  1871 — Dissatisfaction  of 
the  Free  State — Lord  Carnarvon's  proposal  for  reuniting 
the  white  states  in  a  federal  system  similar  to  that  of  the 
Canadian  Dominion — Mr  Froude's  mission — The  annexation 
of  the  Transvaal  in  April  1877 — Sir  Bartle  Frere  appointed 
to  give  effect  to  Lord  Carnarvon's  policy  in  1877.  Wide- 
spread movement  of  revolt  among  the  Bantu  peoples — 
The  subjugation  of  the  natives  becomes  a  condition  precedent 
to  the  re-union  of  the  white  communities — The  revolt  of 
the  Kafirs  under  Kreli  crushed— Ketshwayo's  "  fighting 
machine "  broken  up  by  the  Zulu  war — Reduction  of 
Sikukuni — Settlement  of  Zululand  by  Wolseley — Movement 
among  the  Transvaal  burghers  for  the  restoration  of  their 
independence — Sympathy  with  them  in  England  and  in 
the  Cape  Colony — The  Federation  proposals  of  the  Cape 
ministry  abandoned — Recall  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere — Review 
of  his  administration  (1877-80)      .  ...  43 

CHAPTER  IV. 

The  Boers. 

Transvaal  Revolt — History  of  the  Boers — Their  services  to  South 
Africa — Defeat  of  Moselekatse  and  Dingan — Relations  be- 
tween the  emigrant  farmers  and  the  Imperial  Government — 
Transvaal  Revolt,  1880-81 — Attitude  of  the  Free  State  ;  of 
the  Africander  party  at  the  Cape — Services  of  Sir  Evelyn 
Wood — Retrocession  of  Transvaal  can  only  be  justified  on 
grounds  of  political  expediency — Position  of  the  Boers  in 
South  Africa  ......  61 


CHAPTER  V. 

Natal  and  the  Kafir  Problem. 

Constitution  of  Natal  a  separate  colony  in  1848 — European 
emigration  —  Physical  characteristics  of  the  countr)' — 
Carrying  trade — Sugar  Industry — Indian  labour  imported 
for  the  plantations — Development  of  Coal  Mines — Grant 
of  Responsible  Government  in  1893 — Smallness  of  white 
population  (one  in  ten) — System  of  native  administration 
— Rapid  increase  of  Kafir  population — Question  of  the 
growth  of  the  Bantu  population  in  South  Africa — The 
wider  question  of  the  ultimate  numerical  relationship 
between  the  white  and  coloured  races  of  the  world  raised 


CONTENTS  ix 


PACK 

in  Pearson's  "  National  Life  and  Character  *  — Native 
education  in  the  Cape  Colony  and  its  results — Mr 
Pearson's  "  Forecast "        .....  79 

CHAPTER  VI. 

The  Bechuanaland  Settlement. 

The  Hottentots  and  Bushmen  (yellow-skinned)  are  practically 
extrnct,  but  the  various  branches  of  the  Bantu  (dark-skinned) 
race  thrive  in  South  Africa — Comparison  of  military  and 
industrial  Bantu — Basutoland  :  ability  displayed  by  Moshesh 
— Bechuanaland  :  the  scene  of  the  labours  of  Moffat  and 
Livingstone — The  trade  route  to  Central  Africa — Western 
Border  of  Transvaal  not  delimited  until  1884 — Claim  of 
Boers  to  Sovereignty  over  Bechuanas — In  1884  Imperial 
Government  determine  to  assume  control  of  northward 
expansion  of  the  white  settlers — In  defiance  of  British  Pro- 
tectorate Transvaal  freebooters  effect  settlements  in  1884 — 
Importance  of  maintaining  the  trade  route  to  the  interior 
recognised — Change  of  opinion  in  the  Cape  Colony — 
Bechuanaland  expedition  under  Warren — Restoration  of 
British  prestige  in  South  Africa — The  Bechuanaland  settle- 
ment is  the  turning  point  in  British  Administration  of 
South  Africa  ......  99 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Agricultural  and  Pastoral  Resources. 

Sea-borne  trade  of  England — Deficiency  of  South  Africa  in  grain, 
cattle  and  sheep  as  compared  with  other  new  Anglo-Saxon 
countries — Situation  and  characteristics  of  chief  agricultura 
and  pastoral  districts — Special  industries,  ostrich  farming, 
angora  goat,  and  wine  farming — Deficiency  due  to  uncertain 
rainfall,  and  unprogressiveness  of  Boer — Evidence  of 
travellers  unanimous — Man,  not  nature,  at  fault — Efforts  of 
Colonial  Government — Agricultural  department  created,  and 
means  for  (scientific)  agricultural  education  provided  through- 
out the  Colony — System  of  land  tenure  in  British  colonies 
generally,  and  in  the  Cape  Colony — New  countries  must 
not  be  judged  by  the  same  tests  as  old  countries    .  .         117 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
The  Diamond  Mines  (Kimberley). 
Accounts  of  the  discovery  of  diamonds — Rush  to  the  Vaal  in 
1870 — Kimberley  mine  opened,  July  21,  1871— Small  extent 
of  diamondiferous  area — Geology  of  diamond  mines  :  pro- 

b 


CONTENTS 


bably  volcanic  funnels  filled  with  mud— Origin  of  diamonds 
a  mystery.  Difticullies  and  discomforts  of  early  miners — 
Formation  of  "Mining  Board"  in  1874— Old  system: 
ownership  by  claim  and  surface  working — Claims  gradually 
converted  into  companies  as  difficulty  of  working  increases 
— Reef  {i.e.  sides  of  workings)  falls  in— Crisis  in  1883 — 
The  problem  of  sinking  shafts  for  subterranean  working 
solved — Amalgamation  of  companies  :  until,  in  1888,  the 
De  Beers  Consolidated  Mines  practically  absorbs  the  whole 
industry — Regulation  of  output  and  economy  of  working 
secured — Description  of  mines :  methods  of  extracting 
diamonds  from  soil  raised  from  mines  ;  housing  and  pay- 
ment of  European  employes  ;  absolute  control  of  natives 
— Town  of  Kimberley— Special  legislation  and  extraordinary 
precautions  to  prevent  the  illicit  sale  of  diamonds  in  the 
Cape  Colony — The  story  of  the  diamond  industry  a  remark- 
able record  of  commercial  enterprise  .  .  .         136 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Gold-mining. 

Distribution  of  minerals  throughout  South  Africa — Iron : 
Copper  :  Silver  :  Coal  :  Gold — History  of  gold-mining  in 
the  Transvaal — Original  discovery  discountenanced  by  Gov- 
ernment on  political  grounds — Gold  laws — Gold-mining 
commenced  at  Leydenburg  in  1873;  at  De  Kaap  fields  in 
18S2  ;  at  Witwatersrandt  in  18S6 — Foundation  of  Johannes- 
burg in  1886-87,  now  a  town  of  70,000  inhabitants — De- 
scription of  the  Randt  basin — Estimates  of  the  extent  of 
the  auriferous  deposits — Comparison  and  review  of  gold 
out-put  of  North  America,  Australia,  and  South  Africa — The 
world's  out-put,  1 700- 1 894 — Effect  of  increased  gold  product 
u]X)n  commerce  of  the  world  ....         152 

CHAPTER  X. 

Conflict  of  Nationalities  and  Races. 

O'.it  of  three  (main)  elements,  Bantu,  Dutch  and  English,  are 
fumed  a  variety  of  governments  differently  related  to  the 
Imjierial  Government  and  to  each  other — An  inquiry  into 
the  comparative  failure  of  British  administration — Diver- 
gences of  opinion  between  the  Imperial  and  Colonial  Govern- 
ments— More  fatal  than  special  difficulties — Nationality 
difficulty  and  native  question — Examples  of  disagreement 
between  "the  man  in  Downing  Street"  and  "the  man 
on  the  spot " — England  never  assumed   the  role  of  para- 


CONTENTS  xi 


PAGE 

mount  power  until  1884 — In  1884-85  (Bechuanaland)  the 
Imperial  Government  avoided  the  mistake  of  1854,  and 
determined  to  control  the  northward  expansion  of  the  whites 
— Extension  of  this  policy  to  Mashonaland  in  1889— The 
factor  of  race  is  becoming  gradually  less  important — Partial 
union  of  parties  effected  by  Mr  Rhodes — Amalgamation 
of  the  Dutch  and  English  races  is  being  brought  about  by 
the  spread  of  education  and  extension  of  railway  com- 
munication— Question  of  slavery  lay  at  the  root  of  the 
separation  of  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa — Treatment  of 
natives  is  still  most  formidable  barrier  to  reunion— Mr 
Rhodes  deals  with  the  Bantu  problem  by  the  Glen  Grey  Act 
— The  Africander  race         .....         166 

CHAPTER  XI. 

South  African  Literature. 

Colonial  literature  ;  in  what  sense  it  can  be  distinguished  as 
such  ;  birth  of  the  author  in  a  colony  not  a  sufficient  test ; 
knowledge  of  special  locality  and  of  local  character  not 
enough  ;  the  characteristic  quality  is  the  reproduction  of  the 
spirit,  and  not  the  letter,  of  colonial  life — This  "feeling" 
gives  a  special  value  to  the  poetry  of  Adam  Lindsay  Gordon 
and  Rudyard  Kipling  ;  to  the  prose-fiction  of  Browne  (Rolf 
Boldrewood),  and  Olive  Schreiner — Thomas  Pringle  is  a 
South  African  poet,  he  portrays  characteristic  incidents  in 
the  life  of  the  natives  and  settlers  ;  his  inspiration  comes 
from  the  desert  and  the  wild  uplands  of  the  Eastern  frontier 
— Olive  Schreiner  :  her  youth — The  "  Story  of  an  African 
Farm "  is  a  book  of  "  thought  " ;  Part  i.  is  a  study  of 
child-life  in  a  South  African  setting ;  Part  ii.  an  essay  on 
woman's  rights.  The  book  is  redolent  of  the  Karoo,  its 
incompleteness,  its  strange  gaps,  faithfully  reflect  the 
physical  and  moral  conditions  under  which  it  was  written 
— It  is  valuable  to  the  student  as  a  picture  of  typical  South 
African  life  and  of  Boer  character — Estimate  of  its  literary 
merit — Political  essay- writing  at  the  Cape  .  .  .         186 

CHAPTER  XH. 

The  Chartered  Company  and  Mr  Cecil  Rhodes. 

Mashonaland  identified  by  Mr  Theodore  Bent  with  the  land  of 
Ophir — Zimbabwe  ruins — Victoria  Falls  on  Zambesi— Con- 
quest of  Mashonaland  by  the  Matabele  Zulus  and  devasta- 
tion of  country— Extension  of  British  sphere  to  the  Zambesi 


xn  CONTENTS 


PAGE 


(1885) — Concession  granted  by  Lobengula  for  exploring 
and  prospecting  (1888) — Charter  granted  to  British  South 
Africa  Company  (1889) — The  Occupation  of  Mashonaland 
by  the  Company — The  Pioneer  expedition,  conducted  by 
Selous,  reaches  Salisbury,  Sept.  12,  1890— Colquhoun 
administrator,  1890-91  ;  Jameson,  1891 — Anglo-Portuguese 
Convention  (1891)  opens  east  coast — Lobengula  attacks 
Maslionas  in  Victoria — Matabele  war,  1893 — Extension  of 
railway  and  telegraph  systems  northward — Development  of 
Mashonaland  plateau — Growth  of  Buluwayo— Commercial 
basis  of  Charterland — Shareholders'  profits  from  minerals 
only — Mr  Rhodes'  "Patent" — Prospects  of  gold-mining — 
Buluwayo  in  Autumn  1895  ....         204 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

The  Revolt  of  the  Uitlanders. 

Terms  of  Transvaal  Independence  in  1881 — Alteration  of  posi- 
tion of  British  population  by  successive  enactments  of  the 
Raad — The  admitted  grievances  of  the  Uitlanders — Lord 
Loch's  action  in  1894  —  Dr  Jameson's  incursion  —  Mr 
Chamberlain's  action — Lord  Rosmead  (Sir  H.  Robinson)  at 
Pretoria — Position  of  Mr  Rhodes — Trial  of  Reformers  at 
Pretoria — of  Dr  Jameson  in  London — Responsibility  for  the 
Raid  .......        223 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

The  Insurrection  of  the  Natives  in  Rhodesia. 

Immediate  changes  in  the  Chartered  Company  consequent  upon 
the  Raid — South  Africa  Committee — Causes  of  Native  In- 
surrection— Action  of  local  government  and  settlers  — 
Measures  taken  by  High  Commissioner  and  Imperial 
Government  to  relieve  whites — Colonel  Plumer's  force — 
General  Carrington  appointed  to  command — Course  of 
military  operations — Shooting  of  M'Limo — Mr  Rhodes's 
Indaba — Reforms  proposed  by  Chartered  Company — The 
future  of  Rhodesia  ......         245 


Notes   ........  265 

Historical  Summary  .....  291 

Statistical  Api-endix  .....  295 

Text  of  Convention  of  London  ....  300 


CHAPTER  I 

The  Early  History  and  Occupation  by  the 
Dutch  East  India  Company. 

TN  one  of  those  reflections  which  delight  us  by  their 
"•■  simplicity  and  astonish  us  by  their  profundity,  Pascal 
remarks  that  the  first  object  of  a  man's  study  is  his  own 
person,  that  is  to  say,  that  portion  of  matter  which  is 
immediately  under  his  own  control.  But  he  adds  that  a 
man  can  never  attain  to  a  full  knowledge  of  himself  until 
he  has  mastered  the  science  of  the  universe.  And  the 
same  thought  occurs  in  a  somewhat  different  form  in  that 
defiant  line  in  the  opening  stanza  of  Mr  Rudyard  Kipling's 
ballad  of  "  The  English  Flag  "— 

'*  And  what  should  they  know  of  England,  who  only  England  know?" 

Somewhat  on  this  principle  I  am  going  to  commence  the 
study  of  South  Africa  by  a  review  of  the  leading  charac- 
teristics of  the  other  three  great  provinces  of  the  Empire 
— Australasia,  Canada,  and  India;  and  by  a  comparison 
of  South  Africa  with  these  provinces. 

South  Africa — which  means  for  us  Africa  south  of  the 
Zambesi,  omitting  the  German  territory  on  the  west,  and 
the  Portuguese  territory  on  the  east,  coasts — has  an  area 
(in  round  numbers)  of  one  and  a  quarter  million  square 
miles,  and  a  population  of  four  millions.  It  resembles 
Australia  to  some  extent  in  physical  characteristics,  for  in 
both  countries  there  are  central  and  western  desert  lands, 

A 


2  SOUTH  AFRICA 

and  mountainous  and  more  fertile  eastern  and  southern 
littorals.  In  both  countries  the  land  requires  to  be  irri- 
gated and  fertilised,  and  the  task  of  turning  the  desert  into 
the  garden  is  the  primary  labour  which  engrosses  the 
inhabitants  of  both  alike.  The  area  of  Australasia — that 
is,  Australia  and  New  Zealand — is  more  than  twice  as  large 
as  that  of  South  Africa,  but  its  population  is  the  same — 
four  millions.  There  is  a  circumstance,  however,  which 
makes  the  character  of  these  two  provinces  of  the  Empire 
entirely  different  :  whereas  the  population  of  South  Africa 
is  composed  of  Europeans  and  natives  in  the  proportion  of 
one  to  seven  or  eight,  the  four  million  people  of  Australasia 
are  almost  exclusively  of  Anglo-Saxon  origin. 

The  area  of  Canada,  or  British  North  America,  is  nearly 
three  times  as  extensive  as  that  of  South  Africa  ;  and  its 
population,  which  is  composed  almost  entirely  of  persons 
of  European  origin,  is  five  millions.  In  physical  character- 
istics the  two  countries  are  absolutely  diverse.  Canada  is 
well  supplied  with  navigable  rivers  and  inlets  of  the  sea. 
South  Africa  is  peculiarly  deficient  in  this  respect.  In  the 
"  barren  ground  "  of  Northern  Canada  is  the  haunt  of  the 
musk-ox ;  the  Kalihari  desert  is  the  home  of  the  lion. 
But  there  is  a  point  of  resemblance  between  Canada  and 
South  Africa.  In  both  countries  the  European  population 
is  divided  into  two  sections.  In  Canada  there  are  a 
million  and  a  half  French  people  and  three  and  a  half 
millions  of  English ;  and  in  South  Africa  the  Dutch 
population  exceeds  the  English  in  the  proportion  of  five 
to  four.  In  both  countries,  therefore,  there  is  the 
"  nationality "  difficulty,  the  difiiculty  of  making  two 
diverse  peoples  pull  together  in  the  work  of  civilisation. 

Lastly  there  is  India.  The  area  of  the  two  countries  * 
is  much  the  same,  but  their  respective  physical  character- 
istics are  absolutely  unlike.  With  its  deficient  rainfall  and 
its  useless  rivers,  South  Africa  grows  barely  enough  food 
*  Including  Burmah  in  the  area  of  "  India." 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION  3 

for  its  small  population,  but  India  is  a  very  garden  for 
fertility,  and  supports  a  population  of  little  less  than  three 
hundred  millions.  But  here,  again,  there  is  a  point  of 
contact.  In  both  India  and  South  Africa  the  basis  of 
the  population  is  formed  by  the  native  races.  In  certain 
districts  of  South  Africa  there  is  an  overwhelming  majority 
of  dark-skinned  people,  and  in  these  districts  the  social  and 
political  conditions  are  those  of  India.  That  is  to  say, 
the  coloured  races  are  controlled  and  administered  by 
the  handful  of  Europeans  resident  among  them. 

From  the  political  point  of  view.  South  Africa  exhibits 
a  bewildering  variety.  Unlike  Canada,  the  several  states 
are  not  yet  united  under  a  Central  Government ;  unlike 
Australia,  these  states  are  by  no  means  equally  advanced 
in  the  path  of  civilisation.  The  two  colonies,  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope  (with  which  Southern  Bechuanaland  is  now 
incorporated)  and  Natal,  enjoy  the  freedom  of  "  responsible 
government."  The  Free  State  and  the  South  African  Re- 
public, or  the  Transvaal,  are  two  Dutch  Republics  pos- 
sessing full  internal  freedom.  Of  the  native  territories, 
some  are  administered  by  Imperial,  and  some  by  colonial 
officers.  Finally,  there  is  the  British  South  Africa  Company, 
which  exercises  a  civil  administration  over  territories  as 
extensive  as  the  combined  areas  of  France,  Germany, 
Italy,  and  Austria.  In  certain  territories  the  "  regulations  "  * 
of  the  Company's  Administrator  have  the  force  of  law  by 
virtue  of  their  Charter  and  subsequent  Agreements  with 
the  Imperial  Government. 

But  if  the  political  conditions  of  South  Africa  are 
characterised  by  variety,  an  equally  well-marked  note  of 
uniformity  runs  through  its  physical  features.  Great 
ranges  of  mountains  run  down  the  eastern  coast,  along 
the  southern  coast,  and  more  brokenly  up  the  western 
coast,  at  varying  distances  from  the  coast-line  which 
they  thus  approximately  follow.  Behind  these  barrier 
*  Clause  10,  Agreement  ot  May  1894. 


4  SOUTH  AFRICA 

ranges  are  high  plateaux  declining  into  the  western 
and  central  deserts ;  between  the  ranges  and  the  sea  the 
land  falls  rapidly  either  in  terraces,  or  in  a  succession 
of  lesser  ranges,  or  in  both.  There  are  two  facts  then 
which  the  briefest  survey  of  the  physical  characteristics 
of  South  Africa  reveals.  In  the  first  place,  owing  to  the 
great  elevation  of  the  central  regions,  the  climate  improves 
as  we  advance  from  the  coast  inland ;  and,  in  the  second, 
the  spasmodic  character  of  the  rainfall  (due  in  part  to 
the  disposition  of  the  great  mountain  ranges),  acting  in 
combination  with  the  rapid  fall  of  the  land  from  the 
high  plateaux  or  mountain  ranges  to  the  coast,  renders 
the  rivers  of  South  Africa  singularly  inefficient  for  purposes 
both  of  irrigation  and  of  navigation. 

The  history  of  South  Africa  does  not  begin  with  the 
station  which  Van  Riebeck  planted  in  1652,  in  the  south- 
western corner  of  the  Continent,  but  on  the  low-lying  land 
of  the  south-east  coast.  It  is  unnecessary  to  recapitulate 
the  interesting  chain  of  evidence  by  which  the  identity 
of  Mashonaland  with  the  "  Ophir "  of  antiquity  is  practic- 
ally established  by  Mr  Theodore  Bent.  It  is  sufficient 
to  know  the  result  of  this  evidence  as  it  is  summed  up 
in  a  single  sentence  by  the  explorer.* 

"  Here,  near  the  east  coast  of  Africa,  far  nearer  to 
Arabia  than  India  and  China  and  other  places,  which 
they  were  accustomed  to  visit,  not  only  is  there  evidence 
of  the  extensive  production  of  gold,  but  also  evidence  of 
a  cult,  known  to  Arabia  and  Phoenicia  alike,  temples 
built  on  accurate  mathematical  principles,  containing 
kindred  objects  of  art,  methods  of  producing  gold  known 
only  to  have  been  employed  in  the  ancient  world,  and 
evidence  of  a  vast  population  devoted  to  the  mining  of 
gold." 

This,  then,  was  the  most  fruitful  source  from  which 
was  drawn  that  supply  of  the  precious  metals  with  which 
•    "  Ruined  Cities  of  Mashonaland,"  pp.  193-4. 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION  5 

Phoenicia  was  enriched  at  the  period  when  Zechariah 
said  of  her  principal  city,  "  Tyre  heaped  up  silver  as  the 
dust,  and  fine  gold  as  the  mire  of  the  streets."  Here, 
too,  was  the  storehouse  of  that  profusion  of  wealth  of 
which  Horace  spoke  when  he  taunted  the  Roman 
miUionaire  with  the  thought  that  "  the  undivided  pos- 
session of  all  the  treasures  of  Arabia  and  the  sumptuous 
Orient  "*  could  not  ease  the  heart  of  the  dread  of  death. 

And  now  a  difificulty  arises.  How  was  it  that  the 
inquisitive  Greek  and  the  ubiquitous  Roman  remained 
in  ignorance  of  the  region  from  which  their  supplies  of 
this  precious  metal  came?  Because,  says  Mr  Theodore 
Bent,  it  was  part  of  the  recognised  policy  of  the  Semitic 
nations  to  rigorously  conceal  the  knowledge  of  their 
trading  routes — whether  those  routes  led  westward  beyond 
the  pillars  of  Hercules  to  the  White  Island  of  the  Atlantic, 
or  eastward  to  India,  China,  and  the  east  coast  of  Africa. 
The  secret  was  kept  so  well  that  it  was  not  until  the  end 
of  the  fifteenth  century  that  the  nations  of  Europe  were 
brought  into  direct  trading  connection  with  the  East. 

At  this  period  the  Mohammedans  had  succeeded  the 
Phoenicians  as  the  commercial  intermediaries  between 
the  East  and  West,  and  in  order  to  understand  the 
political  significance  of  the  discovery  of  the  maritime 
route  to  India,  we  must  regard  that  discovery  as  part 
of  the  great  political  duel  between  the  East  and  the 
West  which  runs  through  the  whole  course  of  history. 
In  that  duel  the  chief  antagonists  were  Greece  and 
Persia,  Rome  and  Parthia,  Christendom  and  Islam.  The 
merit  of  opening  up  the  maritime  route  to  the  East 
belongs  to  the  Infante  Henry  of  Portugal.  This  prince, 
it  is  pleasant  for  Englishmen  to  reflect,  was  very  closely 
connected  with  our  own  royal  family.  His  mother  was 
Philippa  of   Lancaster;    Henry    IV.   was   his    uncle,   and 

*  "  Intactis  opulentior 

Thesauris  Arabum  et  divitis  Indiae." — '  Odes,'  III.  24. 


6  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Henry  V.,  the  conqueror  of  Agincourt,  his  cousin.  In 
his  youth  he  was  engaged  in  the  wars  with  the  Moors  in 
Africa ;  and,  as  a  result  of  this  experience,  he  appears 
to  have  added  a  passion  for  geographical  research  to 
the  enmity  which  he  inherited  against  that  people.  He 
founded  a  naval  college  and  an  observatory,  and,  in 
spite  of  failures  and  discouragements,  sent  out  a  succession 
of  navigators  to  explore  the  western  coast  of  Africa 
and  find  an  ocean  pathway  to  the  East.  In  fact, 
he  seems  to  have  grasped  this  central  fact — that,  so 
long  as  the  trade  of  Europe  with  the  East  remained 
in  the  hands  of  the  Mohammedans,  the  merchants  of 
Europe  were  undoing  the  work  of  her  captains  and  men- 
at-arms.  For  although  the  Moors  had  been  driven  from 
the  Iberian  Peninsula,  the  Turks  were  securely  seated 
at  Constantinople,  and  threatened  to  advance  into  the 
heart  of  Europe :  and  it  was  the  profits  of  a  world-wide 
trade  which  supplied  the  treasure  by  which  this  for- 
midable military  power  was  supported. 

Henry  the  Navigator  died  in  1460.  He  died,  therefore, 
without  seeing  the  fruition  of  his  plans.  In  i486,  in  the 
reign  of  John  II.  of  Portugal — the  brother  of  the  Infante 
Henry — Bartholomew  Diaz,  while  engaged  in  this  work  of 
exploring  the  western  coast  of  Africa,  was  carried  by  a 
storm  to  the  southward.  At  first  he  steered  in  an  easterly 
direction,  but  when  he  failed  to  make  the  land,  he  altered 
his  course,  and  eventually  struck  the  southern  coast  of  the 
continent  at  a  point  slightly  westward  of  Cape  Agulhas. 
On  his  return  to  Portugal  he  proposed  to  name  the 
teirible  promontory  where  he  had  been  overtaken  by  the 
storm,  the  "  Cape  of  Tempests."  But  John,  realising  the 
importance  of  the  discovery,  changed  the  name  to  one  of 
happier  augury — the  *'  Cape  of  Good  Hope."  At  the 
same  time  the  king  sent  to  Cairo  and  to  Aden,  at  that 
time  the  centres  of  geographical  knowledge,  to  collect 
information  respecting  the  routes  to  the  East. 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION  7 

Ten  years  later,  in  the  reign  of  Emanuel  the  Fortunate, 
Vasco  da  Gama  started  on  his  memorable  voyage.  He 
left  Portugal  in  July  1497,  reached  the  Cape  in  November, 
touched  at  Natal  on  Christmas  Day,  and  finally  presented 
his  credentials  at  Calicut,  on  the  west  coast  of  Hindostan, 
early  in  the  following  year.  Only  six  years  previously 
Columbus  had  discovered  America  in  his  endeavour  to 
achieve  a  similar  purpose ;  and  so  it  happened  that  two 
events  so  pregnant  with  change  as  the  discovery  of  the 
"  new  world  "  of  America,  and  the  establishment  of  direct 
maritime  communication  between  the  western  nations  of 
Europe  and  the  East,  were  almost  contemporaneous. 

From  this  time  onwards  Portuguese,  Spanish,  Dutch, 
EngUsh  and  French  ships  made  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope, 
or  rather  Table  Bay,  a  port  of  call  on  the  voyage  to  and 
from  the  East ;  but  it  was  not  until  a  hundred  and  fifty 
years  later  that  a  permanent  station  was  established  there. 

By  this  time  the  East  India  trade  had  to  a  large  extent 
fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  Dutch  and  English.  It  had 
been  organised  by  the  establishment  of  two  great  trading 
corporations,  the  Dutch  and  English  East  India  Companies, 
which  were  chartered  almost  simultaneously  in  the  opening 
years  of  the  seventeenth  century. 

The  event  which  immediately  led  to  the  foundation  of 
a  naval  station  at  the  Cape  by  the  Dutch  East  India 
Company  was  the  wreck  of  the  Haarlem  in  Table  Bay  in 
1648.  The  crew  of  the  unfortunate  East  Indiaman  re- 
mained on  the  shore  of  Table  Bay  for  five  months  before 
they  were  carried  back  to  Holland  by  the  homeward  bound 
fleet.  On  their  return,  two  of  the  shipwrecked  crew, 
Janssen  and  Proot,  drew  up  a  "remonstrance,"  which 
they  presented  to  the  Chamber  XVII. ,  the  directory  of 
the  Company.  In  this  memorial  they  set  out  the 
advantages  which,  in  their  opinion,  would  arise  from 
the  establishment  of  a  station  there,  and  enlarged  upon 
the  suitability  of  the  place  for  this  purpose.     Ultimately 


8  SOUTH  AFRICA 

the  directors  decided  to  carry  out  the  proposal,  and  the 
command  of  the  expedition  was  given  to  Jan  Antony  van 
Riebeck,  a  surgeon  in  the  Company's  service. 

The  scope  of  the  Company's  operations  was  exceedingly 
limited.  Their  object  was  entirely  practical,  and  excluded 
any  motives  of  political  ambition,  or  religious  or  scientific 
enthusiasm.  Van  Riebeck  was  instructed  to  erect  a  wooden 
building  for  the  accommodation  of  invalided  sailors  and 
soldiers ;  to  construct  a  fort  with  accommodation  for  a 
garrison  of  seventy  or  eighty  men ;  to  form  a  garden  where 
vegetables  could  be  grown — this  was  a  matter  of  great  im- 
portance, for  at  that  period  scurvy  was  a  terrible  scourge ; 
and  to  treat  the  natives  kindly.  He  carried  out  with  him 
materials  for  the  wooden  building,  and  four  iron  culverins 
to  arm  the  fort :  and  he  was  further  bidden  to  keep  a  diary 
for  the  information  of  the  directors.  The  expedition  was 
conveyed  in  three  ships,  the  Drotnedary,  the  Heron,  and 
the  sloop  Good  Hope,  and  it  was  composed  exclusively  of 
persons  in  the  civil  or  military  employment  of  the  Com- 
pany, who,  with  a  few  female  relatives,  amounted  to  a  total 
of  less  than  two  hundred  in  all.  Van  Riebeck  embarked 
on  the  Dromedary  on  the  i6th  December  1651,  and  set 
sail  from  the  Texel  on  the  24th;  and  all  three  ships  were 
lying  at  anchor  in  Table  Bay  on  the  morning  of  Sunday, 
the  7th  April  1652. 

The  period  of  the  Dutch  occupation  dates  from  the 
arrival  of  Van  Riebeck.  At  this  time  what  is  now  the 
Cape  Colony  was  as  much  an  uninhabited  country  as 
Australia  was  a  century  ago.  There  was  a  fringe  of 
Hottentots  and  Bushmen  inhabiting  the  western  and 
southern  coast  districts  and  the  banks  of  the  Orange 
River,  but  that  was  all.  This  population,  amounting  to 
a  probable  total  of  only  150,000  degraded  and  miserable 
yellow-skinned  people,  were  the  aborigines  of  South  Africa. 
The  dark-skinned  race — the  Bantu — a  people  far  higher 
in  the  scale  of  humanity — had  as  little  claim  to  the  title 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION  9 

of  "  natives "  as  the  Europeans ;  but  they  had  already 
passed  down  the  eastern  coast  between  the  Drakensberg 
and  the  Indian  Ocean,  and  penetrated  southwards  as  far 
as  the  Kei  River.  And  so  the  southern  extremity  of  the 
continent  came  to  be  occupied  almost  contemporaneously 
by  the  Europeans  and  the  Bantu. 

The  station  at  Table  Bay  was  a  very  small  affair.  As 
a  unit  in  the  system  of  the  Dutch  East  India  Company 
(Note  i),  it  was  simply  a  dependency  of  the  third  rank  of 
the  Council  of  India,  which  sat  at  Batavia,  in  Java,  then, 
as  now,  the  centre  of  the  Dutch  possessions  in  the  East. 
Van  Riebeck  was  styled  only  a  "  Commander,"  and  he 
was  liable  to  be  superseded  whenever  an  admiral  or  a 
high  official  came  into  Table  Bay.  Some  of  the  most 
important  of  the  early  measures  of  the  Cape  Government 
are  due  to  the  presence  and  action  of  these  visiting 
authorities.  The  Commander  was  assisted  in  the  govern- 
ment by  a  "  Council  of  Policy."  The  first  council  was 
formed  by  Van  Riebeck,  the  sergeant,  and  the  "  book- 
keeper " :  but  when  it  sat  as  a  court  of  justice,  the 
constable  of  the  fortress,  and  the  two  corporals,  were 
admitted  to  the  board.  The  only  religious  functionary 
was  the  "  sick-comforter."  Marriages  were  performed  in 
the  presence  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Council,  after  the 
banns  had  been  published  by  the  "  sick-comforter." 

For  the  first  few  years  this  handful  of  Europeans  lived 
the  sort  of  life  which  is  described  in  those  imaginary 
accounts  of  persons  wrecked  on  uninhabited  or  savage 
coasts  so  dear  to  our  boyhood.  A  picture  of  almost 
photographic  exactness  is  presented  to  us  in  the  "  Diary  " 
which  Van  Riebeck  was  ordered  to  keep,  and  of  which 
a  great  part  has  been  fortunately  preserved.*  Under  the 
date  October  1652,  we  read  that  Herman  Van  Vogslaar 
was   convicted    of   "wishing  the  purser  at  the  devil  for 

*  "  The  Record,"  a  collection  of  original  documents  made  by  Donald 
Moodie,  Lieut.  R.N.  :  published  at  Capetown  in  1838. 


10  SOUTH  AFRICA 

serving  out  penguins  instead  of  pork,"  and  sentenced  "  to 
receive  one  hundred  blows  from  the  butt-end  of  a  musket." 
On  January  ist,  1653,  the  first  cabbage  was  cut.  On  the 
15  th  of  the  same  month  a  gahot,  or  despatch  boat, 
arrived  from  Europe.  Among  the  items  of  news  which 
she  brought  were  accounts  of  the  execution  of  Charles  I., 
and  of  the  declaration  of  war  between  the  Commonwealth 
and  Holland.  On  Sunday,  October  19th,  David  Janssen, 
a  herdsman,  was  assegaied  to  death  during  service-time  by 
the  Hottentots,  and  the  cattle  under  his  charge  were  stolen. 
On  March  6th,  1854,  a  dead  " basmanneken,"  or  baboon, 
was  found  and  eaten.  The  animal  is  described  as  being 
"as  large  as  a  small  calf,"  and  was  evidently  regarded  as 
a  welcome  accession  to  the  larder.  On  the  6th  of  April, 
the  second  anniversary  of  the  foundation  of  the  settlement 
was  celebrated.  "  Owing  to  scarcity  of  bread  and  meat," 
it  was  impossible  for  the  little  community  to  have  a  feast ; 
but,  "  we  abstained  from  labour,"  the  diary  says,  "  and 
listened  to  a  long  sermon,  and  thus  made  the  most  we 
could  of  the  occasion."  June  29th,  1656,  was  observed 
as  "a  day  of  prayer  and  humiliation."  The  community 
were  reproved  for  their  carelessness  shown  in  the  omission 
of  prayer  before  partaking  of  food ;  and  the  Council 
ordered  that  the  neglect  of  this  religious  duty  should  be 
punished  by  a  fine  amounting  to  is.  for  the  first  offence, 
and  2s.  for  the  second,  beside  "  arbitrary  correction  " 

Five  years  after  the  arrival  of  the  expedition,  a  step  was 
taken  by  the  Directors  which  changed  the  establishment 
at  the  Cape  from  a  mere  naval  station  to  a  permanent 
European  settlement.  At  this  time  the  residents  in  and 
around  the  fort  on  the  shores  of  Table  Bay  amounted  to 
134  white  persons  and  a  few  slaves.  In  April  1657, 
nine  soldiers  and  sailors  were  discharged  and  established  as 
market-gardeners  or  farmers  on  the  banks  of  the  Liesbeck, 
the  small  stream  which  traverses  the  Cape  Peninsula,  at 
a  place   called  then,  as   now,  Rondebosch,  and  situated 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION        ii 

about  three  miles  from  the  fort.  They  were  allowed  to  occupy 
holdings  of  twenty-six  acres  in  extent,  and  they  were  provided 
with  tools  and  seeds  from  the  Company's  stores.  They 
were  also  exempted  from  taxation  for  a  period  of  years. 
In  return  for  these  benefits,  the  settlers,  euphemistically 
termed  "  free  burghers,"  were  required  to  bring  their 
produce  to  the  Company's  stores,  and  sell  it  at  prices 
fixed  by  the  Company's  officers.  After  the  Company's 
requirements  had  been  satisfied,  they  were  at  liberty  to 
dispose  of  their  surplus  produce  to  the  crews  of  foreign 
ships  in  the  Bay ;  but  they  were  not  allowed  to  go  on 
board  these  ships  until  three  days  after  arrival — that  is  to 
say,  until  the  Company  had  itself  sold  all  that  it  desired  to 
sell.  Similarly,  in  regard  to  cattle,  they  were  compelled 
to  purchase  from  the  Hottentots  at  the  same  prices  as  the 
Company  paid,  and  to  sell  only  to  the  Company. 

These  arrangements  are  characteristic  of  the  principles 
and  methods  of  colonisation  pursued  by  the  Dutch  East 
India  Company  during  the  whole  period  of  their  occupation 
of  the  Cape.  The  colony  was  regarded  merely  as  an  estate 
belonging  to  the  Company,  and  the  settlers  as  the  agents 
of  the  Company  employed  in  the  cultivation  of  this  estate, 
and  entitled,  therefore,  to  only  such  profits  as  were  recog- 
nised by  the  terms  of  their  employment.  Under  the  name 
of  the  "  Culture  "  system,  these  principles  may  be  seen  in 
partial  operation  to-day  in  Java.  Even  in  that  country 
the  system  has  become  discredited  ;  and  it  is  one  which 
is  wholly  unsuited  to  a  settlement  of  Europeans  which  is  in 
any  sense  a  "  colony  "  according  to  the  modern  acceptance 
of  the  term. 

This  essay  in  colonisation  was  the  occasion  of  the  first 
serious  conflict  between  the  Europeans  and  the  Hottentots. 
One  of  the  migratory  clans  had  been  accustomed  to  resort 
periodically  to  the  banks  of  the  Liesbeck  for  pasturage. 
Access  to  these  pastures  was  now  hindered  by  the  en- 
closures of  the  settlers ;    and,   therefore,   as  a  Hottentot 


12  SOUTH  AFRICA 

prisoner,  "  who  spoke  tolerable  Dutch,"  explained,  the 
"  Caepmans "  resolved  to  "  dishearten "  the  settlers  by 
taking  away  their  cattle  (Note  2).  The  policy  which  the 
Company  had  at  first  pursued  towards  the  Hottentots  was 
one  of  "  peace  at  any  price."  The  cattle  with  which  the 
garrison  and  the  Company's  fleets  were  supplied  came  from 
these  nomad  clans,  and  it  was  essential,  therefore,  that  they 
should  not  be  frightened  away  by  harsh  treatment.  After 
the  murder  of  David  Janssen,  Van  Riebeck  applied  to  the 
directors  for  instructions.  He  was  ordered  to  put  to  death 
only  the  actual  murderer  or  murderers  of  the  dead  man, 
and  to  take  in  reprisal  only  the  same  amount  of  cattle  as 
had  been  stolen.  These  instructions  were  both  humane 
and  politic,  but  it  was  impossible  to  carry  them  out.  In 
his  reply  Van  Riebeck  points  out  two  fatal  objections.  In 
the  first  place,  he  had  no  means  of  identifying  the  indivi- 
dual evil-doers,  and,  in  the  second,  private  property  was  an 
institution  not  yet  established  among  these  tribes.  The 
only  way  to  punish  the  actual  evil-doers  under  these  cir- 
cumstances was  to  punish  the  tribe  en  bloc;  and  he 
proposed,  therefore,  to  capture  the  whole  tribe  and  all  their 
cattle.  But  the  directors  would  not  consent  to  this  course, 
and  in  the  end  nothing  was  done.  In  this  incident  we  have 
an  excellent  illustration  of  the  respective  attitudes  of  the 
Home  and  Local  Authorities  in  questions  of  native  policy. 
What  the  former  proposes  is  nearly  always  just,  and 
generally  sound  in  theory  ;  but  it  fails  from  a  want  of 
knowledge  of  the  special  circumstances  of  the  case.  That 
knowledge  is  possessed  by  the  local  authority,  but  he  is 
rarely  allowed  to  adopt  the  course  which  the  local  con- 
ditions require,  because,  without  a  knowledge  of  these  con- 
ditions, such  a  course  naturally  appears  at  variance  with  the 
principles  of  conduct  recognised  by  civilised  peoples. 

Van  Riebeck  first  communicated  the  intelligence  of  the 
Hottentots'  attack  upon  the  Liesbeck  settlement  to  the 
Indian   Government.      In    a    somewhat    cool    reply    they 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION        13 

advise  him  "  to  stand  up  stoutly  to  his  own  defence,"  and 
at  the  same  time  authorise  him  provisionally  to  increase 
the  strength  of  the  Cape  garrison  by  drafts  from  passing 
ships.  The  attack  occurred  in  July  1659.  Peace  was 
ultimately  concluded  at  the  Fort  on  April  6th,  1660, 
between  Van  Riebeck  and  "  the  captain  and  chief  of  the 
Caepmans  "  and  various  lesser  personages.  The  Hottentots 
made  many  complaints,  and  required  that  free  access  to  the 
pastures  should  be  granted.  In  reply  to  the  argument 
that  "  there  was  not  grass  enough  for  their  cattle  and  for 
the  settlers'  cattle  also,"  they  enquired,  "  Have  we  then  no 
cause  to  prevent  you  from  procuring  any  cattle  ?  for  if  you 
get  many  cattle,  you  come  and  occupy  our  pasture  with 
them,  and  then  say  the  land  is  not  wide  enough  for  us 
both  !  Who  then  can  be  required  with  the  greatest  degree 
of  justice  to  give  way,  the  natural  owner  or  the  foreign 
invader  ?  "  Worsted  in  argument.  Van  Riebeck  had,  at  last, 
frankly  asserted  that  he  "  would  not  restore  the  land,  as  it 
had  now  become  the  property  of  the  Company  by  the 
sword  and  the  laws  of  war."  The  whole  of  these  negotia- 
tions were  fully  recorded  in  the  diary,  and  transmitted  to 
the  directors.* 

These  latter  admit  that  the  "  discontent "  shown  by  the 
Hottentots  is  "  neither  surprising  nor  groundless,"  and 
suggest  that  the  land  should  be  purchased  from  them,  or 
that  they  should  be  otherwise  satisfied. 

For  some  reason  or  other  this  politic  suggestion  was  not 
carried  out  until  twelve  years  later.  Van  Riebeck  had 
been  removed  at  his  own  request  after  ten  years'  command 
at  the  Cape,  and  his  fidelity  and  capacity  was  rewarded  by 
the  governorship  of  Malacca.  He  subsequently  became 
secretary  to  the  Council  of  India,  and  his  son,  born  at  the 
Cape,  was  Governor-General  of  India.  Other  lesser  men 
had  followed  him  ;  a  strong  castle — of  which  part  is  still 
in  existence  —  had  replaced  the  original  fort,  and  the 
•  The  "Record,"  p.  205. 


14  SOUTH  AFRICA 

settlement  had  grown  in  numbers  and  in  importance,  when 
a  high  ofificial,  Aernout  Van  Overbeke,  arrived  on  his  way 
home   from  Batavia.     Under   his  direction  formal   agree- 
ments were  concluded  with  two  native  chiefs,  by  which  the 
districts  of  the  Cape  and  Hottentots  Holland  were  respec- 
tively ceded  to  the  Company  in  return  for  certain  "goods  and 
articles  of  merchandise."    The  actual  value  of  the  "tobacco, 
beads,  brandy,  bread  and  other  trifles,"  which  constituted 
the  consideration   in  both  cases,  was  extremely  small — it 
amounted   in   fact  to    little  more  than  a  hundred   florins 
"  prime   cost " — and    on   this    account  the    transaction  is 
generally  represented  as  a  mere  trick.     It  appears,  however, 
that  at  this  time  the  directors  made  a  serious  endeavour  to 
legalise  their  de  facto  possession  of  the  Cape  Peninsula  and 
the  districts  beyond,  by  the   purchase  of  territorial  rights 
from  the  native  chiefs.     In  the  first  place,  they  persistently 
pursued  such  a  policy  in  Java,  the  centre  of  the  operations 
of  the  Company,  where  they  ultimately  acquired  possession 
of  territorial  rights  over  the  whole  island  :  next,  although 
the  goods  were  trivial  to  the  Dutch,  they  had  a  far  higher 
value  to  the  Hottentot  purchasers.     What  that  value  was 
can  only  be  seen  by  comparing  this  transaction  with  other 
commercial  dealings  at  the  same  period  between  the  Dutch 
and    the    Hottentots.     Soon    after    Van  Riebeck's  arrival 
"  three  elephants'  teeth "  were  sold  for  some  copper  and 
tobacco,  worth  two  stivers  and  three  pennings,  or  2^d.;  a 
sheep  for  a  yard  of  thin   copper  wire;  and  three  young 
ostriches    for   2   oz.   of  tobacco.       Obviously  ten   pounds 
worth  of  goods  would  represent  a  large  consideration  on 
such  a  scale  as  this.      Moreover,  the  native  chiefs  did  not 
surrender  entire  possession  of  these  territories ;  they  were 
to  be  allowed  to  come  with  their  herds  to  such  districts  as 
were  not  occupied  by  the  farms  and  cattle  of  the  Com- 
pany, or  by  those  of  the  "freemen"  (Note  3). 

It  may  be  asked,  however,  why  the  Company  did  not 
continue  this  policy,  and  make  further  purchases  of  terri- 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION        15 

torial  rights  ?  The  answer  appears  to  be  this.  As  the 
Dutch  advanced  inland  they  found  the  country  practically 
uninhabited,  and  there  was,  therefore,  no  necessity  to 
acquire  further  deeds  of  cession.  The  inland  districts  were 
traversed  by  nomad  clans  of  Bushmen  and  Hottentots, 
but  these  people,  with  their  migratory  habits,  could  estab- 
lish no  right  of  possession  sufficient  to  bar  the  occupation 
of  the  Europeans. 

It  was  during  the  governorship  of  Simon  Van  der  Stell 
(the  first  official  so  styled),  and  that  of  his  son  Adrian, 
covering  a  period  of  nearly  twenty  years,  from  1679  to 
1707,  that  the  material  foundations  of  the  colony  were 
laid.  Up  to  this  time  only  a  few  persons  had  been  in- 
duced to  leave  Holland  for  the  Cape:  but  in  1679  a 
party  of  fifty  emigrants  arrived.  A  few  years  later  a 
town  was  founded  thirty  miles  in  the  interior  to  which 
the  name  of  Stellenbosch  was  given  ;  and  the  first  "  land- 
drost,"  or  district  magistrate,  was  appointed.  In  this 
same  year,  1685,  an  event  happened  in  Europe  which 
was  destined  to  have  an  important  effect  upon  the  fortunes 
of  the  Cape  Settlement,  By  the  revocation  of  the  Edict 
of  Nantes,  the  Huguenots  were  driven  from  France ;  and 
large  numbers  took  refuge  in  England  and  Holland. 
The  Dutch  East  India  Company  offered  to  provide  a 
home  for  some  of  these  French  refugees  at  their  new 
settlement,  and,  during  the  years  1688-90,  as  many  as 
two  hundred  Huguenots  arrived  at  the  Cape  (Note  4). 
This  was  an  important  accession  to  the  population  of 
the  settlement,  for  these  French  settlers  were  not  only 
numerous — relatively,  that  is — but  they  were  drawn  from 
classes  higher  in  the  social  scale  than  the  Dutch  emigrants. 
There  were  farmers,  shop-keepers,  and  even  members  of 
the  French  nobility  among  them,*  and  they  were  accom- 

*  Among  the  emigrants  were  members  of  the  houses  of  Du  Plessis, 
De  Mornay,  Roubaix  de  la  Fontaine,  De  Villiers,  Le  Sueur,  Du 
Pre,  and  Rousseau. 


1 6  SOUTH  AFRICA 

panied  by  their  pastor,  Pierre  Simond.  A  few  were 
settled  on  lands  near  Capetown  and  Stellenbosch,  but 
the  majority  found  a  home  in  the  Berg  River  valley. 

Van  der  Stell  was  instructed  to  take  all  necessary 
measures  for  incorporating  the  French  emigrants  into 
the  community.  The  settlers  of  both  nationalities  were 
carefully  intermingled,  and  the  French  children  were  at 
once  taught  the  Dutch  language.  More  than  one  attempt 
was  made  by  the  French  to  preserve  their  identity,  but 
these  "  French  impertinences  "  were  vigorously  restrained. 
In  1709  the  use  of  the  French  language  in  official  com- 
munications was  forbidden,  and  in  1724  the  Bible  was 
publicly  read  in  French  for  the  last  time. 

By  these  means  the  French  element  at  the  Cape  was 
absolutely  absorbed  into  the  Dutch.  This  policy  was 
undoubtedly  harsh ;  but  if  we  look  at  the  circumstances 
of  the  settlement,  we  must  admit  that  it  was  not  only 
justifiable  but  necessary.  Twenty  -  five  years  after  the 
Huguenot  emigration  the  whole  population  of  the  settle- 
ment amounted  to  only  some  two  thousand  persons,  of 
whom  nearly  one-half  were  children.  It  would  have 
been  obviously  most  disastrous  to  have  allowed  this  small 
community  to  be  divided  into  two  distinct  sections, 
speaking  different  languages,  and  having  different  customs 
and  modes  of  life. 

The  Company's  administration  of  the  Cape  Settlement 
from  its  foundation  to  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth 
century  appears  to  have  been  both  just  and  politic. 
We  cannot  reasonably  complain  either  of  the  policy  the 
directors  pursued  towards  the  Hottentots  or  towards  the 
French  emigrants.  Moreover,  there  was  as  yet  no  mani- 
festation of  that  harsh  attitude  towards  the  coloured  races 
which  has  since  characterised  the  Franco-Dutch  popula- 
tion in  South  Africa.  In  the  seventeenth  century  the 
Dutch  regarded  the  inferiority  of  the  native  races  as 
a  question   not   of  colour  but  of  faith.     A  profession  of 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION        17 

Christianity  placed  the  coloured  person  on  the  same 
level  as  the  European.  In  the  instructions  issued  to 
Van  der  Stell  in  1685,  by  Commissioner  H.  A.  Van 
Rheede,  directions  are  given  for  the  training  of  the 
slaves*  in  the  Company's  possession.  These  slaves  were 
mainly  Asiatics  brought  from  the  Indian  possessions  of 
the  Company. 

"  The  labour  of  the  Company's  slaves  also  [t.e.  as  well 
as  the  free  settlers  previously  discussed]  produces  much 
profit,  and  holds  out  equal  hopes  for  the  future;  but 
these  poor  men  must  be  looked  upon  with  other  eyes, 
for  they  are  the  Company's  own  people,  not  hirelings ; 
they  cannot  quit  the  service  of  their  master  when  tired, 
but  are  bound,  not  only  for  all  their  lives,  but  for  those 
of  their  children  and  descendants.  The  better  we  make 
them,  the  fitter  will  they  be  to  perform  their  duty.  .  .  . 
It  would  be  a  shame  to  us,  whose  part  it  is  to  take  good 
care  of  our  irrational  domestic  cattle,  if  we  permitted 
men  to  run  wild,  and  left  them  in  a  worse  condition 
than  when  in  their  fatherland.  Our  masters  are  the 
foster-fathers  of  Christ's  Church,  and  if  we  fail  to 
employ  the  means  in  our  hands,  and  do  not  exert 
every  endeavour  to  bring  these  men  to  the  knowledge  of 
the  redeeming  faith — we  shut  the  doors  of  that  Church." 

And  among  the  early  marriages  recorded  in  Van 
Riebeck's  diary  is  that  of  a  Bengalese  slave  girl,  Catharina, 
to  Jan  Wonters.  This  girl  had  been  set  free  and 
baptised,  and  she  is  spoken  of  in  precisely  the  same 
terms  "de  eerbaare  jonge  dochter"  as  the  Commander's 
niece. 

By  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century  these  humane 
sentiments  had  become  entirely  lost.  On  September  3rd, 
1754,  a  slave  code  of  the  utmost  brutality  was  promulgated 
from  the  Castle  of  Good  Hope.  By  Article  2  of  this  Code 
"  death  without  mercy  "  was  fixed  as  the  penalty  for  "  any 

*  "Record,"  p.  397. 
B 


1 8  SOUTH  AFRICA 

male  or  female  slave  raising  his  hand  against  his  master 
or  mistress;"  and  by  Article  23,  every  slave  found  at  the 
entrance  of  a  Church,  when  the  congregation  was  leaving 
the  building,  was  directed  to  be  "  severely  flogged  by  the 
ministers  of  justice."  And  for  many  years  in  the  present 
century,  "  Dogs  and  Hottentots  not  admitted "  was  the 
usual  notice  placed  over  the  church  doors  in  South 
Africa. 

What  is  essential  in  the  remaining  history  of  the  Com- 
pany's Settlement  can  be  soon  told. 

In  1700,  the  first  barrier  range  was  crossed  at  Tulbagh 
Kloof,  and  the  settlers  spread  southwards  down  the  fertile 
valley  of  the  Breede  River.  In  1705  the  Cape  Govern- 
ment issued  "  loan  leases,"  or  occupation  licenses  which 
were  resumable  at  any  period,  and  in  this  uncertain  tenure 
of  their  farms  and  grazing  lands  we  have  the  origin  of 
that  nomadic  manner  of  life  which,  under  the  form  of 
"trekking,"  has  constituted  an  important  factor  in  South 
African  history  (Note  5). 

In  1745,  the  eastern  limit  of  the  settlement  was 
advanced  to  the  Gamtoos  River,  and  a  Magistracy  was 
established  at  Swellendam.  During  the  year  1778,  the 
Governor,  Van  Plettenburg,  made  a  tour  of  the  colony, 
and  in  the  course  of  this  tour  he  held  a  conference  with 
the  Kosa  chiefs  at  Prinslo's  farm,  on  the  site  of  Somerset 
East.  In  this  conference  it  was  mutually  agreed  that  the 
Fish  River  should  be  recognised  as  the  boundary  between 
the  Europeans  and  the  Bantu.  The  sequel  is  significant. 
The  very  next  year  the  Kosas  crossed  the  Fish  River, 
murdered  the  Hottentots,  and  over-ran  and  plundered  the 
eastern  farms.  We  find  again  and  again  in  South  African 
history  that  an  attempt  on  the  part  of  the  Europeans  to 
make  a  peaceable  settlement  with  the  Kafirs  is  the 
prelude  to  a  murderous  attack.  The  reason  is  simple 
enough.  The  Kafir  is  like  a  child,  the  only  sanction 
with  which  he  is   acquainted   is   the   sanction  of  physical 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION        19 

force.  In  all  such  cases  he  argues,  "The  white  man 
wishes  to  make  peace  with  me,  therefore  the  white  man 
is  afraid  of  me.  This,  then,  is  the  time  for  me  to  attack." 
Finally,  in  1786,  the  Fish  River  was  formally  declared  to 
be  the  eastern  boundary  of  the  Company's  territory,  and 
a  Magistracy  was  established  at  Graaf  Reinet,  among  the 
scattered  graziers  who  had  settled  at  the  foot  of  the 
Sneuwberg  Mountains. 

All  this  time  the  great  trading  corporation,  the  Dutch 
East  India  Company,  to  which  the  settlement  owed  its 
existence,  was  growing  weaker  and  weaker,  and  by  the 
end  of  the  century  it  had  become  hopelessly  bankrupt 
and  effete.  The  attempt  to  reform  its  administration 
made  in  1791,  when  Commissioners-General  were  ap- 
pointed by  the  Stadtholder  (afterwards  William  I.)  to 
discover  abuses  and  effect  reforms,  proved  unsuccessful, 
and  shortly  afterwards  the  States-General  assumed  the 
direct  control  of  its  possessions.  As  regards  the  Cape, 
the  commercial  basis  upon  which  the  Company's  govern- 
ment was  built  had  become  increasingly  insufficient  for 
the  expanding  European  population. 

The  condition  of  the  settlers  is  revealed  by  the  memorial 
which  they  presented  in  1779.  In  this  memorial  they 
pray  that  the  Fiscal,  the  highest  law-officer  of  the  Govern- 
ment, may  be  restrained  from  arbitrarily  committing 
burghers  to  prison,  and  from  compounding  crimes  by 
private  fines  ;  and  that  the  practice  of  deportation  to  the 
Indian  factories  may  be  prohibited.  At  this  time,  the 
end  of  the  eighteenth  century  it  must  be  remembered, 
it  appears  that  no  books,  except  the  Bible  and  editions  of 
Clement  Marot's  version  of  the  Psalms,  were  to  be  found 
in  the  settlement  outside  of  Capetown.  It  was  respect- 
fully prayed,  therefore,  that  "authentic  copies  of  the 
particular  placaats  and  ordinances  "  in  force  in  the  settle- 
ment should  be  furnished  from  Holland ;  or  that  a 
printing  press    should    be    established    and    a  printer  ap- 


20  SOUTH  AFRICA 

pointed.  The  rigour  with  which  the  Company's  trading 
monopoly  had  been  maintained  is  demonstrated  by 
Article  i8;  in  which  the  directors  are  humbly  solicited 
to  allow  the  Cape  Colonists  **  that  two  ships  may  be  laden 
annually,  for  the  account  of  the  Cape  citizens,  with  such 
wares  as  shall  be  purchased  by  their  appointed  agents 
— the  burgher  representatives  binding  themselves  to  send 
back  the  said  ships  laden,  for  their  account,  with  Cape 
produce,"  which  was  to  be  "  consigned  to  the  Honourable 
Company,  to  be  sold  by  public  auction  in  payment  of  the 
imported  goods." 

This  memorial  was  referred  to  the  law  officer  of  the 
Cape  Government,  the  Fiscal  Boers.  His  reply  is 
extremely  significant.  The  request  for  political  freedom 
is  met  by  the  broad  denial  of  the  right  of  the  settlers  to 
place  themselves  on  an  equality  with  the  "privileged  free 
citizens  "  of  the  United  Provinces.  "  It  would  be  a  mere 
waste  of  words,"  he  says,  "to  dwell  on  the  remarkable 
distinction  to  be  drawn  between  burghers  whose  ancestors 
nobly  fought  for  and  conquered  their  freedom  from 
tyranny  .  .  .  and  such  as  are  named  burghers  here,  who 
have  been  permitted  as  matter  of  grace  to  have  a  residence 
in  a  land  of  which  possession  has  been  taken  by  the 
Sovereign  Power,  there  to  gain  a  livelihood  as  tillers  of  the 
earth,  tailors,  and  shoemakers."  The  prayer  of  the  settlers 
for  commercial  freedom,  for  the  "  rights  of  trading  beyond 
the  colony,  in  ships  freighted  by  them,  to  Europe,  to 
the  African  coast,  to  India,  to  barter  the  produce  of  other 
lands  for  that  of  this  country,"  is  similarly  met  by  a  frank 
statement  of  the  theory  of  the  old  colonial  system.  "  Now 
it  is  clear,  and  requires  no  lengthy  argument,  that  for  the 
purpose  of  enabling  a  subordinate  colony  to  flourish  as 
a  colony,  it  is  not  always  expedient  to  apply  these  means 
which,  considered  in  the  abstract,  might  be  conducive  to 
its  prosperity.  The  object  of  paramount  importance  in 
legislating  for  colonics  should  be  the  welfare  of  the  parent 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION        21 

state,  of  which  such  colony  is  but  a  subordinate  part,  and 
to  which  it  owes  its  existence."  * 

It  is  not  surprising,  therefore,  that  when  Commissary 
Sluysken,  on  the  i6th  September  1795,  capitulated  to 
Admiral  Elphinstone  and  General  Craig,  the  settlers  at 
Swellendam  and  Graaf  Reinet  were  in  open  revolt  against 
the  Company's  government.  The  English  occupation  of 
the  Cape,  which  terminated  the  period  of  the  Dutch  East 
India  Company's  government,  arose  out  of  the  French 
war.  It  was  necessary  to  prevent  a  point  of  such  strateg- 
ical importance — forming  a  convenient  base  from  which 
India  and  the  Indian  trade  could  be  attacked — from  falling 
into  the  hands  of  France.  After  the  treaty  of  Amiens,  by 
which  peace  was  concluded  between  France  and  England, 
the  Cape  Settlement  was  restored  to  the  Dutch  ;  and  during 
the  short  period  (1803-6)  that  it  was  administered  by  the 
representatives  of  the  States-General  every  possible  reform, 
commercial  and  political,  was  introduced.  Subsequently 
on  the  renewal  of  the  struggle  between  France  and  England, 
the  Cape  was  again  occupied,  in  1806,  by  an  EngHsh  force 
under  Sir  David  Baird.  Since  that  time  the  English  flag 
has  not  ceased  to  fly  over  the  Castle  at  Capetown. 

By  the  end  of  the  last  century,  when  the  period  of  the 
government  of  the  Dutch  East  India  Company  came  to 
a  close,  the  south-western  corner  of  the  continent  of  Africa 
was  thinly  peopled  by  a  European  population  some  twenty 
thousand  in  number.  Towns  had  been  founded  at  Cape- 
town, Stellenbosch,  Swellendam  and  Graaf  Reinet.  In 
the  capital  and  its  immediate  neighbourhood  the  inhabi- 
tants had  attained  some  measure  of  material  prosperity ; 
that  is  to  say,  they  were  housed  in  substantial  and  comfort- 
able dwellings,  and  had  made  some  progress  in  agriculture 
and   viticulture.      Elsewhere    the    settlers,   living   for   the 

*  Verantwoording  Van  Fiscal  Boers,  as  translated  by  Judge  Water- 
meyer  in  "Three  Lectures  on  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  :  "  Capetown, 
1857. 


2  2  SOUTH  AFRICA 

most  part  in  isolated  homesteads,  gained  a  scanty  subsist- 
ence by  the  pastoral  industries  and  hunting.  There  were 
no  roads,  there  was  no  trade,  no  system  of  education,  and 
the  government  was  at  once  tyrannical  and  ineffective. 

At  the  same  time  the  Company  had  spread  a  European 
population  over  a  district  as  large  as  the  United  Kingdom, 
and,  if  we  confine  our  notion  of  a  colony  to  the  narrow 
limits  of  what  would  be  the  Company's  definition,  we  must 
admit  that  they  had  been  successful.  They  had  accom- 
plished the  special  object  which  they  had  in  view.  They 
had  established  a  convenient  post  of  call  where  supplies 
could  be  obtained  for  their  fleets,  and  they  had  made  this 
naval  station  self-supporting  by  means  of  the  European 
settlers  whom  they  introduced.  Moreover,  the  policy 
which  they  pursued  towards  the  natives  was  both  humane 
and  prudent.  If,  however,  we  take  a  wider  view  of  the 
responsibilities  of  the  Company,  we  must  decide  that  they 
signally  failed.  It  is  not  merely  that  their  system  of 
government  was  bad,  and  their  trade  policy  uneconomic. 
Regarded  from  this  point  of  view,  it  is  not  enough  to  say 
of  the  Company's  system,  as  the  late  Judge  Watermeyer 
has  said,*  that  "  in  all  things  political  it  was  purely 
despotic ;  in  all  things  commercial  it  was  purely  mono- 
polist." If  we  hold  them  responsible  for  the  well-being 
of  the  community  to  which  they  gave  birth,  the  directors 
of  the  Dutch  East  India  Company  were  guilty  of  a 
political  crime  of  the  gravest  character ;  they  allowed 
a  European  community  to  become  degraded  and  de- 
civilised.  And  it  is  this  decivilised  European  community 
that  England  lightly  essayed  to  govern  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  present  century. 

In  comparison  with  the  magnitude   and   variety  of  the 

interests   involved    in    the    South    Africa   of  to-day,    this 

account  of  the  actual  foundation  of  the  Cape  Settlement 

must    necessarily    appear    somewhat    trivial.        But    the 

*   "  Three  Lectures." 


EARLY  HISTORY  AND  OCCUPATION        23 

traveller  will  gladly  turn  aside  to  visit  the  little  stream 
which  is  the  source  of  some  great  river,  grudging  neither 
the  time  nor  the  labour  which  he  expends.  Neither  should 
we,  who  have  embarked  upon  the  study  of  the  past  history 
and  present  circumstances  of  South  Africa,  regret  the  time 
which  we  devote  to  a  study  of  the  details  of  this  early 
period.  For  a  knowledge  of  the  period  of  Dutch  occupa- 
tion is  a  condition  precedent  to  the  adequate  comprehension 
of  those  great  questions  of  South  African  administration 
which  will  hereafter  claim  our  attention. 

Not  only  do  almost,  if  not  all,  of  these  questions  arise, 
but  they  appear  in  their  simplest  and  most  intelligible  form. 
In  the  controversy  between  Van  Riebeck  and  the  directors 
of  the  Company,  with  reference  to  the  course  to  be  pur- 
sued in  punishing  the  murderer  of  David  Janssens,  we 
have  the  prototype  of  those  endless  "divergences  of 
opinion "  between  H.M.'s  Government  and  the  colonial 
administrators  which  have  filled  the  pages  of  innumerable 
blue-books.  In  the  reasoning  of  the  Hottentot  prisoner, 
who  "  spoke  tolerable  Dutch,"  we  have  an  epitome  of 
those  arguments  which  were  afterwards  employed  with 
such  grave  results  by  the  great  philanthropic  societies  of 
England.  And  in  the  mingled  despotism  and  weakness 
of  the  Company's  government  we  see  the  explanation  of 
that  unreasoning  aversion  to  law  and  order  which  has 
unhappily  characterised  the  rural  settlers  of  Dutch  origin, 
and  intensified  the  difficulties  of  South  African  adminis- 
tration. 

I  have  spoken  of  South  African  history  under  the 
figure  of  a  river.  The  analogy  is  one  which  will  bear 
pressing,  for  there  is  a  curious  similarity  between  the 
progress  of  South  Africa  and  the  course  of  a  South 
African  river.  It  is  no  smooth  stream,  flowing  in  a 
single  channel  down  a  gently  falling  incline.  On  the 
contrary,  its  brief  course  is  diversified  by  every  variety 
of  incident,    its    waters    are    diverted    into    separate   and 


2  4  SOUTH  AFRICA 

distinct  channels,  and  its  current  is  alternately  checked 
by  obstacles,  and  precipitated  onwards  by  abrupt  descents. 
And  if  this  be  a  true  description  of  the  nature  of  South 
African  history  and  progress,  there  is  no  need  to  add  that 
the  study  of  such  a  subject  will  repay  the  student.  With 
its  native  question,  its  nationality  difficulty,  and  its  con- 
solidation problem,  is  it  too  much  to  say  that  in  South 
Africa  we  have  an  epitome  of  those  problems  upon  the 
solution  of  which  the  stability  of  the  Empire  depends  ? 


CHAPTER  II 
The  Kafir  Wars. 

IN  that  beautiful  ode,*  in  which  Euripides  dwells  with 
loving  fulness  on  the  graces  of  his  native  Attica,  he 
places  in  the  forefront  of  his  enumeration  the  fact  that  her 
citizens  dwell  in  a  "sacred  and  unravaged"  land.  With 
how  much  greater  propriety  could  an  English  poet  point 
to  that  immunity  from  the  ravages  of  war  which  has 
characterised  the  life  of  later  generations  of  Englishmen. 
But  there  are  some  who  maintain  that  the  discipline  of 
war  is  necessary  for  the  perfecting  of  national  character. 
Such  persons  can  find  a  quick  consolation  in  the  reflection 
that  this  immunity  is  by  no  means  the  universal  experi- 
ence of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race.  Putting  the  United  States 
on  one  side — where,  in  the  course  of  four  years,  one 
million  lives  were  lost,  and  property  and  labour  to  the 
estimated  value  of  two  thousand  million  pounds  sterling 
were  squandered — and  confining  ourselves  to  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  communities  within  the  Empire,  there  is  abundant 
evidence  to  show  us,  who  read  the  history  of  England 
as  it  is  written  in  Canada,  in  India,  in  New  Zealand,  and 
in  South  Africa,  that  the  gates  are  seldom  entirely  closed 
upon  our  British  Janus.  Of  all  the  Anglo-Saxon  com- 
munities which  have  been  exposed  to  the  ravages  of  war 
— I  speak,  of  course,  not  of  professional  soldiers  but  of 
non-combatants,  civilians,  women,  and  children — none 
have  been  exposed  more  continuously  or  more  fatally 
to  this  baneful  influence  than  the  English  in  South  Africa. 
*  In  the  Medea. 


2  6  SOUTH  AFRICA 

But  why  speak  of  English  ?  We  have  traced  the 
growth  of  a  European  community  at  the  Cape,  but  it 
was  a  community  exclusively  of  Dutch  and  French  origin. 
How  is  it  that  we  speak  of  English  ? 

The  permanent  English  occupation  of  the  Cape  com- 
menced in  the  year  1806.  At  first  our  possession  rested 
upon  the  mere  naked  right  of  conquest,  but  subsequently 
our  position  was  legitimised  by  the  Convention  of  London, 
when,  in  181 4,  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  Ceylon,  and 
a  part  of  Guiana,  were  formally  ceded  by  Holland 
to  England.  For  the  first  twenty  years — the  reason  for 
this  limit  will  appear  afterwards — the  Cape  Colony  was 
governed  in  the  arbitrary  manner  usual  at  that  time  and 
under  like  circumstances.  There  was,  however,  no  "  series 
of  ignorant  and  absurd  governors  "  at  the  Cape,  to  use 
the  rather  harsh  language  of  Sidney  Smith  in  his  second 
essay  on  Botany  Bay.  The  Cape  was  preserved  from 
such  a  fate  by  two  circumstances ;  its  strategic  import- 
ance, as  commanding  the  maritime  route  to  India,  and 
the  natural  difficulty  of  administering  the  government  of 
an  alien  population.  The  early  governors  of  the  Cape 
were  men  of  high  character  and  ability.  They  governed 
arbitrarily,  no  doubt — how  arbitrarily  may  be  seen  from 
those  two  lines  of  Pringle,  in  which  he  sums  up  his 
experience  of  life  at  Capetown — 

"  Oppression,  I  have  seen  thee  face  to  face, 
And  met  thy  cruel  eye  and  clouded  brow  " — 

but  they  were  all  marked  by  that  sense  of  responsibility 
which  happily  characterises  Englishmen  of  their  class. 
And  it  was  to  Lord  Charles  Somerset,  the  most  arbitrary 
of  them  all,  that  the  first  introduction  of  a  considerable 
body  of  Englishmen  was  due.  Lord  Charles  Somerset 
was  so  pleased  with  the  appearance  of  the  country  im- 
mediately to  the  west  of  the  Great  Fish  River  that  he 
recommended   the   district  to  the    Home  Government  as 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  27 

suitable  for  colonisation.  His  suggestion  came  at  an 
opportune  moment,  for  just  then  the  labour  market  of 
England  was  terribly  over-stocked.  By  the  peace  of 
181 5  a  large  amount  of  labour,  hitherto  locked  up  in  the 
military  operations  which  England  had  been  conducting 
against  Napoleon  and  his  allies,  was  set  free.  Out  of 
90,000  applications  the  Government  accepted  some  4000, 
and  English  and  Scotch  emigrants  to  that  number  landed 
at  Algoa  Bay  between  the  months  of  April  1820  and 
May  1 82 1.  The  bulk  of  them  were  established  in  the 
parallelogram  of  land  formed  by  the  Fish  and  the 
Bushman  rivers,  the  district  of  Albany  ;  and  from  this 
centre  they  and  their  descendants  gradually  spread  them 
selves  over  the  whole  of  the  eastern  provinces  of  the 
colony.  It  was  on  these  EngHsh  settlers  that  the  brunt 
of  the  inevitable  conflict  between  the  Europeans  and  the 
Bantu  naturally  fell. 

In  the  year  1826 — the  date  which  terminates  what  I 
have  called  the  period  of  early  governors — the  colonial 
Commissioners,  who  had  been  despatched  by  the  Home 
Government  to  the  Pacific  Settlements  and  the  Cape, 
presented  their  reports.  As  regards  the  Cape,  they 
suggested,  in  addition  to  certain  administrative  reforms, 
a  number  of  measures  which  all  tended  in  the  direction 
of  Anglicising  the  colony.  These  measures  were  many 
of  them  good  in  themselves,  but  they  were  vitiated  by  a 
common  fault.  They  took  no  account  of  the  fact  that 
the  great  majority  of  the  population — probably  six  in 
seven — were  Dutch,  not  English.  It  is  at  least  certain 
that  such  measures,  under  like  circumstances,  would  never 
have  been  proposed  now  in  any  country  under  British 
rule.  For  example:  in  1827,  English  was  ordered  to  be 
used  as  the  official  language,  although  the  proportion  of 
Dutch  to  English  was  what  I  have  stated  it  to  be — six 
in  seven.  In  1828,  the  old  Dutch  system  of  local 
government  and  the  Courts  of  Landdrost  and  Heemraden 


28  SOUTH  AFRICA 

were  abolished,  and  an  English  system,  with  Resident 
Magistrates  and  Civil  Commissioners,  was  established  in 
its  place.  And  in  this  same  year  General  Bourke's  famous 
ordinance,  placing  the  free  coloured  population  of  the 
colony  on  an  equality  in  point  of  law  with  the  Europeans, 
was  issued.  We  shall  not  understand  the  full  significance 
of  this  measure  until  we  have  become  familiar  with  the 
conditions  of  Natal ;  it  is  enough,  however,  to  remark 
here  that  the  removal  of  the  Hottentots  from  the  control 
of  those  special  laws  by  which  their  life  had  hitherto  been 
regulated  was  regarded  by  the  Dutch  colonists  as  a 
dangerous  and  revolutionary  measure.  But  a  more  far- 
reaching  change  was  to  follow.  In  1833  the  Abolition 
Act  was  passed  by  the  Imperial  Parliament.  By  this 
Act  the  institution  of  slavery  was  abolished  throughout 
the  British  dominions.  It  is  not  necessary  that  we  should 
study  the  arguments  by  which  it  was  sought  to  maintain, 
on  political  or  social  grounds,  what  Lord  Brougham  has 
called  "the  wild  and  guilty  fantasy  that  man  can  hold 
property  in  man."  But  it  is  necessary  that  we  should 
be  acquainted  with  the  actual  circumstances  under  which 
the  emancipation  of  slaves  was  carried  out  at  the  Cape ; 
otherwise  we  shall  be  at  a  loss  to  understand  how  it  was 
that  a  measure  so  essentially  just  and  humane  should  have 
excited  such  feelings  of  indignation  and  alarm  among  a 
European  community. 

In  the  first  place,  we  must  recollect  what  the  conditions 
of  the  colony  were  at  this  time.  If  we  put  the  total 
European  population  at  50,000  we  shall  probably  be 
stating  what  is  not  far  from  the  truth.  Of  this  small  popu- 
lation all,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  officials  and  mer- 
chants in  the  towns,  depended  for  their  subsistence  upon 
agriculture  and  stock-raising.  Both  of  these  industries 
were  carried  on  by  means  of  slave  labour ;  and,  for  reasons 
which  we  need  not  now  enter  into,  it  was,  in  some  cases, 
impossible,  and  in  all  cases  difficult,  to  replace  this  slave 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  29 

labour  by  free  coloured  labour  within  the  five  years 
provided  by  the  Act,  or  at  all. 

Emancipation  at  the  Cape  meant,  therefore,  an  entire 
dislocation  of  the  main — almost  the  only — industries  of 
the  community.  In  the  next  place  it  involved  the  colo- 
nists in  an  immediate  loss  of  nearly  ;;^2, 000,000 — a  large 
sum  to  be  lost  by  so  small  a  community.  This  sum  of 
;^2, 000,000  is  obtained  by  merely  taking  the  difference 
between  the  ofificially  appraised  value  of  the  slaves  and  the 
amount  which  actually  reached  the  slave  proprietors  as 
compensation  (Note  6).  In  some  cases  individuals — 
often  those  who  could  bear  such  a  blow  least  well,  orphans, 
widows,  and  aged  persons — were  reduced  to  absolute 
penury ;  while,  speaking  of  the  community  as  a  whole,  we 
may  say  that  there  was  scarcely  a  home  in  the  colony  which 
was  not  at  this  time  darkened  by  the  shadow  of  pecuniary 
embarrassment. 

But  even  this  last  measure,  grievous  and  oppressive 
though  it  was  felt  to  be,  would  not  have  driven  the  eastern 
farmers  of  Dutch  origin  to  so  desperate  a  remedy  as  that 
of  expatriation — the  remedy  to  which  they  now  had  recourse 
— unless  it  had  been  followed  by  a  remarkable  instance  of 
Imperial  indiscretion. 

In  1834  Sir  Benjamin  Durban  was  sent  out  to  the  Cape 
as  Governor.  He  was  instructed  to  carry  through  slave 
emancipation,  to  initiate  rigorous  administrative  retrench- 
ments, and  to  place  the  relations  between  the  Europeans 
and  the  Kafirs  on  a  better  footing.  It  was  this  last  which 
immediately  claimed  his  attention.  On  his  arrival  at 
Capetown,  Sir  Benjamin  was  confronted  by  two  opposite 
opinions.  On  the  one  hand  there  was  a  small  party  (Note 
7)  of  which  Dr  Philip,  the  Superintendent  of  the  London 
Missionary  Society's  Missions  in  South  Africa,  was  the 
head,  and  of  which  the  then  Conmiercial  Advertiser  was 
the  mouth-piece,  which  represented  the  alarms  of  the 
eastern  colonists  as  visionary,   and    the  intention  of  the 


30  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Kafir  chiefs  as  pacific.  On  the  other  hand  there  were 
almost  all  the  colonial  ofiicials,  civil  and  military.  They 
regarded  the  condition  of  the  eastern  border  as  most  un- 
satisfactory, and  believed  that  a  Kafir  invasion  was  imminent. 
Under  these  circumstances  Sir  Benjamin  Durban  took  what 
was  obviously  the  right  course.  He  commissioned  Dr 
Philip  to  visit  the  Kafir  chiefs  and  obtain  from  them 
assurances  of  their  pacific  intentions.  Dr  Philip  did  so, 
and  on  his  return  to  Capetown  he  sent  in  a  report  to  that 
effect.  Meanwhile  another  person,  the  Chief  Justice,  Sir 
John  Wylde,  had  in  the  course  of  his  circuit  visited 
Grahamstown  for  the  purpose  of  holding  the  assizes.  There 
he  had  met  Macomo,  who  held  the  position  of  paramount 
chief  of  the  Gaikas.  Sir  John  Wylde's  impressions  of  the 
intentions  of  Macomo  and  of  the  Kafirs  in  general  was  the 
very  opposite  of  Dr  Philip's.  He  was  accompanied  by  the 
late  Judge  Cloete,  then  Mr  Advocate  Cloete,  and  the  rest 
of  the  story  can  be  given  in  Cloete's  own  words.* 

"  On  our  return  to  Capetown,  at  a  numerous  convivial 
meeting,  to  which  Sir  Benjamin  had  invited  myself  and  my 
family  on  New  Year's  Eve,  I  could  not  help  dilating  some- 
what at  length  on  the  hostile  disposition  of  these  tribes,  to 
which  his  Excellency  appeared  to  listen  with  particular  in- 
terest— but  nothing  else  indicated  the  slightest  disturbance 
in  society,  except  (what  only  was  remembered  afterwards  by 
some  of  us)  that  Sir  Benjamin  had  occasionally  absented 
himself  for  a  few  minutes  from  the  party.  Good  humour 
and  hilarity  prevailed  until  we  had  hailed  in  the  New  Year, 
when  every  one  gradually  returned  to  their  houses  ;  but  on 
the  next  morning,  on  returning  to  town,  I  found  the 
astounding  intelligence  universally  spread  abroad  that  the 
evening  before  his  Excellency  had  received  the  account 
that  the  Kafirs,  to  the  number  of  12,000  or  15,000  men, 
had  invaded  the  whole  frontier  from  every  quarter  on 
Christmas-day,  burning  and  destroying  every  farm-house, 
*  "Five  Lectures,"  iii.  p.  67. 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  31 

murdering    the    inhabitants,  and    carrying   away  all    their 
cattle  and  property. 

"  Still  doubting  this  information,"  Cloete  appealed  to  the 
Governor  himself.  "  He,  in  his  wonted  gentle  and  yet  firm 
manner,  not  only  confirmed  the  report,  but  jocularly 
observed  that  he  had  received  the  sad  intelligence  while 
we  were  assembled  there,  but  that  he  had  done  all  that 
could  be  done,  and  had  not  wished  to  disturb  the  harmony 
of  the  party  by  divulging  such  intelligence. 

"That  night  already  every  order  had  been  given  to 
despatch  every  disposable  soldier,  to  call  out  all  the  burgher 
forces,  and  to  send  off  Colonel  Smith,  the  Quarter-Master 
General  of  the  forces  .  .  .  who  had  started  in  the  middle 
of  the  night,  and  in  five  days  reached  Grahamstown,  where 
he  found  everything  in  an  indescribable  state  of  panic  and 
confusion." 

The  official  returns  show  us  what  a  Kafir  war  meant  for 
these  unhappy  eastern  colonists.  When  the  returns  of 
the  losses  sustained  by  the  farmers  on  the  immediate  frontier 
were  made  up,  it  was  found  that  456  farm-houses  had  been 
burnt  and  entirely  destroyed,  356  farm-houses  had  been 
pillaged  and  partially  destroyed,  60  waggons,  5715  horses, 
111,930  head  of  horned  cattle,  and  161,930  sheep  had 
been  captured  and  irrecoverably  lost.  Within  the  first 
week  fifty  Europeans  had  been  surprised  and  murdered. 

After  twelve  months'  hard  fighting,  in  which  the  British 
troops  were  supported  by  the  burgher  forces  of  the  colony, 
the  Kafirs  were  driven  out  of  the  colony.  Meanwhile  it 
became  Sir  Benjamin  Durban's  duty  to  devise  measures 
which  would  prevent  the  recurrence  of  such  a  disaster. 
With  the  approval  of  his  colonial  advisers,  civil  and 
military.  Sir  Benjamin  determined  to  advance  the  frontier 
from  the  Keiskamma  to  the  Kei,  to  place  a  belt  of 
European  settlers  holding  land  on  military  tenure  between 
the  Fish  and  the  Keiskamma  rivers,  and  then  eastwards, 
to  locate  a   number   of  loyal    Kafirs    between   the   Keis- 


38  SOUTH  AFRICA 

kamma  and  the  Kei  rivers,  with  a  chain  of  forts  in  their 
midst.  In  this  way  Sir  Benjamin  Durban  thought  that 
he  would  erect  a  barrier  sufficiently  strong  to  resist  the 
pressure  of  the  Bantu  peoples  who  were  continually 
crushing  southwards.  These  proposals  were  duly  com- 
municated to  the  Home  Government  for  approval. 

At  this  time  there  were  two  pictures  of  the  Kafir 
before  the  English  world.  In  one  he  was  represented 
as  a  noble  savage  who  was  engaged  in  a  heroic  struggle 
for  his  fatherland  against  European  aggressors  :  a  being, 
indeed,  of  primitive  impulses,  but  one  which  was  capable 
of  almost  indefinite  development  in  the  direction  of 
morality  and  civilisation.  In  the  other  he  appeared 
as  a  murderer,  who  knew  no  distinction  of  age  or  sex ; 
as  a  destroyer,  who  placed  his  brand  to  the  homestead 
for  the  mere  pleasure  of  hearing  the  timbers  crackle, 
and  seeing  the  flames  leap  up  to  heaven.  The  first 
picture  was  illuminated  by  the  soft  rays  of  philanthropic 
enthusiasm  :  the  second  was  seen  in  the  hard,  dry  light 
of  facts  (Note  8).  At  this  time  the  first  picture  only  was 
known  to  Englishmen ;  and  the  temper  of  England  was 
reflected  in  the  despatch  which  Charles  Grant,  afterwards 
Lord  Glenelg,  wrote  on  December  26th,  1835,  almost 
the  very  anniversary  of  that  cruel  and  unprovoked  in- 
vasion. In  this  despatch  the  opinion  was  maintained 
that  it  was  the  colonists  and  not  the  Kafirs  who  were 
the  real  aggressors  ;  that  the  action  of  the  Kafirs  was, 
in  fact,  only  a  natural  and  legitimate  result  of  a  long 
series  of  oppressions  which  had  been  inflicted  upon 
them ;  and  the  measures  which  Sir  Benjamin  Durban 
proposed  to  take — had,  in  fact,  taken — were  revoked, 
and  the  whole  frontier  policy  was  reversed. 

The  sensation  which  this  despatch  created  in  the  colony 
may  be  understood  from  Cloete's  comment  *  : — 

"  A  communication  more  cruel,  unjust,  and  insulting  to 
*  "Five  Lectures,"  p.  73. 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  33 

the  feelings, — not  only  of  the  Commander  who,  wholly 
intent  upon  conciliatory  measures  with  the  Kafirs,  had 
been  suddenly  attacked,  and  seen  the  country  placed 
under  his  authority  and  protection  invaded,  but  of  the 
inhabitants,  who  had  not  only  been  engaged  in  a  twelve 
months'  warfare  of  the  most  harassing  and  dangerous 
character,  but  who  were  smarting  from  a  system  pursued 
during  fourteen  years,  by  the  local  government  never 
affording  them  redress  for  their  most  serious  losses  and 
grievances  on  this  subject, — can  hardly  have  been  penned 
by  a  declared  enemy  of  the  country  and  its  governor.  .  .  ." 

Then  it  was  that  the  eastern  farmers  of  Dutch  origin, 
who  had  shared  with  their  English  neighbours  the  disasters 
of  the  war,  and  who,  unlike  them,  were  bound  by  no 
ties  of  sentiment  to  the  British  connection,  determined 
to  withdraw  themselves  from  the  jurisdiction  of  the 
British  Government,  and  seek  fresh  homes  beyond  the 
borders  of  the  colony. 

Meanwhile  certain  movements  among  the  Bantu  tribes 
beyond  the  frontier  had  taken  place,  which  show  that 
this  determination  was  not  so  desperate  as  it  seems  at 
first  sight. 

In  the  year  1783  a  little  brown  baby  was  born  on  the 
banks  of  the  Umvolosi  River,  in  the  centre  of  Zululand. 
That  little  brown  baby  grew  into  a  man,  who  exceeded 
Nero  in  cruelty,  and  Napoleon  in  ambition.  Before  he 
was  grown  up,  Tshaka — for  that  was  his  name — quarrelled 
with  his  own  father,  and  took  refuge  in  the  kraal  of  a 
neighbouring  chief,  Dingiswayo.  This  Dingiswayo  had 
heard  of  the  great  wars  in  Europe,  and  how  soldiers 
could  be  trained  so  perfectly  that  a  whole  regiment  would 
move  with  the  spontaneity  of  a  single  man,  and  he  re- 
solved to  train  his  braves  on  this  principle.  Tshaka 
became  the  favourite  general  of  Dingiswayo's  army,  and, 
when  the  old  chief  died,  the  favourite  of  the  army  was 
elected  to    fill    his  place.     Then    Tshaka   commenced    a 

c 


34  SOUTH  AFRICA 

cai'eer  of  conquest.  At  the  end  of  this  career  he  had 
raised  the  Zulu  tribe  from  an  insignificant  position  to 
the  headship  of  the  Bantu  race,  and  made  himself  para- 
mount lord  from  the  Limpopo  to  the  borders  of  Kaffraria. 
His  method  was  a  very  simple  one.  With  the  exception 
of  a  few  of  the  handsomest  girls  and  the  strongest  boys, 
whom  he  incorporated  into  his  system,  he  exterminated 
every  tribe  he  attacked.  It  is  estimated  that  between 
the  years  1812  and  1828  he  devastated  thousands  of 
square  miles  of  country,  and  caused  the  death  of  one 
million  human  beings.  The  manner  of  his  death  was 
worthy  of  such  a  life.  Tshaka's  two  brothers,  Dingan 
and  Umhlangana,  having  been  in  terror  of  their  lives  for 
a  long  time,  at  length  conspired  together  and  .slew  him. 
Then  Dingan  "  got  rid "  of  Umhlangana,  and  became 
king  of  the  Zulus.  Meanwhile,  on  the  western  side  of 
the  Drakensberg  a  like  war  of  extermination  had  been 
going  forward  under  Moselekatse,  a  runaway  general  of 
Tshaka.  And  so  at  this  time,  the  year  1835,  the  greater 
part  of  what  is  now  Natal,  the  Free  State,  and  the  South 
African  Republic,  was  depopulated  and  unoccupied  country. 
It  was  to  these  regions  that  the  dissatisfied  farmers  resolved 
to  retire. 

The  emigrants  sold  their  properties  for  what  they  would 
fetch ;  they  packed  their  household  goods  into  their 
great  canvas-covered  waggons,  and  set  out,  with  their 
flocks  and  their  herds,  like  the  patriarchs  of  old.  During 
the  years  1835  ^^  ^^S^,  trains  of  waggons  with  their 
long  teams  of  patient  oxen  were  continually  traversing 
the  sandy  plains,  and  slowly  winding  up  the  sides  of 
the  mountain  ranges.  They  crossed  the  Orange  River, 
and  there,  in  what  is  now  the  Free  State,  they  founded 
Winburg,  the  place  of  victory,  so-called  in  commemora- 
tion of  their  victory  over  Moselekatse  and  his  Matabele 
Zulus.  They  scaled  the  Drakensberg,  and,  descending 
the  eastern    side   of  the    ranges    looked    forth    upon    the 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  35 

terrace  country  of  Natal.  Here  they  founded  Weenen, 
the  place  of  weeping,  where  Dingan  butchered  whole 
companies  of  their  people,  and  Pietermaritzburg,  so- 
named  after  two  of  their  leaders.  Subsequently  they 
recrossed  the  Drakensberg,  and  passing  into  the  Transvaal, 
founded  Lydenburg  in  the  high  country  in  the  north-east, 
and  Potchefstroom  in  the  south. 

And  in  the  meantime  what  was  the  English  Government 
doing  ? 

When  first  the  Colonial  Government  heard  that  it  was 
the  intention  of  the  dissatisfied  farmers  to  leave  the  colony, 
they  referred  the  matter  to  the  Attorney-General,  Sir 
Antony  Oliphant.  He  advised  the  Government  that  he 
knew  of  the  existence  of  no  law,  Imperial  or  colonial, 
which  forbade  British  subjects  to  leave  a  British  territory. 
After  this,  that  is  to  say  for  the  next  eight  or  ten  years,  the 
Colonial  Government,  acting  under  instructions  from  home, 
contented  themselves  with  merely  refusing  to  recognise 
the  existence  of  the  white  communities  which  were  being 
so  irregularly  brought  into  existence.  There  was,  however, 
an  exception  to  the  application  of  this  principle — Natal. 
The  case  of  Natal  was  peculiar.  In  the  first  place, 
there  was  already  a  small  English  population  at  Durban, 
and  in  the  next,  Natal  was  a  maritime  province,  and, 
therefore,  of  more  importance  than  the  interior  districts. 
In  1839  Durban  was  occupied  by  a  military  force,  and 
in  1843  it  was  proclaimed  British  territory.  At  the 
same  time,  the  Government  endeavoured  to  protect  the 
natives  of  the  interior  from  the  aggressions  of  the  emigrant 
farmers  by  entering  into  alliances  with  various  native 
chiefs,  of  whom  the  most  important  was  Moshesh,  chief 
of  the  Basutos. 

In  1846  a  fresh  Kafir  war  broke  out.  In  the  course 
of  this  war  a  large  number  of  British  soldiers  lost  their 
lives,  and  a  large  amount  of  British  capital  was  expended ; 
and  after  this  experience  the  Imperial  Government  decided 


36  SOUTH  AFRICA 

that  a  more  energetic  policy  was  necessary  in  South  Africa. 
Accordingly  they  appointed  Sir  Harry  Smith  Governor  of 
the  Cape  in  1847,  and  instructed  him  to  give  effect  to 
this  change  of  views. 

When  Sir  Harry  Smith  arrived  at  Capetown  he  issued 
a  proclamation  extending  the  boundaries  of  the  colony 
northward  to  the  Orange  River  and  eastward  to  the 
Keiskamma.  The  country  between  the  Keiskamma  and 
the  Kei  was  created  a  native  territory  under  the  name 
of  British  Kaffraria.  That  is  to  say,  as  regards  the 
eastern  border,  Sir  Harry  Smith  now  put  into  effect  the 
measures  which  he,  in  concurrence  with  Sir  Benjamin 
Durban,  had  recommended  twelve  years  before.  He 
then  crossed  over  the  Orange  River  and  visited  the 
emigrant  farmers  there.  He  recognised  the  futility  of 
the  half  measures  which  had  been  taken  partly  in  pursu- 
ance of  the  non-interference  policy  and  partly  under  the 
influence  of  an  exaggerated  belief  in  the  capacity  and 
pacific  intention  of  the  native  chiefs,  and  proclaimed  the 
country  between  the  Vaal  River  on  the  north  and  west, 
the  Orange  River  on  the  south,  and  the  Drakensberg 
Mountains  on  the  east,  a  British  territory  under  the 
name  of  the  Orange  River  Sovereignty.  He  placed  the 
emigrant  farmers  within  the  Sovereignty  under  the  inde- 
pendent control  of  a  British  official,  and  delimited  the 
boundaries  between  them  and  the  natives,  the  Griquas 
on  the  west,  and  the  Basutos  on  the  east. 

These  were  measures  which  were  sound  in  themselves, 
and  which  met  with  almost  universal  approval  in  the 
colony  :  but  unfortunately  they  came  too  late.  Sir  Harry 
Smith  was  scarcely  back  in  Capetown  before  he  received 
intelligence  that  the  emigrant  farmers  in  the  Sovereignty — 
the  men  who  five  years  before  had  vainly  petitioned  the 
British  Government  to  take  them  under  their  jurisdiction — 
had  risen,  and  politely  but  firmly  requested  Major  Warden, 
the    British    resident,    and    his    handful    of    officials    and 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  37 

police,  to  withdraw  from  Bloemfontein.  It  was  not  long 
before  Sir  Harry  Smith  was  on  the  other  side  of  the 
Orange  River.  He  met  the  insurgents  under  Pretorius  at 
Boomplaats,  on  August  29th,  1848,  and  dispersed  them: 
and  he  then  re-established  the  Sovereignty  government 
on  a  firmer  basis.  This  affair  had  scarcely  been  settled 
before  another  Kafir  war  broke  out.  This  war,  lasting 
from  1851  to  1853,  was  really  a  continuation  of  the  pre- 
ceding war  of  1846-7  ;  for  the  Kafir  chiefs  subsequently 
admitted  that  they  had  only  made  peace  in  order  to 
allow  themselves  time  to  collect  the  stores  of  food 
necessary  for  a  fresh  campaign.  Sir  Harry  Smith  was 
considered  responsible  in  some  unaccountable  way  for 
this  fresh  outbreak,  and  he  was  recalled.  Before  he  left 
the  colony,  and  while  he  was  conducting  operations  in 
person  against  the  Kafirs,  he  received  a  communication 
from  Major  Warden,  stating  that  Pretorius,  who  had  re- 
tired beyond  the  Vaal  after  the  battle  of  Boomplaats, 
had  intimated  his  intention  of  raising  the  emigrant  farmers 
in  the  Sovereignty  unless  the  independence  of  himself 
and  his  followers  beyond  the  Vaal  was  recognised  by 
the  Government.  Sir  Harry  Smith  had  no  soldiers  to 
spare,  so  he  acceded  to  Pretorius'  demands  in  order  to 
save  the  Sovereignty,  and  thus,  on  the  17th  January  1852, 
by  the  Sand  River  convention,  the  South  African  Republic, 
or  the  Transvaal,  came  into  existence. 

Sir  Harry  Smith  was  succeeded  in  March  by  Sir  George 
Cathcart.  The  Kafir  war  had  scarcely  been  brought  to  an 
end  before  news  came  of  fresh  disturbances  in  the 
Sovereignty.  This  time  it  was  the  natives,  the  Basutos, 
who  were  the  cause  of  the  trouble,  and  not  the  emigrant 
farmers.  Sir  George  Cathcart  crossed  the  Orange  River 
with  quite  a  considerable  force,  2500  men,  and  en- 
camped on  the  bank  of  the  Caledon  River,  From  this 
position  he  sent  an  ultimatum  to  Moshesh,  the  Basuto 
chief.      He  required    10,000   head    of  cattle,   and    1000 


38  SOUTH  AFRICA 

horses  as  a  compensation  for  the  losses  inflicted  by 
Moshesh  and  his  people  on  the  farmers.  No  doubt 
Moshesh  would  have  been  quite  willing  to  have  acceded 
to  these  demands,  but  unfortunately  he  was  not  an 
absolute,  but  only  a  constitutional,  ruler.  He  had  to 
pay  attention  to  the  opinions  not  only  of  the  chiefs, 
but  even  of  the  commoners  of  the  tribe ;  and  the  mass 
of  the  Basutos  were  unwilling  to  part  with  so  large  an 
amount  of  cattle  without  a  struggle.  Moshesh  ultimately 
sent  3500  head  of  cattle,  with  an  expression  of  regret 
that  he  could  not  provide  the  full  amount.  Then  Sir 
George  Cathcart  invaded  Basutoland  with  his  troops  in 
three  columns.  One  of  these  columns  was  fortunate 
enough  to  capture  4000  head  of  cattle.  Another  en- 
countered a  strong  body  of  Basutos,  and  an  engagement 
ensued  at  Mount  Berea,  in  which  the  Basutos  rather  more 
than  held  their  own  against  the  British  soldiers.  And 
now  the  wisdom  of  Moshesh  appeared.  The  old  chief 
was  not  deceived  for  a  moment  by  this  success,  or  led 
to  suppose  that  his  people  could  ultimately  withstand 
or  conquer  the  British  troops ;  on  the  contrary,  that 
very  night  he  sent  for  his  missionary  adviser,  Mr  Casahs, 
and  despatched  this  letter  : — 

Thaba  Bosigo, 
Midnight,  zoth  December  1852. 
Your  Excellency, — This  day  you  have  fought  against 
my  people,  and  taken  much  cattle.  As  the  object  for 
which  you  have  come  is  to  have  a  compensation  for 
Boers,  I  beg  you  will  be  satisfied  with  what  you  have 
taken.  I  entreat  peace  from  you — you  have  chastised 
— let  it  be  enough  \  and  let  me  be  no  longer  considered 
an  enemy  to  the  Queen.  I  will  try  all  I  can  to  keep 
my  people  in  order  in  the  future. — Your  humble  servant, 

Moshesh. 

Sir    George   Cathcart  had   seen   enough  of  the   Basuto 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  39 

country,  and  of  the  fighting  qualities  of  its  inhabitants, 
to  make  him  quite  ready  to  accept  this  quaUfied  sub- 
mission, and  he  then  withdrew  his  forces.  In  the  report 
which  he  sent  to  the  Imperial  Government  he  recom- 
mended that  one  of  two  alternatives  should  be  pursued. 
Either  the  Sovereignty  should  be  altogether  abandoned, 
or  a  Lieutenant-Governor,  with  a  force  of  at  least  2000 
men,  should  be  established  at  Bloemfontein.  The  Imperial 
Government  chose  the  former  alternative,  and  despatched 
a  special  Commissioner,  Sir  George  Clerk,  to  arrange 
for  the  transference  of  the  government  to  a  Committee 
of  the  emigrant  farmers,  and  so,  on  the  23rd  February 
1854,  by  the  convention  of  Bloemfontein,  the  Free  State 
was  created. 

We  have  now  reached  a  point  in  the  history  of  South 
Africa  where  it  is  convenient  to  pause  a  moment,  and  look 
round. 

First,  we  must  notice  that  five  out  of  the  ten  or  twelve 
political  divisions  marked  on  the  map  of  South  Africa 
to-day  are  already  in  existence.  We  have  the  Cape 
Colony,  Natal,  and  British  Kaffraria — all  three  British 
possessions  ;  and,  in  addition,  the  two  independent  com- 
munities founded  by  the  emigrant  farmers,  the  South 
African  Republic,  and  the  Free  State.  Moreover,  the 
Imperial  Government,  taught  by  the  experience  of  the 
last  twenty  years,  have  now  arrived  at  two  conclusions. 
In  the  first  place  they  have  decided  to  give  the  colonists 
a  larger  share  in  the  management  of  their  affairs.  In 
these  successive  Kafir  wars  a  large  number  of  British 
soldiers — four  hundred  men  went  down  in  the  transport 
Birkenhead,  under  circumstances  of  heroism  which  are 
still  remembered — had  been  sacrificed,  and  a  large  amount 
of  British  capital  had  been  wasted.  Not  only  so,  but  the 
eastern  farmers  claimed  compensation  for  the  losses  in- 
flicted upon  them  by  the  Kafirs  in  these  wars,  and  during 
the   intervening    depredations,    on    the   ground    that    the 


40  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Imperial  Government,  through  their  agent,  Lord  Glenelg, 
had  accepted  the  entire  responsibihty  for  the  reversal  of 
the  colonial  frontier  policy  in  1835.  This  claim  was  not 
allowed  ;  at  the  same  time  almost  the  entire  cost  of  the 
military  operations  against  the  Kafirs  was  defrayed  by  the 
Imperial  exchequer.  The  Imperial  Government  had  very 
practical  evidence,  therefore,  of  the  evils  resulting  from 
the  disregard  of  local  opinion  and  advice;  and  in  1853  a 
representative  Constitution  was  granted  to  the  Cape  Colony. 
By  this  Constitution  two  elective  chambers,  an  upper- 
chamber,  or  Legislative  Council,  with  fifteen  members, 
and  a  Legislative  Assembly  with  forty-six  members,  were 
created.  Full  parliamentary  freedom,  responsible  govern- 
ment, was  not  granted  until  twenty  years  later,  in  1872. 
The  executive  officials  were  still  appointed  by  the  Governor, 
instead  of  being  chosen  from  among  the  representatives 
elected  to  Parliament,  and  they  were,  therefore,  responsible 
for  their  actions  to  the  Crown,  and  not  to  the  people  of 
the  colony.  At  the  same  time  the  colonists  had  hence- 
forward a  means  by  which  they  could  bring  their  wishes 
and  their  opinions  in  a  direct  and  effective  manner  before 
the  colonial,  and  ultimately,  before  the  Imperial  authorities. 
The  second  conclusion  was  the  determination  not  to 
interfere  in  affairs  beyond  the  borders  of  the  British 
possessions,  and  to  leave  the  emigrant  farmers  and  the 
natives  to  adjust  their  differences  by  themselves.  It  is 
quite  true  that  certain  limitations  were  imposed  by  the 
conventions  upon  the  Boer  governments  in  respect  of  the 
treatment  of  the  natives.  At  the  same  time,  it  is  perfectly 
clear  that  at  this  time  the  Imperial  Government,  without 
formally  surrendering  its  paramount  position,  intended  to 
retire  from  the  task  of  controlling  the  European  expansion, 
and  the  consequent  disintegration  of  the  Bantu  peoples. 
Both  the  Sand  River  and  the  Bloemfontein  conventions 
contained  clauses  in  which  Her  Majesty's  Government 
disclaimed   any   intention   of  making  any  further  treaties 


THE  KAFIR  WARS  41 

with  native  chiefs  outside  the  limits  of  the  British  posses- 
sions. This  decision  was  based  on  a  feehng  which 
Tennyson  has  called  "  the  craven  fear  of  being  great." 
It  was  an  attempt  to  escape  from  responsibiUties  which 
naturally  and  rightly  belonged  to  England  as  the  para- 
mount power  in  South  Africa.  As  an  attempt  to  escape 
responsibilities  it  was  both  unsuccessful  and  disastrous. 
It  was  unsuccessful,  because  the  same  difficulties  arose 
at  a  later  period,  and  had  then  to  be  met  under  less 
favourable  conditions.  It  was  disastrous,  because  by 
this  policy  of  non-intervention  the  Imperial  Government 
became  a  party  to  a  process  which  Sir  George  Grey  has 
called  "the  dismemberment  of  South  Africa."  By  this 
process  the  Europeans,  as  representing  the  forces  of 
civilisation,  were  weakened  by  separation  and  division 
in  the  conflict  with  the  Bantu  peoples,  as  representing 
the  forces  of  barbarism  ;  and  the  moral  intervals  which 
had  from  the  first  separated  the  two  sections,  Dutch  and 
English,  were  emphasised  and  perpetuated. 

Meanwhile,  in  spite  of  war  and  devastation,  in  spite 
of  drought  and  blight,  in  spite  of  administrative  blunders 
and  political  misunderstandings,  the  colonists  were  steadily 
advancing  in  wealth  and  civilisation.  The  Drakenstein 
range  had  been  pierced  by  Lord  Charles  Somerset  at 
French  Hoek,  and  again,  by  Sir  Lowy  Cole,  at  Hottentots 
Holland.  In  1844,  Colonial  Secretary  John  Montagu 
projected,  and  Colonel  Mitchell  and  Mr  Andrew  Bain 
executed,  that  system  of  roads  which  Sir  Harry  Smith 
declared  "would  do  honour  to  a  great  nation  instead  of 
a  mere  dependency  of  the  Crown;"  and  on  the  31st  of 
March  1859,  the  first  sod  of  the  Capetown  and  Welling- 
ton railway  was  turned  by  Sir  George  Grey.  Merino 
sheep,  the  producers  of  fine  wool,  were  introduced  from 
Saxony  by  Reitz  and  Breda  in  18 12,  by  Lord  Charles 
Somerset  and  by  the  Albany  settlers  in  1820;  and  thus 
early  the  foundation  of  the  staple  industry  of  the  colony 


42  SOUTH  AFRICA 

was  laid.  By  1S65  the  ostrich — the  wildest  of  birds — 
had  been  tamed  but  not  domesticated;  but  in  1869  Mr 
Arthur  Douglass  of  Albany  perfected  his  artificial  in- 
cubator, and  under  the  stimulus  of  this  invention,  the 
export  of  ostrich  feathers  rose  in  a  single  year  from  17,000 
lbs.  to  28,000  lbs. 

The  missionaries,  too,  were  at  work.  Moffat  was 
established  at  Kuruman,  Livingstone  was  exploring  regions 
beyond  the  reach  of  his  enemies  the  emigrant  Boers,  and 
demanded  at  this  early  period  the  free  navigation  of  the 
Zambesi.  And  in  1841  the  Kafir  College  of  Lovedale, 
perhaps  the  most  important  individual  agency  for 
civilisation  in  South  Africa,  was  founded  by  Govan. 

All  this  time  the  earth  was  waiting  to  reveal  her 
treasures.  The  ample  stores  of  coal  in  the  Transvaal 
and  Natal  remained  unharvested  ;  the  golden  reefs  of  the 
Randt  Basin  were  as  yet  untouched  by  the  prospector's 
hammer ;  the  diamonds  of  Kimberley  lay  close  packed 
in  the  blue  earth  of  their  volcanic  pipes  in  a  despised 
corner  of  the  Free  State.  In  a  word,  the  Cinderella  of 
the  Empire  had  not  yet  been  visited  by  her  fairy  god- 
mothei. 


CHAPTER    III. 

Sir  Bartle  Frere  and  Confederation. 

AT  the  end  of  the  period  1806-1854,  the  Imperial 
■^^  Government  had  arrived  at  two  conclusions  with 
regard  to  the  future  administration  of  South  Africa.  In 
the  first  place  they  had  decided  to  restrict  their  adminis- 
tration to  the  limits  of  the  Cape  Colony,  Natal,  and 
British  Kaffraria.  In  the  next,  they  had  determined  to 
give  to  the  colonists  a  larger  share  in  the  management 
of  their  affairs,  and  in  1853  a  Parliament,  with  two 
representative  chambers,  was  established  at  Capetown. 
It  is  with  this  last  decision  that  we  must  connect  the 
appointment  of  such  a  governor  as  Sir  George  Grey ; — 
a  governor,  that  is  to  say,  who  was  qualified  not  by 
military  experience,  but  by  a  capacity  for  administration, 
in  part  natural  and  in  part  acquired  during  the  discharge 
of  the  duties  of  that  office  in  South  Australia  and  New 
Zealand. 

The  period  of  Sir  George  Grey's  administration,  lasting 
from  1854  to  1862 — for  he  was  recalled  and  reinstated — 
is  remarkable  in  many  respects.  We  will  select  two. 
He  originated  a  method  of  dealing  with  the  Kafirs  which 
was  at  once  more  effective  and  more  humane  (Note  9), 
and  he  formed  a  remarkable  forecast  of  the  future  history 
of  South  Africa,  In  condemning  the  policy  of  non-inter- 
vention, and  the  consequent  dismemberment  of  South 
Africa,  he  foresaw  two  important  movements — that  the 
Bantu  would  one  day  be  tempted  by  the  separation  and 
apparent   weakness    of    the    Europeans    to    contest    the 


44  SOUTH  AFRICA 

supremacy  of  race,  and  that,  in  the  event  of  a  second 
conflict  between  the  Imperial  Government  and  the  Dutch 
population,  the  strength  of  the  resistance  to  be  encountered 
would  be  measured,  not  by  the  conditions  of  the  Dutch 
within  the  colony,  but  by  those  of  their  more  strenuous 
and  independent  kinsmen.  Sir  George  Grey  not  only 
foresaw  these  dangers,  but  he  suggested  appropriate 
remedies.  He  recognised  the  danger  of  leaving  the 
growing  Zulu  people  in  utter  barbarism,  and  he  therefore 
recommended  that  European  residents  and  magistrates 
should  be  introduced  among  them  as  well  as  among  the 
Kafirs.  He  recognised  that  the  attitude  of  the  whole 
Dutch  population  in  South  Africa  would  be  determined 
by  that  of  the  independent  States,  and  he  therefore 
proposed  to  bring  back  these  States  within  the  sphere  of 
Imperial  control  by  uniting  them  to  the  British  Colonies 
in  a  federal  tie  (Note  lo).  Had  these  suggestions  been 
carried  out,  England  might  have  been  saved  the  disaster 
of  Isandlhwana  and  the  disgrace  of  Majuba  Hill, 

As  it  was,  the  Imperial  Government  maintained  their 
policy  of  non-intervention  with  fair  consistency  for  the 
next  fifteen  years.  During  this  period,  partly  owing  to 
the  improved  methods  of  dealing  with  the  Kafirs,  intro- 
duced by  Sir  George  Grey,  and  partly  owing  to  the 
weakening  of  the  warlike  Amakosa  clans — the  Gaikas 
and  Galekas — by  the  extraordinary  self-destruction  which 
took  place  in  the  year  1857,  there  was  no  outbreak  on 
the  eastern  border  (Note  11).  During  this  period, 
too,  the  colonists  made  slow  but  steady  progress,  the 
sort  of  progress  which  is  typified  by  the  ox-waggon,  the 
national  vehicle  of  South  Africa.  But  though  this  pro- 
gress was  slow,  it  was  real  enough  to  justify  the  Imperial 
Government  in  contemplating  the  extension  to  the  Cape 
Colony  of  that  full  parliamentary  freedom  which  they 
had  already  granted  fifteen  years  ago  to  the  Pacific 
Colonies:  and  in    1869  Sir  Henry  Barkly  was  appointed 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  45 

Governor  and  instructed  to  carry  through  the  measures 
necessary  for  the  introduction  of  responsible  government. 
The  new  constitution  was  at  length  proclaimed  on  the 
29th  of  November  1872.  But  before  this  date  an  event 
had  occurred  which  very  materially  altered  the  attitude  of 
England  to  South  Africa.  This  event  was  the  discovery 
of  diamonds  in  1869,  and  the  subsequent  establishment 
of  the  diamond  industry  at  Kimberley  in  1870.  The 
non  -  intervention  policy  was  at  once  abandoned.  In 
1 87 1,  British  authority  was  proclaimed  over  the  diamond 
fields,  together  with  a  large  district  to  the  north  of  the 
Orange  and  the  Vaal  Rivers,  and  the  new  territory  was 
named  Griqualand  West.  By  this  action  the  Imperial 
Government  were  brought  into  conflict  with  both  of  the 
Boer  States.  The  Government  of  the  South  African 
Republic  protested  that  the  proclamation  of  British 
authority  over  so  much  of  Griqualand  West  as  was  north 
of  the  Vaal  River  was  a  contravention  of  the  third  Article 
of  the  Sand  River  convention — 

"  Her  Majesty's  Assistant  Commissioners  hereby  disclaim 
all  alliances  whatever,  and  with  whomsoever,  of  the 
coloured  tribes  to  the  north  of  the  Vaal  River." 

The  Free  State  Government  declared  that  the  actual 
diamond  fields,  the  district  enclosed  between  the  fork  of  the 
Vaal  and  Orange  Rivers,  was  part  of  their  territory,  and 
had  in  fact  been  part  of  the  original  "  sovereignty  "  as 
proclaimed  by  Sir  Harry  Smith  in  1848. 

The  dispute  with  the  South  African  Republic  was 
referred  to  arbitration.  A  commission  was  appointed, 
over  which  Mr  Keate,  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  Natal 
presided.  The  Keate  Award  was  in  favour  of  the  Imperial 
Government.  The  Volksraad  thereupon  repudiated  the 
engagement  to  abide  by  the  result  of  that  award  which 
had  been  made  on  its  behalf  by  President  Pretorius,  and 
Pretorius  resigned.  The  matter  was  then  left  in  abey- 
ance, and  the  question  of  the  delimitation  of  the  south- 


46  SOUTH  AFRICA 

west  boundary  of  the  South  African  Repubhc  was  not 
finally  settled  until  the  provisions  of  the  convention 
of  London  were  enforced  by  the  Bechuanaland  expedition 
of  1885.  To  the  Free  State  Government  it  was  replied 
that  the  land  in  question  had  been  acquired  by  purchase 
from  a  Griqua  chief,  Waterboer  by  name ;  and  the  Free 
State  protested  and  withdrew.  Subsequently,  however, 
a  land  court  was  established  in  Griqualand  West,  and 
the  claims  of  individual  owners  were  subjected  to  legal 
scrutiny.  It  was  then  discovered  that  the  title  of  Water- 
boer to  the  diamond  fields  was  bad ;  for  all  claims  to 
land  based  upon  grants  made  by  Waterboer  were  rejected 
by  this  Court.  President  Brand  then  proceeded  to 
London,  to  lay  his  case  before  the  Colonial  Office.  It 
was  a  simple  case.  The  Imperial  Government  had  based 
their  right  to  the  diamond  fields  upon  Waterboer's  grant. 
It  had  been  held  by  a  British  Court  of  Justice  that  Water- 
boer's title  to  the  land  was  bad,  and  therefore,  since  no 
vendor  can  give  his  purchaser  a  better  title  than  that 
which  he  himself  possesses,  the  title  of  the  Imperial 
Government  was  equally  bad.  Then  the  Colonial  Office 
produced  a  new  argument.  They  reverted  to  the  posi- 
tion which  England  had  held  in  South  Africa  before  the 
Sand  River  and  the  Bloemfontein  conventions.  They 
declared  that  the  Imperial  Government,  as  the  supreme 
authority  in  South  Africa,  had  the  right  to  interfere  in 
the  affairs  of  these  otherwise  independent  communities 
when  the  safety  or  well-being  of  South  Africa  as  a  whole 
required  such  interference.  At  the  same  time  Lord 
Carnarvon,  who  was  then  Colonial  Secretary,  recognised 
that  the  Free  State  had  a  grievance,  and  he  arranged 
a  compromise.  Ultimately  a  sum  of  over  ^,^1 00,000 
was  paid  to  the  Free  State  Government  by  way  of  com- 
pensation. 

Now,  although  this  principle,  that  the  responsibility  of 
England   as   paramount  power  must  be  accompanied  by 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  47 

corresponding  rights  over  the  whole  of  South  Africa,  is 
both  sound  and  necessary,  and  although  the  special  con- 
tention of  the  Colonial  Office,  that  these  paramount  rights 
and  powers  were  not  waived  by  the  two  conventions,  can 
be  shown  to  be  just,  since  both  these  documents  contain 
requirements  and  stipulations  which  could  only  be  rendered 
effectual  by  the  maintenance  of  England's  relationship  of 
paramount  power  towards  the  states  in  question  :  at  the 
same  time  it  was  unfortunate,  to  say  the  least,  that  this 
principle  should  only  have  been  brought  forward  by  the 
Colonial  Office  after  the  title  by  purchase  had  fallen 
through.  We  are  reminded  in  a  very  awkward  manner  by 
this  action  of  the  Colonial  Office  of  that  much  quoted  line 
in  Horace,  in  which  the  man  of  the  world  is  satirically 
represented  as  advising  his  pupil, 

"  Si  possis,  recte,  si  non  quocunque  modo  rem." 

"  Make  money,  honestly  if  you  can,  if  not — somehow 
or  other."  And  we  who  believe,  to  use  Lord  Rosebery's 
phrase,  that  the  British  Empire  is  "  the  greatest  secular 
agency  for  good  known  to  the  world,"  have  a  right  to 
expect,  and  to  require,  that  England  shall  not  be  placed 
in  so  equivocal  a  position  either  by  the  want  of  foresight, 
or  by  the  mere  carelessness  of  her  officials. 

The  establishment  of  the  diamond  industry  had  an 
immediate  effect  upon  the  prospects  of  the  Cape  Colony. 
Within  the  five  years  succeeding  the  date  of  the  discovery 
the  revenue  of  the  colony  was  more  than  doubled.  And 
it  was  on  the  strength  of  this  increasing  revenue  that  the 
first  premier,  Sir  John  Molteno,  was  able  to  commence  an 
extensive  programme  of  railway  construction  by  which  the 
two  chief  towns,  Capetown  and  Port-Elizabeth,  were  con- 
nected, and  the  inland  districts  brought  into  direct  railway 
communication  with  the  ports.  But  there  were  other 
results  from  the  working  of  the  Kimberley  mines  which 
were  less  happy.     The  rough  work  of  excavation  and  of 


48  SOUTH  AFRICA 

raising  the  diamondiferous  earth  was  done  by  natives. 
These  Kafirs  came  from  various  parts  of  South  Africa,  and 
engaged  themselves  for  periods  of  three  months,  or  six 
months,  as  the  case  might  be,  and  then  returned  to  their 
homes  with  earnings  which  represented  to  them,  with  their 
moderate  ideas  of  wealth,  very  large  sums.  With  an 
extraordinary  disregard  of  the  interests  of  the  other 
European  communities,  the  Government  of  Griqualand 
West  permitted  the  natives  to  spend  part  of  their  wages  in 
the  purchase  of  firearms.  Among  those  who  did  so  were 
some  members  of  the  Hlubi  tribe — a  tribe  which  was  located 
on  the  western  borders  of  Natal.  Now  the  laws  of  Natal 
which  regulated  the  possession  of  firearms  by  the  Kafirs 
were  necessarily  very  strict.  Every  native  on  becoming 
possessed  of  a  gun  was  required  to  register  his  name  with 
the  magistrate  of  his  district.  These  Hlubis  neglected  to  do 
this  ;  and  Langa,  their  chief,  was  summoned  to  Maritzburg 
to  answer  for  the  misdemeanour  of  his  people  by  the 
Governor  of  Natal,  who,  under  the  Natal  constitution,  was 
paramount  chief  of  all  the  Kafirs  in  the  colony.  Langa 
neglected,  or  refused,  to  obey  the  summons  ;  ultimately  the 
law  was  enforced  by  the  co-operation  of  the  Cape  Govern- 
ment, but  not  before  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa  had 
experienced  a  very  ugly  feeling  of  alarm. 

It  was  just  at  this  time,  when  South  Africa  was  beginning 
to  attract  population  and  capital  from  England,  that  Lord 
Beaconsfield's  government  came  into  power,  and  Lord 
Carnarvon  became  Secretary  for  the  colonies.  The  con- 
ditions of  South  Africa  were  better  known  now,  thanks  to 
the  diamond  fields,  and  Lord  Carnarvon  saw  in  those 
conditions  two  strong  reasons  for  establishing  a  central 
government — the  necessity  of  adopting  a  common  policy 
towards  the  natives  as  evidenced  by  the  Hlubi  incident, 
and  the  desirability  of  avoiding  further  conflicts  with  the 
Boer  States.  Moreover,  Lord  Carnarvon  had,  in  1867,  in- 
troduced a  bill  uniting  the  British  North  American  colonies 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  49 

in  a  single  federal  system,  the  Canadian  Dominion,  and 
he  naturally  sought  to  apply  the  same  remedy  to  South 
Africa.  That  same  year,  1874,  he  sent  out  despatches  in 
which  he  recommended  that  the  Cape  government  should 
summon  representatives  from  the  various  colonies  and 
states  to  attend  a  conference  on  federation  ;  and  he  de- 
spatched the  late  Mr  J.  A.  Froude  to  act  as  his  own 
representative.  Unfortunately,  through  some  misunder- 
standing between  the  Colonial  Office  and  the  Cape  ministers, 
that  conference  was  not  summoned,  and  an  opportunity 
for  uniting  South  Africa  was  lost.  Events  subsequently 
happened  which  made  the  necessity  for  the  creation  of  this 
central  authority  all  the  more  obvious.  In  the  year  1876 
the  government  of  the  South  African  Republic  practically 
collapsed.  Sikukuni,  a  Kafir  chief  in  the  mountain  country 
in  the  north-east  of  the  Transvaal,  revolted,  and  defeated 
the  burgher  forces  which  were  sent  against  him  under 
the  command  of  the  president  Mr  Burgers.  At  the  same 
time  the  Boers  had  become  involved  in  a  dispute  respecting 
their  eastern  border  with  Ketshwayo,  the  formidable  king  of 
the  Zulus.  Under  the  strain  of  military  service  the  farmers 
became  impoverished,  and  the  Transvaal  treasury  was  at 
one  time  so  empty  that  there  was  not  money  enough  to 
pay  for  the  carriage  of  ammunition  from  Durban  to  Pretoria. 
By  an  application  of  the  principle  already  mentioned — the 
principle  that  England  was  responsible  as  paramount  power 
for  the  well-being  of  South  Africa  as  a  whole — the  Imperial 
Government  decided,  under  certain  circumstances,  to  es- 
tabUsh  the  Queen's  authority  in  the  Transvaal ;  and  a 
commission  was  issued  empowering  Sir  Theophilus  Shep- 
stone  to  take  the  necessary  measures,  if  certain  eventualities 
were  realised.  The  "emergency"  contemplated  by  the 
commission  subsequently  appeared  to  have  arisen,  and  on 
the  12th  of  April  1877,  Sir  Theophilus  Shepstone,  who 
had  ridden  into  Pretoria  with  a  small  body  of  police,  raised 
the  English  flag  (Note   12).     Meanwhile  Lord  Carnarvon 

D 


50  SOUTH  AFRICA 

had  carried  a  second  South  Africa  bill  through  the  Imperial 
Parliament,  and  selected  a  very  able  Indian  administrator, 
Sir  Bartle  Frere,  to  obtain  the  adoption  of  its  provisions  by 
the  local  legislatures. 

Sir  Bartle  Frere  reached  the  Cape  on  March  31st, 
1877.  He  was  in  no  way  responsible  for  the  annexa- 
tion of  the  Transvaal.  The  news  of  this  event  did 
not  reach  him  officially  until  the  30th  of  April.  And 
before  he  could  address  himself  to  the  work  of  South 
African  union  a  native  insurrection  had  broken  out,  in 
August,  on  the  eastern  frontier  of  the  colony.  First  the 
Gaikas  under  Sandille,  and  then  the  Galekas  under  Kreli, 
revolted.  Sir  Bartle  Frere  went  himself  to  the  disturbed 
districts  in  order  that  he  might  personally  supervise  the 
measures  taken  to  suppress  the  revolt.  As  a  result  of 
his  energetic  action  the  area  of  the  disturbance  was  from 
the  first  confined,  and,  in  general,  the  colonists  in  the 
eastern  provinces  were  preserved  from  the  horrors  and 
losses  of  a  long-protracted  Kafir  war  of  the  old  type. 
It  was  not,  however,  until  the  following  May  that  peace 
was  entirely  restored.  Meantime  a  more  formidable 
champion  of  the  Bantu  peoples  had  entered  the  arena 
to  dispute  the  supremacy  of  race  in  South  Africa.  This 
was  Ketshwayo,  the  grandson  of  Tshaka.  It  has  already 
been  mentioned  that,  at  the  time  of  the  annexation  of 
the  Transvaal,  the  Zulus  were  engaged  in  a  dispute  with 
the  Boer  farmers  on  the  eastern  border.  After  the 
annexation  Ketshwayo  transferred  his  quarrel  to  the  new 
Transvaal  Government ;  and  as  early  as  December  i  oth, 
1877,  Sir  Henry  Bulwer,  the  Governor  of  Natal,  informed 
Sir  Bartle  Frere  that,  though  a  "  general  collision " 
between  the  Zulus  and  the  Boers  might  be  avoided,  it 
was  impossible  to  prevent  conflicts  between  individual 
farmers  and  parties  of  Zulus.  In  that  despatch  *  he  also 
spoke  of  a  "  bitter  feeling "  against  the  new  Transvaal 
*  C — 2000. 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  51 

Government  as  existing  on  the  part  of  the  Zulus,  and 
further  suggested  that  a  "  third  party  "  should  be  appointed 
to  arbitrate  between  Ketshwayo  and  the  Transvaal  Govern- 
ment. Sir  Bartle  Frere  decided  to  undertake  the  duties 
of  arbitrator  himself,  and  in  September  1878,  he  visited 
Natal  with  a  view  of  settling  the  dispute.  After  examining 
the  evidence  of  the  frontier  commission,  he  gave  his  award 
in  favour  of  the  Zulu  claim.  At  the  same  time  he  accom- 
panied the  announcement  of  that  award  with  certain  re- 
quirements which  he  deemed  necessary  to  secure  the  peace 
of  South  Africa.  The  most  important  of  these  requirements 
were  (i)  that  Ketshwayo  should  disband  his  army;  (2) 
that  he  should  receive  a  British  resident  at  Ulundi,  his 
capital ;  (3)  that  he  should  surrender  certain  persons 
known  to  have  committed  an  offence  on  Natal  territory ; 
and  (4)  that  he  should  give  certain  guarantees  for  the 
better  government  of  his  people. 

Now,  as  it  is  obvious  that,  if  Ketshwayo  acceded  to 
these  demands,  he  would  have  reduced  himself  from  a 
position  of  independence  to  that  of  a  vassal  of  the  British 
Government,  the  question  arises  whether  Sir  Bartle  Frere 
was  justified  at  this  time  in  sending  what  was  practically 
an  ultimatum  to  the  Zulu  king.  Before  we  are  in  a 
position  to  answer  that  question  we  must  inform  ourselves 
on  two  material  points — the  nature  of  the  Zulu  system, 
and  the  conditions  of  Natal. 

By  methods  analogous  to  those  of  ancient  Sparta,  that 
is  to  say,  by  turning  the  entire  physical  resources  of  his 
people  in  one  direction,  that  of  war,  Ketshwayo  was  in 
possession  at  this  time  of  a  "  military  organisation  which 
enabled  [him]  to  form  out  of  his  comparatively  small 
population  an  army,  at  the  very  lowest  estimate,  of 
25,000  perfectly  trained  and  perfectly  obedient  soldiers, 
able  to  march  three  times  as  fast  as  we  could,  to  dispense 
with  commissariat  of  every  kind  and  transport  of  every 
kind,  and  to  fall  upon  [Natal]  or  any  part  of  the  neigh- 


52  SOUTH  AFRICA 

bouring  colony  in  such  numbers,  and  with  such  deter- 
mination, that  nothing  but  a  fortified  post  could  resist 
them,  making  no  prisoners,  and  sparing  neither  age  nor 
sex."* 

The  conditions  of  Natal  were  these.  There  were  in 
Natal  at  this  time  rather  more  than  20,000  Europeans. 
The  remainder  of  the  population  was  composed  of  over 
300,000  Bantu,  of  whom  the  majority,  we  will  say  two- 
thirds,  were  Zulus :  that  is  to  say,  they  were  members  of 
Ketshwayo's  own  tribe,  and  a  large  proportion  of  them 
had  crossed  the  border  in  order  that  they  might  enjoy 
the  peace  and  security  offered  by  the  Natal  Government 
(Note  13).  If,  therefore,  Ketshwayo  invaded  Natal  with 
his  army — still  more,  if  he  fought  a  successful  engagement 
on  colonial  soil — there  was  a  grave  danger,  amounting 
almost  to  a  moral  certainty,  that  the  mass  of  the  Bantu  in 
Natal  would,  by  a  mere  instinct  of  self-preservation,  join 
the  invaders. 

Moreover,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  designs 
of  Ketshwayo  were  by  no  means  confined  to  the  destruc- 
tion of  Natal.  "  Wherever  there  has  been  disturbance  and 
resistance  to  authority  of  Government,"  Sir  Bartle  Frere 
writes  on  the  eve  of  the  war,t  "between  the  Limpopo  and 
the  westernmost  limits  of  Kafir  population,  there  we  have 
found  unmistakeable  evidence "  of  a  "  common  purpose 
and  general  understanding "  among  the  Bantu  people 
to  shake  off  the  domination  of  the  Europeans.  Of  this 
movement  Ketshwayo  was  the  "head  centre,"  and  the 
Zulus  the  "main  strength." 

In  order  to  form  a  clear  understanding  of  this  most 
material  point — the  relationship  of  the  Zulu  power  to  the 
civilised   communities  of  South  Africa   at   this  crisis — we 

•  Despatch  of  Frere  to  Sir  Michael  Hicks-Beach  (who  had  succeeded 
Lord  Carnarvon  as  Secretary  for  the  Colonies),  March  ist,  1879.  C — 
2316. 

t  Despatch,  Dec.  loth,  1878.     C— 2222. 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  53 

will  take  an  imaginary  case.  We  will  suppose  that 
an  aggressive  person  has  taken  up  a  position  at  a  street- 
corner,  with  a  loaded  gun  raised  to  his  shoulder ;  we  will 
suppose,  further,  that  he  covers  with  his  piece  a  passer-by. 
What,  then,  is  the  duty  of  the  policeman  ?  Is  he  to  wait 
until  this  aggressive  individual  has  actually  discharged  his 
piece  and  wounded  an  innocent  person,  or  must  he 
advance  at  once  and  disarm  him?  Again,  would  the 
policeman  consider  it  a  sufficient  answer,  if  the  armed 
man  objected,  "  But  I  have  not  yet  fired  my  gun.  You 
need  not  be  alarmed  ;  I  always  carry  a  loaded  gun  about 
with  me,  and  often  raise  it  to  my  shoulder."  Plainly 
not ;  neither  did  Sir  Bartle  Frere  consider  that  he  was 
justified  in  allowing  the  Zulu  army  to  further  menace 
the  peace  of  the  Europeans  throughout  South  Africa 
"  We  may  blind  ourselves  as  we  will  to  the  truth,"  he 
writes,*  "gunmakers  and  gun-runners  may  make  excuses 
for  gun-running.  Philanthropists  may  find  reasons  for 
barbarisms,  and  persuade  themselves  of  good  intentions, 
belied  by  every  word  and  act  of  the  chiefs  lifetime. 
Lawyers  may  talk  of  constitutional  rights,  which  would 
find  a  more  natural  and  congenial  habitation  on  the  deck 
of  a  private  vessel,  and  every  one  in  active  life  may  agree 
to  postpone  the  correction  of  a  vicious  system,  'which 
may  last  our  time,'  to  some  more  convenient  season, 
when  *  something  may  turn  up '  to  save  us  trouble,  or 
throw  it  on  our  successors.  But  the  fact  remains,  that 
no  one  can  really  sleep  in  peace  and  security  within  a 
day's  run  of  the  Zulu  border — save  by  sufferance  of  the 
Zulu  chief." 

When  Ketshwayo  had  refused,  or  rather  neglected, 
to  comply  with  these  demands.  Sir  Bartle  Frere  entrusted 
the  enforcement  of  his  requirements  to  Lord  Chelmsford, 
who  was  then  in  command  of  the  British  force  in  Natal. 

Lord  Chelmsford  crossed  the  lower  Tugela  early  in 
*  Despatch,  Dec.  2nd,  1878.   C — 2222. 


54  SOUTH  AFRICA 

January  1879.  One  column  advanced  as  far  as  Etshowe, 
fortified  a  position  there,  and  remained  in  the  heart  of 
Zululand  until  it  was  ultimately  relieved  six  months  later 
after  the  battle  of  Ulundi.  The  main  body  under  Lord 
Chelmsford  advanced  in  a  north-westerly  direction  until 
camp  was  formed  at  Isandlhwana.  On  the  22nd  of 
January  Lord  Chelmsford  again  advanced,  intending  to 
select  a  fresh  position,  leaving  in  camp  a  force  of  700 
British  and  colonial,  and  600  native  troops.  The  Zulus, 
15,000  strong,  evaded  Lord  Chelmsford's  force,  and  ad- 
vanced in  crescent  shaped  formation  upon  the  camp  at 
Isandlhwana.  Before  the  horns  of  the  impi  united  forty 
Europeans  escaped.  Two  officers,  lieutenants  Melvill 
and  Coghill,  made  a  gallant  attempt  to  save  the  colours 
of  the  24th  ;  but  they  were  pursued  and  overtaken  at  the 
Buffalo  River.  The  rest  fought  as  long  as  their  ammuni- 
tion lasted  —  and  then  they  died.  After  the  force  at 
Isandlhwana  had  been  destroyed,  4000  Zulus  advanced 
to  Rorke's  Drift,  to  occupy  the  ford  by  which  the  Buffalo 
River  could  be  crossed  and  Natal  entered.  Fortunately 
a  small  force,  rather  more  than  100  men  of  the  24th, 
under  lieutenants  Chard  and  Bromhead,  had  been  left 
at  Rorke's  Drift.  They  occupied  a  mission  house  which 
they  strengthened  by  biscuit  tins  and  bags  of  mealies. 
Behind  this  defence  they  offered  so  strenuous  a  resistance 
that  the  Zulus  were  compelled  to  retire  without  seizing 
the  position,  and  Natal  was  saved  from  immediate  invasion. 
Lord  Chelmsford  then  fell  back  upon  his  base  in 
Natal,  and  waited  for  reinforcements.  Ultimately  he 
advanced  again  into  Zululand,  and  on  the  4th  of  July 
he  engaged  the  enemy  at  Ulundi.  The  force  under  his 
command  amounted  to  4000  British  and  colonial  troops 
and  1000  natives:  the  number  of  the  Zulus  in  action  he 
estimated  at  20,000.  On  the  6th  of  July  he  was  able  to 
report  *  to  the  Secretary  for  War,  that  he  felt  he  had  a 
•  C— 2482. 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  55 

right  to  say  "  that  the  result  of  Ulundi  would  be  sufificient 
to  dispel  the  idea  that  Ketshwayo  could  defeat  British 
troops  in  the  open  from  the  minds  of  the  Zulu  nation, 
and  of  every  other  tribe  in  South  Africa  for  ever."  On 
27th  August  Lord  Wolseley,  who  had  superseded  Lord 
Chelmsford  immediately  after  Ulundi,  reported  *  that, 
"  with  the  exception  of  the  north-western  corner  inhabited 
by  Makuluni,  the  whole  of  Zululand  might  now  be  con- 
sidered safe  for  the  smallest  parties  of  Europeans."  And 
on  12  th  December  he  again  reported  f  to  the  Secretary 
for  the  Colonies  that  "the  force  under  Colonel  Baker 
Russell's  command  had  stormed  and  taken  Sikukuni's 
stronghold"  on  the  28th  of  November. 

Since  that  time  the  supremacy  of  the  European  race 
has  not  been  seriously  contested  in  South  Africa. 

The  subjugation  of  the  Bantu — that  which  had  been 
a  condition  precedent  to  the  union  of  the  South  African 
Colonies  and  States — was  now  accomplished,  and  Sir 
Bartle  Frere  was  able  to  resume  the  work  which  he  was 
specially  commissioned  to  carry  out. 

In  the  meantime  a  new  factor  had  been  introduced 
into  the  already  complicated  problem  of  South  African 
politics.  After  the  disaster  of  Isandlhwana,  cable  com- 
munication had  been  established  with  England.  The 
unhappy  notoriety  which  the  country  acquired  in  the 
Zulu  war  had  rendered  the  English  public  more  familiar 
with  the  affairs  of  South  Africa,  and  the  comments  and 
opinions  of  the  leaders  of  the  two  great  parties  were 
quickly  reproduced  in  the  colonial  papers  by  means  of 
the  telegraph.  In  order  to  trace  the  effect  produced  by 
the  play  of  English  party  politics  upon  the  measures  taken 
to  forward  South  African  federation,  it  is  necessary  to  go 
back  for  a  moment  to  the  affairs  of  the  Transvaal. 

The  annexation,  accomplished  in  April  1877,  as  already 
related,  was  welcome  enough   to  the  inhabitants  of  the 
*  Idem.  +  C— 2505. 


56  SOUTH  AFRICA 

towns,  who  were  for  the  most  part  of  English  or  German 
origin,  but  it  was  resisted  from  the  first  by  the  farmers 
— that  is  to  say,  by  the  actual  Boer  population.  Delegates 
from  the  Volksraad  were  at  once  despatched  to  the 
Colonial  Office  to  ask  for  the  restoration  of  independence. 
This  delegation,  and  a  second  delegation  which  visited 
England  in  the  following  year,  were  alike  unsuccessful ; 
but  towards  the  end  of  1879,  the  year  of  the  Zulu  war, 
a  ray  of  light  came  from  an  unexpected  quarter.  In  the 
autumn  of  that  year  Mr  Gladstone  embarked  upon  his 
Midlothian  Campaign.  In  one  of  the  speeches  in  which 
he  arraigned  Lord  Beaconsfield's  administration,  he  spoke 
in  terms  of  frank  condemnation  of  the  annexation  of  the 
Transvaal.  In  February  of  the  following  year,  1880, 
an  address,*  signed  by  the  Africander  population  in  the 
Cape  Colony,  was  forwarded  to  Mr  Gladstone ;  and  in 
this  address  he  was  asked  to  use  his  influence  on  behalf 
of  the  restoration  of  the  independence  of  the  Transvaal. 
In  April  of  that  year  the  Liberal  party  came  into  power, 
but  Mr  Gladstone  then  informed  a  further  delegation  that 
he  was  unable  to  advise  the  Queen  to  withdraw  the 
British  Government  from  their  country.  At  the  same 
time  the  Boer  leaders,  Messrs  Kruger  and  Joubert,  had 
received  assurances  of  sympathy  from  private  members 
of  the  Liberal  party,  and  on  their  return  to  South  Africa 
they  resolved  to  commence  an  agitation  in  the  Cape 
Colony.  It  was  just  then — at  the  opening  of  the  winter 
session  of  the  Cape  Parliament — that  the  proposals  of 
the  Cape  Ministry  for  a  Federation  Conference  were 
brought  before  the  Cape  Parliament.  The  Boer  delegates, 
acting  under  the  advice  of  the  leaders  of  the  Africander 
opposition,  obtained  promises  of  support  from  the 
members  who  represented  Africander  constituencies. 
These  members  agreed  to  oppose  the  Federation  pro- 
posals of  Sir  Gordon  Sprigg's  ministry  on  the  ground 
*  Enclosed  in  Despatch,  March  8th,  1880.     C— 2695. 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  57 

that  the  question  of  Transvaal  independence  ought  to 
precede  the  question  of  South  African  Union.  After  a 
prolonged  debate  the  Ministry  ultimately  avoided  defeat 
by  withdrawing  their  Conference  proposals  on  June  29th, 
1880.  As  soon  as  the  despatches  containing  reports  of 
the  debates  in  the  Cape  Parliament,  and  information  of 
the  virtual  defeat  of  the  Colonial  Ministry  on  the  Federa- 
tion question  reached  England,  Lord  Kimberley,  the 
new  Secretary  of  State  for  the  Colonies,  at  once  tele- 
graphed to  Sir  Bartle  Frere  that  the  Government  had 
advised  the  Queen  to  replace  him  by  another  Governor.* 

The  news  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere's  recall  (Note  1 4)  produced 
a  very  general  and  a  very  sincere  expression  of  regret.  Ad- 
dresses containing  such  opinions  were  forwarded  from  all 
parts  of  the  Cape  Colony.  Judged  by  the  test  of  "  interests 
involved,"  no  community  was  better  able  to  pronounce  an 
opinion  on  the  merits  or  demerits  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere's 
administration  than  the  inhabitants  of  the  Albany  district. 
The  verdict  of  Albany  was  clear  and  unmistakeable  : — 

"  Never  did  colonial  governor  find  himself  at  the  very 
outset  of  his  duties  confronted  with  so  many  and  such 
startling  difficulties  as  met  you  soon  after  you  reached 
our  shores.  Never  did  governor  more  effectually  grasp 
the  situation,  and  more  successfully  deal  with  these 
difficulties  than  you  did.  You  carried  the  Galeka  war, 
...  to  a  successful  issue.  .  .  . 

"  We  have  watched  with  the  most  anxious  interest  your 
career  during  that  eventful  period  when  the  affairs  of  the 
neighbouring  colony  of  Natal  were  administered  by  you  ; 
we  perfectly  understand  that  at  that  crisis  the  deep-laid 
plans  and  cruel  purposes  of  the  savage  and  bloodthirsty 
King  of  the  Zulus  were  just  reaching  their  full  develop- 
ment, and  that  his  inevitable  and  long-effected  encounter 
with  the  British  power  could  no  longer  be  averted  ;  it 
was,  no  doubt,  unfortunate  for  your  personal  convenience 
•  C-265S. 


58  SOUTH  AFRICA 

at  the  present  time ;  it  would  appear  also  to  have  been 
temporarily  unfortunate  for  your  reputation,  but  it  was 
extremely  fortunate  for  that  colony,  and  for  the  honour 
of  the  British  name,  that  you  were  on  the  spot  ready  to 
sacrifice  every  personal  consideration,  and  to  undertake 
one  of  the  heaviest  and  most  tremendous  responsibilities 
ever  undertaken  by  servant  of  the  Crown.  Your  excellent 
plans,  your  steady  determination,  your  unflagging  perse- 
verance, led  to  the  downfall  of  a  barbarous  tyrant,  the 
break-up  of  a  most  formidable  and  unwarrantable  military 
power,  and  the  establishment  of  peaceful  relations,  which, 
properly  managed,  might  have  ensured  the  lasting  peace 
and  prosperity  which  you  have  systematically  desired  to 
secure  for  South  Africa."  * 

Meanwhile  the  Boer  leaders,  Messrs  Kruger  and 
Joubert,  were  writing  to  their  sympathisers  in  England, 
"The  fall  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere  will  be  .  .  useful." t  It 
is  a  significant  fact  that  the  letter  in  which  this  sentence 
occurs  was  dated  June  26th,  that  is  to  say,  three  days 
before  the  actual  decision  of  the  Cape  Parliament  (June 
29th).  It  is  significant,  because  it  shows  to  how  large  an 
extent  the  defeat  of  the  colonial  ministry,  and  the  failure 
of  Sir  Bartle  Frere  to  carry  through  the  South  African 
federation,  was  due  to  the  fact  that  it  was  known  in  the 
colony  that  he — the  governor  of  the  colony — was  deprived 
by  a  swing  of  the  political  pendulum  of  the  support  of 
his  official  superiors,  and — what  was  still  more  important — 
of  the  support  of  public  opinion  in  England. 

I  do  not  think  there  is  a  more  painful  record  in  the 
annals  of  colonial  administration  than  this  story  of  the 
abandonment  and  betrayal  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere. 

We  need  not  trouble  ourselves  with  the  reproofs  ad- 
ministered from  Downing  Street,  with  the  complaint  that 
he  had  exceeded  the  letter  of  his  instructions  in  not 
referring  to  the  Imperial  Government  before  he  sent 
*  C-2740.  t  C-2655. 


SIR  BARTLE  FRERE  AND  CONFEDERATION  59 

what  was  practically  an  ultimatum  to  the  Zulu  king. 
Sir  George  Grey,  who  had  anticipated  Frere  in  the 
circumstances  of  his  own  recall,  had  also  provided  a 
sufficient  answer  to  this  and  similar  complaints,  when, 
twenty  years  before,  he  penned  the  indignant  question  : — * 

"  Can  a  man  who,  on  a  distant  and  exposed  frontier, 
surrounded  by  difficulties,  with  invasions  of  Her  Majesty's 
territories  threatening  on  several  points,  assumes  a  re- 
sponsibility which  he  guided  by  many  circumstances  which 
he  can  neither  record  nor  remember  as  they  came  hurry- 
ing on  one  after  the  other,  be  fairly  judged  of  in  respect  to 
the  amount  of  responsibility  he  assumes  by  those  who,  in 
the  quiet  of  distant  offices  in  London,  know  nothing  of  the 
anxieties  or  nature  of  the  difficulties  he  had  to  encounter  ?  " 

But  how  was  England  misled  ?  How  was  it  that 
England  was  thus  unjust  to  the  man,  who  was,  after  all, 
only  faithfully  and  skilfully  discharging  the  duties  of  his 
office  ?  Sir  Bartle  Frere  was  in  no  way  responsible 
for  any  military  error.  The  disaster  of  Isandlhwana,  by 
which  he  was  discredited,  was  in  reality  the  clearest  evidence 
of  his  foresight,  and  the  most  complete  justification  of  his 
action  ;  for  a  barbarous  power,  which  could  annihilate  a 
British  regiment  in  the  open,  was  obviously  no  safe  neigh- 
bour for  Natal ;  and  what  security  could  there  be  for  the 
400,000  Europeans  in  South  Africa  so  long  as  the 
absolute  master  of  that  power  entertained  the  design,  or 
even  believed  in  the  possibility  of  uniting  the  3,000,000 
Bantu  in  a  war  of  race  ? 

There  is  an  explanation  which  lies  ready  to  hand.  We  can 
turn  to  that  storehouse  of  political  experience,  the  literature 
of  ancient  Greece,  and  read  in  the  pages  of  the  historian  of 
Athens  the  comprehensive  verdict,  "  a  Democracy  is  in- 
capable of  Empire." 

But  is  this  sufficient  ?     Is  it  sufficient  for  us  who  believe 
that  a  democracy  is  capable  of  empire,  of  an  empire  with 
*  •'  Correspondence,"  etc.,  printed  April  17th,  i860,  p.  26. 


6o  SOUTH  AFRICA 

wider  boundaries  and  higher  aims  than  any  empire  yet 
recorded  in  history  ?  I  think  not.  I  think  we  shall  seek 
for  a  temporary  disorder  before  we  admit  the  existence  of 
an  incurable  malady  in  the  body  politic. 

At  the  time  that  this  blow  fell  England  had  lately  stood 
face  to  face  with  her  great  world-rival  Russia  ;  and  in  the 
moment  of  that  ordeal  she  had  realised,  as  she  had  never 
realised  before,  the  dignity  and  the  responsibility  of  her 
Imperial  position.  What  wonder  if,  at  such  a  time,  when 
the  multitudinous  interests  of  an  empire  in  four  continents 
were  crowding  upon  her,  England  forgot  the  suspended 
union  of  South  Africa,  forgot  the  deadly  peril  of  Natal, 
forgot  the  iniquitous  system  by  which  a  whole  people  had 
been  converted  into  a  man-slaying  machine,  forgot  that 
Ketshwayo  was  the  grandson  of  Tshaka,  and  knew  only  that 
a  British  regiment  had  been  sacrificed  to  a  barbarous  enemy. 

Was  it  strange,  too,  if  England  in  her  vexation  and  alarm 

did  not  discriminate  too  nicely  in  visiting  her  displeasure  ? 

"  Yes,  we  arraign  her,  but  she, 
The  weary  Titan,  with  deaf 
Ears,  and  labour-dimmed  eyes. 
Regarding  neither  to  right 
Nor  left,  goes  passively  by, 
Staggering  on  to  her  goal  ; 
Bearing  on  shoulders  immense, 
Atlantean,  the  load, 
Well  nigh  not  to  be  borne. 
Of  the  too  vast  orb  of  her  fate." 

And  the  remedy  ?  It  lies  in  the  creation  of  a  central 
authority  which  shall  embody  the  consolidated  resources  of 
the  empire.  Such  an  authority  must  include  represen- 
tatives from  every  province  of  the  empire,  that  so  it  may  be 
informed  with  equal  exactness  of  the  necessities  of  each 
component  part,  and  control  without  dispute  the  Imperial 
exchequer  formed  by  their  united  contributions.  Entrusted 
to  such  an  authority,  we  may  hope  that  an  Imperial  policy 
will  at  length  be  unaffected  by  the  side  issues  of  party  politics, 
and  unrestricted  by  the  exigences  of  national  finance. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

The  Boers. 

EARLY  in  the  year  1881  Englishmen  were  startled  by 
the  receipt  of  strange  intelligence.  The  garrisons  in 
the  Transvaal  had  been  surrounded  and  isolated  by 
insurgents.  On  the  20th  of  December  a  detachment  of 
the  94th,  more  than  250  strong,  marching  from  Lydenburg 
to  Pretoria,  were  attacked  in  a  narrow  defile,  Bronkhorst 
Spruit ;  the  commanding  officer  and  fifty-four  men  were 
killed,  seven  officers  and  ninety-one  men  were  wounded, 
and  the  rest  were  taken  prisoners.  At  the  end  of  January 
General  CoUey,  who  was  in  command  of  the  troops  in 
Natal,  advanced  to  the  relief  of  the  garrisons  in  the  Trans- 
vaal. He  found  that  his  way  was  barred.  Lang's  Nek, 
at  the  entrance  of  the  pass  over  the  Drakensberg  leading 
from  Natal  to  the  Transvaal,  had  been  occupied  by  the 
insurgents.  The  attack  made  by  the  force  under  General 
Colley,  1 100  strong,  on  the  28th  of  January,  was  repulsed 
with  heavy  loss.  Colonel  Deane  and  all  the  staff  and 
mounted  officers  were  shot  down,  and  190  rank  and  file 
were  reported  as  dead,  wounded,  or  missing.  Ten  days 
later,  on  the  8th  of  February,  as  General  Colley  was 
patrolling  the  road  to  Newcastle  with  a  force  of  300  men, 
in  order  to  maintain  his  line  of  communication  between 
that  place  and  the  camp  at  Mount  Prospect,  he  was 
attacked  at  Ingogo  Heights.  In  this  engagement  four 
officers  were  killed,  and  three  were  wounded,  and  150  men 
were  reported  killed  or  wounded.  But  the  crowning 
disaster  was  still  to  come.     On  the  night  of  the  26th  of 

61 


62  SOUTH  AFRICA 

February,  General  CoUey  left  the  camp  at  Mount  Prospect 
with  600  men,  intending  to  turn  the  insurgents'  position  at 
Lang's  Nek  by  occupying  Majuba  Hill,  an  eminence  which 
commanded  the  Boer  lines.  He  detached  part  of  this 
force  to  maintain  communication  with  the  camp,  and 
posted  the  remainder,  some  400  men,  on  the  level  top. 
The  next  morning,  when  the  Boer  leaders  saw  that  the  level 
plateau  of  Majuba  was  fringed  with  redcoats,  they  at  once 
realised  the  significance  of  the  movement.  One  hundred  and 
fifty  volunteers  offered  to  make  an  attempt,  which  seemed 
hopeless  enough,  to  scale  the  hill  and  dislodge  the  English. 
At  four  o'clock  it  was  known  at  Mount  Prospect  that  the 
Boers  had  carried  the  hill  soon  after  mid-day.  It  was 
subsequently  ascertained  that  General  Colley  was  shot  in 
fighting  line  with  two  officers  close  by  him,  that  ninety-two 
men  had  been  killed  and  200  wounded  and  captured. 

In  these  and  some  minor  engagements  as  many  as  800 
English  officers  and  men  had  been  killed  or  wounded.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  Boers  had  lost  eighteen  men  killed  and 
thirty-three  wounded. 

And  who,  then,  were  these  Boers,  and  what  were  their 
circumstances  ? 

The  replies  elicited  by  these  enquiries  heightened  the 
extraordinary  character  of  the  intelligence,  and  increased 
the  bewilderment  of  the  public.  For  it  appeared  that  the 
enemy  which  had  inflicted  these  successive  and  severe 
defeats  upon  the  British  arms  were  the  burgher  force  of 
a  community  of  farmers — a  community  numbering  only 
50,000  inhabitants,  that  is  to  say,  with  a  population 
smaller  than  that  of  an  English  town  of  the  third  rank. 
Their  present  circumstances,  the  actual  grounds  of  their 
quarrel  with  the  Imperial  Government,  were  imperfectly 
understood.  What  their  previous  relationship  to  England 
had  been,  how  they  came  to  be  in  possession  of  a  country 
scarcely  less  in  area  than  the  United  Kingdom,  and 
shrewdly  guessed  to  be  the  most  valuable  in  South  Africa, 


THE  BOERS  63 

above  all,  what  was  the  special  experience  which  had  made 
them  such  daring  patriots,  such  intrepid  foes,  and  such 
consummate  marksmen — on  all  these  points  the  public 
were  profoundly  ignorant,  and,  before  they  had  time  to 
inform  themselves,  the  armistice  of  the  7  th  of  March  was 
succeeded  by  the  cessation  of  hostilities  on  the  23rd,  and 
the  Transvaal  war  had  become  a  thing  of  the  past. 

This  interesting  and  neglected  chapter  of  South  African 
history  now  claims  our  attention. 

The  events  which  led  to  the  great  emigration  of  1835- 
1838,  when  10,000  Dutch  farmers  left  the  Cape  Colony 
and  passed  into  the  interior,  have  already  been  related, 
and  a  mention  of  the  bare  heads  under  which  those  events 
can  be  grouped  will  be  sufficient  to  recall  the  circumstances. 
There  were  the  injudicious  measures  which  accompanied 
the  Anglicising  of  the  Colony  ;  there  was  the  indiscreet 
interference  of  the  missionaries  and  the  odium  cast  by  the 
philanthropic  societies  in  England  upon  the  Dutch  popu- 
lation at  the  Cape ;  there  were  the  direct  and  indirect 
losses  occasioned  by  the  emancipation  of  slaves ;  and, 
lastly,  there  was  the  reversal  by  the  Imperial  Government 
of  Sir  Benjamin  Durban's  measures  for  the  protection  of 
the  eastern  settlers  from  future  Kafir  inroads.  To  these 
must  be  added  two  subsidiary  causes  :  the  depopulation  of 
large  areas  in  the  interior  by  the  murderous  wars  of  Tshaka 
and  Moselekatse,  and  the  northward  flow  of  the  Europeans. 
The  first  of  these  has  been  already  described,  but  the 
second  needs  some  brief  explanation.  The  northward 
expansion  of  the  whites  (contrasting  with  the  southward 
flow  of  the  Bantu)  is  as  noticeable  a  feature  in  South 
African  colonisation  as  the  eastward  expansion  is  in  North 
America.  It  is  due  to  two  simple  and  easily  understood 
causes  :  the  unproductiveness  of  the  soil  and  the  unpro- 
gressiveness  of  the  Boer,  or  South  African  farmer.  The 
joint  result  of  these  two  causes  may  be  stated  to  be  this  :  — 
each  son  in  a  Boer  family  requires  just  as  much  land  for 


64  SOUTH  AFRICA 

his  support  as  his  father  has  held  before  him.  This  north- 
ward expansion  commenced  at  the  beginning  of  the 
century.  Some  European  half-castes,  uniting  with  the 
Mantatees,  produced  the  Griquas,  and  this  race  subse- 
quently occupied  lands  near  the  confluence  of  the  Vaal 
and  Orange  Rivers.  The  colonists  maintained  intercourse 
with  the  Griquas,  and  early  in  the  century  the  eastern 
graziers,  discovering  that,  owing  to  the  more  constant  rain- 
fall, the  pastures  were  more  fertile  in  these  districts  than 
in  the  colony,  began  to  make  a  practice  of  driving  their 
cattle  across  the  Orange  River  at  certain  seasons  of  the 
year.  They  had,  however,  no  intention  of  leaving  the 
colony ;  on  the  contrary,  they  returned  and  paid  their 
opgaaf,  or  annual  assessed  taxes,  as  regularly  as  before. 
At  the  time  of  the  emigration,  therefore,  the  eastern 
farmers  had  in  this  way  become  acquainted  with 
part  of  the  country  between  the  Orange  and  Vaal 
Rivers. 

The  first  party  of  emigrants,  one  hundred  in  number, 
left  the  colony  in  the  year  1835.  They  made  their  way 
to  the  extreme  north-east  of  the  Transvaal.  There  they 
divided  into  two  parties.  One  of  these  parties  was  at- 
tacked and  almost  entirely  destroyed  by  the  natives.  The 
survivors  of  the  other  party,  after  enduring  extremes  of 
famine  and  fever,  reached  Delagoa  Bay,  and  eventually 
sailed  to  Natal.  In  August  of  the  next  year  (1836)  a 
party  of  two  hundred  emigrants,  under  Hendrik  Potgieter, 
crossed  the  Orange  River  and  reached  Thaba  N'chu  on 
the  north  bank  of  the  River  Caledon.  Here  they  were 
received  willingly  enough  by  a  Barolong  chief,  Maroko  ; 
and  from  this  point  they  advanced  northwards  and  formed 
encampments  on  the  south  bank  of  the  Vaal.  Hendrik 
Potgieter  and  a  small  party  of  men  then  crossed  the 
Vaal,  and  explored  the  country  further  north.  On  their 
return  they  found  that  their  encampments  had  been  at- 
tacked   by   the    Matebeles    under    Moselekatse,   and    that 


THE  BOERS  65 

twenty-five  European  men  and  women  had  been  murdered. 
Potgieter  at  once  went  into  "  laager  "  *  on  a  suitable  hill, 
Vecht  Kop,  and  there  awaited  a  fresh  onslaught.  Be- 
hind the  waggons  the  men  shot  straight  and  quick,  and 
their  mothers  and  wives  loaded  the  guns.  The  Matabele 
were  repulsed,  but  they  carried  off  all  the  emigrants' 
sheep  and  cattle.  The  party  was  now  in  great  peril,  for 
they  had  no  oxen  to  yoke  into  their  waggons,  and 
therefore  could  not  retreat.  Ultimately  they  managed 
to  communicate  with  Maroko ;  and  this  chief,  and  Mr 
Archbell,  a  missionary,  sent  friendly  natives  with  oxen 
to  their  assistance  ;  and  in  this  manner  they  were  able 
to  retire  to  Thaba  N'chu. 

Meanwhile  a  larger  company,  headed  by  Gert  Marritz, 
starting  from  Graaf  Reinet,  and  other  companies  from 
Uitenage  and  Albany,  had  crossed  the  Orange  River. 
The  emigrants  were  now  strong  enough  to  attack  Mosele- 
katse.  A  commando  of  200  men,  under  the  leadership 
of  Marritz,  crossed  the  Vaal  River,  and  recovered  some 
waggons  and  7000  head  of  cattle.  At  the  same  time 
the  position  of  the  emigrants  was  so  perilous  that  many 
of  them  began  to  entertain  the  idea  of  returning  to  the 
colony.  It  was  just  at  this  crisis  that  they  were  joined 
by  Pieter  Retief.  Retief  was  a  colonist  of  Huguenot 
extraction.  He  had  held  a  command  under  the  Colonial 
Government,  but  he  had  suffered  severely  from  the  Kafir 
invasion  of  1834-5,  and  he  had  been  censured  for  some 
measures  which  he  took  for  the  restraint  of  Hottentot 
vagrants.  So  he  resolved  to  throw  in  his  lot  with  the 
emigrants,  and  sold  his  property.     On  Retiefs  arrival  a 

*  "  These  '  laagers,'  or  camps,  were  formed  by  their  waggons  being 
brought  up  into  a  square,  the  poles  and  waggon  gear  of  one  waggon 
being  firmly  secured  under  the  perch  of  the  next  waggon  ;  and  when 
time  admitted  branches  of  the  thorny  mimosas  were  also  wattled  in 
under  each  waggon,  so  that  no  entrance  could  be  effected  into  the 
enclosure  without  forcibly  tearing  up  all  these  impediments." — Cloete, 
iii.  p.  77. 

B 


66  SOUTH  AFRICA 

government  was  organised.  The  emigrants  assembled  at 
Winburg.  A  constitution  was  drawn  up  on  June  6th, 
1837,  and  Retief  was  elected  Commandant-General.  At 
the  same  time  some  of  the  emigrants  expressed  the 
opinion  that  Natal  would  be  a  more  suitable  country 
for  settlement  than  the  Orange  River  district,  and  Retief 
himself  favoured  the  opinion.  He  determined,  how- 
ever, before  deciding  to  lead  the  emigrants  across  the 
Drakensberg,  to  himself  visit  Dingan,  the  Zulu  king, 
and  ascertain  whether  Dingan  would  cede  Natal.  While 
he  was  absent  on  this  mission  a  second  commando,  con- 
sisting of  135  mounted  men  and  some  friendly  natives, 
was  organised  by  Potgieter  and  Jacobus  Uys.  After  nine 
days'  desperate  fighting  the  Matabele  were  so  severely 
punished  that  Moselekatse  retired  to  the  north  of  the 
Transvaal,  and  ultimately  crossed  the  Limpopo.  There 
he  attacked  the  Mashonas,  and  after  depopulating  the 
southern  portion  of  their  country,  settled  with  his  people 
in  the  district  now  called  Matabeleland. 

Retief  found  that  Dingan  was  willing  to  allow  the 
emigrant  farmers  to  settle  in  Natal ;  and,  early  in  the 
next  year  (1838),  he  led  a  large  company  across  the 
Drakensberg.  They  formed  encampments  on  the  Blue 
Krans  River ;  and  then  Retief,  with  a  party  of  seventy 
Europeans  and  thirty  natives,  proceeded  to  Dingan's 
capital,  Umkungunhlovu,  to  arrange  for  the  formal  cession 
of  the  country.  On  the  4th  of  February  a  deed  of 
cession,  which  had  been  drawn  up  in  English  by  a 
missionary  named  Owen,  residing  there,  was  read  to 
Dingan.  He  expressed  himself  as  satisfied  with  its  terms, 
and  affixed  his  mark  to  it.  On  the  following  morning 
the  emigrants  were  informed  that  Dingan  wished  them 
to  drink  beer  in  the  royal  hut  before  they  set  out  on  their 
homeward  journey.  Retief  and  his  companions,  having 
no  suspicion  of  treachery,  left  their  guns  at  the  entrance 
of  the  hut.     When   they  had    entered    Dingan   suddenly 


THE  BOERS  67 

bade  his  guards  seize  them.  The  whole  party  were  at 
once  led  to  the  place  of  execution,  and  barbarously 
murdered.  This  order  was  followed  by  another.  Ten 
regiments  were  bidden  to  advance  without  delay  against 
the  encampments,  and  destroy  them.  The  nearest  party 
of  emigrants  were  murdered — men,  women  and  children 
— with  the  exception  of  one  young  man  who  was  herding 
cattle  at  a  distance  from  the  waggons.  This  single  sur- 
vivor was  able  to  warn  the  more  distant  parties,  and  these 
latter  were  able  to  go  into  laager  before  the  Zulus  came 
upon  them.  The  Zulus  were  unable  to  force  the  laagers, 
but  they  destroyed,  or  rather  massacred,  600  Europeans 
and  natives  before  they  retired. 

Meanwhile  Uys  had  reached  the  Drakensberg  with  a 
second  party,  and  was  preparing  to  descend  into  Natal. 
Both  he  and  Potgieter  collected  fighting  men,  and  hastened 
to  assist  the  emigrants  at  the  Blue  Krans  River.  Subse- 
quently a  force  of  1500  natives,  headed  by  17  Englishmen 
from  Durban,  and  a  commando  of  350  farmers,  crossed  the 
Tugela,  and  attacked  Dingan.  Both  of  these  forces  were 
defeated,  and  Natal  was  again  overrun  by  the  Zulus. 
The  English  settlers  *  at  Durban  were  forced  to  take 
refuge  on  board  the  Comet,  a  man-of-war  which  was 
fortunately  anchored  in  the  bay ;  the  emigrants  defended 
themselves  successfully  behind  their  waggons.  After  the 
Zulus  had  again  retired,  the  emigrants  remained  in  a 
position  of  great  danger  until  the  month  of  November, 
when  they  were  joined  by  Andries  Pretorius,  and  a  force 
of  450  men  collected  in  the  Orange  River  districts. 
Pretorius  was,  like  Retief,  a  man  of  higher  social  grade, 
and  he  at  once  assumed  a  commanding  position  among 
the   emigrants.     He   had   resolved,   moreover,   to  avenge 

*  Natal  was  colonised  under  a  concession  from  Tshaka  by  English- 
men as  early  as  1825.  In  1835  the  settlers  petitioned  that  their 
settlement  at  Durban  might  be  called  "Victoria,"  and  taken  under 
the  protection  of  the  Imperial  Government. 


68  SOUTH  AFRICA 

his  people.  He  crossed  the  Tugela  with  the  force  he 
had  collected,  and  advanced  carefully,  laagering  at  every 
stage,  until  he  arrived  at  the  neighbourhood  of  Dingan's 
capital.  Then  Dingan  let  loose  all  his  regiments  upon 
the  farmers'  camp.  On  the  evening  of  the  i6th  December, 
ever  afterwards  celebrated  by  the  Boers  as  Dingan's  day, 
3000  Zulus  lay  dead  outside  the  waggons,  but  within 
only  four  men  had  died  of  their  wounds.  Then  Dingan 
was  seized  with  terror.  He  set  fire  to  his  town,  and 
retreated  to  the  north.  From  among  the  smoking  ruins 
of  Umkungunhlovu  Pretorius  carried  back  Retief's  skull, 
and  the  actual  deed  of  cession  with  Dingan's  mark  upon 
it* 

When  Pretorius  returned  with  these  melancholy  relics 
to  his  people  in  Natal,  he  found  that  Durban,  the  port, 
had  been  occupied  by  a  military  force  under  Major 
Charters.  The  emigrants  in  the  interior,  however,  were 
not  interfered  with  by  the  soldiers,  and  in  the  spring 
of  1839  Pietermaritzburg,  the  present  capital  of  Natal, 
was  laid  out  by  them.  In  September  they  were  joined 
by  an  important  ally.  Dingan  had  quarrelled  with  Panda, 
his  half-brother,  and  this  Panda  had  withdrawn  with  a 
large  following,  and  now  offered  his  services  to  the  emi- 
grants. In  January  of  the  next  year,  1840,  Panda  ad- 
vanced into  Zululand,  supported  by  a  force  of  emigrants 
under  Pretorius.  In  the  battle  which  followed  Dingan  was 
ultimately  but  decisively  defeated.  He  fled  to  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  Delagoa  Bay,  and  was  there  murdered.  On  the 
14th  of  February  Pretorius  issued  a  proclamation  in  which 
he,  as  "  Commandant-General  of  the  Right  Worshipful 
Volksraad  of  the  South  African  Society  of  Port  Natal," 
in  the  first  place  declared  Panda  King  of  the  Zulus  in 
succession  to  Dingan  ;  and,  secondly,  claimed  possession 
of  the  whole  of  Natal  by  right  of  conquest.     Just  at  this 

*  "This  deed  was  delivered  over  to  me  by  the  Volksraad  in  1843,  and 
is  in  the  archives  of  the  Colonial  Office." — Cloete,  p.  94. 


THE  BOERS  69 

time  the  British  force,  a  detachment  of  the  92nd  regiment, 
was  withdrawn  by  Sir  George  Napier,  who  was  then 
Governor  of  the  Cape  Colony,  in  pursuance  of  instruc- 
tions received  from  the  Home  Government. 

Although  Sir  George  Napier  declined  to  make  any 
formal  acknowledgment  of  the  existence  of  the  settlement, 
the  emigrants  had  now  practically  achieved  their  inde- 
pendence. Towards  the  end  of  the  year  1840,  however, 
Pretorius  committed  an  act  not  only  of  extreme  barbarity, 
but  of  extreme  folly.  He  attacked  a  chief,  N'capai  by 
name,  who  lived  200  miles  from  Natal,  on  the  border 
of  the  Cape  Colony.  Pretorius  killed  N'capai's  people, 
captured  his  cattle,  and  carried  off  seventeen  young 
children  into  slavery.  Sir  George  Napier  then  sent  a 
force  of  250  infantry  to  the  Umgazi  River,  to  watch 
the  movements  of  the  emigrants,  and  to  prevent  any 
further  expeditions  against  the  natives.  At  the  same 
time  he  applied  to  the  Home  Government  for  instructions. 
Ultimately  the  Imperial  Government  decided  to  occupy 
Natal ;  and  in  pursuance  of  a  despatch,  written  by  the 
then  Lord  Stanley  on  the  13th  December  1842,  Mr 
Cloete  arrived  as  British  Commissioner  at  Durban  on 
the  I  St  of  May  1843,  ^"d  a  permanent  administration 
was  established.  In  the  years  1846  and  1847,  the  bulk 
of  the  emigrants  withdrew  from  Natal,  some  to  the  Orange 
River  district  and  some  to  the  Transvaal.  They  had 
a  very  simple  reason  for  withdrawing.  A  land  court 
had  been  established,  and  they  were  dissatisfied  with 
the  amount  of  land  assigned  to  the  Europeans,  both 
collectively  and  individually.  They  objected  to  the  appor- 
tionment of  any  part  of  Natal  to  the  Bantu,  for  they 
regarded  the  whole  country  as  belonging  to  them  by 
right  of  conquest,  and  at  the  same  time  the  possession 
of  a  large  area  of  land  was,  as  I  have  already  pointed 
out,  necessary  for  the  very  existence  of  the  Boer. 

The  subsequent  history  of  the  emigrants  in  the  Orange 


70  SOUTH  AFRICA 

River  district  and  beyond  the  Vaal  has  already  been 
related  as  part  of  the  main  stream  of  South  African 
history.  It  will,  however,  be  convenient  at  this  point 
to  consider  in  a  connected  form  the  main  acts  and 
measures  which  indicate  the  varying  relationship  main- 
tained by  the  Imperial  Government  to  the  Boers. 

The  first  military  occupation  of  Durban  was  made  under 
a  proclamation  of  Sir  George  Napier,  dated  November 
14th  1838.  The  object  of  that  occupation  was  there 
stated  to  be : — "  To  put  an  end  to  the  unwarranted 
occupation  of  the  territories  belonging  to  the  natives, 
by  certain  emigrants,  from  the  Cape  Colony,  being  sub- 
jects of  Her  Majesty." 

The  same  principle  appears  in  the  reply  which  Sir 
George  Napier  made  to  the  communication  of  the  Volks- 
raad  of  "  the  South  African  Society  of  Port  Natal," 
forwarded  in  January  1841,  and  containing  a  request 
for  an  acknowledgment  of  independence  and  a  com- 
mercial treaty.  Sir  George  Napier  then  said  : — "  That 
Her  Majesty  could  not  acknowledge  the  independence 
of  her  own  subjects,  but  that  the  trade  of  the  emigrant 
farmers  would  be  placed  on  the  same  footing  as  that  of 
any  other  British  settlement,  upon  their  receiving  a 
military  force  to  exclude  the  interference  with,  or  the 
possession  of,  the  country  by  any  other  European  power." 

The  emigrants  on  receipt  of  this  communication  issued 
a  fresh  declaration  of  their  independence  as  "  Dutch 
South  Africans."  Sir  George  Napier  then  announced,  by 
proclamation  of  2nd  December  1841,  his  intention  "of 
resuming  the  military  occupation  of  Natal." 

Lord  Stanley's  despatch  (already  mentioned)  contained 
definite  instructions  as  to  the  nature  of  the  administration 
which  was  to  be  established  over  the  emigrants. 

The  Commissioner  was  directed  to  call  the  inhabitants 
together,  and  give  them  an  opportunity  of  stating  the 
nature  of  the    institutions    they  required;   but  legislative 


THE  BOERS  71 

power  was  not  to  be  conceded  as  yet.  "  I  think  it  pro- 
bable," Lord  Stanley  says,  "  looking  to  the  nature  of  the 
population,  that  they  will  desire  those  institutions  to  be 
founded  on  the  Dutch,  rather  than  on  the  English  model, 
and,  however  little  some  of  those  institutions  may  be 
suited  to  a  more  advanced  state  of  civilisation,  it  is  the 
desire  of  Her  Majesty's  government,  that  in  this  respect 
the  contentment  of  the  emigrants,  rather  than  the  abstract 
merits  of  the  institutions,  should  guide  our  decision." 

There  were,  however,  certain  limitations  to  this  freedom 
of  selection,  i.  No  distinction  or  disqualification,  founded 
on  "  colour,  origin,  language,  or  creed,"  was  to  be  recog- 
nised. 2,  No  "aggression  upon  natives  beyond  the 
colony"  was  to  be  sanctioned  under  any  plea  whatever. 
3,  Slavery  in  any  shape  or  form  was  declared  to  be 
"  absolutely  unlawful." 

It  is  impossible  not  to  feel  that  the  principle  of  this 
despatch  is  both  just  and  generous  :  and  any  opinion  we 
may  form  of  the  subsequent  dealings  of  the  British 
Government  with  the  Boers  must  be  largely  modified  by 
the  remembrance  of  the  equitable  character  of  these 
original  proposals,  and  of  the  one  reason — the  greed  of 
land — which  prevented  the  emigrants  from  remaining 
under  the  administration  so  established. 

In  1848  British  authority  was  effectively  established 
over  the  emigrants  in  the  Orange  River  districts  by  Sir 
Harry  Smith :  it  was  withdrawn  when  the  Free  State  came 
into  existence  under  the  Convention  of  Bloemfontein  in 
1854.  Two  years  previously  the  independence  of  the 
emigrants  beyond  the  Vaal  was  recognised  by  the  Sand 
River  Convention  (1852). 

It  was  undoubtedly  the  intention  of  the  Imperial 
Government  to  rid  itself  of  any  further  responsibility  by 
these  conventions.  That  object  was  not  attained.  On 
the  contrary,  when  circumstances  made  it  necessary  for 
England  to  resume  the  part  of  paramount  power  in  South 


72  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Africa,   it  was    found   that  she  had  placed    herself   in   a 
position    of  great    disadvantage.     For    these    conventions 
not   only  recognised  the  independence    of  the   emigrant 
farmers,   but  they  bound    the   Imperial    Government  not 
to  make  any  fresh  alliances  with  the  native   chiefs  north 
of  the  Vaal  River.     Moreover,  while  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment agreed   to  allow  the  emigrants  to  obtain  arms  and 
ammunition  freely  in  the  British  possessions,  they  pledged 
themselves  to  prevent  the  natives  from  procuring  fire-arms.* 
When  the  discovery  of  diamonds  had  shown  that  South 
Africa  was  a  more  valuable  possession  than  had  ever  been 
supposed,  England  began  again  to  exercise  the  paramount 
rights  which  had  remained  dormant  for  nearly  fifteen  years. 
In  1868  the  Imperial  Government  interfered  between  the 
Free  State  and  the  Basutos.     At  that  time  the  Free  State 
Government  had  at  last,  after  four  years'  fighting,  succeeded 
in  reducing  Moshesh  to  submission.     They  proposed  to 
punish  him  by  confiscating  a  large  part  of  his  territory. 
The  ground  on  which  the  Imperial  Government  interfered 
was  the  belief  that  the  dispersion  of  the  Basutos,  which 
would  result  from   this  action   of  the   Free  State,  would 
endanger  the  peace  of  South  Africa.      In    187 1    British 
authority  was  proclaimed  over  Griqualand  West,  a  territory 
including   country  north   of  the    Vaal    and    the  diamond 
fields — a  part  of  the   Orange   Free  State.     The  justifica- 
tion  for  this   act  was   the   belief  that   the  district  which 
contained    so    valuable    a    possession    as    the    Kimberley 
diamond    mines  ought  to    be  administered  by  the  para- 
mount power.     And   in   1877  the  Queen's  authority  was 
established    in    the    Transvaal,    on    the    ground    that    the 
weakness   and   bankruptcy  of  the   local   government  con- 
stituted,   in    view   of    the   growing    disturbances    amongst 
the    natives,    and    the    organisation    of    the    Zulus    under 
Ketshwayo,  a  menace  to  the  supremacy  of  the  Europeans 
in  South  Africa  (Note  15). 

*  Despatch  of  Sir  George  Grey,  1858,  §  10. 


THE  BOERS  73 

We  have  now  returned  to  the  point  in  what  has 
been  called  the  main  stream  of  South  African  history 
from  which  we  diverged  to  trace  the  history  of  the 
Transvaal  Boers. 

When  it  became  evident  to  the  Boer  leaders  that,  in 
spite  of  Mr  Gladstone's  condemnation  of  the  annexation, 
and  in  spite,  too,  of  the  very  practical  proof  of  Africander 
solidarity  which  had  been  afforded  by  blocking  the  federa- 
tion proposals  of  the  Cape  ministry,  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment did  not  intend  to  withdraw  from  the  Transvaal,  they 
resolved  to  resort  to  the  arbitrament  of  arms.  The  affairs 
of  the  community  were  entrusted  to  a  Triumvirate — Messrs 
Kruger,  Joubert,  and  Pretorius ;  and  on  the  i6th  December 
— Dingan's  day — the  flag  of  the  South  African  Republic 
was  floated  in  the  breeze  on  the  desolate  uplands  of  the 
Wilwatersrandt. 

The  successes  which  attended  the  insurgents  have 
already  been  related. 

But  now,  when,  to  use  an  expressive  phrase  of  General 
Wood,  "the  Boer  leaders  had  lit  a  fire  which  had  got 
beyond  their  control,"  happily  all  those  parties  in  whose 
control  that  fire  lay  hastened  to  extinguish  it. 

The  Imperial  Government  poured  overwhelming  re- 
inforcements into  South  Africa.  At  the  time  of  the 
cessation  of  hostilities,  the  22  nd  of  March,  General  Wood 
had  10,000  men  massed  on  the  slopes  of  the  Drakensberg, 
eager  to  avenge,  if  need  be,  the  defeats  suffered  by  the 
British  arms.  General  Roberts  and  his  staff  had  arrived 
at  Capetown,  and  10,000  additional  troops  were  on  their 
way  to  South  Africa.  President  Brand,  of  the  Free  State, 
used  the  whole  of  his  influence  on  the  side  of  peace,  and 
he  was  successful  in  preventing  the  Free  State,  as  a  state, 
from  taking  part  in  the  quarrel  (Note  16).  Mr  Hofmeyr, 
the  leader  of  the  Africander  party  in  the  Cape  Colony, 
exhorted  the  Boer  leaders  to  moderation  (Note  17), 
General  Wood  (who  had  succeeded  to  the  command  of 


74  SOUTH  AFRICA 

the  troops  on  the  death  of  General  Colley),  without 
sacrificing  a  single  point  in  the  game  of  war,*  showed 
both  tact  and  patience  in  the  very  difificult  negotiations 
which  he  conducted,  and  won  the  confidence  of  the 
insurgent  leaders.  And  so  the  armistice  of  the  7  th  of 
March  was  followed  by  the  cessation  of  hostilities  on 
the  22  nd.  The  sum  of  the  terms  actually  offered  by 
General  Wood,  and  accepted  by  the  Boer  leaders,  were 
these : — 

I.  A  complete  amnesty  was  guaranteed  to  all  the 
insurgents,  including  the  leaders,  except  persons  who  had 
committed  acts  contrary  to  the  rules  of  civilised  warfare. 

2.  A  commission  was  to  be  appointed  for  the  purpose 
of  restoring  the  independent  Transvaal  Government,  and 
the  names  of  the  persons  composing  this  commission  were 
to  be  named  forthwith.  They  were  Sir  Hercules  Robinson, 
the  new  Governor  of  the  Cape,  Chief  Justice  de  Villiers, 
and  General  Wood  himself.  It  was  also  stipulated  that 
President  Brand  should  be  present  at  the  meetings  of 
the  commission. 

3.  Complete  self-government  under  the  British 
suzerainty  was  to  be  granted,  at  the  latest,  within  six 
months  from  the  cessation  of  hostilities,  and  under  the 
terms  arranged  by  the  commission  (Note  18). 

It  has  been  sought  to  represent  the  retrocession  of  the 
Transvaal  as  an  act  justifiable  on  grounds  other  than  those  of 
political  expediency.  But  that  is  a  contention  which  cannot 
be  maintained.  The  retrocession  came  twelve  months  too 
late.  If  it  was  intended  that  it  should  rank  as  an  act  of 
grace,  the  independence  of  the  Boers  should  have  been 
granted  in  May  1880.  If  a  man  asks  an  alms  of  us,  and 
we  refuse  him  ;  if  he  then  threatens  us  with  violence,  and 
we  empty  our  pockets,  can  we  claim  to  have  been  actuated 
by  motives  of  philanthropy  ?  But  that  is  not  all.  It  was 
wrong,  no  doubt,  to  subject  a  community  of  50,000 
*  Despatch  93,  C — 2837. 


THE  BOERS  75 

farmers  to  an  alien  government.  But  was  it  right  to  desert 
the  10,000  loyahsts  in  the  towns?  It  was  right,  no  doubt, 
to  recognise  the  wishes  of  the  Africander  population  in 
the  Cape  Colony,  being  the  Queen's  subjects,  but  was  it 
right  to  expose  the  English  colonists,  also  the  Queen's 
subjects,  to  the  degradation  and  contempt  which  they 
endured  at  the  hands  of  their  Dutch  neighbours  during 
the  years  1881  to  1885  ? 

No,  the  retrocession  of  the  Transvaal  must  be  justified 
on  the  ground  of  political  expediency.  But  let  us  under- 
stand clearly  the  nature  of  this  expediency.  The  Boers 
had  the  whole  of  Dutch  South  Africa  at  their  backs  : 
they  emphasised  the  fact  of  Africander  solidarity  by  shoot- 
ing down  800  English  officers  and  men.  It  was  more 
expedient  to  surrender  the  Transvaal  than  to  run  the 
risk  of  having  to  subdue  the  whole  Dutch  population 
in  South  Africa  by  force  of  arms — that  is  to  say,  it  was 
expedient  under  the  then  existing  political  conditions  of 
South  Africa.  But  how  can  we  justify  the  course  of 
action  which  created  those  conditions  ?  In  other  words, 
was  the  crisis  which  arose  at  the  end  of  1880  one  which 
could  have  been  neither  foreseen  nor  prevented  by  the 
exercise  of  reasonable  foresight  and  address  on  the  part 
of  the  Imperial  Government  ? 

Let  us  look  at  the  information  which  was  placed  before 
them  as  to  the  condition  of  the  Transvaal  during  the 
twelve  months  which  immediately  preceded  the  revolt. 

On  the  29th  of  October  1879,  Lord  Wolseley,  who 
was  then  administering  the  Transvaal,  reported  to  the 
Secretary  for  the  colonies,  "  That  he  was  informed  on 
all  sides  that  it  was  the  intention  of  the  Boers  to  fight 
for  independence,"  but  he  also  stated  that,  in  his  opinion, 
the  insecurity  of  the  important  section  of  loyalists  would 
be  "  an  insuperable  obstacle  to  retrogression." 

On  the  2nd  of  March  1880,  he  wrote  in  justification 
of  certain  energetic  measures  which  he  had  taken  to  up- 


76  SOUTH  AFRICA 

hold  the  Queen's  authority  * — measures  which  had  been 
censured  by  the  Imperial  Government — that  the  object 
of  the  meeting  of  the  Boer  leaders  in  December  1879 
was  to  see  how  far  they  "would  be  suffered  to  advance 
in  open  repudiation  of  the  Queen's  authority "  ;  that  the 
tolerance  of  such  proceedings  was  regarded  by  the  mass 
of  the  Boer  population  as  "  sufficient  evidence  of  the 
inability  of  the  administration  to  defend  its  authority," 
and  was  "  the  seal  of  success  upon  rebellion."  "  It 
appeared  to  me,"  he  continues,  "  to  be  quite  clear  that 
the  longer  this  false  idea  of  the  timid  collapse  of  British 
sovereignty  was  suffered  to  germinate,  the  more  dangerous 
would  become  the  audacity  of  the  leaders  and  instigators 
of  the  agitation,  and  the  more  confirmed  and  intractable 
would  be  the  feelings  of  the  people."  f  And  in  his 
despatch  of  July  the  6th,  1880,  Sir  Bartle  Frere  placed 
first  among  the  causes  to  which  was  due  the  refusal  of 
the  Colonial  Parliament  to  pledge  itself  to  the  Conference 
proposals,  the  distrust  and  uncertainty  which  was  felt  re- 
garding the  course  of  H.M.  Government  in  the  Transvaal, 
Zululand  and  Natal.  | 

I  have  spoken  of  the  disgrace  of  Majuba,  and  I  used 
the  word  advisedly ;  but  the  disgrace  of  Majuba  does 
not  lie  in  the  defeat  of  the  British  arms.  I  believe  that 
if  the  special  conditions  and  circumstances  of  the  engage- 
ments of  the  Transvaal  Revolt  are  studied,  it  will  be 
found  that  our  soldiers  fought  with  no  less  than  their 
accustomed  gallantry  (Note  19).  The  disgrace  of 
Majuba  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  was  the  sign  and  seal  of 
the  disasters  which  attend  a  vacillating  policy,  an  evasion 
of  responsibilities,  and  the  desertion  and  abandonment 
of  a  faithful  servant. 

There  are  passages  in  the   lives   of  nations,  as  in  the 

*  The  nrrests  of  Pretorius  and  Bok. 
t  C-2584. 
t  C— 2655. 


THE  BOERS  77 

lives  of  individuals,  where  the  office  of  history  is  confined 
within  the  narrowest  limits.  In  such  passages  there  is 
no  room  for  picturesque  description  or  complacent  detail, 
still  less  for  the  eloquence  which  is  naturally  stimulated 
by  the  contemplation  of  wise  counsels  or  brave  deeds. 
It  remains  solely  to  trace  the  connection  of  cause  and 
effect ;  and  in  proportion  as  the  analysis  is  accurate  and 
exact,  is  the  possibility  of  achieving  a  useful  purpose. 
Such  a  passage  is  the  story  of  the  relationship  of  Eng- 
land to  the  Boers :  and  I  have  endeavoured  to  relate  the 
facts  with  some  completeness,  for  an  account  of  mistakes 
and  errors,  and  of  the  disasters  resulting  from  them,  is 
only  useful  when  it  is  so  clear  that  it  becomes  a  means  by 
which  like  errors  can  be  avoided  in  the  future. 

Well,  the  Boer  has  been  left  in  undisturbed  possession 
of  his  inheritance  in  South  Africa  for  fourteen  years,  and 
during  that  time  he  has  passed  from  poverty  to  opulence 
— through  the  exertions  of  the  aliens  to  whom  he  denies 
the  franchise. 

Let  us  do  justice  to  the  Boer.  Let  us  acknowledge 
the  reality  of  the  original  grievances  which  drove  him 
beyond  the  hmits  of  the  British  jurisdiction  ;  let  us  admit 
the  magnitude  of  the  services  which  he  rendered  to  South 
African  civilisation  by  destroying  the  murderous  power  of 
Dingan,  and  driving  the  Matabele  hordes  beyond  the 
Limpopo ;  let  us  forget  the  occasions  on  which  he  lapsed 
into  the  inferior  morality  of  the  previous  century  in  his 
treatment  of  the  natives ;  let  us  freely  admire  the  deter- 
mination and  the  intrepidity  which  he  displayed  in  defence 
of  his  independence. 

We  may  do  all  this  and  still  feel  that  something  is 
wanting  to  justify  him  in  the  occupation  of  the  fairest 
districts  of  settled  South  Africa.  He  has  won  his 
promised  land  from  the  heathen.  It  is  exceedingly  im- 
probable that  he  will  ever  be  disturbed  again  in  the  posses- 
sion of  this  inheritance  by  any  external  force.     But  he  has 


78  SOUTH  AFRICA 

still  to  justify  his  possession  of  these  ample  pastures, 
these  rich  and  fertile  valleys,  and  these  stores  of  gold 
and  of  coal. 

If  he  can  enlarge  his  mind,  if  he  can  reform  existing 
abuses,  if  he  can  expand  an  archaic  system  of  government 
and  render  it  sufficiently  elastic  to  meet  the  requirements 
of  an  enlarged  population  and  important  and  increasing 
industries — well  and  good.  If  not,  let  the  Boer  beware : 
for  he  will  place  himself  in  conflict  with  the  intelligence 
and  progress  of  South  Africa. 

Then  the  Boer  system  will  be  condemned  by  a  higher 
authority  than  the  Colonial  Office  or  the  opinion  of 
England ;  and  from  the  high  court  of  nature — a  court 
from  which  no  appeal  lies — the  inexorable  decree  will  go 
forth — "  Cut  it  down  ;  why  cumbereth  it  the  ground  ?  " 


CHAPTER    V. 

Natal  and  the  Kafir  Problem. 

T^HE  gain  which  has  been  achieved  by  humanity  during 
-*■  the  present  century  has  invited  criticism  by  its  very 
magnitude.  Matthew  Arnold  and  Ruskin  have  told  us, 
each  in  his  own  characteristic  manner,  that  a  material 
gain  may  be  a  spiritual  loss.  Mr  William  Morris,  as 
the  social  reformer — not  "  the  idle  singer  of  an  empty 
day " — has  attacked  the  dearest  doctrine  of  economic 
science,  and  declared  that  "  division  of  labour "  is  wage- 
saving  not  labour-s?iV\r\g.  Henry  George  has  warned  us 
that  the  progress  of  the  few  may  bring  poverty  to  the 
many,  and  that  while  the  rich  are  getting  richer,  the  poor 
are  getting  poorer. 

To  these  weighty  indictments  against  the  age  of  progress, 
the  late  Mr  Pearson  has  added  his  gloomy  forecast. 
This  new  criticism  is  no  longer  confined  to  a  single 
society,  or  to  some  one  aspect  of  contemporary  life.  Its 
contentions  are  supported  by  observations  covering  the 
whole  range  of  political  and  social  movement  throughout 
the  world  ;  and  the  doom  which  is  here  pronounced  is 
not  that  of  a  single  community  but  of  civilisation  in 
general. 

In  spite,  however,  of  the  persistency  with  which  the 
prophets  of  the  age  have  warned  societies  and  individuals 
against  any  unreasoning  hopes  of  the  future,  certain  ideals 
have  hitherto  survived.  Among  them  the  most  captivating, 
and  perhaps  the  most  practical,  is  a  belief  on  the  part  of 
the  various  members  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  family  that  their 

79 


8o  SOUTH  AFRICA 

race  is  destined  to  spread  civilisation  throughout  the 
world.  It  is  on  this  ideal  of  a  beneficent  and  imperial 
mission  that  Mr  Pearson's  criticism  falls  most  heavily. 
For,  if  it  be  true  that  the  coloured  races,  protected  and 
assisted  by  European  civilisation,  will  rapidly  increase  in 
population,  and  ultimately  circumscribe  and  paralyse  the 
white  races,  we  Englishmen,  the  conquerors  and  admin- 
istrators of  India,  beyond  all  others  are  "the  blind 
instruments  of  fate  for  multiplying  the  races  that  are  now 
our  subjects,  and  will  one  day  be  our  rivals."  * 

Natal  is  a  case  in  point. 

But  before  we  proceed  to  discuss  this  aspect  —  the 
aspect  which  appears  the  most  characteristic  and  stimu- 
lating of  the  life  of  Natal — we  must  first  consider  those 
broad  necessary  facts  which  will  enable  us  to  form  a 
general  notion  of  the  colony  as  a  whole. 

The  most  important  events  in  the  early  history  of  Natal 
have  already  been  mentioned.  To  these  events — told 
incidentally  as  forming  part  of  general  South  African 
history — only  one  or  two  fresh  facts  need  be  added. 
The  basis  of  the  English  population  was  laid  during  the 
years  1848-51,  when  immigrants,  to  the  number  of  nearly 
4000,  arrived  in  the  colony,  attracted  thither  by  the 
representations  of  a  Mr  Byrne,  an  English  gentleman 
who  had  visited  the  country  in  1843,  the  year  in  which 
a  British  administration  was  first  permanently  established. 
For  three  years,  1845-48,  Natal  was  governed  as  a  depend- 
ency of  the  Cape  Colony.  It  was  then  erected  into 
a  separate  colony,  governed  by  a  Lieutenant-Governor  and 
an  executive  council.  In  1855,  after  the  visit  of  Sir 
George  Grey,  a  legislative  council  was  established.  In 
1866  representative  members  were  admitted  to  this  council. 
In  1873  the  Hlubi  trouble,  to  which  reference  has  already 
been  made,!  arose,  and  in  consequence  of  the  facts  dis- 

*  "  National  Life  and  Character,"  p.  83. 
t  Chap.  iii.  p.  48. 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM        8i 

closed  by  this  incident,  Lord  Wolseley  was  sent  out  as 
special  commissioner,  to  enquire  into  the  relations  exist- 
ing between  the  Natal  government  and  the  natives.  As 
a  result  of  the  enquiries  then  made,  certain  reforms  were 
introduced  into  the  system  of  native  administration  by 
Sir  Henry  Bulwer,  who  became  Governor  of  Natal,  on 
the  departure  of  Lord  Wolseley,  in  August  1875.  The 
progress  of  the  colony  was  disastrously  affected  by  the 
Zulu  and  Transvaal  wars ;  but,  since  that  time — since 
1 88 1 — Natal  has  rapidly  advanced  in  prosperity;  and  in 
1893  responsible  government  was  established. 

Under  the  present  constitution  there  is  a  Legislative 
Council,  of  eleven  members,  nominated  by  the  Governor- 
in-Council  and  holding  their  seats  for  ten  years,  and  a 
Legislative  Assembly  of  thirty-seven  members,  elected  by 
the  various  constituencies  for  four  years.  Under  the  very 
special  circumstances  of  Natal  the  Imperial  government 
have  thought  fit  to  make  a  reservation  in  conferring 
parliamentary  government  upon  the  colonists.  The 
Governor  is  empowered  to  designate  not  more  than  six 
offices  "political"  offices,  and  to  reserve  these  for  "crown" 
appointment.  Provision  is  also  made  for  the  application 
of  a  due  proportion  of  the  colonial  revenue  to  the  payment 
of  the  salary  of  the  Governor,  and  of  the  salaries  of  these 
political  officers,  and  to  native  education. 

The  Natal  franchise  is  liberal.  A  European  is  entitled 
to  vote  for  members  of  the  Assembly  if  he  possesses  real 
property  of  the  value  of  i£s°y  o"^  occupies  such  property 
at  an  annual  rental  of  not  less  than  ^10;  or  if  he  is  in 
receipt  of  an  annual  income  of  ^96  or  upwards.  In  both 
cases  he  must  also  have  resided  in  the  colony  for  three 
years.  The  natives,  too,  are  admitted  to  political  privileges; 
but  in  their  case  a  time  of  probation  is  required.  A  native 
is  entitled  to  vote  if,  in  addition  to  possessing  one  or  other 
of  these  qualifications,  he  has  lived  for  seven  years  exempt 
from  the  action  of  the  special  native  laws ;    that  is  to  say, 

F 


82  SOUTH  AFRICA 

if  he  has  become,  to  all  intents  and  purposes,  a  civilised 
being. 

The  area  of  Natal  is  rather  more  than  twenty  thousand 
square  miles  (20,460),  or  a  good  deal  less  than  half  that 
of  England  without  Wales  and  Scotland.  The  country 
falls  into  three  natural  divisions.  There  is  a  coast  belt, 
extending  for  eight  or  nine  miles  inland,  where  the 
temperature  is  raised  by  the  warm  Mozambique  channel 
which  flows  past  the  coast,  and  where  sugar,  tea,  arrow- 
root, and  other  tropical  products  are  raised.  Then, 
passing  inland  and  westwards,  there  are  the  midlands, 
where  the  country  rises  from  900  feet  above  sea  level  to 
3000  feet.  Here  horned  cattle  are  depastured,  and  maize 
— but  not  corn — is  grown.  And,  lastly,  there  are  the 
uplands,  rising  from  3000  feet  in  elevation  to  5000  feet, 
where  they  spring  into  the  Drakensberg.  This  is  where 
the  sheep  farms  are ;  and,  in  the  north,  there  is  a  great 
coal-field,  estimated  at  2000  square  miles  in  extent,  where 
coal  is  raised  in  considerable  and  increasing  quantities. 

The  population  of  Natal  we  may  take  to  be  in  round 
numbers  600,000  (588,576).  Of  this  total  45,000 
persons  are  Europeans,  40,000  are  coolies  or  Indian 
immigrants,  and  500,000  are  Kafirs.  The  European 
population  is  in  the  main  concentrated  in  the  two  towns, 
Durban,  the  port,  and  Maritzburg,  forty-five  miles  inland, 
the  seat  of  Government. 

The  volume  of  annual  trade  passing  through  Durban 
is  four  and  a  half  millions.*  Of  this  amount  rather  more 
than  three  millions  (;^3,2 12,259)  represents  imports,  and 

*  The  figures  in  the  text  are  for  1892,  and  are  taken  from  the 
"Statistical  Abstract"  for  the  Colonics,  &c.  (C — 7144),  published  in 
1893.  Later  returns  show  a  diminution  of  about  a  million  in  the  volume 
of  tiade,  due  mainly  to  the  diversion  of  the  transit  trade  from  Durban, 
owing  to  the  establishment  of  better  railway  communication  from  other 
ports  to  the  O.  F.  State  and  the  Transvaal.  As,  however,  the  Natal 
railway  has  been  extended  to  Johannesburg  and  Pretoria  in  September 
1895,  I  leave  the  '92  returns  as  most  representative. 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM  83 

a  million  and  a  half  (^1,535,903)  exports.  But  pro- 
bably only  two-thirds  of  the  imports,  and  less  than  a  half 
of  the  exports,  belong  to  Natal.  In  order  to  understand 
the  significance  of  these  figures,  we  will  compare  the  trade 
of  Natal  with  that  of  New  Zealand.  I  say  New  Zealand, 
because  the  total  of  the  population  of  New  Zealand  is  nearly 
the  same  as  that  of  Natal,  while  the  numerical  relationship 
between  the  Europeans  and  the  natives  is  almost  exactly 
reversed,  for  in  New  Zealand  we  have  a  small  (45,000) 
and  dwindling  population  of  Maories  in  the  midst  of 
Europeans.  The  volume  of  the  New  Zealand  trade 
reaches  over  sixteen  millions,  of  Avhich  nine  and  a  half 
millions  (p^9, 534,851)  are  exports,  and  seven  millions 
(.^6,943,056)  imports.  The  native,  therefore,  both  con- 
sumes and  produces  very  much  less  than  the  European. 

In  the  Natal  exports  the  chief  items  are  the  wool  export, 
^^583, 385,  of  which  part  only  is  produced  in  Natal,  and 
the  sugar  export,  ;j^  11 9, 461,  which  is  exclusively  Natal 
produce.  And  to  these  figures  we  must  add  the  fact  that, 
in  1892,  141,000  tons  of  coal  were  raised  in  the  colony. 
Of  this  amount  three-fourths  (117,000  tons)  came  from 
the  collieries  of  a  single  company,  the  Dundee  Coal 
Company,  which  only  commenced  work  in   1890. 

Now  as  to  the  employment  of  the  Europeans.  Of  the 
13,000  adult  males,  more  than  one-half  are  artisans  and 
mechanics.  The  remainder  are  chiefly  distributed  among 
the  farmers  who  raise  the  wool,  the  planters  who  grow 
the  sugar,  the  officials  and  professional  men  who,  in 
addition  to  conducting  the  general  affairs  of  the  colony, 
control  the  native  population,  and  the  agents  and  middle- 
men who  forward  the  goods  received  at  the  port,  Durban. 
For  Durban  serves  not  only  Natal,  but  the  south-eastern 
corner  of  the  Transvaal,  the  eastern  corner  of  the  Free 
State,  and  the  native  territories  lying  north  and  south  of 
the  colony.  This  inland  or  "  overberg "  trade  requires 
the  services  of  these  agents,   and   provides  employment 


84  SOUTH  AFRICA 

for  a  commercial  class  quite  out  of  proportion  to  the 
actual  trade  of  Natal.  The  existence  of  this  forwarding 
trade  has  benefited  the  colony  in  two  ways.  It  has 
made  the  creation  of  a  complete  and  relatively  extensive 
railway  system  necessary  and  possible  ;  and  it  has  caused 
the  colonists  to  spend  both  energy  and  capital  in  improving 
the  port.  The  harbour  of  Durban  consists  of  a  land-locked 
stretch  of  water  enclosed  between  the  Bluff  promontory 
and  the  town.  Across  the  entrance,  the  Bluff  Channel, 
there  runs  a  bar  of  sand  which  prevents  vessels  of  deep 
draught  from  reaching  the  secure  waters  of  the  harbour. 
Between  the  years  1854  and  1881  the  average  depth  of 
water  over  the  bar  was  6  feet  5  inches.  By  various 
harbour  works  7  feet  7  inches  have  been  gained,  and 
the  maximum  draught  registered  in  1892  was  19  feet  9 
inches — a  depth  which  will  admit  all  but  the  largest 
class  of  ocean-going  steamers. 

I  need  only  speak  at  length  of  one  of  the  Natal 
industries — the  sugar  industry  ;  for  the  South  African  wool 
export  will  be  discussed  in  a  subsequent  chapter,  and 
the  collieries  do  not,  of  course,  present  any  characteristic 
features.  In  this  industry  some  eight  hundred  pounds 
sterling  (;£8so,^oo)  is  invested.  There  are  26,000  acres 
under  crop,  and  of  this  area  half  is  reaped  annually. 
There  are  thirty-six  factories,  and  in  the  year  1 891-1892  the 
output  of  sugar  amounted  to  15,000  tons.  The  planta- 
tions are  worked  by  some  6000  coolies,  and  a  small 
number  of  Kafirs.  This  fact — the  fact  that  the  planters 
have  to  go  to  India  for  their  labour  when  they  have  a 
large  mass  of  unemployed  Kafirs  at  their  doors — is  the 
most  significant  feature  of  the  sugar  industry.  It  appears 
that  the  Natal  Kafirs  cannot  be  induced  to  submit  to  the 
restraints  of  regular  employment.  The  whole  question  of 
Indian  immigration  was  carefully  considered  by  a  com- 
mission which  sat  from  1885  to  1S87  ;  and  it  was  then  found 
that  it  was  impossible  to  dispense  with  Indian  immigration 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM        85 

without  ruining  the  industry.  This  was  felt  to  be  too 
heavy  a  sacrifice,  so  the  planters  continue  to  bring  over 
coolies  from  India  under  contracts  for  three  years'  service. 
The  immigrants  appear  to  be  exposed  to  no  hardships  ; 
on  the  contrary,  many  of  them  settle  in  Natal  after  their 
contracts  have  expired,  and  a  good  deal  of  the  retail  trade 
of  the  colony  has  passed  into  their  hands.  The  com- 
mencement of  coal  mining  has  benefited  the  sugar  industry, 
for  the  cheap  supply  of  fuel  allows  the  planters  generally 
to  avail  themselves  of  the  diffusion  process  for  the  extraction 
of  the  juice  of  the  sugar-cane.  By  this  process  the  juice 
is  first  dissolved  out  of  the  cane  by  hot  water,  and  then 
the  liquid  so  obtained  is  solidified  by  evaporation.  Both 
of  these  treatments  require  a  large  expenditure  of  fuel, 
and  therefore  the  fact  that  coal  can  now  be  obtained 
at  2 IS.  6d.  the  ton  at  Durban,  has  obviously  an  important 
bearing  upon  the  prospects  of  the  industry. 

Now  we  are  free  to  approach  the  subject  of  the  govern- 
ment and  administration  of  the  Kafirs. 

The  physical  basis  upon  which  the  Natal  Government 
rests  consists  of  (i)  a  garrison  of  the  Imperial  troops,  in 
number  from  1000  to  1500  men  ;  (2)  the  Natal  Mounted 
PoHce,  a  small  permanent  colonial  force  with  a  commandant, 
eight  oflicers,  and  280  men  ;  and  (3)  the  volunteers.  This 
latter  force  amounts  to  a  total  of  all  arms — mounted  rifles, 
artillery,  infantry,  and  a  coast  corps — nearly  two  thousand 
(1835)  strong. 

Every  native  who  is  responsible  for  a  hut  is  required  to 
pay  an  annual  hut-tax  of  14s.,  and  by  means  of  this  charge 
— a  charge  which  is  very  cheerfully  borne — the  Kafirs  are 
themselves  made  to  pay  for  the  expenses  of  administration. 

The  Letters  Patent  issued  in  1848,  by  which  Natal  was 
created  a  separate  territory,  directed  that  there  should  be 
"  neither  interference  with,  nor  abrogation  of,  any  law, 
custom,  or  usage  "  prevailing  among  the  natives,  except  so  far 
as  these  might  be  "  repugnant  to  the  general  principles  of 


86  SOUTH  AFRICA 

humanity  recognised  throughout  the  w  h  jle  world."  We  may 
compare  this  proviso  with  the  corresponding  proviso  in  the 
Constitution  Act  of  an  ordinary  British  colony.  By  such 
Imperial  Acts  a  Colonial  Legislature  is  empowered  to  make 
laws,  and  these  laws  are  declared  to  be  valid,  except  so  far  as 
they  are  "  repugnant  to  the  law  of  England."  In  the  follow- 
ing year,  1849,  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  Natal  was  created 
by  ordinance  "  Supreme  Chief  "  of  all  the  natives  within  the 
colony,  and  empowered  to  adminster  native  law  through 
such  persons  as  he  thought  fit  to  appoint  for  that  purpose. 

In  Natal,  therefore,  the  tribal  organisation  has  been 
preserved  instead  of  being  broken  up,  as  we  saw  was  done 
in  the  Cape  Colony  under  the  policy  initiated  by  Sir  George 
Grey ;  and  the  authority  of  the  chiefs  has  been  utilised  for 
the  purposes  of  government.  At  the  present  time  the 
administration  of  justice  is  effected  by  means  of  three  kinds 
of  courts — those  presided  over  by  European  magistrates, 
chiefs' courts,  and  mixed  tribunals.  In  these  latter  cases 
between  Europeans  and  natives  are  heard,  and  European 
magistrates  and  chiefs  sit  side  by  side.  In  all  these  courts 
Kafir  law  and  custom,  as  modified  by  the  Colonial  Statutes, 
are  recognised.  The  Natal  Laws  also  include  a  number  of 
statutes  intended  merely  to  preserve  order  among  the 
natives.  Such  laws  are  of  two  kinds — those  which  regulate 
the  relationship  between  the  Europeans  and  natives,  e.g. 
such  laws  as  those  which  forbid  the  sale  of  intoxicating 
liquors,  or  of  firearms,  by  a  European  to  a  native,  under 
very  severe  penalties,  and  a  class  of  laws  which  deal  with 
what  may  be  called  special  police  regulations  applicable  to 
the  natives  only.  These  latter  cover  such  matters  as 
"  passes,"  or  the  written  permission  which  a  native  is 
required  to  procure  from  a  magistrate  before  he  changes 
his  residence  ;  the  curfew,  or  the  nine  o'clock  bell,  after 
which  the  Kafirs  retire  to  their  huts  in  Maritzburg  and 
Durban  ;  and  the  registration  of  firearms. 

The  system  resembles  that  of  India  rather  than  that  of 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM         87 

the  Cape  Colony.  The  natives  have  been  left  practically  to 
themselves  : — not  altogether,  because  there  are  now  a  small 
number  (73)  of  native  schools  at  work;  but  this  effort  is 
too  slight  to  produce  any  effect  as  yet  upon  the  solid  mass 
of  Kafirdom  against  which  it  is  directed.  Considered  only 
as  a  means  of  governitig  the  natives,  the  Natal  administra- 
tion has  been  successful,  for,  with  the  exception  of  the  Hlubi 
trouble,  there  has  been  no  serious  outbreak  among  the 
Kafirs  since  Natal  was  constituted  a  separate  government. 
But  now,  in  the  view  of  the  experience  of  the  last  ten  years, 
in  view,  that  is  to  say,  of  the  very  rapid  growth  of  the  Kafir 
population  in  the  colony,  the  question  is  being  raised  whether 
it  is  enough  merely  to  govern  without  civilising.  This 
question  constitutes  what  I  have  termed  the  "  problem  "  of 
Natal. 

We  will  take  the  figures  as  Mr  Pearson  gives  them.  In 
1863  the  European  element  constituted  one-seventh  of 
the  population  of  the  colony,  in  189 1  it  constituted  only 
one-twelfth  ;  and  again,  in  1879,  the  year  in  which  the  Zulu 
war  broke  out,  there  were  319,934  Kafirs  in  Natal,  in 
1 89 1  there  were  455,983  (Note  20). 

Making  due  allowance  for  the  undoubted  fact  that  this 
increase  is  very  largely  due  to  immigration,  the  figures  are 
still  sufficiently  significant.  And  what  applies  to  Natal 
applies  also  to  South  Africa  generally. 

Let  us  take  the  fact  of  the  Bantu  increase  as  Mr  Theal 
states  it : 

"That  the  Bantu  population  in  South  Africa  from  the 
Limpopo  to  the  sea  has  trebled  itself  by  natural  increase 
alone  within  fifty  years,  is  asserting  what  must  be  far  below 
the  real  rate  of  growth."  * 

The  chief  causes  of  this  rapid  increase  are  disclosed  by 
a  very  interesting  enquiry  initiated  by  the  Native  Depart- 
ment of  the  Cape  Government  in  1855.  A  circular  con- 
taining a  series  of  questions  was  distributed  among  the 

*  Appendix  to  "  The  Republics  "  ("  History  of  South  Africa  "). 


88  SOUTH  AFRICA 

magistrates,  missionaries,  and  traders.  The  collective 
evidence  of  these  authorities  attributes  the  increase  to  the 
"  controlling  power  of  the  civilised  Governments  "  which 
has  removed  certain  ancient  checks  on  population,  such  as 
tribal  wars  and  feuds,  and  executions  on  charge  of  witchcraft, 
and  lessened  the  action  of  others,  such  as  "  ignorance  of 
medicine  "  and  "  uncertainty  of  food  supplies."  At  the 
same  time,  most  of  these  authorities  are  of  opinion  that  the 
present  rate  of  increase  will  not  be  maintained  in  the 
future.  They  indicate  that  already  certain  new  checks  are 
coming  into  operation.  The  most  important  of  these  new 
checks  are  : — 

(a)  The  rapid  limitation  of  the  food  supply  which  can 
be  produced  by  the  primitive  methods  of  cultivation 
practised  by  the  Kalirs,  and 

(d)  The  adoption  of  European  dress  and  manners.  This 
last  introduces  a  higher  standard  of  comfort,  a  recognised 
check  on  indiscriminate  reproduction  ;  and  also  appears  to 
slightly  deteriorate  the  physique  of  the  South  African  native. 

Still,  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  Bantu  are  increasing 
very  rapidly  in  South  Africa ;  and  the  broad  fact  remains, 
that  in  South  Africa  the  Europeans  must  be  prepared  to 
share  the  country  with  the  coloured  races,  instead  of 
exclusively  occupying  it  as  they  have  done  in  North 
America  and  Australia. 

And  if  this  is  so,  the  question  of  native  education 
becomes  especially  important. 

What,  then,  is  being  done  in  South  Africa  to  educate 
the  native,  to  make  him  a  civilised  being,  to  fit  him,  in 
short,  for  this  partnership  with  the  European?  As  I 
have  already  said,  in  Natal  there  has  been  no  serious 
effort  made  in  this  direction.  No  effort  has  been  made 
in  the  Native  Territories,  nor  in  the  Republics.  Experi- 
ence shows  that,  in  order  to  produce  any  permanent 
results,  two  conditions  are  necessary.  There  must  be 
an  efficient  machinery  for  educating  the  young,  and  there 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM         89 

must  be  a  sufficient  European  background  to  prevent 
the  civilised  native  from  falling  back  into  barbarism. 
The  only  part  of  South  Africa  where  these  conditions 
are  at  all  realised  as  yet  are  some  districts  of  the  Cape 
Colony.  It  is  to  the  Cape  Colony,  therefore,  that  we 
must  go,  if  we  would  learn  what  has  been  already  achieved 
in  this  direction,  and  what  results  may  be  expected  in 
the  future. 

In  the  Cape  Colony  an  extensive  and  efficient  machinery 
for  native  education  has  been  at  work  for  many  years  past. 
From  a  report  of  the  Superintendent-General  of  Education 
(Sir  Langham  Dale),  published  in  1883,  we  learn  that, 
in  the  preceding  year  there  were  396  mission  schools 
with  an  attendance  of  44,307  ;  226  aborigines'  day  schools 
with  an  attendance  of  13,817,  and  21  boarding  and  trade 
schools  with  2519  pupils.  It  should  also  be  added  that 
about  one-third  of  the  Annual  Education  Grant  (amount- 
ing in  1889  to  ;^85,ooo)  is  appropriated  to  the  purposes 
of  native  education. 

Of  all  these  native  schools  and  institutions,  Lovedale 
is  the  most  remarkable ;  and  a  record  of  the  work  done 
at  Lovedale  will  give  some  insight  into  both  the  methods 
pursued  and  the  results  attained  by  the  native  educator. 

In  the  same  report  it  is  stated  that  there  were  300 
pupils  at  Lovedale,  and  that  the  yearly  turnover  was 
;^i  5,000,  There  is  a  college  department  in  which  native 
clergy  and  teachers  are  trained  ;  there  are  workshops  where 
young  men  are  taught  bookbinding,  printing,  and  smiths' 
and  carpenters'  work,  and  where  young  women  are  taught 
sewing  and  laundress  work ;  and  there  is  an  elementary 
school  for  boys  and  girls.  As  evidence  of  the  reality  of 
the  trade  instruction  given  at  Lovedale,  the  fact  is  re- 
corded that  the  work  of  thirty-five  apprentices  for  one  year 
realised  the  sum  of  ;^2  2oo. 

Writing  on  the  general  question  of  native  education 
— a  question  which  has  been  warmly  debated  at  the  Cape 


90  SOUTH  AFRICA 

■ — the  Superintendent-General  of  Education  says,  in  a 
supplementary  report  issued  in  the  following  year,  that 
the  supporters  of  native  education  "  appeal  to  such  facts 
as  the  large  interchange  among  natives  of  letters  passing 
through  the  post-office ;  of  the  utilisation  of  educated 
natives  as  carriers  of  letters,  telegrams,  and  parcels  ;  of 
the  hundreds  who  fill  responsible  posts  as  clerks,  inter- 
preters, school-masters,  sewing-mistresses,  and  of  the  still 
larger  number  engaged  in  industrial  pursuits,  as  carpenters, 
blacksmiths,  tinsmiths,  wagon-makers,  shoemakers,  printers, 
sail  makers,  saddlers,  etc.,  earning  good  wages,  and  helping 
to  spread  civilisation  among  their  own  people."  Among 
the  opponents  of  native  education  he  finds  "conflicting 
opinions."  "  On  the  one  hand,"  he  says,  "  the  schools 
are  abused  as  worthless,  and  educated  natives  decried ; 
on  the  other  hand,  I  find  it  affirmed  that  the  aborigines 
are  getting  a  better  education  than  the  white  people,  and 
that  the  native  apprentices  from  the  trade  schools  become 
successful  rivals  in  industrial  employments." 

To  clench  the  argument  I  have  made  some  extracts 
from  the  South  African  Circular  issued  by  the  Emi- 
grants' Information  Office  in  October  1894.  After  saying 
that  the  bulk  of  the  labour  employed,  both  in  agriculture 
and  in  mining,  is  supplied  by  the  natives,  the  Circular 
continues,  under  the  heading  "  Mechanics  " — 

"  It  should  be  remembered  that  large  numbers  of 
Malays  and  other  coloured  men,  in  all  parts  of  Cape 
Colony,  now  compete  with  whites  as  skilled  mechanics 
at  lower  wages. 

"  Nearly  all  the  reports  received  (from  various  com- 
mercial centres)  state  either  that  none  but  natives  are  em- 
ployed, or,  that  ...  if  Europeans  are  employed  .  .  . 
the  supply  is  sufficient. 

"In  the  Transkei  Europeans  receive  los.  to  15s.  a  day, 
but  they  are  rarely  employed  ..." 

This  is  very  practical  and  conclusive  evidence  of  the 
value  of  native  education  at  the  Cape. 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM         91 

We  will  now  enlarge  the  area  of  our  observations  once 
again,  and  pass  from  a  consideration  of  the  growth  of  the 
Bantu  population  to  the  wider  question  of  the  ultimate 
numerical  relationship  between  the  higher  and  lower  races 
raised  by  the  late  Mr  Pearson,  who  was  for  many  years 
Minister  of  Education  in  Victoria,  in  his  work  entitled 
"National  Life  and  Character  :  a  Forecast." 

Mr  Pearson's  forecast  depends  upon  two  main  proposi- 
tions. 

1.  The  lower  races  will  in  the  future  increase  at  so 
disproportionate  a  rate  (as  compared  with  the  white  popula- 
tions) as  ultimately  to  predominate  over  the  higher  races. 

2.  The  stationary  condition  of  society  to  which  the 
higher  races  are  to  be  thus  reduced  will  involve  a  general 
deterioration  of  national  life  and  character. 

The  arguments  by  which  Mr  Pearson  seeks  to  establish 
the  first  of  these  two  propositions  are  contained  in  the 
chapter  on  "The  Unchangeable  Limits  of  the  Higher  Races." 
He  points  out  that,  with  the  exception  of  small  acquisitions, 
such  as  that  of  the  Mediterranean  seaboard  of  Africa  by 
France,  and  of  Western  Turkestan  by  Russia,  the  white 
races  are  not  likely  to  add  any  considerable  territories 
to  those  which  they  already  occupy.  From  the  evidence 
collected  on  this  head  Mr  Pearson  concludes  that  "  by 
far  the  most  fertile  parts  of  the  earth,  and  [those]  which 
either  are  or  are  bound  to  be  the  most  populous,"  cannot 
possibly  be  the  homes  of  any  of  the  higher  races.  Mean- 
while the  dense  yellow  populations  of  China,  India,  Japan, 
and  the  Malay  Archipelago,  the  black  populations  of 
Central  and  Southern  Africa,  the  negroes  of  the  United 
States,  and  the  Indians  of  Central  and  South  America, 
are  bound  to  multiply  with  an  ever-increasing  rapidity. 
And  thus,  in  Mr  Pearson's  words — 

"  The  day  will  come,  and  perhaps  is  not  far  distant, 
when  the  European  observer  will  look  round  to  see  the 
globe  girdled  with  a  continuous  zone  of  the  black  and 


92  SOUTH  AFRICA 

yellow  races,  no  longer  too  weak  for  aggression  or  under 
tutelage,  but  independent,  or  practically  so,  in  Govern- 
ment, monopolising  the  trade  of  their  own  regions,  and 
circumscribing  the  industry  of  the  European ;  when 
Chinamen  and  the  nations  of  Hindustan,  the  States  of 
Central  and  South  America,  by  that  time  predominantly 
Indian,  and  it  may  be  the  African  nations  of  the  Congo 
and  the  Zambesi,  under  a  dominant  caste  of  foreign 
rulers,  are  represented  by  fleets  in  the  European  seas, 
invited  to  international  conferences,  and  welcomed  as 
allies  in  the  quarrels  of  the  civilised  world.  The  citizens 
of  these  countries  will  then  be  taken  up  into  the  social 
relations  of  the  white  races,  will  throng  the  English  turf, 
or  the  salons  of  Paris,  and  will  be  admitted  to  inter- 
marriage .  .  .  We  shall  wake  up  to  find  ourselves  elbowed 
and  hustled,  and  perhaps  even  thrust  aside  by  peoples 
whom  we  looked  down  upon  as  servile,  and  thought  of 
as  bound  always  to  minister  to  our  needs."  * 

In  order  to  get  a  definite  notion  of  the  nature  of  the 
change  which  is  here  predicted,  it  is  necessary  to  form 
some  idea  (approximately  correct)  of  the  relative  numbers 
of  the  higher  and  lower  races,  and  of  the  manner  in  which 
they  are  respectively  distributed  over  the  surface  of  the 
globe.  Mr  Pearson  himself  subsequently  states  the  ratio 
between  the  white  and  coloured  populations  to  be  as  one 
to  two.  Assuming  that  this  is  so,  let  us  suppose  Europe, 
North  America,  and  Australia  to  belong  exclusively  to 
the  400,000,000  Europeans  in  and  out  of  Europe,  and 
Asia,  Africa,  and  South  America  similarly  to  the 
800,000,000  Chinese,  Hindus,  Africans,  and  Indians, 
which  form  the  bulk  of  the  population  of  these  continents. 
In  this  way  we  get  400,000,000  of  whites  occupying 
15,000,000  square  miles,  as  opposed  to  800,000,000  of 
coloured  people  occupying  35,000,000  square  miles  of 
the  earth's  surface.  This  calculation  omits  to  take  account 
*  P.  84. 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM        93 

of  2,000,000  square  miles,  and  200,000,000  people ; 
but  as  both  areas  and  populations  would  be  fairly  evenly 
divided  among  the  higher  and  lower  races,  the  omission 
does  not  affect  the  argument. 

As  the  population  of  South  America  is  too  small  to 
have  any  immediate  significance,  it  is  in  China,  in  India, 
and  in  Central  Africa  that  we  may  expect  the  first  signs 
of  the  disproportionate  increase  which  is  to  reverse  the 
present  relationship  of  the  higher  and  lower  races. 

Our  knowledge  of  the  population  of  China  is  eminently 
unsatisfactory.  But  in  the  absence  of  definite  information, 
there  are  two  considerations  which  are  valuable  as  tending 
to  mitigate  the  alarm  caused  by  the  migratory  tendencies 
lately  developed  by  the  most  populous  nation  in  the 
world.  In  the  first  place,  by  far  the  greater  portion  of 
its  400,000,000  *  inhabitants  are  confined  to  China 
proper,  that  is  to  say,  to  an  area  one-third  only  of  the 
four  and  a  half  million  square  miles  of  the  empire,  and 
equal  to  India.  Assuming,  therefore,  that  the  oppor- 
tunities of  expansion  permitted  to  the  Chinese  by  the 
remaining  three  million  square  miles  of  sparsely  peopled 
territory  are  not  more  than  equivalent  to  the  sanitary 
and  other  advantages  of  British  administration  enjoyed 
by  the  people  of  India,  we  may  conclude  that  the  rate  of 
increase  in  China  is  not  likely  to  exceed  that  in  India. 
Accordingly,  if  we  find  that  the  increase  of  population  in 
India  does  not  at  present  indicate  any  such  expansion  as 
Mr  Pearson's  forecast  requires,  we  may,  in  the  absence  of 
any  positive  evidence  to  the  contrary,  conclude  as  much 
with  regard  to  China.  In  the  second  place,  China  has 
already  been  brought  face  to  face  with   Russia,  f     Con- 

*  Generally  stated  now  as  350,000,000. 

t  "  It  is  Russia  who  threatens  her  frontiers  in  Chinese  Turkestan 
and  on  the  Pamirs  ;  Russia  who  is  always  nibblins;,  in  scientific 
disguise,  at  Tibet ;  Russia  who  has  designs  in  Manchuria  ;  Russia 
whose  shadow  overhangs  Korea ;  Russia  who  is  building  a  great 
trans-continental   railway   that   will   enable   her   to   pour   troops  into 


94  SOUTH  AFRICA 

tinued    development,    therefore,    will    bring   the    Chinese 

increasingly  into  collision  with  a  state  which  is,  perhaps, 

the  most    powerful    military  state  in  the  world,  and  one 

whose    population    has    increased    by    natural    increment 

during   the   last   hundred  years  at  the  rate  of  more  than 

200  per  cent.* 

With   India  the   case   is,  happily,   different.     Here  we 

have    census    returns    which    reveal    the    movement    of 

population    with    increasing    fidelity.       The    census    for 

1 89 1     shows    that    the    entire    population    under     both 

British  and   feudatory   rule   now   reaches  a  total   of  over 

284,000,000,  having  increased   during  the  decade    1881- 

91  at   1 2  "36  per  cent.     The  population  of  British  India, 

however,     now    numbering     220,000,000,    has    increased 

(deducting  the  increment  due  to  the  acquisition  of  fresh 

territories)    at    the    lesser    rate    of    9I    per    cent.      The 

apparently  more  rapid  increase  in  the  native,  as  compared 

with    the    British    territories,    is    referred    by    the    Census 

Commissioner    to    the    receipt    of    more    faithful    returns, 

arising  partly  from  a   better    disposition    in    the  natives, 

and    partly    to    the    fact    that    many    of    these    feudatory 

states   are  now   more   directly  under  British  control  than 

they    have    been    previously.!      We    may  therefore   fairly 

conclude  that   9I  per  cent,   represents  the  rate  at  which 

the  Indian  peoples  have  increased    by  natural  increment 

during  the  last  decade.     If  we  compare  this  9^  per  cent. 

with  the  1 3*98  per  cent.J  of  natural  increase  in  England, 

and  the  14*40  per  cent,  of  natural,  and  24*86  per  cent. 

of  actual  increase  in  the  United  States  § — to  say  nothing 

China  at  any  point  along  3500  miles  of  continuous  border." — "China 
in  relation  to  the  Powers,"  Times,  February  loih,  1893.  The  fact  that 
Russia  is  the  natural  rival  of  China  (and  of  the  yellow  races)  is  em- 
phasised by  the  results  of  the  war  between  China  and  Japan. 

*  GifTen,  in  Statistical  Society s  Journal,  June  1885,  p.  103. 

t  Preliminary  Report  by  Mr  J.  A.  Baines,  Census  Commissioner  to 
the  Government  of  India. 

X  Preliminary  Report,  etc.,  of  the  Census  (England  and  Wales),  1891. 

§  Statesman's  "Year-Book,"  p.  1069. 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM 


95 


of  even  higher  rates  reached  in  Austraha — we  can  scarcely 
avoid  the  conclusion  that  India,  at  any  rate,  affords  but 
slight  confirmation  of  Mr  Pearson's  contention. 

Apart  from  the  evidence  I  have  already  mentioned  as 
indicating  that  a  new  set  of  checks  are  in  operation  which 
will  prevent  the  Bantu  race  in  South  Africa  from  increasing 
in  the  future  at  the  present  abnormal  rate,  we  can  form 
some  estimate  of  the  probable  rate  of  increase  of  the 
Central  African  generally  from  the  progress  of  the  race  in 
the  United  States.  Even  here  the  census  returns  are  not 
altogether  reliable.  In  1870  in  particular  the  numbers  of 
the  blacks  were  so  much  understated  as  to  produce  an 
apparent  rate  of  increase  for  the  decade  1870-80  so  high 
as  justly  to  cause  serious  apprehension.  But  an  examin- 
ation of  the  decennial  returns  for  the  century  1 790-1 890 
indicates  that,  so  far  from  the  black  race  increasing  in  an 
ascending  ratio  relatively  to  the  white,  the  proportion  of 
negroes  to  Europeans  is  appreciably  less  now  than  it  was 
a  hundred  years  ago. 


Table  showing  comparative  growth  of  the  White 
AND  Coloured  Population  in  the  United  States.* 


Popu 

ation. 

Number  of 

Per  cent. 

jf  Increase. 

Years. 

coloured  to 

White. 

Coloured. 

100,000  white. 

White. 

Coloured. 

1790 

1,271,488 

689,884 

54,258 

... 

1800 

1,702,980 

918,336 

53,925 

33 '94 

33"" 

181O 

2,208,785 

1,272,119 

57,594 

2970 

38-52 

1820 

2,831,560 

1,653.240 

58.386 

28*20 

29-96 

1830 

3,660,758 

2,187.545 

59.757 

29-28 

32-32 

1840 

4,632.530 

2,701,901 

58.325 

26-55 

23-51 

1850 

6,222,418 

3.442,238 

55.320 

34-32 

27-40 

i860 

8,203,852 

4,216,241 

51,393 

31-84 

22-49 

1870 

9,812,732 

4,555,990 

46,429 

19-61 

8-06 

1880 

13,530,408 

6,142,360 

45,397 

37-89 

34-82 

1890 

16,868,205 

6,996, 166 

41,475 

24-67 

13-90 

*  The  United  States  "  Census  Bulletin,"  No.  48,  March  27th,  1891. 


96  SOUTH  AFRICA 

In  connection  with  this  table  it  is  necessary  to  point  out 
that  (i),  the  States  included  in  the  enumeration  contain 
fifteen-sixteenths  of  the  total  coloured  population  ;  and, 
(2),  the  number  of  immigrants  from  Europe  or  from  the 
northern  States  of  the  Union  is  so  small  as  not  to  appreci- 
ably affect  the  rate  of  increase  of  the  whites.  This 
calculation  is  the  more  significant  from  the  fact  that  it 
comes  from  a  country  where  the  negro  race  is  already  in 
the  enjoyment  of  those  advantages  of  European  adminis- 
tration which  Mr  Pearson  thinks  would,  if  extended  to  the 
race  in  Central  Africa,  produce  a  disastrous  and  dispro- 
portionate increase.  * 

In  his  concluding  pages  Mr  Pearson  invites  his  readers 
to  think  of  civilised  society  under  the  figure  of  an  old 
man,  "  with  his  intellect  keen,  with  his  experience  bitter, 
with  his  appetites  unsatiated,  with  the  memory  of  past 
enjoyment  stinging  him." 

Society  is  "  doomed  to  live  on  into  the  ages,  with  all 
that  the  best  ordered  polity  can  secure  it,  with  all  in- 
herited treasures  of  beauty,  with  a  faith  in  science  that 
is  perpetually  mocked  by  weaker  and  weaker  results, 
and  with  no  spiritual  sense  to  understand  what  surrounds 
it,  with  the  mind's  vision  growing  dim,  with  the  appre- 
hension of  art  dwarfed  to  taking  comfort  in  bric-a-brac, 
with  no  hope  or  suggestion  of  sight  beyond  the  grave.  .  .  "  f 

It  is  a  more  hopeful  and  a  more  just  thought  to  present 
the  Anglo-Saxon  race  to  the  mind  under  the  figure  of  a 
youth. 

During  the  last  hundred  years  not  only  has  the  popula- 
tion   of    Europe    risen    from    145,000,000     in     1788    to 

*  The  general  conclusion,  based  upon  returns  for  a  hundred  years 
(given  above),  does  not  differ  materially  from  Mr  Pearson's  conclusion 
as  stated  in  Appendix  ii.,  p.  348  : — "  Assuming  the  facts  of  the  last 
census  to  be  unimpeachable,  it  seems  to  result  that  whites  and  blacks 
increase  in  nearly  the  same  ratio."  But  this  is  obviously  insufficient 
for  the  purposes  of  his  contention. 

+  P.  337. 


NATAL  AND  THE  KAFIR  PROBLEM        97 

350,000,000  in  1888,  but  during  the  same  period  the 
European  population  out  of  Europe  has  grown  at  a  far 
more  rapid  rate,  increasing  from  5,000,000  to  70,000,000. 
To  this  remarkable  increase  the  Anglo-Saxon  people  have 
been  by  far  the  largest  contributors;  and  Dr  Giffen  estimates* 
that,  "in  another  century,  at  the  past  rate  of  progress, 
there  will  be  nearly  1,000,000,000  of  this  race  alone 
in  the  world."  If,  therefore,  the  growth  of  population 
in  Europe  should  be  checked,  either  by  the  operation  of 
war,  or  by  mere  stagnation  such  as  we  see  in  France, 
it  is  to  the  Anglo-Saxon  settlements  in  America,  Australia 
and  South  Africa  that  we  must  look  to  maintain  the  pre- 
dominance of  the  white  races  in  the  world. 

It  is  then  that  the  citizens  of  America,  Australia  and 
South  Africa  will  justify  their  occupation  of  these  con- 
tinents. The  European  traveller  will  no  longer  scrutinise 
their  title  deeds,  or  contrast  the  broad  unfinished  streets 
and  the  wildernesses  of  corrugated-iron  sheds  and  shanties 
in  their  growing  towns  with  the  splendours  of  the  historic 
capitals  of  Europe,  or  compare  their  arid  and  unfertilised 
plains  with  the  soft  luxuriance  and  settled  beauty  of  an 
old  world  landscape.  Even  the  harsh  tone  of  colonial 
life  will  have  been  forgotten.  Or  rather,  it  will  then  be 
seen  that  for  these  and  other  deficiencies  there  is  a  large 
and  generous  compensation.  For  it  is  the  sense  of  youth 
permeating  the  hfe  of  these  new  communities  that  causes 
that  unreasonable — as  it  seems — complacency  with  condi- 
tions of  existence  so  palpably  defective,  and  that  irritation 
at  the  application  of  any  old  world  test,  which  seems  to 
characterise  Americans  and  Australians. 

And  yet  this  complacency  is  not  so  unreasonable  after 
all.  For  what  man  of  mature  years  would  not  exchange 
his  great  possessions,  or  high  position,  for  the  thirty,  or 
twenty,  or  even  ten  years  of  vigorous  action  with  its 
glittering  possibilities   that  a  young   man,   untrained   and 

*  Journal  of  the  Statistical  Society^  ]\xxiQ  1S85,  p.  loi. 
G 


98  SOUTH  AFRICA 

untried,  inferior  to  the  other  in  all  else  but  this  boon  of 
youth,  alone  possesses  ?  So  it  is  with  our  greater  England  : 
it  is  instinct  with  the  energy  of  anticipated  existence,  and 
the  torch  of  life  which  is  delivered  into  its  hands  burns 
ever  brighter  and  stronger  with  the  flames  of  Science 
Industry,  Peace  and  Justice. 


CHAPTER    VI, 

The  Bechuanaland  Settlement. 

'T^HE  original  possessors  of  the  soil  of  South  Africa 
"'■  were  not  the  dark-skinned  people,  the  Bantu, 
whom  we  have  been  led  by  unhappy  associations  to 
regard  as  the  "  natives,"  but  a  yellow-skinned  race, 
differing  in  little  but  their  woolly  hair  from  the  Chinese 
and  the  Malays.  At  the  time  of  Van  Riebeck's  expedi- 
tion— in  1652 — they  had  already  deeply  degraded  in  the 
scale  of  civilisation.  To-day  their  descendants,  the  50,000 
or  60,000  Hottentots,  Bushmen,  Namaquas  and  Korannas, 
have  no  political  or  social  importance. 

With  the  dark-skinned  race,  the  Bantu,  who  occupied 
the  southern  extremity  of  Africa  contemporaneously  with 
the  Europeans,  the  case  is  very  different.  They  out- 
number the  Europeans  in  the  proportion  of  six  to  one ; 
and  they  have  plainly  signified  their  intention  of  sharing 
the  country  with  them. 

Hitherto  we  have  been  mainly  concerned  with  the 
warlike  tribes  of  this  family,  the  Kafirs,  the  Zulus,  and 
the  Matabele  Zulus ;  we  have  now  to  consider  the  re- 
lations of  the  Europeans  with  one  of  the  peaceable  tribes, 
the  Bechuanas. 

The  distribution  of  the  mihtary  and  industrial  Bantu 
is  significant.  The  military  Bantu  are  found  in  possession 
of  the  most  fertile  regions.  They  are  found  between 
the  Drakensberg  mountains  and  the  Indian  Ocean,  and 
in  the  fertile  districts  to  the  north-west — the  Zoutpans- 
berg — and    to  the    south  of  the   range — Kaffraria.     The 

99 


loo  SOUTH  AFRICA 

industrial  Bantu  are  found  clinging  to  the  mountains 
as  in  Basutoland,  or  scattered  over  the  high  plateau 
which  forms  the  greater  part  of  the  Free  State  and 
the  Transvaal,  or  on  the  confines  of  the  Kalahari  desert, 
or  on  those  of  the  deserts  and  karoos  south  of  the 
Orange  River,  The  desert  was  their  ultimate  retreat 
when  they  were  compelled  to  retire  before  their  more 
warlike  kinsmen. 

The  military  and  industrial  Bantu  differ  in  their  tribal 
organisation,  in  their  dwellings,  and  in  their  pursuits. 
They  are  both  armed  with  the  same  weapon,  the  assegai  * 
or  spear ;  but  the  assegai  of  the  military  Bantu  is  short- 
handled  and  broad-bladed.  It  is  not  thrown  away,  but 
used  for  fighting  at  close  quarters.  The  manner  in  which 
the  assegai  is  used,  and  the  general  method  of  the  attack 
of  the  warlike  tribes,  are  well  described  by  Pringle  in  his 
poem  "  Mokanna's  Gathering  "  : 

"  Grasp  each  man  short  his  stabbing  spear, 
And  when  to  battle's  edge  we  come, 
Rush  on  their  ranks  in  full  career, 
And  to  their  hearts  strike  home." 

More  than  one  disaster  inflicted  upon  the  British  troops 
has  borne  witness  to  the  terrible  effect  of  this  "rush." 
The  assegai  of  the  industrial  Bantu  is  long  in  the  shaft 
and  light  in  the  blade;  it  is  used  as  a  javeHn,  and  is 
intended  mainly  for  the  purposes  of  the  chase.  Among 
the  military  Bantu  the  chief  is  a  despot  against  whose 
word  there  is  no  appeal :  among  the  industrial  Bantu 
the  power  of  the  chief  is  limited  ;  first,  by  the  council 
of  lesser  chiefs — his  brothers,  as  he  calls  them — and, 
secondly,  by  the  pitso,  or  general  assemblage  of  the 
freemen  of  the  tribe.  The  town  of  the  military  Bantu 
is  designed  solely  with  a  view  to  defence.  The  chiefs 
hut  and  the  cattle  pens  are  placed  in  the  centre,  and 
around  these  the  remaining  huts  are  built  in  concentric 
•    From  hasta  through  the  Portuguese. 


THE  BECHUANALAND  SETTLEMENT     loi 

circles.  The  town  of  the  industrial  Bantu  is  open ;  that 
is  to  say,  it  is  intended  to  serve  the  requirements  of  a 
peaceable  people.  Again  they  differ  in  their  respective 
pursuits.  The  sole  business  of  the  military  tribes  was 
warfare ;  they  planted  just  so  much  corn,  and  raised  just  so 
many  cattle  as  would  provide  for  their  immediate  wants. 
Outside  the  town  of  the  industrial  Bantu  we  find  plots  of 
garden  ground  cultivated,  and  they  are  acquainted  with 
the  art  of  smelting  ore  and  working  in  iron. 

The  chief  seats  of  the  industrial  tribes  are  Bechuanaland 
and  Basutoland.  Of  these  the  former,  Bechuanaland,  is 
interesting  to  Englishmen  as  being  the  scene  of  the 
labours  of  some  of  our  most  famous  missionaries,  Robert 
Moffat,  David  Livingstone,  and  Mr  John  Mackenzie.  It 
is  politically  important,  because  this  region,  inhabited  by 
peaceable  tribes  was,  and  is,  the  trade  route  from  the 
Cape  Colony  to  Central  Africa.  For  a  long  time  it  was 
the  only  door  into  the  interior  of  Africa,  and  this  door 
would  have  been  permanently  closed  by  the  Boers  except 
for  the  interposition  of  the  broad  shoulders  of  a  single 
Englishman,  Livingstone.  After  his  house  had  been 
plundered  by  a  Boer  commando  towards  the  end  of 
1852 — the  year  of  the  Sand  River  Convention — Living- 
stone turned  from  his  missionary  labours  to  the  work 
of  exploration.  In  his  own  words — "  The  Boers  resolved 
to  shut  up  the  interior,  and  I  determined  to  open  the 
country."  *  To  the  missionaries,  therefore,  we  owe — 
quite  apart  from  their  general  services  in  the  cause  of 
Christianity  and  civilisation — the  establishment  of  British 
authority  in  Bechuanaland,  and,  indirectly,  the  acquisi- 
tion of  the  whole  of  the  vast  central  region  now 
administered  by  the  British  South  Africa  Company. 

Had   time   permitted    it  would    have    been  interesting 
to   have    considered    Basutoland    in    detail.      In    some 
respects   the    Basutos   are   the    most    interesting   of    the 
*  "Missionary  Travels,"  1857. 


102  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Bantu  peoples  in  South  Africa.  We  find  the  tribal 
organisation  most  completely  developed  among  them, 
and  they  inhabit  an  exceedingly  picturesque  country, 
the  Switzerland  of  South  Africa  it  has  been  called. 
Moreover,  it  is  impossible  not  to  sympathise  with  Moshesh, 
the  old  chief,  who  could  express  the  requirements  of 
political  expediency  in  a  phrase  so  beautiful  as  that  in 
which  he  petitioned  for  the  protection  of  the  Imperial 
Government.  This  was  in  1868,  when  he  and  his  people 
were  threatened  with  extinction,  or  at  any  rate  dispersion, 
at  the  hands  of  the  Free  State.  Moshesh  then  prayed  : — 
"  Let  me  and  my  people  rest  and  live  under  the  large 
folds  of  the  flag  of  England  before  I  am  no  more." 
This  request  was  granted;  but  in  1871  Basutoland  was 
annexed  to  the  Cape  Colony.  In  1880  the  Colonial 
Government  endeavoured  to  enforce  the  disarmament 
measures,  which  they  had  been  led  to  adopt  in  con- 
sequence of  the  general  disturbances  among  the  Bantu 
at  the  period  of  the  Zulu  war,  in  Basutoland.  After  an 
expensive  and  unsuccessful  campaign,  they  determined, 
in  1883,  to  abandon  the  country.  The  Imperial  Govern- 
ment regarded  this  proposal  as  disastrous  to  the  prestige 
of  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa,  and  they  again  "  took 
over"  Basutoland  in  1884. 

To  return  to  Bechuanaland. 

Tradition  tells  us  that  in  the  distant  past  one  Morolong 
led  the  Baralongs  from  the  far  North,  and  that  the  tribe 
settled  on  the  Molopo  River  under  Mabua,  fourth  in 
descent  from  Morolong.  Here  the  Baralongs  were 
attacked  and  dispersed  by  the  Matabele  Zulus,  under 
Moselekatse.  On  their  dispersal  one  section  was  led 
by  Moroko  southwards  to  Thaba  N'chu.  Two  other 
sections,  respectively  led  by  Taoane,  the  father  of 
Montsioa,  and  Machabi,  also  found  their  way  into  the 
country  between  the  Orange  River  and  the  Vaal.  In 
1836    the    emigrant   farmers    entered    this    same    district, 


THE  BECHUANALAND  SETTLEMENT     103 

and  shortly  afterwards  the  Boers,  under  Hendrik  Potgieter, 
entered  into  an  alliance  with  the  Baralongs  for  the  purpose 
of  attacking  Moselekatse.  After  the  "old  lion  of  the 
North"  had  been  defeated  and  driven  beyond  the 
Limpopo,  Taoane  returned  with  his  following  to  the 
south  bank  of  the  Moroko.  By  virtue  of  this  conquest 
Hendrik  Potgieter  issued  a  proclamation  in  which  he 
laid  claim  to  the  whole  of  the  country  which  had  been 
overrun  by  the  Zulu  chief.  Under  this  proclamation  the 
Boers  (and  the  Transvaal  Government)  claimed  to  exercise 
sovereign  powers  over  all  the  Bechuana  tribes ;  and  in 
1868,  President  Pretorius  issued  a  proclamation  by  which 
the  Transvaal  authority  was  declared  to  extend  as  far  as 
Lake  N'gami.  The  British  Government,  however,  at  once 
protested  against  this  proclamation,  and  it  was  withdrawn. 
Although  some  of  the  Bechuana  chiefs  recognised  the 
sovereignty  of  the  Boers,  both  Taoane  and  Montsioa,  who 
succeeded  his  father  in  1849,  appear  to  have  repeatedly 
refused  submission.  They  maintained  that  the  Baralongs 
reoccupied  their  country  as  of  right,  and  not  by  permission 
of  the  Boers.  On  March  27th,  1870,  Montsioa  wrote  to 
the  Landdrost  of  Potchefstroom  to  complain  that  taxes 
had  been  demanded  of  his  people  by  an  official  of  the 
Transvaal  Government.  "  If  there  is  not  soon  made  an 
end  of  this  lawless  matter,"  he  wrote,  "  I  shall  be  obliged 
to  hand  it  over  to  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  High  Com- 
missioner, Sir  P.  E.  Wodehouse,  with  the  earnest  request 
to  arbitrate  between  me  and  my  most  noble  allies."  * 

In  187 1  Griqualand  West  was  occupied  by  the  Imperial 
Government,  and  in  the  same  year  an  attempt  was  made 
to  settle  this  question  of  the  South-Western  frontier  of  the 
Transvaal,  by  arbitration.  The  Keate  Av/ard  was,  how- 
ever, repudiated  by  the  Volksraad,  and  the  question 
remained  in  abeyance.  In  1877  the  Transvaal  was 
annexed,  and  the  border  was  delimited.    In  1878  Bechuana- 

*  "  Bechuanaland,"  by  a  member  of  the  Cape  Legislature,  p.  2. 


I04  SOUTH  AFRICA 

land  was  in  a  state  of  great  disturbance,  and  the  Griqua- 
land  West  police  occupied  the  country  for  some  time. 
After  they  had  been  withdrawn  Imperial  agents  were 
placed  with  two  of  the  chiefs,  Mathlabane  and  Manko- 
roane.  In  1881  the  independent  Transvaal  Govern- 
ment was  re-estabUshed  under  the  terms  of  the  Convention 
of  Pretoria.  In  November  of  that  year  the  High  Com- 
missioner, Sir  Hercules  Robinson,  telegraphed  *  to  the 
Civil  Commissioner  at  Kimberley,  informing  him  that 
"  in  consequence  of  the  final  definition  of  the  Transvaal 
boundary,  the  Government  did  not  intend  to  continue 
to  maintain  representatives  outside  the  Colonial  frontier." 
These  agents  were  then  withdrawn.  In  the  next  two  years, 
1 88 1-3,  Bechuanaland  became  more  and  more  disturbed. 
Montsioa,  the  Baralong  chief,  was  at  war  with  his  brother 
Moshette,  and  Mankoroane,  the  Batlapin  chief,  was 
engaged  in  a  struggle  with  David  Massou,  the  head  of 
the  Korannas.  Of  these  four  chiefs,  Montsioa  and 
Mankoroane  claimed  the  protection  of  the  Imperial 
Government,  while  Moshette  and  Massou  acknowledged 
the  sovereignty  of  the  Transvaal.  All  four  chiefs  were 
assisted  by  European  volunteers,  or  "  freebooters," 
who  were  to  be  rewarded  for  their  services  by  grants 
of  land ;  that  is  to  say — by  the  land  taken  from  the 
rival  chief,  by  the  spoils  of  war  in  fact. 

In  November  1883,  the  Transvaal  delegates,  Messrs 
Kruger,  Du  Toit  and  Smit,  arrived  in  England.  The 
object  of  their  visit  was  to  obtain  certain  modifications 
of  the  Convention  of  Pretoria.  In  this  object  they  were 
successful,  and  on  February  27th,  1884,  the  Convention 
of  London  was  signed.  As  this  Convention  governs  the 
existing  relationship  between  Great  Britain  and  the  South 
African  Republic — the  name  which  was  now  formally 
recognised  as  the  designation  of  the  Transvaal  State — 
and  as  there  appears  to  be  a  good  deal  of  misunder- 
•  C— 3098. 


THE  BECHUANALAXD  SETTLEMENT  1=5 

standing  on  the  r^:;rr:,  I  give  tbe  telegram  in  wiiich 
Lotd  Der:;  :'rt  :':.-,'.  5r::t:iry  for  tbe  Ccdomes,  an- 
nounced i:.t  ^rotHtioos.  This  tdi^;tam 
wasaddre.-:  -  -  1  :  ■  7:  - ~—h.  the  acting  Goremor 
at  tiie  O.:  "  -  Ht:  -e  ?.:\'^-z~  had  also  come 
rol^^laiii  :  :  :  1:  •.-  1  I  i5c5e  might  have 
tbeber=f:  ::'  :.  f  ii^.:-  i:  ■-.  -.  :  ;.  v 

"C ::    T    :     -   ;  ^tI  ::-:z      -^     i ::       v:  ^ra  boandaiy 
E5  r::::  Ti  :   r  -   it        1:        British    Pio- 

:r:'t;:i:t  ".   t    ::-"::;     : -::  ir    -  :ir. :  ■  i-i.    e^abiisiied 

■=r::h  Zz.z.\:-:i  ::r.i-:.:  7:.r;  :::r._:T  z: :  ;.-.:Taent  of 
z-:'i^:  : :  ^::.ii  .  r  z::  '.Mt  ::.-:  -::'r':i  :  :-:iierating 
-  .;        .      :.         ::::.-:.    1-  '        --'     Debt 

:.  :-::t-     :.-.i_:ii.       Sarne    c:-i.T:t    intemal 

t     -    7  - :  -  fraal    as    in    Orange    Free    State. 
d^omalic    ''--     . 'se    with 
::-r,r    r:    .-    -  ;.^-    ::    itie^i:    Qmeais  f-       -:^7-alto 
;"::.:.•    'rr'-rj        lt.7.i:T^     i;^;iearwcl-    ;i:.i--:     Lad 
:    •:         7t      r      i:    t;-     :^:     goveromez-i.       Vi-    ziay 


io6  SOUTH  AFRICA 

The  special  articles  in  the  new  Commission  were  as 
follows  : — 

IV.  And  we  do  hereby  require  and  empower  you  as  such 
our  High  Commissioner  ...  to  take  all  such  measures 
and  do  all  such  things  in  relation  to  the  native  tribes  in 
South  Africa  with  which  it  is  expedient  that  we  should 
have  relations,  and  which  are  not  included  within  the 
territory  of  either  of  the  said  Republics  or  of  any  foreign 
power,  as  are  lawful  and  appear  to  you  to  be  advisable  for 
maintaining  our  possessions  in  peace  and  safety,  and  for 
promoting  the  peace,  order,  and  good  government  of 
the  tribes  aforesaid,  and  for  preserving  friendly  relations 
with  them. 

V.  And  we  do  hereby  authorise  and  empower  you,  by 
instruments  under  your  hand  and  seal,  to  appoint  so  many 
fit  persons  as  you  shall  think  necessary  ...  to  be  your 
Deputy  Commissioners,  or  to  be  resident  Commissioners  or 
assistant  Commissioners  .  .  .  [Such  Commissioners  to  have 
the  powers,  etc.,  within  their  districts  of  the  High  Commis- 
sioner.] 

VI.  And  ...  we  further  authorise,  etc.,  you  to  appoint 
such  border  agents  and  other  officers  as  you  shall  think 
necessary,  if  provision  shall  have  been  made  for  their 
payment  .  .   . 

This  was  a  very  significant  departure,  for,  in  under- 
taking the  administration  of  the  territories  occupied  by  the 
natives,  the  Imperial  Government  had  assumed  the 
further  and  very  necessary  duty  of  regulating  and  controlling 
the  northward  expansion  of  the  Europeans. 

In  pursuance  of  this  new  policy  Colonel  (now  Sir) 
Marshall  Clarke  took  over  Basutoland  in  March  (1884), 
and  in  May  Mr  Mackenzie  arrived  in  Bechuanaland  for  the 
purpose  of  giving  effect  to  the  newly  proclaimed  pro- 
tectorate. 

When  Mr  Mackenzie  arrived  in  Bechuanaland  he  found 
that  the  volunteers  in  the  service  of  Moshelte  and  Massou 


THE  BECHUANALAND  SETTLEMENT     107 

had  established  two  independent  communities,  the  "re- 
pubUcs "  of  Land  Goshen  and  Stellaland.  The  burghers 
of  Stellaland  submitted,  but  the  burghers  of  Land  Goshen 
refused  to  acknowledge  the  authority  of  the  Deputy  Com- 
missioner. During  the  next  few  months  the  country  re- 
mained in  a  state  of  anarchy,  which  culminated  in  the  out- 
rages perpetrated  by  the  freebooters  of  Rooi  Grond  at  the 
end  of  July  and  in  the  month  of  August.  Rooi  Grond,  it 
should  be  explained,  was  the  capital  of  Land  Goshen. 
It  had  been  cleverly  placed  on  the  line  of  the  new  south- 
western boundary  of  the  Transvaal,  so  that  the  town  stood 
partly  in  the  Transvaal  and  partly  in  the  protectorate.  On  the 
30th  of  July  Mr  Mackenzie  was  withdrawn  by  Sir  Hercules 
Robinson.  It  was  stated,  at  the  time  the  appointment  had 
been  made,  that  the  mere  fact  of  Mr  Mackenzie  being  a 
missionary,  and  therefore  known  to  sympathise  with  the 
natives,  was  sufficient  to  render  his  success  impossible. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  appears  that  Mr  Mackenzie's  actions 
as  Deputy  Commissioner  were  both  equitable  and  prudent ; 
and  it  seems  probable  that,  if  he  had  been  properly  supported, 
that  is  to  say,  if  he  had  received  the  200  police  for  which  he 
asked,  he  would  have  established  his  authority  in  spite  of 
the  very  great  opposition  with  which  he  met.  In  deference 
to  the  opinion  of  his  colonial  ministers,  which  Sir  Hercules 
Robinson  was  bound  to  consider,  Mr  Mackenzie  was  how- 
ever withdrawn,  and  Mr  Cecil  J.  Rhodes,  a  colonial  ex- 
minister,  was  appointed  to  succeed  him.  Mr  Rhodes  w^as 
accompanied  by  Captain  Bower,  who  filled  the  newly 
created  office  of  Imperial  Secretary.  These  two  gentlemen 
fared  no  better,  but  rather  worse,  than  Mr  Mackenzie. 

The  freebooters  of  Rooi  Groud  were  contemptuously  in- 
different to  the  arrival  of  these  new  officials.  They  did  not 
even  think  it  worth  while  to  desist  from  the  attack  upon 
Montsioa's  town,  in  which  they  were  then  engaged,  and 
scarcely  allowed  them  an  opportunity  of  delivering  their 
message. 


io8  SOUTH  AFRICA 

At  this  point  in  the  history  of  South  Africa  the 
authority  of  the  Imperial  Government  was  "  at  its  lowest 
ebb."     Mr  Mackenzie  writes  in  "  Austral  Africa  " — * 

"  No  Imperial  officer  before  or  since  was  ever  in  such 
a  position — dogging  the  steps  of  freebooters  in  the  Trans- 
vaal with  proferred  repudiation  of  our  own  accredited  and 
official  actions  within  an  English  protectorate,  and  dogging 
their  footsteps  in  vain.  Cape  Colonist,  Free  State  farmer, 
roving  European — each  and  all  became  aware  that  day 
that  there  was  no  Imperial  or  Colonial  authority  in 
Bechuanaland.  Delarey  and  Van  Niekerk  were  masters, 
but  they  gladly  acknowledged  that  they  too  had  a  master 
— the  Transvaal  Government,  then  represented  on  the 
border  by  General  Joubert ;  and  they  accordingly  proceeded 
to  lay  the  affairs  of  the  protectorate  before  General  Joubert 
at  Goshen,  while  the  Secretary  of  the  High  Commissioner 
waited  the  turn  of  events,  and  the  wishes  of  others,  at  Mr 
Delarey's  farm." 

On  September  loth,  President  Kruger  issued  a  proclama- 
tion by  which  "  in  the  interests  of  humanity "  he  "  pro- 
claimed and  ordained  "  the  contending  chiefs,  Moshette  and 
Montsioa,  to  be  under  the  protection  of  the  South  African 
Republic.  The  proclamation  was  stated  to  be  made  "  pro- 
visionally "  and  subject  to  Article  iv.  -f  of  the  Convention 
of  London. 

JVotv  the  Transvaal  had  gone  too  far.  The  broad 
contempt  of  the  Imperial  Government,  and  the  cynical 
disregard  of  the  interests  of  the  mother  colony,  which 
the  Boers  had  manifested  in  this  action,  produced  a  re- 
vulsion of  public  opinion  in  the  Cape  Colony.  It  was 
seen  that  what  had  been  represented  as  a  question  of 
nationality  was  also  a  question  of  principle ;  that  the 
question  at   issue  was   not  merely  whether  the  Dutch  or 

•  Vol.  I.  p.  433. 

t  Under  Article  iv.  the  S.  A.  Republic  remains  within  the  sphere 
of  British  influence  as  regards  its  foreign  relations. 


THE  BECHUANALAND  SETTLEMENT     109 

the  English  should  take  the  lead  in  South  Africa,  but 
also  whether  the  inevitable  northward  expansion  of  the 
Europeans  should  be  an  honourable  triumph  over  the 
forces  of  nature  and  of  barbarism,  or  whether  this  advance 
should  be  polluted  by  crime  and  injustice.  And  when 
this  was  realised  there  arose  in  the  minds  of  all  law  abid- 
ing colonists  an  earnest  desire  for  the  intervention  of 
England  (Note  21). 

When  this  state  of  affairs  was  made  known  to  the 
Imperial  Government  they  very  naturally  hesitated.  They 
declared — the  declaration  was  made  publicly  by  Mr  Evelyn 
Ashley,  the  Under-Secretary  for  the  colonies — that,  before 
England  could  again  interfere  by  force  of  arms  in  the 
affairs  of  South  Africa,  she  must  be  assured  of  the 
support  of  public  opinion  in  the  Cape  Colony. 

The  reply  to  this  challenge  came  in  the  form  of  a  great 
public  meeting  which  was  held  in  the  Corn  Exchange  at 
Capetown  on  September  24th.  This  meeting  was  both 
large  and  representative.  It  was  declared  by  the  Volksblad 
to  be  "  the  most  important  public  meeting  held  in  the 
colony,"  since  the  meeting  held  in  1849  to  protest  against 
the  formation  of  a  penal  settlement  at  the  Cape.  Among 
the  resolutions  passed  the  first  recorded  the  opinion : — 

"  That  the  intervention  of  Her  Majesty's  Government 
in  Bechuanaland  for  the  maintenance  of  the  trade  route 
to  the  interior,  and  the  preservation  of  native  tribes  to 
whom  promises  of  Imperial  protection  had  been  given,  was 
an  act  dictated  by  the  urgent  claims  of  humanity  no  less 
than  by  the  necessities  of  a  wise  and  far-seeing  policy." 

And  the  second : 

"  That  any  failure  on  the  part  of  Her  Majesty's  Govern- 
ment to  maintain  its  just  rights  under  the  Convention  of 
London,  entered  into  with  the  Transvaal,  and  to  fulfil  its 
obligations  towards  the  native  tribes  in  the  protectorate 
of  Bechuanaland  would  be  fatal  to  British  supremacy  in 
South  Africa." 


no  SOUTH  AFRICA 

After  this  assurance  of  moral  support  the  Imperial 
Government  proceeded  to  take  action.  On  the  9th  of 
October  the  High  Commissioner  formally  called  upon 
the  Government  of  the  South  African  Republic  to  with- 
draw their  proclamation ;  and  this  was  at  once  done. 
Meanwhile  an  expedition  was  equipped  and  despatched 
sufficient  to  establish  the  Queen's  authority  in  Bechuana- 
land,  if  necessary,  by  force  of  arms  :  and  the  command 
of  the  expedition  was  given  to  Sir  Charles  Warren. 

While  the  Bechuanaland  expedition  was  being  de- 
spatched, the  Colonial  Government  made  an  attempt  to 
settle  the  Bechuanaland  question  without  the  intervention 
of  the  Imperial  Government.  Their  object  in  making 
this  attempt  was  stated  to  be  "  an  earnest  desire  to  avert 
bloodshed  and  avoid  the  creation  of  race  bitterness  and 
national  jealousies."  They  were  also  of  opinion  that  the 
appearance  of  an  Imperial  force  in  South  Africa  at  this 
crisis  would  cause  a  "risk  being  run  of  feelings  being 
aroused  which  might  lead  to  a  calamitous  race  war,  and 
of  unsettling  society  in  every  relation."  Acting  under 
this  belief,  two  members  of  the  Colonial  Ministry  (the 
Premier,  Sir  Thomas  Upington,  and  the  Treasurer-General, 
Sir  Gordon  Sprigg)  proceeded  to  Rooi  Grond  ;  and  on 
the  22nd  of  November  certain  conditions  submitted  by 
these  ministers  were  accepted  by  the  representatives  of  Land 
Goshen.  The  agreement  provided  for  the  annexation  of 
"  the  territory  known  as  Land  Goshen "  to  the  Cape 
Colony ;  and  it  was  transmitted  in  extenso  by  telegraph 
to  the  Imperial  Government.  After  a  fortnight  of  sus- 
pense it  was  known  at  the  Cape  that  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment had  refused  to  ratify  the  settlement.  In  the  opinion 
of  Sir  Hercules  Robinson  the  terms  proposed  were 
"  equivalent  to  recognition  as  a  de  facto  Government  of 
freebooters  who  had  made  war  on  the  British  protectorate, 
and  to  acknowledgment  of  the  bona  fide  character  of  the 
claims  of  the  brigands  to  land  in  Montsioa's  country."  * 
*  C-4275. 


THE  BECHUANALAND  SETTLEMENT     iii 

General  Warren  arrived  at  Capetown  on  December 
4th,  and  on  the  following  day  the  decision  of  the  Imperial 
Government  was  communicated  to  the  Colonial  Ministry. 
Within  less  than  a  year,  on  the  loth  of  November  1885, 
he  was  reading  an  account  of  the  Bechuanaland  expedition 
at  the  Colonial  Institute.  This  expedition  stands  out  in 
the  history  of  South  Africa  as  perhaps  the  one  completely 
successful  armed  intervention  of  the  Imperial  Government, 
and  therefore  a  somewhat  lengthy  extract  from  this 
account  *  will  not  be  out  of  place. 

The  duties  with  which  Sir  Charles  Warren  was  charged 
by  the  terms  of  his  commission  were  : — 

"To  remove  the  fiUibusters  from  Bechuanaland,  to 
pacificate  the  country,  to  reinstate  the  natives  in  their 
land,  and  to  take  such  measures  as  were  necessary  to 
prevent  further  depredations,  and,  finally,  to  hold  the 
country  until  its  further  destination  [was]  known." 

"There  was  every  intention,"  Sir  Charles  Warren  says, 
"  to  fight  on  the  part  of  the  fiUibusters,  and  on  the  part  of 
those  who  sympathised  with  them,  but  when  they  found 
that  we  were  prepared  at  all  points,  they  did  not  know 
how  to  commence.  They  received  no  provocation,  and 
they  simply  retired  before  us  and  disappeared.  This 
was  due  in  a  great  measure  to  the  rapidity  with  which 
the  troops  were  organised,  disciplined  and  drilled  and 
marched  up  the  country.  In  four  months  from  the  date 
of  leaving  England  we  had  occupied  Land  Goshen,  and 
driven  the  fiUibusters  out.  Within  a  month  of  our  leaving 
England,  viz.,  on  December  13th,  the  head  of  the  column 
was  encamped  on  the  Orange  River,  and  recruiting  was 
going  on  rapidly;  three  regiments  of  colonists  of  500  men 
each,  and  a  battery  of  artillery  and  corps  of  guides  were 
enrolled :  two  of  them,  namely,  the  2nd  mounted  Rifles 
and  the  Pioneers,  were  brought  together  from  all  parts 

*  "  Our  Portion  in  South  Africa,"  by  General  Sir  Charles  Warren, 
"  Proceedings  of  Royal  Colonial  Institute,"  Vol.  xvii. 


112  SOUTH  AFRICA 

of  the  colony,  and  the  3rd  mounted  Rifles  was  recruited 
from  the  Diamond  Fields.  Methuen's  Horse,  which  did 
not  arrive  in  the  colony  till  December  26th,  and  which 
was  composed  entirely  of  English  volunteers,  was  taken 
straight  up  by  rail  to  the  Orange  River,  and  there  organised 
and  drilled,  and  by  January  22nd  (1885),  that  is  to  say, 
within  six  weeks  from  our  arrival  in  the  Cape  Colony, 
the  whole  of  the  troops  had  marched  up  ninety  miles 
through  Griqualand  West,  and  were  assembled  at  Barkly 
Camp  on  the  Vaal  River,  numbering  nearly  5000  men  ; 
2000  horses  had  been  bought  and  shod,  saddles  fitted, 
and  men  mounted  and  drilled.  Within  six  weeks  of  that 
date  the  head  of  the  column  had  occupied  Rooi  Grond, 
and  the  whole  line  of  communication  down  to  Barkly, 
a  distance  of  230  miles." 

Certain  military  details  which  Sir  Charles  Warren  gives 
are  interesting.  In  the  first  place  we  notice  that  troops 
were  employed  which  had  been  raised  in  the  colony.  These 
included  men  who  could  not  only  shoot  straight,  but  who 
had  been  trained  to  shoot  in  the  very  difficult  atmosphere 
of  South  Africa.  Next,  the  officers  and  men  were  "  dressed 
alike."  It  will  be  remembered,  in  connection  with  the  en- 
gagements in  the  Transvaal  revolt,  that  there  was  a  very 
heavy  relative  mortality  among  the  officers  ;  the  fact  being 
that  the  Boer  marksmen  shot  down  the  officers  first.  This 
fact — the  fact  of  the  men  and  officers  being  dressed  alike — 
was  "  described  by  the  Transvaal  papers  as  being  '  very 
unfair.' "  Also  war-balloons  were  employed  for  purposes  of 
scouting.  These  were  a  "  matter  of  mystery  and  alarm,  and 
considered  unfair  and  contrary  to  their  ideas  of  the  usages 
of  war."  Again  Sir  Charles  Warren  was  a  "local  man," 
and  he  was  able  to  make  use  of  his  knowledge  of  the 
country.  The  Boers  declared  that  it  would  be  impossible 
for  the  British  force  to  reach  Rooi  Grond  without  entering 
Transvaal  territory  to  obtain  water.  Sir  Charles  Warren 
"  dug  wells,  and  by  the  use  of  tanks  prevented  the  water 


THE  BECHUAN ALAND  SETTLEMENT     113 

from  flowing  back,"  and  thus  kept  the  supply  sweet  and 
wholesome. 

"  On  the  other  hand,"  he  adds,  "  a  blunder,  or  a  desire 
on  the  part  of  any  of  the  officers  or  men  to  make  them- 
selves conspicuous,  and  sacrifice  the  interests  of  the 
expedition,  must  have  precipitated  an  action." 

On  his  return  from  Bechuanaland  Sir  Charles  Warren 
was  received  everywhere  with  the  "  warmest  enthusiasm." 
Not  only  were  the  receptions  at  the  large  towns  in  the 
colony  described  as  being  of  an  "  unprecedented  descrip- 
tion," but  a  "  most  gratifying "  reception  was  accorded 
to  him  by  the  President  and  people  of  the  Free  State. 
"  There  was,"  he  says,  "  one  general  sentiment  throughout 
the  colony  of  gratitude  to  the  mother-country  for  having 
given  peace  with  honour,  having  averted  civil  war,  and 
having  restored  to  Englishmen  the  prestige  and  position 
which  they  had  enjoyed  in  former  days." 

After  the  forces  were  withdrawn  Southern  Bechuanaland 
was  created  a  Crown  Colony,  and  its  government  was 
entrusted  to  an  "administrator."  Shortly  afterwards  the 
original  protectorate  was  extended,  and  the  sphere  of 
British  influence  advanced  to  the  Zambesi.  Subsequently, 
in  1895,  the  Crown  Colony  of  Bechuanaland  was  incor- 
porated into  the  Cape  Colony. 

Since  this  time — that  is  to  say,  since  the  date  of  the 
Bechuanaland  expedition  —  England  has  continued  to 
perform  the  duties  of  a  central  authority  in  respect  to 
the  native  tribes  outside  the  Republics ;  and  to-day  all 
these  native  territories,  with  the  exception  of  Swaziland, 
are  administered  by  Imperial  or  Colonial  officers.  The 
burden  of  these  responsibilities,  when  once  it  was  frankly 
accepted,  has  proved  less  heavy  than  was  anticipated. 
It  is  found  possible  to  maintain  order  and  administer 
justice  in  a  native  territory  by  means  of  European  officials 
and  magistrates  supported  only  by  a  small  body  of 
permanent    police ;    and    the    expenses    of    this    simple 

H 


114  SOUTH  AFRICA 

administration  are  practically  defrayed  by  the  proceeds 
of  the  hut-tax  levied  upon  the  natives,  together  with  those 
of  the  trading-licenses  paid  by  European  traders. 

We  can  form  some  idea  of  the  character  of  the  men 
who  are  engaged  upon  out-post  duty  in  this  part  of  the 
empire  from  the  vivid  description  of  the  Bechuanaland 
Border  Police  given  by  Lord  Randolph  Churchill.  He 
visited  South  Africa  in  1891,  and  the  portion  of  the 
force  he  describes  *  were  then  stationed  at  Fort  Tuli,  on 
the  northern  boundary  of  the  Transvaal. 

"  Here,  some  thousands  of  miles  away  from  England, 
in  a  country  inhabited  by  a  numerous  tribe  of  savages 
of  noted  ferocity,  not  a  hundred  miles  from  the  kraal  of 
the  great  Lobengula,  was  a  tiny  group  of  men  holding 
their  own,  maintaining  their  authority  partly  by  their  own 
reputation  for  efificiency,  partly  because  they  represented 
the  might  and  prestige  of  the  empire ;  never  dreaming, 
even  for  a  moment,  that  a  shadow  even  of  danger  could 
approach  them,  never  doubting  their  ability  to  dissipate 
any  danger  should  it  arise.  This  is  the  group  of  military 
force  which  holds  for  England  a  portion  of  South  Africa, 
from  Kimberley  to  Fort  Salisbury,  comprising  a  territory 
as  large  as  Germany  and  France,  replete  with  elements 
of  a  hostile  and  dangerous  nature." 

In  this  and  the  preceding  chapters  we  have  traced  the 
European  occupation  of  South  Africa  through  a  period 
of  little  less  than  two  centuries  and  a  half.  We  have  seen 
how  the  station  established  by  the  Dutch  East  India  Com- 
pany at  Table  Bay  in  1652  became  a  settlement;  and 
how  these  settlers  gradually  advanced  into  the  interior, 
meeting  with  little  opposition  from  the  yellow  races  which 
constituted  the  sole  inhabitants  of  these  regions,  and  how, 
by  the  end  of  the  last  century,  the  south-western  corner 
of  Africa  was  thinly  peopled  with  some  20,000  Dutch- 
speaking  Europeans.  Meanwhile,  a  dark-skinned  race — 
*  "  Men,  Mines,  and  Animals,"  p.  125. 


THE  BECHUANALAND  SETTLEMENT     115 

the  Bantu — had  simultaneously  advanced  from  the  north 
and  occupied  the  fertile  regions  between  the  Drakens- 
berg  and  the  Indian  Ocean. 

At   the    beginning    of   the    present   century    the    Cape 
settlements  were  ceded  by  Holland  to  Great  Britain,  and 
shortly  after  this  change  of  administration  the  stream  of 
European  colonisation   setting   northwards  and   eastwards 
met  the  southward  flow  of  the  Bantu.     For  fifty  years  the 
expansion  of  the  Europeans,  reinforced  by  English  immigra- 
tion,   became  little  more  than  a  record  of  the  conflicts 
between  the  British  troops  and  the  warlike  tribes  of  this 
family.     When  the  century  was  half-way  through,  England, 
wearied  by  the  burden  of  the  Kafir  wars,  recognised  the 
mdependence  of  the  emigrant  farmers,  and  became  a  party 
to  the  dismemberment  of  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa. 
Twenty-five  years  later,  when  the  discovery  of  diamonds  had 
revealed  an  unexpected  source  of  wealth,  English  interest 
in    South   Africa  revived,   and  an    attempt  was   made  to 
reunite  the  colonies  and  states  by  the  creation  of  a  federal 
government,  and  so  recover  the  European  solidarity  which 
had  been  lost.     The  attempt  came  too  late.     The  evils 
which   a   central   government   could    have  checked   were 
already  full  grown.     The  well-intentioned    efforts  of  the 
Imperial  Government  encountered  a  double  resistance — 
a  general  rising  of  the  Bantu,  and  an  active  and  concerted 
hostility  on  the  part  of  the  Dutch  population  in  and  out  of 
the  Cape  Colony.     These  forces  might  have  been  overcome, 
and  an  Imperial  policy,  at  once  just  and  progressive,  have 
eventually   triumphed   over   all   opposition,    had   not   the 
counsels  of  England  been  divided.     In  the  Bechuanaland 
settlement   we   have    reached    the    turning   point    in    the 
history    of    England's    administration    of    South    Africa. 
From  that  time  forward  the   responsibilities  of  a   central 
power    have   been  frankly  accepted   by  England,  and,    in 
spite  of  temporary  disturbances,  there  is  reason  to  believe 
that  his  declared  intention  to  do  justice  to  the  colonists  of 
both  nationalities  will  ultimately  reconcile  the  conflicting 


ii6  SOUTH  AFRICA 

claims  of  Dutch  and  English,  and  the  conflicting  interests 
of  farmer  and  capitalist. 

The  remaining  chapters  are  mainly  concerned  with  an 
account  of  the  gradual  development  of  the  material  resources 
of  South  Africa.  We  shall  find  that  deficiencies  of  soil  and 
climate  have  been  counterbalanced  by  a  remarkable  profusion 
of  mineral  wealth.  That  under  the  impulse  of  gold  discovery, 
commerce  has  expanded,  population  increased,  railways 
have  been  constructed,  and  European  civilisation  has  been 
carried  up  to  the  Zambesi ;  but  that  this  material  prosperity 
has  brought  in  its  train  a  new  series  of  problems — not  hope- 
less, but  requiring  infinite  tact,  judgment,  and  determination 
for  their  solution. 


CHAPTER    VI  I. 

Agricultural  and  Pastoral  Resources. 

"\^rHEN  the  Emperor  Napoleon  I.  wished  to  put  a 
^  ^  taunt  upon  England,  he  called  the  English  a 
nation  of  shop-keepers.  But  Napoleon  was  scarcely 
original.  Many  years  before  a  great  English  writer  had 
noticed  the  same  thing,  that  Englishmen  were  a  trading 
race.  The  inference,  however,  which  Adam  Smith  drew, 
was  the  very  opposite  of  that  which  was,  presumably,  the 
inference  of  Napoleon ;  for  Adam  Smith  adds  that  the 
desire  of  obtaining  markets  for  their  produce  had  led 
the  English  to  found  the  Atlantic  Colonies  and  commence 
the  conquest  of  India.  And  when  Max  O'Rell  wishes 
to  give  a  descriptive  title  to  his  last  book,  which  contains 
his  impressions  of  the  British  Colonies,  he  calls  it  "John 
Bull  and  Co." 

Well,  let  us  accept  this  continental  estimate  of  our 
national  life  and  character.  For  the  moment  let  us  for- 
get such  names  as  Shakespeare  and  Milton,  Bacon  and 
Newton,  Reynolds  and  Gainsborough.  Without  any 
obtrusive  patriotism  we  can  find  some  satisfaction  even 
in  this  restricted  view  of  our  position  in  the  common- 
wealth of  nations.  For  the  external  trade  of  England — 
and  by  England  is  meant  the  United  Kingdom — is  far 
greater  than  that  of  its  brilliant  and  wealthy  continental 
neighbour,  far  greater,  too,  than  that  of  its  own  great 
daughter  state — 

•'The  beacon-bright  Republic,  far-off  sighted." 


ii8  SOUTH  AFRICA 

And  that,  too,  in  spite  of  the  marvellous  fertihty  of 
France  and  the  giant  proportions  of  the  United  States. 

The  external  or  sea-borne  trade  of  England  for  the 
year  1889  amounts  (in  round  numbers)  to  a  total  value 
of  seven  hundred  and  forty  million  pounds  (see  Appendix^ 
Table  II.) 

I  take  this  year,  the  year  1889,  as  the  basis  of  my 
remarks,  because  it  is  a  fairly  normal  year.  In  1889  the 
trade  of  England  had  recovered  from  the  depression 
which  lasted  from  1884-18S8;  and  it  was  not  yet  dis- 
turbed by  the  political  and  financial  troubles  in  South 
America,  nor  by  the  M'Kinley  Tariff.  Since  1889 
the  total  value  of  our  trade  has  fallen  by  some  fifty  or 
sixty  million  pounds  ;  but,  in  the  first  place,  this  shrinkage 
is  confined  to  the  money  value  (for  the  bulk  has  increased), 
and,  in  the  next,  there  is  every  reason  to  expect  that  the 
money  value  of  1889  will  be  reached  again  and  even 
exceeded. 

Of  this  total  of  seven  hundred  and  forty  million  pounds, 
four  hundred  and  twenty-five  million  pounds  represent 
imports,  and  three  hundred  and  fifteen  million  pounds, 
exports.  Of  our  imports,  seven-eighths  are  food  and 
raw  materials,  and  of  our  exports — omitting  imports  re- 
exported— seven-eighths  also  are  manufactured  articles. 
We  can  see  at  once,  therefore,  what  the  industrial  posi- 
tion of  England  is.  England  is  a  great  workshop,  the 
greatest  workshop  in  the  world  :  she  imports  food  for 
her  people,  and  raw  materials  which  are  made  up  into 
manufactured  articles,  and  these  manufactures  she  sells 
to  the  world. 

The  food  purchase  of  England  amounts  to  a  total  of 
one  hundred  and  seventy-eight  million  pounds,  being 
417  per  cent,  of  the  total  imports.  Of  this  purchase 
the  largest  item,  53*6  million  pounds,  nearly  a  third  of 
the  whole,  is  paid  for  animal  food  ;  and  almost  the  same 
proportion,    5 2 '2   million   pounds,   is  paid  for  corn,  grain 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    119 

and  flour.  Then  we  pay  23-2  million  pounds  for  sugar, 
38*3  million  pounds  for  other  vegetable  products,  8"i 
million  pounds  for  spirituous  liquors,  and  2  "6  million 
pounds  for  fish. 

The  purchase  of  raw  materials  amounts  to  a  total  of 
181-4  million  pounds.  The  largest  item  is  that  of  raw 
cotton,  which  is  one-fourth  of  the  whole,  amounting  to 
45-8  million  pounds.  Next  to  that  comes  "sheep's  wool," 
one-sixth  of  the  whole,  for  which  297  million  pounds  is 
paid.  Then  follow  "metals  and  ores,"  21 7  million 
pounds  ;  wood,  20*4  million  pounds  ;  textiles  other  than 
sheep's  wool,  15  "6  million  pounds  ;  and  other  raw  materials 
which  make  up  the  balance,  48*2  million  pounds. 

Now,  let  us  pause  for  a  moment  to  consider  where 
England  makes  her  purchases.  Speaking  generally,  we 
may  say  that  the  bulk  of  her  food  and  raw  materials 
comes  from  the  new  Anglo-Saxon  countries,  the  United 
States  and  the  British  Colonies,  from  Russia  and  from 
British  India.  An  analysis  of  three  important  imports, 
grain,  cotton  and  wool,  will  make  this  plain.  Of  the 
total  grain  purchase  (52*2  million  pounds),  more  than 
one-third  (18*2  million  pounds)  comes  from  the  United 
States,  and  more  than  one-fourth  (14  million  pounds) 
from  Russia.  The  rest  comes  in  decreasing  proportions 
from  India,  Canada,  Australia  and  elsewhere.  More  than 
two-thirds  (33'6  miUion  pounds)  of  the  cotton  purchase 
(45  "8  million  pounds)  comes  from  the  United  States,  and 
a  much  less  amount,  five  million  pounds  worth,  from 
India.  And  actually  five-sixths  (25*4  million  pounds) 
of  the  entire  wool  purchase  (29'7  million  pounds)  comes 
from  Australasia.  To  this  last  import  South  Africa  con- 
tributes some  three  million  pounds,  one-tenth  of  the 
whole.* 

*The  figures  in  the  text  are  based  upon  an  "Analysis  of  the  Maritime 
Trade  of  the  United  Kingdom,"  by  Sir  Kawson  W.  Rawson,  1892. 
The  results  are  exhibited  in  tabular  form  in  the  Statistical  Appendix. 


I20  SOUTH  AFRICA 

While,  however,  England  purchases  a  part  only  of 
her  food  and  raw  materials  from  the  British  Colonies, 
nine-tenths,  that  is  to  say,  practically  the  whole  of  the 
exports  of  the  colonies,  omitting  the  inter-colonial  trade, 
comes  to  England.  The  English  import,  therefore,  from 
any  given  colony  furnishes  us  with  a  rough  measure  of 
its  development.  Consequently  we  can  gain,  at  the  out- 
set, a  general  notion  of  the  agricultural  and  pastoral 
development  of  South  Africa,  from  merely  learning  that 
South  Africa  is  a  country  which  contributes  nothing  to 
the  food  supplies  of  England,  and  only  one-tenth  of  the 
wool  supply. 

Canada,  Australia,  and  New  Zealand  all  contribute  in 
proportion  to  their  population  as  much  (or  more)  to  the 
food  supply  of  England  as  the  United  States.  New 
Zealand,  a  country  with  an  area  only  one-tenth  of  South 
Africa  and  a  European  population — 600,000 — of  about 
equal  numbers,  in  addition  to  a  large  grain  and  meat 
export,  sends  nearly  twice  as  much  sheep's  wool  to  Eng- 
land as  South  Africa. 

Now  we  will  look  a  little  more  closely  at  the  South 
African  exports.*  In  round  numbers  they  amount  to  a 
total  of  eighteen  million  pounds.  They  have  reached  this 
total  mainly  through  the  rapid  increase  in  the  output  of 
gold  in  the  Transvaal,  which  in  1895,  amounted  in  value 
to  ;^8,72  5,ooo.  This,  together  with  ;^4,ooo,ooo  worth 
of  diamonds  from  Kimberley,  and  the  copper  export  gives 
a  mineral  export  of  about  ;!^i 3,000,000.  The  pastoral 
exports  consist  of  more  than  ;^2, 000,000  worth  of  sheep's 
wool,  ;^5 00,000  worth  of  ostrich  feathers,  the  same 
amount  of  hides,  and  more  than  ^^5 00,000  worth  of 
Angora   hair. 

Taking  the  production  of  grain  {See  Appendix,  Table  V.), 
horned  cattle,  and  sheep's  wool  {See  Appendix,  Table  VI.), 
the  three  primary  industries  of  a  new  country,  as  a  test,  we 

*  I.e.  exports  passing  through  Durban  and  ports  of  the  Cape  Colony. 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    121 

are  forced  to  the  conclusion  that  the  condition  of  South 
Africa  is  very  unsatisfactory.  And  so  an  account  of  the 
agricultural  and  pastoral  development  of  South  Africa 
seems  to  resolve  itself  into  an  endeavour  to  answer  the 
question  :  "  To  what  is  this  deficiency  due  ?  " 

In  this  enquiry  it  is  necessary  to  remember  what  are 
the  main  physical  characteristics  of  South  Africa ;  and 
at  the  same  time  we  can  take  the  opportunity  of  ascertain- 
ing the  position  of  the  chief  grain  and  wool  areas. 

The  first  fact  that  commands  our  attention  is  the  very 
high  average  elevation  of  the  continent  of  Africa.  This 
continent,  the  tropical  continent  par  excellence,  has  an 
average  elevation  twice  as  great  as  that  of  Australia,  more 
than  one-third  greater  than  that  of  Europe,  and  nearly 
one-third  greater  than  that  of  America,  North  and  South. 
It  is  only  equalled  in  this  respect  by  Asia,  which  contains 
the  greatest  mountain  masses  and  the  highest  mountain 
summits  in  the  world.  In  view  of  the  importance  of 
elevation  as  a  factor  in  climate,  this  is  a  fact  which  must 
largely  modify  any  estimate  we  form  of  the  political  and 
commercial  value  of  the  central  and  south-central  areas. 

The  general  climatic  conditions  of  South  Africa  are 
determined  by  the  position  of  the  mountain  ranges.  It 
will  be  remembered  *  that  they  are  situated  compara- 
tively near  the  coast,  and  to  a  great  extent  conform  to 
the  contour  of  the  coast-line.  Physically,  South  Africa 
falls  into  four  divisions.  The  south  coast  valleys,  the 
east  coast  semi-tropical  slopes,  the  central  plateaux,  and 
the  western  deserts ;  the  south  and  east  winds  which 
carry  rain-clouds  to  the  interior  plateaux  and  deserts 
must  be  not  only  violent  but  continuous,  since  they  have 
to  bear  the  clouds  over  mountain  barriers  which  reach 
a  height  sometimes  of  10,000  and  12,000  feet.  It  is 
not  surprising,  therefore,  that  the  interior  districts,  form- 
ing two-thirds  of  settled  South  Africa,  should  have  no 
•  Chap.  I.  p.  3. 


122  SOUTH  AFRICA 

regular  or  periodic  rainfall.  Moreover,  owing  to  the 
rapid  fall  of  the  land  from  the  mountains  to  the  coast, 
the  rivers  on  the  south  and  east,  which  traverse  these 
broken  and  terrace-like  districts,  are  practically  useless 
for  purposes  of  navigation  and  irrigation. 

The  chief  grain  areas  are  these.  In  the  Cape  Colony 
there  is  a  v>-estern  district  extending  from  Piquetberg  to 
Caledon.  It  consists  of  the  plains  lying  between  the 
mountains  and  the  sea  at  the  south-western  corner  of  the 
continent ;  and  the  centre  of  this  district  is  Malmesbury. 
In  the  east  of  the  colony  there  are  two  areas  of  which 
Graaf-Reinet  and  Middelburg  are  the  centres ;  but  the 
most  important  area  is  that  which  lies  between  the  Storm- 
berg  Mountains  and  the  Orange  River,  containing  the 
centres  of  Hershel  and  Barkly  East.  Grain  is  not  grown 
in  the  Karoo,  nor  in  the  eastern  coast  districts ;  for  the 
Karoo  is  too  dry  and  the  atmosphere  in  the  coast  districts 
is  too  moist.  In  the  Orange  Free  State  there  is  a  district 
called  the  "  Conquered  Territor}-,"  which  is  suitable  for 
grain  growing,  because  it  has  a  periodic  rainfall.  It 
extends  for  loo  miles  from  Bethlehem  to  Wepener, 
and  lies  on  the  south-eastern  border.  In  the  Transvaal, 
grain  can  be  grown  on  the  Bankenveldt  or  Terrace 
countr}' ;  that  is  to  say,  in  the  central  districts  which  lie 
between  the  "  high  country  "  in  the  south  and  east,  and 
the  "  low "  tropical  belt  in  the  west  and  north.  It  in- 
cludes the  districts  Ipng  between  the  River  Marico  on 
the  west  and  Leydenburg  on  the  east,  and  includes  the 
very  fertile  country  on  and  near  the  Magaliesberg  range. 
In  Natal  the  only  grain  which  is  grown  is  the  Indian 
corn  or  mealies,  consumed  by  the  Kafirs. 

The  wool  areas  are  more  extensive  than  the  grain  areas. 
In  the  Cape  Colony  there  is,  first  of  all,  a  district  in  the 
Western  Province  l>'ing  on  the  south  coast  from  Caledon 
to  Mossel  Bay ;  and,  in  the  eastern  provinces  and  the 
Transkeij    the    whole    country   between    the    Stormberg 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    123 

Mountains  and  the  Indian  Ocean.  In  both  of  these 
areas  the  sheep  are  pastured  upon  grass.  Then  there  are 
the  central  districts,  including  the  Karoo  and  the  country 
northward  of  the  great  mountain  ranges  ;  here  the  sheep 
are  pastured  on  the  succulent  Karoo  plants — plants  with 
leaves,  stems,  and  roots  thickened  to  contain  stores  of 
moisture,  and  therefore  able  to  survive  long  periods  of 
drought.  Passing  outside  the  Cape  Colony,  we  may  say 
that  practically  the  whole  of  the  Free  State  is  suitable  for 
sheep-raising.  In  the  Transvaal  the  high  country  is  most 
suitable,  and  sheep  are  pastured  in  Natal  on  the  highest 
plateau  to  the  north  and  east  of  the  colony. 

In  order  to  complete  this  rapid  sur\-ey  of  the  agricultural 
and  pastoral  resources  of  South  Africa  it  is  necessarj'  to  add 
a  brief  account  of  three  special  industries  of  the  Cape 
Colon)- — mohair,  ostrich-farming,  and  the  cultivation  of  the 
vine. 

By  "  special "  is  meant  that  these  are  industries  which 
can  only  be  carried  on  in  countries,  or  districts  of  countries, 
which  are  naturally  suitable  for  them. 

The  Angora  goat,  which  furnishes  mohair,  is  a  native  of 
the  central  plateaux  of  Asia  Minor,  and  is  also  found  in  the 
highlands  of  Persia  and  Kashmir.  The  value  of  the  hair 
of  this  animal  was  recognised  in  very  ancient  times.  It 
was  used  for  the  hangings  of  the  Tabernacle  of  the 
Israelites  ;  and  the  robes  of  the  kings  of  Persia  consisted 
of  cloth  of  the  same  material.  Attempts  were  made  to 
introduce  these  fine-haired  Eastern  goats  into  the  Cape  by 
the  Dutch  East  India  Company  as  early  as  1725.  But 
this  original  attempt  to  bring  the  goats  from  Kashmir  via 
Ceylon  failed.  Subsequent  attempts  made  early  in  the 
present  century  were  only  partially  successful :  and  it  was 
not  imtil  forty  years  ago  (1856)  that  the  industry  was  really 
established.  The  honour  of  founding  the  industry  belongs 
to  Mr  Adolph  Mosenthal  who  himself  visited  Asia  Minor 
to    procure    the  animals.     In    his    quest    he    was    greatly 


124  SOUTH  AFRICA 

assisted  by  the  late  Lord  Stratford  de  Redclyffe,  the  famous 
EngUsh  ambassador  at  the  court  of  the  Sultan.  Another 
name  which  deserves  to  be  honourably  mentioned  in  con- 
nection with  this  industry  is  that  of  Sir  Titus  Salt,  the  great 
Yorkshire  manufacturer.  The  bulk  of  the  goats'  wool  from 
the  Cape  is  still  made  up  at  the  Saltaire  works. 

The  average  annual  clip  per  head  amounts  in  weight  to 
five  or  six  pounds,  and  is  worth  20s. 

But  the  Angora  goat  is  not  only  valuable,  it  is  also  a  very 
beautiful  animal.  Somewhat  smaller  in  size  than  the 
domestic  goat,  it  has  a  small  and  pretty  head,  surmounted 
in  both  sexes  by  long,  flat,  corrugated  horns  extending  from 
18  to  24  inches,  its  fleece  falls  in  natural  ringlets  almost 
to  the  ground,  and  is  white  and  lustrous.  The  herds  of 
Angoras  roam  at  will  over  the  veldt,  unrestrained  by  any 
boundary,  but  they  are  docile  and  easily  managed. 

The  value  of  the  annual  export,  taking  a  five  years' 
average,  amounts  to  ;^4oo,ooo  ;  and  this  Cape  export  forms 
one-third  of  the  mohair  purchase  of  England. 

The  ostrich  industry  presents  an  obvious  contrast  to  the 
Angora  industry,  for  the  ostrich  is  a  native — a  very  old 
inhabitant  indeed — of  South  Africa.  But  the  industry  was 
not  established  without  effort.  There  are  three  stages. 
At  first  the  wild  birds  were  hunted  and  killed,  and  the 
feathers  were  so  obtained.  Next,  ostrich  chicks  {i.e.  young 
birds  up  to  seven  months  of  age)  were  caught  and  farmed. 
But  these  birds,  when  they  were  full  grown,  were  found  to 
be  very  fierce  and  unmanageable,  and  the  number  of  birds 
kept  was  very  small.  In  1865,  however,  as  many  as  eighty 
ostriches  were  returned  as  forming  part  of  the  live  stock  of 
the  colony.  The  establishment  of  ostrich  farming  as  a 
separate  industry  dates  from  the  year  1869,  when  Mr 
Arthur  Douglas  perfected  his  artificial  incubator.  By 
means  of  this  invention  successive  generations  of  birds  have 
been  hatched,  brought  up  by  hand,  and,  in  this  way,  being 
accustomed  to  man  from  their  birth,  the  birds  have  become 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    125 

increasingly  domesticated.  Now  a  drove  of  ostriches 
proceeding  on  a  Cape  road  is  a  sight  which  is  no  more 
alarming,  and  scarcely  more  unusual,  than  a  drove  of 
cattle. 

Ostriches  are  kept  on  farms  throughout  the  colony  ;  but 
they  are  not  farmed  outside  the  Cape  Colony.  Within 
the  colony  the  industry  is  tending  to  become  specialised. 
The  chief  districts  are  Oudtshoorn  on  the  south  coast,  and 
Albany  in  the  eastern  province.  The  price  of  ostrich  feathers 
varies  very  much,  as  the  demand  is  controlled  by  the  changes 
of  fashion,  but  the  average  yearly  value  of  the  export  is 
^500,000. 

Viticulture  is,  from  one  point  of  view,  the  most  interesting 
of  the  Cape  industries.  It  is  the  oldest  established,  and  it 
is  carried  on  in  the  districts  which  have  been  longest 
colonised — the  mountain  slopes  and  valleys  in  the  south 
western  corner  of  the  colony.  The  surroundings  of  the 
wine  farms  are  very  picturesque.  The  old  Dutch  home- 
steads are  quaintly  built,  with  coal-black  thatched  roofs  and 
white-washed  walls ;  and  the  vineyards,  owing  to  the  re- 
markable fruitfulness  of  the  vines,  are  richly  coloured  in 
the  season  of  the  grape  harvest.  The  vine  plants  are 
grown  without  stick  or  trellis  or  other  supports,  and  have 
very  much  the  appearance  of  currant  bushes.  The  soil  of 
these  districts  of  the  Cape  is  specially  suitable  for  viticulture, 
yet,  from  an  economic  point  of  view,  this  industry  is  the  least 
satisfactory  of  all,  for  the  amount  of  wine  exported  from  the 
Cape  is  very  small.     In  1892  it  amounted  to  ;!^i  8,000. 

We  are  now  in  a  position  to  answer  the  question  which 
preceded  this  review  of  the  agricultural  and  pastoral 
resources  of  South  Africa. 

The  insufficient  development  of  South  Africa  in  respect 
of  these  primary  industries — grain  growing  and  the  raising 
of  horned  cattle  and  sheep — is  due  to  two  main  causes,  one 
physical  and  one  moral.  The  physical  cause  is  the  in- 
sufficiency and  uncertainty  of  the  rainfall  in  the  interior ; 


126  SOUTH  AFRICA 

and  the  moral  cause  is  the  unprogressiveness  of  the  Boer 
or  South  African  farmer. 

Observations  *  covering  a  period  of  thirty-five  years  show 
that  in  the  British  Isles  the  annual  average  rainfall  varies 
(omitting  certain  abnormal  stations)  from  22  inches  at 
Greenwich  to  38  inches  at  the  Orkney  Isles ;  and  in 
France  from  24  inches  at  Paris  to  52  inches  in  the 
Department  of  the  Lower  Pyrenees.  In  the  Cape  Colony 
observations  (again  omitting  abnormal  stations)  show  a 
variation  from  2  inches  at  Port  Nolloth  to  the  37  inches 
which  fell  in  the  very  wet  year,  1876,  at  King  William's 
Town.  Taking  averages,  we  find  that  the  average  rainfall 
in  the  western  districts  is  9  inches,  in  the  midland  1 7 
inches,  and  in  the  eastern  27  inches. 

Combining  these  facts,  we  may  safely  conclude  that  an 
average  year  in  the  Cape  Colony  would  be  considerably 
drier  than  the  driest  year  in  the  United  Kingdom  or  in 
France.  And  we  may  say  further,  that  the  weather  in 
South  Africa  generally  is  marked  by  long  periods  of 
drought,  terminated  by  torrential  rains. 

This  uncertain  and  insufficient  rainfall,  together  with  the 
unsatisfactory  nature  of  the  South  African  rivers,  and  the 
fact  that  there  is  as  yet  no  adequate  machinery  for  water 
storage  and  irrigation,  is  a  very  real  hindrance  to  agricul- 
tural and  pastoral  pursuits. 

The  moral  cause  is  the  unprogressiveness  of  the  Boer  or 
South  African  farmer. 

Travellers  are  only  too  unanimous  on  this  point. 

Captain  Percival,  who  visited  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope 
in  1796,  the  second  year  of  the  temporary  British  occupa- 
tion, writes  :  f 

"  The  Dutch  farmers  never  assist  the  soil  by  flooding, 
being  satisfied  with  the  moisture  it  derives  from  the  water 

*  Symon's  Tables. 

t  "An  Account  of  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,"  by  Captain  Robert 
rcrcival,  iSo.i,  p.  227. 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    127 

in  its  neighbourhood.  Their  only  labour  is  sowing  the 
seed ;  leaving  the  rest  to  chance  and  the  excellent  climate. 
Their  ploughs,  harrows,  and  utensils  of  husbandry  are 
clumsy,  ill-formed,  and  clogged ;  but  they  cannot  be 
prevailed  on  to  make  any  alteration  in  the  system  of  their 
agriculture." 

And  a  little  further  on  he  says  :  * 

"  No  part  of  the  world  has  had  its  natural  advantages 
so  abused  as  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  The  very  minds 
and  dispositions  of  the  settlers  interfere  with  every  plan  of 
improvement  and  public  utility." 

Lord  Randolph  Churchill,  who  visited  South  Africa  in 
1 89 1,  writes,  f  with  special  reference  to  the  Transvaal 
Boer : 

"  The  Boer  farmer  personifies  useless  idleness.  Occupy- 
ing a  farm  of  from  six  thousand  to  ten  thousand  acres,  he 
contents  himself  with  raising  a  herd  of  a  few  hundred 
head  of  cattle,  which  are  left  almost  entirely  to  the  care  of 
the  natives  whom  he  employs.  It  may  be  asserted, 
generally  with  truth,  that  he  never  plants  a  tree,  never  digs 
a  well,  never  makes  a  road,  never  grows  a  blade  of  corn. 
Rough  and  ready  cultivation  of  the  soil  for  mealies  by  the 
natives  he  to  some  extent  permits,  but  agriculture  and  the 
agriculturists  he  holds  alike  in  great  contempt." 

Then  we  have  one  whom  we  may  call  an  impartial 
witness — the  genial  Frenchman  who  disguises  his  admir- 
ation for  England  under  an  assumption  of  literary  mahce. 
In  "  John  Bull  and  Co."  Max  O'Rell  says  :  f 

"The  Boers  are  farmers  and  sportsmen,  nothing  more. 
Their  ancestors  were  farmers,  and  they  do  not  conceive 
that  they  themselves  could  be  anything  else.      Ignorant, 

*  Idem.  p.  231. 

t  "  ?.Ien,  Mines,  and  Animals,"  p.  94. 

X  p.  305. 


128  SOUTH  AFRICA 

bigoted,  behind  the  times,  these  Dutch  Bretons,  transplanted 
in  Africa,  cultivate  the  soil  like  the  contemporaries  of  the 
patriarchs,  and  refuse  even  to  look  at  agricultural  machinery." 

On  the  other  hand,  what  can  be  done  even  with  the 
difficult  soil  of  the  Karoo  has  been  shown  by  Mr  Logan's 
enterprise.  Speaking  of  Mr  Logan's  estate  of  100,000 
acres  at  Matjesfontein,  Lord  Randolph  Churchill  writes  :* 

"Mr  J.  D.  Logan,  .  .  .  100,000  acres  .  .  .  has  settled 
himself  down  on  what  appears  at  first  sight  to  be  the  most 
unpromising  spot  for  a  farmer  which  the  mind  can  imagine. 
Here,  in  the  arid  plain  of  the  Karoo,  producing  nothing 
but  low  scrub  and  scanty  herbage,  he  has  built  himself 
a  large  and  comfortable  house,  a  spacious  homestead  with 
good  cottages  for  his  men,  and  elevates  with  much  success 
flocks  of  many  thousands  of  sheep  and  herds  of  many 
hundreds  of  cattle.  The  Karoo  is  far  more  hospitable 
and  nourishing  for  live  stock  than  the  uninstructed  tourist 
would  imagine.  The  climate  is  perfect,  the  air  invigorating 
like  that  of  Scotland,  and  the  only  source  of  anxiety  to  the 
farmer  is  found  in  the  somewhat  insufficient  rainfall.  Sport 
is  to  be  obtained  in  plenty  ....  I  imagine  that  many 
a  young  English  farmer  with  a  good  training,  an  active 
disposition,  and  a  small  capital,  might  find  in  the  Karoo 
both  a  home  and  a  fortune.  No  rent,  scarcely  any  taxes, 
and  perfect  freedom  are  constituents  of  happiness  which  to 
the  ordinary  English  farmer  would  appear  almost  an  un- 
realisable  dream." 

And  he  testifies  to  the  capabilities  of  the  Transvaal  soil 
in  general :  f 

"  All  over  the  Transvaal,  and  especially  round  Johannes- 
burg, the  well-watered  and  yet  easily  drained  valleys  possess 
a  soil  of  astonishing  fertility,  which,  with  ordinary  skill  and 
care,  could  produce  abundant  crops  of  almost  every  grain, 
every  vegetable,  and  every  fruit.  Whether  for  house- 
•  Id.  pp.  35,  36.  t  Id.  p.  80. 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    129 

building,  for  use  in  mines,  or  for  common  firewood,  the 
plantation  of  trees  proposes  to  a  landowner  munificent 
remuneration.  Such  is  the  geniality  of  the  climate,  such 
the  fertility  of  the  soil,  that  many  kinds  of  useful  and 
valuable  trees  are  estimated  by  competent  authority  to 
make  a  growth  of  no  less  then  ten  feet  in  the  course  of  a 
year." 

Lastly  there  is  the  evidence  of  the  wine  industry.  Baron 
Karl  von  Babo,  the  son  of  the  Austrian  expert  in  viti- 
culture, was  commissioned  by  the  Cape  Government  in 
1885  to  visit  and  report  upon  the  wine  farms.  According 
to  his  report,  the  vineyards  of  the  Cape  are  six  times  as 
productive  as  those  of  Europe,  and  eight  times  as  pro- 
ductive as  those  of  Australia.  And  yet  we  find  that  in  the 
year  1892,  while  the  single  colony  of  Victoria,  in  Australia, 
exported  wine  to  the  value  of  ;^63,235,  the  Cape  exported 
less  than  one-third  of  that  value  (^17,964)  {See  Appendix^ 
Table  VII.). 

In  the  face  of  this  evidence  we  can  scarcely  avoid  the 
conclusion  that  the  climate  and  soil  of  South  Africa  are 
not  so  much  at  fault  as  the  men  who  have  become,  to  so 
large  an  extent,  the  possessors  of  the  soil.  And  if  this 
is  so,  if,  after  all,  man  and  not  nature  is  chiefly  at  fault  in 
South  Africa,  it  becomes  interesting,  and  indeed  necessary, 
to  ask.  What  are  the  Cape  Government  doing  ?  What  are 
the  men,  that  is  to  say,  who  are  from  time  to  time  entrusted 
with  the  management  of  the  affairs  of  the  colonists,  doing  ? 

During  the  last  ten  or  twelve  years  we  must,  I  think, 
admit  that  the  Cape  Government  have  done  all  that  could 
be  reasonably  expected  of  them.  They  appear  to  be 
sensible  of  the  reproach  under  which  their  colony  labours, 
the  reproach  of  having  the  dearest  loaf  in  the  world.  They 
are  conscious  of  the  necessity  which  exists  for  developing 
the  agricultural  and  pastoral  resources  of  the  colony,  and 
during  this  period  a  number  of  useful  measures  have  been 
introduced  with  this  object  in  view. 

I 


I30  SOUTH  AFRICA 

For  example,  it  is  well-known  that  vegetation,  forests  in 
particular,  promote  rainfall.  In  1883  the  forest  depart- 
ment was  rendered  effective,  and  the  necessary  measures 
were  taken  to  preserve  the  existing  forests,  and  to  raise 
fresh  plantations  in  suitable  districts.  The  colony  is 
now  divided  into  four  forest  conservancies,  and  each 
of  them  is  placed  under  the  control  of  a  "conservator 
of  forests "  and  his  assistants.  Other  colonies  have 
followed  this  example,  and  now  Natal  has  its  "forest 
officer,"  and  Bechuanaland  its  "  forest  ranger " ;  while 
the  Chartered  Company  have  from  the  first  had  a  forest 
department  to  watch  over  the  woodlands  of  Mashonaland. 

In  this  same  year  (1883),  also,  a  select  committee  was 
appointed  by  the  Cape  Parliament  to  enquire  into  the 
condition  of  the  agriculture  and  industries  of  the  colony. 
According  to  the  evidence  before  this  committee,*  it 
appeared  that  the  farmers  chiefly  complained  of  the  un- 
certain supply  of  the  native  labour  which  they  employed. 
The  committee  themselves  spoke  of  "  the  crying  want 
of  irrigation  works  in  various  parts  of  the  colony."  Acting 
on  the  recommendations  of  this  committee,  the  Government 
soon  afterwards  created  a  "department  of  agriculture," 
and  established  agricultural  schools  at  suitable  centres. 
And  so  to-day,  not  only  can  the  young  agriculturist 
obtain  scientific  agricultural  instruction,  but  the  farmers 
themselves  can  procure  advice  from  qualified  officials  on 
practical  matters,  such  as  the  treatment  of  diseases  among 
stock,  and  the  best  methods  of  fertilising  the  various  soils. 

Moreover,  of  late  years  the  Cape  Government,  in 
common  with  other  governments  in  the  British  colonies, 
have  passed  a  number  of  laws  regulating  the  sale  and 
cultivation  of  their  unoccupied  areas.  All  the  colonies 
possess  a  valuable,  though  not  always  a  realisable,  asset 
in  their  unoccupied  or  "  crown "  lands.  In  the  Cape 
one-third  of  the  area  of  the  colony  is  as  yet  unappropriated 
*  Cape  Parliamentary  Papers,  A.  3 — 83. 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    131 

to  private  owners.  The  proceeds  of  the  sale  and  leasing 
of  these  lands  form  a  considerable  item  in  the  revenue 
of  a  colony.  But,  apart  from  these  direct  profits,  the  mere 
occupation  and  cultivation  of  fresh  areas  is  advantageous 
to  a  new  country ;  and  recently  the  Australasian  Govern- 
ments, at  all  events,  have  had  a  further  object  in  view. 
They  have  endeavoured  to  distribute  part  of  their  urban 
population  by  settlements  in  rural  districts ;  for  there  has 
been  the  same  tendency  in  the  Pacific  colonies  to  crowd 
into  large  towns  as  we  have  observed  in  England. 

The  system  of  sale  is  very  much  the  same  in  all  the 
British  colonies.  A  distinction  is  made  between  "  large  " 
and  "  small "  areas.  The  former  are  sold  by  auction,  and 
the  latter  are  practically  assigned  to  applicants  by  the  Land 
Boards.  From  time  to  time  the  Government  announces 
that  such  and  such  blocks  of  crown  lands  are  to  be  sold, 
and  the  lots  are  knocked  down  to  the  highest  bidder. 
But  even  in  the  case  of  these  large  areas — areas  which 
might  tempt  the  capitalist  or  the  investor — the  purchase 
is  facilitated,  for  it  is  not  necessary  to  pay  the  whole  of 
the  purchase  money  at  once.  In  the  Cape  Colony  a 
deposit  must  be  paid  at  the  time  of  purchase,  one-tenth 
of  the  purchase  money  within  six  months,  and  one-fifth 
within  twelve  months.  The  balance  may  remain  unpaid, 
and  on  this  balance  (properly  secured)  the  purchaser  pays 
a  moderate  rate  of  interest,  4  per  cent.,  to  the  Govern- 
ment. In  the  year  1892  two  million  acres  of  crown  lands 
were  sold  in  the  Cape  Colony.  They  realised  a  total  sum 
of  ;!^ 1 28,025,  that  is  to  say,  they  sold  at  an  average  price 
per  acre  of  only  (about)  is.  3d. 

The  small  areas  are  from  8  to  500  acres  in  extent, 
and  consist  of  land  suitable  for  occupation  by  small 
farmers  and  agricultural  settlers.  An  applicant  sends 
in  an  application  to  the  Civil  Commissioner  of  the 
district  in  which  the  land  is  situated.  He  must  state 
among  other  things  that  he  is  twenty-one  years  of  age,  and 


132  SOUTH  AFRICA 

does  not  possess  as  much  as,  or  more  than,  500  acres 
of  land  in  the  colony.  His  application  is  referred  to 
the  Land  Board  of  the  district ;  and,  if  it  is  approved, 
the  applicant  receives  a  license  to  occupy  the  holding 
for  five  years,  on  payment  of  an  annual  license  fee  fixed 
at  one-twentieth  part  of  the  value  of  the  land,  as  estimated 
by  the  Board.  At  the  end  of  this  period,  if  he  has 
fulfilled  the  conditions  of  the  license,  the  licensee  receives 
a  quit-rent  title  instead  of  his  license,  and  continues  to 
pay  the  amount  of  his  license  fee  as  quit-rent.  From 
the  issue  of  the  license  the  licensee  is  recognised  as 
having  an  interest  in  the  holding,  which  he  can  both 
sell  or  assign  (under  certain  conditions),  but  the  Govern- 
ment reserves  to  itself  all  rights  to  gold,  silver,  or  precious 
stones.  Since,  in  the  case  of  these  small  areas,  the 
occupation  and  cultivation  of  the  land  is  part  of  the 
consideration  which  the  purchaser  gives,  he  must  fulfil 
two  conditions.  He  must  commence  to  reside  on  his 
holding  within  six  months,  and  he  must  bring  one-twentieth 
part  of  the  land  into  cultivation  within  two  years.  Taking 
the  average  price  of  land  to  be  that  shown  by  the  sales 
in  1892,  the  annual  license  fee  which  would  be  paid 
on  a  holding  of  500  acres  (the  largest  permitted  by 
the  law)  would  amount  to  ^i,  i  is.  6d. 

There  is  need  of  such  settlers,  and  of  the  exercise 
of  human  skill  and  ingenuity  in  the  task  of  fertilising  the 
soil.  Remarkable  as  is  the  mineral  development  of  the 
last  few  years,  it  is  the  Veldt,  and  not  Kimberley  or 
Johannesburg,  which  characterises  South  Africa.  Once 
beyond  the  barrier  ranges  and  the  undulating  plains 
spread  on  every  side  desolate  and  illimitable.  The  surface 
of  the  earth  is  broken  only  by  rounded  and  flat-topped 
masses,  hills  with  the  contour  of  mountains,  weird  dis- 
tortions which  serve  only  to  confuse  the  vision.  There 
is  neither  tree  nor  shrub,  homestead  nor  boundary,  to 
arrest  the  eye.     At  most  a  line  of  mimosa  bushes  marks 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    133 

the  barren  track  of  the  periodic  water  course,  and  the 
brown  earth  at  our  feet  is  studded  here  and  there  by 
stunted  bushes. 

Such  is  the  Veldt,  and  such  is  the  characteristic 
landscape  of  two-thirds  of  settled  South  Africa. 

Yet  even  so  the  human  spectator  experiences  no  sense 
of  depression  ;  for  over  his  head  the  great  sun  is  shining 
in  his  might.  In  the  high  plateaux  of  South  Africa 
and  the  uplands  of  Australia,  where  the  air  is  free  from 
all  humidity,  the  increased  power  of  the  sun  is  welcomed, 
and  not  dreaded.  It  is  difficult  to  describe  this  influence 
of  the  sun.  Let  me  try  to  do  so  by  an  illustration.  In  a 
recent  novel,*  the  heroine,  a  young  Australian  girl,  is 
represented  as  chilled  and  depressed  beyond  all  endurance 
by  a  wet  day  in  the  English  summer. 

"  Gazing  out  at  the  wretched  day  .  .  .  she  longed  for 
one  little  glimpse  of  the  sunlit  bush.  The  barest  sandhill 
on  her  father's  run  would  have  satisfied  her,  so  long  as  its 
contour  came  with  a  sharp  edge  against  the  glorious  dark- 
blue  sky ;  the  worst  bit  of  mallee  scrub  in  all  Riverina — 
with  the  fierce  sun  gilding  the  leaves — would  have  pre- 
sented a  more  cheery  prospect  than  this  one  on  the  banks 
of  the  renowned  .  .  .  Thames." 

Stimulated  by  this  beneficent  influence,  the  Anglo-Saxon 
in  South  Africa  will  irrigate,  cultivate,  and  fertilise  the 
Veldt,  till  the  whole  face  of  nature  has  been  changed. 
Does  such  a  prospect  seem  too  remote?  If  so,  let  me 
put  this  further  question  — "  Do  we  understand  how 
greatly  a  country  and  a  climate  may  be  affected  by  the 
agency  of  man  ?  "  When  I  hear  men  speaking  of  this  and 
that  new  country  as  being  unsuitable  for  European  occupa- 
tion, I  wonder  whether  the  speakers  have  ever  considered 
what  England,  this  garden  of  the  world,  was  like  in  the 
sixth  century,  the  century  in  which  Englishmen  first  settled 
here,  and  in  which  was  born  the  one  nation  of  the  Teutonic 
*  "A  Elide  from  the  Bush,"  by  Mr  Ilorming. 


134  SOUTH  AFRICA 

family  absolutely  untainted  by  the  moral  and  physical 
degeneracy  which  marked  the  declining  years  of  the 
Graeco-Roman  civilisation. 

At  that  time  the  famous  area  which  now  contains 
Westminster  Abbey,  the  Houses  of  Parliament,  the  offices 
of  Downing  Street  and  Whitehall — a  group  of  buildings 
which  more  than  any  other  concentrates  in  itself  the  past 
history  and  the  present  life  of  our  nation — was  a  desolate 
ridge  barely  emerging  from  the  surrounding  marshes  which 
separated  it,  by  an  interval  of  two  miles,  from  the  town  of 
London.  The  English  settlements  upon  the  east  and 
south  coasts  were  isolated  from  each  other,  and  cut  off 
from  the  interior  of  the  island,  by  fen  and  forest,  marsh 
and  ing.  Between  the  Sussex  coast  and  the  valley  of 
the  Thames  lay  Andredsweald,  a  stretch  of  forest,  broken 
by  uninhabited  wastes,  extending  from  Kent  to  Berkshire. 
From  York  to  Cambridge  there  ran  a  succession  of  ings, 
marshes,  and  fens,  which  effectually  barred  the  progress 
of  the  east  coast  settlers.  The  greatest  manufacturing 
district  of  England  was  covered  by  the  forest  of  Elmet, 
which  stretched  from  Nottingham  to  Cumberland ;  Wales 
was  protected  by  the  forests  of  Dean,  of  Wyre,  and  of 
Arden ;  West  Wales,  as  the  counties  of  Cornwall  and 
Devonshire  were  then  called,  by  the  forest  of  Selwood. 
So  great  were  the  natural  difficulties,  and  so  inhospitable 
was  the  climate,  that,  had  there  been  no  convenient 
estuaries,  and  above  all,  no  deep  and  placid  rivers  to 
bear  the  English  keels  into  the  heart  of  the  island,  the 
colonisation  of  Britain  by  the  English  might  never  have 
been  accomplished. 

Those  who  discourage  the  acquisition  of  fresh  areas  in 
Africa — South  and  Central — and  disparage  the  value  of 
the  territories  already  colonised,  are  wanting  in  this  faculty. 
The  dry  bones  of  history  and  political  economy  must 
be  clothed  by  the  imagination  to  assume  form  and 
substance.      Such    persons   arrange    their    facts    as    the 


AGRICULTURAL  &  PASTORAL  RESOURCES    135 

Japanese  artists  arrange  their  lines ;  they  have  no  sense 
of  perspective  to  guide  them.  They  discredit  a  new 
country  because  it  cannot  satisfy  the  tests  which  they 
would  apply  to  an  old  country ;  they  condemn  the 
change  of  to-morrow  because  it  is  impossible  under  the 
conditions  of  to-day. 

It  was  no  easy  task,  that  task  which  was  undertaken  by 
the  English  in  the  sixth  century — to  clear  the  forests,  to 
drain  the  marshes,  and  reclaim  the  wastes  of  Britain ;  and 
who  shall  say  that  this  same  colonising  race,  with  its 
quickened  intelligence,  its  inherited  aptitudes,  its  ac- 
cumulated stores  of  knowledge,  its  ocean-going  steam- 
ships, its  railways,  and  its  telegraphs,  shall  not  teach  even 
the  desert  of  South  Africa  to  "rejoice  and  blossom  as 
the  rose  "  ? 

Note. — For  the  effect  of  the  Rinderpest,  see  Note  31. 


CHAPTER    VII  I. 

The  Diamond  Mines. 

TT  is  certainly  somewhat  remarkable  that  the  circum 
-*-  stances  which  attended  the  discovery  of  diamonds 
in  South  Africa  appear  to  be  only  imperfectly  remembered 
to-day.  There  are  various  accounts ;  but  these  accounts 
differ  from  each  other  in  some  material  particular,  and 
that,  too,  although  the  events  to  which  they  refer  happened 
less  than  thirty  years  ago. 

This  much,  however,  would  appear  to  be  established. 
In  the  year  1867,  a  hunter  or  trader,  named  O'Reilly, 
was  enamoured  of  a  white  stone  which  was  shown  him 
among  a  collection  of  river  pebbles  at  a  farmhouse  in 
the  Hopetown  district  of  the  Cape  Colony.  This  white 
stone  proved  to  be  a  diamond,  and  was  sold  eventually 
to  the  Governor,  Sir  Philip  Wodehouse,  for  ;^Soo.  Two 
years  later,  in  1869,  the  farmer  himself,  Van  Niekerk, 
purchased  a  similar  stone  from  a  Griqua  Hottentot  for 
cattle  and  goods  of  the  estimated  value  of  ;^4oo. 

This  second  stone  was  bought  by  Messrs  Lilienfeld 
of  Hopetown  for  10,000  pounds  or  guineas.  It  was 
appropriately  christened  "  the  Star  of  South  Africa,"  and 
subsequently  came  into  the  possession  of  the  Countess 
of  Dudley,  who  paid  ;^2 5,000  for  it. 

This  was  exciting  news,  and  before  long  a  number  of 
persons  were  searching  for  similar  treasures  over  the 
district  at  the  confluence  of  the  Vaal,  the  Modder,  and 
and  the  Orange  Rivers.  As  the  white  pebbles  had  been 
river  stones,  the  diggers  first  of  all  directed  their  attention 
136 


THE  DIAMOND  MINES  137 

to  the  banks  of  the  Vaal,  working  their  way  northwards, 
and  finding  numerous  diamonds.  By  the  beginning  of 
the  year  1870  there  were  10,000  men  on  the  banks  of  the 
Vaal.  Towards  the  end  of  that  year  diamonds  were  dis- 
covered on  two  farms,  Dutoitspan  and  Bulfontein,  about 
20  miles  south  of  the  bend  of  the  river  where  these 
"  wet "  diggings  were  situated.  The  diggers  now  rushed 
southwards,  and  established  themselves  as  best  they  could 
in  the  middle  of  the  barren  and  desolate  plain.  Next 
year  two  new  mines  were  reported,  "  Old  "  De  Beers  and 
the  "  Colesberg  Kopje,"  or  Kimberley.  All  these  four 
mines  would  be  enclosed  by  a  circle  with  a  diameter  of 
only  3^  miles,  and  they  produce  nine-tenths  of  the  total 
output  of  diamonds  from  South  Africa. 

Kimberley,  as  the  "dry"  diggings  came  to  be  col- 
lectively called,  was  anything  but  a  pleasant  place  of 
residence.  There  was  no  regular  communication  even 
by  road  with  the  surrounding  districts,  and  no  certain 
supply  of  food;  the  miners  were  sheltered  by  the  most 
unsubstantial  of  dwellings ;  water  was  scarce,  and  the 
dust  of  an  eight  months'  drought  blinded  their  eyes  and 
choked  their  throats. 

The  diamondiferous  area  is  covered  by  the  square 
formed  on  the  map  of  South  Africa  by  the  intersection 
of  the  28th  and  30th  parallels  of  south  latitude  and  the 
24th  and  26th  degrees  of  east  longitude.  This  square 
vv'ould  include  the  two  mines  in  the  Free  State,  Koffy- 
fontein  and  Jagersfontein,  subsequently  discovered  and 
situated  to  the  south  of  Kimberley,  and  the  river  diggings 
to  the  north.  Almost  the  whole  of  this  district  is  en- 
closed by  the  wide  fork  of  the  Orange  and  Vaal  Rivers,  and 
it  has  an  elevation  of  more  than  4000  feet  above  sea  level. 

The  diamond  mines  of  Kimberley  *  are  the  craters  and 

*  The  account  in  the  text  is  based  upon  the  reports  of  the  De 
Beers  Consolidated  Mines,  Limited,  and  in  particular  on  the  "Tech- 
nical Report "  of  Mr  Gardner  F.  Williams,  the  general  manager, 
issued  in  the  second  Annual  Report  (1890). 


138 


SOUTH  AFRICA 


pipes  of  extinct  volcanoes  filled  with  mud,  or  "blue 
ground,"  of  igneous  or  eruptive  origin.  These  oval 
columns  of  blue  ground  occur  in  the  formation  known 
as  the  Karoo  Beds — a  formation  which  extends  over  the 
whole  of  the  interior  of  what  we  call  "  South  "  Africa,  and 


By  Permission  of  De  Beers  Consolidaled  Mines ^  Ltd. 

below  the  surface  layers  they  are  encased  in  horizontal 
strata  consisting  of,  first,  carbonaceous  shales,  then  an 
amygdaloidal  trap  called  "  melaphyre,"  and,  lastly,  quartzite. 
The  thrust  which  filled  the  pipes  has  come  from  below. 
That  appears  from  two  circumstances.  In  the  first  place, 
the  edges  of  the  softer  strata,  the  carbonaceous  shales, 
were  found  to   be   turned   upwards,  and,  in  the  second, 


The  diamond  mines.  ^39 

fragments  of  the  lower  encasing  rocks  are  found  in  the 
higher  levels  of  the  column  in  the  shape  of  boulders 
embedded  in  the  blue  ground. 

The  origin  of  the  diamonds  themselves  is  not  yet 
explained.  At  first  it  was  suggested  that  the  diamonds, 
being  pure  carbon,  had  been  formed  by  the  passage  of 
volcanic  steam  through  the  carbonaceous  shales;  but 
when  the  work  of  excavation  proceeded,  and  the  levels 
of  the  column  below  the  shales  were  still  found  to  contain 
diamonds,  this  theory  had  to  be  abandoned.*  That  the 
diamonds  were  not  made  in  the  pipes  in  which  the  blue 
earth  is  now  enclosed  is  proved  by  the  fact  that  broken 
crystals  are  frequently  found  :  for  these  crystals,  of  course, 
could  only  have  been  broken  during  the  movements  which 
accompanied  the  process  of  filling  the  pipes.  There  is 
one  further  fact  which  is  noticeable.  It  seems  that  the 
blue  ground  has  not  spread  beyond  the  lips  of  the  craters. 
This  circumstance  is  accounted  for  by  the  supposition 
that,  at  the  time  the  columns  reached  the  surface,  the 
country  was  under  water.  It  was  covered,  it  is  supposed, 
by  the  waters  of  a  great  fresh-water  lake  in  the  Karoo 
area.  The  waters  of  this  lake  subsequently  flowed  into 
the  sea,  over,  and  through,  the  barrier  ranges,  discharged 
by  some  great  convulsion  of  nature. 

The  diamonds  were  won  at  first  by  surface  diggings, 
and  afterwards  by  subterranean  workings. 

During  the  first  period  the  mines  rapidly  assumed 
the  appearance  of  open  quarries.  In  the  Kimberley 
mine,  the  richest  of  the  four  mines,  the  blue  ground 
was  at  first  removed  by  means  of  roadways  which  had 
been  left  between  the  claims  when  the  diamondiferous 
area  was  first  marked  out.  But  in  the  middle  of  the 
second  year,   1872,  these  roadways  fell  in,  and  a  system 

*  If,  however,  as  appears  to  be  the  case,  fresh  strata  of  carbonaceous 
shales  are  found  below  the  quartzite,  the  theory  would  again  become 
possible. 


140  SOUTH  AFRICA 

of  bucket  haulage  had  to  be  adopted.  Wire  cables 
were  carried  from  the  various  workings  to  the  edge  of 
the  crater,  and  the  blue  ground  was  carried  in  buckets 
running  on  these  cables.  In  order,  however,  to  keep 
the  numerous  cables  clear  of  one  another,  and  provide 
each  proprietor  with  a  sufficient  space  for  hoisting  and 
tipping  the  buckets  at  the  edge,  wooden  stagings,  with 
tiers  of  platforms,  were  erected  round  the  margin  ;  and 
by  this  contrivance  the  extent  of  the  landing  space  was 
multiplied  by  three. 

Meanwhile,  as  the  work  of  excavation  proceeded,  the 
difficulty  and  cost  of  raising  the  blue  ground  increased. 
The  central,  and  lowest,  claims  were  flooded  by  accumu- 
lations of  drainage  water,  and  the  encasing  rocks  became 
disintegrated  by  exposure  to  atmospheric  influences,  and 
fell  in.  In  1874  the  Kimberley  Mining  Board  was 
established  to  combat  these  evils.  It  represented  the 
combined  interests  and  the  combined  resources  of  the 
miners,  but  it  proved  unequal  to  the  task  of  keeping 
the  workings  clear.  In  1882  more  than  half  a  million 
of  money  was  spent  in  removing  "reef,"  as  the  fallen 
rock  was  called ;  and  still  the  open  workings  were  only 
partially  cleared.  Early  in  the  following  year  the  Board 
desisted  from  the  hopeless  conflict.  Its  books  showed 
a  deficit  of  a  quarter  of  a  million,  and  the  banks  refused 
to  discount  its  "reef"  bills.  And  so  in  the  Kimberley 
mine  operations  were  brought  to  a  standstill. 

It  was  clear  that  the  blue  ground  must  be  removed 
now  by  subterranean  workings  ;  but  it  was  by  no  means 
easy  to  see  how  these  subterranean  workings  were  to  be 
commenced.  To  pierce  the  hard  rock  outside  the  limits 
of  the  crater,  and  reach  the  blue  ground  by  transverse 
drivings,  was  considered  at  first  both  too  costly  and  too 
lengthy.  Moreover,  it  was  not  yet  ascertained  that  the 
supply  of  blue  ground  was  practically  inexhaustible. 
Wliat   was    required    was    some    method    of   reaching   the 


THE  DIAMOND  MINES  141 

diamondiferous  ground  which  would  not  entail  the  per- 
formance of  an  amount  of  dead  work  which  would  eat 
up  the  profits.  Also  the  method  must  be  speedy,  for 
the  industry  required  immediate  relief.  These  require- 
ments were  met  by  a  scheme  put  forward  by  Mr  Edward 
Jones,  an  engineer.  He  proposed  to  reach  the  submerged 
blue  ground  by  sinking  shafts  through  the  reef  itself. 
The  shafts  were  sunk  on  the  "  coffer-dam "  principle ; 
that  is  to  say,  successive  frameworks  of  wood  were  let 
down  into  successive  excavations,  and  in  this  way  the 
shifting  mass  of  debris  was  penetrated  without  dangerous 
or  inconvenient  dislocations  of  the  surrounding  soil, 
and  the  blue  ground  was  once  more  reached. 

At  the  same  time,  however,  some  of  the  open  workings 
were  again  cleared  by  means  of  fresh  removals  of  reef. 
These  fresh  removals  of  reef  produced  fresh,  and  even  more 
disastrous,  subsidences,  which  both  carried  away  the  new 
shafts  and  machinery  and  again  submerged  the  open  workings. 

In  all  four  mines  successive  falls  of  reef  occurred,  and 
the  open  workings  were  gradually  abandoned.  By  the 
year  1885  it  was  admitted  that  open  workings  could  not 
be  carried  on  below  a  certain  depth,  which  varied  from 
350  to  400  feet;  and  it  was  then  that  the  present  system 
of  subterranean  working  was  gradually  introduced. 

Under  the  new  system  shafts  were  sunk  outside  the 
margin  of  the  craters,  and  the  blue  ground  was  struck 
by  transverse  tunnels.  The  subterranean  workings  were  in 
operation  first  at  the  De  Beers  mine ;  and  the  introduction 
of  the  system  caused  the  annual  out-put  of  diamonds 
won  from  that  mine  by  the  De  Beers  Mining  Company  to 
rise  from  half  a  million  to  a  million  carats.  At  the 
same  time  the  cost  of  production  was  largely  decreased 
by  the  improved  methods  which  had  been  simultaneously 
introduced.  Moreover,  as  the  orifice  of  the  pipe  was 
reached,  it  was  seen  that  the  column  of  blue  ground 
extended  perpendicularly  downwards,  and  that  the  supply 


142  SOUTH  AFRICA 

of  diamond-bearing  material  was  practically  inexhaustible. 
Although  the  new  workings  were  not  yet  in  operation  at 
the  Kimberley  mine,  it  was  known  that  the  same  forma- 
tion existed  there  too. 

The  diamond  industry  was  now  threatened  by  an 
entirely  different,  and  quite  unexpected,  danger,  the  loss 
of  profits  by  competition,  the  diminution  of  the  value 
of  the  diamond  by  excessive  production.  In  1882  the 
value  of  the  carat  was  27s.  3d.,  in  1887  it  had  already 
fallen  to  i8s.  5|d. 

This  disaster  was  prevented  by  an  amalgamation  of 
the  competing  companies. 

The  amalgamation  of  mining  interests  was  the  last 
of  a  series  of  changes  of  ownerships  which  had  ac- 
companied the  changes  in  the  methods  of  winning  the 
diamonds  which  we  have  traced.  Originally  the  diamond- 
iferous  area  of  each  mine  was  marked  out  in  claims. 
In  the  Kimberley  mine  these  claims  were  31  feet  by 
31  feet.  No  person  was  allowed  to  hold  more  than  one 
claim  under  the  early  regulations,  but  the  more  valuable 
claims  were  sub-divided,  and  so  this  mine  at  one  time 
contained  1600  separate  mining  properties.  In  1874 
the  limit  of  claims  tenable  by  a  single  owner  was  raised 
to  ten  ;  and  shortly  afterwards  it  was  altogether  abolished. 
As  the  difficulty  and  the  consequent  cost  of  raising  the 
blue  ground  increased,  a  process  set  in  which  may  be 
called  the  elimination  of  the  individual  digger.  In  1 880-1 
the  majority  of  the  properties  held  by  individuals  were 
converted  into  Limited  Liability  Companies ;  and,  in 
1883,  the  Inspector  of  mines  reported,  with  respect  to 
the  Kimberley  mine,  that  it  "  could  never  be  worked  to 
best  advantage  until  all  the  payable  holdings  had  been 
amalgamated."  In  1885  the  four  mines  were  in  the 
possession  of  forty-two  companies  and  fifty-six  private 
firms.  One  mine,  the  De  Beers,  however,  was  divided 
among  only   seven   companies  and   three  private  owners. 


THE  DIAMOND  MINES  143 

Among  these  companies  the  most  important  was  the  De 
Beers  Mining  Company,  and  this  Company  became  the 
nucleus  for  the  amalgamation. 

The  De  Beers  Mining  Company  was  founded  in  1880, 
with  a  capital  of  ;i^2  00,000.  It  gradually  absorbed  the 
whole  of  the  De  Beers  mine,  and  then  obtained,  by 
purchase  of  shares  and  amalgamation  of  properties,  con- 
trolling interests  in  the  remaining  three  mines.  On  the 
31st  March  1883,  the  De  Beers  Mining  Company  became 
the  De  Beers  Consolidated  Mines,  Limited ;  and  two 
years  later  the  directors  of  the  new  Company  were  able 
to  report  to  their  shareholders  that  the  object  with  which 
the  conversion  had  been  effected,  "  had  at  last  been  ac- 
complished, and  the  four  diamond-producing  mines  of 
De  Beers,  Kimberley,  Dutoitspan  and  Bulfontein  were 
now  practically  under  the  control  of  the  Company," 

In  this  way  a  contest  between  the  proprietors  of  the 
Kimberley  and  De  Beers  mines,  which  must  have  ruinously 
affected  the  industry,  was  averted.  The  author  of  this 
briUiant  financial  achievement  was  Mr  Cecil  Rhodes. 
Speaking  of  his  part  in  the  amalgamation  of  the  Kimberley 
mines.  Lord  Randolph  Churchill  says  :  *  "It  was  this  great 
work  accomplished  in  the  teeth  of  unheard-of  difficulties, 
and  almost  insurmountable  opposition,  representing  the 
conciliation  and  unification  of  almost  innumerable  jarring 
and  conflicting  interests,  which  revealed  to  South  Africa 
that  it  possessed  a  public  man  of  the  first  order." 

The  "De  Beers  Consolidated  Mines,"  therefore,  practi- 
cally represents  the  diamond  industry  of  Kimberley,  and 
their  methods  are  the  methods  of  that  industry.  They 
were  adopted  in  1889,  and  they  embody  the  result  of 
nearly  twenty  years'  experience  of  diamond  mining. 
Although  the  Company  control  all  four  mines  they  are  at 
present  working  only  two,  Kimberley  and  De  Beers.  These 
two  mines  afford  a  sufficient  and  economic  supply  of 
*  "  Men,  Mines,  and  Animals,"  p.  38. 


144  SOUTH  AFRICA 

diamond-bearing  ground,  for  it  is  the  policy  of  the  Company 
to  place  only  that  amount  of  diamonds  on  the  market  which 
it  can  carry  at  the  present  price  per  carat,  about  25  s. 

The  first  operation  *  is  to  raise  the  blue  ground  to  the 
surface.  For  this  purpose  tunnels  are  driven  north  and 
south,  east  and  west,  through  the  area  of  excavation.  The 
rectangular  spaces  formed  by  the  intersection  of  the  tunnels 
are  successively  cleared  of  blue  ground,  working  from  the 
rock  margin  inwards.  As  the  process  of  excavation  proceeds 
the  reef  or  debris  gradually  falls  in  and  fills  up  the  space 
created  by  the  removal  of  the  blue  ground.  The  working 
levels  are  laid  out  40,  and  the  main  levels  from  90  to 
120  feet  apart.  The  "hoisting"  is  done  only  from  the 
main  levels.  The  blue  ground  is  "  dumped  "  down  through 
shoots  to  the  main  levels,  then  loaded  into  trucks  and 
finally  "  tipped  "  at  the  foot  of  the  shaft  into  the  "  skip." 
The  skip  holds  four  loads,  or  rather  more  than  three  tons, 
and  Mr  Gardner  Williams,  the  general  manager  of  the 
Company,  reports  in  June  of  1893,  that  an  average  of  5*3 
tons  per  minute  had  been  hoisted  by  a  single  shaft  during 
an  eight  hours'  "  shift." 

At  the  head  of  the  shaft  the  blue  ground  is  tipped  into 
surface  boxes,  and  then  drawn  off  into  trucks  which  carry  it, 
by  a  system  of  "  endless  wire  rope  haulage,"  to  the  "  floors  " 
for  pulverisation.  These  "  floors  "  are  simply  rectangular 
spaces,  600  yards  by  200  yards,  marked  off"  on  ground 
which  has  been  cleared  of  bush,  and  rendered  hard  and 
level  by  rolling.  The  length  of  the  main  line  is  three  miles, 
and  there  are  two  branches,  respectively  one  mile  and 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  length. 

This  second  operation,  pulverisation,  is  effected  by 
exposing  the  blue  ground  to  the  action  of  the  air  and  rain, 
and  to  assist  disintegration  the  ground  is  "  worked "  or 
broken  up,  first  by  men  with  pickaxes  and  afterwards  by 

*  This  account  of  the  methods  pursued  is  based  upon  Mr  Gardner  F. 
Williams'  "Technical  Report." 


THE  DIAMOND  MINES 


145 


harrows  drawn  originally  by  spans  of  mules,  but  subsequently 
by  steam  power.  The  length  of  the  exposure  required  varies 
from  three  to  six  months  according  to  the  nature  of  the  blue 
ground. 

The  pulverised  blue  ground  is  then  "washed."  The 
machines  are  erected  in  "  nests  "  at  various  points,  and  are 
generally  placed  on  heaps  of  tailings.  The  blue  ground  is 
carried  by  mechanical  methods  to  the  top  of  the  machines, 

OEPOSITINO     FLOORS  — 


OE  BEERS    MINE  


PCicTMul, 

nn 

\? 

/"- 

N                           /" 

31 

K 

w 

te 

x> 

t. 

u 

^^■h«y/                       K    e[n]   I    L   W  0    R   T    M 

t 

S    T 

A    T 

C 

i 

g — 

i 

t 

3 

» 

" 

" 

" 

" 

« 

« 

" 

« 

'  w 

" 

" 

" 

H 

T^ 

llli._ 

jU-.J 

'*-* 

_»j_ 



O0eST-FOJ7-rB7» 


By  Permission. 


and  dumped  into  a  shoot  which  is  furnished  with  perforated 
pipes.  These  pipes  supply  water  and  at  the  same  time 
regulate  the  downward  passage  of  the  mass  into  the  puddling 
cylinder.  The  latter  is  a  revolving  cylinder,  two  and 
a  half  feet  in  diameter,  with  perforations  of  one  and 
a  quarter  inch  round,  and  one  inch  square.  Both 
clear  and  muddy  water  is  poured  into  the  cylinder 
with  the  blue  ground.  The  "  coarse  "  ground  passes  out 
at  the  end  of  the  cylinder  and  is  carried  back  to  the  floors 


146  SOUTH  AFRICA 

for  further  pulverisation.  The  "  fine "  ground  passes 
through  the  perforations  and  is  shot  into  the  washing  pan. 
The  washing  pan  is  fourteen  feet  in  diameter,  and  is 
furnished  with  ten  revolving  arms  provided  with  "  teeth  " 
so  set  as  to  work  the  solid  mass  by  a  spiral  course  to  the 
edge  of  the  pan,  while  the  lighter  stuff  is  discharged  from 
the  centre  into  a  second  pan,  called  a  "  safety  "  pan.  Each 
"  safety "   pan    serves    two    "  washing "    pans.     The   solid 


DLB£ERS  COfiSOilDATED  MINES  L".' 


Crfiiui, 


A/<RANCCMENT    OF    MTAiHINC     flAMT ' 


DC    6ECRS  MIN(.   


By  Ferviisdon. 

mass,  or  "  deposit "  is  drawn  off  by  means  of  a  "  slot " 
from  the  edge  of  the  pan  every  twelve  hours.  It  is  this 
"  deposit "  which  contains  the  diamonds. 

Meanwhile  the  water  is  not  wasted.  It  is  carried  from 
the  puddling  cylinder  to  a  mud  screen,  and,  after  being 
purified,  is  again  hoisted  by  bucket  elevators  out  of  the 
tank  into  which  it  flows  from  this  screen,  to  the  top  of 
the  machine.  The  rate  at  which  the  machines  work  may 
be  gathered  from  the  fact  that  from  forty  to  forty-five  loads 


THE  DIAMOND  MINES 


U1 


pass  through  a  single  pan  in  one  hour.  Nor  is  the 
efficiency  of  the  machinery  inferior  to  its  speed,  for  by  this 
process  the  blue  ground  is  reduced  to  one-hundredth  part  of 
its  bulk.  That  is  to  say,  that  loo  loads  of  blue  ground  are 
"  washed  "  down  into  one  load  of  deposit. 

This  deposit  is  then  "  graded,"  or  separated  into 
stones  (or  gravel)  of  equal  size,  and  further  concentrated 
by  Hartz  jigs  or  "  pulsators."  The  separation  is  performed 
by  a  cylinder,  about   1 5  feet  long  by  i  ^  in  diameter,  made 


-SECTION  A.8- 


Bjf  Permission. 


by  metal  plates  with  round  perforations  of  four  different 
sizes,  namely,  from  ^th  to  fths  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 
The  coarse  deposit  passes  out  at  the  end,  and  is  then 
sorted  by  hand.  The  fine  deposit  passes  through  the 
perforations,  and  flows  down  on  to  jigs  furnished  with 
screens  covered  with  a  layer  of  bullets,  and  having  square 
perforations  corresponding  to  the  round  perforations  in 
the  cylinder.  The  four  sizes  of  stones  are  collected  in 
V-shaped    boxes  under   the    screens.       The    lighter  stuff, 


148  SOUTH  AFRICA 

however,  remains  on  the  surface  of  the  downward  flowing 
mass,  passes  over  the  top  of  the  screens,  and  is  carried  off 
to  the  tailing  heap.  Out  of  twelve  loads  of  deposit  fed 
into  the  cylinder,  one  would  pass  out  at  the  end,  four 
would  pass  through  the  screens  of  the  pulsators  into  the 
boxes,  and  seven  would  be  carried  away  as  waste. 

The  deposit  thus  separated  into  masses  of  equal  sized 
stones  is  then  laid  out  on  tables  and  sorted.  The  sorting 
is  done  first  (while  the  stuff  is  wet)  by  European  workmen, 
and  afterwards  by  native  convicts  supplied  by  the  Cape 
Government. 

The  diamonds  vary  in  size  from  a  pin's  head  to  that  of 
the  largest  diamond  as  yet  found  at  Kimberley.  This 
measured  if  inches  through  the  major,  and  i^  inches 
through  the  minor  axis,  and  weighed  in  the  rough  4281^ 
carats,  and,  when  cut,  228^  carats.*  They  show  all 
colours,  green,  blue,  pink,  brown,  yellow,  and  are  both 
clear  and  opaque.  After  sorting  they  are  sent,  under  an 
armed  escort,  to  the  diamond  ofifice.  There  they  are  classified 
by  reference  to  their  size,  colour  and  purity,  and  finally 
made  up  into  parcels,  and  sold  to  the  agents  of  the 
European  diamond-merchants. 

The  following  figures  will  show  the  extent  of  the  opera- 
tions of  the  De  Beers  Consolidated  Mines  : — 

The  extent  of  the  open  works  of  the  four  mines  is 
1 1 1.73  acres.  The  De  Beers  mine  shows  an  area  at  the 
hard  rock  level  of  io'i2  acres  of  which  5*97  are  worked; 
and  the  Kimberley  mine,  at  the  same  level,  of  4*55 
acres,  of  which  2*69  are  being  worked.  Both  mines  and 
works  are  lighted  by  ten  circuits  of  electric  lamps,  with  a 
total  illuminating  power  equal  to  that  of  63,696  candles. 
The  amount  of  labour  employed,  according  to  the  Report 

On  June  30th,  1893,  a  diamond  was  found  at  the  Jagersfontein 
Mine,  in  the  Orange  Free  State,  which  weighs  969J  carats  gross,  is  of 
fine  quality,  and  bhie-while  colour,  and  measures  through  its  longest 
axis  3  inches.  This  is  probably  the  largest  and  the  most  valuable 
diamond  in  the  world. 


THE  DIAMOND  MINES  149 

issued  in  June  1890,  was  1261  Europeans,  who  are 
comfortably  housed  at  the  village  of  Kenil worth,  and  5250 
natives,  who  are  imprisoned  in  the  two  "  compounds." 
Among  the  underground  workers  the  wages  of  the 
Europeans  range  from  ^^7  to  ;^4  per  week ;  and  those  of 
the  natives  from  4s.  to  5  s.  per  day.  The  Europeans  and 
native  workmen  on  "  the  floors  "  receive  respectively  from 
j[^(i  to  ;!^3,  I2S.,  and  from  21s.  to  17s.  6d.  per  week. 

By  means  of  this  plant  and  this  supply  of  labour,  in  the 
financial  year  1892-93  (in  round  numbers)  three  million 
loads  of  blue  ground  were  raised  at  a  cost  of  a  million  and 
a  half  sterling,  and  the  diamonds  found  realised  three 
millions  and  a  quarter,  showing  a  profit  of  a  million  and 
a  half ;  and  out  of  this  profit,  after  all  necessary  deductions 
and  reserves,  the  Company  paid  two  half-yearly  dividends 
of  i2|  per  cent,  on  their  capital  of  four  millions. 

These,  then,  are  the  processes  by  which  the  diamonds  of 
Kimberley  are  won.  Let  me  add  a  description  of  the 
town  itself.  It  is  the  vivid  picture  contained  in  Lord 
Randolph  Churchill's  "  Men,  Mines,  and  Animals."  * 

"  Nothing  in  the  external  appearance  of  Kimberley 
suggests  either  its  fame  or  its  wealth.  A  straggling, 
haphazard  collection  of  small,  low  dwellings,  constructed 
almost  entirely  of  corrugated  iron  or  of  wood,  laid  out  with 
hardly  any  attempt  at  regularity,  and  without  the  slightest 
trace  of  municipal  magnificence,  is  the  home  of  the 
diamond  industry.  It  seems  that  when  the  diamonds 
were  first  discovered  some  twenty  years  ago,  many 
thousands  of  persons  settled  down  suddenly  on  the 
spot  like  a  cluster  of  swarming  bees,  and  established 
themselves  anyhow  as  best  they  could  in  the  most 
rough  and  primitive  fashion,  never  dreaming  but  that 
the  yield  of  diamonds  would  be  of  limited  extent  and 
short  duration,  that  their  fortunes  would  be  rapidly 
acquired,  and  that  they  would  pass  as  rapidly  away 
*  P.  36. 


I50  SOUTH  AFRICA 

from  the  place,  having  exhausted  all  its  wealth-producing 
resources.  The  reverse  has  proved  the  case.  The 
diamondiferous  resources  of  Kimberley  are  now  known 
to  be  practically  inexhaustible,  but  the  amalgamation  of  the 
mines  has  restricted  employment  and  checked  immigration, 
and  the  town  still  preserves,  and  probably  will  always  pre- 
serve, its  transitory  and  rough-and-ready  appearance." 

There  is  one  point  still  to  be  noted.  The  special 
character  of  this  industry  has  produced  some  rather 
curious  legislation.  In  order  to  protect  the  diamond 
industry — an  industry  in  which  the  product  is  at  once 
so  valuable  and  so  portable — the  Cape  Parliament  has 
passed  a  series  of  enactments  which  have  created  a 
statutory  crime  known  as  "  Illicit  Diamond  Buying,"  and 
this  crime  is  punished  with  remarkable  severity.  The 
ordinary  presumption  of  the  law  in  favour  of  the  innocence 
of  the  accused  is  abolished,  and  a  man  is  liable  to  a 
maximum  penalty  of  fifteen  years'  penal  servitude  for 
merely  neglecting  to  report  to  the  proper  quarter,  and 
at  once,  a  diamond  which  he  may  have  chanced  to  have 
found  (Note  22). 

In  the  case  of  the  native  employes  extraordinary 
precautions  are  taken.  During  the  term  of  their  service, 
for  three  months  and  more,  they  are  treated  as  prisoners. 
Every  day  they  are  stripped  and  searched  on  leaving  the 
mines,  and  for  a  week  before  the  conclusion  of  their 
contract  they  are  isolated  and  subjected  to  a  regime  which 
makes  a  theft  of  diamonds  a  physical  impossibility. 

The  story  of  the  diamond  mines  wins  our  interest  not 
so  much  because  of  the  element  of  the  marvellous  which 
surrounds  the  commencement  of  the  industry — the  weird 
situation,  the  strange  origin,  the  chance  discovery — but 
because  of  the  difficulties  which  beset  its  development. 
Twice  the  industry  was  threatened  with  destruction — in 
1883  by  successive  falls  of  the  encasing  rocks,  and  in 
1889  by  the  commencement  of  a  ruinous  competition. 


THE  DIAMOND  MINES  151 

The  lesson  of  Kimberley  is  the  value  of  effort.  There 
was  no  high  motive  to  elicit  this  effort.  At  first  sight 
scarcely  a  useful  purpose  was  subserved,  for  the  value 
of  a  gem  is  of  all  values  the  most  artificial,  its  beauty  is 
of  all  beautiful  objects  least  securely  founded  upon  utility. 
But  the  digger  and  the  capitalist  sought  not  diamonds 
but  wealth :  a  few  were  successful,  far  more  were  un- 
successful ;  but  South  Africa  has  reaped  the  benefit  of 
their  efforts. 

"The  pulpit  and  the  press,"  says  Emerson,*  "have  many 
commonplaces  denouncing  the  thirst  for  wealth;  but  if 
men  should  take  these  moralists  at  their  word,  and  leave 
off  aiming  to  be  rich,  the  moralists  would  rush  to  rekindle 
at  all  hazards  this  love  of  power  in  the  people,  lest 
civilisation  should  be  undone." 

The  history  of  the  diamond  mines  affords  us  a  striking 
illustration  of  this  pregnant  remark. 

The  yield  of  twenty-five  years'  search  in  the  Kimberley 
mines  has  been  exchanged  for  seventy  millions  of  money. 
This  exchange  has  been  a  factor  of  supreme  importance 
in  the  history  of  South  Africa.  The  interest  of  the 
mother-country  was  awakened,  the  railway  system  of  the 
Cape  Colony  was  developed,  and,  above  all,  an  energetic 
and  wealthy  community  was  created  in  the  heart  of  South 
Africa. 

What  ultimate  developments,  political  and  commercial, 
will  follow  the  era  of  gold  discovery  we  cannot  tell,  but  of 
this  at  least  we  may  be  certain,  that  the  present  quickened 
life  of  South  Africa  is  the  direct  outcome  of  the  experience, 
the  energy,  and  the  resources  which  were  concentrated 
there  by  the  search  for  diamonds, — that  Johannesburg 
and  Fort  Salisbury  are  alike  the  offspring  of  Kimberley. 

*  "  The  Conduct  of  Life  "  :  E^say  on  Wealth, 


CHAPTER    IX. 

Gold-Mining. 

TT  is  the  prospect  of  the  rapid  acquisition  of  wealth 
-*-  which  makes  men  leave  their  home  and  expose  them- 
selves to  unknown  difficulties  and  unknown  dangers  in 
new  countries.  The  most  efficient  magnet  is  gold.  In 
the  middle  of  the  century  we  have  seen  it  at  work  populat- 
ing North  America  and  Australia  :  during  the  closing  years 
of  the  century  we  see  this  same  powerful  influence  in  full 
operation  in  South  Africa. 

The  mineral  wealth  of  South  Africa  is  both  varied  and 
widely  distributed. 

Iron  is  found  in  the  Cape  Colony,  in  the  Orange  Free 
State  and  in  Natal,  and  there  are  ample  deposits  of  this 
useful  metal  in  the  Transvaal  and  in  the  territories  of  the 
Chartered  Company.  At  present  this  metal  is  not 
worked. 

Copper-mining  is  the  oldest  of  the  mineral  industries 
of  (modern)  South  Africa.  The  deposits  lie  in  the  north- 
western corner  of  the  Cape  Colony.  Copper-mining  was 
commenced  in  1852;  and  by  1864  the  export  had  risen 
to  ;;^  1 00,000  in  value.  Since  that  date  the  annual  out- 
put has  reached  a  value  varying  between  p^ 2 5 0,000  and 
;!^8oo,ooo.  Out  of  the  annual  output  of  30,000  tons, 
nine-tenths  (27,000  tons)  are  raised  by  the  Cape  Copper 
Mining  Company.  Ookiep,  where  these  mines  lie,  is 
connected  by  a  line  of  railway,  ninety  miles  in  length, 
with  Port  Nolloth. 

Silver  is  found  in  the  Cape  Colony,  but  not  in  payable 


GOLD-MINING  153 

quantities.  In  the  Transvaal  there  is  a  district  which 
would  be  enclosed  by  a  circle  with  a  diameter  of  50 
miles,  immediately  east  of  Pretoria,  where  there  are 
abundant  deposits  of  silver.  A  considerable  amount  of 
capital  has  been  invested  in  these  Transvaal  silver  mines, 
and  several  companies  are  at  work.  So  far,  however, 
the  industry  is  promising,  but  not  yet  established :  its 
development  has  been  hindered  by  the  superior  attractions 
of  the  gold  fields. 

Coal  is  found  in  the  Cape  Colony,  in  the  Orange  Free 
State,  in  Natal,  and  in  the  Transvaal.  In  the  Cape 
Colony  the  coal  mines  on  the  Stormberg  Mountains  are 
being  worked.  Three  of  these,  Cyphergat,  Fairview,  and 
Molteno,  furnish  an  annual  output  of  35,000  tons,  *  and 
provide  supplies  of  coal  for  the  Eastern  and  Northern 
Railway  systems.  The  Free  State  output  is  about  20,000 
tons.  The  Natal  coal  deposits  are  found  in  the  highest 
and  most  northern  of  the  three  natural  formations  or 
terraces  into  which  the  area  of  that  Colony  is  divided. 
The  annual  output  amounts  to  140,000  tons  ;  and  of  this 
total  more  than  three-fourths  (117,000  tons)  was  raised 
by  the  Dundee  Coal  Company  at  the  place  so  named. 
The  coal  industry  is  a  valuable  ancillary  to  the  sugar 
industry,  f  The  coal  fields  in  the  Transvaal  lie  in  close 
juxtaposition  to  the  gold  fields.  Coal  deposits  are  found 
over  a  wide  area  extending  from  the  Vaal  River  on  the 
south  to  Middelburg  on  the  north,  and  from  Boksburg 
(on  the  edge  of  the  Randt  Basin)  on  the  west  to  the 
Drakensberg  Mountains  on  the  east.  Two  collieries, 
the  Brakspan  and  Springs,  which  have  an  output  of 
200,000  tons  and  100,000  tons  respectively,  lie  on  the 
eastern  edge  of  the  Randt  basin,  and  furnish  the  gold 
fields  with  the  necessary  supplies  of  coal  at  an  average 
price  of  20s.  6d.  the  ton.     This  convenient  and  abundant 

*  The  coal  figures  are  taken  from  the  returns  for  1892. 
t  See  Chapter  V.  p.  85. 


154  SOUTH  AFRICA 

supply  of  fuel  has  largely  assisted  the  rapid  development 
of  gold-mining  on  the  Randt. 

The  subjoined  comparison  will  indicate  the  significance 
of  these  figures — 

Estimated  area  of  coal  fields      Annual  output 
in  square  miles.  in  tons. 

South  Africa,     .  56,000  600,000 

New  South  Wales,      25,000  3,500,000 

United  Kingdom,          4,000  180,000,000 

The  coal  industry  in  South  Africa,  therefore,  is  in  its 
infancy,  but  it  is  capable  of  indefinite  development. 

Gold  is  found  in  the  Cape  Colony,  but  not  in  sufificient 
quantities  to  repay  the  miner  or  digger.  Both  in  the 
Knysna  and  at  Prince  Albert  in  the  Karoo,  gold  winning 
has  been  commenced  and  abandoned.  It  is  also  found 
in  Zululand,  in  Swaziland,  in  the  Transvaal,  and  in  the 
territories  of  the  Chartered  Company.  To-day,  gold- 
mining  is  being  actively  prosecuted  in  the  Transvaal  and 
in  Matabeleland  and  Mashonaland. 

The  era  of  gold  development  has  advanced  rapidly. 
Only  ten  years  ago  gold-mining  in  South  Africa  was  a 
tradition  of  the  past  or  a  dream  of  the  future.  Men 
looked  regretfully  at  the  old  Dutch  maps  in  which 
Mashonaland  and  Matabeleland  were  indicated  as  "The 
Land  of  Ophir":  or  shook  their  heads  when  they  were 
asked  to  buy  shares  in  the  Transvaal  gold  ventures.  Up 
to  this  time  there  had  been  many  discoveries  and  many 
disappointments. 

As  early  as  the  year  1854,  two  years  after  the  inde- 
pendence of  the  emigrant  farmers  beyond  the  Vaal  had 
been  recognised  by  the  Imperial  Government,  discoveries 
of  gold  were  reported  in  the  Transvaal.  But  the  Boer 
Government  prohibited  prospecting.  They  were  afraid — 
and  rightly  so — that  the  introduction  of  a  mining  popula- 
tion would  endanger  their  newly  acquired  independence. 


GOLD-MINING  155 

The  early  explorers  were  compelled,  therefore,  to  turn 
their  attention  to  the  districts  northward  of  the  Limpopo. 
The  history  of  the  discovery  of  gold  offers  a  contrast  to 
the  history  of  the  discovery  of  diamonds.  The  searchers 
for  diamonds  stumbled  at  the  very  outset  upon  the  richest 
deposits,  the  four  marvellous  mines  at  Kimberley ;  but 
fortune  seems  to  have  taken  a  whimsical  delight  in  mis- 
leading the  prospectors.  Hartley,  the  "  pioneer  of  the  gold 
fields,"  himself  possessed  a  farm  on  the  Witwatersrandt. 
In  1869  Baines  passed  over  the  northern  outcrop  of  the 
famous  conglomerate  beds  when  he  was  conducting  a 
party  of  gold  prospectors  from  Durban  to  Matabeleland. 
During  the  period  of  the  annexation  (1877-81),  an 
Australian  expert,  Mr  Armfield,  was  employed  by  the 
first  administrator.  Sir  Theophilus  Shepstone.  He  was 
at  work  prospecting  on  the  Randt,  but  the  conglomerate 
beds  escaped  his  hammer.  And  so  it  was  not  until  two 
years'  patient  and  skilful  search  had  been  completed  by 
two  brothers,  Mr  H.  W.  and  Mr  F.  Struben,  that  the 
existence  of  the  most  valuable  and  the  most  permanent 
gold  field  yet  known  to  the  world  was  revealed. 

After  the  discovery  of  the  Tati  gold  field  by  the  German 
explorer,  Karl  Mauch,  in  1865,  the  early  restrictions  upon 
prospecting  were  withdrawn  by  the  Transvaal  Government, 
and  gold  discovery  was  encouraged  In  1872  the  subject 
had  become  sufficiently  important  to  require  the  attention 
of  the  Volksraad,  and  the  first  gold  law  was  passed  in 
that  year.  This  law — the  first  of  successive  enactments 
which  were  codified  by  the  "  Consolidated  Gold  Law " 
of  1885 — declared  the  right  to  all  minerals  and  precious 
stones  to  be  vested  in  the  state  (Note  23).  At  the  same 
time  rewards  were  offered  for  the  discovery  of  payable 
gold  fields. 

The  first  gold  fields  in  the  Transvaal  were  in  the 
mountainous  regions  east  and  west  of  the  Northern 
Drakensburg. 


156  SOUTH  AFRICA 

In  1873  the  Landdrost  of  Lydenberg  reported  that 
gold  had  been  discovered  thirty-three  miles  east  of  his  town, 
and  these  Lydenberg  fields  have  continued  to  be  worked 
up  to  the  present  with  varying  fortune.  After  the  Retro- 
cession (1881)  the  Transvaal  Government  adopted  the 
"  concession  "  or  "  monopoly  "  principle.  It  is  alleged 
that  they  wished  to  reduce  the  numbers  of  the  miscel- 
laneous mining  population  by  placing  the  industry  in  the 
hands  of  a  few  capitalists.  Whether  any  such  intention 
existed  or  not,  the  object  in  question  was  not  secured. 
The  diggers  withdrew  to  the  De  Kaap  valley,  fifty  miles 
south  of  Lydenberg,  where  the  existence  of  gold  had  been 
reported  as  early  as  1875.  In  1886  a  rich  mine,  the 
Sheba  mine,  was  discovered  in  this  district,  and  in  the 
following  year  Barberton,  the  centre  of  the  De  Kaap 
fields,  had  attracted  a  population  of  10,000  persons. 
Since  that  date  Barberton  has  gradually  declined.  For 
both  the  Lydenberg  and  the  De  Kaap  fields  have  been 
drained  of  their  population  by  the  Randt,  which  was 
declared  a  public  gold  field  in  September  1886. 

The  Witwatersrandt  is  the  ridge  of  a  great  stretch  of 
uplands,  the  "  high  veldt  "  of  the  Transvaal,  which  runs 
for  300  miles,  almost  due  east  and  west,  between  the 
valley  of  the  Vaal  and  the  head  waters  of  the  Limpopo. 

Johannesburg  stands  on  the  crown  of  this  ridge  at  an 
elevation  of  5735  feet  above  sea  level. 

It  was  on  these  same  desolate  uplands  that  the  Transvaal 
flag  was  raised  by  the  Triumvirate  in  revolt  against  the 
Imperial  Government  on  the  i6th  December  1880.  In 
1 886  a  few  prospectors  and  their  workpeople  were  the 
sole  inhabitants  of  the  Randt.  To-day  Johannesburg 
ranks  as  one  of  the  commercial  centres  of  the  world  ; 
and  for  thirty  miles  along  the  crest  of  the  ridge  the  pit-head 
gears,  batteries  and  surface  works  of  the  sixty  or  seventy 
companies  in  active  operation,  give  evidence  of  the  millions 
of  capital  which  have  been  invested, 


GOLD-MINING  157 

"Johannesburg,"  says  Lord  Randolph  Churchill,  "ex- 
tends for  a  considerable  distance  along  a  ridge  of  hills 
6000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Around,  wherever 
the  eye  reposes,  it  is  arrested  by  mining  shafts,  hauling 
gear,  engine  houses  and  tall  chimneys.  Johannesburg 
presents  a  very  English  appearance,  that  of  an  English 
manufacturing  town  minus  its  noise,  smoke  and  dirt.  The 
streets  are  crowded  with  a  busy,  bustling,  active,  keen, 
intelligent-looking  throng.  Here  are  gathered  together 
human  beings  from  every  quarter  of  the  globe,  the  English 
possessing  an  immense  predominance.  The  buildings 
and  general  architecture  of  the  town  attain  an  excellent 
standard,  style  having  been  consulted  and  sought  after, 
stone  and  bricks  the  materials,  corrugated  iron  being 
confined  to  the  roofs,  solidity,  permanence  and  progress 
the  general  characteristics.  The  rise  of  the  town  has 
been  almost  magical."  * 

The  sudden  growth  of  Johannesburg  f  is  the  more 
remarkable  when  we  remember  that  at  first  every  nail, 
every  plank,  every  brick,  every  morsel  of  food  and  every 
drop  of  drink  had  to  be  carried  up  to  the  desert  plateau, 
for  a  hundred  miles  or  more,  on  ox-waggons.  The 
average  pace  of  the  ox-waggon  is  a  mile  and  a  half 
an  hour.  To-day,  however,  the  railway  has  brought 
Johannesburg  within  forty-nine  hours  of  Cape  Town,  and 
seventeen  or  eighteen  days  of  London. 

Geologists  tell  us  that  the  granite  foundation  of  South 
Africa  was  overlaid  by  sedimentary  accumulations  which 
became  quartzose  strata ;  that  both  granite  and  horizontal 
strata  were  pierced  and  broken  by  the  intrusion  of  igneous 
rocks  ;  that  the  distorted  surface  was  again  covered  by 
horizontal  strata,  and  again  broken  by  fresh  intrusions 
of  eruptive  masses ;  and  that,  finally,  the  whole  system 
was  subjected   to  a  great   convulsion  which  carried   the 

*  "  Men,  Mines,  and  Animals  in  South  Africa,"  p.  58. 
t  The  present  population  is  102,078.     See  Note  30. 


X58 


SOUTH  AFRICA 


edges  of  broken  sections  of  the  horizontal  strata  to  the 
surface,  and  in  places  even  thrust  the  granite  through 
the  successive  layers  of  sedimentary  rocks.  Then  the 
face  of  the  whole  country  was  smoothed  and  softened 
by  the  silent  passage  of  the  hand  of  Time. 

The   Randt   basin  is   a   section  of  the   upper   series   of 
quartzose    strata,    broken    and    dislocated,    but  preserving 


B-eU>n<v 


Slaiiderlcn, 


3lsctr1aim:d,  Jingle  N\  ^: 

ofMipr     ^ 


a  certain  regularity  of  curvature  from  its  depressed  centre 
to  its  upturned  edges.  The  sandstones  and  quartzites 
are  interstratified  with  beds  of  conglomerate,  and  it  is 
these  conglomerate  or  "  banket  "  reefs  which  carry  gold. 

The  edge  of  the  basin  can  be  traced  for  some  130 
miles  on  the  southward  slope.  On  the  northern  edge 
there  is  an  outcrop  of  half-a-dozen  parallel  reefs — the 
Main  Reef  series — which  extends  for  thirty  miles  east  and 


GOLD-MINING  159 

west  of  Johannesburg.  Further  east  at  Heidelburg,  and 
further  west  at  Klerksdorp  there  are  fresh  outcrops ; 
and  from  all  these  outcrops  the  reefs  dip  towards  the 
centre  of  the  basin  at  angles  varying  from  80  to  10 
degrees. 

The  thirty  miles  of  the  northern  outcrop,  from  Rand- 
fontein  to  Boksburg,  is  the  centre  of  the  mining  activity. 
There  are  some  sixty  or  more  companies  at  work,  and  the 
district  is  traversed  by  a  railway  which  runs  from  the 
Spring  Colliery  on  the  east  to  Krugersdorp  on  the  west ; 
and  thus  provides  the  industry  with  its  supplies  of  coal. 

The  character  of  the  ore  is  such  that  both  the  most 
efficient  machinery  and  the  most  skilful  processes  are 
required  for  successful  gold  extraction.  Above  the  water 
level — which  varies  in  depth  from  50  to  150  feet — the 
ore  was  a  friable  conglomerate,  which  yielded  by  milling 
80  per  cent,  of  its  gold.  But  the  supply  of  free-milHng 
ore  was  soon  exhausted.  Below,  it  is  a  hard,  pyritic 
conglomerate,  yielding  only  50  per  cent,  by  mechanical 
processes ;  and  it  is  this  pyritic  ore  which  constitutes 
the  auriferous  supply  of  the  Randt  basin. 

The  crushing  of  the  stamps,  therefore,  and  the  con- 
centration of  the  vanners,  are  supplemented  by  chemical 
processes  (Note  24).  The  "concentrates"  are  treated 
by  the  Plattner  or  Chlorination  process ;  and  the  "  tail- 
ings "  by  the  M'Arthur-Forrest  or  an  equivalent  Cyanide 
process. 

The  result  of  this  combination  of  milling,  concentration, 
and  precipitation  is  that  90  per  cent,  of  the  gold  which  the 
hard  pyritic  ore  carries  is  successfully  recovered. 

And  now  a  question  of  great  interest  arises  :  What  is  the 
probable  area  of  these  auriferous  deposits  ?  What  is  the 
probable  extent  of  the  conglomerate  beds  ?  This  is  a 
question  which  can  only  be  answered  by  experts,  and  that 
approximately. 

Mr  Hamilton    Smith,  the   American    mining   engineer, 


i6o  SOUTH  AFRICA 

visited  the  Randt  at  the  end  of  1892,  for  the  purpose  of 
reporting  to  Messrs  Rothschild  on  the  prospects  of  mining 
at  deep  levels.  He  assumes  that  50,000  feet  of  the  northern 
outcrop,  that  is  to  say,  not  quite  eleven  out  of  thirty 
miles  of  outcrop,  extends  southwards  to  an  inclined  depth 
of  5200  feet,  with  an  average  probable  thickness  of  five 
feet.  He  calculates  that  this  extent  of  conglomerate  would 
contain  100,000,000  tons  of  ore,  of  which  3,000,000  tons 
had  been  already  raised,  and  that  the  value  of  the  balance, 
at  a  yield  of  12I  dwts.  the  ton,  would  be  ;^2 15,000,000. 
He  further  assumes  that  "  the  many  miles  "  of  conglomerate 
beds  outside  this  area  will  produce  at  least  half  as  much 
more,  and  concludes,  therefore,  that  the  total  value  of  the 
Randt  deposits  is  ;i^3 2 5,000,000,  or  about  _;^i 00,000,000 
in  excess  of  the  total  yield  of  California  between  1849  ^"^ 
1892  (;^23o,ooo,ooo).  He  also  adds  that  in  his  opinion 
the  producing  power  of  the  mines  will  be  raised  in  "  three  or 
four  years  "  to  an  output  of  "  five  or  six  million  tons  of  ore 
per  annum,"  and  a  yield  of  _p^i 0,000,000  in  value.  As 
the  yield  of  the  Randt  for  1895  amounted  to  a  total  of 
2,277,635  ozs.,  valued  at  ;^7, 839,500,  it  appears  that 
this  forecast  will  be  realised.  This  output  is,  of  course, 
independent  of  the  lesser  Transvaal  fields.  Beside  the 
Lydenberg  and  De  Kaap  fields,  those  of  Klerksdorp  and 
Potchefstroom  have  commenced  to  yield  handsomely.  These 
lesser  fields  yielded  250,000  ozs.,  or  about  ;j^8 5 0,000  worth 
of  gold  in  1895. 

A  later  estimate,  that  of  Mr  Theodore  Reunert,*  puts 
the  value  of  the  auriferous  deposits  of  the  Randt  basin  at 
;^45o,ooo,ooo. 

This  estimate  proceeds  upon  the  assumption  that  the 
reefs  which  outcrop  for  thirty  miles  on  the  edge  of  the 
basin  can  be  worked  for  one  mile  across  the  dip,  and  have, 
as  before,  a  payable  thickness  of  five  feet.  This  thirty 
square  miles  of  conglomerate  beds  would  yield,  at  the  low 

*  In  "  Diamonds  and  Gold  in  South  Africa,"  p.  193. 


GOLD-MINING  i6i 

grade  of  8  dwts.  the  ton,  130,000,000  ozs.,  or  rather  more 
than  the  ;!^45o,ooo,ooo  worth  of  gold. 

The  actual  evidence  of  the  southward  extension  of  the 
conglomerate  beds,  which  is  a  necessary  assumption  in  both 
these  estimates,  consists  of  the  results  obtained  by  the 
borings  and  shafts  already  sunk.  Vertical  shafts  have 
struck  the  reefs  at  a  depth  of  700  feet,  and  inclined  shafts 
have  followed  the  dip  for  1000  feet.  The  "great  bore-hole," 
starting  from  a  point  more  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
south  of  the  outcrop,  found  the  Main  Reef,  in  June  1893, 
at  a  depth  of  2400  feet.  Here  the  angle  of  the  dip  has 
changed  from  60  to  only  16  degrees,  and  both  the  thick- 
ness and  the  auriferous  character  of  the  reef  is  maintained.* 

This  evidence,  combined  with  the  fact  that  the  outcrop 
of  the  reefs  has  been  traced  for  150  miles  in  all — for  there 
is  an  outcrop  southward  of  the  Vaal  River  in  the  Free 
State — makes  us  inclined  to  believe  that  the  actual  magni- 
tude and  value  of  the  gold  deposits  of  the  Randt  have  been 
underrated  in  both  these  cautious  estimates.  Indeed,  both 
these  estimates  are  based  upon  what  is  admittedly  only  a 
partial  review  of  the  auriferous  resources  of  the  great  gold 
field,  t 

But  the  gold  deposits  of  South  Africa  are  by  no  means 
confined  to  the  Randt  basin. 

The  establishment  of  railway  communication  between 
Pretoria  and  Delagoa  Bay,  now  accomplished,  is  expected 

*  According  to  the  Johannesburg  Star  of  June  17th,  1893,  5  ft. 
8  in.  of  the  Main  Reef  was  traversed,  and  assays  of  the  South  Reef, 
previously  pierced  at  a  depth  of  2343  feet,  gave  an  average  yield  of  23 
dwts.  12  grs.  to  the  ton  of  ore. 

t  Since  the  above  was  written  Mr  Hamilton  Smith  has  contributed 
a  fresh  article  to  the  Times  (Feb.  19,  1895),  i"  which  he  gives  the 
results  of  observations  made  from  August  to  December  1894.  He 
says  :  ' '  From  the  foregoing  statement  it  is  evident  that  the  chances  are 
far  greater  now  than  they  were  in  1892  of  my  conjectures  of  that  date 
being  realised,  and  to-day  nearly  every  one  conversant  with  the  Randt 
considers  them  as  being  considerably  under  the  mark."  A  further 
extract  is  given  in  the  Notes  {25). 

L 


i62  SOUTH  AFRICA 

to  produce  renewed  activity  in  both  the  Lydenberg  and 
the  De  Kaap  fields ;  and  at  any  time  the  gold  fields  of 
Mashonaland  and  Matabeleland  may  leap  into  competition 
with  the  Randt. 

In  the  immediate  future,  therefore,  we  may  expect  to 
find  in  South  Africa  the  largest  and  most  reliable  con- 
tributor of  gold  that  the  world  has  ever  possessed. 

It  will  probably  merit  both  these  adjectives. 

The  output  of  the  Randt  alone  has  grown  from  34,897 
ozs.  in  1887  to  2,277,635  ozs.  in  1895;  rising  in  value 
from  p^i  25,000  to  nearly  _;^8, 000,000.  The  advance 
of  the  last  year  (1895)  is  about  250,000  ozs.,  or  about 
^^850,000  in  value. 

If  this  rate  of  progress  is  maintained  in  the  Randt,  the 
Transvaal  output  will  overtake  the  highest  outputs  of 
the  United  States  or  Australia,  the  ;^i 5,000,000  and 
;^i 3,000,000  worth  of  gold  which  were  respectively  won 
in  these  countries  in  1853.  But  will  this  rate  of  increase 
be  maintained  ?  Apart  from  the  evidence  of  the  extent 
of  the  conglomerate  beds  already  given,  there  is  this 
further  consideration  which  points  to  the  permanency  of 
the  Randt  output.  Whereas  the  Californian  and  the 
Australian  fields  were  indebted  for  their  great  initial 
outputs  to  alluvial  deposits,  or  rich  veins  of  gold,  the 
Randt  output  has  been  drawn  from  the  first  from  reef 
mining.  The  Randt,  therefore,  has  no  reason  to  fear 
any  such  rapid  decline  as  accompanied  the  change  from 
alluvial  to  quartz  mining  in  both  the  United  States  and 
America.* 

•  Professor  Egleston,  in  "  Metallurgy  of  Gold,  Silver,  and  Mercury 
in  the  United  States,"  says  that  ^210,000,000  out  of  an  estimated 
total  of  ^235,000,000  worth  of  gold  yielded  by  California  between 
1851  and  1861  was  drawn  from  "auriferous  gravels,"  His  estimate 
of  the  Californian  output  is  higher  than  Mr  Hamilton  Smith's  (given 
above),  and  he  puts  the  total  gold  production  of  the  world  between 
these  years  at  a  higher  figure  than  that  of  Dr  Soetbeer,  upon  whose 
tables  the  figures  in  the  text  are  based.  (Journal  of  Statistical 
Society,  June  1894. 


GOLD-MINING  163 

The  diminished  Australian  output  of  gold  remained  at 
(about)  ;;^6,ooo,ooo  value  for  the  fifteen  years  1875-1890  ; 
and  the  diminished  output  from  the  United  States  remained 
at  (about)  ;^6, 500,000  value  during  the  years  1882-1892. 
The  Australian  output  has  since  been  strengthened  by 
discoveries  in  Western  Australia ;  and  the  total  American 
output  (including  the  United  States,  Mexico,  and  British 
Columbia)  is  reported  to  have  amounted  in  1894  to  more 
than  ;^9, 000,000  in  value — a  yield  which  exceeds  that 
of  any  previous  year  subsequent  to  1870.  There  is  one 
other  important  contributor  to  the  world's  gold  supply 
—  Russia.  The  Russian  output  has  averaged  from 
;;^4,ooo,ooo  to  ;^5,ooo,ooo  lu  valuc  for  the  last  twenty 
years,  and  it  is  said  that  prospects  of  an  increased  output 
are  entertained. 

In  view  of  the  long  continued  decline  in  the  gold  outputs 
of  the  United  States  and  Australia  the  appearance  of  a  new 
and  apparently  permanent  contributor  to  the  world's  gold 
supply  is  obviously  a  matter  of  great  commercial  import- 
ance. From  1700  to  1850  the  world's  annual  gold  supply 
was  about  ;^2,ooo,ooo  in  value.  For  the  twenty-five  years, 
1850-1875,  it  averaged  ;^25, 000,000.  This  was  the  period 
when  both  the  American  and  the  Australian  gold  fields  were 
at  the  height  of  their  productiveness,  and  it  was  marked 
by  a  great  industrial  and  commercial  expansion.  During 
the  fifteen  years  1875-1890  the  world's  gold  supply  fell 
to  an  average  of  ;^2o,ooo,ooo.  Assuming  that  America, 
Australia,  and  Russia  continue  to  produce  not  less  than 
a  total  output  of  (say)  ;2^i 8,000,000,  the  Randt's  present 
contribution  of  ;,^8,ooo,ooo  raises  the  world's  annual  gold 
supply  to  the  level  of  the  period  185 0-187 5.  If>  however, 
the  Randt's  output  be  increased,  or  still  more,  if  both  the 
Randt's  output  be  increased  and  further  contributions  are 
added  from  other  South  African  gold  fields,  the  supply  at 
the  end  of  the  century  will  exceed  that  obtained  during 
the  ten  years   1 850-1 860,  the  period  of  the  great  initial 


i64  SOUTH  AFRICA 

output    of    the   American    and    Australian    fields    (Note 

No  one,  I  suppose,  would  deny  that  this  increase  in 
the  world's  supply  of  gold  will  have  a  beneficial  effect 
upon  agriculture,  manufactures,  and  industries. 

The  prices  which  were  obtained  by  producers  during 
the  normal  period  1867-1877  had  fallen  in  1891  by 
28  per  cent.*  Since  then  they  have  reached  a  still  lower 
level.  We  need  not  stop  to  enquire  to  what  extent  this 
loss  to  the  producer  has  been  modified  by  the  fact  that 
the  producer  is  also  a  consumer — a  consideration  which 
includes  the  further  fact  that  the  workman's  wages  have 
an  increased  purchasing  power.  It  is  sufficient  for  the 
moment  to  assume  the  truth  of  the  statement,  which  we 
hear  repeated  on  every  side,  that  this  fall  in  prices  is  the 
immediate  cause  of  the  present  agricultural  and  com- 
mercial depression.  Ultimately,  no  doubt,  the  producer 
would  again  receive  a  normal  value  for  his  produce. 
Meanwhile  he  is  at  a  disadvantage.  He  is  at  a  dis- 
advantage in  payments  made  for  all  services  from  those 
of  an  employe  to  the  highest  professional  skill.  For  these 
services  are  estimated  by  reference  to  the  general  wealth 
of  the  community — the  general  capacity  of  the  com- 
munity at  large  to  purchase  them  ;  and  this  is  ex  hypothesi 
a  higher  standard  than  that  of  the  falling  industry. 
Again,  in  payments  made  in  respect  of  loans  and  debts, 
either  on  account  of  capital  or  interest ;  for  the  capital 
repaid  has  now  a  higher  purchasing  power,  and  the 
interest  is  paid  at  a  rate  fixed  when  the  profits  of  the 
industry  were  greater.  Lastly,  he  is  at  a  disadvantage  in 
payments  made  to  the  State.  During  all  this  period  of 
falling  prices,  from  1877  onwards,  we  have  been  uncon- 
sciously laying  an  increasingly  unfair  proportion  of  the 
burden   of  taxation    upon    our    producers.     In    all    these 

•  Mr  A.  Sauerbeck's  table  in  Statistical  Society's  y(?«;«a/,  March 
1892. 


GOLD-MINING  165 

ways  the  classes  which  are  economically  the  most  im- 
portant in  the  community  are  receiving  an  inadequate 
share  of  the  general  profits. 

Without  pretending  to  trace  the  working  of  a  process 
so  subtle  as  the  "  appreciation  "  of  gold,  or  the  acquisition 
of  an  artificial  value  by  money  under  the  present  mono- 
metallic system,  it  is  impossible  not  to  connect  this  fall 
in  prices  with  the  absolute  decrease  of  20  per  cent.,  and  the 
far  higher  relative  decrease  in  the  output  of  gold  shown 
by  the  period  1 875-1 891  in  comparison  with  the  period 
1850-1875.  If  this  be  so — if  the  remedy  for  the  partial 
paralysis  of  our  agriculture  and  of  our  commerce  be  an 
increased  supply  of  gold — we  may  take  heart,  for  this 
remedy  is  surely  at  hand. 


CHAPTER    X. 

Conflict  of  Nationalities  and  Races. 

A  SSUMING  the  population  of  South  Africa  *  to  be 
■^^  4,000,000,  this  total  would  be  composed  of  650,000 
Europeans  and  3,350,000  coloured  people.  The  numerical 
relationship  of  the  Europeans  to  the  coloured  people  varies 
in  the  several  colonies,  states,  and  territories. 

In  the  Cape  Colony  the  Europeans  are  to  the  coloured 
people  in  the  proportion  of  one  to  four  ;  in  Natal  they  are 
as  one  to  twelve;  in  the  Free  State,  as  one  to  two;  in  the 
Transvaal,  as  one  to  four ;  in  the  Crown  Colony  of  Bechu- 
analand,  as  one  to  ten ;  and  in  the  territories  of  the 
Chartered  Company,  as  one  to  one  hundred. 

Neither  the  coloured  nor  the  European  population  is 
homogeneous. 

The  composition  of  the  former  is  approximately  shown 
by  the  subjoined  table  : — 

Aborigines   (Hottentots  and  Bushmen)       .  50,000 ■) 

(Military  :    i.e.    Kafirs,  Zulus,  I 

and  allied  tribes          .         .  2,350,000  | 

Industrial:     i.e.    Bechuanas,  r  3)350,000 

Basutos  and  Mashonas       .  700,000 

Mixed  Races  (Cape  "  boys ")     .         ,        .  250,000 

Malays 13,000, 

Of  the  650,000  Europeans,  if  we  omit  to  take  account 
of  other  nationalities,  probably  375,000  would  be  Dutch 
and   275,000  English.     The  two  sections  would  approxi- 

•  As  previously  defined  :  Africa  south  of  the  Zambesi,  omitting  the 
German  and  Portuguese  territories. 
166 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES     167 


mately  be  distributed  as  follows  : — in  the  Cape  Colony,  as 
eleven  to  nine ;  in  Natal,  equally ;  in  the  Free  State,  as 
nine  to  one ;  in  the  Transvaal,  equally,  although,  ten 
years  ago,  the  Dutch  were  to  the  English  as  seven  to  one. 

These  three  main  elements,  Bantu,  Dutch,  and  English, 
are  organised  into  a  variety  of  communities  : — 

Mode  of  Government. 
Two  British  Colonies  j    NatS*^°^^"^    }   Responsible  Government. 


Two  Republics 


Native  Territories 


Territories  of  the 


South  African") 

Republic 

(Transvaal) 

Free  State 

Basutoland 

Zululand 

Tongaland 

Transkei 

Tembuland 

Griqualand 

Pondoland 


Chartered  Company/ 


Full  internal  freedom  within 
terms  of  Conventions. 

Officers  under  High  Com- 
missioner. 

Officers  under  Cape  Govern- 
ment, 

Administrator  for  civil,  and 
Deputy  Commissioner  for 
military,  affairs. 

The  relationship  of  these  states  to  England  as  paramount 
power,  of  course,  varies  very  considerably. 

In  the  Cape  Colony  and  Natal  the  Governor  is  the 
"  link "  by  which  this  relationship  is  maintained.  The 
political  functions  of  the  Governor  of  a  Parliamentary 
Government  have  been  aptly  compared  by  Lord  Dufferin 
to  the  duties  performed  by  "  the  man  with  the  oil  can  "  in 
tending  a  piece  of  machinery.  Sir  Hercules  Robinson,  in 
a  speech  delivered  at  Kimberley  in  1884,  described  the 
more  obvious  duties  of  his  office  in  some  detail.  Those 
duties,  he  said,  were  negative  rather  than  positive.  In 
case  of  a  difference  of  opinion  between  the  Governor  and 
the  Ministry,  he  could  say  "  No."  If  the  ministers  then 
resigned,  the  appointment  of  the  person  to  be  entrusted 
with  the  formation  of  a  new  Ministry  rested  with  him.     In 


1 68  SOUTH  AFRICA 

case  of  a  disagreement  between  the  Ministry  and  the 
Parliament,  the  Governor  must  decide  whether  it  is  best 
for  the  public  interests  that  there  should  be  a  new  Ministry 
or  a  new  Parliament. 

The  Governor  acts  as  a  link  between  the  colony  and  the 
mother-country  in  so  far  as  he  is  himself  advised  by  an 
Imperial  Minister,  the  Secretary  of  State  for  the  colonies,  in 
giving  advice  to  the  colonial  ministry.  Moreover,  he  is  in 
all  things  political  and  social  the  representative  of  the 
Sovereign,  and  as  such  he  exercises  the  peculiar  preroga- 
tives of  the  Crown. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  the  Governor  of  the  Cape 
Colony  fills  two  distinct  and  sometimes  conflicting  offices 
— those  of  Governor  of  the  Cape  Colony  and  High  Com- 
missioner for  South  Africa. 

In  his  capacity  of  High  Commissioner  he  gives  effect 
immediately  to  the  views  of  the  Imperial  Government. 
Through  the  high  Commissionership  the  forces  of  the 
Chartered  Company  and  the  territory  of  Basutoland  are  kept 
under  the  direct  control  of  the  Imperial  Government.  The 
Government  of  Zululand  is  also  similarly  related  to  the 
Imperial  Government ;  for  the  Resident  Commissioner  in 
that  country  represents  the  Governor,  not  the  Government, 
of  Natal. 

The  control  which  England  exercises  over  the  Re- 
publics is  based  partly  upon  the  position  of  the  former 
as  paramount  power  in  South  Africa,  and  partly  upon 
rights  definitely  reserved  by  the  terms  of  the  successive 
Conventions. 

As  paramount  power  the  Imperial  Government  has 
(and  exercises)  the  right  to  interfere  in  cases  where  the 
action  of  an  otherwise  independent  state  would  endanger 
the  common  interests  of  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa. 

Under  the  Conventions,  the  ultimate  control  of  the 
relationships  of  the  two  Republics  with  foreign  powers 
is  maintained  by  special  clauses,  which  render  the  assent 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES     1 69 

of  the  Imperial  Government  necessary  to  the  validity  of 
treaties  respectively  concluded  between  the  Republics 
and  such  foreign  powers.* 

The  fate  of  Rhodesia  is  still  undecided.  At  present, 
an  Imperial  officer  is  placed  in  command  of  the  local 
forces.  The  civil  administration  is  left  in  the  hands  of  the 
Administrator,  who  is  appointed  by  the  Directors  of  the 
Company  with  the  approval  of  the  Secretary  of  State  for 
the  colonies  ;  but,  whereas  he  can  be  removed  by  the 
Directors  only  with  the  consent  of  the  Secretary  of  State, 
he  can  be  removed  by  the  Secretary  of  State  immediately 
and  without  the  assent  of  the  Directors. "|* 

Here,  then,  is  a  great  country  in  the  making. 

Did  ever  history  present  a  more  amazing  picture  of 
political  complexity?  Was  there  ever  a  single  country, 
or  rather  a  single  province  of  an  Empire,  that  consisted 
of  such  diverse  elements  and  showed  so  great  a  variety 
of  political  and  social  organisation  ? 

I  speak  of  South  Africa  as  one  country.  Am  I  justified 
in  so  doing  ?  Yes,  because  there  exists  a  principle  of 
unity  which  cannot  be  overlooked  or  forgotten  —  the 
paramount  power  of  England.  Its  present  divisions — 
where  such  divisions  are  real  and  not  apparent — are  due 
to  the  neglect  of  this  principle  in  the  past,  and  its  future 
progress  and  ultimate  consolidation  depends  upon  the 
maintenance  of  this  principle  in  full  vigour  and  in  full 
operation  in  the  future. 

But  the  paramount  power  of  England  was  not  effectively 
exercised  in  South  Africa  until  a  comparatively  recent  period 
— the  period  of  the  Bechuanaland  Settlement  (1884-5). 
Then  for  the  first  time  the  policy  of  the  Imperial  Govern- 

*  By  article  IV.  of  the  London  Convention  the  South  African  Re- 
public is  prevented  from  making  treaties  w^ithout  the  assent  of  the 
Imperial  Government  with  foreign  powers  other  than  the  Orange  Free 
State.     See  p.  105,  and  full  text  in  Appendix. 

t  Clause  III.,  Agreement  of  May,  1894. 


I70  ■  SOUTH  AFRICA 

ment  was  based  upon  a  consideration  of  the  conditions 
of  South  Africa  as  a  whole.  Then  for  the  first  time  the 
eyes  of  her  Majest/s  Government  were  officially  opened 
to  the  existence  of  two  facts  which  had  from  the  first 
governed  the  course  of  South  African  history,  and  which, 
acting  in  combination,  made  the  administration  of  South 
Africa  more  difficult  than  that  of  any  other  colony  or 
dependency  of  the  Empire,  Yet  these  two  facts  were 
plain  enough  to  eyes  which  were  not  thus  officially 
blind,  being  nothing  more  than  the  natural  desire  of  the 
Europeans  to  possess  themselves  of  fruitful  and  un- 
occupied lands,  and  the  natural  property  of  the  dark- 
skinned  people,  to  increase  and  multiply. 

With  certain  other  special  conditions  of  South  Africa 
the  Imperial  Government  had  been  acquainted  from  the 
first.  They  were  aware  that  the  Europeans  were  not 
the  sole  claimants  to  the  soil ;  that,  on  the  contrary,  every 
step  in  advance  taken  by  the  colonists  brought  them 
into  more  serious  conflict  with  a  numerous  and  courageous 
race  of  dark-skinned  people  ;  and  they  were  inclined,  at 
least  at  one  period,  when  the  tide  of  philanthropic  zeal 
ran  high  in  England,  to  over-estimate  the  value  of  the 
claims  advanced  by  the  Bantu  both  in  point  of  fact 
and  equity.  They  were  aware,  too,  that  the  Europeans 
were  themselves  divided  into  two  nationalities,  and  that 
the  Dutch  and  English  colonists  were  separated  by  differ- 
ences of  language,  customs  and  character. 

A  knowledge  of  these  conditions  had  been  forced  upon 
the  Imperial  Government  by  the  logic  of  facts.  In  the 
one  case  the  eastern  frontier  of  the  Cape  Colony  had 
been  maintained  by  a  series  of  costly  and  disastrous 
Kafir  wars ;  and  in  the  other,  a  measure  acceptable 
enough  to  English  sentiment,  the  abolition  of  slavery,  had 
produced  the  expatriation  of  many  thousands  of  the 
Dutch  settlers. 

Obviously    this    was    a    country    which    required    the 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES    171 

establishment  of  a  strong  central  power,  for  such  an 
authority  could  alone  grasp  the  general  conditions,  and 
control  the  political  and  social  tendencies  arising  out 
of  them. 

What  prevented  the  Imperial  Government  from  assuming 
the  responsibilities  and  exercising  the  rights  of  a  paramount 
power  in  South  Africa  was  at  first  the  feeling  that  no 
adequate  return  could  be  expected  from  the  necessary 
expenditure  of  moral  and  material  force.  I  speak  now 
of  the  period  after  the  great  emigration,  when  it  had 
become  apparent  that  a  central  authority  was  necessary 
to  preserve  the  unity  of  the  separate  European  com- 
munities, and  to  effectively  regulate  the  relationships  of 
those  communities  with  each  other  and  with  the  coloured 
races,  but  before  the  commercial  importance  of  the  country 
was  recognised.  This  attitude  was  maintained — with  in- 
tervals of  spasmodic  activity — during  the  period  between 
the  great  emigration  and  the  discovery  of  diamonds — 
1 836-1 870.  In  plain  words,  it  was  not  thought  worth 
while  for  England  to  assume  the  role  of  paramount  power. 
This  was  the  impression  in  England.  It  was  an  erroneous 
view,  and  one  which  was  quite  opposed  to  the  best  local 
opinion. 

In  1858  Sir  George  Grey  wrote: — 

"  In  recommending  a  remedy  ...  I  would  urge  that 
experience  has  shown  that  the  views  which  led  to  the 
dismemberment  of  South  Africa  were  mistaken  ones. 
That  in  point  of  fact,  Her  Majesty's  possessions  here 
are  of  great  and  yearly  increasing  value  to  the  trade 
and  commerce  of  Great  Britain,  and  may  be  made 
valuable  to  an  almost  indefinite  extent.  That  it  has 
now  been  conclusively  shown  that  the  people  do  not 
desire  Kafir  wars ;  that  they  are  fully  aware  of  the  much 
greater  advantages  they  derive  from  the  peaceful  pursuits 
of  industry,  and  from  cultivating  their  valuable  exports."  * 
*  Despatch  to  Sir  E.  B.  Lytton,  November  19th,  1858. 


172  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Sir  George  Grey's  remedy,  of  course,  was  the  immediate 
creation  of  a  central  authority  by  uniting  the  colonies 
and  now  independent  Dutch  communities,  founded  by 
the  emigrant  farmers,  in  a  federal  system. 

During  this  period  it  would  have  been  comparatively 
easy  to  have  established  this  central  authority  by  means 
of  which  the  paramount  rights  of  England  could  have 
been  effectively  exercised.  Subsequently,  that  is  to  say, 
after  the  discovery  of  diamonds  had  produced  a  material 
alteration  in  the  attitude  of  England  towards  South  Africa, 
the  Imperial  Government  were  extremely  anxious  to 
apply  this  "  remedy  " — federal  union — of  Sir  George  Grey. 
But  the  difficulties  of  the  situation  had  then  enormously 
increased. 

At  the  same  time  mere  lukewarmness  and  shortsighted- 
ness on  the  part  of  the  Imperial  Government  is  not  in 
itself  sufficient  to  account  for  the  very  special  disasters, 
and  the  general  ineffectiveness,  which  has  characterised 
our  administration  of  South  Africa  up  to  1881 — the  year 
of  the  retrocession  of  the  Transvaal.  Indeed,  after  the 
establishment  of  the  diamond  industry  the  Imperial 
Government  ceased  to  be  lukewarm. 

In  order  to  explain  this  comparative  failure  we  must 
look  deeper. 

Up  to  this  date  the  two  authorities  which  should  have 
unitedly  given  effect  to  the  power  of  England  were  in 
constant  conflict.  The  cause  which  lay  at  the  root  of 
the  endless  "  divergencies  of  opinion  "  between  the  home 
and  colonial  authorities  lay  in  the  simple  fact  that  the 
information,  or  rather  the  data,  upon  which  the  respective 
opinions  of  Downing  Street  and  Capetown  were  founded, 
was  different.  The  home  authorities  were  guided  by 
certain  general  principles,  the  colonial  by  a  knowledge 
of  the  actual  facts  of  the  case  acquired  locally  and  im- 
possible to  communicate.  It  is  to  this  conflict  between 
*'  the    man   in    Downing  Street "  and    "  the  man  on    the 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES    173 

spot " — whether  a  civil  or  military  officer — that  the 
disasters  suffered  by  the  British  arms,  and  the  losses 
incurred  by  the  British  treasury,  are  directly  attributable. 
It  is  this  conflict,  too,  which  has  made  South  Africa  "a 
grave  of  reputations  "  for  the  colonial  administrator. 

Let  us  take  some  examples  : — 

After  the  colony  had  been  cleared  of  the  Kafirs  who 
had  swept  over  the  Eastern  frontier  in  1834-5,  Sir 
Benjamin  Durban  was  of  opinion  that  certain  measures 
were  necessary  for  the  future  security  of  the  colonists. 
He  proposed  to  grant  lands  between  the  Keiskamma 
and  the  Fish  Rivers  to  the  settlers  who  had  suffered  most 
in  this  and  the  preceding  Kafir  invasions.  The  object 
of  this  proposal  was  at  once  to  compensate  the  sufferers, 
and  at  the  same  time  to  form  "  a  belt  of  a  dense  European 
population,"  in  advance  of  the  Fish  River.  He  also  pro- 
posed to  locate  between  the  Keiskamma  and  the  Kie  a 
body  of  loyal  Kafirs  who  were  to  be  at  once  controlled 
and  protected  by  a  chain  of  forts  occupied  by  a  military 
force.  These  measures  were  reversed  by  Lord  Glenelg's 
despatch  of  December  26th,  1835.  The  Imperial  Govern- 
ment were  of  opinion  that  the  colonists  and  not  the 
Kafirs  were  the  aggressors,  and  that  future  conflicts  could 
be  avoided  by  a  recognition  of  the  claim  of  the  Kafirs  to 
the  country  beyond  the  Fish  River,  and  they,  therefore, 
ordered  the  evacuation  of  the  country  eastward  of  that 
river. 

In  the  year  1858,  Sir  George  Grey  was  of  opinion  that 
the  application  of  the  Orange  River  Free  States  for  the 
resumption  of  British  authority  over  them  should  be 
favourably  entertained,  and  that  a  Federal  Union  might 
be  established  between  these  States  and  the  British 
Colonies ;  and  that  by  means  of  this  union  the  solidarity 
of  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa  might  be  regained,  and 
the  danger  of  future  conflict  between  the  Dutch  and 
English  sections  avoided. 


174  SOUTH  AFRICA 

The  Imperial  Government  decided  "  not  to  assent  to 
any  project  for  the  resumption  of  British  sovereignty  in 
any  shape  over  the  Orange  River  Free  States."  They 
were  of  opinion  that  Sir  George  Grey's  action  in  en- 
deavouring to  reunite  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa 
"  had  so  far  compromised  them,  and  endangered  the 
success  of  that  poHcy  which  they  must  deem  right  and 
expedient  in  South  Africa,  that  his  continuance  in  the 
administration  of  the  government  of  the  Cape  could  be 
no  longer  of  service  to  public  interests."  * 

In  December  1878,  Sir  Bartle  Frere  was  of  opinion 
that  the  necessity  for  immediate  action  against  Ketshwayo 
was  so  great  as  to  render  it  impossible  for  him  to  incur 
the  delay  which  would  have  been  involved  in  submitting 
the  terms  of  his  ultimatum  to  the  Imperial  Government. 
He  wrote  : —  f 

"The  Zulus  .  •  .  had  violated  English  territory,  slain 
persons  under  English  protection,  and  had  repeatedly 
refused  the  redress  which  we  demanded.  Could  a  final 
demand  for  redress  on  this  account  be  postponed  ?  It 
seems  to  me  clearly  not,  with  any  safety  to  Natal  and  its 
inhabitants." 

He  adds  that  this  reference  would  have  required  a 
delay  of  two  months.  These  two  months  would  not 
have  passed  without  "  fresh  manifestations  of  Zulu  im- 
patience," or  an  outbreak  in  the  Transvaal,  for  **  whatever 
were  the  chances  of  Zulu  acquiescence,  there  was  no 
question  of  the  bitter  anger  with  which  [the  award]  was 
received  in  the  Traansvaal." 

The  Imperial  Government  were  of  opinion  that,  not- 
withstanding these   circumstances,  the  delay  should  have 

*  Correspondence,   etc.,    relative    to    recall   of    Sir  George   Grey. 
Printed,  April  17th,  1S60. 
t  Despatchf  March  1st,  1S79.     C— 2316. 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES    175 

been  incurred ;  and  for  this  "  indiscretion "  Sir  Bartle 
Frere  was  partially  superseded*  and  discredited. 

Here  are  three  crises  in  the  history  of  South  Africa  in 
which  the  Imperial  Government  and  their  representative 
are  in  conflict. 

The  nett  result  of  these  endless  divergencies  of  opinion 
was,  that  the  colonial  administration  never  became 
sufficiently  stable  to  acquire  and  maintain  for  England 
the  position  of  a  paramount  power  in  South  Africa,  either 
during  the  period  when  such  a  position  might  have  been 
naturally  assumed,  or  afterwards. 

The  rapid  development  of  the  Cape  Colony,  which 
succeeded  the  discovery  of  diamonds  at  Kimberley,  estab- 
lished the  fact  that  South  Africa  was  a  country  in  which 
British  energy  and  capital  might  be  profitably  invested. 
Nor  was  there  any  question  now  as  to  the  evils  which  had 
resulted  from  the  dismemberment  policy,  and  the  necessity 
for  the  creation  of  a  central  government  to  remedy  them. 
The  indemnity  paid  to  the  Free  State  Government  for  the 
trespass  committed  by  the  declaration  of  British  authority 
over  the  diamond  fields,  and  the  numerical  increase  of  the 
Bantu,  together  with  the  reported  formation  of  fresh  military 
systems  among  them,  afforded  practical  evidence  on  both 
points.  The  Imperial  Government,  therefore,  resolved  to 
take  South  Africa  in  hand,  and  establish,  by  means  of  a 
federal  union,  the  central  authority  which  was  the  necessary 
instrument  for  the  exercise  of  its  paramount  rights. 

But  the  difficulties  were  now  enormously  increased. 
The  Dutch  element  had  advanced  in  power  and  solidarity, 
the  natives  had  multiplied  and  grown  stronger,  and  there 
was  a  danger  of  collision  with  Germany.  The  proposal  to 
unite  the  colonies  and  states  of  South  Africa  in  a  federal 
union  was  unsuccessful,  both  when  it  was  advanced  under 
the  Imperial  initiative  of  Lord  Carnarvon,  and  again  when 
it  was  launched  under  the  immediate  control  of  the  local 

*  By  Lord  Wolseley,  as  High  Commissioner  of  South-East  Africa. 


176  SOUTH  AFRICA 

administrator,  Sir  Bartle  Frere.  And  so  the  intention  to 
assume  the  position  and  responsibilities  of  a  paramount 
power  at  this  time  was  defeated.  The  Imperial  Govern- 
ment were  earnest  enough  in  making  the  attempt.  They 
were  no  longer  deterred  by  any  shadowy  dread  of 
unknown  and  unjustifiable  responsibilities.  Since  the 
time  of  the  Sand  River  and  Bloemfontein  Conventions  an 
altogether  higher  and  wider  view  of  the  Imperial  destiny  of 
England  had  grown  up  in  the  minds  of  Englishmen  and 
their  rulers.  The  head  of  the  Imperial  administration  at 
this  time  was  Lord  Beaconsfield,  the  one  man  who  of  all 
others  had  done  most,  by  stimulating  a  sense  of  national 
responsibility,  to  direct  the  current  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race 
into  a  wider  and  more  splendid  course.  But  under  com- 
pulsion of  the  exigencies  of  party  politics,  Lord  Beacons- 
field's  Government  shrank  back  at  the  critical  moment,  from 
fear  of  an  expenditure  of  military  force  and  tax-payers' 
money,  which,  necessary  as  it  was  from  the  point  of  view 
of  South  African  interests,  could  not  be  justified  in  the 
eyes  of  an  electorate  only  partially  informed  of  the  facts  of 
the  case.  And  the  sequel  ?  It  is  already  known  to  us. 
An  able  and  conscientious  administrator  was  unjustly  dis- 
credited ;  the  union  of  South  Africa  was  indefinitely  post- 
poned. The  Imperial  Government  had  put  its  hand  to  the 
plough  and  looked  back. 

In  the  Bechuanaland  Settlement  (1884-5)  the  Imperial 
Government  for  the  first  time  assumed  the  responsibilities 
of  a  paramount  power,  and  in  so  doing  they  avoided  the 
mistake  of  1854.  At  this  period  a  fresh  expansion  of  the 
Europeans  beyond  the  limits  of  the  colonies  and  states  took 
place.  But  the  communities  of  Stellaland  and  Land  Goshen 
were  not  allowed  to  grow  into  independent  republics,  nor 
was  the  relationship  between  the  settlers  and  the  natives 
left  to  adjust  itself  by  natural  methods — methods  which 
resolved  themselves  into  the  gradual  extermination,  or 
practical  enthralment,  of  the  weaker  race.     Provision  was 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES     177 

made  for  the  inevitable  disintegration  of  the  native  systems 
produced  by  contact  with  civilisation.  Where  the  chief 
was  strong  and  the  tribe  sufficiently  cohesive,  chief  and 
tribe  were  protected  from  premature  interference ;  where  the 
tribal  organisation  had  already  broken  down,  the  magistrate 
was  introduced  to  take  the  place  of  the  chief.  In  short,  a 
fnodus  vivetidi  was  established  under  which  the  settlers  and 
the  natives  could  live  peaceably  side  by  side,  and  mutually 
benefit  each  other. 

In  1889  the  principle  was  again  applied,  and  the  Imperial 
Government,  as  paramount  power  in  South  Africa,  under- 
took the  task  of  regulating  the  expansion  of  the  Europeans, 
and  controlling  the  consequent  disintegration,  and  ultimate 
civilisation,  of  the  coloured  races  throughout  the  whole  of 
the  immense  region  stretching  northward  to  the  Congo  State. 
In  this  case  the  Imperial  Government  have  delegated  the 
immediate  duty  of  organisation  and  administration  to  private 
enterprise,  but  even  under  the  present  constitution  of  the 
Chartered  Company  they  are  responsible  for  the  final  destiny 
of  this  great  accession  to  the  Empire. 

The  purpose  of  this  retrospect  is  to  advance  the 
contention  that  the  conflict  of  races  and  nationalities 
in  South  Africa  is  not  alone  sufficient  to  account  for 
the  unhappy  separation  of  the  Europeans,  or  the  cruel 
and  costly  process  by  which  the  supremacy  of  the  Euro- 
peans has  been  established  over  the  native  races.  And 
the  inference  I  wish  to  suggest  is  hopeful,  but  not 
unduly  optimistic.  It  is  that  if  the  main  cause  of  these 
evils  be  that  which  I  suggest,  the  repetition  of  these 
evils  can  be  checked,  if  not  altogether  prevented,  in  the 
future. 

The  nationality  difficulty  of  course  exists,  and  the 
native  question  exists ;  but  neither  of  these  are  insoluble 
problems. 

There  is  no  inherent  divergency  between  the  Dutch 
and  English  character  sufficient  to  prevent  the  amalgama- 

M 


178  SOUTH  AFRICA 

tion  of  the  two  peoples.  The  Dutch  in  South  Africa 
have  won  the  admiration  of  authorities  as  distinct  as 
the  late  Mr  J.  A.  Froude  and  Mr  Selous.  Mr  Froude 
says  of  the  Boers  that  they  "of  all  human  beings  now 
on  this  planet,  correspond  nearest  to  Horace's  description 
of  the  Roman  peasant  soldiers  who  defeated  Pyrrhus 
and  Hannibal."  *  And  Mr  Selous  has  found  "  no  people 
in  the  world  more  genuinely  kind  and  hospitable  to 
strangers  than  the  South  African  Dutch  in  the  Transvaal, 
the  Free  State,  or  the  Cape  Colony " ;  and  is  sure  that 
since  they  "possess  in  such  an  eminent  degree  so  many 
of  the  qualities  that  Englishmen  profess  to  admire,  the 
two  races  would,  with  a  better  knowledge  of  one  another, 
soon  shake  off  their  mutual  prejudices,  and  agree  to  work 
together  for  the  common  good  and  advancement  of  the 
best  interests  of  South  Africa."  f  These  are  weighty 
opinions,  but,  apart  from  any  such  individual  testimony, 
a  study  of  South  African  history  shows  us  that  the 
"  awkwardness "  of  the  Franco-Dutch  settlers  and  their 
descendants  is  due  far  more  to  circumstances  than  to 
nationality. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  century,  when  England  assumed 
the  administration  of  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa, 
these  people  had  been  cut  off  for  more  than  a  hundred 
years  from  European  influence,  that  is  to  say,  from 
civilisation.  From  that  time  onwards  the  quarrel  of 
the  Boers  has  been  against  the  Government  as  such, 
and  not  against  individual  Englishmen.  Pringle  relates  f 
how  "  Groot  Willem "  Prinslo  "  came  forth  very  good- 
humouredly  to  shake  hands,  and  drink  to  the  better 
acquaintance"  of  the  very  party  of  Albany  settlers  who 
were  about  to  take  possession  of  the  lands  from  which 
this  Prinslo  and   other  Dutchmen  had  been  dispossessed 

*  "Oceana,"  ch.  iii.  p.  37. 

t  "  Travel  and  Adventure  in  Africa,"  p.  7. 

1  "Narrative  of  a  Residence  in  South  Africa." 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES     179 

in  consequence  of  their  share  in  the  "  wicked  and  foolish  " 
Bezeidenhout  rebeUion.  Such  instances  might  be  multi- 
pHed  almost  without  end.  A  remarkable  application  of 
the  principle  was  made  by  Sir  Evelyn  Wood  in  his 
telegraphic  despatch  to  the  Secretary  for  the  Colonies 
immediately  after  the  cessation  of  hostilities  in  the 
Transvaal  Revolt :  "  Uneducated  men  mistrust  Govern- 
ments, but  trust  persons,  therefore  Roberts  should  go  him- 
self to  Transvaal  to  get  known  by  the  people."  *  The 
expatriation  of  the  Boers  again  removed  a  large  section 
of  the  Dutch  population  from  the  influences  of  civilisa- 
tion ;  and  the  non-interference,  or  dismemberment,  policy 
perpetuated  this  isolation.  It  is  not  surprising,  therefore, 
that  in  South  Africa  to-day  there  should  be  a  certain 
antipathy  between  the  "  old,"  and  the  new  "  colonists," 
which  is  quite  independent  of  any  difference  of  nationality. 
These  old  colonists  who  have  been  thus  cut  off  for  two 
centuries  from  civilisation  are,  from  a  consciousness  of 
their  own  deficiencies,  slow  and  cautious ;  distrustful,  if 
not  actually  resentful,  of  the  changes  which  are  being 
forced  upon  them.  The  new  colonists,  who  come  fresh 
from  the  industrial  centre  of  the  world,  are  naturally 
more  enterprising,  and  they  manifest  a  certain  impatience 
towards  these  men  who  cling  so  tenaciously  to  the  soil 
which  they  do  so  little  to  improve.  But  this  antipathy 
is  being  broken  down.  The  moral  intervals  upon  which 
it  is  based  are  being  diminished  by  the  action  of 
two  powerful  levelling  agencies — education  and  the  rail- 
way. 

Mr  Rhodes  has,  from  the  commencement  of  his  career, 
grasped  the  fact  that  what  divides  the  Europeans  in  the 
Cape  Colony,  and  generally  in  South  iVfrica,  is  not  nation- 
ality but  education ;  and  additional  merit  belongs  to  his 
public  services,  because  the  appeal  for  support  to  carry  out 
his  measures  has  been  addressed  to  all  enlightened  men 
♦  C— 285S. 


i8o  SOUTH  AFRICA 

irrespective  of  nationality.  By  this  policy  he  had,  until  the 
date  of  the  Jameson  incursion,  produced  a  partial  union  of 
the  Dutch  and  English  parties  in  the  Cape. 

The  question  which  lay  at  the  root  of  the  original  separa- 
tion of  the  Europeans  in  South  Africa  was  the  question  of 
slavery.  The  same  cause  threatened  to  rend  apart  the 
United  States  of  America,  but  there  its  operation  was 
prevented,  and  the  national  unity  was  maintained,  at  the 
cost  of  a  civil  war.  The  question  has  disappeared  in  this 
acute  form,  for,  apart  from  the  Conventions,  no  European 
community  could  venture  to  maintain  an  institution  which 
has  been  condemned  by  the  moral  sense  of  the  whole 
civilised  world.  But  the  question  of  the  treatment  of  the 
natives,  in  the  form  of  the  admission  or  not  of  the  coloured 
people  to  political  and  civil  rights,  still  constitutes  the 
main  cause  which  tends  to  maintain  the  separation  of  the 
Dutch  and  English.  In  the  republics  the  coloured  people 
are  entirely  excluded  from  political,  and  partially  excluded 
from  civil,  rights.  In  the  British  colonies  the  principle  of 
political  equality,  irrespective  of  colour,  is  estabhshed. 
Nor  is  the  significance  of  this  difference  affected  by  the 
fact  that  both  in  Natal  and  the  Cape  Colony  limitations 
have  been  introduced  to  prevent  the  abuse  of  such  privi- 
leges, for  these  limitations  are  the  result  of  practical 
experience,  and  as  such  they  commend  themselves  to  all 
reasonable  persons.  In  Natal  a  native  must  have  lived 
for  seven  years  exempt  from  the  control  of  the  native  laws 
before  he  can  avail  himself  of  the  several  qualifications 
which  otherwise  entitle  him  to  take  part  in  the  government 
of  the  colony.  Similarly  in  the  Cape  Colony  the  applica- 
tion of  the  general  terms  of  the  franchise  to  the  native 
population  is  limited  by  the  two  provisos — that  no  person 
is  entitled  to  be  registered  as  a  voter  on  account  of  sharing 
in  any  native  communal  or  tribal  occupation  of  lands,  nor 
unless  he  is  able  to  sign  his  name,  and  write  his  occupation 
and  address.     Also  in  the  "Cape  Colony — where  alone  in 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES     i8i 

South  Africa  the  work  of  civiHsing  the  natives  has  sufficiently 
advanced  to  make  the  question  of  immediate  importance — 
the  distribution  of  seats  is  so  arranged  as  to  counterbalance 
the  enormous  numerical  superiority  of  the  coloured  races, 
a  superiority  which  might  otherwise  constitute  a  serious 
menace  to  the  well-being  of  the  community  in  the  future 
(Note  26),  Thus  in  the  Eastern  Province,  which  contains 
the  great  mass  of  the  native  population  (inclusive  of  the 
Transkei  territories),  a  member  of  the  Legislative  Council 
is  apportioned  to  mixed  constituencies  containing  an 
average  of  respectively  227,492  coloured  people  and 
18,065  Europeans;  and  a  member  of  the  House  of 
Representatives  is  similarly  apportioned  to  56,873  natives 
and  4516  Europeans.  Whereas  in  the  colony  as  a  whole, 
the  average  population  represented  by  a  single  member 
of  the  Legislative  Council  or  House  of  Representatives 
is,  respectively,  69,352  and  20,076.*  And,  as  a  matter 
of  fact,  there  are  few  constituencies  in  which  the  native 
vote  has  any  weight.  The  Malays  in  and  about  Capetown, 
the  Hottentots  of  the  Kat  River  Settlement,  and  the  Kafirs 
at  King  Williamstown,  Fort  Beaufort,  and  Alice,  alone 
command  the  attention  of  a  Parliamentary  candidate.  In 
the  Transkei,  where  the  natives  are  practically  untouched 
by  civilisation,  the  grant  of  representatives  has  been 
received  with  stolid  indifference.  "  I  do  not  think  any 
political  impression  whatever,"  says  Mr  H.  G.  Elliott, 
Chief  Magistrate  of  Tembuland,  "has  been  produced 
upon  the  native  population  of  this  territory  by  the  return 
of  a  member  to  the  House  of  Assembly.  I  am  confident 
that  not  five  per  cent,  know  the  meaning  of  it,  and  not 
one  per  cent,  care  anything  about  it,  and  that  the  balance 
only  wish  to  be  left  as  they  are."  f 

Here  we  have  approached  another  aspect  of  the  Native 
Question  of  South  Africa.     What  will  be  the  nature  of  the 

*  Tables  of  Director  of  Census  (1891). 

t  Report  in  Cape  Blue-book  on  Native  Affairs,  1SS9. 


1 82  SOUTH  AFRICA 

relationship — numerical,  social,  and  political — which  will 
be  ultimately  established  between  the  natives  and  the 
Europeans  ?  The  task  of  organising,  controlling,  and 
educating  the  dense  mass  of  rapidly  increasing  Bantu 
which  lies  between  the  Cape  Colony  and  Natal  has  been 
assumed  by  the  Cape  Government,  and  it  constitutes  a 
problem  of  which  it  is  hard  to  over-estimate  either  the 
intrinsic  difficulty,  or  the  importance  to  the  civilised 
world. 

There  is,  however,  this  consideration,  which  is  of  a  re- 
assuring character.  In  the  past  the  great  disasters  due 
to  the  presence  of  the  Bantu  peoples  have  arisen  from 
movements  which  have  taken  place  among  tribes  beyond 
the  control  of  the  European  Governments.  Such  move- 
ments have  been  of  two  kinds — the  formation  of  military 
systems  by  ambitious  and  energetic  chiefs,  and  the  con- 
sequent displacement  of  native  populations.  Formerly, 
the  European  Governments,  even  when  such  movements 
were  known  to  them,  were  unable  to  interfere  until  the 
evil  was  full  grown  and  some  unmistakable  act  of  aggres- 
sion had  been  committed,  because  these  native  tribes 
and  their  chiefs  were  regarded  by  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment as  independent  powers,  and  had  to  be  treated  as 
such.  Henceforward,  we  may  hope  that  such  disasters 
will  not  be  repeated.  For  the  withdrawal  of  the  white 
police,  which  gave  the  Matabele  their  opportunity,  is  a 
special  cause  which  is  not  likely  to  occur  again.  And 
now  from  the  Zambesi  to  Capetown  there  is  a  network  of 
European  Magistracies,  with  officials  whose  duty  it  is  to 
watch  and  report  the  earliest  signs  of  danger. 

The  Secretary  for  Native  Affairs  is  the  minister  who 
is  specially  charged  with  the  difficult  task  of  securing 
the  peaceful  development  of  the  native  population  within 
the  colonial  boundary. 

Mr  Rhodes,  who,  until  his  resignation,  occupied  this 
position   in  addition  to  the  premiership,  has  endeavoured 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES     183 

to  solve  the  problem  by  the  Glen  Grey  Act  (1894) 
(Note  27). 

In  introducing  this  important  measure  Mr  Rhodes  said 
that  in  the  Transkei  there  were  600,000  Bantu,  that  in 
about  twenty  years  there  would  be  1,200,000,  and  that 
the  Transkei  could  not  support  such  a  population  as  this. 
He  also  made  the  interesting  statement  that  he  was 
personally  responsible  for  some  2,000,000  African  natives. 
As  Managing  Director  of  the  Chartered  Company  he  was 
responsible  for  half  a  million  natives  north  of  the  Zambesi 
and  half  a  million  south  of  the  Zambesi ;  and  as  Secretary 
for  Native  Affairs  he  was  responsible  for  one  million  natives 
in  the  Cape  Colony,  He  aimed,  therefore,  at  the  in- 
troduction of  a  system  which  could  be  applied  ultimately 
throughout  South  and  Central  Africa.  It  should  also 
be  noticed  that  Mr  Rhodes  is  strongly  opposed  to  the 
encroachment  of  Europeans  upon  the  native  territories, 
or  to  anything  which  might  lead  to  the  mixing  of  the 
two  races. 

The  objects  and  methods  proposed  by  the  Glen  Grey 
Act  are  these — 

The  overcrowding  of  natives  upon  the  land  is  to  be 
prevented  by  the  substitution  of  a  system  of  allotments, 
with  rights  of  commonage,  held  under  a  regular  title  by 
the  head  of  a  family  and  descending  to  the  eldest  son  by 
the  law  of  entail,  in  place  of  locations  held  under  com- 
munal tenure. 

The  minds  of  the  natives  are  to  be  occupied  and  their 
faculties  developed  by  the  establishment  of  a  simple 
system  of  local  government,  consisting  of  village  and 
district  councils.  Mr  Rhodes  points  out  that,  by  the 
control  of  civilised  governments,  the  employment  furnished 
by  war  and  councils  of  war  has  been  taken  away,  and 
nothing  has  so  far  been  substituted  in  its  place.  By 
these  means,  however,  the  natives  will  be  able  to  occupy 
themselves  with  matters  "like  bridges,  roads,   education, 


1 84  SOUTH  AFRICA 

plantation  of  trees,  and  various  local  questions."  *  They 
are  also  to  be  allowed  to  tax  themselves  for  these  local 
purposes.  In  this  way  the  Transkei  will  be  able  to  pay 
the  cost  of  its  own  development.  Mr  Rhodes  estimates 
that  in  Fingoland  a  tax  of  ten  shillings  per  allotment  will 
produce  ;^9ooo  per  annum. 

In  order  to  provide  a  "  gentle  stimulus  to  come  forth 
and  find  the  dignity  of  labour,"  the  idle  young  males, 
that  is  to  say,  those  who  have  no  white  employers,  are 
to  pay  a  labour  tax  of  los.  per  head.  The  proceeds  of 
this  tax  are  to  be  devoted  to  industrial  schools  and  train- 
ing, and  so  "  the  neglect  of  labour  will  provide  a  focus 
for  instruction  in  labour."  By  this  means,  also,  the  labour 
market  of  the  colony  will  be  replenished,  and  the  prospects 
of  agriculture  materially  improved.! 

The  "  liquor  pest "  is  to  be  removed.  Power  is  given 
to  the  District  Councils  to  close  the  canteens,  but  the 
several  districts  must  tax  themselves  to  raise  funds  for 
compensating  the  canteen-holders. 

To  prevent  disturbances  it  is  proposed  to  apply  the 
bill  gradually.  At  first  its  application  was  limited  to 
the  Glen  Grey  area  and  to  Fingoland ;  and  its  subsequent 
extension  depended  upon  the  results  observed  in  these 
districts.^  The  ultimate  success  of  the  measure,  of  course, 
can  only  be  demonstrated  by  time  and  experience ;  but 
in  breadth  of  principle  it  is  a  great  advance  upon  any 
previous  native  legislation ;  and  it  is  an  experiment  which 
will  be  closely  watched. 

Fortunately  South  Africa  is  by  no  means  deficient  in 
public  men.  The  difficulties  of  the  situation  have  formed 
an  excellent   training  school   in   politics,  for  in   no   other 

•  Report  in  the  Cape  Weekly  A7-giis,  July  26,  1894. 

t  Mr  Rhodes  compares  the  wages  of  the  coloured  labour  in  the  Cape 
Colony — 2s.  and  2s.  6d.  a  day — with  those  of  coloured  labour  in  Egypt 
and  the  Niger  Protectorate,  where  it  is  respectively,  2d.  and  4d.  a  day. 

X  It  has  since  been  announced  that  the  Government  have  extended 
the  Act  to  three  new  districts. 


CONFLICT  OF  NATIONALITIES  AND  RACES     185 

colony  or  dependency  of  the  Empire  do  more  various  or 
more  important  problems  arise.  And  these  difificulties 
have  produced  public  men  of  commensurate  ability. 
Apart  from  Mr  Rhodes,  the  names  of  Sir  Henry  de 
Villiers,  the  late  President  Brand,  and  Mr  Hofmeyr  at 
once  present  themselves. 

It  is  to  such  men  and  others  like  them  that  the  consoli- 
dation of  the  Europeans  and  the  education  of  the  natives 
— the  two  great  tasks  which  lie  before  the  Europeans 
in  South  Africa — must  be  entrusted. 

One  thing  at  least  we  may  expect  and  require,  that  in 
the  future  the  progress  of  South  Africa  may  not  be 
hindered  by  any  such  grave  divergencies  of  opinion 
between  the  Imperial  and  Colonial  authorities  as  have 
happened  in  the  past.  The  possibility  of  such  divergencies 
unhappily  exists,  but  the  danger  of  their  occurrence  has 
been  largely  diminished  by  the  establishment  of  cable 
communication,*  and  by  the  increased  and  increasing 
speed  of  the  ocean-going  steamships  which  bridge  the 
interval  between  England  and  her  daughter  States,  and 
make  it  possible  for  the  representatives  of  the  Colonial 
and  Imperial  Governments  to  meet  in  frequent  conference. 

And  when  the  schoolmaster  and  the  railway  have  done 
their  work  ;  when  the  old  sores  have  been  healed,  and 
the  old  antipathies  forgotten,  what  will  be  the  character 
of  the  Africander  race  ?  It  should  be  courageous,  strenu- 
ous, and  patriotic  :  for  it  will  need  these  qualities  to  fulfil 
its  destiny.  Courage  to  maintain  its  supremacy  over  the 
coloured  races  nurtured  in  its  borders  ;  strenuousness  to 
overcome  the  natural  deficiencies,  and  use  to  the  full  the 
natural  advantages  of  the  land  of  its  adoption  ;  and  an 
intense  patriotism  to  keep  itself  free  from  the  insidious 
effects  of  constant  association  with  a  race  lower  than 
itself  in  the  scale  of  humanity. 

*  This  was  done  in  June  18S0,  after  Isandlhwana. 


CHAPTER    XI. 

South  African  Literature. 

TN  proposing  to  discuss  South  African  literature  as  a  part 
-*■  of  South  African  life — that  is  to  say,  of  the  life  of  the 
English  colonists — we  are  confronted  at  the  outset  by 
a  difficulty.  The  political  unity  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race 
has  been  lost,  but  its  literary  unity  is  unquestioned. 
Shakespeare  and  Milton  belong  as  much  to  the  United 
States  of  America,  or  the  commonwealth  of  Australia,  as 
to  England :  the  literary  heritage  of  which  they  form  part 
is  a  common  possession  of  the  English  under  whatever 
sky  they  live.  In  the  face  of  this  obvious  fact,  must  not 
any  distinction  which  is  drawn  between  writers  in  England 
and  writers  beyond  the  seas  be  purely  artificial,  or  one 
which  would  most  suitably  be  considered  among  distinctions 
which  are  based  upon  conditions  which  are  merely  part  of 
the  personality  of  the  author  ? 

On  the  other  hand,  we  must  remember  that  this  very 
Elizabethan  and  Stuart  literature  was  itself  the  outcome  of 
a  period  of  national  expansion,  similar  in  character  to  the 
Victorian  expansion,  though  it  was  infinitely  less  rapid  and 
far-reaching.  In  spite,  then,  of  this  difficulty,  we  must  try 
to  form  some  definite  conception  of  colonial  or  extra-insular 
literature.  This  conception  will  be  more  of  the  nature  of 
a  working  hypothesis  than  a  definition,  but  without  some- 
thing of  the  kind,  however  tentative,  we  shall  not  be  able 
to  make  any  advance  at  all  in  the  enquiry  we  have  in 
hand.  It  will  clear  the  ground  a  little  if  we  decide  first  of 
all  what  a  work  of  this  class  is  not. 

x86 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  187 

In  order,  then,  to  be  included  in  this  class  it  is  not 
necessary  that  the  novel  or  poem,  as  the  case  may  be, 
should  be  the  work  of  a  "  colonial-born  "  author.  That 
requirement  would  exclude  from  our  list  such  characteristic 
novels  as  those  of  Marcus  Clarke,  the  author  of  "  For  the 
Term  of  his  Natural  Life,"  and  of  Mr  Thomas  Alexander 
Browne,  the  author  of  "  Robbery  under  Arms,"  and  such 
characteristic  poetry  as  that  of  Adam  Lindsay  Gordon. 
All  of  these  authors  would  be  disqualified  by  this  test, 
although  one  of  them,  Mr  Browne,  was  only  three  years 
old  when  he  reached  Sydney,  and  the  other  two  arrived  in 
Australia  before  they  were  twenty-one. 

Nor  is  it  sufficient  that  the  work  should  show  a  special 
knowledge  of  the  locality  in  which  the  scene  is  laid,  or  of 
the  social  and  material  conditions  which  govern  the  action 
of  the  persons.  For  that  would  include  the  "historical 
novel  "  and  the  "  novel  of  adventure  "  as  such. 

What  gives  individuality  to  authors  of  the  class  we  are 
proposing  to  consider  is  the  capacity  to  reproduce  the 
spirit,  and  not  merely  the  letter  of  colonial  life,  or  better, 
of  the  life  of  the  English  outside  of  England.  In  its 
broadest  aspect  this  will  be  the  hfe  of  the  Anglo-Saxon 
race,  when  the  blood  of  its  sons  is  stirred  with  strife,  and 
their  faces  are  flushed  with  victory  over  the  forces  of  nature 
and  alien  races,  or  their  teeth  set  tight  in  defiance  of  the 
inevitable.  The  fiction  which  reflects  this  life  is  marked 
by  a  note  of  freedom  with  which  is  associated  a  certain 
natural  materialism,  born  of  cloudless  skies  and  virgin 
lands ;  its  poetry,  by  a  fierce  realism  which  glories  in  the 
worst,  whether  that  worst  be  the  result  of  physical  conflict 
or  mental  anguish.  For  in  this  struggle  our  race  is  at  its 
best  and  at  its  worst ;  and  the  eyes  of  the  spectators  are 
quickly  opened  to  the  realities  of  existence. 

In  two  such  characteristic  works  as  "  Robbery  under 
Arms,"  and  "The  Story  of  an  African  Farm,"  the  leading 
motive  is  a  revolt  against  society.     The  former  is  a  book 


1 88  SOUTH  AFRICA 

of  action,  and  in  it  the  will  of  society  is  defied  in  its 
external  form  of  law :  the  latter  is  a  book  of  thought,  and 
the  revolt  here  is  against  "  convention,"  that  is  to  say,  the 
rules  by  which  society  regulates  its  inner  life,  and  which 
are  based  upon  no  definite  physical  sanction.  The  wider 
charity  which  makes  both  these  authors  recognise,  and 
emphasise,  an  underlying  morality  in  immoral  action,  is 
a  reflex  of  the  wider  social  and  material  conditions  of 
colonial  and  extra-insular  life.  In  England  men  are 
enclosed  in  grooves,  in  the  Australian  colonies  an  efficient 
democracy  has  produced  a  fusion  of  ranks,  in  India  and 
South  Africa,  and  in  other  countries  which  present  a 
career,  the  personal  element  is  more  powerful,  and  in 
all  the  material  of  social  life  is  less  closely  compacted. 

In  extra-insular  poetry  there  is  also  a  distinctive  note, 
and,  although  such  poetry  is,  naturally,  to  a  large  extent 
concerned  with  the  imperial  aspects  of  the  life  of  the 
English,  this  characteristic  feeling  is  not  dependent  upon 
subject.  Tennyson  deals  with  the  imperial  destiny  of 
England — 

"  The  loyal  to  their  crown 
Are  loyal  to  their  own  far  sons,  who  love 
Our  ocean-empire  with  her  boundless  homes 
For  ever  broadening  England,  and  her  throne 
In  our  vast  Orient,  and  one  isle,  one  isle 
That  knows  not  her  own  greatness  :  if  she  knows 
And  dreads  it  we  are  fall'n."  * 

Matthew  Arnold  is  characteristically  touched  by  the  pathos 
of  the  situation ;  by  the  contrast  between  the  toiling 
millions  and  the  splendour  of  the  political  edifice  they  are 
unconsciously  erecting  ;  an  edifice  too  splendid  for  them  to 
understand,  and  one  in  which  neither  they  nor  their 
children  will  dwell.  Under  the  influence  of  this  thought, 
England  becomes  the  "  Weary  Titan,"  who  already 
staggers  under  the  burden  of  empire. 

*  Dedication  to  the  Queen  :  Idylls  of  the  King. 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  189 

But  the  spirit  in  which  these  utterances  are  conceived  is 
quite  distinct  from  the  spirit  which  pervades  the  poetry 
which,  in  default  of  a  better  name,  I  call  extra-insular,  when 
it  is  concerned  with  the  like  subjects. 

Take,  for  example,  Tennyson's  Defence  of  Liccknoiv, 
and  in  particular  the  two  lines — 

"  Handful  of  men  as  we  were,  we  were  English  in  heart  and  limb, 
Strong  with  the  strength  of  the  race  to  command,  to  obey,  to  endure  ; " 

and  compare  it  with  Mr  Rudyard  Kipling's  Ballad  of 
East  and  West,  in  which  the  same  pride  of  race  is 
set  forth  in  a  more  subtle  and  triumphant  form — a  form  in 
which  the  comparison  is  expressed  by  emphasising  points 
not  of  contrast,  but  of  similarity,  and  at  the  same  time 
suggesting  a  wide  field  of  superiority.  In  the  pursuit  of  the 
stolen  horse  the  reckless  daring  that  matches  the  temper 
of  the  chief  of  the  Border  thieves  is  shown  by  the  "  Colonel's 
son  "  ;  the  honourable  reluctance  to  slay  an  enemy  who  is 
completely  in  his  power  comes  from  Kamal.  And  so, 
Kamal  the  Border  chief  not  only  surrenders  the  favourite 
horse,  but  sends  his  son  "  to  eat  the  white  Queen's  meat," 
and  become  a  "  man  of  the  Guides  " — 

"  Oh,  East  is  East,  and  West  is  West,  and  never  the  twain  shall  meet, 
Till  earth  and  sky  stand  presently  at  God's  great  judgment  seat  ; 
But  there  is  neither  East  nor  West,  Border,  nor  Breed,  nor  Birth, 
When  two  strong  men  stand  face  to  face,  tho'  they  come  from  the  ends 
of  the  earth  I  " 

That  is  a  verse  which  could  only  have  been  written  by 
a  man  who  is  sensitive  to  influences  which  pulsate  but  faintly 
in  our  island  air,  who  has  been  born  in  a  day  of  Ilbert  Bills; 
a  day  when  the  native  press  of  India  surrounds  the  page 
which  contains  an  account  of  the  farewell  ceremonies  of 
a  popular  Viceroy  with  a  band  of  gold ;  a  day  in  which 
an  Indian  gentleman  represents  a  metropolitan  constituency 
in  the  House  of  Commons. 


190  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Or  compare  the  "  grand  air  "  of  the  verse — 

"  We  sailed  wherever  ship  could  sail, 

We  founded  many  a  mighty  state, 
Pray  God  our  greatness  may  not  fail 

Through  craven  fear  of  being  great." 

with  the  fierce  realism  which  characterises  Mr  Rudyard 
Kiphng's  presentation  of  the  ocean  predominance  of 
England  in  his  poem  The  English  Flag.  Here,  in 
answer  to  the  poet's  invocation,  the  four  winds  declare, 
each  in  their  turn,  what  they  know  of  the  flag,  which  is  so 
little  known,  and  so  lightly  esteemed,  by  the  English  in 
England.  The  same  quality  runs  through  the  whole 
poem,  but  perhaps  it  shows  most  clearly  in  the  reply  of  the 
West  Wind— 

"The  West  Wind  called  : — "  In  squadrons  the  thoughtless  galleons  fly 
That  bear  the  wheat  and  cattle  lest  street-bred  people  die. 
They  make  my  might  their  porter,  they  make  my  home  their  path, 
Till  I  loose  my  neck  from  their  rudder  and  whelm  them  all  in  my  wrath. 

I  draw  the  gliding  fog-bank  as  a  snake  is  drawn  from  the  hole. 
They  bellow  one  to  the  other,  the  frighted  ship  bells  toll. 
For  day  is  a  drifting  terror  till  I  raise  the  shroud  with  my  breath, 
And  they  see  strange  bows  above  them  and  the  two  go  locked  in  death. 

But  whether  in  calm  or  wrack-wreath,  whether  by  dark  or  day, 
I  heave  them  whole  to  the  conger  or  rip  their  plates  away, 
First  of  the  scattered  legions,  under  a  shrieking  sky. 
Dipping  between  the  rollers,  the  English  Flag  goes  by. 

The  dead  dumb  fog  hath  wrapped  it — the  frozen  dews  have  kissed — 
The  naked  stars  have  seen  it,  a  fellow  star  in  the  mist. 
What  is  the  Flag  of  England  ?     Ye  have  but  my  breath  to  dare, 
Ye  have  but  my  waves  to  conquer.     Go  forth,  for  it  is  there." 

Now,  let  us  glance  for  a  moment  at  the  work  of  Adam 
Lindsay  Gordon.  The  subject  is  a  very  commonplace 
one,  but  I  think  we  can  recognise  a  distinctive  value 
in  the  poem  ;  that,  in  short,  it  possesses  the  characteristic 
feeling  which  separates  it,  and  poems  of  this  class,  from 
the  general  mass  of  English  poetry.      It  is  the  death  of 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  TJTERATURE  191 

the  outcast  in  the  AustraHan  bush.  As  The  Sick 
Stockrider  looks  back  he  forgets  the  material  hardships 
of  the  past,  and  remembers  only  its  pleasures — 

•'  'Twas  merry  in  the  glowing  morn,  amid  the  gleaming  grass, 

To  wander  as  we've  wandered  many  a  mile, 
And  blow  the  cool  tobacco  cloud,  and  watch  the  white  wreaths  pass, 

Sitting  loosely  in  the  saddle  all  the  while. 
'Twas  merry  'mid  the  blackwoods  when  we  spied  the  station  roofs, 

To  wheel  the  wild  scrub  cattle  at  the  yard, 
With  a  running  fire  of  stock-whips,  and  a  fiery  run  of  hoofs  ; 

Oh,  the  hardest  day  was  never  then  too  hard  !  " 

Then  he  faces  the  present — 

"  Let  me  slumber  in  the  hollow  where  the  wattle  blossoms  wave, 

With  never  stone  or  rail  to  fence  my  bed  ; 
Should  the  sturdy  station  children  pull  the  bush  flowers  on  my  grave, 

I  may  chance  to  hear  them  romping  overhead. 
I  don't  suppose  I  shall  tho',  for  I  feel  like  sleeping  sound  ; 

That  sleep,  they  say,  is  doubtful.     True  ;  but  yet 
At  least  it  makes  no  difference  to  the  dead  man  underground. 

What  the  living  men  remember  or  forget. 
Enigmas  that  perplex  us  in  the  world's  unequal  strife 

The  future  may  ignore  or  may  reveal. 
Yet  some  as  weak  as  water,  Ned  !  to  make  the  best  of  life, 

Have  been  to  face  the  worst,  as  true  as  steel."  * 

Among  South  African  authors  two  names  are  pre- 
eminent, Thomas  Pringle  and  Olive  Schreiner.  Both 
of  these  authors  have  made  contributions  to  English 
literature  of  permanent  value,  and  both  satisfy,  though 
in  different  ways,  the  conception  of  colonial,  or  extra- 
insular,  literature  which  I  have  tentatively  advanced. 

Pringle  was  born  at  Kelso  in  1789.  He  came  to  South 
Africa  as  the  leader  of  the  "  Scotch  party  "  in  the  Albany 
Settlement  of  1820.  Afterwards  he  removed  to  Capetown, 
and  took  part  in  the  struggle  for  the  freedom  of  the 
colonial  press  which  signalised  the  arbitrary  administration 
of  Lord  Charles  Somerset.  Subsequently,  in  1826,  he 
returned  to  England,  and  became  the  secretary  of  the 
Society  for  the  Abolition  of  Slavery.  He  died  on 
*  This  is  the  original  stanza. 


192  SOUTH  AFRICA 

December  5th,  1834,  little  more  than  a  year  after  the 
efforts  of  the  society  had  been  crowned  by  the  passing 
of  the  Abolition  Act. 

Pringle,  therefore,  was  only  a  very  short  time — some 
six  years — resident  in  South  Africa,  but  his  characteristic 
work  is  South  African.  His  inspiration,  with  few  ex- 
ceptions, comes  from  the  Karoo,  from  the  barren  ranges 
and  deep  valleys  of  Kaffraria,  and  from  the  life  of  the 
settlers  and  the  coloured  people.  His  best  known  poem 
is  Afar  ifi  the  Desert,  and  of  this  poem  Coleridge  has 
written,  with  what  at  this  period  of  time  seems  dispropor- 
tionate warmth,  "  I  do  not  hesitate  to  declare  it  among 
the  two  or  three  most  perfect  lyrics  in  our  language." 
To  us  the  merit  of  the  poem  lies  in  the  descriptive  power 
which  it  reveals.  As  a  picture  of  the  Karoo  it  is  singularly 
true  both  in  expression  and  feeling,  but  the  lyric  exaltation 
is  not  there. 

"  Afar  in  the  desert  I  love  to  ride, 

With  the  silent  Bush-boy  alone  by  my  side  : 

Away — away — in  the  wilderness  vast, 

Where  the  White  Man's  foot  hath  never  passed, 

And  the  quivered  Coranna  or  Bechuan 

Hath  rarely  crossed  with  his  roving  clan  : 

A  region  of  emptiness,  howling  and  drear, 

Which  man  hath  abandoned  from  famine  and  fear  ; 

Which  the  snake  and  the  lizard  inhabit  alone, 

With  the  twilight  bat  from  the  yawning  stone  ; 

Where  grass,  nor  herb,  nor  shrub  takes  root, 

Save  poisonous  thorns  that  pierce  the  foot ; 

And  the  bitter-melon,  for  food  and  drink, 

Is  the  pilgrim's  fare  by  the  salt  lake's  brink  : 

A  region  of  drought  where  no  river  glides, 

Nor  rippling  brook  with  osiered  sides  ; 

Where  sedgy  pool,  nor  bubbling  fount, 

Nor  tree,  nor  cloud,  nor  misty  mount. 

Appears,  to  refresh  the  aching  eye  : 

But  the  barren  earth,  and  the  burning  sky, 

And  the  blank  horizon  round  and  round. 

Spread — void  of  living  sight  and  sound." 

Otherwise    the   poetic    value  of   his  work  is    not    high. 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  193 

Traces  of  the  influence  of  Scott,  his  poetic  master,  are 
everywhere  apparent.  Perhaps  the  best  individual  poem 
is  the  Softg  of  the  Wild  Bushman. 

"  My  yoke  is  the  quivering  assagai, 

My  rein  the  tough  bow-string  ; 
My  bridle  curb  is  a  slender  barb — 

Yet  it  quells  the  forest  king. 
The  crested  adder  honoureth  me, 

And  yields  at  my  command 
His  poison  bag,  like  the  honey  bee, 

When  I  seize  him  on  the  sand. 
Yea,  even  the  wasting  locust  swarm. 

Which  mighty  nations  dread, 
To  me  nor  terror  brings  nor  harm — 

For  I  make  of  them  my  bread." 

Here  and  there  we  find  isolated  couplets  which  are 
powerful :  such,  for  example,  as  the  lines  in  the  Caffer 
Commando — 

"  For  England  hath  spoke  in  her  tyrannous  mood, 
And  the  edict  is  written  in  African  blood." 

Or  those  in  Evening  Rambles — 

"  And  the  aloe  rears  her  crimson  crest, 
Like  stately  queen  for  gala  drest. " 

It  is  the  descriptive  merit  which  appears  in  these  last 
lines — and  in  the  poem  of  which  they  form  part — which 
gives  his  poetry  its  value.  We  have  seen  it  in  the 
picture  of  the  desert ;  it  is  equally  noticeable  in  his  descrip- 
tion of  the  bare,  serrated  ridges  which  are  charactefistic 
of  the  South  African  mountain  ranges — 

"  Sterile  mountains  rough  and  steep, 
That  bound  abrupt  the  valley  deep, 
Heaving  to  the  clear  blue  sky 
Their  ribs  of  granite,  bare  and  dry. 
And  ridges  by  the  torrents  worn. 
Thinly  streaked  with  scraggy  thorn." 


194  SOUTH  AFRICA 

It  is  present,  too,   in  his   cameos   of  the   natives.     In 
The  Hottentot— 

"  Mild,  melancholy,  and  sedate,  he  stands, 
Tending  another's  flock  upon  the  fields, 
His  fathers'  once,  where  now  the  white  man  builds 
His  home,  and  issues  forth  his  proud  commands." 

And  in  The  Caffer — 

"  Lo  !  where  he  crouches  by  the  cleugh's  dark  side, 
Eying  the  farmer's  lowing  herds  afar  ; 
Impatient  watching  till  the  evening  star 
Lead  forth  the  twilight  dim,  that  he  may  glide 
Like  panther  to  the  prey.     With  free  born  pride 
He  scorns  the  herdsman,  nor  regards  the  scar 
Of  recent  wound — but  burnishes  for  war 
His  assagai  and  targe  of  buffalo-hide." 

Mrs  Cronwright  Schreiner,  the  authoress  of  "  The  Story 
of  an  African  Farm,"  is  the  daughter  of  a  Lutheran 
minister  at  Capetown.  One  of  her  brothers,  Mr  Advocate 
Schreiner,  after  graduating  at  the  Cape  University,  pro- 
ceeded to  Cambridge,  where,  in  1882  I  beUeve,  he  was 
placed  by  the  examiners  first  in  the  first  class  of  the 
Law  Tripos,  and  afterwards  elected  a  fellow  of  Downing. 
Quite  recendy  he  served  for  some  time  as  Attorney-General 
in  Mr  Rhodes'  ministry.  At  the  time  the  "  Story  of  an 
African  Farm  "  was  written,  now  fifteen  years  ago,  Olive 
Schreiner  was  exceedingly  young;  and  she  was  actually 
living  among  the  surroundings  which  are  so  faithfully 
reproduced. 

The  key  to  the  book  is  to  be  found  in  a  remark  which 
the  boy  Waldo  makes,  when  the  children  are  discussing 
the  history  of  Napoleon  :  "  The  brown  history  tells  only 
what  he  did,  not  what  he  thought." 

It  is  a  book  of  "  thought."  In  its  external  aspect  the 
first  part  is  a  study  of  child-life,  and  the  second  an 
essay  in  woman's  rights ;  while  the  whole  contains  a 
picture  of  the  growth  of  a  soul — of  a  woman's  soul — closely 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  195 

associated  with  the  philosophic  conception  of  the  growth 
of  the  kosmos,  or  gradual  enlargement  of  the  area  of  the 
sense-perceptions  both  of  the  race  and  of  the  individual. 
Its  faults  of  structure,  its  incompleteness,  its  strange  gaps, 
seem  to  reflect  the  physical  characteristics  of  the  Karoo, 
and  the  social  and  material  conditions  under  which  it 
was  written. 

A  youthful,  and  therefore  impressionable,  but  well-stored 
mind,  was  suddenly  thrown  back  upon  itself  by  a  singular 
monotony  of  physical  and  social  surroundings.  To  these 
conditions  are  due  the  unusual  union  of  introspective 
analysis,  with  vivid,  almost  photographic  presentation  of 
character,  and  of  certain  aspects  of  nature.  Moreover, 
under  these  conditions,  certain  states  of  mind,  which  are 
ordinarily  forgotten,  or  passed  over,  both  in  real  life  and 
in  the  delineation  of  that  life  by  the  novelist,  assume  a 
substantive  and  definite  form.  People  who  live  in  cities, 
or  within  the  reach  of  city  influences,  do  not  pay  much 
attention  to  "dreams"  and  "reveries";  but  there  is  an 
actual  predominance  of  dreams  and  reveries  and  com- 
munings with  nature  in  Olive  Schreiner's  work. 

Of  the  value  of  the  thought  which  this  book  contains 
in  relation  to  the  development  of  woman  it  is  sufficient  to 
say  that  in  "  Lyndall "  we  have  the  immediate  prototype 
of  the  heroine  of  a  large  class  of  recent  novels.  In  re- 
viewing these  novels  collectively  under  the  title  of  "  The 
Novel  of  the  Modern  Woman,"  a  sympathetic  critic* 
says,  "Who  could  have  foreseen  that  the  new,  and  in 
many  respects  the  most  distinctive  note  of  the  literature 
of  the  last  decade  of  the  nineteenth  century,  would  be 
sounded  by  a  little  chit  of  a  girl  reared  in  the  solemn 
stillness  of  the  Karoo,  in  the  solitude  of  the  African 
bush?  The  Cape  has  indeed  done  yeoman's  service  to 
the  English  speaking  world.     To  that  pivot  of  the  empire 

*  Mr  Stead,  in  the  Review  of  Reviews^  July  1894. 


196  SOUTH  AFRICA 

we  owe  our  most  pronounced    type  of  the  imperial  man 
and  of  the  emancipated  woman." 

Not  the  least  valuable  for  us  is  its  faithful  and  vivid 
portrayal  of  rural  life  in  the  Cape  Colony,  and  in  particular 
of  the  character  of  the  Boer, 

To  begin,  let  us  observe  how  nature  is  drawn  in  its  most 
characteristic  aspect  in  South  Africa. 
,  First  the  long  period  of  drought — 

''  From  end  to  end  of  the  land  the  earth  cried  for 
water.  Man  and  beast  turned  their  eyes  to  the  pitiless 
sky,  that,  like  the  roof  of  some  brazen  oven,  arched  over- 
head. On  the  farm,  day  after  day,  month  after  month, 
the  water  in  the  dams  fell  lower  and  lower  ;  the  sheep 
died  in  the  fields ;  the  cattle,  scarcely  able  to  crawl, 
tottered  as  they  moved  from  spot  to  spot  in  search  of 
food.  Week  after  week,  month  after  month,  the  sun 
looked  down  from  the  cloudless  sky,  till  the  Karoo 
bushes  were  leafless  sticks,  broken  into  the  earth,  and 
the  earth  itself  was  naked  and  bare  ;  and  only  the  milk 
bushes,  like  old  hags,  pointed  their  shrivelled  fingers 
heavenwards,  praying  for  the  rain  that  never  came."  * 

Then  the  torrential  rain — 

"  Outside  the  rain  poured ;  a  six  months'  drought  had 
broken,  and  the  thirsty  plain  was  drenched  with  water. 
What  it  could  not  swallow  ran  off  in  mad  rivulets  to  the 
great  *  sloot '  that  now  foamed  like  an  angry  river  across 
the  flat.  Even  the  little  furrow  between  the  farmhouse 
and  the  Kraals  was  now  a  stream,  knee-deep,  which  almost 
bore  away  the  Kafir  women  who  crossed  it.  .  .  .  The 
fowls  had  collected,  a  melancholy  crowd,  in  and  about 
the  waggon-house,  and  the  solitary  gander,  who  alone 
had  survived  the  six  months'  want  of  water,  walked  hither 
and  thither,  printing  his  webbed  foot-marks  on  the  mud, 

*  P,  12.     Ed.  of  1S94. 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  197 

to  have  them  washed  out  the  next  instant  by  the  pelting 
rain."  * 

And  afterwards  the  "  princely  day "  which  follows  the 
breaking  of  the  drought — 

"The  long  morning  had  melted  slowly  into  a  rich 
afternoon.  Rains  had  covered  the  Karoo  with  a  heavy 
coat  of  green  that  hid  the  red  earth  everywhere.  In  the 
very  chinks  of  the  stone  walls  dark  green  leaves  hung 
out,  and  beauty  and  growth  had  crept  even  into  the  beds 
of  the  sandy  furrows  and  lined  them  with  weeds."  t 

Then  there  is  the  farmhouse  on  the  Karoo  and  its 
inhabitants.  In  spite  of  the  strangeness  of  the  surround- 
ings, how  familiar  the  author  has  made  it  all ;  and  how 
well  we  seem  to  know  the  chief  personages  of  the  story. 
Tant'  Sannie,  the  Boer  woman,  with  her  grossness  of 
person  and  language ;  Em  and  Lyndall,  the  two  little 
English  girls  whose  dead  father  married  Tant'  Sannie 
to  provide  them  with  a  protector ;  the  kindly  old  German 
overseer  and  his  son  Waldo ;  the  vagabond  Englishman 
who  supplants  him  :  Greg,  who  takes  half  the  farm  off 
Em's  hands  when  she  has  grown  up  ;  even  the  Hottentot 
maids  and  the  Kafirs,  the  Boer  visitors,  and  the  strangers 
who  come  and  go — all  assume  reality  under  the  deft 
portraiture  of  Olive  Schreiner. 

Tant'  Sannie  does  not  occupy  much  space  upon  the 
canvas,  but  the  figure  is  distinct  and  vigorous.  As  she 
sits  in  her  elbow  chair,  sipping  her  coffee,  with  her  feet 
comfortably  resting  upon  the  wooden  stove,  and  her 
Hottentot  maid  in  attendance,  she  seems  to  personify 
the  Africander  Dutch  in  every  inch  of  her  huge  frame. 
Apart  from  her  external  appearance  she  displays  the 
typical  mental  attitude  in  its  two  characteristic  traits — 
she  is  superstitious,  and  averse  to  change.  For  this 
gross  creature,  in  spite  of  her  violent  language  and 
material  philosophy,  "was  a  firm  believer  in  the  chinks 
•  P.  270.  t  P.  334. 


1 98  SOUTH  AFRICA 

in  the  world  above,  where  not  only  ears,  but  eyes,  might 
be  applied  to  see  how  things  went  on  in  this  world  below. 
She  never  felt  sure  how  far  the  spirit  world  might  overlap 
this  world  of  sense,  and,  as  a  rule,  prudently  abstained 
from  doing  anything  which  might  offend  unseen  auditors."  * 

Equally  characteristic  is  her  reproval  of  Em  for  using 
soda,  instead  of  milk-bushes,  to  make  soap. 

"  Not  that  I  believe  in  this  new  plan  of  putting  soda 
in  the  pot.  If  the  dear  Father  had  meant  soda  to  be  put 
into  soap,  what  would  he  have  made  milk-bushes  for,  and 
stuck  them  all  over  the  '  veld '  as  thick  as  lambs  in  the 
lambing  season  ?  " 

And  again  : — 

"'J/}'  mother  boiled  soap  with  bushes,  and  I  will  boil 
soap  with  bushes.  If  the  wrath  of  God  is  to  fall  upon 
this  land,'  said  Tant'  Sannie,  with  the  serenity  of  conscious 
virtue,  '  it  shall  not  be  through  me.  Let  them  make  their 
steam-waggons  and  their  fire-carriages  :  let  them  go  on  as 
though  the  dear  Lord  didn't  know  what  he  was  about 
when  he  gave  horses  and  oxen  legs — the  destruction  of 
the  Lord  will  follow  them.  I  don't  know  how  such  people 
read  their  Bibles.  When  do  we  hear  of  Moses  or  Noah 
riding  in  a  railway  ?  '"  f 

The  grotesque  use  of  Biblical  phraseology  is  one  of  the 
results  of  the  long  isolation  of  the  Boers  from  civilising 
influences.  Neither  Tant'  Sannie's  language  nor  her 
demeanour  is  overdrawn  :  on  the  contrary,  both  can  be 
matched  by  a  discussion  which  took  place,  less  than  two 
years  ago,  in  the  Transvaal  Volksraad,  when  a  proposal 
to  co-operate  with  the  Governments  of  the  Free  State  and 
Cape  Colony  in  destroying  the  locusts  was  violently  opposed 
on  the  ground  that  the  locusts  "were  a  plague  sent  by 
God,  as  in  the  days  of  King  Pharaoh." 

*  V.  83.  t  Pp.  33(3-7. 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  199 

Of  the  other  characters,  and  of  the  story  into  which 
their  several  fortunes  are  woven,  I  can  only  speak  very 
briefly. 

The  first  of  the  two  parts  into  which  the  book  is  divided 
is,  as  I  have  already  said,  a  study  of  child-life  in  a  South 
African  setting :  of  the  life  of  Waldo,  the  German  boy, 
and  of  the  two  little  English  girls,  Em  and  Lyndall.  Em 
is  to  have  the  farm  when  she  is  seventeen,  but  Lyndall 
will  have  nothing,  and  therefore  she  makes  up  her  mind 
to  go  to  school.  In  reply  to  Em's  pitying  generosity,  she 
says — 

" '  I  do  not  want  your  sheep ;  I  want  things  of  my  own. 
When  I  am  grown  up,'  she  added,  the  flush  on  her  delicate 
features  deepening  at  every  word ;  *  there  will  be  nothing 
that  I  do  not  know.  I  shall  be  rich,  very  rich,  and  I 
shall  wear  not  only  for  best  but  every  day  a  pure  white 
silk,  and  little  rosebuds  like  the  lady  in  Tant'  Sannie's 
bedroom.' "  * 

The  life  of  the  great  world  is  borne  in  upon  these 
children  in  a  curiously  distorted  fashion  through  the  sole 
medium  of  books.  They  have  read  of  Napoleon,  and 
in  discussing  his  life  Lyndall  says — 

" '  I  have  noticed  that  it  is  only  the  made-up  stories 
that  end  nicely ;  the  true  ones  all  end  so.' 

"  As  she  spoke  the  boy's  dark,  heavy  eyes  rested  on  her 
face. 

'*  *  You  have  read  it,  have  you  not  ? ' 

"  He  nodded.  '  Yes  ;  but  the  brown  history  tells  only 
what  he  did,  not  what  he  thought.' 

"  '  It  was  in  the  brown  history  that  I  read  of  him,'  said 
the  girl ;  '  but  I  know  what  he  thought.  Books  do  not 
tell  everything.' 

"  *  No,'  said  the  boy,  slowly  drawing  nearer  to  her,  and 

•  P.  14. 


200  SOUTH  AFRICA 

sitting  down   at  her   feet,   '  what  you  want  to  know  they 
never  tell.' "  * 

It  is  this  inner  life  that  is  described,  and  the  gradual 
awakening  of  the  conscious  being  :  its  agonies  and  dis- 
appointments, and  its  final  compromise,  when  "  this  thing 
we  call  existence  "  is  realised  to  be  no  longer  "  a  chance 
jumble,"  but  "a  living  thing,  a  one.'' 

"  And  so  it  comes  to  pass  in  time  that  the  earth  ceases 
for  us  to  be  a  weltering  chaos.  We  walk  in  the  hall  of 
the  universe,  our  soul  looking  up  and  round  reverentially. 
Nothing  is  despicable — all  is  meaning-full ;  nothing  is 
small — all  is  part  of  a  whole,  whose  beginning  and  end 
we  know  not.  The  life  which  throbs  in  us  is  a  pulsation 
from  it ;  too  mighty  for  our  comprehension,  not  too  small. 

"  And  so  it  comes  to  pass  at  last,  that  whereas  the  sky 
was  at  first  a  small  blue  rag  stretched  out  over  us,  and 
so  low  that  our  hands  might  touch  it,  pressing  down  on 
us,  it  raises  itself  into  an  immeasurable  blue  arch  over 
our  heads,  and  we  begin  to  live  again."  f 

The  second  part  is  occupied  with  the  tragedies  of  their 
lives,  mainly  that  of  Lyndall.  Into  these  I  have  not  time 
to  enter  now ;  yet  neither  as  children,  nor  afterwards,  are 
they  characters  that  are  likely  to  be  forgotten.  There  is 
Waldo,  with  his  "  silky  black  curls  "  and  uncouth  move- 
ments, with  his  infinite  yearnings  after  the  unseen,  and 
his  infinite  anguish  in  the  material  world.  And  Em  and 
Greg  —  well,  they  are  Em  and  Greg.  These  homely 
diminutives  sufficiently  indicate  the  comparative  common- 
placeness  of  their  respective  characters  and  fortunes.  And 
Lyndall,  how  could  we  forget  Lyndall,  with  her  frailty  of 
person  and  strength  of  will,  with  her  worldly  philosophy 
and  unworldly  action  ?  Lyndall  is  the  favourite  child  of 
the  author.  She  is  endowed  with  a  personal  charm  that 
nothing  can  dispel — not  even  the  equivocal  position  in 
•  P.  i8.  t  P.  52. 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  201 

which  she  has  at  last  placed  herself.  We  are  never  told 
in  so  many  words  in  what  her  beauty  consists,  but  we 
know  that  her  face  had  that  highest  form  of  beauty, 
beauty  of  expression,  "the  harmony  between  that  which 
speaks  from  within,  and  the  form  through  which  it  speaks." 

I  have  spoken  of  the  incompleteness,  of  the  strange 
gaps,  which  characterise  the  work.  This  deficient  con- 
struction, the  absence  of  any  subordination  of  the  parts  to 
the  whole,  or  of  the  lesser  characters  to  any  central  action, 
is  nowhere  more  conspicuous  than  in  the  treatment  of 
Lyndall's  "  stranger." 

On  this  point  the  author  has  explained  herself  in  the 
preface  to  the  second  edition. 

"  Human  life,"  she  says,  "  may  be  painted  according 
to  two  methods.  There  is  the  stage  method.  According 
to  that,  each  character  is  duly  marshalled  at  first,  and 
ticketed ;  we  know  with  an  immutable  certainty  that  at 
the  right  crisis  each  one  will  reappear,  and  act  his  part, 
and,  when  the  curtain  falls,  all  will  stand  before  it  bowing. 
There  is  a  sense  of  satisfaction  in  this,  and  of  complete- 
ness. But  there  is  another  method — the  method  of  the 
life  we  all  lead.  Here  nothing  can  be  prophesied.  There 
is  a  strange  coming  and  going  of  feet.  Men  appear,  act 
and  re-act  upon  each  other,  and  pass  away.  When  the 
crisis  comes  the  man  who  would  fit  it  does  not  return. 
When  the  curtain  falls,  no  one  is  ready.  When  the  foot- 
lights are  brightest  they  are  blown  out ;  and  what  the 
name  of  the  play  is  no  one  knows.  .  .  Life  may  be  painted 
according  to  either  method ;  but  the  methods  are  different. 
The  canons  of  criticism  that  bear  upon  the  one  cut 
cruelly  upon  the  other." 

Well,  the  author  ought  to  know  how  her  book  was  written, 
but,  apart  from  this,  the  book  tells  its  own  story.  She  has 
written  it  so  because  it  actually  happened  so.  Construc- 
tively it  is  not,  it  was  never  intended  to  be,  a  work  of 
art :   it  is  a   bit   of  real   life,  a  record  of  experience,   a 


202  SOUTH  AFRICA 

human  document.  Lyndall's  stranger  is  indicated  in  this 
shadowy  form  because  it  was  only  in  this  shadowy  form 
that  he  existed  in  the  author's  mind.  The  Boer  woman, 
Em,  Greg,  Waldo,  the  coloured  people — all  these  she 
has  actually  seen,  and  she  has  drawn  them  as  she  saw 
them :  the  stranger  she  has  imagined,  and  his  picture 
contains  just  so  much  as  could  assume  substance  in  her 
mind. 

There  is  another  branch  of  South  African  literature 
upon  which  I  must  say  a  word. 

It  is  somewhat  remarkable  that,  while  colonial  fiction 
and  colonial  poetry  is  read  in  England,  no  account  is 
taken  of  the  skill  exhibited  in  political  essay-writing. 
And  yet  the  success  achieved  by  colonial  writers  is  more 
general,  and  relatively  higher,  in  this  than  in  any  other 
branch  of  letters.  It  would  be  strange  if  this  were  other- 
wise, for  as  Amiel,  the  Genevan,  has  pointed  out,  democracy 
tends  to  develop  the  individual  upon  political  lines.  "  On 
things,"  he  says,  "  its  effect  is  unfavourable,  but  on  the 
other  hand,  men  profit  by  it,  for  it  develops  the  individual 
by  obliging  everyone  to  take  an  interest  in  a  multitude  of 
questions."  Among  works  of  this  class  in  South  Africa 
we  have  Cloete's  "  Five  Lectures  on  the  Emigration  of 
the  Dutch  Farmers,"  and  the  late  Judge  Watermeyer's 
"  Three  Lectures  on  the  Cape  of  Cood  Hope  under  the 
government  of  the  Dutch  East  India  Company."  The 
difficult  circumstances  under  which  the  colonisation  of 
South  Africa  by  the  Europeans  has  been  effected  present 
a  wide  field  to  the  historian,  and,  apart  from  the  monu- 
mental work  of  Mr  Theal,  we  find  a  group  of  colonial 
writers  who  have  devoted  themselves  to  the  useful  task 
of  recording  the  work  of  past  generations  of  colonists  for 
the  benefit  and  instruction  of  the  present. 

In  this  connection  it  is  necessary  to  make  some  mention 
of  the  Cape  University.  The  University  of  the  Cape  of 
Good  Hope  was  incorporated  in   1873,  and  obtained  its 


SOUTH  AFRICAN  LITERATURE  203 

charter  in  1877.  It  is  the  crown  of  a  remarkably  complete 
and  effective  system  of  national  education  ;  and  although 
its  teaching  staff  is  distributed  among  the  various  colleges, 
there  is  a  sufficient  amount  of  academic  work  to  be  trans- 
acted at  its  head-quarters  at  Capetown  to  render  the 
University  circle  a  distinct  stimulus  to  the  literary  enter- 
prize  of  the  colony. 

But  the  work  of  Olive  Schreiner  stands  out  conspicuous, 
if  not  unique,  not  only  in  South  Africa,  not  only  through- 
out the  British  Colonies,  but  throughout  the  English- 
speaking  world.  If  we  ask  to  what  special  element  this 
pre-f;minence  is  due,  we  can  find  the  answer  in  that  re- 
markable chapter  which  contains  the  Allegory  of  the  Search 
for  Truth.  * 

"  The  attribute  of  all  art,  the  highest  and  the  lowest,  is 
this — that  it  says  more  than  it  says  and  takes  you  away 
from  itself.  It  is  a  little  door  that  opens  into  an  infinite 
hall  where  you  may  find  what  you  please.  Men,  thinking 
to  detract,  say,  '  People  read  more  in  this  or  that  work 
of  genius  than  was  ever  written  in  it,'  not  perceiving  that 
they  pay  the  highest  compliment." 

It  is  this  attribute  of  art  that  is  conspicuous  in  "  The 
Story  of  an  African  Farm."  Its  literary  merit  is  due,  not 
to  its  realism,  not  to  its  discussion  of  a  social  problem,  but 
to  its  suggestiveness ;  in  short,  to  its  possession  of  this 
highest  quality  of  art,  to  speak  directly  to  the  mind,  not 
by  reason  but  through  the  imagination. 

•  Part  II.  ch.  2. 


CHAPTER    XI L 

The  Chartered  Company  and  Mr  Cecil  Rhodes. 

TI^OLLOWING  the  precedent  established  by  Napoleon, 
-^  when  —  now  a  hundred  years  ago  —  P^ron,  the 
naturalist,  was  sent  to  report  upon  the  Antipodean  settle- 
ment of  Botany  Bay,  the  French  Government  have  lately 
despatched  Monsieur  Lionel  D^cle  on  a  scientific  mission 
to  Africa.  With  the  general  results  of  the  observations 
made  by  the  explorer  during  his  journey  from  Capetown 
to  Uganda  we  are  not  specially  concerned  :  he  has 
however,  with  the  aptitude  of  the  French  mind  for  rapid 
generalisation,  provided  us  with  a  happy  phrase  to  char- 
acterise the  field  of  the  Chartered  Company's  operations — 
"  The  pick  of  Central  Africa  on  both  sides  of  the  Zambesi." 
But  we  are  dealing  with  a  country  which  is  not  only 
physically  but  historically  attractive.  Apart  from  the  in- 
terest which  attaches  to  the  scene  of  a  great  colonising 
effort,  the  territories  now  opened  up  by  the  Company 
possess  two  strong  claims  upon  our  attention,  the  great 
River  Zambesi  and  the  ruins  of  Zimbabwe. 

The  special   objective    of  the   Company's    operations  * 
is  the  high  plateau  which  stretches  for   300  miles,  at  an 

*  The  Company's  "field  of  operations"  extends  from  the  Molojx) 
River  to  the  Congo  State,  over  an  area  of  750,000  square  miles. 
Matabeleland  and  Mashonaland  have  been  provided  with  an  adminis- 
trative system  similar  to  that  of  a  Crown  Colony  ;  and  the  Company 
assume  the  administration  of  the  country  north  of  the  Zambesi  (except 
Nyasaland)  under  the  Agreement  of  November  4th,  1S94.  Under  the 
Charter  the  Cumpany  have  the  sole  right  to  obtain  concessions  of  land 
and  minerals  in  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate.  The  military  forces 
of  the  Company  are  under  the  direct  control  of  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment. I'ut  see  Chapter  XIV'. 
204 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY      205 

elevation  varying  from  4000  to  upwards  of  5000  feet,  in 
a  north-easterly  direction  from  Buluwayo  to  Umtali,  and 
forms  the  watershed  of  the  Zambesi  on  the  north,  and 
the  Sabi  and  Limpopo  on  the  south.  It  is  here  in  the 
uplands  of  Matabeleland  and  Mashonaland  that  the 
political  and  social  interest,  the  colonising  interest  in 
fact,  centres. 

Northward  our  attention  is  attracted  by  the  Zambesi, 
a  river  second  only  to  the  Nile  among  the  rivers  of 
Africa  in  geographical  significance. 

The  interest  of  the  Zambesi  culminates  in  the  Victoria 
Falls.  Here,  at  a  point  midway  in  its  eastward  course, 
when  its  stream  is  more  than  a  mile  broad  and  its  waters 
so  placid  that  they  assume  the  appearance  of  a  lake, 
the  Zambesi  encounters  a  strange  obstacle.  A  rock- 
bound  channel,  400  feet  deep  and  300  feet  wide,  stretches 
across  the  whole  breadth  of  its  stream  and  then  doubles 
sharply  backwards,  leaving  a  wedge-shaped  platform  of 
rock  level  with  the  surface  of  the  upper  waters.  Into 
this  channel  the  Zambesi  flings  its  waters  down  the 
perpendicular  wall  of  rock.  The  effects  which  accompany 
this  physical  tour  de  force — the  thunderous  noise  with 
which  the  waters  fall  over  the  precipice  and  crash  to- 
gether in  the  narrow  channel ;  the  chromatic  brilliancy 
of  the  play  of  sunlight  upon  spray-clouds ;  the  glimpses 
of  the  island-studded  palm-fringed  river  seen  through 
the  shifting  curtain  of  mist  at  dawn  or  sunrise,  when 
every  chromatic  value  is  raised  to  a  point  of  brilliancy 
reached  only  during  the  rapid  approach  or  rapid  with- 
drawal of  the  tropical  sun — can  be  imagined  but  not 
described. 

The  regions  in  which  the  historic  interest  centres  lie 
eastward  of  the  Mashonaland  plateau.  The  venerable 
ruins  on  the  Lunde  River  and  at  Zimbabwe  record  the 
scene  of  the  Semitic  colonisation  undertaken,  probably 
under  Phoenician  auspices,  in  the  era  of  King  Solomon. 


2o6  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Its  object  was,  of  course,  commercial :  to  work  the  gold 
mines,  to  trade  with  the  natives  in  ivory  and  ostrich 
feathers.  The  ruins  of  the  temple-fortress  of  Zimbabwe 
lie  20  miles  east  of  Fort  Victoria.  The  methods  of 
building,  the  scientific  and  religious  motives  of  the 
architectural  design,  clearly  indicate  the  presence  of  a 
race  superior  in  civilisation  to  any  native  African  people. 
This  superior  race  is  identified  by  Mr  Theodore  Bent 
with  the  Sabeaans,*  and  their  sphere  of  operations  with 
the  Ophir  of  the  Bible. 

On  the  coast,  in  a  line  due  east  from  Zimbabwe  is  Sofala, 
the  first  point  of  Africa  south  of  the  Equator  occupied 
by  the  Europeans.  These  earliest  European  colonists 
were  the  Portuguese ;  but  here  in  Africa,  as  in  India, 
they  had  been  forestalled  by  the  Arabian  merchants. 
In  1497  Vasco  da  Gama,  in  the  course  of  his  voyage 
to  India,  found  Arab  traders  established  on  the  east 
coast  of  Africa;  and  when,  in  1505,  Alvarez  occupied 
Sofala,  it  is  mentioned  that  two  Arab  dhows  were  lying 
there  ladened  with  gold.f 

The  existence  of  the  Zimbabwe  ruins  was  known  to 
the  Portuguese,  and  the  district  in  which  they  were 
situated  was  termed  Monomotapa,  but  in  Mr  Bent's  opinion 
the  Portuguese  themselves  never  penetrated  so  far  inland, 
and  their  information  was  based  upon  the  reports  of  the 
Moorish  traders.  The  first  European  who  saw  the 
Zimbabwe  ruins  was  the  German  explorer,  Karl  Mauch. 
The  discovery  took  place  in  187 1,  but,  unfortunately,  he 
maintained  that  "  the  fortress  on  the  hill  was  a  copy  of  King 
Solomon's  Temple  on  Mount  Moriah,  that  the  lower  ruins 
were  a  copy  of  the  palace  which  the  Queen  of  Sheba  in- 
habited during  her  stay  at  Jerusalem,  and  that  the  trees  in  the 
middle  of  it  were  undoubtedly  alraug  trees."  f     Karl  Mauch 

*  "  Ruined  Cities  of  Mashonaland,"  p.  195. 
+  Idem.  pp.  196-7. 
X  Idem,  p.  209. 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY     207 

suffered  for  his  enthusiasm.  His  picturesque  statements 
excited  incredulity  and  the  work  of  scientific  exploration  was 
delayed  for  twenty  years,  when  it  was  undertaken  by  Mr 
Theodore  Bent  under  the  joint  auspices  of  two  *  London 
societies  and  the  Chartered  Company. 

The  original  inhabitants  of  the  Mashonaland  plateau  are 
a  tribe  of  industrial  Bantu.  The  Mashonas  are  without 
military  organisation,  live  in  open  villages,  and  have  made 
some  progress  in  the  arts.  Interesting  evidence  of  the 
character  of  these  people  is  afforded  by  a  description  of  a 
visit  to  one  of  their  villages  which  was  lately  read  by  Mr 
Frank  Surridge  at  a  meeting  of  the  Colonial  Institute.! 
Mr  Surridge  was  chaplain  to  the  pioneer  force  which 
occupied  the  country  in  1890  ;  and  his  account,  therefore, 
is  valuable,  because  he  describes  the  people  while  they  were 
still  untouched  by  European  civilisation.  He  tells  us  that 
the  inhabitants  of  the  village  fled  on  the  appearance  of  "  a 
white  stranger  with  a  huge  camera  and  tripod,"  and  that  he 
was  left  in  possession  of  the  chief's  kraal.  He  continues, 
"  Moving  about  through  the  quaint  little  houses,  we  may  see 
signs  of  their  industry.  There  stands  the  smith's  forge,  of 
a  very  primitive  type  of  their  own  designing,  but  sufficient 
to  produce  some  splendidly  finished  specimens  in  wrought 
iron,  such  as  assagais,  reaping  implements,  and  knives.  At 
another  place  may  be  seen  the  miniature  arsenal,  where  the 
native  men  had  been  occupied  in  the  manufacture  of  their 
own  gunpowder.  Another  man  may  be  bestowing  some 
time  and  labour  in  carving  a  charm  in  ivory  or  a  pillow  in 
wood.  Others  may  be  occupied  in  cotton-spinning  or 
mat-making.  And  last,  but  not  least,  there  might  be  seen 
the  native  brewer  labouring  at  his  trade,  and  producing 
what  is  generally  known  as  Dtchuala,  or  beer  very  small  in 
character.     Around  the  village  there  is  some  agricultural 

*  The  Royal  Geographical  and  the  British  Society  for  the  advance- 
ment of  Science.     Mr  R.  Swan  was  associated  with  Mr  Bent, 
t  Reports,  vol.  xxii.  p.  462  (July  1891). 


3o8  SOUTH  AFRICA 

land ;  the  women  are  the  labourers,  and  gather  in  their 
harvests  of  corn,  rice,  tobacco,  sweet  potatoes,  pumpkins, 
and  monkey  nuts." 

But  the  plateau  is  not  exclusively  occupied  by  the 
Mashonas.  The  southern  portion  is  in  possession  of  a  very 
different  people,  the  Matabele.  The  Matabele  Zulus,  it 
will  be  remembered,  retired  northwards  beyond  the  Limpopo, 
after  the  defeat  of  Moselekatse  by  the  Boers  under  Hendrik 
Potgeiter.  Shortly  after  that  event,  about  the  year  1840 
according  to  Mr  Selous,  this  warlike  people,  under 
Umziligazi,  the  son  of  Moselekatse  and  father  of  Lobengula, 
overran  Mashonaland.  Following  the  usual  methods  of 
the  military  Bantu,  they  exterminated  the  inhabitants  of 
that  portion  of  the  country  which  they  selected  for  oc- 
cupation, and  reduced  the  survivors  to  slavery  or  vassalage. 
Since  this  conquest  to  the  date  of  Lobengula's  death  the 
Matabele  king  has  maintained  his  supremacy  over  his 
Mashona  subjects  by  sending  his  impis  among  them  once  a 
year  for  the  purpose  of  indiscriminate  murder  and  plunder. 
It  was  an  interference  with  this  native  custom  that  caused 
the  outbreak  of  hostilities  between  Lobengula  and  the 
Company.     (Note  28.) 

Such,  then,  in  brief  outline,  are  the  characteristic  features 
of  Charterland. 

The  Mashonaland  plateau,  the  immediate  objective  of 
the  Company,  was  known  from  the  accounts  of  hunters  and 
explorers — and  these  accounts  have  since  been  verified — 
to  be  temperate  in  climate,  well-watered,  and  well-wooded. 
It  was  a  country  where,  to  use  Mr  Selous'  words  written 
originally  in  1883,  "  European  children  would  grow  up  with 
rosy  cheeks,  and  apples  would  not  be  flavourless."  *  There 
was  also  presumptive  evidence  of  the  presence  of  gold  in  the 
remains  of  ancient  workings  which  had  been  discovered,  and 
in  the  practice  of  the  natives  who  were  known  to  obtain 
alluvial  gold  by  primitive  methods  from  the  Mazoe  and  its 
*  "  Travel  and  Adventure,"  p.  79  and  note. 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY      209 

tributary  streams.  To-day  the  gold  resources  of  Mashona- 
land  are  broadly  stated  to  consist  of  "  2000  miles  of 
mineralised  quartz,"  *  and  in  addition  to  gold  the  existence 
of  ample  deposits  of  coal  and  iron  in  juxtaposition  has  been 
ascertained. 

The  occupation  of  this  country  might  legitimately  have 
been  undertaken  by  the  Imperial  Government ;  for  is  not 
England  both  the  paramount  power  in  South  Africa,  and 
the  greatest  colonising  nation  in  the  world  ?  As  a  matter 
of  fact,  this  obvious  and  salutary  task  was  left  to  be  ac- 
complished by  private  enterprise,  we  might  almost  say  by 
a  single  individual. 

The  acquisition  of  the  interior  of  South-Central  Africa 
by  Mr  Cecil  Rhodes  and  his  associates  is  probably  the 
most  successful  application  of  the  resources  of  civilisation 
to  a  commercial  enterprise  yet  placed  on  record. 

A  mere  narrative  of  the  successive  steps  by  which  the 
occupation  has  been  accomplished  is  sufficiently  impressive. 

By  a  proclamation  of  the  High  Commissioner  of  March 
23rd,  1885,  the  22nd  parallel  of  south  latitude  was  fixed 
as  the  northern  boundary  of  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate, 
and  the  British  sphere  of  influence  was  shortly  afterwards 
extended  northwards  to  the  Zambesi.  By  thus  fixing  the 
boundary  of  the  Protectorate  it  was  supposed  that  the 
northward  expansion  of  the  South  African  Republic  would 
be  checked,  for  a  band  of  red  was  placed  between  the 
Transvaal  border  and  the  interior  of  Africa.  Notwith- 
standing this  precautionary  measure,  it  became  known  in 
1887  that  the  Boers  contemplated  the  establishment  of 
a  northern  colony.  Fortunately  the  Boers  were  watched 
by  vigilant  eyes  in  the  Cape  Colony,  and  this  forward 
movement  was  anticipated  by  the  conclusion  of  a  treaty 
of  "  peace  and  amity "  between  Great  Britain  and 
Lobengula.     Under  the  terms  of  this  treaty,  which  was 

*  Company's  Report,  —   p.  ic. 
4 


21b  SOUTH  AFRICA 

executed  early  in  1888,  the  Matabele  king  bound  himself 
not  to  enter  into  correspondence  with  any  foreign  power 
without  the  knowledge  and  consent  of  the  High  Com- 
missioner. On  October  30th  in  the  same  year  Mr 
Rochfort  Maguire  and  two  others  obtained  a  concession 
of  the  right  to  work  minerals  in  Lobengula's  territory. 

The  immediate  object  of  the  Association  which  after- 
wards became  the  British  South  Africa  Company  was 
to  give  effect  to  this  concession.  The  owners  of  the 
Rudd  concession  transferred  their  rights  to  the  founders 
of  the  Company,  and  the  founders  of  the  Company  under- 
took in  return  to  find  the  necessary  capital,  and  to  share 
the  nett  receipts  arising  from  the  operations  of  the  future 
Company  in  South  Africa  with  the  concessionaires.* 

On  April  30th,  1889,  proposals  for  the  formation  of  a 
Company  to  develop  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate,  and 
the  territories  lying  to  the  north,  were  submitted  by  the 
Association  to  the  Imperial  Government.  The  objects 
of  the  proposed  Company  were  shortly  stated  to  be 
these : — 

1.  To  extend  northwards  the  railway  and  telegraph 
systems  in  the  direction  of  the  Zambesi. 

2.  To  encourage  emigration  and  colonisation. 

3.  To  promote  trade  and  commerce. 

4.  To  develop  and  work  mineral  and  other  concessions 
under  the  management  of  one  powerful  organisation, 
thereby  obviating  conflicts  and  complications  between  the 
various  interests  that  had  been  acquired  within  those 
regions,  and  securing  to  the  native  chiefs  and  their 
subjects  the  rights  reserved  to  them  under  the  several 
concessions. 

At  the  same  time  the  Association  declared  its  intention 
to  petition  for  a  Royal  Charter,  on  the  ground  that  the 

*  "Report,"  1889-92,  p.  2.  This  original  arrangement  was  after- 
wards converted  (in  November  1893)  "''^o  a  half  share  of  the  increased 
share  capital  of  ;^2,ooo,ooo. 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY      211 

undertaking  "could  not  be  considered  as  likely  to  be 
remunerative  for  some  time,"  and  that  "  the  sanction  and 
moral  support "  of  the  Imperial  Government  was  "  necessary 
to  the  due  fulfilment"  of  the  objects  proposed.* 

In  complying  with  this  request  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment were  influenced  by  two  considerations.  In  the  first 
place,  the  operations  of  a  Company  incorporated  by  Royal 
Charter  would  be  more  easily  controlled  than  those  of 
a  Company  formed  under  the  provisions  of  the  Joint  Stock 
Companies  Acts ;  and  in  the  second,  Lord  Knutsford,  the 
Secretary  for  the  Colonies,  was  of  opinion  that  such  a 
Company  could,  generally,  "  relieve  Her  Majesty's  Govern- 
ment from  diplomatic  difficulties  and  heavy  expenditure," 
and,  in  particular,  render  valuable  assistance  to  Her 
Majesty's  Government  in  South  Africa  by  undertaking 
the  administration  of  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate.! 

The  British  South  Africa  Company  obtained  its  Charter 
on  the  29th  of  October  1889.  Arrangements  were  at 
once  made  by  Mr  Rhodes,  the  Managing  Director  in 
South  Africa,  for  the  extension  of  the  railway  northwards 
from  Kimberley ;  and  at  the  same  time  a  police  force 
sufficient  for  the  occupation  of  the  country  and  the  pro- 
tection of  the  settlers  was  enrolled  and  organised. 

The  actual  occupation  was  effected  by  the  famous 
Pioneer  Expedition  which  left  the  camp  on  the  Macloutsie 
River  on  June  28th,  1890,  and  reached  Fort  Salisbury, 
a  distance  of  400  miles,  on  the  12th  of  September.  The 
Pioneeer  Force  consisted  of  200  Europeans  and  150 
native  labourers :  it  was  organised  by  Mr  Frank  Johnson, 
and  conducted  by  Mr  F.  C.  Selous :  the  Pioneers  were 
accompanied  by  the  newly-organised  police.  The  police 
force  started  500  strong,  but  their  numbers  were 
gradually  lessened  as  the  forts  and  stations  were 
successively  established  and   garrisoned.     The   command 

*  Idem.  p.  2. 

t  Letter  from  Colonial  Office  to  Foreign  Office,  Idem.  p.  3. 


2  12  SOUTH  AFRICA 

of  the  entire  expedition  was  entrusted  to  Colonel 
Pennefather.  In  the  course  of  this  march  a  "  service- 
able road,  400  miles  long,"  the  Selous  Road,  was 
constructed  by  the  Pioneers,  who  cut  paths  through 
the  forests,  rendered  the  rivers  fordable,  and  spanned  the 
streams  with  corduroy  bridges  ;  and  forts  with  intermediate 
stations  were  erected  and  garrisoned  at  Tuli,  Victoria, 
Charter,  and  Salisbury.  The  cost  of  the  expedition, 
exclusive  of  grants  of  land  and  mineral  rights  to  the 
Pioneers^  was  ;^89,2  85,  los.  od.  Moreover,  the  occupa- 
tion of  Mashonaland  was  effected  "without  the  loss  of 
a  single  life,  and  without  the  necessity  of  firing  a  shot."  * 

On  the  29th  of  September  the  force  was  disbanded  at 
Salisbury,  the  Pioneers  dispersed  to  search  for  gold,  and 
the  administration  of  the  country  thus  occupied  by  some 
1000  Europeans  was  assumed  by  Mr  A.  R.  Colquhoun. 

Shortly  afterwards  the  Company's  Police  found  them- 
selves in  collision  with  the  Portuguese  authorities  in 
Manica  at  Massi  Kessi.  The  Portuguese,  although 
they  had  been  in  possession  of  certain  points  on 
the  south-eastern  littoral  of  Africa  since  the  occupation 
of  Sofala  in  1505,  had  never  established  an  effective 
control  over  the  natives  in  the  interior.  It  was  not 
anticipated,  therefore,  that  any  obstacle  would  be  presented 
by  this  shadowy  territorial  claim  to  the  establishment  of 
free  communication  between  Fort  Salisbury  and  the  coast. 

Ultimately,  further  conflict  was  avoided  by  the  arrange- 
ment of  a  modus  vivendi  on  the  nth  of  November;  and 
the  terms  of  this  arrangement  were  embodied  in  the 
Anglo-Portuguese  Convention  of  June  nth,  1891.  By 
this  treaty  the  territorial  claims  of  Portugal  were  recognised, 
but  the  nominal  possession  by  this  power  of  the  littoral 
belt  was  not  allowed  to  interfere  with  the  development  of 
the  interior  country.  In  return  for  the  definite  recognition 
of  her  territorial  rights  by  Great  Britain,  Portugal  under- 
*  Idem,  p,  7. 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY  213 

took  to  construct  or  allow  the  construction  of  a  railway 
from  Beira  to  the  interior,  and  to  limit  the  duties  levied 
upon  goods  in  transit  across  the  Portuguese  territories 
between  the  East  Coast  and  the  British  Sphere  to  a 
maximum  of  3  per  cent.  At  the  same  time  the  free 
navigation  of  the  Zambesi  was  secured. 

The  unexpected  opposition  of  the  Portuguese  had  an 
adverse  influence  upon  the  Mashonaland  Settlement.  By 
preventing  the  immediate  establishment  of  communication 
between  Salisbury  and  Beira,  the  Portuguese  compelled 
the  Company  to  draw  their  supplies  by  the  long  over- 
land route,  and  the  prices  of  stores  and  provisions  were 
abnormally  raised  by  this  enormous  cost  of  carriage. 
The  1500  settlers,  in  Mr  Rhodes'  words,*  "went  to 
work  to  find  their  reefs,  but  they  were  removed  1700 
miles  from  the  coast,  and  their  food  cost  them  j[,io  a  ton." 
At  the  same  time  the  difficulties  of  the  situation  were 
increased  by  the  unusually  heavy  rains  which  fell  during 
the  season  of  1 890-1.  This  latter  circumstance  had  the 
further  effect  of  causing  the  retirement  of  the  Company's 
first  administrator,  Mr  Colquhoun ;  and  the  appointment 
of  Dr  Leander  Jameson  as  his  successor. 

When  Dr  Jameson  assumed  the  control  of  the  Settle- 
ment, towards  the  end  of  1891,  the  affairs  of  the  Company 
had  reached  something  like  a  crisis. 

The  settlers  were  discontented,  for  fever  was  prevalent 
and  food  at  famine  prices.  The  police  force,  originally 
500  strong,  had  been  raised  to  650,  in  order  that 
the  Company  might  successfully  co-operate  with  the 
Bechuanaland  Border  Police  in  preventing  a  threatened 
"trek"  from  the  Transvaal.  The  accounts  of  the 
Company  showed  an  annual  expenditure  of  ;,r2  5o,ooo, 
while  the  revenue  available  for  administrative  purposes  was 
practically  nothing. 

Dr  Jameson,  however,  proved  equal   to  the  occasion. 

*  Company's  Report  oi  Annual  Meeting,  29th  November  1892. 


214  SOUTH  AFRICA 

**  If  you  will  give  me  ,-^3000  a  month,  I  can  pull 
through,"  he  said,  when  Mr  Rhodes  "talked  matters 
over"  with  him.*  In  the  following  year  the  police  were 
disbanded  with  the  exception  of  40  men,  and  a  volunteer 
force  of  500  men  at  ;£4  a  head  was  substituted  in  their 
place.  At  the  same  time,  as  every  able-bodied  man  in 
the  country  was  liable  to  burgher  duty,  arrangements 
were  made  for  equipping  a  total  force  of  1500  men  if 
necessity  arose. 

This  necessity  came  sooner  than  was  foreseen.  As  the 
Company  has  been  in  effect  charged  with  directly  pro- 
voking hostilities  with  a  view  to  the  destruction  of  the 
Matabele  system,  a  statement  made  by  Mr  Rhodes  at  the 
second  annual  meeting  of  the  shareholders,  held  on  the 
29th  November  1892,  is  significant.  Mr  Rhodes  then 
said  :  f  "  Our  differences  with  the  Portuguese  are  over, 
and  we  are  on  most  friendly  terms  with  Lobengula.  The 
latter  receives  a  globular  sum  of  j^ioo  a  month  in 
sovereigns,  and  he  looks  forward  with  great  satisfaction 
to  the  day  when  he  will  receive  them.  I  have  not  the 
least  fear  of  any  trouble  in  the  future  from  Lobengula." 

Although  Dr  Jameson  and  the  officers  of  the  Company 
have  been  "  clearly  exonerated "  by  an  exhaustive  and 
impartial  enquiry  made  by  the  Imperial  Government  into 
the  "  origin  and  conduct "  of  the  Matabele  War,  this 
statement,  made  little  more  than  six  months  before  the 
actual  outbreak  of  the  war,  retains  its  significance.  It  is 
incredible  that  Mr  Rhodes  should  have  made  this  definite, 
and,  as  it  proved  to  be,  optimistic  statement,  if  a  struggle 
with  Lobengula  had  been  at  that  time  even  remotely 
contemplated.  On  the  contrary  it  appears  that  the  re- 
cognition and  maintenance  of  Lobengula's  authority  was 
part  of  the  Company's  programme. 

The  necessity  of  abandoning  this  attitude  was  forced 
upon  the  Company  by  the  action  of  the  Matabele  king. 
*  Jaew.  t  /c/em.  p.  7, 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY  215 

It  is  an  old  story  in  South  Africa.  The  savage  cannot 
dissociate  peace  from  weakness.  When  Lobengula  saw 
the  white  men  quietly  going  about  their  business,  and 
scrupulously  avoiding  any  aggressive  action  against  himself 
and  his  people,  he  drew  his  own  conclusions,  and,  under 
the  influence  of  these  conclusions,  he  became  himself 
emboldened  and  aggressive.  And  then,  in  Mr  Rhodes' 
words,*  "  We  either  had  to  have  that  war,  or  leave  the 
country.  I  do  not  blame  the  Matabele,"  he  added,  "  their 
system  was  a  military  system ;  they  once  a  year  raided 
the  surrounding  people,  and  such  a  system  was  impossible 
for  our  development." 

In  the  course  of  this  annual  raid  upon  the  Mashonas 
a  Matabele  impi,  "about  300  strong,"  and  itself  "a 
detachment  of  a  much  larger  body,"  entered  Victoria  on 
the  1 8th  July  1893. 

"  As  the  lives  of  the  settlers  were  in  danger,  Dr  Jameson 
gave  the  Matabele  ample  notice  to  leave  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  township,  and  on  their  refusing  to  do  so  and  con- 
tinuing their  raids,  he  ordered  the  mounted  police,  about 
thirty-eight  in  number  (under  the  late  Captain  Lendy, 
R.A.),  to  eject  them.  The  Matabele  fired  on  the  police, 
but  they  were  driven  out  and  pursued  for  some  miles, 
about  thirty  of  them  being  killed.  It  was  hoped  that 
this  would  be  a  sufficient  lesson  for  them,  but  such  was 
not  the  case.  Messages  were  immediately  sent  to 
Lobengula,  and  every  effort  was  made  to  obtain  a  peaceful 
solution  of  the  difficulty ;  but  Lobengula  despatched  a 
defiant  message  in  answer  to  one  also  sent  by  Sir  Henry 
Loch,  Her  Majesty's  High  Commissioner,  refusing  to  treat 
until  the  Company  had  delivered  up  to  him  the  Mashona 
men,  women  and  children  who  had  taken  refuge  in 
Victoria."  That  is  the  official  account  of  the  origin  of 
the  Matabele  War  contained  in  the  Company's  Report,  f 

*  Company's  Report,         -    p.  6. 
t  B.  p.  17. 


2i6  SOUTH  AFRICA 

The  actual  events  of  the  war  are  too  recent  to  require 
narration  in  detail.  When  once  it  became  evident  that 
a  contest  was  inevitable,  both  Mr  Rhodes  at  Capetown 
and  Dr  Jameson  at  Fort  Salisbury  acted  with  prescience 
and  promptitude.  Dr  Jameson  organised  and  equipped 
the  scattered  settlers,  who  volunteered  almost  to  a  man, 
and  concentrated  his  available  forces,  both  European  and 
native,  at  Fort  Salisbury,  Victoria,  and  Tuli.  Mr  Rhodes 
placed  ;;^5  0,000  to  the  credit  of  the  Company,  and  in- 
formed the  High  Commissioner  that  the  Company  would 
need  no  assistance  from  the  Imperial  Government.  At 
the  same  time  he  sent  up  horses  from  the  Transvaal,  and 
forwarded  supplies  to  Palachwe,  Macloutsie,  and  Fort 
Salisbury. 

The  columns  despatched  from  Salisbury  and  Victoria 
for  the  capture  of  Buluwayo  numbered  1227  men,  and 
of  these  672  were  Europeans.*  They  effected  a  junction 
at  Indaima's  Mount,  a  point  sixty  miles  equi-distant  from 
Forts  Charter  and  Victoria,  on  the  i6th  of  October,  that 
is  to  say,  about  a  fortnight  after  Dr  Jameson  had  been 
authorised  by  the  High  Commissioner  "  to  take  all  steps 
he  considered  necessary  to  provide  for  the  safety  of  the 
lives  and  property  of  the  settlers  under  his  administra- 
tion." The  force  was  commanded  by  Major  P.  W.  Forbes, 
but  both  the  administrator,  Dr  Jameson,  and  the  Com- 
pany's senior  military  officer,  Major  Sir  John  Willoughby, 
accompanied  the  columns.  From  this  point  they  advanced 
along  the  plateau,  where  the  country  was  comparatively 
open,  in  a  south-westerly  direction  upon  Buluwayo.  On 
the  24th  and  25th  of  October  they  were  attacked  by  5000 
Matabele  on  the  Shangani  River,  and  on  the  ist  of 
November,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  Imbembezi,  they 
were  again  confronted  by  a  force  of  7000  Matabele  which 
included  Lobengula's  finest  regiments.  In  both  cases  the 
Company's  force  fought  in  laager,  and  thus  protected, 
♦  P.  i8. 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY     217 

they  repulsed  the  Matabele  rush  with  heavy  losses.  On 
the  4th  of  November  Buluwayo  was  occupied.  A  month 
later,  Major  Allan  Wilson  and  thirty-five  others,  forming 
part  of  a  patrol  300  strong  despatched  to  secure  the 
fugitive  Lobengula,  were  surrounded  and  cut  off  on  the 
Shangani  River,  The  story  of  their  death,  told  sub- 
sequently by  the  Matabele,  has  added  another,  but  not 
a  new  page  to  England's  book  of  memories.  By  the  22  nd 
of  December  the  columns  had  been  disbanded,  and  the 
country  was  then  thrown  open  to  the  volunteers  for 
prospecting  and  settlement. 

In  these  operations  the  Mashonaland  force  lost  80 
killed,  of  whom  49  were  Europeans ;  and  45  wounded, 
of  whom  1 2  were  Europeans.  The  Southern  force, 
which  had  advanced  simultaneously  upon  Buluwayo  from 
Tati,  and  which  consisted  of  the  Bechuanaland  Border 
Police,  under  Major  Gould-Adams,  together  with  the 
Tuli  column,  lost,  out  of  a  total  of  445  Europeans,  4 
men  killed  and  10  wounded.* 

The  Matabele  War  expenditure  appears  in  the  Company's 
accounts  as  p^i 1 3,488,  2s.  iid. 

At  such  cost  and  by  such  swift  methods  was  the 
conquest  of  Matabeleland  accomplished. 

But  the  Matabele  War  was  an  episode — unfortunately 
not  the  only  episode — in  the  progress  of  operations  which 
are  essentially  commercial  and  pacific  in  their  intention. 

The  first  section  of  the  Bechuanaland  Railway,  or 
Main  Trunk  Line  of  Africa,  extending  from  Kimberley 
to  Vryburg,  was  opened  on  the  3rd  of  December  1890: 
and  the  second  section,  from  Vryburg  to  Mafeking,  on 
the  3rd  of  October  1894.  And,  since  the  beginning  of 
the  present  year  (1896),  nearly  180  miles  of  railway  has 
been  laid  northward  from  Mafeking.  Palapye,  a  distance 
of  300  miles  in  the  direction  of  Buluwayo,  will  be  reached 
early  in  1897,  and  Buluwayo  by  the  end  of  the  year. 
*  Pp.  24- 26. 


2i8  SOUTH  AFRICA 

The  East  Coast,  or  Beira  Railway,  was  carried  from 
Fontesvilla,  a  place  45  miles  up  the  Pungwe  River,  to 
the  75th  mile-stone  on  the  19th  of  October  1893,  and 
then  forward  to  the  present  terminus,  Chemoio,  a  distance 
of  118  miles  inland.  The  section  (about  55  miles)  to 
the  Portuguese  boundary  will  be  completed  by  the  end 
of  1896  ;  and  the  line  will  then  be  carried  forward  without 
delay  to  Umtali  and  Salisbury. 

The  telegraph  has  advanced  further  and  more  rapidly 
than  the  railway.  It  reached  Fort  Victoria  in  December 
1 89 1,  and  Fort  SaUsbury,  a  distance  of  819  miles  from 
Mafeking,  on  the  17th  of  February  1892. 

From  this  point  it  is  proposed  to  carry  the  line  forward 
to  Wady  Haifa,  and  thus  establish  direct  telegraphic  com- 
munication between  Cairo  and  Capetown.  At  the  present 
it  has  reached  Zomba  in  the  Nyasaland  Protectorate. 
The  break  between  Tete  on  the  Portuguese  frontier  and 
Salisbury  will,  if  the  conditions  of  labour  are  favourable, 
be  completed  by  the  end  of  1896.  It  will  then  advance 
northwards  to  Fort  Johnston,  to  Katonga,  at  the  head  of 
Lake  Nyasa,  and  to  Abercorn ;  and,  unless  unforeseen 
difficulties  occur,  will  reach  Lake  Tanganyika  in  Septem- 
ber 1897. 

This  project  is  a  favourite  scheme  with  Mr  Rhodes. 
"  If  this  telegraph  is  made,"  he  said,*  "  there  will  be  an 
end  to  the  slave  trade,  and  it  will  also  give  us  the  keys 
to  the  Continent.  I  repeat  that  I  have  no  doubt  about 
the  success  of  the  project,  which  is  a  much  easier  under- 
taking than  amalgamating  the  Kimberley  diamond  mines, 
or  governing  the  Cape  Colony." 

Meanwhile  the  internal  development  of  Mashonaland 
has  not  been  neglected.  Roads  have  been  constructed, 
telegraphic  and  postal  communication  established,  public 
buildings  erected  in  the  towns,  and  the  machinery  of 
administration  has  been  completed.  Buluwayo,  the 
*  Second  Annual  Meeting,  p    12  (November  19th,  1892). 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY     219 

youngest  of  the  four  or  five  towns  with  any  considerable 
European  population,  has  far  outgrown  the  rest.  In  less 
than  a  year,  that  is  to  say,  in  September  1894,  this  place 
was  converted  from  the  home  of  a  savage  tribe  into  a 
town  of  2000  inhabitants,  housed  to  a  large  extent  in 
brick  buildings,  and  reading  one  or  other  of  the  two 
weekly  newspapers  already  issued  in  type.  While  outside 
the  town  as  many  more  were  engaged  in  prospecting  on 
the  various  gold  fields.*  With  the  growth  of  Buluwayo 
the  success  of  the  Chartered  Company's  enterprise,  as 
a  colonising  experiment,  may  be  said  to  be  assured. 

At  a  recent  meeting  of  the  Company,!  Mr  Rhodes 
spoke  definitely  on  this  point.  "  I  have  been  through 
the  country,  and  from  an  agricultural  point  of  view  I 
know  it  is  a  place  where  white  people  are  going  to  settle. 
...  I  would  as  soon  live  there  as  in  any  part  of  South 
Africa." 

Looking  at  Mashonaland  from  this  point  of  view,  as 
a  new  field  for  British  emigration,  an  important  considera- 
tion arises.  What  effect  will  the  commercial  basis  upon 
which  this  country  has  been  developed  have  upon  the 
settlers  ?  In  other  words,  how  are  the  shareholders  of  the 
Company  to  get  a  return  for  their  capital  without  unduly 
burdening  the  inhabitants  ? 

The  method  in  which  this  is  to  be  done  constitutes 
what  Mr  Rhodes  calls  his  "patent."  In  the  same  speech 
he  says  : — 

"  I  have  once  said  before  that  out  of  licences  and  the 
usual  sources  of  revenue  for  a  government  you  cannot 
expect  to  pay  dividends.  The  people  would  get  annoyed 
if  you  did;  they  do  not  like  to  see  licences  spent  in 
dividends — those  are  assets  which  are  to  pay  for  any 
public  works  and  for  good  government.     We  must,  there- 

•  AM 

*  —  p.  23. 

+  P.  9  (January  i8th,  1895). 


2  20  SOUTH  AFRICA 

fore,  look  to  our  minerals  to  give  us  a  return  on  our 
capital,  which,  you  must  remember,  is  ;^2, 000,000."  * 

In  the  earlier  speech  to  which  he  here  refers,  he 
explains  how  the  idea  occurred  to  him,  and  how  the 
method  will  work.     In  that  speech  he  said  : — + 

"  My  experience  of  the  past  is  that,  just  as  qua  Govern- 
ment so  qua  a  Company — we  cannot  expect  to  do  more  than 
balance  revenue  and  expenditure  from  land,  customs,  and 
assisting  in  other  matters  connected  with  developing  the 
general  natural  resources  of  the  country.  Therefore, 
when  we  created  the  Charter,  we  had  to  consider  by 
what  means  a  return  could  be  given  to  the  shareholders, 
and  I  remember  thinking  out  the  various  ways  of  making 
a  return  to  those  who  had  risked  their  capital  in  the 
undertaking.  It  has  always  struck  me  that,  if  it  were 
possible  for  the  Government  of  a  country  to  share  in  the 
discovery  of  the  minerals,  a  very  fair  return  would  accrue. 
For  instance,  I  have  been  a  miner  at  Kimberley,  on  the 
discovery  of  the  diamond  fields,  and  I  was  allowed  to 
mark  out  one  claim.  It  has  always  struck  me  afterwards, 
when  I  had  become  engaged  in  the  politics  of  the  country, 
that  if  I  had  been  allowed  to  mark  out  five  claims,  no 
one  would  have  been  hurt  if  I  had  pegged  out  two  and 
a  half  for  myself  and  two  and  a  half  for  the  Government. 
The  same  thought  had  occurred  to  me  when  I  went  up 
to  Witwatersrand  and  saw  that  marvellous  gold  field, 
where  the  terms  were  that  they  could  each  mark  out  one 
claim.  It  had  occurred  to  me  that,  supposing  the  law 
had  been  that  each  of  them  could  mark  out  ten  claims — 
five  for  themselves  and  five  for  the  Government — it  would 
not  hurt  the  prospectors,  and  it  would  have  meant  wealth 
to  the  Government  of  the  country.  The  only  objection 
to  the  idea  was  that  it  was  a  perfectly  new  one.  At  any 
rate,  we  thought  we  would  try  it  in  Mashonaland,  and  it 

•  Since  increased. 

t  Second  Annual  Meeting,  p.  9  (November  1892). 


THE  CHARTERED  COMPANY     221 

was  the  law  of  the  country  that  50  per  cent,  of  the  vendor 
scrip  went  to  the  Charter." 

The  success,  therefore,  of  the  Chartered  Company  as 
a  commercial  undertaking  depends  upon  the  discovery 
of  payable  gold  deposits. 

The  general  prospects  of  gold  mining  in  Matabeleland, 
Mashonaland,  and  Manicaland  have  been  ascertained 
through  the  report  of  Mr  J.  H.  Hammond,  the  consulting 
Engineer  to  the  Gold  Fields  of  South  Africa  Company. 
From  this  report,*  dated  November  5th,  1894,  it  appears 
that  (i)  the  ore  deposits  are  "true  fissure-veins";  (2) 
that  veins  of  this  class  are  universally  noted  for  their 
permanency,"  but  "  permanency "  does  not  "  necessarily 
imply  the  occurrence  of  pay-shoots  of  commercial  value  " ; 
(3)  on  the  other  hand,  "  it  would  be  an  anomaly  in  the 
history  of  gold-mining  if,  upon  the  hundreds  of  miles  of 
mineralised  veins,  valuable  ore  shoots  should  not  be 
developed  as  the  result  of  future  work." 

Up  to  the  time  of  the  native  insurrection,  gold  mining 
was  in  progress  round  Buluwayo  in  Matabeleland ;  and  in 
Mashonaland  in  the  districts  of  Salisbury,  Mazoe,  Umtali, 
Lo  Magunda,  Umfuli,  and  Victoria.  As  regards  results, 
the  Gold-fields  of  Mashonaland  Company  showed  an  out- 
put (for  three  months  only)  in  1894  of  385  ozs.,  and  up  to 
July  1895,  of  1943  ozs.  The  Mashonaland  Central  Com- 
pany also  obtained  a  crushing  of  560  ozs.  Mining  as  well 
as  farming  has  been  brought  to  a  standstill  by  the  insurrec- 
tion, but  after  the  railways  have  been  completed,  and  both 
food  and  mining  plant  can  be  brought  up  at  reasonable 
cost,  industrial  enterprize  will  be  renewed. 

This,  then,  is  the  method  by  which  Mr  Rhodes  intends, 
in  his  own  phrase,  to  "  combine  the  commercial  with  the 
imaginative,"  to  pay  dividends,  and  extend  the  empire. 

Let  me  close  this  account  of  the  operations  of  the 
Chartered    Company   by   Mr    F.    C.    Selous's    description 

*  B.  p.  72. 


2  22  SOUTH  AFRICA 

of  the  state  of  affairs  which  he  found  at  Buluwayo,  on  his 
return  to  Rhodesia  in  the  autumn  of  1895. 

"  In  short,  at  this  time — the  autumn  of  1895 — everything 
was  apparently  conleiir  de  rose  in  Matabeleland.  Properties, 
whether  farm  lands,  building  sites  in  town,  or  mining  claims, 
went  up  to  very  high  values,  whilst  almost  every  one  believed 
that  within  a  year  Buluwayo  would  contain  a  population  of 
5000  souls,  and  that  the  town  itself  would  receive  a  plenti- 
ful supply  of  water  from  the  reservoirs  already  in  course 
of  construction,  and  be  lighted  by  electric  light.  In  fact, 
all  was  mirth  and  joy  and  hope  in  the  future  ;  for  what 
was  to  hinder  the  ever  increasing  prosperity  of  the  country? 
Much  good  work  had  already  been  done  on  many  of  the 
reefs,  and  on  the  whole  the  promise  was  distinctly  good. 
Then,  again,  after  a  probation  of  eighteen  months,  the 
country  had  been  pronounced  favourably  upon  by  Dutch 
and  Colonial  farmers,  especially  for  cattle-ranching,  whilst 
many  predicted  that  much  of  the  high  veld  would  carry 
sheep."  * 

This  prospect  of  security  and  assured  prosperity  was 
rudely  destroyed  by  two  events  which  have  now  to  be 
related — the  Revolt  of  the  Uitlanders  in  the  Transvaal, 
and  its  sequel,  the  insurrection  of  the  natives  in  Rhodesia. 

*  Sunshine  and  Storm  in  Rhodesia,  F.  C,  Selous,  p.  5. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 
The  Revolt  of  the  Uitlanders. 

WHEN  the  Boer  Government  was  restored  in  1881, 
there  were  two  classes  of  inhabitants  in  the  Trans- 
vaal, whose  interests  the  Imperial  Government  desired  to 
protect  —  the  natives  and  the  British  residents.  The 
general  restrictions  imposed  upon  the  internal  freedom 
of  the  Boers  with  this  object  in  view  are  now  embodied 
in  the  Convention  of  London,  which,  in  1884,  replaced 
the  Pretoria  Convention  of  1881.  With  the  natives  we 
are  not  now  concerned.  British  residents  who  had  entered 
the  country  during  the  period  of  annexation  (1877-1881), 
were  exempted  from  "  all  compulsory  military  service  what- 
soever." It  was  also  sought  to  secure  equal  civil  and 
political  rights  for  any  Englishmen  who  might  subsequently 
settle  in  the  country.  By  Article  XIV,  (replacing  Article 
XVI,  of  the  original  Convention) : — 

"All  persons,  other  than  natives,  conforming  themselves 
to  the  laws  of  the  South  African  Republic  (a)  will  have 
full  liberty,  with  their  families,  to  enter,  travel,  or  reside  in 
any  part  of  the  South  African  Republic ;  (d)  they  will  be 
entitled  to  hire  or  possess  houses,  shops,  and  premises ; 
(c)  they  may  carry  on  their  commerce  either  in  person  or 
by  any  agents  whom  they  may  think  fat  to  employ ;  (d)  they 
will  not  be  subject  in  respect  of  their  persons  or  property, 
or  in  respect  of  their  commerce  or  industry,  to  any  taxes, 
whether  general  or  local,  other  than  those  which  are  or 
may  be  imposed  upon  citizens  of  the  said  Republic." 

It  must  be  concluded  that  this  article  is  not  legally 


2  24  SOUTH  AFRICA 

sufficient  for  the  purpose  in  question ;  but  a  reference  to 
the  proceedings  of  the  Commissioners  by  whom  the  form 
of  the  Boer  Government  was  fixed  will  conclusively  show 
what  was  their  intention.  In  these  proceedings  the  follow- 
ing colloquy  is  duly  recorded  in  the  blue-book  as  taking 
place  between  Mr  Kruger  and  the  Commissioners. 

"  Sir  H.  Robinson :  Before  annexation,  had  British 
subjects  complete  freedom  of  trade  throughout?  Were 
they  on  the  same  footing  as  citizens  of  the  Transvaal? 

Mr  Kruger :  They  were  on  the  same  footing  as  the 
burghers.  There  was  not  the  slightest  difference  in  accor- 
dance with  the  Sand  River  Convention. 

Sir  Hercules  Robinson :  I  presume  you  will  not  object 
to  that  continuing  ? 

Mr  Kruger :  No ;  there  will  be  equal  protection  for 
anybody. 

Sir  Evelyn  Wood  :  And  equal  privileges  ? 

Mr  Kruger :  We  make  no  difference  as  far  as  burgher 
rights  are  concerned.  There  may,  perhaps,  be  some  slight 
difference  in  the  case  of  a  young  person  who  has  just  come 
into  the  country." 

Moreover,  when  Swaziland  became  part  of  the  territory 
of  the  South  African  Republic,  under  the  Swazi  Conven- 
tion of  1894,  the  Imperial  Government,  warned  by  the 
inadequacy  of  the  Pretoria  Convention,  introduced  definite 
stipulations,  which  secure  for  the  Uitlander  in  that  territory 
the  very  rights  which  are  denied  to  his  brother  Uitlander 
in  the  Transvaal. 

It  was  also  sought  to  secure  equal  privileges  for  British 
trade  by  Article  XIII.,  which  prevents  the  imposition  of 
discriminating  duties  against  British  imports,  or  the  main- 
tenance or  imposition  of  any  prohibition  "on  the  importa- 
tion into  the  South  African  Republic  of  any  article  coming 
from  any  part  of  Her  Majesty's  dominions,  which  shall  not 
equally  extend  to  the  like  article  coming  from  any  other 
place  or  country."     And  when  the  Vaal  Drifts  were  closed 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     225 

in  October  1895,  the  action  of  the  Republican  Government 
was  successfully  contested  by  the  Imperial  Government  on 
the  ground  that  it  was  a  breach  of  the  Convention. 

It  is  due,  therefore,  to  a  mere  technical  error  that  the 
Government  of  the  South  African  Republic  have  been  able 
to  pursue  the  course  of  repressive  legislation  which  has 
reduced  the  Uitlanders  to  their  present  position.  The 
details  of  their  grievances  are  fully  set  out  in  the  manifesto 
of  the  National  Union,  issued  on  the  26th  December  1895, 
and  in  Mr  Chamberlain's  despatch  of  the  4th  February 
1896.*  The  general  attitude  of  the  Transvaal  Executive 
is  expressed  in  the  phrase  which  President  Kruger  is 
reported  to  have  used :  "  When  the  floods  rise  we  build 
the  banks  higher." 

The  successive  alterations  in  the  franchise  laws  which 
have  been  conceived  in  this  spirit  are  as  follows. 

In  1 88 1  the  British  immigrant  could  obtain  the  franchise 
after  two  years'  residence.  In  1882  the  period  of  residence 
was  raised  to  five  years.  In  1890  a  Second  Chamber  was 
created,  to  which  the  Uitlander  had  access  under  certain 
restrictions.  But  this  second  chamber  was  invested  with 
none  of  the  powers  of  an  effective  legislative  body.  It  can 
merely  recommend  legislation  on  certain  matters  to  the 
Raad.  At  the  same  time  as  this  specious  concession  was 
made  the  period  of  residence  was  again  raised.  Ten  years 
was  now  required  as  a  qualification  for  the  right  to  elect 
members  of  the  Raad,  and  fifteen  as  a  qualification  for  the 
membership  of  that  body.  In  1893  a  law  was  passed  by 
the  Raad,  enacting  that  a  Uitlander  could  only  obtain  the 
franchise  after  ten  years'  qualification  for  the  membership 
of  the  Second  Chamber.  As  he  could  not  secure  this 
qualification  until  he  was  thirty  years  of  age,  it  followed 
that  no  Uitlander  under  the  age  of  forty  could  obtain  the 
franchise.  Moreover,  although  he  must  have  submitted  to 
the  liability  for  compulsory  drill,  and  compulsory  service  in 

*  C— 7933- 
p 


2  26  SOUTH  AFRICA 

the  field  if  required,  he  would  still  be  prevented  from  exer- 
cising the  right  of  voting  for  the  offices  of  President  and 
Commandant-General. 

From  this  exclusion  of  the  Uitlanders  from  any  share  in 
the  Government  of  the  Republic  has  arisen  the  present 
strange  and  anomalous  situation.  The  British  inhabitants, 
forming  an  actual  majority  (note  30)  of  the  people  of  the 
Transvaal  lie  at  the  mercy  of  an  ignorant  and  notoriously 
hostile  rural  community  represented  by  a  bare  majority  of  the 
twenty-four  members  of  the  Raad.  The  children  of  this  popu- 
lation, which  pays,  according  to  Mr  Chamberlain,  eighteen- 
or  nineteen-twentieths  of  the  total  revenue  of  the  state,  are 
growing  up  in  ignorance  because  the  Government  refuse  to 
recognise  any  other  medium  of  instruction  than  the  Dutch 
language.  Public  notices  are  communicated  to  this  British 
population  in  Dutch ;  the  legal  records  of  commercial 
transactions,  to  be  valid,  must  be  written  in  Dutch  ;  in  the 
courts  of  law  Englishmen  must  plead  in  Dutch,  and  give 
evidence  in  Dutch  through  an  interpreter.  A  great  indus- 
try— the  gold  industry — with  which  the  industrial  prosperity 
of  the  Transvaal  is  bound  up,  and  on  which  the  commer- 
cial development  of  South  Africa  depends,  is  fettered  by  a 
fiscal  system  which  offends  against  economics  as  flagrantly 
as  it  does  against  justice,  and  by  administrative  methods 
which  are  both  ineffective  and  immoral. 

But  President  Kruger  and  the  Raad  have  had  certain 
direct  dealings  with  the  National  Union  and  the  people  of 
Johannesburg  which  must  be  recorded. 

In  1894  a  petition  for  reforms,  signed  by  13,000  men, 
was  addressed  to  the  Raad.  It  was  received  with  "  con- 
temptuous laughter  and  jeers."  In  1895  ^  similar  petition, 
signed  by  38,000  men,  was  rejected.  On  this  occasion 
one  of  the  members  expressed  the  opinion  that  if  the  Uit- 
landers wanted  the  franchise  they  would  have  to  fight  for  it* 

*  Mr  Otto.  He  said  : — "  Come  on  if  you  want  to  fight.  I  say, 
come  on  and  have  it  out — the  sooner  the  better.     I  am  prepared  to 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     227 

Moreover,  it  must  be  added  that  in  1892  President  Kruger 
gave  a  written  pledge  to  introduce  a  measure  which  should 
extend  the  franchise  to  "  trustworthy  persons."  The  fulfil- 
ment of  this  pledge  consisted  in  the  restrictive  legislation 
of  1893,  under  which,  in  Mr  Chamberlain's  words,  the 
Uitlander  "  can  now  never  hope  to  attain  these  rights  in 
full,  and  their  partial  enjoyment  is  only  conceded  after  a 
term  of  probation  so  prolonged  as  to  amount,  for  most 
men,  to  a  practical  denial  of  the  claim.  If  he  omits  to 
obtain  any  kind  of  naturalization  for  himself,  his  children, 
though  born  on  the  soil,  remain  aliens  like  himself."  Well 
may  Mr  Chamberlain  add  that  "  The  feelings  of  intense 
irritation  which  have  been  aroused"  by  the  original  griev- 
ances "  have  not  been  lessened  by  the  manner  in  which 
remonstrances  have  been  met."  * 

In  order  to  complete  this  survey  of  the  events  previous 
to  the  Revolt  an  account  of  Lord  Loch's  action,  in  June 
1894,  must  be  included. 

At  this  date  Lord  Loch  visited  Pretoria  to  discuss 
matters  in  connection  with  the  Swazi  Convention  and 
the  exemption  of  British  subjects  from  the  operation  of  the 
Commando  laws.  It  appears  from  his  statement  in  the 
House  of  Lords  t  that  on  this  occasion  he  was  requested 
by  the  residents  of  the  Randt  to  visit  Johannesburg.  On 
the  26th  June,  however,  President  Kruger  addressed  a 
letter  to  him,  in  which  he  begged  him  not  to  take  this 
step.  In  the  reply,  dated  June  27  th,  in  which  Lord  Loch 
acceded  to  this  request,  he  pointed  out  that  the  40,000 
British  subjects  in  the  Transvaal  appeared  to  him  to  have 
"  some  very  real  and  substantial  grievances."  At  the  same 
time,  he  received  a  deputation  of  Randt  residents,  and 
from  these   twelve  gentlemen  he  learnt  that  a  resort  to 

fight  you,  and  I  think  every  burgher  of  the  South  African  Republic  is 
with  me.  I  say  to-day  that  the  people  who  signed  the  memorials  are 
rebels." 

*  Despatch  of  Feb.  4th.  t  May  ist,  1896. 


2  28  SOUTH  AFRICA 

force  was  in  contemplation.  In  reply  to  this  information, 
Lord  Loch  pointed  out  the  folly  and  danger  of  such  a 
course.  Subsequently,  upon  his  return  to  Cape  Town, 
and  in  view  of  the  continued  agitation  at  Johannesburg, 
he  felt  it  to  be  his  duty  as  Her  Majesty's  High  Commis- 
sioner to  take  certain  steps,  which  included  the  "  assembly 
at  certain  points  of  British  Imperial  Bechuanaland  Police." 
He  continued  : — 

"  My  intention  was  that,  if  disturbances  had  arisen  in 
Johannesburg — disturbances  resulting  from  the  adminis- 
tration extended  by  the  Republic  towards  the  Uitlanders 
in  that  city — it  would  have  been  my  duty,  I  considered,  to 
have  informed  President  Kruger  that  he  would  be  held  respon- 
sible for  the  safety  of  the  lives  and  property  of  British  subjects. 
I  should  have  further  considered  it  to  be  my  duty  to  have 
informed  President  Kruger  that  if  he  had  failed  in  provid- 
ing the  necessary  protection  of  the  lives  and  property  of 
British  subjects  in  Johannesburg,  I  should  have  felt  myself 
at  liberty  to  have  taken  such  steps  as  I  might  have  felt 
expedient  to  have  given  that  protection  which  he  would 
have  failed  to  give."  * 

It  will  be  observed  that  there  is  a  strange  similarity 
between  the  situation  in  June  1894  and  that  which  arose 
eighteen  months  later,  in  December  1895.  If  it  be  the 
case,  as  I  venture  to  contend,  that  any  estimate  of  the 
degree  of  guilt,  legal  and  moral,  which  attaches  respectively 
to  Dr  Jameson,  to  Mr  Rhodes,  and  to  the  Transvaal 
Reformers,  must  largely  depend  upon  the  attitude  of  the 
High  Commissioner  and  of  the  Imperial  Government, 
up  to  the  crisis,  and  at  the  time  when  that  crisis  arose, 
the  fact  that  the  situation  was  no  new  one — that,  in  fact, 
the  drama  of  1895-6  had  been  fully  rehearsed  in  1894 — is 
one  of  singular  significance.  Incredible  as  it  seems,  the 
fact  is  there.  Her  Majesty's  High  Commissioner  at  Cape- 
town and  Her  Majesty's  Ministers  in  Downing  Street,  were 
•   Times  report. 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     229 

familiar  with  the  condition  of  the  Transvaal ;  they  knew 
that  the  Uitlanders  had  long  been  suffering  from  "  very 
real  and  substantial  grievances ; "  were  being  goaded  to 
desperation  by  the  insolent  trifling  or  contemptuous  in- 
difference of  President  Kruger  and  the  Volksraad ;  knew 
that  Johannesburg  was  arming  in  its  amateur  fashion ; 
knew,  in  a  word,  that  all  the  materials  for  a  conflagration 
had  been  collected ;  that  all  that  was  needed  was  to  apply 
the  match  and  kindle  the  flame — and  yet  they  sat  still  and 
did  nothing,  until  they  were  galvanized  into  action  by  the 
news  that  Dr  Jameson  had  crossed  the  Transvaal  border. 

In  the  face  of  Lord  Loch's  action  in  1894,  it  is  hard 
to  regard  the  explanation  of  this  supineness  which  Mr 
Chamberlain  gives  as  wholly  sufficient ;  or  to  acquit  either 
Lord  Rosmead  or  the  Imperial  Government  of  all  respon- 
sibility for  the  disasters  which  arose  out  of  Dr  Jameson's 
gallant  but  misjudged  interference.  According  to  this 
explanation  the  Imperial  Government  refrained  from  inter- 
ference because,  in  the  first  place,  "  the  Uitlanders  and  their 
organs  had  always  deprecated  the  introduction  into  the 
dispute  of  what  is  called  in  South  Africa  the  '  Imperial 
factor ; '  "  and,  in  the  second,  because  the  "  *  rumours '  of 
violent  measures  '  were  continually  falsified  by  the  event.' "  * 
It  is,  of  course,  necessary  to  remember  that  there  was 
nothing  in  the  actual  assembling  of  the  police  forces  to 
arouse  the  suspicion  of  the  Colonial  Office,  or  of  the  High 
Commissioner.  The  arrangements  which  had  lately  been 
made  for  the  transfer  of  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate 
(with  the  exception  of  Khama's  Country)  to  the  Chartered 
Company,  and  the  consequent  inspection  and  retention  of  a 
section  of  the  Bechuanaland  Border  Police  by  Dr  Jameson, 
with  other  circumstances,  sufficiently  accounted  for  what 
took  place  at  Pitsani  Pitlogo  and  Mafeking  up  to  the 
period  when  the  expedition  set  out 

It  is  not  easy  to  relate  the  actual  circumstances  of  the 
*  Despatch,  February  4th. 


2  30  SOUTH  AFRICA 

revolt  within  the  compass  required  lor  these  pages.  But 
the  attempt  must  be  made. 

On  the  2oth  November  1895,  Mr  Lionel  Phillips,  the 
Chairman  of  the  Chamber  of  Mines  at  Johannesburg, 
delivered  a  speech  which  was  marked  by  a  note  of  menace. 
"  Nothing,"  he  said,  "  was  further  from  his  heart  than  a 
desire  to  see  an  upheaval,  which  would  be  disastrous  from 
every  point  of  view,  and  which  would  probably  end  in  the 
most  horrible  of  all  possible  endings — in  bloodshed."  At 
this  time  an  understanding  had  been  entered  into  between 
the  reform  leaders  and  Dr  Jameson,  that  the  latter  should, 
under  certain  circumstances,  throw  a  force  of  the  Chartered 
Company's  police  into  Johannesburg.  On  the  26th 
December,  the  Manifesto  of  the  Transvaal  National  Union 
was  issued  at  Johannesburg ;  it  was  signed  by  Mr  Charles 
Leonard,  the  Chairman.  It  was  published  in  the  Johannes- 
burg Star  in  full,  and  a  summary  appeared  in  the  London 
Times  of  December  28th.  It  commenced  by  announcing 
that  the  meeting  which  was  to  have  taken  place  on  the 
27  th  December  was  postponed  until  the  6th  January 
next.  It  ended  with  the  following  summary  of  the  objects 
of  the  Union  : — 

"  We  want : 

1.  The  establishment  of  this  Republic  as  a  true 
Republic. 

2.  A  Grondwet  or  constitution  which  shall  be  framed 
by  competent  persons  selected  by  representatives  of  the 
whole  people  and  framed  on  lines  laid  down  by  them,  a 
constitution  which  shall  be  safeguarded  against  hasty 
alteration. 

3.  An  equitable  franchise  law  and  fair  representation. 

4.  Equality  of  the  Dutch  and  English  language. 

5.  Responsibility  to  the  Legislature  of  the  Heads  of 
the  great  departments. 

6.  Removal  of  religious  disabilities. 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     231 

7.  Independence  of  the  Courts  of  Justice  with  adequate 
and  secured  remuneration  of  the  Judges. 

8.  Liberal  and  comprehensive  education. 

9.  An  efficient   Civil  Service,  with  adequate  provision 
for  pay  and  pension. 

10.   Free  Trade  in  South  African  products. 

This  is  what  we  want. 

There  now  remains  the  question  which  is  to  be  put  be- 
fore you  at  the  Meeting  of  the  6th  of  January,  viz.:  How 
shall  we  get  it  ?  To  this  question  I  shall  expect  from  you 
an  answer — in  plain  terms  according  to  your  deliberate 
judgment."  * 

On  Sunday,  the  29th  December,  two  bodies  of  mounted 
police  marched  respectively  from  Pitsani  Pitlogo,  and 
Mafeking,  and  effected  a  junction  at  Malmani,  a  point 
within  the  Transvaal  border,  early  on  the  following  morning. 
This  force,  which  consisted  of  between  500  and  600 
mounted  troopers,  was  commanded  by  Dr  Jameson,  the 
British  South  Africa  Company's  administrator,  and  Major 
Sir  John  Willoughby,  the  company's  senior  military  officer. 
Before  leaving  camp  on  Sunday  afternoon  the  men  were 
informed  that  Dr  Jameson  had  received  a  letter  from  the 
principal  residents  in  Johannesburg  inviting  him  to  pro- 
ceed to  that  place  for  the  purpose  of  protecting  the  lives  and 
property  of  the  British  residents.  On  Wednesday,  the  ist 
January,  1896,  after  disregarding  two  messages  from  the 
High  Commissioner,  Dr  Jameson  reached  Krugersdorp,  a 
point  some  ten  miles  west  of  Johannesburg,  and  came  into 
conflict  with  the  Boers.  On  the  following  day  (January 
2nd),  after  an  engagement  of  some  hours'  duration,  in 
which  twenty-five  men  were  killed  on  the  side  of  the 
Chartered  Company,  the  column  surrendered  at  Doorn- 
kop,  and  were  subsequently  taken  to  Pretoria.  There 
was  a  dispute  as  to  the  terms  under  which  the  surrender 
was  effected.  The  Boers  maintained  that  the  surrender 
*  As  it  appeared  in  the  Johannesburg  Star. 


232  SOUTH  AFRICA 

was  unconditional,  alleging  that  Mr  Cronj6,  the  officer  who 
conducted  the  negociations,  had  no  authority  to  offer  any 
other  terms  than  those  of  an  unconditional  surrender.  Sir 
John  Willoughby  was  able,  however,  to  produce  the  written 
communications  which  passed  between  him  and  this  officer ; 
and  on  this,  and  other  evidence  which  was  submitted  for 
their  consideration,  the  War  Office  decided  "  that  whatever 
position  Mr  Cronje  may  hold  in  the  Transvaal  Army,  he 
decidedly,  on  the  occasion  in  question,  acted  as  an  officer 
in  authority,  and  guaranteed  the  lives  of  Dr  Jameson  and 
all  his  men  if  they  at  once  laid  down  their  arms  ;  "  and  fur- 
ther, that  "  no  subsequent  discussion  amongst  the  Trans- 
vaal officers  could  retract  the  terms  of  this  surrender."  * 

Meanwhile  "  the  Uitlander  Tortoise  had  put  out  its  head." 
On  the  30th  December  the  Transvaal  police  and  officials 
were  withdrawn  from  Johannesburg,  and  on  the  following 
day  a  Provincial  Government  was  proclaimed.  But  no 
force  advanced  from  Johannesburg  to  meet  the  Chartered 
Company's  column,  although  Dr  Jameson  was  so  near  that 
it  was  actually  reported  in  London  that  he  had  entered  the 
town.  And  it  was  to  this  circumstance  that  the  failure  of 
the  expedition  as  a  military  enterprise  was  due.  After  the 
surrender  of  the  column  Johannesburg  lay  at  the  mercy  of 
a  burgher  force  variously  estimated  at  from  8000  to  12,000 
men. 

Here  two  questious  arise  :  First,  what  was  the  cause  of 
the  hitch  ?  and,  second,  what  was  the  position  of  Mr  Cecil 
Rhodes  ? 

Neither  of  these  questions  can  be  fully  answered  until 
the  South  Africa  Committee  has  held  its  enquiry  ;  but 
sufficient  facts  and  evidence  have  already  been  disclosed  to 
enable  us  to  form  an  approximately  correct  conception  of 
what  really  took  place. 

It  appears  that  it  was  arranged  that  on  a  given  day — the 
28th  December — the  Reform  Committee  should  declare  a 
•  C— 8063. 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UFrLANDERS     233 

Provisional  Government,  Dr  Jameson  should  enter  the 
Transvaal,  and  Mr  Rhodes  should  start  from  Capetown  for 
Johannesburg.  Up  to  Monday,  the  23rd,  the  three  parties 
were  in  harmony,  for  on  that  day  Dr  Rutherfoord  Harris, 
the  Capetown  secretary  of  the  Chartered  Company,  tele- 
graphed* to  Dr  Jameson — 

"  Company  (z>.,  insurrection)  will  be  floated  next  Saturday 
at  12  o'clock  at  night.  They  are  very  anxious  you  must  not 
start  before  9  o'clock.     Secure  telegraph  office  silence." 

But  on  the  26th  a  difference  of  opinion  had  arisen.  On 
that  day  Dr  Jameson  hears  from  Col.  Rhodes  at  Johannes- 
burg that  "  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  postpone  flotation," 
and  receives  the  same  telegram  through  Dr  Harris  at  Cape- 
town, with  the  addition  of  the  words,  "You  must  not  move 
until  you  hear  from  us  again.  Too  awful.  Very  sorry." 
And  a  further  telegram  from  his  brother  (Mr  S.  A.  Jameson) 
at  Johannesburg  tells  him  why  the  "flotation  "  is  postponed. 

"  It  is  absolutely  necessary  to  postpone  flotation  through  un- 
foreseen circumstances  here  altogether  unexpected,  and  until  we 
have  C.  J.  Rhodes's  absolute  pledge  the  authority  of  Imperial 
Government  will  not  be  insisted  on.  Charles  Leonard  left  last 
night  to  interview  C.  J.  Rhodes.  We  will  endeavour  to  meet 
your  wishes  as  regards  December,  but  you  must  not  move  until 
you  have  received  instructions." 

So  far  as  Mr  Rhodes  knew  the  insurrection  was  now  in- 
definitely postponed.  He  distrusted,  too,  either  the  energy 
or  the  good  faith  of  the  Reform  leaders.  On  the  following 
day,  Friday,  the  27  th,  Dr  Harris  telegraphs  to  Dr  Jameson 
— "  You  must  wait  patiently  and  I  will  do  my  very  utmost, 
but  am  beginning  to  see  our  shareholders  in  Matabeleland 
concession  were  very  different  to  those  in  Secheland 
matter."  And  again,  in  the  course  of  further  communica- 
tions— communications  in  which  Dr   Jameson's  objection 

*  These  telegrams  were  in  cypher ;  but  it  will  be  remembered  that 
the  key  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Transvaal  Government — being  found 
in  the  baggage  captured  at  Krugersdorp. 


234  SOUTH  AFRICA 

that  the  Chartered  Company  was  already  compromised  by 
the  concentration  of  the  police,  was  answered  by  the  state- 
ment that  the  taking  over  of  the  B.  B.  Police  was  in  itself 
a  sufficient  explanation  of  the  circumstances  in  question — 
Dr  Harris  telegraphs  on  the  28th  : 

"  You  are  quite  right  with  regard  to  cause  of  delay  of  flotation, 
but  Charles  Leonard  and  Hamilton  of  S/ar  inform  us  that  move- 
ments not  popular  in  Johannesburg.  When  you  have  seen  Cap- 
tain Maurice  Heany  let  us  know  by  wire  what  he  says.  We 
cannot  have  fiasco." 

And  later  in  the  same  day  came  a  more  decided  warning 

"  Lionel  Phillips  telegraphs  A.  Beit  the  following  : — 
'It  is  absolutely  necessary  to  delay  flotation.  If  foreign 
subscribers  (Chartered  Company)  insist  on  floating  without 
delay,  anticipate  complete  failure.' " 

And  on  this  same  day,  Saturday  the  28th,  as  we  know 
from  the  Blue-book,*  Mr  Rhodes  had  an  interview  with 
Sir  Graham  Bower,  the  Imperial  Secretary,  at  Capetown, 
in  the  course  of  which  he  gave  an  accurate  account  of  the 
situation.  The  Johannesburg  insurrection,  he  said,  "  had 
fizzled  out  as  a  damp  squib.  The  capitalists  financing  the 
movement  had  made  the  hoisting  of  the  British  flag  a  sine 
qua  non.  This  the  National  Union  rejected,  and  issued  a 
manifesto  declaring  for  a  republic.  The  division  had  led 
to  the  complete  collapse  of  the  movement,  and  it  was 
thought  that  the  leaders  of  the  National  Union  would  now 
probably  make  the  best  terms  they  could  with  President 
Kruger." 

Mr  Rhodes's  position,  then,  was  this.  He  was  pre- 
pared to  assist  in  the  insurrection,  provided  that  the  Trans- 
vaal was  thereby  converted  into  a  British  possession.  He 
did  actually  assist  the  conspirators  to  the  extent  of  placing 
the  resources  of  the  Chartered  Company  and  of  the  De 
Beers  Consolidated  Mines  at  their  disposal.    But  he  stopped 

•  C— 8063. 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     235 

short  at  the  point  of  allowing  Ur  Jameson  to  cross  the 
border  for  the  purpose  of  supporting  an  insurrectionary 
movement  which  aimed  solely  at  converting  a  Boer  Re- 
public into  a  Uitlander  Republic.  But  in  spite  of  the  risk 
of  failure  threatened  by  the  breach  between  the  Reform 
leaders  and  Mr  Rhodes,  and  in  spite  of  the  latter's  orders 
not  to  move  under  existing  circumstances,  Dr  Jameson 
resolved  to  enter  the  Transvaal  on  his  own  responsibility, 
and,  if  possible,  to  win  the  game  off  his  own  bat.  More 
than  that,  carried  away  by  the  confidence  of  the  high 
spirited  young  officers  who  served  under  him,  he  entertained 
the  conception  of  marching  directly  on  Pretoria  if  the 
Johannesburg  auxiliaries  proved  efificient,  and  met  him  as 
had  been  arranged.  Under  this  impulse  he  resolved  to 
himself  initiate  the  insurrection,  and  force  the  hands  of  the 
Reform  Committee,  by  an  appeal  to  the  spirit  of  the  general 
mass  of  British  residents.  Accordingly  he  telegraphed  on 
Dec.  2Sth,  to  Mr  Wolff,  the  Chartered  Company's  repre- 
sentative at  Johannesburg,  "  Meet  me  as  arranged  before 
you  leave  by  Tuesday  night,  which  will  enable  us  to  decide 
which  is  best  destination."  And  on  the  following  day,  the 
29th,  he  telegraphed  to  his  brother,  Mr.  S,  A.  Jameson; 
"  Dr  Wolff  will  understand  the  distant  cutting  {i.e.,  that  he 
had  cut  the  wires  which  communicated  with  Mr  Rhodes 
and  Capetown).  British  Bechuanaland  police  have  already 
gone  forward.  Guarantee  {i.e.,  of  expenses  of  the  force) 
given." 

Mr  Rhodes  received  the  information  that  Dr  Jameson 
had  crossed  the  border  on  Sunday  the  29th.  He  com- 
municated the  intelligence  to  Sir  Graham  Bower  on  the 
same  day.  In  a  telegram  despatched  to  Mr  Chamberlain 
on  the  31st,  Lord  Rosmead  says,*  that  he  has  "seen  C.  J. 
Rhodes,  who  assured  him  Jameson  acted  without  his 
authority  ...  he  at  once  endeavoured  to  stop  him,  but 
found  wires  cut."     According  to  Mr  Schreiner's  evidence, 

*  C-7933- 


236  SOUTH  AFRICA 

given  before  the  Jameson  Select  Committee  at  the  Cape,* 
Mr  Rhodes  made  use  of  the  following  words  in  speaking 
to  him  of  the  event : — 

"  Yes,  yes,  it  is  true.  Old  Jameson  has  upset  my  apple- 
cart. He  has  ridden  in.  Go  and  write  your  resignation 
[Mr  S.  was  Attorney-General  in  the  Government].  I  did 
not  tell  you  yesterday,  because  I  thought  I  had  stopped 
him.  Poor  old  Jameson  !  Twenty  years  friends,  and  now 
he  goes  in  and  ruins  me.  I  cannot  hinder  him,  and  I 
cannot  destroy  him." 

As  regards  the  legality  of  Mr  Rhodes's  action,  I  may 
remark,  without  endeavouring  to  anticipate  the  result  of  the 
enquiries  of  the  South  Africa  Committee,t  that  the  con- 
clusion of  the  Cape  Committee  on  this  question  does  not 
appear  to  discriminate  on  a  point  of  the  highest  importance. 
This  committee  found  that : 

"...  Mr  Rhodes  did  not  direct  or  approve  of  Dr 
Jameson's  entering  the  territory  of  the  South  African  Re- 
public at  the  precise  time  when  he  did  so,  but  the  com- 
mittee cannot  find  that  that  fact  relieves  Mr  Rhodes  from  re- 
sponsibility for  the  unfortunate  occurrence  which  took  place. 
Even  if  Dr  Jameson  be  primarily  responsible  for  the  last 
fatal  step,  Mr  Rhodes  cannot  escape  the  responsibility  of  a 
movement  which  had  been  arranged,  with  his  concurrence, 
to  take  place  at  the  precise  time  that  it  did,  if  circumstances 
had  been  favourable  at  Johannesburg.^'' 

Surely  this  proviso  is  in  matters  of  this  kind  all-im- 
portant. The  offence  which  is  punishable  under  the 
Foreign  Enlistment  Act  is  that  of  "  fitting  out  any  .  .  . 
expedition  to  proceed  against  the  dominions  of  any 
Friendly  State."  If  a  Provisional  Government,  claiming 
authority  over  the  Republic,  had  been  established  and 
maintained  at  Johannesburg,  and  this  Government  had 
eventually  been  recognised  as  the  successor  of  the  Repub- 

*  Reported  to  ihe  Cape  Assembly  on  July  17th,  1896. 
t  OrdcrcJ  July  30th,  1896. 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     237 

lican  Government  by  foreign  powers,  how  could  Dr  Jame- 
son's expedition  have  been  shown  to  have  committed  the 
offence  of  proceeding  against  a  friendly  State  ?  Moreover, 
in  the  case  of  this  insurrection  the  words  which  Lord 
Palmerston  used  in  defending  his  Government  against  the 
charge  of  allowing  Englishmen  to  enlist  in  the  revolutionary 
forces  commanded  by  Garibaldi,  have  a  special  significance  : 

"  It  is  the  fault  and  fortune  of  governments  when  their 
subjects  have  revolted  that  they  appeal  to  all  friendly 
powers  for  assistance  to  remove  the  men  who  are  the 
authors  and  instigators  of  the  revolution.  These  govern- 
ments forget  that  they  are  the  real  and  original  authors  and 
instigators  of  these  revolutionary  movements  ;  and  if  their 
prayers  were  granted,  the  first,  most  effectual,  and  only 
necessary  step  would  be  their  own  removal ^ 

To  return  to  the  narrative  of  events.  As  I  have 
already  mentioned  a  summary  of  the  manifesto  of  the 
National  Union  was  published  in  the  Times  of  Decem- 
ber 28th,  1895  ;  and  before  that  day  the  Cologtie 
Gazette  was  reported  to  have  accused  Mr  Rhodes 
of  "inspiring  and  fomenting  the  discontent  of  the 
Uitlanders  for  the  purpose  of  incorporating  the  South 
African  Republic  with  Rhodesia."  Possibly  in  consequence 
of  these  reports,  Mr  Chamberlain  telegraphed*  at  5.30  p.m. 
on  Sunday,  the  29th,  to  Lord  Rosmead,  that  it  had  been 
suggested  that  "  some  one  in  the  service  of  the  Company 
was  advancing  from  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate  with 
police."  At  the  same  time  he  desired  him  to  remind  Mr 
Rhodes  that  such  action  was  contrary  to  certain  articles  in 
the  Charter.  Early  in  the  afternoon  of  the  next  day  the 
reassuring  statement  made  by  Mr  Rhodes  t  that  the  '*  move- 
ment at  Johannesburg  had  collapsed,"  reached  him.  In 
reply  to  this,  Mr  Chamberlain  telegraphed  to  Lord  Rosmead, 
"  Are  you  sure  Jameson  has  not  moved  in  consequence  of 
collapse."  He  had  scarcely  sent  off  this  pertinent  enquiry 
*  C— 7933.  t  See  p.  234. 


238  SOUTH  AFRICA 

before  he  received  a  definite  confirmation  of  his  fears,  with 
the  information  that  Lord  Rosmead  had  forthwith  tele- 
graphed to  Mr  Newton,  the  Resident  Commissioner  at 
Mafeking,  to  send  a  special  mounted  messenger  in  pursuit.* 
This  was  the  first  of  a  series  of  disquieting  telegrams, 
including  an  intimation  forwarded  from  the  British  Resident, 
Sir  Jacobus  de  Wet,  that  "  President  S.  A.  R.  has  asked 
for  the  intervention  of  Germany  and  France."  Late  that 
Monday  night  Mr  Chamberlain  desired  Lord  Rosmead  to 
"  leave  no  stone  unturned  to  prevent  mischief.''  And  on 
the  following  afternoon  he  telegraphed  directly  to  President 
Kruger,  "  Can  I  co-operate  with  you  further  .  .  ,  bring 
about  .  .  .  peaceful  arrangement  which  is  essential  .  .  . 
and  which  would  be  promoted  by  the  concessions  which  I 
am  assured  you  are  ready  to  make  ?  "  It  is  interesting  to 
note  that  Mr  Chamberlain  at  once  addressed  himself  to  the 
question  of  the  Uitlanders'  grievances.  If  there  had  been 
supineness  at  the  Colonial  Office  before  the  crisis,  activity 
and  alertness  was  the  order  of  the  day  now.  Mr  Cham- 
berlain personally  devoted  himself  to  the  direction  of  affairs 
with  unremitting  energy.  Every  step  which  could  reassure 
the  Republican  Government,  and  allay  the  excitement  of 
race  animosity  in  South  Africa  was  taken.  The  Chartered 
Company  was  ordered  "  to  telegraph  at  once  to  their 
representative  in  Matabeleland  to  stop  the  intended  move- 
ment" of  Rhodesia  Horse  southwards.  Official  notices 
were  published  through  the  South  African  press  that  the 
Imperial  Government,  the  High  Commissioner,  and  Mr 
Cecil  Rhodes,  all  alike,  repudiated  Dr  Jameson's  action. 
And,  at  the  suggestion  of  Mr  Hofmeyr,  Lord  Rosmead  and 
the  Governor  of  Natal  issued  proclamations  forbidding  the 
British  colonists  to  take  part  in  the  hostilities.  The  British 
subjects  in  the  South  African  Republic  were  by  the  Queen's 

*  Sir  Graham  Bower  had  been  unable  to  f^ive  Lord  Rosmead  the 
information  (which  Mr  Rliodes  had  jjivcn  him  late  on  Sunday  night) 
until  Monday  morning. 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     239 

command  enjoined  to  abstain  from  "  aiding  or  countenanc- 
ing Dr  Jameson  or  his  force."  On  the  evening  of  Thurs- 
day, the  2nd  of  January,  Lord  Rosmead,  under  directions 
from  Mr  Chamberlain,  proceeded  from  Capetown  to  the 
scene  of  action,  to  act  as  a  "  peace-maker  "  between  the 
insurgents  and  the  Republican  Government.  He  reached 
Pretoria  on  the  evening  of  Saturday  the  4th,  and  remained 
there  until  the  1 4th.  As  the  result  of  his  mediation,  he  was 
able  to  inform  Mr  Chamberlain  on  the  7  th  of  January  that 
the  Reform  Committee  had  sent  a  message  to  the  effect  that 
they  had  resolved  "  to  comply  with  the  demands  of  the 
South  African  Republic  to  lay  down  their  arms ;  the  people 
of  Johannesburg  placing  themselves  and  their  interest  un- 
reservedly in  my  hands  in  the  fullest  confidence  that  I 
will  see  justice  done  to  them."  *  And  on  the  same  day 
he  reported  President  Kruger's  determination  to  hand  over 
Dr  Jameson  and  his  men  to  the  Imperial  authorities  on  the 

*  With  this  statement  of  the  understanding  upon  which  the  Reform 
Committee  surrendered  Johannesburg,  the  following  notices  which  were 
printed  in  large  type  in  the  Standard  and  Diggers^  News  (a  copy  of 
which  is  before  me)  must  be  read  :  "  We  understand  on  the  authority 
of  Sir  Sidney  Shippard  that,  if  a  single  shot  is  fired  against  the 
burghers,  Dr  Jameson's  life  will  be  seriously  endangered."  "The 
High  Commissioner  earnestly  requests  the  people  of  Johannesburg  to 
lay  down  their  arms."  And,  although  it  is  quite  true  that  from  a 
military  point  of  view  Johannesburg  lay  at  the  mercy  of  the  Boer  levies 
it  must  be  remembered  that  to  storm  or  starve  Johannesburg  would 
inevitably  have  led  to  a  contest  between  the  Dutch  and  British  colonists 
in  South  Africa,  in  which  the  Imperial  forces  must  have  intervened. 
It  is  possible  that  the  burghers  who,  as  it  was,  were  restrained  with 
difficulty  by  President  Kruger  from  resorting  to  extreme  measures  in 
dealing  with  the  Jameson  force,  would  not  have  recoiled  before  this 
prospect.  It  is  possible,  too,  that  in  addition  to  the  immediate  assistance 
which  the  Free  State  had  already  offered,  the  Republican  Government 
would  have  relied  to  some  extent  upon  the  assistance  of  Germany  and 
France.  But  the  temper  of  England  being  what  it  was — the  temper 
in  which  the  German  Emperor's  congratulatory  message  to  President 
Kruger  was  answered  by  the  immediate  equipment  of  a  Special  Service 
squadron — the  gravity  of  the  situation,  which  the  reduction  of  Johannes- 
burg by  force  of  arms  would  have  created,  must  have  been  realised  by 
the  leaders  of  the  Dutch  nationality  both  within  and  without  the 
Transvaal, 


240  SOUTH  AFRICA 

borders  of  Natal.  On  the  loth,  he  was  able  to  add  that 
President  Kruger  had  issued  his  "forgive  and  forget" 
proclamation,  and  had  promised  to  submit  a  law  for  the 
establishment  of  a  municipality  in  Johannesburg  to  the 
Raad  during  the  next  session. 

Nevertheless  it  is  plain  from  the  language  of  Mr 
Chamberlain's  despatches  that  he  was  not  at  this  time 
satisfied  with  the  course  which  events  had  taken.  On  the 
4th  of  January  he  instructed  Lord  Rosmead  to  remind  the 
Republican  Government  "  that  the  danger  from  which  they 
had  just  escaped  was  real,  and  one  which,  if  the  causes 
which  led  up  to  it  were  not  removed,  might  recur,  although 
in  a  different  form."  And  on  the  15th  of  the  same  month 
he  exhorted  Lord  Rosmead  to  "  use  plain  language."  The 
people  of  Johannesburg,  he  said,  had  surrendered  "  in  the 
belief  that  reasonable  concessions  would  be  arranged  by 
your  intervention ;  and  until  these  are  granted,  or  are 
definitely  promised  to  you  by  the  President,  the  root  cause 
of  the  recent  troubles  will  remain."  To  this  Lord  Rosmead 
replied  somewhat  curtly :  "  The  question  of  concession  to 
Uitlanders  has  never  been  discussed  between  us."  I  quote 
these  expressions  of  Mr  Chamberlain  because  the  opinion 
which  they  embody  provides  us  with  a  test  by  means  of 
which  we  can  estimate  both  the  extent  to  which  Mr 
Chamberlain  has  modified  his  original  policy  of  securing  an 
immediate  redress  of  the  "  admitted  grievances  "  of  the  Uit- 
landers, and  the  value  of  the  measures  (note  2  9)  which  have 
been  passed  by  the  Raad  up  to  the  present  in  fulfilment  of  the 
promises  made  in  this  proclamation  of  the  i  oth  of  January. 

It  is  not  my  intention  to  pursue  the  narrative  beyond 
this  point.  The  negociations  which  subsequently  took 
place  between  the  Colonial  Office  and  the  Republican 
Executive  relative  to  Mr  Chamberlain's  invitation  extended 
to  President  Kruger  in  his  despatch  of  Feb.  4th,  1896, 
are  to  be  found  in  the  Blue-books.  The  account  of  Mr 
Cecil  Rhodes's  resignation  of  the  premiership  of  the  Cape 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     241 

Colony  and  subsequently  of  his  directorship  of  the  Chartered 
Cornpany  will  be  found,  together  with  the  changes  already 
introduced  in  the  administration  of  Rhodesia,  in  the  follow- 
ing chapter. 

There  are,  however,  two  events  which  arose  so  directly 
out  of  the  Johannesburg  revolt  that  a  brief  reference  to 
them  is  necessary.  I  refer,  of  course,  to  the  trial  of  the  sixty- 
three  members  of  the  Reform  Committee  at  Pretoria,  and 
to  that  of  Dr  Jameson  and  his  officers  in  London. 

Sentence  was  pronounced  on  the  Johannesburg  Reformers 
by  Judge  Gregorowski  (of  the  Free  State)  on  April  28th, 
1896.  The  four  leaders,  Messrs  Lionel  Phillips,  George 
Farrar,  J.  H.  Hammond,  and  Colonel  Rhodes,  pleaded 
guilty  to  the  charge  of  having  negociated  with  Dr  Jameson  ; 
and  the  fifty-nine  remaining  members  of  the  Committee  to 
having  assisted  in  furnishing  the  people  of  Johannesburg 
with  arms.  The  leaders  were  sentenced  to  death,  and 
the  others  to  various  terms  of  imprisonment  and  to  fines. 
The  death  sentences  were  afterwards  commuted  by  the 
Executive,  under  Article  IH.  of  the  Grondivet,  to  fifteen 
years  imprisonment,  and  finally  to  fines  of  ;^25,ooo,  and 
an  undertaking  (on  pain  of  banishment)  not  to  take  part  for 
the  future  in  any  political  movement  in  the  Republic. 
Ultimately  all  the  reformers, — except  one  who  died  in  gaol 
at  Pretoria,  and  two  who  refused  to  submit  to  any  penalty 
on  the  ground  that  the  Imperial  Government  were  pledged 
to  hold  them  safe  under  the  terms  of  the  Johannesburg 
surrender — were  released  on  payment  of  fines  varying  in 
amount  with  the  degree  of  culpability. 

Dr  Jameson,  C.B.,  Major  Sir  John  Willoughby,  Captain 
the  Hon.  Robert  White,  Colonel  Grey,  Major  the  Hon. 
H.  F.  White,  and  Major  the  Hon.  C.  J.  Coventry,  were 
convicted  under  the  Foreign  Enlistment  Act,  1870,  on  July 
29th,  1896,  after  trial  at  bar  before  a  special  jury,  and  a 
court  composed  of  the  Chief  Justice  (Lord  Russell  of  Kill- 
owen),  Baron  Pollock,  and  Mr  Justice  Hawkins. 

Q 


242  SOUTH  AFRICA 

The  case  of  Regina  v.  Jameson  and  others  has  an  im- 
portance altogether  independent  of  the  forensic  interest 
which  it  has  created.  The  story  of  the  events  which  cul- 
minated in  those  seven  dreary  days  in  the  Chief  Justice's 
Court  will  live  in  the  pages  of  history.  With  the  blame 
which  henceforth  attaches  to  the  names  of  Dr  Leander 
Jameson,  Sir  John  Willoughby,  and  the  rest,  there  will  be 
mingled  a  feeling  of  compassionate  regard  such  as  has 
rarely,  if  ever,  been  felt  towards  any  convicted  persons. 
And  this  feeling  is  natural :  it  is  explained  by  the  con- 
sideration that  the  crime  of  which  these  men  have  been 
found  guilty  is  a  conventional  one.  Conventional,  because 
there  is  no  Englishman  who  believes  that  either  Dr  Jame- 
son, or  any  one  of  his  associates,  is  one  whit  less  worthy 
of  regard,  one  whit  less  capable  of  honourably  performing 
any  of  the  duties  or  responsibilities  of  human  life,  now^ 
than  he  was  before  he  had  been  found  guilty  of  fitting  out 
an  expedition  against  a  friendly  State — to  wit,  the  South 
African  Republic. 

I  do  not  say  that  the  sentence  is  not  in  accordance  with 
the  law.  It  is  this  very  fact,  the  irreproachable  legality 
of  the  entire  proceedings  in  this  trial,  which  shows  that 
the  crime  is  itself  conventional.  The  prisoners  were 
convicted  by  what  is  probably  the  most  perfect  judicial 
procedure  in  the  world.  A  strong  Court — no  single  judge, 
but  the  Chief  Justice  of  England  supported  on  his  right 
by  the  soundest  lawyer  on  the  Bench,  and  on  his  left  by 
the  most  experienced  of  our  criminal  judges — the  most 
able  counsel  of  the  English  Bar,  a  jury  alike  intelligent 
and  honest,  afford  the  elements  out  of  which  must  come  a 
true  verdict  and  a  just  sentence.  The  defence  essayed  to 
show  that  the  violation  of  the  Transvaal  territory  was  by 
an  improvised  act,  an  act  done  under  a  sudden  and  generous 
impulse.  The  evidence  which  was  brought  forward  by  the 
Crown,  letter  after  letter,  telegram  after  telegram,  showed 
that  carefully  concealed  measures  had  been  taken,  and  a 


THE  REVOLT  OF  THE  UITLANDERS     243 

deliberate  and  preconcerted  plan  eventually  carried  into 
effect.  Even  the  approximate  date  of  the  expedition,  the 
26th  of  December,  had  been  fixed  more  than  a  month 
before  the  two  columns  simultaneously  marched  out  from 
Mafeking  and  Pitsani  Pitlogo. 

With  such  evidence  before  them,  it  was  impossible  for 
the  jury  to  find  a  verdict  other  than  "guilty";  nor  could 
the  Court — this  strong  and  learned  Court — have  pro- 
nounced any  lighter  sentence.  It  would  be  unreasonable 
to  expect  that  the  verdict  of  history  could  ever  reverse 
the  verdict  of  this  consummate  tribunal. 

And  yet,  I  repeat,  there  is  no  Englishman  worthy  of 
the  name  who  thinks  the  worse  of  Dr  Jameson  and  his 
associates.  He  is  a  criminal  in  the  eye  of  the  law,  but  he 
is  no  criminal  in  the  judgment  of  the  nation.  We  have 
this  astonishing  fact  before  us.  The  verdict  is  universally 
admitted  to  be  true,  the  sentence  to  be  just,  and  yet  these 
facts  do  not  prevent  the  nation  from  feeling  the  fullest 
sympathy  with  these  men  against  whom  the  verdict  has 
been  recorded.  This  feeling  of  sympathy  is  something 
quite  different  from  the  natural  feeling  of  commiseration 
which  is  felt  by  all  persons  of  ordinary  benevolence  for 
one  who  is  visited  even  by  a  well-merited  punishment. 
The  feeling  of  sympathy  for  Dr  Jameson  is  so  genuine  and 
so  powerful  that  it  amounts  to  nothing  more  nor  less  than 
a  direct  refusal  to  believe  that  he  or  his  associates  are  in 
any  ordinary  sense  criminals,  although  they  have  been 
convicted  of  crime.  And  the  reason  is  not  far  to  seek. 
The  nation  cannot  dissociate  itself  from  the  crime  of  these 
men.  The  culpable  inactivity  of  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment in  South  Africa  led  directly  to  the  state  of  affairs  at 
Johannesburg  which  made  this  expedition  possible,  and 
which,  according  to  the  rider  appended  by  the  Jury  to  its 
verdict,  presented  great  provocation  to  the  accused.  The 
grievances  and  the  consequent  discontent  of  the  Uitlanders 
in  the  Transvaal  were  known  to  the  British  agent  at  Pretoria ; 


2  44  SOUTH  AFRICA 

they  were  known  to  Her  Majesty's  High  Commissioner  at 
Capetown;  they  were  known  to  Her  Majesty's  Secretary 
of  State  in  Downing  Street.  Two  years  ago,  Lord  Loch 
proposed  to  use  the  very  same  body  of  troops  for  this  very 
same  purpose — the  purpose  of  protecting  British  lives  and 
British  property  in  the  event  of  an  insurrection  of  the 
Uitlanders  in  the  Transvaal.  The  Chief  Justice,  in  the 
course  of  his  exhaustive  summing-up,  very  pertinently 
asked,  "  Why  was  not  that  letter  of  invitation  addressed  to 
the  High  Commissioner,  or  the  Secretary  of  State?"  But 
the  Chief  Justice  seemed  to  be  entirely  ignorant  of  the 
significant  answer  which  his  enquiry  invited.  Neither  of 
these  officials  were  addressed  because  the  British  people  in 
the  Transvaal  had  learnt  by  bitter  experience  the  utter 
futility  and  uselessness  of  making  any  appeal  directly  or 
indirectly  to  the  Imperial  Government.  The  condition  of 
the  British  subjects  in  the  Transvaal  before  Dr  Jameson's 
expedition  was  the  condition  which  is  expressed  in  those 
burning  words  of  Junius,  "  What  has  an  Englishman  now 
to  hope  for?  He  must  turn  from  King,  Lords,  and 
Commons,  and  look  up  to  God  and  himself  if  he  means  to 
be  free." 

For  the  incredible  supineness  of  the  Imperial  Govern- 
ment, which  left  the  fires  of  revolt  to  smoulder  at  Johannes- 
burg for  two  years,  the  British  nation  is  itself  responsible ; 
for  the  Government  is  its  agent  and  servant  Out  of  this 
supineness  arose  Dr  Jameson's  crime ;  and  the  British 
people  do  well  to  refuse  to  dissociate  themselves  from  the 
men  whom  they  have  themselves  made  criminals 


CHAPTER    XIV. 
The  Insurrection  in  Rhodesia. 

IT  will  be  remembered  that  in  a  previous  chapter,* 
mention  was  made  of  the  partial  amalgamation  of  the 
Dutch  and  English  parties  in  the  Cape  Colony  under  the 
leadership  of  Mr  Rhodes.  The  alliance  between  him  and 
Mr  Hofmeyr,  the  leader  of  the  Africander  party,  was  un- 
doubtedly one  of  the  most  hopeful  signs  in  the  political 
situation  as  it  appeared  before  the  end  of  the  year  1895  ; 
for  it  strengthened  the  prospect  of  a  general  union  of  the 
Republics  and  Colonies  to  be  achieved  through  the  unique 
position  of  Mr  Rhodes  as  managing  director  of  the  Char- 
tered Company  and  Prime  Minister  of  the  Cape  Colony. 
But  when  Dr  Jameson  had  "ridden  in" — to  use  the  ex- 
pression with  which  Mr  Rhodes  is  credited  in  his  interview 
with  Mr  Hofmeyr — "  the  crockery  was  broken  "  ;  and  on 
the  6th  of  January  1896  Mr  Rhodes  resigned  the  premier- 
ship, and  Sir  J.  Gordon  Sprigg  was  called  upon  to  form  a 
new  ministry. 

After  this  event  Mr  Rhodes  returned  to  England,  saw 
Mr  Chamberlain,  and  forthwith  returned,  by  way  of  the 
Suez  Canal  and  Beira,  to  Rhodesia.  Here,  in  the  country 
which  bore  his  name,  he  announced  his  intention  of  residing 
for  the  future,  and  of  henceforth  devoting  his  energies  to 
the  development  of  its  resources. 

While  the  negociations  for  the  visit  of  President  Kriiger 
were  in  course  of  progress,  the  Imperial  Government  at 
once  endeavoured  to  satisfy  the  Transvaal  Executive  that 
they  were  prepared  to  offer  "  a  complete  guarantee  "  against 

*  X.  p.  179. 


2  46  SOUTH  AFRICA 

any  attack  upon  the  independence  of  the  South  African 
RepubHc  "  either  from  any  part  of  Her  Majesty's  dominions 
or  from  the  territory  of  any  foreign  power."  For  this 
purpose  certain  changes  were  without  delay  introduced  into 
the  administration  of  Rhodesia.  The  entire  forces,  poUce, 
volunteers,  and  native  levies,  were  placed  under  the  com- 
mand of  an  Imperial  Officer,  who  was  styled  "  Commandant- 
General  of  the  local  forces  in  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate 
and  in  the  territories  south  of  the  Zambesi  under  the  direct 
administration  of  the  British  South  Africa  Company,  and 
Deputy-Commissioner  of  the  last  mentioned  territories  "  ; 
and  Col.  Sir  Richard  Martin  was  appointed  to  this  office. 
Changes  in  the  personnel  of  the  Company  also  followed 
as  a  result  of  the  Jameson  incursion.  The  duties  of  the 
Company's  Administrator,  now  purely  civil,  were  under- 
taken by  Lord  Grey.  Dr  Rutherfoord  Harris  was  removed 
from  the  Capetown  Secretaryship  ;  and  towards  the  end  of 
June,  the  resignations  of  Mr  Rhodes  and  Mr  Beit  from  the 
Board  of  Directors  were  accepted,  and  at  the  same  time 
Mr  Rochfort  Macguire  retired  as  being  Mr  Rhodes' 
representative  on  the  Board.  Mr  Rhodes's  resignation, 
and  the  subsequent  cancellation  of  his  power  of  attorney 
to  represent  the  Directors  in  South  Africa,  followed  in 
awkward  proximity  to  a  strongly  worded  despatch,  signed 
by  Dr  Leyds,  the  State  Secretary  of  the  Transvaal  Executive, 
in  which  the  Imperial  Government  were  called  upon  to 
prosecute  Mr  Rhodes,  Mr  Beit,  and  Dr  Rutherfoord  Harris. 
But  before  Sir  Richard  Martin  had  received  his  final 
instructions,  an  event  had  happened  which  compelled 
the  Imperial  Government  to  make  further  arrangements. 
This  event — the  insurrection  of  the  natives  in  Rhodesia — 
was  the  disastrous  sequel  of  Dr  Jameson's  expedition.  It 
was  necessary  now  to  supplement  the  local  by  Imperial 
troops.  And  it  was  thought  advisable  to  place  a  general 
officer  in  active  service.  Sir  Frederick  Carrington,  over  the 
combined  forces,  with  supreme  authority  until  the  power  of 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      247 

the  rebels  should  be  declared  to  have  been  broken  by  the 
High  Commissioner. 

Two  main  causes  are  assigned  for  the  irritation  and  dis- 
content of  the  natives — the  cattle  question  and  the  abuses 
committed  by  the  native  police. 

The  former  of  these  causes  requires  some  explanation. 

After  the  war  with  Lobengula  the  proprietorship  of  the 
royal  cattle  passed  to  the  Company,  But  only  part  were 
taken  possession  of  by  the  Company's  officials  ;  the  re- 
mainder, 90,000  head  of  cattle,  were  branded  with  the 
Company's  mark  and  left  to  the  natives  to  pasture  and 
tend  as  before.  Then  the  Government  called  up  the 
cattle  as  they  required  from  time  to  time.  As  the  result 
of  this  course  of  procedure  the  natives  were  irritated  by 
what  seemed  to  them  to  be  a  continual  process  of  confis- 
cation. At  last,  in  view  of  their  discontent  and  on  the 
recommendation  of  Mr  Herbert  Taylor,  chief  Native  Com- 
missioner, the  Company  decided  to  take  two-fifths  of  the 
then  remaining  balance  of  70,000  head,  and  leave  the 
remaining  three-fifths  as  the  absolute  property  of  the 
natives.  Under  this  arrangement  the  indunas  were  sum- 
moned to  Buluwayo,  and  after  they  had  expressed  their 
satisfaction  at  the  proposal,  the  cattle  were  distributed.* 

Certain  causes,  not  under  the  control  of  the  Company's 
government,  also  contributed  to  render  the  natives  uneasy 
at  the  presence  of  the  white  man.  In  1890  there  was  a 
plague  of  locusts  ;  in  1894  and  1895  there  was  a  partial 
drought ;  and  immediately  before  the  outbreak  the  pre- 
valence of  the  rinderpest  or  cattle  plague  (note  31) 
necessitated  the  wholesale  destruction  of  cattle  in  the 
infected  districts  with  a  view  of  arresting  the  spread  of  the 
disease. 

But  there  is  good  ground  for  believing  that  this  irritation 
would  not  have  culminated  in  an  insurrection  had  it  not 

*  For  particulars  of  cattle  trouble  see  C — 8130.  (Report  of  Mata- 
beleland  Land  Commission  of  1894.) 


248  SOUTH  AFRICA 

been  for  the  disastrous  circumstance  that  the  Jameson 
expedition  had  practically  denuded  the  country  of  the  white 
police. 

The  narrative  which  Mr  F.  C.  Selous  tells  of  his  own 
experience  of  the  outbreak  in  its  earliest  stage  points 
significantly  to  this  conclusion.  The  murder  of  a  native 
policeman  on  the  night  of  Tuesday,  the  20th  of  March, 
was,  he  says,  the  first  overt  act  of  rebellion  on  the  part  of 
the  Matabele  against  the  government  of  the  British  South 
Africa  Company.  On  Tuesday,  the  24th  of  March,  on 
reaching  his  homestead,  Essexvale,  about  mid-day,  he 
found  that  some  natives  from  the  neighbouring  village  of 
Intuntini  had  been  over  to  borrow  some  axes.  The 
request  caused  no  surprise  to  Mrs  Selous,  as  they  were 
accustomed  to  render  such  services  to  their  Matabele 
neighbours.     He  continues  : — 

"  About  sundown  some  of  these  same  men  brought  the 
usual  evening's  milk,  and  my  wife  and  I  chatted  with  them 
for  some  time.  We  spoke  about  the  recent  murders  on 
the  Umzingwani,  and  the  conduct  of  Umzobo  and  Umfon- 
disi,  and  my  wife  asked  me  to  say  that  she  thought  they 
had  acted  very  foolishly,  as  the  white  men  would  punish 
them.  At  this  they  laughed,  and  one  of  them  said  signifi- 
cantly, '  How  can  the  white  men  punish  them  ?  Where  are 
the  white  police  ?     There  are  none  left  in  the  country.' "  * 

What  follows  is  equally  significant,  as  tending  to  refute 
the  allegation  that  the  white  settlers  in  general  ill-treated 
the  natives.  Without  denying  that  there  were  isolated  acts 
of  lawlessness — such  acts  as  are  found  in  every  community, 
old  or  young — he  holds  that  the  charge  is  otherwise  base- 
less. And  this  general  conclusion  (elsewhere  stated)  is 
supported  by  the  fact  that  he  finds  himself  unable  to 
attribute  the  escape  of  his  wife  and  himself  to  the  circum- 
stance that  they  had  lived  on  the  best  of  terms  with  the 
natives  round  the  homestead.  "  Why  no  attempt  was  made 
*  "  Sunshine  and  Storm  in  Rhodesia,"  p.  23. 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      249 

to  murder  us  on  that  Tuesday,"  he  says,  "will  always 
remain  a  mystery  to  me."  He  thinks  that  the  real  reason 
was,  that  the  natives  supposed  he  had  gone  from  home  to 
fetch  assistance.  That  their  disposition  was  by  no  means 
benevolent  was  shown  by  the  fact  that  they  went  off  that 
night  with  the  cattle  which  had  been  placed  under  their 
charge,  and  probably  assisted  in  the  murder  of  Messrs 
Foster,  Eagleson,  and  Anderson. 

But  it  remains  for  the  investigations  of  the  South  Africa 
Committee  to  sift  the  truth  of  these  allegations.  And  at 
this  point  it  will  be  convenient  to  set  out  in  full  the  order 
of  the  30th  July,  1896,  under  which  this  Committee  was 
appointed  by  the  House  of  Commons. 

"  That  a  Select  Committee  be  appointed  to  inquire  into 
the  origin  and  circumstances  of  the  incursion  into  the 
South  African  Republic  by  an  armed  force,  and  into  the 
administration  of  the  British  South  Africa  Company,  and 
to  report  thereon  ;  and,  further,  to  report  what  alterations 
are  desirable  in  the  government  of  the  territories  under  the 
control  of  the  Company." 

Meanwhile  a  brief  account  of  the  actual  circumstances 
of  the  rebellion  may  be  of  interest. 

As  already  stated,  March  20th  is  the  date  which  marks 
the  commencement  of  the  insurrection.  From  that  time 
onwards  the  settlers  in  the  scattered  homesteads  or  mining 
camps  were  exposed  to  the  murderous  attacks  of  the 
Matabele.  On  Tuesday,  the  24th,  news  of  the  murder 
of  Mr  Bentley,  the  native  Commissioner,  and  of  the  whites 
in  the  Insiza  and  Filabusi  districts,  reached  Mr  Duncan,  the 
Company's  administrator  at  Buluwayo.  In  order  to  realise 
the  extreme  gravity  of  the  danger  by  which  the  Rhodesian 
settlers  were  thus  suddenly  confronted,  and  the  consequent 
merit  of  the  efforts  made,  both  by  themselves  and  by  the 
Cape  and  Imperial  authorities  on  their  behalf,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  know  the  position  of  the  government  at  Buluwayo, 
and  the  meagre  character  of  the  resources  at  its  command. 


250  SOUTH  AFRICA 

At  this  time  affairs  were  in  a  transition  state.  The 
Chartered  Company  were  represented  by  the  acting-ad- 
ministrator, Judge  Vincent,  at  SaHsbury,  and  by  Mr 
Duncan,  at  Buluwayo.  Lord  Grey,  the  new  adminis- 
trator, was  on  his  way  to  take  up  his  duties ;  Sir  Richard 
Martin  had  not  left  England.  The  Imperial  Government 
was  represented  at  Buluwayo  by  Captain  Nicholson,  under 
whose  control  the  military  forces  of  the  Company  had  been 
placed  after  the  Jameson  incursion. 

Mr  Duncan  and  Captain  Nicholson  had  at  their  disposal 
a  few  mounted  police  under  Captain  Southey,  580  rifles, 
about  100  horses,  and  fortunately  a  good  supply  of  ammuni- 
tion. It  was  obvious  that  under  these  circumstances  the 
settlers  must  defend  themselves.  The  promptitude  with 
which  they  undertook  this  duty  is  shown  by  the  fact,  that 
within  a  few  hours  of  the  receipt  of  the  news  of  the  Insiza 
murders,  three  parties  of  mounted  men  set  off  to  relieve  and 
bring  in  the  whites  in  the  outlying  districts.  One  example 
will  suffice  as  evidence  of  the  work  achieved  by  these  patrols. 
On  Thursday  night,  Mr  Maurice  Gifford  relieved  Cumming's 
store,  and  thus  rescued  thirty-six  men  and  one  woman,  who 
were  in  laager.  The  relief  force  themselves  lost  one  man 
killed,  and  three  wounded. 

On  this  same  Thursday,  the  26th,  Buluwayo  went  into 
laager;  and  on  April  ist,  the  Buluwayo  Field  Force  was 
constituted,  and  in  this  force  practically  all  the  able-bodied 
males  enrolled  themselves.  On  April  the  5th,  a  count  was 
taken  of  the  population  of  Buluwayo  as  they  left  the  laager, 
in  the  morning.  It  appeared  that  there  were  1547  persons, 
of  whom  652  were  women  and  children,  and  915  men. 
On  the  same  day  a  parade  of  the  Buluwayo  Field  Force 
was  held.  There  were  500  men  on  parade  ;  and  this  force, 
together  with  the  270  men  who  were  outside  the  town, 
engaged  in  bringing  in  the  unprotected  settlers, — making  a 
total  of  less  than  800  men, — represented  the  whole  available 
force  with  which  the  Europeans  could  confront  the  rebel 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      251 

Matebele.  Of  this  force  400  men  were  required  to  garrison 
Buluwayo,  130  men  were  despatched  to  keep  open  the 
Mangwe  road — the  Une  of  communication  with  the  south 
— and  the  remainder,  less  than  300  men,  aided,  however, 
by  150  Cape  "boys,"  under  Mr  Colenbrander,  were  free 
for  offensive  operations. 

One  of  the  most  alarming  features  of  the  situation  was 
the  defection  of  the  armed  and  trained  Matabele  native 
police.  Of  these  about  one  half  joined  the  rebels  in  the 
course  of  the  insurrection ;  and  those  who  did  not  revolt 
could  not  be  trusted  to  remain  loyal.  On  March  the  28th, 
80  native  police  were  for  this  reason  disarmed  at  Buluwayo. 

Meanwhile  the  news  of  the  rebellion,  and  of  the  desperate 
position  of  the  handful  of  Europeans,  severed  by  600  miles 
of  road  from  the  nearest  railway-terminus,  had  been  tele- 
graphed to  the  High  Commissioner  at  Capetown,  and  to 
the  Colonial  Office  in  London. 

Lord  Rosmead  (Sir  Hercules  Robinson)  at  once  placed 
the  Imperial  stores  at  Mafeking  at  the  disposal  of  the 
Chartered  Company,  and  a  supply  of  500  rifles  and  ammuni- 
tion, forwarded  by  coach  under  an  armed  escort  from  this 
source,  reached  Buluwayo  on  April  the  ist.  On  the  2nd 
of  April,  Colonel  Plumer,  of  the  York  and  Lancaster 
Regiment,  with  a  staff  of  officers  from  the  garrison  at 
Capetown,  was  despatched  to  Mafeking  with  instructions 
to  raise  a  force  of  500  mounted  men — eventually  720  were 
equipped — to  relieve  Buluwayo.  This  force  was  recruited 
at  Kimberley  and  Johannesburg,  and  it  included  a  number 
of  Dr  Jameson's  troopers,  who  had  been  handed  over  by 
President  Kriiger  to  the  Imperial  Government,  and  had 
now  returned  from  England  to  South  Africa.  Colonel 
Plumer  acted  with  great  energy.  On  April  the  12  th,  the 
first  detachment  of  50  men  left  Mafeking;  on  May  the 
3rd,  the  entire  force  had  been  moved  up  to  Macloutsie ; 
and  on  the  15th,  Colonel  Plumer  and  Sir  Richard  Martin 
together  reached  Buluwayo. 


252  SOUTH  AFRICA 

At  the  same  time  preparations  were  being  made  at 
Salisbury  to  equip  a  relief  column  from  that  place.  It  was 
with  this  column  that  Mr  Rhodes  fought  his  way  through 
the  insurgents  to  the  centre  of  the  rebelUon,  eventually 
reaching  Buluwayo  on  the  30th  of  May. 

But  the  events  of  the  first  three  weeks,  indicating  as  they 
did  that  the  whole  Matabele  people  had  risen  in  revolt, 
caused  the  Imperial  Government  to  supplement  these 
irregular  and  volunteer  forces  by  drafts  from  the  Imperial 
troops  at  Capetown  and  Maritzburg,  and  to  place  the  com- 
bined forces,  local  and  Imperial,  under  the  command  of  a 
general  officer,  Sir  Frederick  Carrington.  In  the  second 
week  in  April,  Lord  Grey,  who  was  now  in  the  Cape 
Colony,  accepted  on  behalf  of  the  Chartered  Company  an 
ofiFer  of  the  Imperial  Government  to  send  300  men  of  the 
7th  Hussars  and  150  mounted  infantry  from  Natal.  In  a 
despatch  to  the  High  Commissioner,  dated  April  15th, 
Mr  Chamberlain  announced  the  intention  of  the  Imperial 
Government  to  send  reinforcements  to  South  Africa,  in 
order  to  supply  the  place  of  the  drafts  which  would  be 
forwarded  to  Matabeleland.  On  the  17  th  of  April,  General 
Carrington  was  recalled  from  Gibraltar;  and  on  the  25th 
he  sailed  for  South  Africa,  and  reached  Buluwayo  on 
the  2nd  of  June.  The  forces  placed  at  his  disposal  were 
stated  in  his  instructions  (April  25  th)  to  consist  of  the 
following : — 300  men  of  the  7th  Hussars  and  as  many 
mounted  infantry  as  could  be  spared  from  the  Cape  and 
Natal  regiments;  720  Colonial  Volunteers  raised  by 
Colonel  Plumer,  D.S.O.  at  Mafeking;  and  the  various 
pohce  and  volunteer  forces,  etc.,  serving  in  Matabeleland 
and  with  Colonel  Plumer.  In  addition  to  these.  General 
Carrington  was  authorized  to  use,  if  necessary,  the  police 
and  native  forces  in  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate,  and 
450  mounted  infantry  which  were  being  sent  out  from 
England  to  reinforce  the  Cape  garrison. 

To  return  to  Buluwayo.      The  settlers  enrolled  them- 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      253 

selves  in  the  Buluwayo  Field  Force  on  April  ist.  Of  this 
force  only  a  part  could  be  employed  outside  of  Buluwayo  ; 
but  the  few  hundred  men  thus  available  succeeded  in 
achieving  two  purposes.  In  the  first  place,  they  brought  in 
the  unprotected  whites,  and,  in  the  second,  they  engaged 
and  drove  the  enemy  from  the  immediate  neighbourhood  of 
the  town  into  the  hills  and  forest  recesses.  In  these 
conflicts  severe  losses  were  inflicted  upon  the  Matabele ; 
but  it  is  noticeable  that  the  settlers  had  to  fight  in  exposed 
positions  and  did  not  rely  upon  the  maxims  but  upon  their 
rifles.  On  Thursday,  the  i6th  of  April,  the  Matabele, 
notwithstanding  the  checks  which  they  had  received,  had 
advanced  \\'ithin  a  short  distance  of  the  town.  The 
situation  at  this  time  was  suflSciently  alarming.  There  were 
1500  men,  women,  and  children  in  Buluwayo  who 
retreated  within  the  shelter  of  the  laager  every  night.  At 
Gwelo  there  was  a  collection  of  some  400  persons, 
including  29  women  and  children,  in  laager  ;  and  there 
was  a  lesser  collection  of  refugees  under  Uke  circumstances 
at  Belingwe.  With  these  exceptions  the  whole  country  was 
at  the  mercy  of  the  Matabele  rebels.  Twelve  miles  west 
of  Buluwayo,  at  Redbank  on  the  Khami  river,  there  was  a 
large  impi.  Some  thousands  of  Matabele  under  I^Iyamanda, 
Lobengula's  eldest  son,  were  encamped  on  the  banks  of  the 
Umguza ;  and  there  were  two  large  impis  on  the  EUbaini 
hills.  Altogether  ten  thousand  natives  were  massed  in  a 
semi-circle,  stretching  from  the  west  to  the  north-east  of  the 
town  ;  while  large  numbers  were  assembling  to  the  south  on 
the  Matoppo  hills.  The  main  road  to  the  south  was, 
however,  still  open — a  circumstance  due,  according  to  Mr 
Selous,  to  the  orders  of  the  M'Limo, 

That  under  these  circumstances  the  settlers  should  have 
been  able  to  hold  their  own  until  the  arrival  of  the  reUef 
force  from  Mafeking  a  month  later,  is  an  achievement  which 
has  scarcely  yet  been  appreciated  at  its  real  value. 

On  the  2Sth  of  April,  Lord  Grey  reached  Buluwayo  and 


254  SOUTH  AFRICA 

took  up  his  duties  as  Administrator.  In  what  spirit  he 
entered  upon  those  duties  is  apparent  from  the  brave 
speech  which  he  made  on  the  3rd  of  May.  He  then  said 
that  at  the  beginning  of  the  outbreak  the  Government  had 
only  379  rifles;  but  now  "Buluwayo  was  as  safe  as 
London." 

On  the  1 8th  of  April,  the  Salisbury  relief  column, 
commanded  by  Colonel  Beal,  and  accompanied  by  Mr 
Rhodes  and  Sir  Charles  Metcalfe,  set  out ;  and  on  the  3rd 
of  May  it  relieved  Gwelo.  Meanwhile,  on  the  i  ith  of  May, 
when  Colonel  Plumer's  force  was  getting  within  striking 
distance,  a  column  was  despatched  from  Buluwayo  to  meet 
and  co-operate  with  the  Salisbury  column.  The  Buluwayo 
column  consisted  of  42  officers  and  613  men,  under 
Colonel  Napier,  who  commanded  the  Buluwayo  Field 
Force  during  the  rebellion.  The  two  columns  met  on  the 
1 9th  of  May  ;  and  a  flying  column,  under  Colonel  Spreckly, 
was  shortly  afterwards  despatched  to  attack  the  natives  on 
the  hills  south  of  the  Insiaa  River.  On  the  27th  the 
Salisbury  force,  with  Mr  Rhodes,  went  southwards,  and 
finally  reached  Buluwayo  on  the  30th. 

Meanwhile,  on  the  23rd  of  May,  Colonel  Plumer's  force 
attacked  the  enemy  on  the  Umguza  river,  about  twelve  miles 
from  Buluwayo.  In  this  engagement  the  Matabele  were 
driven  from  a  strong  position  on  the  densely  wooded  hills 
into  the  open  valley  of  the  river,  and  then  pursued  for  a 
distance  of  three  miles. 

After  the  arrival  of  General  Carrington  on  June  2nd, 
offensive  operations  on  a  larger  scale  were  commenced. 
By  the  end  of  the  first  week  in  that  month,  three  con- 
siderable patrols  had  been  despatched  against  the  insurgents. 
Colonel  Plumer  proceeded  with  a  force  of  600  men  west- 
wards to  the  Khami  river.  Captain  Macfarlane,  who  was 
accompanied  by  Mr  Rhodes  and  Sir  Charles  Metcalfe,  took 
300  mounted  men  and  100  Colonial  "boys"  northwards 
to  the  Umguza.     And  a  third  force  under  Colonel  Spreckly 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      255 

was  directed  to  co-operate  with  a  column  under  Colonel 
Beal  in  dislodging  a  body  of  natives  who  had  occupied  a 
ford  on  the  Umguza  River,  at  a  point  six  miles  from 
Buluwayo  on  the  main  road  to  Salisbury.  The  purpose 
of  these  operations  was  to  disperse  the  natives  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  Buluwayo  before  attacking  the  gathering 
masses  of  Matabele  on  the  Motoppo  hills. 

But  the  insurrection  was  not  confined  to  the  Matabele. 
On  the  23rd  of  June  the  disturbing  intelligence  reached 
Buluwayo  that  the  peaceful  Mashonas  had  also  risen 
against  the  white  man.  The  number  of  whites  murdered 
in  Mashonaland  was  comparatively  small.  Salisbury  went 
into  laager,  and  relief  parties  were  sent  out  to  the  home- 
steads and  mining  camps.  For  some  weeks  the  position 
of  the  settlers  was  one  of  extreme  discomfort  and  no  little 
peril ;  but  forces  were  rapidly  desjxitched  from  Matabele- 
land,  and  on  the  23rd  of  July  the  Salisbury  laager  was 
broken  up.  Shortly  after  this  date,  communication  between 
the  various  settlements  was  restored,  and  the  insurgents 
were  scattered  and  broken.  But  the  rising  of  the  Mashonas 
for  a  time  delayed  the  execution  of  General  Carrington's 
measures  for  reducing  the  Matabele  insurgents. 

On  the  4th  of  July  the  Buluwayo  Field  Force  was  dis- 
banded. From  this  point  the  task  of  quelling  the  insur- 
rection was  taken  out  of  the  hands  of  the  settlers.  The 
forces  employed  were  under  an  Imperial  Officer,  General 
Carrington,  and  consisted,  as  has  been  already  stated,  in 
part  of  Imperial  troops ;  but  the  expense  was  defrayed 
by  the  Chartered  Company.  The  attitude  of  the  Directors 
will  appear  from  the  reply  which  Lord  Grey  made  to  the 
offer  of  assistance  from  the  Cape  Government,  and  which 
was  read  in  the  Cape  Assembly  on  the  9th  of  July. 

"  It  is  the  ambition  of  the  Chartered  Company  and  of 
the  people  of  this  country  to  secure  for  England  the 
peaceful  possession  of  Rhodesia  at  their  own  cost  and 
without    calling    upon    the    tax-payers   of   England  or    of 


256  SOUTH  AFRICA 

the    Cape    Colony    for    the   contribution    of  a  single  six- 
pence." 

Without  attempting  to  narrate  the  operations  of  General 
Carrington's  force  in  detail,  I  shall  refer  to  one  or  two 
significant  episodes  which  will  enable  the  reader  to  form 
some  conception  of  the  character  of  the  fighting  and  of 
the  subsequent  course  of  events. 

The  first  of  these  episodes  is  the  shooting  of  the  M'Limo 
by  the  American  scout,  Mr  F.  R.  Burnham,  in  his  cave 
in  the  Matoppo  country  on  June  23rd.  The  M'Limo  was 
the  head  of  a  priestly  caste  and  the  mouthpiece  of  the 
native  god  ;  and  he,  like  Nongase,*  had  incited  the  natives 
to  rebel  by  promises  of  supernatural  assistance — promises 
which  included  the  re-appearance  of  King  Lobengula. 
Mr  Burnham,  who  was  one  of  the  survivors  of  Wilson's 
party,  has  described  his  exploit  in  a  report  addressed  to 
Lord  Grey.     He  says  : — 

"After  several  attempts  that  were  failures,  on  the  23rd 
of  the  month,  we  [i.e.,  Mr  Burnham  and  Mr  Armstrong, 
a  native  commissioner]  succeeded  in  catching  the  M'Limo 
in  the  act  of  going  through  his  incantations  in  the  cave. 
Our  orders  from  General  Carrington  were  to  capture  him  if 
possible,  but  on  no  account  to  allow  him  to  escape  us. 
We  were  surrounded  by  Kaffirs  in  all  directions.  The 
ground  is  very  rough — huge  granite  kopjes,  and  boulders, 
and  dongas.  We  hid  our  horses  as  near  the  cave  as  it  was 
possible,  and  with  great  difficulty  got  ourselves  into  the 
cave.  M'Limo  was  going  through  a  preparatory  Indaba 
this  day,  and  the  women  and  the  old  men  were  carrying 
beer  and  utensils  for  the  big  Indaba  to  come  off  on  the 
following  day.  The  Impi  was  supposed  to  be  behind  the 
big  granite  hill.  Just  as  M'Limo  had  finished  his  dances 
in  the  smaller  crevices  and  pathway  leading  to  the  main 
entrance,  and  was  starting  into  the  main  cavern,  I  shot  him 
with  a  Lee-MclXord  rifle,  killing  him  instantly.     We   left 

•  See  Note  1 1. 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      257 

his  body  at  the  entrance  to  the  big  cave.  He  is  a  man 
sixty  years  old,  with  short-cropped  hair.  He  was  not 
dressed  with  any  snake  skins,  charms,  or  any  of  the 
ordinary  equipment  of  the  witch  doctor,  neither  had  he 
any  article  of  white  manufacture  of  any  kind.  He  is  not  a 
Ringkop  [i.e.  of  Zulu  blood] ;  he  is  a  Makalaka.  His 
features  are  rather  aquiline  for  a  negro  ;  very  wide  between 
the  eyes.  His  skin  is  more  red  than  black.  Immediately 
after  killing  him  we  rushed  down  the  side  of  the  mountain. 
Just  at  the  foot  there  is  a  large  kraal  of  over  one  hundred 
huts,  built  on  waving  grass,  no  dagga  being  near  it.  The 
huts  are  conical,  with  low  doors,  and  were  used  as  tem- 
porary resting-places  by  the  people  coming  to  hold  Indabas 
with  M'Limo.  We  fired  these  huts.  The  winds  blowing 
strongly  against  the  kopje  carried  a  huge  sheet  of  flame  and 
volumes  of  smoke  far  over  the  top.  The  Kaffirs  saw  us, 
and  shouted  and  shrieked  as  we  got  to  our  horses.  For 
two  hours  we  were  hotly  pursued,  and  were  nearly  ex- 
hausted. Fortunately,  the  Kaffirs  abandoned  the  chase 
after  we  crossed  the  Shashani  River.  We  arrived  at 
Mangwe  at  6.30  p.m.  I  would  say  that  all  the  trails 
leading  to  this  cave  have  been  worn  and  beaten  down 
several  inches  in  depth  by  constant  travel  this  year.  The 
dust  on  all  the  trails  is  an  inch  or  more  in  depth,  showing 
that  this  was  the  great  Konza  [Council]  place  for  the  whole 
country.  The  Kaffir  information  by  which  Mr  Armstrong 
was  enabled  to  discover  the  movements  of  the  M'Limo  was 
obtained  under  strict  bond  of  secrecy  never  to  betray  their 
names  to  the  white  Government  or  anybody,  as  it  would 
mean  absolute  and  certain  death  to  all  of  them." 

A  second  episode  is  the  storming  of  Secombo's  strong- 
hold in  the  Matoppo  Hills  by  Colonel  Plumer's  column  on 
the  5  th  of  August.  In  this  engagement  the  fighting  lasted 
from  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning  to  three  in  the  afternoon. 
The  impis  under  Secombo  and  Umlugulu,  with  three 
Others,  were  broken  up.    Secombo's  stronghold  was  stormed 

R 


2  58  SOUTH  AFRICA 

by  200  infantry  under  Captain  Beresford.  This  force  was 
then  surrounded  by  the  Matabele  rebels,  but  kept  them  in 
check  until  it  was  relieved  by  Major  Kershaw.  Ultimately 
the  rebels  retreated  to  their  caves  with  a  loss  of  300. 
The  column  lost  5  men  killed  and  1 5  wounded.  Among 
the  former  was  Major  Kershaw,  an  officer  of  great  promise 
In  this  engagement  the  Cape  "  boys  "  fought  with  great 
bravery  ;  but  some  of  the  "  friendlies  "  {i.e.  Matabele)  went 
over  to  the  enemy. 

Among  the  measures  adopted  by  the  High  Commis- 
sioner for  the  termination  of  the  insurrection  was  the  issue 
of  a  proclamation,  declaring  that  all  natives  who  submitted 
before  the  loth  of  August,  with  the  exception  of  persons 
convicted  by  the  civil  authorities  of  the  murder  of  unpro- 
tected whites,  would  be  pardoned.  The  date  of  the  expir- 
ation of  the  amnesty  was  afterwards  extended ;  and  the 
third  episode  which  I  propose  to  bring  before  the  reader — 
the  negociations  conducted  in  person  by  Mr  Rhodes  with 
the  rebel  chiefs — forms  part  of  the  effort  thus  made  to 
secure  the  peaceable  surrender  of  the  insurgent  Matabele. 

On  the  23rd  of  August  Mr  Rhodes,  with  Dr  Sauer  and 
Mr  J.  W.  Colenbrander,  rode  without  any  escort  five  miles 
into  the  heart  of  the  Matabele  position  in  the  Matoppo 
Hills,  and  held  an  indaba,  or  council,  with  Secombo  and 
other  native  chiefs.  I  take  the  following  account  of  their 
daring  adventure  from  the  columns  of  the  Daily  Telegraph 
of  August  the  24th. 

"  About  noon  yesterday  John  Grootboom  arrived  in  Mr 
Rhodes's  camp  and  asked  to  see  those  in  command.  He 
then  stated  that  six  principal  chiefs,  two  princes,  Lobengula's 
brothers,  and  thirty-four  indunas  and  captains  of  the 
Matabele  impis  were  gathered  in  solemn  council  in  the 
hills,  four  miles  away.  The  meeting  was  being  held  in 
secret,  as  the  chiefs  were  afraid  to  come  into  the  open 
owing  to  their  distrust  of  the  white  troops.  They  wished, 
however,  to  see  Mr  Colenbrander,  whom  they  trusted  as 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      259 

a  friend,  and  while  they  dared  not  ask  such  a  great  man 
as  Mr  Rhodes  to  come  to  the  council,  he  would,  neverthe- 
less, be  welcome  if  he  were  willing  to  do  so. 

"  Thereupon  Mr  Rhodes  promptly  decided  to  go.  The 
military  staff  at  once  wished  to  accompany  him  in  order 
to  ensure  his  safety,  but  Grootboom  strongly  advised  that 
no  such  step  should  be  taken,  inasmuch  as  it  would  only 
defeat  its  object  and  undoubtedly  involve  Mr  Rhodes  in 
great  personal  danger. 

"  Accordingly,  Mr  Rhodes,  Dr  Sauer,  Mr  Colenbrander, 
and  the  Press  representative  started  for  the  spot  indicated, 
every  man  taking  a  revolver  in  each  pocket,  except  Mr 
Rhodes,  who  went  unarmed,  declining  to  carry  any  weapon. 
John  Grootboom  and  John  Makings  made  up  the  party  to 
the  number  of  six,  and  together  they  moved  quietly  into 
the  rugged  portion  of  the  Matoppos,  the  route  lying  over 
land  covered  with  kopjes,  and  honeycombed  with  caves. 

"  Externally  every  man  endeavoured  to  display  a  calm 
and  even  nonchalant  air,  but  they  all  felt  terribly  anxious, 
as  they  feared  they  might  be  running  into  a  trap  set  by  the 
rebels  to  catch  the  great  white  chief,  Rhodes,  alive,  and  to 
murder  the  others.  This,  moreover,  they  could  easily  have 
accomplished. 

"  Just  four  miles  from  camp  the  six  reached  the  foot  of  a 
huge  kopje,  and  one  hundred  yards  further  on  was  the 
trysting-place. 

"  Mr  Rhodes  and  his  companions  dismounted  in  dignified 
silence,  and  took  up  their  position  by  a  large  ant-heap  and 
waited.  The  suspense  seemed  interminable,  and  although 
there  was  the  stillness  of  death,  the  six  knew  well  enough 
that  the  place  was  surrounded  by  hundreds  of  armed 
Matabele.  Any  wavering  sign  of  fear  would  have  been 
fatal,  but  nothing  of  the  kind  was  shown. 

"  The  critical  moment  came  when  Grootboom  advanced 
to  the  kopje  to  say  the  party  were  awaiting  the  appearance 
of  the  chiefs. 


2  6o  SOUTH  AFRICA 

"Suddenly  there  was  a  gleam  of  dead  white  from  the 
kopje,  and  all  the  chiefs  filed  out  in  a  row,  headed  by  one 
carrying  the  white  flag.  They  drew  near  to  the  party  in 
silence,  and  squatted  round  them  in  a  semi-circle.  The 
Indaba  lasted  for  five  hours,  all  points  at  issue  being 
thoroughly  discussed,  and  full  explanations  proffered  by 
the  white  men  to  allay  the  uneasiness  which  the  chiefs  evi- 
dently felt  at  certain  possible  consequences  of  the  surrender. 

"  Then  the  chiefs  rose,  and  each  threw  a  small  stick  at 
the  feet  of  Mr  Rhodes,  indicating  their  willingness  to 
surrender  their  guns,  while  another  similar  stick  meant 
they  were  ready  to  hand  over  their  assegais. 

"  In  return  Mr  Rhodes,  whose  coolness  and  dignity  were 
never  at  a  loss,  promised  that  the  desired  abolition  of  the 
native  police  force  should  be  taken  into  serious  considera- 
tion. The  chiefs  then  solemnly  declared  that  hostilities 
should  cease  at  once,  and  guaranteed  the  safety  of  the 
roads  and  of  the  coaches." 

This  striking  scene  was  the  central  incident  in  negocia- 
tions  of  the  value  of  which  Lord  Grey  has  thus  written  : — 

"  I  cannot  speak  too  highly  of  the  immense  services 
rendered  by  Mr  Rhodes  in  connection  with  his  nego- 
ciations  in  the  Matoppos.  With  infinite  patience  and 
characteristic  tenacity  of  purpose,  he  has  sat  down  at 
the  base  of  the  Matoppos  in  a  camp  unprotected  by  a 
single  bayonet,  which  could  have  been  perfectly  well  rushed 
any  night  during  the  last  six  weeks  by  the  rebels,  with 
absolute  safety  to  themselves.  It  was  entirely  due  to  the 
confidence  which  this  action  on  his  part  inspired  in  the 
minds  of  the  rebels,  who  were  very  suspicious  and  alarmed 
as  to  the  treatment  they  would  receive  if  they  surrendered, 
that  they  were  at  length  induced  to  go  out  from  the  hills  on 
the  flats.  In  this  work  he  has  been  most  ably  assisted  by  Mr 
Colenbrander,  whose  manner  with  the  natives  is  perfect."  * 

*  Letter  of  the  i6th  October,  addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the 
Chartered  Company. 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      261 

But  this  is  by  no  means  the  sum  of  the  services  rendered 
by  Mr  Rhodes  during  the  year  1896  to  the  settlers  in 
Rhodesia  and  to  the  Chartered  Company. 

It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  assert  that  both  the  com- 
mercial development  and  the  future  peace  of  Rhodesia 
depends  upon  the  rapid  extension  of  the  railways  more 
than  upon  any  other  single  measure.  The  distances  to 
which  the  railways  have  been  already  carried  forward,  both 
from  the  Cape  Colony  and  from  the  East  Coast,  have  been 
already  stated  in  a  previous  chapter.*  To  this  all-impor- 
tant work  of  advancing  the  railways,  Mr  Rhodes  applied 
himself  on  his  return  to  Rhodesia  at  the  beginning  of  the 
year  (1896);  and  it  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  the 
result  achieved  is  due  to  his  untiring  energy  and  great 
resources. 

The  rebellion  in  Rhodesia  still  smoulders,  and  the  fate 
of  the  Chartered  Company  hangs  in  the  balance.  In 
view  of  these  facts  it  may  seem  premature  to  discuss  the 
remedial  proposals  advanced  by  the  Chartered  Company. 
But  this  account,  however  limited  in  its  scope,  would  be 
incomplete  without  some  reference  to  the  future. 

The  Directors  have  to  allay  the  dissatisfaction  both  of 
the  natives  and  of  the  European  settlers. 

In  respect  of  the  former  it  appears  from  Lord  Grey's 
letter  of  the  i8th  of  October,  that  it  is  the  intention  of  the 
Buluwayo  Government  to  introduce  a  system  of  native 
control  practically  identical  with  that  which  is  in  force 
in  the  Colony  of  Natal.  That  is  to  say,  the  natives  are 
to  be  governed  through  the  chiefs,  and  the  tribal  divisions 
and  organisation  is  to  be  as  much  as  possible  restored. 
The  chiefs  or  indunas  will  become  salaried  officials  of  the 
Government,  and  the  maintenance  of  order  will,  in  the 
first  instance,  be  entrusted  to  them.  In  each  division, 
however,  there  will  be  a  European  official,  the  Native 
Commissioner,  to  whom  the  chief  will  refer  in  matters  in 
*  Chap,  xii,  pp.  217-18. 


262  SOUTH  AFRICA 

which  the  interests  of  the  white  settlers  are  involved. 
Further,  the  native  police  force  is  to  be  abolished,  and  only 
European  police  will  be  employed  in  the  future. 

The  requirements  of  the  settlers  have  been  met  in  a 
generous  spirit.  The  Company  have  promised  to  com- 
pensate them  for  losses  incurred  in  the  destruction  of 
cattle,  in  pursuance  of  the  Rinderpest  regulations,  and  for 
all  losses  caused  by  the  insurrection.  They  have  also 
undertaken  to  complete  the  railway  system  as  speedily 
as  possible,  and  to  reduce  the  charges  laid  upon  mining 
properties. 

In  estimating  the  possibilities  which  the  future  holds  for 
Rhodesia,  there  is  one  feature  of  the  insurrection  which 
must  not  be  overlooked.  Although  Rhodesia  is  distinct- 
ively an  English  colony,  there  are  two  considerable  Dutch 
settlements — one  in  Gazaland  effected  towards  the  end 
of  1 89 1,  and  another  south  of  Fort  Charter,  established 
after  the  Matabele  war.  There  were  also  at  the  time  of 
the  Insurrection  a  number  of  Dutch  Africanders  employed 
as  carriers  upon  the  roads,  in  addition  to  stray  agricul- 
tural settlers.  Part  of  these  Dutch  settlers  formed  the 
Africander  Corps  under  Commandant  Van  Rensberg;  and 
the  men  of  this  corps  fought  throughout  the  insurrection 
side  by  side  with  the  British  settlers.  This  union  of  the 
races  in  the  face  of  a  common  danger  is  a  significant  and 
hopeful  sign. 

In  conclusion,  let  me  say  one  word  as  to  the  future. 

Lord  Salisbury,  in  a  statement  which  he  made*  in  the 
House  of  Lords  on  the  subject  of  the  Soudan  Expedition, 
remarked  that  the  operations  of  that  expedition  were  limited 
by  the  small  amount  of  the  funds  at  the  disposal  of  the 
Egyptian  Government,  and  suggested  that  here  was  a  field 
for  the  activities  of  the  millionaires  who  had  financed  the 
"invasion"  of  the  Transvaal.  It  was  a  humorous  turn  in 
the  mouth  of  the  Prime  Minister  of  England,  but  the  idea 
•  In  June  1896. 


THE  INSURRECTION  IN  RHODESIA      263 

which  underlay  it  was  serious.  That  private  individuals 
should  devote  part  of  their  wealth  to  the  development  of 
the  resources  of  the  Empire  is  a  thought  which  has  been 
brought  home  to  the  people  of  England  by  the  object-lesson 
which  they  have  had  in  South  Africa ;  and  it  is  one  which 
has  taken  hold  of  the  national  mind.  As  it  is,  Lord 
Salisbury's  account  of  what  was  going  forward,  pending 
the  assistance  of  the  millionaires,  was  not  disappointing. 
Speaking  of  the  responsibilities  of  England,  the  Premier 
said  : — 

We  shall  not  have  restored  Egypt  to  the  position  in  which  we 
received  her,  we  shall  not  have  placed  Egypt  in  that  position  of  safety 
in  which  she  deserved  to  stand,  until  the  Egyptian  flag  floats  over 
Khartoum. 

But  for  the  present  the  expedition  must  halt  at  Dongola, 
for  the  "  controlling  factor  is  the  question  of  finance." 
One  advantage  of  Dongola,  he  added,  was  "that  it  is  on 
the  road  to  Kartoum."  I  could  suggest  that  Kartoum  also 
has  this  advantage — that  it  is  on  the  road  to  Uganda. 
And  if  the  millionaires  have  not  come  to  the  assistance  of 
the  Soudan  expedition,  they  are  busy  carrying  forward  the 
British  flag  from  the  South  of  Africa  northwards.  If  we 
carry  our  minds  forward  for  twenty  years,  and  forecast  the 
results  of  this  simultaneous  advance  towards  Uganda,  the 
prospect  which  rises  before  our  mental  vision  is  inspiriting. 
By  that  time  the  territory  of  British  East  Africa  will 
unite  with  that  of  the  Eastern  Soudan.  The  Uganda 
railway  will  have  done  its  work  and  brought  the  western 
highlands  into  communication  with  the  coast.  Uganda 
will  be  then  in  the  position  of  Natal :  that  is  to  say,  there 
will  be  a  small  European  population  organising  and  con- 
trolling the  natives,  and  so  developing  the  natural  resources 
of  its  own  and  the  surrounding  districts.  Rhodesia  will  be 
peopled  with  European  settlers,  and  it  will  then  be  seen 
that  the  temperate  uplands  of  Mashonaland  and  Matabele- 
land  are  the  key  to  Central  Africa ;  since  here  alone  can  a 


264  SOUTH  AFRICA 

considerable  European  population  live  under  European 
conditions,  and  so  preserve  the  mental  and  physical  char- 
acteristics of  the  parent  races.  Politically,  Rhodesia  will 
be  the  centre  of  a  group  of  Colonies  and  Protectorates, 
including  Nyasaland,  the  territories  of  the  British  South 
Africa  Company  north  of  the  Zambesi,  and  the  Bechuana- 
land  Protectorate.  Here  will  be  a  British  group  bulky 
enough  to  outweigh  the  Dutch  Republics  in  a  common 
system  which  includes  all  the  States  and  Colonies  from 
Lake  Tanganyika  to  Cape  Agulhas.  Capetown  and  Cairo 
will  be  united  by  telegraph,  and  the  International  Congo 
State,  traversed  by  the  Stevenson  Road,  will  alone  obtrude 
between  the  British  system  stretching  northwards  from 
Uganda  to  Alexandria,  and  the  consolidated  and  frankly 
British  South  African  Federation.  Johannesburg  will  be 
as  populous  as  Sydney  or  Melbourne,  and  the  Boer  will 
have  passed  out  of  knowledge  as  a  political  force. 

If  this  forecast  be  realised — if  this  estimate  of  the 
importance  of  Rhodesia  be  not  excessive — it  is  fitting  that 
Englishmen  should  not  forget  that  the  acquisition  of 
Rhodesia  is  the  work  of  Mr  Cecil  Rhodes. 


NOTES. 


1.  Organisation  of  Dutch  East  India  Company. 

General  Directory  (or  Chamber  XVII.). 

[This  consisted  of — eight  repre- 
sentatives of  Chamber  (or  office) 
of  Amsterdam  ;  four  of  Zeeland  ; 
two  of  the  Maas  ;  two  of  the  North 
Quarter  (Hoorn  and  Enkhuizen) ; 
and  one  sent  by  all  these  alter- 
nately except  Amsterdam.  It  met 
at  various  places  in  Holland.] 

Governor-General  and  Council  of  India. 

[Sitting  at  Batavia  (in  Java),  the 
centre  of  the  Company's  settle- 
ments in  the  East.] 


1  I  I 

Admirals,  Governors,  and  Commanders 

who,  with  their  Councils  of  Policy,  administered  the  various  settle- 
ments of  the  Company  formed  in  pursuance  of  the  Charter  (1602), 
which  granted  a  monopoly  of  the  trade  of  the  Netherlands  "eastward 
of  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  or  westward  of  the  Straits  of  Magellan." 

2.  Origin  of  Conflict  with  the  Natives  (Hottentots). 

Extract  from  a  despatch  dated  July  29,  1659,  of  Commander  Van 
Riebeck  and  Council  to  the  Governor-General  and  Council,  Batavia. 

"  The  Hottentoos  have  been  again  at  work  .  .  .  the  fiscal  Gabbema 
.  .  .  took  two  .  .  .  killed  one  .  .  .    one  taken  prisoner. 

"  The  said  prisoner,  who  was  one  of  the  Caepmans,  and  spoke  toler- 
able Dutch,  being  asked  why  they  did  us  this  injury,  declared  .  .  . 
because  they  saw  that  we  were  breaking  up  the  best  land  and  grass, 
where  their  cattle  were  accustomed  to  graze,  trying  to  establish  our- 
selves everywhere,  with  houses  and  farms,  as  if  we  were  never  more  to 
remove,  but  designed  to  take  for  our  permanent  occupation  more  and 

265 


266  SOUTH  AFRICA 

more  of  this  Cape  Country,  which  had  belonged  to  them  from  tin:e 
immemorial.  Aye,  so  that  their  cattle  could  not  get  at  the  water  with- 
out passing  over  the  corn  land,  which  we  would  not  allow  them  to  do  ; 
that  they  consequently  resolved  (as  it  was  their  land)  to  dishearten  us, 
by  taking  away  the  cattle  (with  which  they  could  see  that  we  broke  up 
and  destroyed  the  best  land)  ;  and  if  that  would  not  produce  the  effect 
— by  burning  our  houses  and  corn  until  we  were  all  forced  to  go  away  : 
that  Doman  had  also  put  it  into  their  heads  that  after  all  the  houses  in 
the  country  were  destroyed,  the  fort  could  be  easily  surprised — as  the 
earth  walls  were  built  with  a  slope — and  then  the  Dutch  might  be 
forced  quite  to  abandon  the  countiy  ..."    ("The  Record.") 

3.   Title  by  deed  of  purchase. 

The  form  of  the  first  of  these  two  "  agreements  "  was  as  follows  : — 

"Agreement  entered  into  between  the  Commissioner  Arnout  van 
Overbeck  with  the  Council  at  the  Cabo  de  Boa  Esperance,  on  the  part 
of  the  General  Chartered  Dutch  East  India  Company,  on  [of]  the  one 
part ;  and  the  HoUentoo  Prince  Manckhagou,  alias  Schacher,  heredi- 
tary sovereign  of  the  land  of  the  Cabo  de  Boa  Esperance,  on  [of]  the 
other  part. 

"  First  the  said  Prince  Schacher  promises  for  himself,  his  heirs  and 
descendants,  to  sell,  cede  and  deliver,  in  full,  perpetual  and  hereditary 
property,  as  he  doth  by  these  presents  sell  and  deliver,  to  the  said 
Company,  the  whole  district  of  the  Cabo  de  Boa  Esperance,  beginning 
from  the  Lion  Hill  and  extending  along  the  coast  of  Table  Bay,  with 
Ilout  and  Saldanha  Bays  inclusive,  with  all  the  lands,  rivers,  creeks, 
forests  and  pastures,  therein  situated  and  comprised,  together  with  their 
dependencies,  so  that  the  same  may  be  everywhere  cultivated  and  occu- 
pied, without  let  or  hindrance  from  any  one — with  this  understanding, 
however,  that  he  and  his  Kraals  and  herds  of  cattle,  may  come  freely 
and  without  molestation  to  the  outermost  farms  of  the  said  district  and 
where  neither  the  Company  nor  the  freemen  depasture  their  cattle,  and 
that  he  shall  not  be  expelled  from  the  same  by  our  nation,  by  force, 
and  without  cause. 

[Secondly,  the  Prince  shall  not  annoy,  &c.,  the  Company's  servants. 
Thirdly  and  fourthly,  he  shall  act  as  an  ally  of  the  Company.] 

"The  Honble.  Company  promise  on  [of]  the  other  part,  to  give  and 
present  to  the  said  Prince  Schacher,  for  this  surrender  and  sale  of  the 
whole  Cape  district,  as  is  now  given  and  presented,  once  for  all  a  sum 
of  four  thousand  reals  of  8,  in  sundry  goods  and  articles  of  merchandise, 
this  day  delivered  to  his  contentment. 

[Secondly,  to  allow  him  peaceable  possession,  &c.  ;  and  to  assist  and 
protect  him  against  enemies,  &c.  ] 

"All  which  aforesaid  points  of  agreement  .  .  .  have  been  read  over 
to  the  said  Prince  .  .  .  and  the  sundry  wares  paid  .  .  .  whereupon 
the  contract  was  confirmed  on  both  sides  by  shaking  hands,  and  signed 
and  sealed  by  the  Company's  seal. 


NOTES  a67 

"  Done  in  the  Fortress,  the  Good  Hope,  April  19th,  1672. 

Thus  X  marked  by  the  Prince 
Schacher  aforesaid. 

Thus  X  marked  by  T.  Tachou, 
chief  person  next  to  the  Prince. 


[L.  S.]  Aernout  van  Overbeke. 
[L.  S.]  Albert  van  Brugel. 
[L.  S.]  Conrad  van  Brietenback. 
[L.  S.]  J.  Coon. 


"  In  my  presence— H.  GRUDOP." 

A  similar  deed  of  May  5,  1672,  conveyed  "the  whole  district  of  the 
land  called  '  Hottentoos  Holland  ' "  to  the  Company  for  goods  esti- 
mated at  4000  reals  :  and  the  captain  of  a  ship  despatched  to  Natal  was 
instructed  {inter  alia)  to  purchase  from  the  chief  "  the  bay  of  Natal  and 
the  adjoining  land,"  to  have  the  purchase  "  attested  by  a  deed  in  com- 
mon form,"  to  pay  the  estimated  price  of  19  or  20,000  guilders  (florins) 
in  "beads,  copper,  ironmongery,  &c.,"  and  to  take  care  "that  the 
articles  of  merchandise  are  not  noticed  in  the  deed. "  The  actual  value 
of  the  merchandise  given  by  the  two  agreements  was  very  trivial,  as 
appears  from  the  following  : — 

Extract  from  despatch  of  Gov :  Isbrand  Goske  and  Council  to 
Chamber  XVn.,  1673,  May  10. 

"Hottentots  Holland  was  last  year  ceded,  &c.,  for  the  sum  of 
R.4000  which  was  paid  with  merchandise  of  the  value  of/8i  16.  prime 
cost,  .  .  .  The  land  of  the  Cape  which  the  owners  often  complained 
had  been  wrongfully  withheld  from  them,  &c.,  was  also  ceded  ...  for 
a  like  sum  of  K.  4000,  but  which  was  paid  with  the  value — in  tobacco, 
beads,  brandy,  bread  and  other  trifles — of /33  17,  also  prime  cost 
..."  These  sums  amount  respectively  to  not  quite  £t,  and 
£2,  i6s.  od.  in  English  money.     ("The  Record.") 

4.  Conditions  under  which  the  Huguenot  Refugees  were  permitted 
to  settle  at  the  Cape. 

"  Reglement  de  I'assemblee  de  Dix-sept  .  .  , 

[i.  The  Company  is  to  provide  means  of  transport  from  Holland  to 
the  Cape. 

ii.  The  Refugee  must  undertake  to  support  himself  by  labour  or 
trade  ;  but  implements,  seed,  &c.,  to  be  advanced  by  the  Company  and 
repaid  by  the  Settlers. 

iii.  The  Refugee  must  (except  by  special  permission  of  Chamber 
XVn.)  remain  for  five  years  at  the  Cape  ;  and,  if  he  then  returns,  must 
pay  for  his  passage  out,  and  further  sell  all  his  property  acquired  at  the 
Cape,  receiving  its  equivalent  in  letters  of  exchange  of  the  Company. 

iv.  He  must  take  the  following  oath  of  allegiance  ;] 

"  Je  promets  et  jure  d'estre  soumis  et  fidelle  a  leurs  hautes  puissances 

les  Estats  Generaux  des  Provinces  Unies,  nos   souverains  maistres  et 

seigneurs,  a  son  Altesse,  monsieur  le  Prince  d'Orange,  comme  Gouver- 

neur,  Capitaine  et  Amiral  General,  et  au  Directeurs  de  la  Compagnie 


2  68  SOUTH  AFRICA 

Generale  des  Indes  Orientales  de  ce  pais,  Pareillement  au  Gouveneur 
General  des  Indes,  ainsi,  qu'a  tous  les  gouverneurs,  commandants,  et 
autres,  qui  durant  le  voyage  par  mer  et  en  suite  par  terra  auront  com- 
mandement  sur  nous. 

"  Et  que  j'observeray  et  executeray  fidellement,  et  de  point  en  point, 
toutes  les  lois  et  ordonnances,  faites  ou  a  faire  tant  par  Messieurs  les 
Directeurs,  par  le  Gouverneur  General  et  par  les  Conseillers,  que  par  le 
Gouverneur  ou  Commandant  du  lieu  de  ma  residence,  et  de  me  gouver- 
ner  et  comporter  en  toutes  choses  comme  un  bon  et  fidelle  sujet.  Ainsi 
Dieu  m'aide. 

"  Fait  et  attest^  dans  I'assemblee  des  Dix-sept  le  20  Octobre,  1687." 
("The  Record.") 

5.  Origin  of  "trekking"  or  the  nomadic  manner  of  life  pursued  by 
the  Dutch  farmers. 

In  1705  the  Government  issued  "  loan  leases,"  or  occupation  licences, 
resumable  at  any  period  by  the  Company.  The  bad  effect  which  this 
uncertainty  of  tenure  produced  upon  the  character  of  the  loan-lessees 
was  soon  apparent,  as  appears  from  the  following  : — 

Extract  from  a  Resolution  of  the  Council,  dated  Feb.  13,  1770  (passed 
after  receiving  a  report  from  the  Landdrosts  (Magistrates)  of  Stellen- 
bosch  and  Swellendam,  and  forbidding  the  issue  of  further  loan- 
leases). 

"  And  as  it  has  further  appeared  by  the  said  report  to  the  especial 
displeasure  of  the  Council  that  the  aforesaid  Commission,  on  their  way 
from  the  Fish  to  the  Gamtoos  River,  met  several  persons  grazing  con- 
siderable herds  of  cattle,  according  to  their  own  pleasure,  and  without 
possessing  there,  or  thereabouts,  farms  in  loan  from  the  Company  ; 
while  others  did  not  scruple  to  wander  about  with  their  cattle,  hither 
and  thither,  several  days' journey  from  their  loan  farms  ; — it  was  accord- 
ingly taken  into  consideration,  that  the  same  not  only  tends  to  the 
evident  injury  of  the  Honourable  Company,  with  reference  to  the  income 
derived  from  the  rents  of  cattle  farms,  but,  that  it  must  be  concluded 
beyond  doubt,  that  such  covetous  conduct  is  chiefly  practised  in  order  to 
enable  them  more  conveniently  to  carry  on  an  illicit  traffic  in  the  barter- 
ing of  cattle,  whether  with  the  Hottentots  residing  thereabouts,  or  with 
the  so-called  Kaffirs  as — among  other  appearances  noticed  by  the  Com- 
mission— sufficiently  appears  from  their  having  found  a  beaten  waggon- 
road  leading  out  of  the  Swellendam  district  to  the  residence  of  the 
Kaffirs :  and  this  all  notwithstanding  that  the  said  cattle  barter  has  been 
from  time  to  time  prohibited  on  pain  of  bodily  and  capital  punishment, 
especially  by  the  proclamation  still  in  force  of  the  8th  December  1739. 
It  is  resolved,  &c. 

"In  the  Castle,  the  Good  Hope,  Feb.  13,  1770. 

(Sipted)        R.  TULBAGH. 

J.  V.  PLETTENBURG." 
(and  eight  others. )     ("  The  Record. ") 


NOTES  269 

Origin  of  the  "  Apprentices  "  of  the  Boers. 

"...  The  Dutch  masters  went  still  farther  (i.e.  than  claiming  the 
children  of  their  slaves) ;  for  the  children  of  Hottentots  living  with 
them  as  hired  servants,  although  both  father  and  mother  belonged  to 
that  race,  were  yet  retained  as  slaves  till  they  arrived  at  the  age  of 
twenty-five  years ;  and  although  the  laws  in  favour  of  the  Hottentots 
obliged  the  Dutch  to  register  such  children  at  the  Cape,  and  to  give 
them  their  freedom  at  this  age  ;  yet  the  period  of  their  liberty  was  in 
reality  little  nearer  than  before,  unless  they  deserted  into  the  wild  and 
uncultivated  parts  of  the  interior,  far  beyond  the  reach  of  their  masters. 
Many  arts  were  employed  to  retain  them  beyond  the  age  of  twenty-five 
years  ;  it  was  usual  to  keep  them  in  ignorance  of  the  date  of  their  birth, 
and  thus  make  them  continue  to  work  till  their  strength  began  to  fail 
them.     When  old,  &c.,  they  were  discharged  ...  to  misery." 

Dutch  Government  of  Hottentots. 

"  From  policy,  which  they  have  been  willing  to  pass  for  a  sense  of 
justice,  the  Dutch  have  paid  some  marks  of  attention  and  respect  to  the 
chiefs  or  heads  of  these  tribes  ;  and  have  publicly  nominated  them 
captains  over  the  rest ;  adding,  at  the  same  time,  as  a  badge  of  office, 
a  chain  and  staff,  or  pole,  headed  with  silver  or  brass,  with  the  arms  of 
the  Republic  engraved  on  it.  These  chiefs,  in  return  for  these  marks 
of  distinction,  are  obliged  to  appear  at  certain  periods  at  Capetown, 
before  the  Governor  and  Council,  and  there  give  an  account  of  the 
people  under  them,  and  receive  orders  from  the  Dutch.  After  perform- 
ing this  duty,  they  are  generally  sent  back  with  presents  of  gin,  brandy, 
tobacco,  iron  and  toys." 

(P'rom  an  account  of  the  Colony  written  by  Captain  Robert  Percival, 
who  visited  the  Cape  in  1796,  i.e.  the  second  year  of  the  temporary 
British  occupation. ) 

6.  Slave  Emancipation. 

When  the  Slave  Emancipation  Act  was  passed  on  August  7,  1833, 
by  the  Imperial  Parliament,  ;i^20,ooo,oc)0  was  voted  as  compensation  to 
slave  proprietors.  The  official  valuation  of  the  35,000  slaves  in  the  Cape 
was  ^3, 000,000  ;  but  instead  of  this  sum  being  paid,  only  ;!^i,247,ooo 
was  apportioned  to  the  Cape.  Not  only  so,  but  the  compensation  money 
was  made  payable  in  London,  and  the  colonists  were  compelled  to  employ 
agents,  whose  charges  still  further  reduced  the  sums  of  money  to  which 
the  claimants  were  entitled.  Some  owners  refused  to  forward  their 
claims  at  all ;  and  in  1843  an  unclaimed  balance  of  ^^5906  due  to  the 
Cape  proprietors  of  slaves  was  transferred  from  the  National  Debt  office 
to  the  Master  of  the  Supreme  Court  at  Capetown,  and  by  him  invested 
to  the  credit  of  the  Education  Department  on  account  of  mission 
schools. 

As  originally  passed,  seven  years'  apprenticeship  was  allowed  as  an 
intermediate  period  ;  but  this  was  shortened  to  five  years'.     August  ist, 


2  70  SOUTH  AFRICA 

1838,  was  the  "day  of  freedom"  elsewhere,  but  at  the  Cape  on 
December  i,  1838,  the  former  proprietors  of  slaves  saw.  .  .  "the 
whole  of  their  farming  pursuits  and  plans  destroyed  :  no  bribe,  nor 
entreaty,  I  believe  did  avail  in  one  single  instance  to  induce  any  one  of 
these  now  free  persons  to  stay  over  that  day  ..." 

"  In  some  places  remunerative  wages  were  offered  .  .  .  but  in  the 
Eastern  country  districts  this  was  impossible,  and  the  agriculturists  there 
found  themselves  totally  deprived  of  every  vestige  of  labour  to  improve 
or  cultivate  their  farms,  or  even  to  superintend  or  herd  their  flocks." 

The  above  is  taken  from  Judge  Cloete's  "Five  Lectures  on  the 
Emigration  of  the  Dutch  Farmers,"  etc. 

These  were  delivered  before  the  Natal  Society,  and  published  at 
Capetown  in  1856.  They  contain  an  expression  of  opinion  rendered 
valuable  by  the  fact  that  the  writer  was  himself  both  a  Dutch  colonist 
and  a  high  official,  being  in  fact  the  Commissioner  appointed  to  estab- 
lish British  authority  over  the  emigrant  farmers  in  Natal  in  1843. 

7.  Origin  of  the  Feud  between  the  Missionaries  and  the  Dutch 
Settlers. 

[Circuit  Courts  were  established  by  Lord  Caledon  in  l8ll.] 

"...  The  very  first  circuit  which  proceeded  through  the  Colony 
was  furnished  with  a  calendar  containing  between  70  and  80  cases,  of 
murders,  aggravated  assaults,  and  the  like  ;  which  the  missionaries  Dr 
Van  der  Kemp  and  the  Rev.  J.  Read,  constituting  themselves  the  pro- 
tectors of  the  Hottentot  race,  and  who  had  then  established  the  first 
missionary  school  or  location  on  the  frontier  (at  Bethelsdorp)  deliberately 
brought  forward,  and  transmitted  to  the  local  government,  as  charges 
against  the  members  of  almost  every  respectable  family  on  the  frontier 
...  it  is  but  just  to  add,  that  of  the  long  list  of  atrocious  crimes 
thus  enquired  into  with  the  utmost  care  and  impartiality,  not  one  single 
instance  of  murder  was  proved  against  the  accused,  although  in  a  few 
cases  acts  of  personal  assault  and  transgression  of  some  colonial  law 
were  brought  home  to  them,  and  punished  accordingly." 

[The  parties  accused — there  were  100  families  involved  and  over  1000 
witnesses  summoned  and  examined — had  to  pay  heavy  expenses,  because, 
under  the  then  colonial  law,  the  public  prosecutor  could  claim  costs  in 
any  event,  and  was  himself  entitled  to  double  fees.] 

.  .  .  "  all  those  results  engendered  a  bitter  feeling  of  hostility  towards 
the  administration  of  justice  in  general,  and  more  particularly  against 
the  missionaries,  who  had  brought  forward  these  accumulated  charges 
against  such  a  number  of  colonists."     (Cloeie.) 

8.  Origin  of  Kafir  Wars. 

The  great  Fish  River  was  the  eastern,  and  an  imaginary  line  the 
northern,  boundary  of  the  colony  as  surrendered  to  the  English.  The 
arid  deserts  to  the  north  forbade  migration  ;  on  the  eastern  boundary 
the  colonists  were  confronted  by  the  Amakosa  .  .  .  "Who,  far  from 
allowing  any  inroads  upon  their  own  territories,  commenced  a  system 


NOTES  271 

of  aggression  upon  our  colonists,  which  extended  over  the  greatest  part 
of  the  Graaf  Reinet  and  Uitenhage  districts,  from  which  they  were  not 
finally  expelled  until  the  year  1812.  But  this  system  of  aggression  they 
have  never  abandoned,  but  on  the  contrary  have  perseveringly  carried 
on  for  nearly  seventy  years ;  each  succeeding  war  having  only  formed 
them  into  a  more  dangerous,  experienced,  and  vindictive  foe."  (Cloete.  ) 

Kafir  methods  of  warfare. 

"  The  Kafir,  at  the  first  onset,  is  perhaps  less  ferocious  than  cunning, 
and  more  intent  upon  improving  his  own  interests  by  theft  than  in  tak- 
ing life  from  the  mere  spirit  of  cruelty  :  but  once  roused,  he  is  like  the 
wild  beast  after  the  taste  of  blood,  and  loses  all  the  best  attributes  of 
humanity.  The  movement  of  a  body  of  these  savages  through  the  land 
may  be  likened  to  *a  rushing  and  mighty  wind.'  On,  on  they  sweep  ! 
like  a  blast ;  fiUing  the  air  with  a  strange  tuhirr — reminding  one,  on  a 
grand  scale,  of  a  flight  of  locusts. 

"An  officer  [in  the  war  of  1835]  had  his  attention  suddenly  arrested 
by  a  cloud  of  dust ;  then  a  silent  mass  appeared,  and  lo  !  a  multitude  of 
beings,  more  resembling  demons  than  men,  rushed  past.  There  were 
no  noises,  no  sound  of  footsteps,  nothing  but  the  shiver  of  the  assegais, 
which  gleamed  as  they  dashed  onwards." 

Attack  on  Fort  Peddie. 

This  was  an  incident  in  the  "War  of  the  Axe"  (1846-48).  Fort 
Peddie  was  "a  mere  earthen  embankment"  held  by  a  handful  of 
soldiers.  The  account  is  that  of  "an  eye-witness"  published  in  a 
frontier  paper. 

"  Were  it  not  that  life  and  death  were  concerned  in  it,  I  should  have 
pronounced  it  [the  attack]  a  most  beautiful  sight.  The  Kaffir  com- 
manders sent  their  aides-de-camp  from  one  party  to  another,  just  as  you 
would  see  it  done  on  a  field  day  with  European  troops.  The  main 
bodies  were  continually  increasing  with  horse  and  footmen,  and  soon 
after  eleven  the  array  was  truly  terrific.  The  largest  body  was  to  the 
westward ;  finding  their  schemes  of  drawing  the  troops  out  did  not 
succeed,  small  parties  advanced  in  skirmishing  order,  and  then  the  two 
divisions  of  Pato  and  the  Gaikas  moved  towards  each  other,  as  if  intend- 
ing a  combined  attack  on  some  given  point.  Colonel  Lindsay  was 
superintending  the  working  of  the  gun  himself,  and,  as  soon  as  a  body 
of  Gaikas  came  within  range,  a  shot  was  sent  into  the  midst  of  them. 
.  .  .  The  Kaffirs  now  extended  themselves  in  a  line  six  miles  in 
length.  These  advancing  at  the  same  time  so  filled  the  valley  that  it 
seemed  a  mass  of  moving  Kaffirs  ;  rockets  and  shells  were  poured 
rapidly  on  them,  and  presently  a  tremendous  fire  of  musketry  poured 
over  our  heads.  The  enemy,  however,  did  not  come  near  enough  for 
the  infantry  to  play  upon  them,  and  only  a  few  shots  were  fired  from 
the  infantry  barracks.  .  .  ,  The  actual  fighting  was  between  the  Fingoes 
and  the  Kaffirs ;  the  troops  could  not  have  gone  out  without  exposing 


272  SOUTH  AFRICA 

the  forts  to  danger,  as  there  were  masses  ready  to  pour  in  from  all 
quarters."     (From  Mrs  Harriet  Ward's  "  P'ive  Years  in  Kaffirland,") 

9.  Sir  George  Grey's  Kafir  Policy. 

Sir  George  Grey  (i)  established  schools  and  hospitals,  (2)  broke 
down  the  power  of  the  chiefs  by  (a)  purchasing  from  them  by  monthly 
stipends  the  right  to  inflict  fines  and  punishments,  and  introducing 
European  Magistrates  to  administer  justice,  (d)  discrediting  witch- 
doctors who  were  the  instruments  of  the  chief's  cupidity,  (3)  substituted 
individual  for  tribal  tenure  of  land. 

The  measures  thus  initiated  have  since  been  adopted  as  the  basis  of 
the  native  policy  of  the  Cape  Government. 

"The  aim  of  the  policy  of  the  Colonial  Government  since  1855  has 
been  to  establish  and  maintain  peace,  to  diffuse  civilisation  and  Christi- 
anity, and  to  establish  society  on  the  basis  of  individual  property  and 
personal  industry.  The  agencies  employed  are  the  magistrate,  the 
missionary,  the  schoolmaster,  and  the  trader."  (Noble,  "History  of 
South  Africa.") 

To  this  statement  we  may  add  a  pregnant  remark  of  Sir  Langham 
Dale  (Late  Superintendent  General  of  Education). 

"  Every  native  who  owns  a  plot  of  land  or  a  plough  or  a  wagon  and 
oxen  is  a  hostage  for  peace. " 

Another  measure  of  Sir  George  Grey  was  the  introduction  of  a  body 
(2000)  of  agricultural  immigrants  from  Germany  into  the  valley  of  the 
Buffalo  river  (East  London  is  the  port)  in  185S-59.  These  immigrants 
formed  a  useful  complement  to  the  military  settlers  of  the  Anglo-German 
legion  previously  introduced  in  1857. 

Sir  George  Grey  is  also  remarkable  for  the  daring  assumption  of  per- 
sonal responsibility  by  which,  in  Lord  Malmesbury's  words,  he  "probably 
saved  India."  In  September  1858,  he  despatched  the  returning  troops 
from  China  to  India,  and  "stripped  the  colony  of  troops  to  aid  the 
Indian  Government." 

10.  Sir  George  Grey's  forecast. 

The  necessity  for  a  federal  union  of  the  South  African  States  was 
clearly  stated  by  Sir  George  Grey  in  a  despatch  to  Sir  E.  B.  Lytton, 
dated  November  19,  1858.  It  must  be  remembered  that  he  (Grey)  had 
seen  the  provincial  governments  of  New  Zealand  successfully  united 
by  a  central  government.  The  whole  despatch  contains  a  masterly 
review  of  the  conditions  created  by  the  previous  policy  of  non-inter- 
ference, and  a  no  less  masterly  forecast  of  future  dangers. 

Of  the  general  results  of  the  non-interference  policy  he  writes  : — 
"  16.  The  defects  of  the  system  thus  described  [i.e.  the  recognition  of 
the  Dutch  Republics,  the  separation  of  Natal,  and  the  abandonment  of 
the  Native  chiefs — measures  which  he  has  collectively  called  '  the  dis- 
memberment of  South  Africa ']  appear  to  be  that  the  country  must  be 
always  at  war  in  some  direction,  as  some  one  of  the  several  states,  in 


NOTES  ^73 

pursuit  of  its  supposed  interests,  will  be  involved  in  difficulties,  either 
with  some  European  or  native  state.  Every  such  war  forces  all  the 
other  states  into  a  position  of  an  armed  neutrality  or  of  interference. 
For,  if  the  state  is  successful  in  the  war  it  is  waging,  a  native  race  will 
be  broken  up,  and  none  can  tell  what  territories  its  dispersed  hordes 
may  fall  upon.  Nor  can  the  other  states  be  assured  that  the  coloured 
tribes  generally  will  not  sympathise  in  the  war,  and  that  a  general  rising 
may  not  take  place.  Ever  since  South  Africa  has  been  broken  up  in 
the  manner  above  detailed,  large  portions  of  it  have  always  been  in  a 
state  of  constant  anxiety  and  apprehension  from  these  causes.  The 
smallness  and  weakness  of  the  states,  and  a  knowledge  that  they  are 
isolated  bodies,  bound  by  no  ties  of  interest  or  common  government 
with  other  states,  has  encouraged  the  natives  to  resist  and  dare  them, 
whilst  the  nature  of  the  existing  treaties,  and  the  utter  abandonment  of 
the  natives  by  Great  Britain,  to  whom  they  had  hitherto  looked  up,  has 
led  the  natives  to  combine  for  their  mutual  protection,  and  thus  to 
acquire  a  sense  of  strength  and  boldness  such  as  they  have  not  hitherto 
shown ;  so  that,  whilst  the  Europeans  have  appeared  to  grow  weak, 
they  have  felt  themselves  increase  in  strength  and  importance. 

"  17.  Again,  such  petty  states  must  be  constant  foci  of  intrigues  and 
internal  commotions,  revolutions,  or  intestine  wars.  ..." 

Of  the  future  attitude  of  the  Dutch  population  he  says  : — 

"  14.  I  think  there  can  be  no  doubt  that,  in  any  great  public,  or 
popular,  or  national  question  or  movement,  the  mere  fact  of  calling 
these  people  different  nations  would  not  make  them  so,  nor  would  the 
fact  of  a  mere  fordable  stream  running  between  them  sever  their  sym- 
pathies or  prevent  them  from  acting  in  unison.  I  think  that  many 
questions  might  arise  in  which,  if  the  government  on  the  south  side  of 
the  Orange  River  took  a  different  view  from  that  on  the  north  side  of  the 
river,  it  might  be  very  doubtful  which  of  the  two  governments  the  great 
mass  of  the  people  would  obey. " 

This  was  the  state  of  things  which  Sir  Bartle  Frere  was,  twenty 
years  later,  commissioned  to  remedy  by  giving  effect  to  Lord  Car- 
narvon's bill  for  *'  enabling  the  Union  of  South  African  Colonies  and 
States,"  passed  by  the  Imperial  Parliament  in  1877. 

Extract  from  despatch  of  April  12,  1877  (Lord  Carnarvon  to  Sir 
Bartle  Frere). 

"5.1  request  that  you  will  lay  this  despatch  with  its  enclosure  (the 
draft  bill)  before  the  Houses  of  the  Legislature,  and  [transmit  copies 
to  the  Presidents  of  the  Free  State  and  of  the  Transvaal  Republic].  I 
will  only  add  an  expression  of  my  hope  that  they  will  perceive,  in  the 
alterations  I  have  now  made,  a  further  evidence  of  my  regard  for  the 
natural  wish  of  any  government  or  community  which  may  propose  to 
take  advantage  of  the  measure  that  no  question  should  be  prejudged 
which  can  properly  be  left  open  for  subsequent  consideration.  [I  have 
sent  copies  of  the  bill,  &c.,  to  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  Natal.]  " 

S 


2  74  SOUTH  AFRICA 

11.  Prophecy  of  Nongase. 

Nongase,  niece  of  Umlakazi,  prophesied  that  on  Feb.  l8,  1857,  a 
hurricane  would  sweep  the  earth,  the  ancestors  of  the  Kafirs  would 
rise  with  countless  herds  of  cattle,  and  that  they,  and  the  followers  of 
the  prophetess,  would  sweep  the  white  men  and  the  Fingoes  from  the 
earth.  Under  the  influence  of  this  promise  the  Kafirs  destroyed  their 
cattle  and  neglected  to  sow  their  corn.  50,000  died  of  starvation, 
34,000  were  brought  into  the  Cape  Colony  and  employed,  and  others 
were  assisted  in  their  own  country.  Sir  George  Grey  had  carefully 
watched  the  course  of  events,  and  made  provision  both  for  defending  the 
frontier  and  assisting  the  starving  Kafirs. 

12.  Annexation  of  the  Transvaal. 

The  Justification  for  the  annexation  of  the  Transvaal  (efifected 
under  instructions  from  Lord  Carnarvon  before  Sir  Bartle  Frere  com- 
menced his  period  of  Governorship)  appears  from  the  following  : — 

Extract  from  despatch  of  December  11,  1878  (Frere  to  Sir  M.  Hicks- 
Beach). 

"32.  The  Zulu  king  and  his  'dog'  Sikukuni  .  .  .  were  able  to 
challenge  the  power  that  had  destroyed  Dingaan  .  .  .  and  the  English 
Government  believed  there  was  a  very  serious  danger  of  Zulus  and 
other  native  tribes  driving  back  the  white  settlers  in  the  Transvaal, 
and  once  more  contesting  the  supremacy  of  race  on  our  northern 
border. 

"33.  This  danger  was  one  main  ground  for  the  annexation  of  the 
Transvaal.  .   .  . 

"34.  This  is  a  sound  argument  ...  if  we  do  really  protect  the 
Transvaal ;  but  it  will  cease  to  secure  acquiescence  .  .  .  unless  [we 
'  let  the  natives  know  that  if  the  English  Government  is  non-aggressive, 
it  is  so  from  a  sense  of  justice,  and  from  no  want  of  power  ']." 

13.  Character  of  Ketshwayo. 

In  reply  to  a  remonstrance  from  the  Governor  of  Natal,  on  the  sub- 
ject of  the  murder  of  Zulu  women,  in  which  he  was  reminded  of  the 
promises  he  made  on  his  coronation  to  the  British  representative  then 
present,  Ketshwayo  said  (1876) : 

"Did  I  ever  tell  Shepstone?  Did  he  tell  the  white  people  I  made 
such  an  arrangement?  Because,  if  he  did,  he  has  deceived  them.  I 
do  kill,  but  do  not  consider  yet  I  have  done  anything  in  the  way  of 
killing.  Why  do  the  white  people  start  at  nothing?  I  have  not  yet 
begun.  I  have  yet  to  kill ;  it  is  the  custom  of  our  nation,  and  I  shall 
not  depart  from  it.  Why  does  the  Governor  of  Natal  speak  to  me 
about  my  laws?  Do  I  go  to  Natal  and  dictate  to  him  about  his  laws? 
I  shall  not  agree  to  any  laws  or  rules  from  Natal,  and  by  so  doing 
throw  the  great  Kraal  which  I  govern  into  the  water.  My  people  will 
not  listen  unless  they  are  killed ;  and,  while  wishing  to  be  friends  with 


NOTES  275 

the  English,  I  do  not  agree  to  give  over  my  people  to  laws  sent  by 
them.  Have  I  not  asked  the  English  Government  to  allow  me  to  wash 
my  spears,  since  the  death  of  my  father  Umpandi,  and  they  have  kept 
playing  with  me  all  this  time,  and  treating  me  like  a  child  ?  Go  back 
and  tell  the  English  that  I  shall  act  on  my  own  account,  and  if  they 
wish  me  to  agree  to  their  laws,  I  shall  leave  and  become  a  wanderer ; 
but  before  I  go  it  will  be  seen,  as  I  shall  not  go  without  having  acted. 
Go  back  and  tell  the  white  man  this,  and  let  them  hear  it  well.  The 
Governor  of  Natal  and  I  are  equal.  He  is  governor  of  Natal,  and  I 
am  governor  here."    (From  despatch  of  Frere,  December  10,  1878.) 

14.  Recall  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere. 

The  reasons  for  the  defeat  of  the  Colonial  Government  and  the 
failure  of  the  proposal  for  a  Federation  Conference  in  June  1880,  appear 
from  the  following  : — 

Extracts  from  Sir  Bartle  Frere's  despatch  of  August  3,  1880,  reply- 
ing to  telegraphic  announcement  of  his  recall  sent  by  Lord  Kimberley 
on  August  I. 

In  5-  he  complains  of  the  unfairness  of  leaving  him  in  office  "  con- 
demned to  removal  upon  change  of  government "  [the  Liberals  came  in 
power  in  the  spring  of  this  year],  and  "  weakened  and  discredited  by 
the  want  of  the  full  confidence  of  their  successors,  to  attempt  such  a 
task  as  forwarding  the  policy  of  a  union  of  South  African  Provinces." 
And  continues : 

"  7.  My  ministers  loyally  made  the  attempt  .  .  .  relying  on  the 
tradition  that  the  varying  political  views  of  parties  in  England  did  not 
influence  the  great  lines  of  English  colonial  policy,  and  that  in  attempt- 
ing the  task  undertaken  at  the  desire  of  your  lordship's  predecessor,  they 
would  enjoy  the  benefit  of  the  hearty  support  of  Her  Majesty's  present 
Government. 

"  13.  [The  position  of  the  Transvaal  .  .  .  was  an  essential  element 
in  the  question  of  South  African  union.  There  were  present  in  the 
colony  at  the  time  delegates  from  the  disaffected  party  in  the  Transvaal], 
ably  directed  by  leading  members  of  the  local  opposition.  They  were 
generally  believed  to  be  in  close  correspondence  with  some  leading 
members  of  the  Liberal  party  in  England,  who  were  said  to  assure  them 
of  success  .  .  .  [Members  of  the  Cape  Parliament  who  represented 
Dutch  constituencies  were  asked  to  postpone  the  Conference  proposals 
to  the  question  of  cancelling  the  annexation  of  the  Transvaal]." 

Lord  Kimberley  says,  in  his  reply  to  this  despatch  (addressed  to  the 
Administrator  of  the  Cape,  and  dated  October  14,  1884) : — 

That  (l)  there  has  not  been  "  the  smallest  indication  of  any  difference 
of  opinion  between  Her  Majesty's  Government  and  Sir  Bartle  Frere  " 
on  the  question  of  Confederation  ;  (2)  that  it  was  precisely  for  this 
reason  that  the  Government  of  the  Colony  was  not  taken  out  of 
Sir  Bartle  Frere's  hands  on  the  change  of  Government  in  England,  and 


2  76  SOUTH  AFRICA 

because  they  did  not  wish  it  to  seem  that  they  withdrew  their  support 
from  him  and  his  Colonial  ministers  "at  the  critical  moment  when  the 
conference  resolutions  were  about  to  be  brought  before  the  Cape  Par- 
liament." 

The  despatch  concludes, 

"  6.  Her  Majesty's  Government  fully  recognise  that  Sir  Bartle  Frere 
failed  in  carrj'ing  through  that  policy  from  no  shortcoming  on  his  own 
part,  and  they  are  content  to  accept  his  statements  of  the  reason  of  that 
failure  as  evidence  that  the  causes  lie  much  deeper  than  any  mere  per- 
sonal considerations." 

Of  these  "causes,"  the  strongest  was  the  sympathy  of  the  Colonists 
of  Dutch  extraction  at  the  Cape  with  their  kinsmen  in  the  Transvaal. 
In  fact,  the  words  of  Sir  George  Grey  (written  in  1858)  had  come  true. 
The  whole  Dutch  population  in  South  Africa  were  "acting  in  unison." 

15.  The  relationship  of  England  to  the  Transvaal. 

Extract  from  a  despatch  of  Sir  Michael  Hicks-Beach  to  Sir  Garnet 
Wolseley,  November  20,  1879. 

"4.  .  .  .  The  power  and  authority  of  England  have  for  many  years 
been  paramount  there  [i.e.  in  the  Transvaal] ;  and  neither  by  the  Sand 
River  Convention  of  1852,  nor  at  any  other  time,  did  Her  Majesty's 
Government  surrender  the  right  and  duty  of  requiring  that  the  Trans- 
vaal should  be  governed  with  a  view  to  the  common  safety  of  the 
various  European  communities.  It  has  long  been  obvious  that  the 
largest  measure  of  freedom  which  the  country  could  enjoy  consistently 
with  the  fulfilment  of  this  condition,  would  be  found  in  that  union  which 
seems  to  have  been  contemplated  by  the  Volksraad  in  1877,  when  by 
a  resolution  quoted  and  adopted  in  the  memorial  of  the  Boer  Committee, 
dated  April  16,  and  again  in  their  memorandum  of  the  same  date,  they 
declared  their  readiness  to  enter  into  a  closer  union  with  Her  Majesty's 
Colonies  for  the  benefit  of  South  Africa. 

"5.  As  there  has  never  been  any  room  for  doubting  that  Her 
Majesty's  power  would  continue  to  be  supreme  in  South  Africa,  the 
union  provided  for  by  the  South  African  Act,  1877,  is  practically  that 
which  the  people  of  the  Transvaal  have  professed  to  desire ;  and  it  is 
obvious  that,  as  a  member  of  a  South  African  Confederation,  the  country 
might  receive  a  constitution  which  would  confer  upon  the  people,  under 
the  paramount  authority  of  the  British  Crown,  the  fullest  independence 
compatible  with  that  thorough  unity  of  action  which  the  common  welfare 
demands ;  and  would  enable  them  practically  to  govern  themselves 
according  to  their  own  views  in  all  matters,  except  those  as  to  which 
an  independent  power,  unless  determined  to  be  hostile,  would  be  obliged 
to  co-oi:.erate  with  its  neighbours." 


NOTES  277 

16.  The  attitude  of  the  Orange  Free  State. 

Extract  from  telegram  of  President  Brand,  Bloemfontein,  to  Consul 
for  Orange  Free  State,  London  (Feb.  15,  1881). 

"  .  .  .  As  soon  as  I  heard  that  a  collision  had  taken  place,  I  ordered 
circulars  to  be  written  to  our  border  Landdrosts,  to  publish  and  make 
known  to  our  Field  Cornets  and  Burghers  that,  as  their  President  and 
Friend,  I  requested  and  directed  them  to  abstain  from  taking  any  part 
in  the  unfortunate  state  of  affairs  ;  that  by  so  doing  the  time  might 
perhaps  come  when,  by  our  friendly  offices,  the  Government  and  people 
of  the  Free  State  might  be  of  real  service  to  secure  the  blessings  of 
peace,  and  assist  in  a  satisfactory  settlement." 

Extract  from  Sir  Evelyn  Wood's  despatch  announcing  agreement  to 
terms  (March  21,  1881)  :  — 

"  Brand's  presence  has  been  invaluable."     (c — 2837.) 

17.  The  attitude  of  the  Africander  party  in  the  Cape  Colony. 

Telegrams  from  Mr  Hofmeyr,  the  leader  of  the  Africander  party  in 
the  Cape  Colony,  to  General  Joubert. 

"  March  8. 

"  Friends  have  heard  with  great  pleasure  armistice,  as  promising  of 
peace.  Believe  British  Government  anxious  to  meet  wishes  of  Boers, 
but  difficulty  is  how  to  grant  concession  either  before  you  have  desisted 
from  opposition,  or  British  arms  victorious.  We  pray  you  help  Govern- 
ment, by  adopting  conciliatory  tone,  and  offering  desist  from  armed 
opposition,  on  tacit  understanding  that  no  further  use  be  made  by 
British  of  such  desisting  than  to  send  limited  number  of  troops  across 
border,  and  provisioning  garrisons.  Also  hope  if  Commissioners  pro- 
posed if  either  Wood  or  Robinson,  with  Brand  and  Villiers,  you  will 
not  hesitate  accept,  if  such  commission  have  full  power." 

"  March  11. 

"After  a  thorough  investigation  by  my  friends,  independence  can  be 
secure  in  no  other  way  than  as  follows  :  the  assembly  of  a  Commission 
as  proposed  in  my  former  telegram ;  should  the  Commission  be  ap- 
pointed with  full  power,  your  conditional  independence  must  be  begged 
for  through  the  people  as  a  reclamation  ;  but  in  any  case,  before  the 
Commission  can  be  appointed,  either  the  British  arms  must  have  con- 
quered, or  the  Boers  must  have  given  a  tangible  proof  of  submission  in 
the  eyes  of  the  world  ;  consider  earnestly  I  pray  you  what  is  said  in  my 
previous  telegram  ;  also  that,  in  case  no  agreement  is  come  to,  the 
armistice  will  give  rise  to  great  dissatisfaction  among  the  Boers,  and  give 
occasion  for  fresh  accusation  of  untrustworthiness  against  the  Boers. 
God  give  you  peace."     (c — 2837.) 


2  78  SOUTH  AFRICA 

1 8.  The  Retrocession  of  the  Transvaal. 

Letter  of  Sir  George  Colley  to  General  Joubert  before  the  advance 
upon  the  Boer  position  at  Langsnek. 

"Head  Quarters  Camp,  Fort  Amiel, 
"January  23,  1881. 

"Sir, 

"  I  duly  received  the  letter  of  December  17,  signed  by  your- 
self and  other  leaders  of  the  insurgents ;  and,  simultaneously  with  it, 
the  news  of  the  attacks  made  at  different  points  on  Her  Majesty's 
forces.  .   .  . 

"The  men  who  follow  you  are,  many  of  them,  ignorant,  and  know 
and  understand  little  of  anything  outside  their  own  camp.  But  you, 
who  are  well  educated  and  have  travelled,  cannot  but  be  aware  how 
hopeless  is  the  struggle  you  have  embarked  upon,  and  how  little  any 
accidental  success  can  affect  the  ultimate  result.  To  save,  therefore, 
the  innocent  lives  that  must  be  sacrificed  and  the  blood  that  must  be 
uselessly  spilt  in  a  prolonged  resistance,  I  call  upon  you  to  dismiss  your 
followers  ;  and  when  the  forces  now  in  arms  against  Her  Majesty  have 
dispersed,  I  shall  be  prepared  to  give  attention  to,  and  to  forward  to 
Her  Majesty's  Government  for  consideration,  any  representations  which 
are  made  to  me  of  grievances  under  which  any  of  Her  Majesty's  subjects 
in  the  Transvaal  believe  themselves  to  suffer. 

"I  have,  &c." 


Joubert's  reply. 


"  Camp  of  Commandant  General, 
"January  27,  iSSi. 


"...  We  are  unable  to  satisfy  your  demands  in  terms  of  your 
letter.  So  long  as  your  Excellency  addresses  us  as  rebels,  and  inti- 
mates that  the  leaders  are  contemptuously  misleading  a  multitude 
of  ignorant  people,  it  is  utterly  hopeless  for  us  to  find  proper  words  to 
reply. 

"  But  before  God  we  would  not  be  justified  if  we  did  not  avail  our- 
selves of  this,  perhaps  the  last  opportunity,  of  speaking  to  you,  as  the 
representative  of  Her  Majesty  the  Queen  and  the  people  of  England,  for 
whom  we  have  the  highest  respect. 

"  We  must  emphatically  repeat  that  we  are  willing  to  assist  in  respect 
of  the  wishes  of  the  Imperial  Government  for  the  Confederation  of  South 
Africa. 

[Refers  to  the  Proclamation  of  the  Triumvirate]  .  .  ,  "  We  would 
be  satisfied  with  the  cancellation  of  the  annexation  and  the  restoration 
of  the  South  African  Republic  under  the  patronage  of  Her  Majesty  the 
Queen,  so  that  once  a  year  the  British  Flag  shall  be  hoisted,  all  in 
strict  accordance  with  the  above-mentioned  claim  of  our  first  pro- 
clamation. 


NOTES  279 

"  If  your  Excellency  perseveres  to  refute  this,  we  shall  submit  our- 
selves to  our  destiny.     But  the  Lord  will  provide. 

"Ihave,  &c."     (c— 2866.) 

Colley  moved  out  and  attacked  on  January  28.  Then  followed 
Langsnek  (Jan,  28) ;  Ingogo  Heights  (Feb.  8) ;  Majuba  Hill,  and 
death  of  Colley  (Feb.  27). 

The  terms  actually  offered  by  Sir  Evelyn  Wood,  and  accepted  by  the 
Boers,  were  these  : — 

(i. )  Complete  amnesty  to  all,  including  leaders,  except  to  persons  who 
had  committed  acts  contrary  to  rules  of  civilised  warfare.  (Despatch  of 
Colonial  Secretary  of  March  8. ) 

(ii.)  Commission  named — Sir  H.  Robinson,  Chief  Justice  de  Villiers, 
and  Sir  E.  Wood ;  President  Brand  to  be  present  at  proceedings. 

(iii.)  Complete  self-government  under  British  suzerainty,  with  British 
Resident  at  Pretoria  ;  provision  to  be  made  for  (a)  protection  of  native 
interests,  (d)  arrangement  of  frontier  affairs,  and  (c)  relations  with  Foreign 
Powers  by  the  Commission. 

(iv.)  Complete  self-government  to  be  granted,  at  latest,  within  six 
months.  (Despatch  of  Colonial  Secretary  of  March  12,  and  Sir 
E.  Wood  of  March  21.) 

They  were  ratified  on  receipt  of  telegram  from  Colonial  Secretary  on 
March  22.     (c— 2837.) 

19.  Behaviour  of  British  troops  in  action  against  the  Boers. 

The  charge  of  the  58th  at  Langsnek. 

"  Colonel  Deane,  with  splendid  gallantry,  tried  to  carry  the  hill  by  a 
rush.  His  horse  was  shot  but  he  extricated  himself,  and,  dashing  for- 
ward on  foot,  fell,  riddled  with  bullets,  ten  yards  in  front  of  the  foremost 
man  .  .  .  the  58th,  which  had  fallen  back  leisurely  (supported  by  part 
of  the  60th),  without  haste  or  confusion,  reformed  at  the  foot  of  the  hill, 
and  marched  back  into  position  in  as  good  order,  and  with  as  erect  and 
soldierly  bearing,  as  when  it  marched  out."  (From  despatch  of  Com- 
mander Romilly.) 

Corporal  Farmer  and  Private  Murray  were  recommended  respectively 
for  the  Victoria  Cross  and  the  Distinguished  Service  Medal,  by  General 
Sir  Evelyn  Wood,  for  bravery  displayed  at  Majuba  Hill. 

"Corporal  Farmer  showed  a  spirit  of  self-abnegation,  and  an  example 
of  cool  bravery  which  cannot  be  too  highly  commended.  While  the 
Boers  closed  with  our  troops  near  the  wells.  Corporal  Farmer  held  a 
white  flag  over  the  wounded,  and  when  the  arm  holding  the  flag  was 
shot  through,  he  called  out  that  he  had  'another.'  He  then  raised  the 
flag  with  the  other  arm  and  continued  to  do  so  until  that  also  was  pierced 
by  a  bullet. 


28o  SOUTH  AFRICA 

"  Private  John  Murray  was  close  to  the  brow  over  our  line  of  advance 
during  the  final  forward  movement  of  the  Boers.  A  Scotchman  in  the 
Boer  ranks  called  upon  Private  Murray  to  surrender.     The  latter  replied 

'  I'll  see  you  d d  first,'  and  jumped  down,  receiving  a  bullet-wound 

in  the  arm.  Half-way  down  the  hill  his  knee  fell  out  of  joint,  but, 
obtaining  the  assistance  of  a  comrade  to  restore  it  to  place,  he  returned 
at  six  o'clock  with  his  rifle  and  side-arms  to  camp,  where  he  was  seen 
by  Second-Lieutenant  Sinclair-Wemyss,  of  the  22nd  Highlanders." 
(From  despatch  of  General  Wood  to  Secretary  for  War.) 

It  is  noticeable  that  three  companies  of  the  92nd  Highlanders — the 
regiment  which  was  most  distinguished  in  the  march  to  Candahar — were 
in  action  at  Majuba.     (c — 2950.) 


20.  Mr  Pearson's  argument  from  Natal. 

Natal  is  a  case  in  point,  and  "  the  case  of  Natal  is  most  instructive 
for  what  may  be  expected  in  Africa  generally"  (p.  36).  In  1891  the 
colony  had  a  European  population  of  only  36,000  out  of  a  total  of 
481,000  inhabitants.  Moreover,  "  the  lower  races  have  nearly  doubled 
since  1863,  when  one-seventh  of  the  population  was  European." 

The  weak  point  in  Mr  Pearson's  argument  is  the  absence  of  analogy 
between  Natal  and  "Africa  "as  a  whole.  Africa  cannot  increase  by 
immigration,  but  only  by  natural  increment. 

(i)  But  in  Natal  the  growth  of  the  Native  population  is  not  due  to 
natural  increment,  but  mainly  to  immigration.  The  Kafirs  are  attracted 
by  the  leniency  and  security  of  British  rule,  and  these  immigrants  have 
sometimes  travelled  500  or  600  miles  on  foot  from  the  interior.  (Peace, 
"  Our  Colony  of  Natal,"  p.  44.) 

(2)  The  growth  of  commerce  has  enhanced  the  value  of  the  cow,  an 
animal  adopted  by  the  Kafir  as  the  general  measure  of  wealth,  and,  in 
particular,  the  medium  in  which  the  bride-price  is  paid.  The  Natal 
Legislature,  so  far  from  fearing  the  increase  of  the  natives,  have  actually 
had  to  pass  a  law,  fixing  the  legal  maximum  price  for  a  bride  at  ten 
cows,  in  order  to  prevent  the  operation  of  this  check  on  marriage. 
(Natal  Laws,  1891,  No.  19.) 

(3)  Mr  Pearson's  figures  do  not  allow  for  a  recent  increase  in  the 
white  population  due  to  immigration.  The  figures,  as  given  by  the 
Colonial  Office  Report  (1891-92),  are  as  follows  : — 

1879.  1891, 

Whites,      .         .     22,654  46,788 

Indian  Coolies,  .     16,999  41.142 

Kafirs,        .         .  319,934  455.983 


NOTES  281 

21.  Change  of  opinion  in  the  Cape  Colony. 

The  following  extract  is  from  Mr  Leonard's  (late  Attorney-General) 
speech  at  the  meeting  held  on  September  24,  1884,  at  Capetown,  to 
protest  against  the  abandonment  of  Bechuanaland  (and  the  trade  route 
to  the  interior)  by  England.  This  meeting  was  termed  by  the  Volksblad 
"  the  most  important  meeting  held  in  the  colony  since  that  held  in 
1849  to  protest  against  the  formation  of  a  penal  settlement  at  the  Cape." 
His  words  indicate  that  a  great  change  had  taken  place  in  the  public 
opinion  of  the  colony,  as  compared  with  that  prevalent  in  1879-1880 
(the  period  of  the  Transvaal  War).  In  fact,  for  the  first  time  the  ques- 
tion of  the  northward  expansion  of  the  whites  was  recognised  to  be  a 
question  of  civilisation,  and  not  one  of  racial  jealousy. 

"Certain  individuals  in  this  colony,  and  certain  individuals  in  the 
interior  states  have  made  up  their  mind  to  trade  upon  the  ignorance  of 
the  poor  people  in  the  Transvaal,  who  think  the  people  of  Great  Britain 
have  been  defeated  at  Laings  Nek  and  Majuba,  and  the  object  of  their 
intrigues  is  to  destroy  the  British  supremacy  in  South  Africa.  .  .  .  This 
has  been  the  object  of  some  of  the  people  of  the  Transvaal,  and  per  fas 
et  nefas  to  make  this  colony  a  hidebound  dependency  of  the  British 
Crown.  Their  object  has  been  ...  to  cross  our  northern  boundary, 
to  take  land  down  to  the  Indian  Ocean  on  the  East,  and  down  to  the 
Kalahari  on  the  West,  in  order  that  this  portion  of  the  British  Empire 
may  for  ever  be  shut  in,  and  British  sentiment  be  destroyed  ;  that  so 
the  Transvaal,  by  its  powers  of  unlimited  expansion,  shall  become  the 
paramount  state  in  South  Africa  ;  and  with  them  is  to  rest  whether  we 
shall  be  graciously  allowed  to  guard  our  coasts,  or  whether  that  simple 
privilege  shall  be  denied  us.  .  .  . 

**  It  would  be  a  disastrous  thing  to  everyone  if  Great  Britain  should 
lose  her  supremacy  here  ;  and  the  withdrawal  of  the  British  flag  from 
this  country  would  be  disastrous  not  only  to  loyal  subjects  of  Her 
Majesty,  but  to  the  sedition-mongers,  the  traitors,  and  the  rascals  who 
have  for  years  past  endeavoured  to  break  down  our  British  supremacy. 
All  South  Africa  would  then  be  reduced  to  the  same  state  as  the  Trans- 
vaal— a  country  without  a  Government — and  I  should  be  sorry  to  see 
this  colony  in  the  state  of  the  South  African  Republic  ;  and  I  should 
be  sorry  to  see  this  country  under  the  flag  of  mighty  Germany  or  of 
Republican  France. 

•'  Well,  gentlemen,  I  came  to  say  my  say,  and  I  think  I  have  said  it. 
We,  as  loyal  subjects  of  the  Queen,  as  law-abiding  and  law-loving 
people,  whether  born  subjects  of  Her  Majesty  or  not,  have  been 
challenged  to  say  our  say,  we  have  been  told  England  durst  not  move 
hand  nor  foot  to  maintain  her  honour,  to  uphold  her  supremacy,  be- 
cause of  the  colonists.  I  am  not  going  to  speak  of  the  colonists  of 
Rooi  Grond,  who  slaughter  young  people  of  five,  six,  seven,  and  eight 
years  of  age,  nor  of  colonists  who  shoot  women,  but  I  claim  to-night  to 
speak  for  ten  thousand,  or  one  hundred  thousand,  in  this  colony,  and  1 
say  that  is  our  answer  to  the  taunt  which  has  been  put  upon  us." 
(From  the  Cape  Times,  September  25,  1884.) 


282  SOUTH  AFRICA 

22.  The  Diamond  Laws. 

Under  the  Trade  in  Diamonds  Consolidation  Act  (No.  48,  1882), 
(inter  alia) : — 

(i)  It  is  declared  unlawful  for  any  person  to  have  in  his  possession 
any  rough  or  uncut  diamond  unless  he  is  able  to  produce  his  proper 
permit  for  the  same,  or  to  account  satisfactorily  for,  or  prove  his  right 
to,  the  possession  of  the  same.  Only  duly  licensed  dealers,  etc.,  are 
permitted  to  buy,  etc.,  any  rough  or  uncut  diamond.  The  penalty  for 
contravention  is  a  fine  not  exceeding  ^^looo,  or  imprisonment  up  to 
fifteen  years,  or  both. 

(2)  Persons  finding  diamonds  on  private  property  are  required  to 
make  a  declaration  of  the  fact  within  fourteen  days  to  the  Resident 
Magistrate  of  the  district. 

(3)  All  persons  authorised  to  deal,  etc.,  in  diamonds  are  required  to 
keep  a  register  of  their  transactions.  Such  record  including  (a)  date 
of  purchases,  etc. ;  (d)  name  of  consigner,  cutter,  seller,  buyer,  owner, 
etc. ;  (c)  weight  of  each  parcel ;  (d)  number  of  stones  of  10  carats  and 
upwards  in  each  parcel ;  (e)  price  paid  or  received ;  {/)  weight  of  a 
single  stone  valued  by  buyer  at  over  ;f  100.  A  copy  of  this  register 
must  be  forwarded  every  month  to  the  Chief  of  PoUce,  etc.,  and  pro- 
duced when  required. 

The  operation  of  this  Act  is  confined  to  "  the  district  forming  the  late 
Territory  of  Griqualand  West "  ;  but  a  subsequent  Act  (No.  14  of 
1885),  extends  its  operation  (with  slight  modification)  to  the  whole  of 
the  Cape  Colony. 

23.  The  Transvaal  Gold  Laws. 

By  the  law  of  1872,  the  right  to  all  minerals  and  precious  stones  is 
declared  to  be  vested  in  the  State.  This  and  subsequent  enactments 
were  codified  in  1885  by  the  "  Consolidated  Gold  Law," 

The  President  with  the  consent  of  the  Executive  Council  is  em- 
powered to  declare  both  Government  and  private  lands  to  be  "public 
diggings "  ;  and  further  provisions  secure  an  equitable  distribution  of 
the  prospective  mineral  wealth  between  the  government,  the  owner  (if 
private  land),  the  prospector  or  discoverer,  and  tlie  public. 

The  owner  is  entitled  to  (i)  a  7nijnpaclit  or  mining  lease  over  not 
more  than  one-tenth  of  the  "  farm"  or  estate  ;  (2)  "  owner's  claims"  in 
proportion  to  the  extent  of  the  farm  but  not  exceeding  ten  in  number, 
and  certain  "  preferent  claims  "  for  his  nominees ;  (3)  one-half  of  the 
proceeds  of  diggers'  or  prospectors'  licences,  and  three-fourths  of  the 
"stand"  (or  building)  licences.  The  mijnpacht  is  granted  for  not  less 
than  five,  nor  more  than  twenty  years,  and  is  renewable. 

The  prospector  or  discoverer  is  entitled  to  six  claims  free  of  licence 
so  long  as  they  remain  registered  in  his  name. 

The  Government  provides  officials  for  the  administration  of  justice 
and  the  collection  of  licence  fees  and  other  revenue.     The  rent  on  the 


NOTES  283 

area  covered  by  the  mijnpacht  is  fixed  at  los.  per  morgen  (two  acres). 
Prospectors'  licences  are  issued  at  5s.  per  month,  and  entitle  the 
licensees  to  hold  and  examine  claims.  Diggers'  licences  are  issued 
at  15s.  or  20s.  (with  machinery).  The  Government  also  takes  one- 
fourth  of  the  "stand  "  licences. 

In  extent  the  claims  measure: — (l)  30  x  30  Dutch  feet  (30  Dutch 
are  equal  to  31  English  feet)  for  precious  stones;  (2)  150  x  150  for 
alluvial  mining  ;  (3)  150  on  the  strike  x  400  on  the  dip  for  quartz  mining. 
Only  Europeans  can  hold  claims,  and  each  claim  must  be  pegged  off 
and  registered  in  the  name  of  a  separate  person. 

The  Transvaal  claim  rights  are  identical  with  those  of  the  Spanish 
"  custom  "  in  the  Americas.  The  claim  holder  is  only  entitled  to  work 
minerals  within  the  limits  of  the  surface  boundary  carried  vertically 
downwards.  He  cannot  follow  the  reef  in  all  its  "dips,  spurs,  and 
angles,"  as  is  the  case  in  the  United  States.  In  consequence  of  this 
limitation  claims  have  been  secured  on  the  Randt  for  more  than  a  mile 
southwards  across  the  dips  ;  and  it  is  combinations  of  these  claims 
which  constitute  the  properties  of  the  "deep-level"  Companies. 

24.  The  Chemical  Processes  in  use  on  the  Randt. 

Chlorination.  The  concentrates  obtained  by  the  vanner  from  the 
pyritic  ore  are  (i)  roasted  to  rid  them  of  sulphur,  (2)  charged  into  vats 
and  permeated  by  chlorine  gas  for  sixty  hours  or  a  sufficient  period  for 
the  gold  to  combine  with  the  chlorine.  The  chloride  of  gold  thus 
formed  is  (3)  dissolved  by  the  introduction  of  water,  and,  after  the 
solution  has  been  freed  from  sand  and  iron  oxides,  it  is  run  into  pre- 
cipitating vats,  and  the  gold  which  it  contains  is  (4)  precipitated  by 
sulphate  of  iron.  These  precipitates  are  (5)  collected  and  smelted  into 
bars  of  almost  pure  gold.  By  this  process  95  per  cent,  of  the  gold  is 
recovered  from  the  concentrates,  an  amount  which  represents  9 '5  of 
the  total  recovery  of  90  per  cent,  obtained  by  all  processes  from  the 
pyritic  ore. 

Cyaniding.  The  tailings  left  by  the  vanners  are  charged  into  vats 
where  the  gold  is  (l)  dissolved  out  of  the  mass  by  successive  solutions 
of  cyanide  of  potassium.  These  auriferous  solutions  are  carried  into 
precipitating  boxes,  and  the  gold  which  they  contain  is  (2)  precipitated 
by  the  medium  of  zinc  scrap.  By  this  process  70  per  cent,  of  the  gold 
in  the  tailings  is  recovered,  or  21  per  cent,  of  the  total  extraction  by  all 
processes. 

25.  Extract  from  Mr  Hamilton  Smith's  article  in  Times,  February 
19,  1895. 

"In  the  report  of  1892  I  estimated  for  the  length  of  11  miles  the 
average  thickness  of  the  ore  to  be  worked  was  S  ft.  ;  I  should  now 
estimate  it  to  be  6  ft.,  but  I  find  in  many  mines  that  a  good  deal  of 
poorer  ore  has  been  left  standing,  so  that  the  average  yield  from  this 
thickness  of  6  fl.,  when  it  is  all  mined,  will  be  less  than  the  13  dwt. 


284  SOUTH  AFRICA 

before  given.  My  opinion,  though,  as  given  in  1S92  of  the  quantity  of 
gold  to  be  extracted  remains  unchanged,  the  greater  thickness  compen- 
sating for  the  smaller  yield  per  ton.  In  1894  the  value  of  the  Randt 
gold  bullion  was  ;if7, 000,000,  and  this  without  any  increase  from  the 
new  deep-level  mines  ;  these  latter  will  become  fairly  productive  in 
1897,  so  for  that  year  a  product  of  fully  ;i{^i 0,000, 000  can  be  fairly 
expected.  Judging  from  present  appearances,  the  juaximum  product  of 
the  Randt  will  be  reached  about  the  end  of  this  century,  when  it  will 
probably  exceed  ;^i 2, 500,000  per  annum.  In  addition  to  the  yield 
which  may  be  expected  from  the  main  reef  series,  I  think,  in  a  few  years 
a  considerable  quantity  of  gold  will  be  produced  from  other  reefs, 
especially  from  what  is  called  the  "black  reef."  This  reef,  with 
perhaps  one  exception,  thus  far  appears  to  be  what  in  mining  parlance 
is  called  "spotted,"  the  ore  varying  greatly  in  value  in  the  distance  of  a 
few  feet.  Very  likely  more  money  will  be  lost  than  made  in  working 
this  deposit,  but  the  gold  from  it  may  in  time  add  appreciably  to  the 
bullion  output  of  the  district. 

From  the  foregoing  statement  it  is  evident  that  the  chances  are  far 
greater  now  than  they  were  in  1892,  of  my  conjectures  of  that  date 
being  realised,  and  to-day  nearly  every  one  conversant  with  the  Randt 
considers  them  as  being  considerably  under  the  mark.  The  Randt  for 
1894  with  its  product  of  ;i^7, 000,000  stands  third  in  the  world,  the 
United  States  still  remaining  first  with  its  greatly  increased  output  of 
over  ;[f9,ooo,ooo,  and  Australasia  (Australia,  New  Zealand,  and 
Tasmania)  being  probably  second  with  a  product  of  about  ;i^8,ooo,ooo. 
In  1849  the  world's  product  of  gold  was  about  ;i^6,ooo,ooo,  which  in- 
creased to  something  over  ;^30,ooo,ooo  in  1853,  owing  to  the  discovery 
and  working  of  the  rich  placers  of  California  and  Australia  ;  from  1853 
the  yield  steadily  declined  until  in  1S83  it  had  fallen  to  less  than 
;^20,ooo,ooo.  Since  1887  the  yield  has  advanced  by  leaps  and  bounds, 
the  increase  being  chiefly  due  to  the  new  discoveries  in  South  Africa, 
until  for  1894  the  product  has  most  probably  amounted  to  fully  8,600,000 
ounces  of  fine  gold,  worth  over  ;f  36, 500,000,  an  output  certainly  much 
greater  than  that  for  any  previous  year  in  the  history  of  the  world.  In 
1853  it  was  evident  that  the  great  yield  from  both  California  and 
Australia  would  be  short-lived,  whereas  the  probabilities  now  are  that 
this  great  product  of  ^^36, 500,000  will  be  fully  maintained  for  quite  a 
number  of  years  to  come  ;  and  yet,  in  spite  of  this  fact  and  this  belief, 
the  prices  of  commodities  generally  in  use,  such  as  wheat,  cotton,  wool, 
sugar,  iron,  copper,  &c. ,  are  now  lower  than  they  have  been  for  the 
past  hundred  years.  It  has  been  generally  accepted  that  one  of  the 
principal  causes  of  the  rise  in  the  price  of  standard  articles  from  1849  to 
i860  was  due  to  the  influx  of  gold  from  California  and  Australia.  Will 
the  same  rise  in  values  measured  by  the  ounce  of  gold  take  place  in  the 
coming  five  years  ?  This  is  a  question  of  vast  importance  to  all  of  us, 
from  the  richest  capitalist  to  the  poorest  labourer.  I  see  that  at  least 
one  authority  of  position  seems  to  be  of  the  opinion  that  the  probable 
rise  in  prices  due  to  this  great  flood  of  gold  will  have  the  effect  of  so  in- 


NOTES  285 

creasing  the  cost  of  mining  and  reduction  that  many  mines  in  the  Randt 
will  be  compelled  to  suspend  work.  This,  I  think,  is  an  altogether 
erroneous  view,  for  should  general  prices  recover  to  their  level  of  ten  or 
fifteen  years  ago,  this  additional  cost  would  be  fully  compensated  for  by 
the  increased  economies  which  year  by  year  will  be  carried  into  effect  in 
operating  the  Randt  mines  ;  so,  unless  a  mountain  of  gold  should  be 
discovered  somewhere  or  other,  the  Randt  will  in  every  probability 
continue  to  increase  its  yield  for  at  least  five  or  six  years  to  come." 

26.  Equality  of  Natives. 
Baron  von  Hiibner  says  : — 

"  Experience  has  shown  the  impossibility  in  the  lon£^  run  of  governing 
colonies  of  mixed  population,  where  the  blacks  form  the  large  majority, 
by  means  of  a  responsible  or  Parliamentary  Government.  Thus  Jamaica 
has  asked,  on  its  own  initiative,  to  be  made  a  Crown  Colony.  Natal, 
on  the  representation  of  Lord  Wolseley,  did  the  same.  Cape  Colony, 
I  have  been  told  confidentially  by  politicians  in  Capetown,  will  be 
obliged  sooner  or  later  to  follow  suit."  ("Through  the  British 
Empire,"  vol.  i.  p.  146.) 

Against  this,  Sir  Hercules  Robinson  says  : — 

"  Responsible  Government  .  .  .  has  been  a  complete  success  not- 
withstanding that  the  natives  within  the  represented  districts  exceed 
the  Europeans  in  the  proportion  probably  of  nearly  two  to  one.  Where 
responsible  Government  at  the  Cape  has  broken  down  has  been  in  the 
attempt  to  govern  extra-colonial  native  territories,  such  as  Basutoland 
and  the  Transkei."     (Ti??ies,  March  4,  1884.) 

27.  The  Glen  Grey  Act  (August  1894). 

The  objects  of  the  Act,  as  disclosed  by  the  full  title,  are  "  to  provide 
for  the  disposal  of  lands  and  for  the  administration  of  local  affairs  with- 
in the  district  of  Glen  Grey  and  other  proclaimed  districts." 

Glen  Grey  (with  reservations  of  lands  owned  by  individuals  or  public 
bodies,  etc.)  is  to  be  divided  into  locations,  and  the  locations  into 
allotments  of  four  morgen  (8  acres),  to  be  held  on  perpetual  quit-rent 
(15s.)  tenure  by  individual  natives. 

Each  location,  with  its  respective  commonage,  is  to  be  placed  under 
the  control  of  three  persons,  being  resident  holders  of  land  within  the 
location,  "  who  shall  be  appointed  by  the  Governor  after  the  considera- 
tion of  the  wishes  and  recommendations  of  the  resident  holders  of  land 
in  the  location,"  and  hold  office  for  one  year.  These  "Location 
Boards  "  can  be  invested  with  the  powers,  etc.,  of  "  Village  Boards  of 
Management  "  by  the  Governor's  regulations.     (Part  I.  §§  2-16. ) 

The  succession  to  the  allotment  is  regulated  by  the  provisions  of 
§§  24  and  25  : — "  The  allotment  and  other  immovable  property  of  every 
registered  holder  shall' not  be  capable  of  being  devised  by  will,  but 
upon  his  or  her  decease  shall  devolve  upon  and  be  claimable  according 


2  86  SOUTH  AFRICA 

to  the  rule  of  primogeniture  by  one  male  person  to  be  called  the  heir," 
and  to  be  determined  by  the  table  given  in  §  24. 

The  Labour  tax  is  treated  in  Part  IV.  §§  33-36  : — "  Every  male 
native  residing  in  the  district,  exclusive  of  natives  in  possession  of 
lands  under  ordinary  quit-rent  titles,  or  in  freehold,  who,  in  the  judg- 
ment of  the  Resident  Magistrate,  is  fit  for  and  capable  of  labour,  shall 
pay  in  to  the  public  revenue  a  tax  of  ten  shillings  per  annum."  But  a 
native  is  excepted,  (i)  for  a  year,  if  he  has  been  in  service  beyond  the 
district  for  at  least  three  months  of  the  preceding  twelve  months  ;  (2) 
from  any  further  payment,  if  he  has  been  in  service  for  a  total  period, 
consecutive  or  otherwise,  of  not  less  than  three  years.  Also  the 
Resident  Magistrate  may  exempt  a  native  for  one  year  on  certain 
grounds  (among  them  employment  within  the  district  for  three  months). 

The  powers,  etc.,  of  the  District  Councib  are  contained  in  Part  V. 
§§  37-59  : — These  councils  are  to  consist  of  twelve  members,  of  whom 
six  are  appointed  by  the  Governor  and  six  are  selected  by  the  members 
of  the  Location  Boards.  The  Resident  Magistrate  is  an  additional 
member  of  the  Council  ex-officio,  and,  when  present,  is  to  act  as 
chairman.  The  Council  is  empowered  to  levy  a  rate  not  exceeding 
2d.  in  the  pound  on  the  rateable  property  within  the  district,  and  a  rate 
of  not  less  than  5s.  on  every  adult  male  native,  excepting  natives  in 
possession  of  lands  under  ordinary  quit-rent  title  or  in  freehold. 

Liquor  licences  are  dealt  with  in  Part  VI.  §§  60-64  • — The  principle 
of  local  option  is  adopted,  and  no  new  licences  are  to  be  granted  by  the 
Licencing  Court,  except  after  a  resolution  has  been  passed  by  a 
majority  of  the  members  of  the  District  Council  approving  of  the  issue 
of  the  licence.  Old  licences  may  be  renewed,  except  they  are  con- 
demned by  a  two-thirds  majority  of  the  District  Council  {§  63). 

28.  The  Conquest  of  Mashonaland  by  the  Matabele  Zulus. 

"  Some  fifty  years  ago  this  fine  country  must  have  been  thickly  in- 
habited, as  almost  every  valley  has,  at  one  time  or  another,  been  under 
cultivation.  The  sites  of  villages  are  also  very  numerous,  though  now 
only  marked  by  a  few  deep  pits  from  which  the  natives  obtained  the 
clay  used  by  them  for  plastering  their  huts  and  making  their  cooking 
pots ;  and  also  the  presence  usually  of  a  cluster  of  huge  acacia-trees, 
which  grow  to  a  far  greater  size  on  the  sites  of  old  villages  than  any- 
where else.  On  the  summit  of  every  hill  may  be  found  the  walls,  in 
more  or  less  perfect  preservation,  of  what,  I  think,  must  have  been 
cattle  kraals.  These  walls  are  very  neatly  built  of  squared  stones, 
nicely  fitted  together,  but  uncemented  with  any  kind  of  mortar.  The 
peaceful  people  inhabiting  this  part  of  Africa  must  then  have  been  in 
the  zenith  of  their  prosperity.  Herds  of  their  small  but  beautiful  cattle 
lowed  in  every  valley,  and  their  rich  and  fertile  country  doubtless 
afforded  them  an  abundance  of  vegetable  food.  About  1840,  however, 
the  Matabele  Zulus,  under  their  warlike  chief,  Unziligazi,  settled  in 
the  country  which  they  now  inhabit,  and  very  soon  bands  of  these 
ferocious  and    bloodthirsty  savages  overran  the  peaceful  vales  of  the 


NOTES 


287 


Mashuna  country  in  every  direction.  The  poor  Mashunas,  unskilled  in 
war,  and  living,  moreover,  in  small  communities  scattered  all  over  the 
country,  without  any  central  government,  fell  an  easy  prey  before  the 
fierce  invaders,  and  very  soon  every  stream  in  their  country  ran  red 
with  their  blood,  whilst  vultures  and  hyanas  feasted  undisturbed 
amidst  the  ruins  of  their  devastated  homes.  Their  cattle,  sheep,  and 
goats  were  driven  off  by  their  conquerors,  and  their  children,  when  old 
enough  to  walk  and  not  above  ten  or  twelve  years  of  age,  were  taken 
for  slaves ;  the  little  children  too  young  to  walk  were,  of  course,  killed 
together  with  their  mothers.  In  a  very  few  years  there  were  no  more 
Mashunas  left  in  the  open  country,  the  remnant  that  had  escaped 
massacre  having  fled  into  the  mountainous  districts  to  the  south  and 
east  of  their  former  dwellings,  where  they  still  live.  Thus,  in  a  short 
time  an  immense  extent  of  fertile  country  that  had,  perhaps,  for  ages 
past  supported  a  large  and  thriving  community,  was  again  given  back 
to  nature  ;  and  so  it  remains  to  the  present  day — an  utterly  uninhabited 
country,  roamed  over  at  will  by  herds  of  elands  and  other  antelopes." 
(Selous  :   "Travel  and  Adventure  in  Africa,"  pp.  80-81.) 


29.  Transvaal  Legislation. 

The   Enactments  of  the   Raad 
following  : — 

Name  of  Measure. 

Revision  of  the  Grond- 
wet,  or  Constitution. 


during  the   year  1896  include  the 


New  Press  Law. 


Aliens'  Expulsion  Law. 


Education  Law. 


Purpose  or  Effect. 

Three  months'  notice  of  new  law  (by 
publication  in  the  Staats  Courant)  no  longer 
necessary. 

President  can  prohibit,  entirely,  or  tem- 
porarily, dissemination  of  publications 
printed  outside  the  Republic  ;  political 
articles  must  bear  name  of  writer,  and 
writer,  editor,  printer,  publisher  and  distri- 
butors are  rendered  liable  to  severe  penal- 
ties if  the  matter  is  held  to  be  dangerous 
to  the  interests  of  the  Republic. 

Any  stranger  dangerous  to  public  peace 
and  order  may  be  expelled  by  order  of  the 
President  within  14  days.  Burghers  can 
appeal  to  the  High  Court ;  but  Uitlanders 
have  no  such  right,  being  liable  to  six 
months'  imprisonment  if  they  refuse  to  obey 
(and  then  to  be  forcibly  expelled). 

Gives  power  to  Superintendent  of  Edu- 
cation (Dr  Mansvelt,  a  Hollander)  to 
provide  for  education  of  non-Dutch  speak- 
ing children  whose  parents  reside  on  the 
gold-fields.  This  law  leaves  the  require- 
ments  of  the    Uitlanders   entirely  in  the 


SOUTH  AFRICA 


The  Johannesburg 
Municipality  Law. 


The  Liquor  Law. 


The  Aliens'  Admission 
Law. 


Name  of  Measure.  Purpose  or  Effect. 

hands  of  a  Government  official  who  is 
notoriously  in  favour  of  the  policy  of  mak- 
ing the  Uitlanders  learn  to  speak  Dutch. 
Out  of  ^103,000  set  apart  for  education 
for  current  year,  ;i^8oo  only  is  assigned  for 
English  schools.     (See  next  note.) 

The  Mayor  is  to  be  appointed  by  the 
Government ;  one  half  of  the  Members  of 
the  Municipal  Council  are  to  be  elected  by 
the  burghers,  and  the  remaining  half  by  the 
inhabitants.  In  other  words  the  control  is 
given  to  the  very  small  number  of  Boers 
and  Hollanders  (chiefly  officials)  resident  in 
the  town. 

The  sale  of  intoxicating  drinks  to  natives 
on  the  gold-fields  is  prohibited.  If  this  law 
is  enforced  its  effect  will  be  most  beneficial. 

After  January  ist,  1897,  all  immigrants 
must  be  furnished  with  either  (i)  a  regular 
passport,  which  must  show  that  they  have 
sufficient  means  to  support  themselves ;  or 
(2)  evidence  of  identity  and  capacity  to 
support  themselves,  and  obtain  from  a  Field 
Cornet,  or  other  officer  of  the  Republic,  a 
travelling  and  residing  passport.  This  latter 
is  to  be  renewed  every  three  months.  But 
if  the  holder  declares  his  intention  to  settle 
in  the  Republic,  it  need  only  be  renewed 
every  twelve  months. 

30.  The  Population  of  Johannesburg. 

An  official  census  was  taken  under  the  authority  of  the  Sanitary 
Board  between  July  15th  and  Oct.  21st,  1896.  It  shows  the  total 
population  living  within  a  three-mile  radius  of  the  Market-square  to 
number  102,078  persons.  Of  these  50,907  are  Europeans,  42,533 
Natives,  4,807  Asiatics,  952  Malays,  and  the  remaining  2,879  ^"^^ 
returned  as  of  mixed  and  other  races. 

The  origin  of  the  Europeans  is  shown  to  be  as  follows  : — 
Place  of  Birth. 

United  Kingdom,  .  16,265. 

Cape  Colony       .  .  15,162. 

Transvaal,           .  .  6,205. 

Russia,   .            .  .  3>335- 

Germany,            .  ,  2,262. 

Holland,             .  .  819. 

France,  .            .  .  402. 


NOTES  289 

With  additions  fVom  Sweden  and  Norway,  Italy,  Switzerland  and 
other  countries. 

The  political  states  of  the  25,058  European  males  over  16  years  of 
age  is  as  follows  : — 

1,039  are  burghers,  or  citizens  of  the  Republic. 
516  are  naturalised  subjects. 
23,503  have  no  vote. 

The  educational  position  appears  from  the  fact  that  out  of  13,391 
European  children  under  15  years  of  age,  6,992  are  unable  to  read  or 
write,  and  are  not  undergoing  instruction  of  any  kind. 

The  relation  of  the  Sexes  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  there  are  32,387 
European  Males  and  18,520  European  females.  And  of  31,981  married 
persons,  22,968  are  males  and  9,013  females. 

31.  The  Rinderpest. 

The  Zambesi  cattle  fever,  or  rinderpest,  broke  out  at  Buluwayo  on 
March  5th,  1896.  By  High  Commissioner's  proclamation  of  March  9th, 
the  removal  of  cattle  without  permission  was  forbidden,  and  powers 
were  given  to  the  Cattle  Inspector  to  isolate  and  destroy  affected  cattle, 
etc.  Notwithstanding  the  enforcement  of  the  regulations  the  disease 
made  its  way  to  Palapye,  in  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate  ;  and  on 
March  nth,  the  High  Commissioner  advised  the  Transvaal  Govern- 
ment of  the  fact.  President  Kriiger  at  once  forbade  the  importation  of 
cattle  from  Rhodesia  and  the  Bechuanaland  Protectorate.  Every  effort 
was  made  by  Mr  Newton,  the  Resident  Commissioner  at  Mafeking  to 
stay  the  progress  of  the  disease  in  the  Protectorate.  On  May  9th  the 
Treasury  sanctioned  the  expenditure  of  ^"50,000  by  the  Imperial 
authorities  for  the  purpose  of  compensating  the  owners  of  sound  cattle 
which  were  slaughtered,  and  for  the  distribution  of  food  amongst  the 
natives  and  the  transport  riders  who  were  reduced  to  destitution  by  the 
loss  of  their  cattle. 

The  Cape  Government  have  attempted  to  stay  the  disease  by  con- 
structing a  fence  across  the  Continent  following  the  line  of  the  Orange 
River,  and  guarding  the  fence  by  police.  But  according  to  a  statement 
made  by  Mr  F.  R.  Thompson,  late  Special  Rinderpest  Commissioner, 
to  Renter's  Agency  (published  Nov.  19th,  1896)  this  measure  has  been 
undertaken  too  late. 

"  Now,  after  a  lapse  of  six  weeks,  the  fencing  of  the  Orange  River 
is  being  commenced,  but  as  the  rinderpest  jumps  sixty  miles  a  day,  it 
is  too  late." 

"The  Transvaal  war,  native  rebellions,  and  the  Jameson  raid  sink 
into  insignificance  compared  with  the  present  situation,  which  is  un- 
doubtedly the  gravest  that  a  British  colony  has  ever  had  to  face.  The 
rinderpest  will  run  through  the  whole  of  Cape  Colony  and  Natal,  and  not 
I  per  cent,  of  the  cattle  in  Cape  Colony  can  be  saved.  I  am  persuaded 
that  the  pest  will  not  stop  until  it  reaches  the  dock  gates  at  Cape  Town. 

T 


2  90  SOUTH  AFRICA 

To  stop  its  course  is  now  a  matter  of  impossibility,  and  if  the  policy  of 
killing  cattle  and  compensating  is  pursued  with  the  Colonial  natives  as 
in  the  north,  my  long  experience  of  South  Africa  and  its  natives  leads 
me  to  the  conviction  that  we  shall  have  to  face  one  of  the  biggest  wars 
Africa  has  ever  experienced.  It  will  be  found  that  Zulus,  Griquas,  and 
Basutos  will  join  hands,  and,  as  it  is  a  well-known  fact  that  we  could 
not  beat  the  Basutos,  what  could  be  done  in  the  case  of  such  a  combina- 
tion as  I  have  indicated  ? 

"  Rinderpest  is  now  in  the  old  Cape  Colony,  at  Bethulie,  and  all 
over  the  Free  State.  Natal  is  at  present  unaffected,  but  at  Herschell 
— the  great  native  centre  which  bounds  the  Free  State — its  presence 
may  be  expected  at  any  hour." 

Dr  Otto  Henning's  account  of  the  symptoms  of  the  disease  is  as 
follows  : — 

This  is  a  feverish  disease  of  typical  rapid  course  which  spreads  by 
contagion,  and  chiefly  attacks  cattle.  Sheep,  goats,  and  game  are 
less  liable  ;  human  beings,  horses,  mules  and  donkeys  do  not  get  it. 

A  healthy  animal  which  has  come  into  contact  with  a  sick  one 
usually  shows  the  first  symptoms  of  the  disease  seven  days  after ; 
occasionally  the  period  is  considerably  longer.  General  symptoms  are 
fever,  weariness,  uneasiness,  rough  coat,  failing  appetite,  increase  of 
pulse  and  breathing,  convulsive  trembling  of  skin,  rapid  emaciation,  and 
decline  of  strength. 

Special  symptoms. — One  of  the  first  and  most  constant  is  a  frequent 
short  cough,  and  thin  slimy,  afterwards  matter}'  discharge  from  the 
inflamed  and  swollen  mucous  membrane  of  the  nose,  eyes  and  even 
mouth.     On  the  3rd  (rarely  so  soon  as  the  2nd)  day,  diarrhoea  sets  in. 

Sometimes  small  ulcers  and  sores  are  visible  on  the  mucous  membrane 
of  the  lips,  gums  and  cheeks,  and  on  those  parts  of  the  skin  which  can 
be  licked. 

Diseased  animals  rarely  succumb  earlier  or  later  than  from  the  4th  to 
the  7th  day  after  the  first  symptoms  have  become  manifest. 

Experience  has  always  shown  that  medical  treatment  is  of  no  avail, 
but  merely  tends  to  spread  the  malady.  It  is  therefore  wisest  and 
cheapest  to  destroy  all  animals  affected  at  the  earliest  possible  moment 
and  all  carcases,  unskinned  and  complete,  should  be  burnt  carefully  or 
deeply  buried. 

The  disease  does  not  originate  through  influences  such  as  cold  and 
fog,  dew  or  rain,  or  bad  food  and  water,  but  is  solely  due  to  a  vege- 
table parasite,  which  is  able  to  spread  easily  and  rapidly.     [C — 8141.] 

As  a  last  resource,  the  Cape  Government  have  summoned  Dr  Koch, 
the  German  scientist,  to  South  Africa,  and  have  commissioned  him  to 
investigate  the  disease  with  a  view  of  discovering  a  possible  remedy. 


HISTORICAL  SUMMARY. 


B.C.    1700.   Land  of  Punt  (S.-E.  Africa)  conquered  by  the  Egyptians. 
1000.  Solomon's  Expedition  to  the  land  of  Ophir  (S.-E.  Africa). 
600.  Voyage  of  Phoenician  seamen  (from  Red  Sea)  round  Africa. 
A.D.       35.  Sabaean  King  Kharabit  is  in  possession  of  the  E.  coast  of 
Africa. 

Portuguese  Period. 

i486.  Discovery  of  the  Cape  (Cabo  Tormentoso)  by  Bartholomew  Diaz. 
1497.  Vasco  da  Gama  sails  to  India  by  the  Cape. 
1505.  Alvarez  de  Cahal  occupies  Sofala  (East  Coast). 
1580.  Sir  Francis  Drake  passes  the  Cape  on  his  (return)  voyage  round 
the  world. 

Dutch  Period. 

1602    Netherlands  East  India  Company  chartered. 
1 648.   Wreck  of  the  Haarlem  in  Table  Bay. 
1652.  Arrival  of  expedition  under  Van  Riebeck. 

Government  by  the  Dutch  East  India  Company. 

1657.  Nine  of  the  Company's  servants  settled  as  "  free  burghers "  at 

Rondebosch. 
1679.  Simon  Van  der  Stell  appointed  Commander. 

Huguenot  emigration. 


1689. 

1709.  The  use  of  French  in  official  communications  forbidden. 

1714.  Returns  show  Capetown  has  300  houses,  and  that  whole  popula- 
tion of  settlement  =  free  burghers,  647  men,  341  women,  ,900 
children,  employing  93  men  servants,  and  owning  1178  male, 
240  female  slaves. 

1779.  The  Franco-Dutch  settlers  send  representatives  to  Holland  pray 
ing  for  reforms. 

1783.  Birth  of  Tshaka. 


292  SOUTH  AFRICA 

1786.  Fish  River  declared  limit  of  colony,  and  magistracy  established 

at  Graaf-Reinet. 
1795.   British  Force  (under  Admiral  Elphinstone  and  General  Craig) 

take  possession  of  the  Cape. 
1S03.   Restoration  of  the  Cape  to  the  Dutch  after  the  Treaty  of  Amiens. 
1806.  Surrender  of  the  Cape  by  General  Janssens  to  Sir  David  Baird. 

Period  of  British  Kule. 

1806.  Population  of  Colony  =  73,663,  of  whom  26,720  were  of  European 

descent ;  exports  ^60,000,  imports  ;if  100,000. 

1807.  Earl  of  Caledon   appointed   Governor — postal    communication, 

circuit  courts,  regulations  for  Hottentots. 
1S12.   Sir  John  Cradock  :  "  loan-leases  "  converted  into  perpetual  quit- 
rent  properties — public  schools  established  in  country  districts. 
I.   Kafir  War  (1811-12):  Kafirs  driven  back  to  original  Dutch 
frontier  (the  Fish  River).     Foundation  of  Grahamstown. 

1814.  Lord  Charles  Somerset. 

1815.  The  Cape  formally  ceded  to  England  by  Holland.     (The  agree- 

ment passed  the  Cape  and  other  possessions  (notably  Ceylon) 

to  the  British  Government  in  return  for  Java  and  a  sum  of 

money.) 

o       {II.  Kafir  War  :  Defence  of  Grahamstown  by  Wiltshire — bound- 

'„''■  \      ary  advanced  to  Chumie  and  Keiskamma  Rivers — Mission- 

"■  '      aries  sent  to  Gaika  tribe. 
1820.  Albany  Settlement :  arrival  of  5000  British  emigrants  at  Algoa 

Bay.     Foundation  of  Port  Elizabeth. 
1826.    General  Bourke  :  ordinance  declaring  free  coloured  men  equal  in 
law  with  the  whites. 
Report  of  Royal  Commission  :  establishment  of  Executive  Coun- 
cil, Supreme  Court,  Resident  Magistrates  (in  place  of  Land- 
drosts).  Schools,  &c.  (conversion  of  Dutch  into  English  Colony). 
English  ordered  to  be  used  as  official  language. 

1833.  Abolition  Act. 

1834.  Sir  Benjamin  D'' Urban  :  Slave  emancipation  carried  out. 

o  rill.  Kafir  War:  invasion  of  Colony  by  Kafirs — boundary 
s  c  »  advanced  to  Kei  River  :  Lord  Glenelg's  despatch  ordering 
•  35'  I      evacuation  of  new  territory,  disafl'ection  of  "Boer"  population. 

jj-^o'  ]■  Exodus  of  the  "emigrant  farmers." 

1837.   Defeat  of  Moselekatse  by  Hendrik  Potgieter 

1835.  Massacre  of  Retiefs  party  by  l^ingan. 

Pretorius  (Andries)  is  Commandant-General  of  Boers — defeat  of 
Dingan  (Dec.  10). 
1S43.    British  government  established  in  Natal. 

184O.  V  IV.  Kafir  War  (War  of  the  Axe) :  war  with  the  Gaikas — ter- 
1^48.  /     minated  by  Sir  Harry  Smith. 
1I547.   Sir  Henry  Pottin^er  first  Governor  and  High  Commissioner 


HISTORICAL  SUMMARY  293 

1848.  Sir  Henry  Smith  :  Declaration  of  British  Sovereignty  up  to  the 

Vaal  River  and  the  Drakensberg  mountains. 

1849.  Convict  agitation  in  Cape  Colony. 

^fSi-  I V.  Kafir  War.     Moshesh,  Basuto  chief,  submits, 
1853-/ 

1852.  Sand  River  Convention.     Boers  beyond  the  Vaal  are  absolved 

from  their  allegiance,  and  Pretorius  is  pardoned. 

{Boers  of  Orange  River  Sovereignty  revolt.  Imperial  Govern- 
ment decide  upon  a  policy  of  non-interference — withdraw 
troops — acknowledge  Orange  Free  State  by  convention  of 
Bloemfontein. 

1853.  Representative   Government   (elective   Council    and    Assembly) 

granted  to  Cape  Colony. 

1854.  Sir  George  Grey  :  New  Kafir  Policy. 

1857.  Settlement  of  Anglo-German  legion  (2000)  on  the  Buffalo  River 

(East  London  founded). 

1858.  Agricultural  German  immigration  (2000). 

1862.  Sir  Philip  VVodehouse  :  policy  of  retrenchment  insisted  upon  by 

the  Imperial  Government. 

1863.  First  line  of  railway  opened — public  works  policy  initiated. 
1865.   British  Kaffraria  incorporated  into  the  colony. 

1869.  Sir  Henry  Barkly  :    authorised  to  bring  in  Responsible  Govern- 
ment.    Discovery  of  diamonds. 

1 87 1.  Proclamation  of  British  authority  over  the  diamond  fields. 

1872.  New  constitution  (Responsible  Government)  received  royal  assent: 

Sir  John  Molteno  first  Premier. 

1873.  Colony  divided  into  legislative  districts. 

1874.  Mr  Froude's  mission  in  favour  of  confederation  scheme  of  Lord 

Carnarvon. 
1877.  Sir  Bartle  Frere  :  authorised  to  carry  out  confederation  of  South 

African   states   as  Governor  of  the  Cape  Colony  and   High 

Commissioner  in  South  Africa  (April). 
Annexation  of  the  Transvaal  (April  12th). 
1877-8.  Subjugation  of  Kreli  and  Sandele. 

1879.  The  Zulu  War. 

Lord   Wolseley,    High    Commissioner    for    South-East    Africa 
(June).     Administrator  of  Transvaal. 

1880.  June  29.  Federation  Proposals  defeated  in  Cape  Parliament. 
Aug.  I.  Recall  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere. 

Sir  Hercules  Robinson  succeeds. 

Boers  revolt  under  Triumvirate  Kruger,  Joubert,  and  Pretorius 
(Dec.  16). 

1881.  Convention  of  Pretoria  (independence  of  South  African  Republic 

(Transvaal)   recognised.     Suzerain   rights  of  British  Govern- 
ment maintained). 

1883.  Imperial  Government  take  over  Basutoland. 

1884.  Convention  of  London  (modification  of  Convention  of  Pretoria: 

Bechuanaland  Protectorate  (Feb.  27). 


2  94  SOUTH  AFRICA 

1885.  Sir   Charles  Warren's   Expedition,     Extension  of  Protectorate 

and  formation  of  Crown  Colony. 

1886.  Discovery  of  Gold  at  Witwatersrandt  (Johannesburg). 

1887.  Zululand  taken  over  by  Imperial  Government. 

1888.  Treaty  with   Lobengula   and   mineral   concessions    obtained    in 

Mashonaland. 

1889.  Sir  Henry  Loch  succeeds. 

1889.  Customs  Union  Convention  (first  step  towards  federation  of  South 

Africa). 
Charter  granted  to  British  South  Africa  Company. 

1890.  Cecil  Rhodes,  Prime  Minister.     Pioneer  Expedition  to  Salisbur}'. 

1 89 1.  Anglo- Portuguese  Convention. 

1893.  Matabele  War. 

1894.  Matabele  Settlement. 
Glen  Grey  Act. 

B.S.A.    Coy.    undertake    administration    of   country  north    of 

Zambesi  (Nov.  4). 
Swazi  Convention  (Dec.  10). 

1895.  Sir  Herades  Kohinson  re-appointed. 
Annexation  of  Pondoland. 

1895. 
Dec.     26.   Manifesto  of  Transvaal  National  Union  issued  at  Johannes- 
burg. 
,,         29.  Dr  Jameson's  force  starts. 
1896. 
Jan.         2.   Surrender  of  Dr  Jameson's  force  to  the  Boers. 
,,  ,,    Sir  Hercules  Robinson  leaves  Capetown  for  Pretoria. 

,,  6.   Mr  Rhodes  resigns  Premiership  of  the  Cape  Colony. 

March    5.    Rinderpest  appears  at  Buluwayo. 
,,         20.  Outbreak  of  Native  insurrection  in  Rhodesia. 
April    28.  Sentence  on  Reformers  at  Pretoria. 

,,  ,,     Lord  Grey  arrives  at  Buluwayo. 

June        2.  General  Carrington  arrives  at  Buluwayo. 
July       17.   Cape  Committee  report  on  the  Raid. 
,,         29.  Sentence  passed  on  Dr  Jameson,  Sir  John  Willoughby,  and 

others. 
,,         30.  South  Africa  Committee  ordered. 
Aug.      21.  Mr  Rhodes  meets  rebel  chiefs  in  Matoppos. 
Oct.       18.   Lord  Grey  addresses  letter  to  Secretary  of  the  Chartered 
Company, 


STATISTICAL  APPENDIX 


295 


X 

Q 

W 

Ph 

Ph 

< 

< 
o 

►— t 

H 

H 
< 
H 
C/3 


s? 


vo         ►-<         w 


10         Woo  CO    Tt 

^        "m  r^  g  -<" 


"3 


§. 


296  SOUTH  AFRICA 

II.  Maritime  Trade  of  United  Eangdom  in  1889. 

(Based  upon  Sir  Rawson  Rawson's  "Analysis.") 
Imports. 
per  cent. 
Food.        .        .        .        4i7l_iti,s      ;^i78,ooo,ooo 
Raw  Materials  (with  Ores)    42-5/      ^  181,400,000 

Manufactured   and    Miscel- 
laneous    .         .         ,         1 5 '8  67,800,000 


Total,         .      ;^427, 200,000 

Exports. 

Imports  ^^-exported  ....      ;^66, 700,000 

per  cent. 

[■Textiles         .         45  ^ 

Iron    and     Steel        | 

British  Produce  J        Manufactures,    25  *-  =  gths. 
iintish  l-roduce  -j  q^-^^^     Manufac-        | 

I      factures      .         15  J 

I  Raw  Materials        15  248,900,000 


Total         .      ;i^3i5,6oo,ooo 
Grand  Total  .         .      ;,f742, 800,000. 

Partial  Analysis  of  some  hnports. 
G^ain  .  ;^52, 200,000         I2'2  p.c.  of  total  Imports. 

Of  which 

18,200,000  (  =  ^rd.)  is  from  United  States. 
14,000,000  is  from  Russia,  India, 

Canada,  Australia,  &c. 

Cotton  .  ;^45, 800,000         107  p.c.  of  total  Imports. 

Of  which 

33,600,000  (=§rds.)  is  from  United  States. 
5,000,000  is  from  India. 

Wool  .         .  ;^29,7oo,ooo  7  p.c.  of  total  Imports. 

Of  which 

25,400,000  (  =  6ths)  is  from  Australasia. 
3,000,000  (=^th)  is  from  South  Africa. 

Note. — Value  is  only  a  partial  measure.     Bulk  of  goods  is  largely 
increasing.     Price  of  goods  is  steadily  going  down. 

f  Imports     .         .         .      ;i^4o8,50o,ooo 

For  1894,  returns  are  \  British  Exports  .         216,100,000 

(^  Re-Exports        ,         .  57,900,000 

True  Total        ,         .      ^682,666,441 


STATISTICAL  APPENDIX 


297 


III.  South  African  Exports  in  1893. 

Minerals 

;i{^IO,00O,O0O 

Gold  .         .         .        ;^5, 500,000 

Diamonds  .         .         .  4,000,000 

Copper        .         .         .      200,000 

Pastoral 

4,000,000 

Wool           .         .         .  2,400,000 

Ostrich  Feathers          .      500,000 

Hides          .         .         .       500,000 

Hair  (Angora)     .         ,      500,000 

Wine 

18,964 

Sugar         

95,943 

e  Total  /  ^y  Durban    .     ;^i,242,i69  \ 
e     oiai  -y  gy  ^^p^  p^^jg    1 3, 1 56, 589  J 

;^I4,398,7S8 

Exports  from  Cape  Colony  only  in  1892. 

Wool 

^^2,029,093 

Ostrich  Feathers 

517,009 

Hides           .... 

478,379 

Copper  ore  .... 

253,681 

Hair  (Angora) 

373.810 

Wine 

18,645 

Grain,  &c 

7,589 

Diamonds    .... 

3,906,992 

(From  States) 

Jiangs  Yearbook,  1894.) 

IV.  Gold-producing  Count 

pies. 

£  value  in  1894. 

North  America 

9,000,000 

Australasia          ..... 

8,000,000 

Transvaal 

7,000,000 

Russia  (1892) 

4,000,000 

World's  Output 

35,000,000 

(Based  on  Mr 

Hami 

Iton  Smith's  estimate.) 

V,  "Wheat  production  of  the  Cape  Colony  compared  with 
that  of  other  Countries. 

Bushels  in  1892. 

Cape  Colony 3,890,898 

48,182,295 


Canada 

Australasia 

The  United  Kingdom 

France 

The  United  States     . 


41,161,057 

60,775,000 

327,000,000 

315,949,000 


298 


SOUTH  AFRICA 


Wheat  Production  of  the  World. 


Europe  .         . 
Asia 

Africa     . 
Australasia 
S.  America     . 
N.  America    . 

1893. 

Bushels. 

.     1,435,666,000 

345,896,000 

35,514,000 

41,161,000 

81,644,000 

447,479,000 

•     2,387,360,000 

1892. 

Bushels. 

1,406,933,000 

289,944,000 

34,464,000 

35,963,000 

51,262,000 

574,131,000 

Total 

2,391,697,000 

(From  Statistics  of  American  Department  of  Agriculture.) 

VI.  'Wool-exporting  Countries. 

£  value  in  1893. 

Australasia 25,000,000 

South  Africa 2,400,000 

Russia 1,000,000 


VII.    Wine  exports  of  the  Cape  Colony  and  Victoria  in  1892. 

Gallons.  £ 

Victoria         .         .         .         273,253  63,235 

Cape  Colony  .         .  78,836  17.964 

Fertility  of  Vineyards  in  various  Countries,  as  estimated 
by  Baron  von  Babo. 

Germany    . 
France 
Spain 

United  States 
Australia    . 
Cape  Colony— 
>> 
(From  Official  Handbook  to  the  Cape  Colony,  ^'c,  p.  271.) 


24 

lectolitres  per  hectare 

i8i 

Coast  Districts 

17 

I4i 
86^ 

Inland    ,, 

173 

STATISTICAL  APPENDIX 


299 


^~^-^ 

^,^ 

^_^ 

^_^ 

^ ^ 

Tj-  ro 

Tt 

Tf 

<+ 

^ 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

"1   "1 

.^-^ 

u 

ro  N 

'^ 

ro 

<m 

ro 

ro  ro 

3 

a^  ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

On  On 

■*-» 

t^^ , 

c_^ 

?^ 

ro;X) 

ro 

00 

\n 

On  tJ- 

0   "^ 

M 

^ 

0\  LO 

vnoo 

On 

l^ 

00   0 

w 

■<t  0\ 

ro 

10 

(n  M 

m  o\ 

■* 

ro 

vn 

N    0 

t-O 

M 

ro  ro 

u-i  w 

" 

> 


On  00 
M-  O 


•*^0   O   Th  O   N  ^  O 
Ni^OooOONr-^O 

tCc/T  o  Lo  cToo"  d~  cT 
N  >o  o  -^ao  «  vo  " 

u-1  LO  N     1-1  M  H 


ro  O   O  O  O 

o  NO  o  o  o 

in  w-1  iy-1  O    ■* 

r^  (^  rn  t-C  c5" 
O   O  NO  -   O 

W  00  l-l    u^ 


r^  t^  O  \0  O  •+  N 
ro  -<  O  <^  O  N  M 
N  00   O   '•'~.  O    '"';  — 

O   N   O   '^  d  CO  ui 

►H     10  N     1-1  O) 


1^  o  0  o  o 
00  NO  9  o  o 
t^  V/-1  o^  o  o 

On  CT\  rovo"  c5" 
N  TfNO  —  O 
1-1  vo        1-1  un 


t^  ON  O  00       00   ■+  O 

00  "^  o  •*      i^co  o 

On  r^  11  u^    .   w>  M  m 


^000 

"  o  o  o 


»«wOnOO''')(^0 

n 

NO    N    0 

0    0 

mnO^O    0    0    ONt^o 

fOND    0 

LO   0 

m  -^QC    On  ro  M    r^  N 

0 

^NO 

N   0  rooo  vn  0   0  vO 

0 

CO  rooo 

fS    11 

N    N                        •-<  NO  00 

li-i 

^  « 

N  r^ 

N                                    ro 

*^ 

"^ 

m  N 



ciXi 


aj  o  ' 


o 


£       s  o  o 

,-3  J  q'ox:  g^ 


U^ 


O    :3   *";    rt    j-i    u    iM 


J^    lU    rt 


O   V 
o   i'   rt 


c  ,^ 


■x:  o 


S  S  -s  ;z;  N 


nl    3    P         _  ._ 
1-    O    ;S    u    O    i-. 


flj   rt  . — ^  . — 1 
>    OJ    O    c« 

^   uf^   « 

"^^^ 

U    C    K    IJ 

•-  D  x:  -c 

"X!    '-'  ^ 
\^    ° 

m  Ts       _; 
-i3  o^ 

3   C       "^ 
Cn  1)    <U    U 

oopq-g  rt 
c  ^  «J 

S  "  <"  s  « 


1) 


<u 


"5^ 


^rO  S       C      0) 

Cl,  rt  g   1)  ^ — 

!>    C  ^  --S  ^ 

>C    1-  uj    C    O) 


tl5  S  o  2  o 
"2  2  ^5  ■><  "S 

^Q  ^_  ^<  (u  o 
G  Id  .—  in  " 
fe  <y  ti   t«   ■" 

^  c^  o  3 

--.  g  rt  ?  o 
^  2  •:;>*, -o 

ui    S    S   "^3 

•s  ci.>-c  jr-.-s 


FULL    TEXT    OF    CONVENTION    OF 
LONDON,    1884. 


A  Convention  between  Her  Majesty  the  Queen  of  the  United 

Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  and  the 

South  African  Republic, 

Whereas  the  Government  of  the  Transvaal  State,  through  its 
Delegates,  consisting  of  Stephanus  Johannes  Paulus  Kruger,  President 
of  the  said  State,  Stephanus  Jacobus  Du  Toit,  Superintendent  of 
Education,  and  Nicholas  Jacobus  Smit,  a  member  of  the  Volksraad, 
have  represented  that  the  Convention  signed  at  Pretoria  on  the  3rd  day 
of  August  1881,  and  ratified  by  the  Volksraad  of  the  said  State  on  the 
25th  October  1881,  contains  certain  provisions  which  are  inconvenient, 
and  imposes  burdens  and  obligations  from  which  the  said  State  is 
desirous  to  be  relieved,  and  that  the  south-western  boundaries  fixed  by 
the  said  Convention  should  be  amended,  with  a  view  to  promote  the 
peace  and  good  order  of  the  said  State,  and  of  the  countries  adjacent 
thereto  ;  and  whereas  Her  Majesty  the  Queen  of  the  United  Kingdom 
of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland,  has  been  pleased  to  take  the  said  repre- 
sentations into  consideration  :  Now,  therefore.  Her  Majesty  has  been 
pleased  to  direct,  and  it  is  hereby  declared,  that  the  following  articles 
of  a  new  Convention,  signed  on  behalf  of  Her  Majesty  by  Her  Majesty's 
High  Commissioner  in  South  Africa,  the  Right  Honourable  Sir 
Hercules  George  Robert  Robinson,  Knight  Grand  Cross  of  the  Most 
Distinguished  Order  of  Saint  Michael  and  Saint  George,  Governor  of 
the  Colony  of  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  and  on  behalf  of  the  Transvaal 
State  (which  shall  hereinafter  be  called  the  South  African  Republic)  by 
the  above-named  Delegates,  Stephanus  Johannes  Paulus  Kruger, 
Stephanus  Jacobus  Du  Toit,  and  Nicholas  Jacobus  Smit,  shall,  when 
ratified  by  the  Volksraad  of  the  South  African  Republic,  be  substituted 
for  the  articles  embodied  in  the  Convention  of  3rd  August  1881  ;  which 
latter,  pending  such  ratification,  shall  continue  in  full  force  and  effect. 
300 


CONVENTION  OF  LONDON,   1884  301 

Article  I. 

The  territory  of  the  South  African  Republic  will  embrace  the  land 
lying  between  the  following  boundaries,  to  wit  :  — 

Beginning  from  the  point  where  the  north-eastern  boundary  line  of 
Griqualand  West  meets  the  Vaal  River,  up  the  course  of  the  Vaal 
River  to  the  point  of  junction  with  it  of  the  Klip  River  ;  thence  up  the 
course  of  Klip  River  to  the  point  of  junction  with  it  of  the  stream  called 
Gansvlei  ;  thence  up  the  Gansvlei  stream  to  its  source  in  the  Drakens- 
berg ;  thence  to  a  beacon  in  the  boundaiy  of  Natal,  situated  immedi- 
ately opposite  and  close  to  the  source  of  the  Gansvlei  stream  ;  thence 
in  a  north-easterly  direction  along  the  ridge  of  the  Drakensberg, 
dividing  the  waters  flowing  into  the  Gansvlei  stream  from  the  waters 
flowing  into  the  sources  of  the  Buffalo,  to  a  beacon  on  a  point  where 
this  mountain  ceases  to  be  a  continuous  chain  ;  thence  to  a  beacon  on 
a  plain  to  the  north-east  of  the  last  described  beacon  ;  thence  to  the 
nearest  source  of  a  small  stream  called  "Division  Stream;"  thence 
down  this  division  stream,  which  forms  the  southern  boundary  of  the 
farm  Sandfontein,  the  property  of  Messrs  Meek,  to  its  junction  with  the 
Coldstream  ;  thence  down  the  Coldstream  to  its  junction  with  the 
Buffalo  or  Umzinayti  River  ;  thence  down  the  coast  of  the  Buffalo 
River  to  the  junction  with  it  of  the  Blood  River ;  thence  up  the  course 
of  the  Blood  River  to  the  junction  with  it  of  Lyn  Spruit  or  Dudusi ; 
thence  up  the  Dudusi  to  its  source;  thence  80  yards  to  Bea.  I., 
situated  on  a  spur  of  the  N'Qaba-Ka  hawana  Mountains  ;  thence  80 
yards  to  the  N'Sonto  River  ;  thence  down  the  N'Sonto  River  to  its 
junction  with  the  White  Umvulozi  River ;  thence  up  the  White 
Umvulozi  River  to  a  white  rock  where  it  rises  ;  thence  800  yards  to 
Kambula  Hill  (Bea.  II.)  ;  thence  to  the  source  of  the  Pemvana  River, 
where  the  road  from  Kambula  Camp  to  Burgers'  Lager  crosses  ;  thence 
down  the  Pemvana  River  to  its  junction  with  the  Bivana  River  ;  thence 
down  the  Bivana  River  to  its  junction  with  the  Pongolo  River  ;  thence 
down  the  Pongolo  River  to  where  it  passes  through  the  Libombo 
Range  ;  thence  along  the  summits  of  the  Libombo  Range  to  the 
northern  point  of  the  N'Yawos  Hill  in  that  range  (Bea.  XVI.) ;  thence 
to  the  northern  peak  of  the  Inkwakweni  Hills  (Bea.  XV.) ;  thence  to 
Sefunda,  a  rocky  knoll  detached  from  and  to  the  north-east  end  of  the 
White  Koppies,  and  to  the  south  of  the  Musana  River  (Bea.  XIV.)  ; 
thence  to  a  point  on  the  slope  near  the  crest  of  Matanjeni,  which  is  the 
name  given  to  the  south-eastern  portion  of  the  Mahamba  Hills  (Bea. 
XHI.)  ;  thence  to  the  N'gwangwana,  a  double-pointed  hill  (one  point 
is  bare,  the  other  wooded,  the  beacon  being  on  the  former),  on  the  left 
bank  of  the  Assegai  River  and  upstream  of  Dadusa  Spruit  (Bea.  XII.) ; 
thence  to  the  southern  point  of  Bendita,  a  rocky  knoll  in  a  plain 
between  the  Little  Hlozane  and  Assegai  Rivers  (Bea.  XI.) ;  thence  to 
the  highest  point  of  Suluka  Hill,  round  the  eastern  slopes  of  which 
flows  the  Little  Hlozane,  also  called  Ludaka  or  Mudspruit  (Bea.  X.) ; 
thence  to  the  beacon  known  as  "Viljoen's,"  or  N'Duko  Hill ;  thence 


302  FULL  TEXT  OF 

to  a  point  north-east  of  Derby  House,  known  as  Magwazidili's  Beacon  ; 
thence  to  the  Igaba,  a  small  knoll  on  the  Ungwempisi  River,  also 
called  "Joubert's  Beacon,"  and  known  to  the  natives  as  "  Piet's 
Beacon"  (Bea.  IX.);  thence  to  the  highest  point  of  the  N'Dhlovud- 
walili  or  Houtbosch,  a  hill  on  the  northern  bank  of  the  Umqwempisi 
River  (Bea.  VIII.) ;  thence  to  a  beacon  on  the  only  flat-topped  rock, 
about  lo  feet  high  and  about  30  yards  in  circumference  at  its  base, 
situated  on  the  south  side  of  the  Lamsamane  range  of  hills,  and  over- 
looking the  valley  of  the  great  Usuto  River ;  this  rock  being  45  yards 
north  of  the  road  from  Camden  and  Lake  Banagher  to  the  forests  on 
the  Usuto  River  (sometimes  called  Sandhlanas  Beacon)  (Bea.  VII.); 
thence  to  the  Gulungwana  or  Ibubulundi,  four  smooth  bare  hills,  the 
highest  in  that  neighbourhood,  situated  to  the  south  of  the  Umtuli 
River  (Bea.  VI.)  ;  thence  to  a  flat-topped  rock,  8  feet  high,  on  the 
crest  of  the  Busuku,  a  low  rocky  range  south-west  of  the  Impulazi 
River  (Bea.  V.);  thence  to  a  low  bare  hill  on  the  north-east  of  and 
overlooking  the  Impulazi  River  to  the  south  of  it  being  a  tributary  of 
the  Impulazi,  with  a  considerable  waterfall,  and  the  road  from  the 
river  passing  200  yards  to  the  north-west  of  the  beacon  (Bea.  IV.); 
thence  to  the  highest  point  of  the  Mapumula  range,  the  watershed  of  the 
Little  Usuto  River  on  the  north,  and  the  Umpulazi  River  on  the  south, 
the  hill  the  top  of  which  is  a  baie  rock,  falling  abruptly  towards  the 
Little  Usuto  (Bea.  III.)  ;  thence  to  the  western  point  of  a  double- 
pointed  rocky  hill,  precipitous  on  all  sides,  called  Makwana,  its  top 
being  a  bare  rock  (Bea.  II.)  ;  thence  to  the  top  of  a  rugged  hill  of 
considerable  height  falling  abruptly  to  the  Komati  River,  this  hill  being 
the  northern  extremity  of  the  Isilotwani  range,  and  separated  from  the 
highest  peak  of  the  range  Inkomokazi  (a  sharp  cone)  by  a  deep  neck 
(Bea.  I.).  (On  a  ridge  in  the  straight  line  between  Beacons  I.  and  II. 
is  an  intermediate  beacon. )  From  Beacon  I.  the  boundary  nms  to  a 
hill  across  the  Komati  River,  and  thence  along  the  crest  of  the  range 
of  hills  known  as  the  Makongwa,  which  runs  north-east  and  south-west, 
to  Kamhlubana  Peak  ;  thence  in  a  straight  line  to  Mananga,  a  point  in 
the  Libombo  range,  and  thence  to  the  nearest  point  in  the  Portuguese 
frontier  on  the  Libombo  range  ;  thence  along  the  summits  of  the 
Libombo  range  to  the  middle  of  the  poort  where  the  Komati  River 
passes  through  it,  called  the  lowest  Komati  Poort ;  thence  in  a  north 
by  easterly  direction  to  Pokioens  Kop,  situated  on  the  north  side  of 
the  Olifant's  River,  where  it  passes  through  the  ridges ;  thence  about 
north  norlh-west  to  the  nearest  point  of  Serra  di  Chicundo  ;  and  thence 
to  the  junction  of  the  I'afori  River  with  the  Limpopo  or  Crocodile 
River  ;  thence  up  the  course  of  the  Limpopo  River  to  the  point  where 
the  Marique  River  falls  into  it.  Thence  up  the  course  of  the  Marique 
River  to  "  Derde  Poort,"  where  it  passes  through  a  low  range  of  hills, 
called  Sikwane,  a  beacon  (No.  10)  being  erected  on  the  spur  of  said 
range  near  to,  and  westward  of,  the  banks  of  the  river  ;  thence,  in  a 
straight  line,  through  this  beacon  to  a  beacon  (No.  9),  erected  on  the 
top  of  the  same  range,  about  1700  yards  distant  from  beacon  No.  lO; 


CONVENTION  OF  LONDON,    1884  303 

thence,  in  a  straight  line,  to  a  beacon  (No.  8)  erected  on  the  highest 
point  of  an  isolated  hill,  called  Dikgagong,  or  "  Wildebeest  Kop," 
situated  south-eastward  of,  and  about  3^  miles  distant  from  a  high  hill, 
called  Moripe  ;  thence,  in  a  straight  Hne,  to  a  beacon  (No.  7)  erected 
on  the  summit  of  an  isolated  hill  or  "koppie"  forming  the  eastern 
extremity  of  the  range  of  hills  called  Moshweu,  situated  to  the  north- 
ward of,  and  about  two  miles  distant  from,  a  large  isolated  hill  called 
Chukudu-Chochwa  ;  thence,  in  a  straight  line,  to  a  beacon  (No.  6) 
erected  on  the  summit  of  a  hill  forming  part  of  the  same  range  Mosh- 
weu ;  thence,  in  a  straight  line,  to  a  beacon  (No.  5)  erected  on  the 
summit  of  a  pointed  hill  in  the  same  range  ;  thence,  in  a  straight  line, 
to  a  beacon  (No.  4)  erected  on  the  summit  of  the  western  extremity 
of  the  same  range  ;  thence,  in  a  straight  line,  to  a  beacon  (No.  3) 
erected  on  the  summit  of  the  northern  extremity  of  a  low,  bushy 
hill,  or  "Koppie,"  near  to  and  eastward  of  the  Notwane  River; 
thence,  in  a  straight  line,  to  the  junction  of  the  stream  called 
Metsi  Mashwane  with  the  Notwane  River  (No.  2);  thence  up  the  course 
of  the  Notwane  River  to  Sengoma,  being  the  Poort  where  the  river 
passes  through  the  Dwarsberg  range  ;  thence,  as  described  in  the 
Award  given  by  Lieutenant-Governor  Keate,  dated  October  17,  1871, 
by  Pitlanganyane  (narrow  place),  Deboaganka  or  Schaapkuil,  Sibatoul 
(bare  place),  and  Maclase,  to  Ramatlabama,  a  pool  on  a  spruit  north 
of  the  Molopo  River.  From  Ratmalabama  the  boundary  shall  run  to 
the  summit  of  an  isolated  hill,  called  Leganka  ;  thence,  in  a  straight 
line,  passing  north-east  of  a  Native  Station,  near  "  Buurman's  Drift," 
on  the  Molopo  River,  to  that  point  on  the  road  from  Mosiega  to  the 
old  drift  where  a  road  turns  out  through  the  Native  Station  to  the  new 
drift  below;  thence  to  "Buurman's  Old  Drift;"  thence  in  a  straight 
line,  to  a  mai-ked  and  isolated  clump  of  trees  near  to  and  north-west 
of  the  dwelling-house  of  C.  Austin,  a  tenant  on  the  farm  "Vleifontein," 
No.  117  ;  thence,  in  a  straight  line,  to  the  north-western  corner  beacon 
of  the  farm  "  Mooimeisjesfontein,"  No.  30;  thence,  along  the  western 
line  of  the  said  farm  "  Mooimeisjesfontein,"  and  in  prolongation  there- 
of, as  far  as  the  road  leading  from  "  Ludik's  Drift,"  on  the  Molopo 
River,  past  the  homestead  of  "Mooimeisjesfontein,"  towards  the  Salt 
Pans  near  Harts  River  ;  thence,  along  the  said  road,  crossing  the 
direct  road  from  Polfontein  to  Sehuba,  and  until  the  direct  road  from 
Polfontein  to  Lotlakane  or  Pietfontein  is  reached  ;  thence  along  the 
southern  edge  of  the  last-named  road  towards  Lotlakane,  until  the  first 
garden  ground  of  that  station  is  reached  ;  thence,  in  a  south-westerly 
direction,  skirting  Lotlakane,  so  as  to  leave  it  and  all  its  garden  ground 
in  native  territory,  until  the  road  from  Lotlakane  to  Kunana  is  reached ; 
thence  along  the  east  side,  and  clear  of  that  road  towards  Kunana, 
until  the  garden  grounds  of  that  station  are  reached  ;  thence,  skirting 
Kunana,  so  as  to  include  it  and  all  its  garden  ground,  but  no  more, 
in  the  Transvaal,  until  the  road  from  Kunana  to  Mamusa  is  reached ; 
thence,  along  the  eastern  side  and  clear  of  the  road  towards  Mamusa, 
until  a  road  turns  out  towards  Taungs ;  thence,  along  the  eastern  side 


304  FULL  TEXT  OF 

and  clear  of  the  road  towards  Taungs,  till  the  line  of  the  district  known 
as  "  Stellaland  "  is  reached,  about  ii  miles  from  Taungs  ;  thence,  along 
the  line  of  the  district  Stellaland,  to  the  Harts  River  about  24  miles 
below  Mamusa  ;  thence  across  Harts  River,  to  the  junction  of  the  roads 
from  Monthe  and  Phokwane  ;  thence,  along  the  western  side  and  clear 
of  the  nearest  road  towards  "  Koppie  Enkel,"  an  isolated  hill  about 
36  miles  from  Mamusa,  and  about  18  miles  north  of  Christiana,  and 
to  the  summit  of  the  said  hill ;  thence,  in  a  straight  line,  to  that  point 
on  the  north-east  boundary  of  Griqualand  West  as  beaconed  by  Mr 
Surveyor  Ford,  where  two  farms,  registered  as  Nos.  72  and  75,  do 
meet,  about  midway  between  the  Vaal  and  Harts  Rivers,  measured 
along  the  said  boundary  of  Griqualand  West  ;  thence  to  the  first 
point  where  the  north-east  boundary  of  Griqualand  West  meets  the 
Vaal  River. 

Article  II. 

The  Government  of  the  South  African  Republic  will  strictly  adhere 
to  the  boundaries  defined  in  the  first  Article  of  this  Convention,  and 
will  do  its  utmost  to  prevent  any  of  its  inhabitants  from  making  any 
encroachments  upon  lands  beyond  the  said  boundaries.  The  Govern- 
ment of  the  South  African  Republic  will  appoint  Commissioners  upon 
the  eastern  and  western  borders  whose  duty  it  will  be  strictly  to  guard 
against  irregularities  and  all  trespassing  over  the  boundaries.  Her 
Majesty's  Government  will,  if  necessary,  appoint  Commissioners 
in  the  native  territories  outside  the  eastern  and  western  borders 
of  the  South  African  Republic  to  maintain  order  and  prevent  en- 
croachments. 

Her  Majesty's  Government  and  the  Government  of  the  South  African 
Republic  will  each  appoint  a  person  to  proceed  together  to  beacon  off 
the  amended  south-west  boundary  as  described  in  Article  I.  of  this 
Convention  ;  and  the  President  of  the  Orange  Free  State  shall  be  re- 
quested to  appoint  a  referee  to  whom  the  said  persons  shall  refer  any 
questions  on  which  they  may  disagree  respecting  the  interpretation  of 
the  said  Article,  and  the  decision  of  such  referee  thereon  shall  be  final. 
The  arrangement  already  made,  under  the  terms  of  Article  19  of  the 
Convention  of  Pretoria  of  the  3rd  August  1881,  between  the  owners 
of  the  farms  Groolfontein  and  Valleifonlein  on  the  one  hand,  and  the 
Barolong  authorities  on  the  other,  by  which  a  fair  share  of  the  water 
supply  of  the  said  farms  shall  be  allowed  to  flow  undisturbed  to  the 
said  Barolongs,  shall  continue  in  force. 

Article  III. 

If  a  British  officer  is  appointed  to  reside  at  Pretoria  or  elsewhere 
within  the  South  African  Republic  to  discharge  functions  analogous  to 
those  of  a  Consular  officer  he  will  receive  the  protection  and  assistance 
of  the  Republic. 


CONVENTION  OF  LONDON,   1884  305 

Article  IV. 

The  South  African  Republic  will  conclude  no  treaty  or  engagement 
with  any  State  or  nation  other  than  the  Orange  Free  State,  nor  with 
any  native  tribe  to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  the  Republic,  until  the 
same  has  been  approved  by  Her  Majesty  the  Queen. 

Such  approval  shall  be  considered  to  have  been  granted  if  Her 
Majesty's  Government  shall  not,  within  six  months  after  receiving  a 
copy  of  such  treaty  (which  shall  be  delivered  to  them  immediately  upon 
its  completion),  have  notified  that  the  conclusion  of  such  treaty  is  in 
conflict  with  the  interests  of  Great  Britain  or  of  any  of  Her  Majesty's 
possessions  in  South  Africa. 

Article  V. 

The  South  African  Republic  will  be  liable  for  any  balance  which 
may  still  remain  due  of  the  debts  for  which  it  was  liable  at  the  date 
of  Annexation,  to  wit,  the  Cape  Commercial  Bank  Loan,  the  Railway 
Loan,  and  the  Orphan  Chamber  Debt,  which  debts  will  be  a  first 
charge  upon  the  revenues  of  the  Republic.  The  South  African 
Republic  will,  moreover,  be  liable  to  Her  Majesty's  Government  for 
;^250,ooo,  which  will  be  a  second  charge  upon  the  revenues  of  the 
Republic. 

Article  VI. 

The  debt  due  as  aforesaid  by  the  South  African  Republic  to  Her 
Majesty's  Government  will  bear  interest  at  the  rate  of  three  and  a  half 
per  cent,  from  the  date  of  the  ratification  of  this  Convention,  and  shall 
be  repayable  by  a  payment  for  interest  and  Sinking  Fund  of  six  pounds 
and  ninepence  per  ;^ich3  per  annum,  which  will  extinguish  the  debt  in 
twenty-five  years.  The  said  payment  of  six  pounds  and  ninepence  per 
;^ioo  shall  be  payable  half-yearly,  in  British  currency,  at  the  close  of 
each  half  year  from  the  date  of  such  ratification  :  Provided  always  that 
the  South  African  Republic  shall  be  at  liberty  at  the  close  of  any  half 
year  to  pay  off  the  whole  or  any  portion  of  the  outstanding  debt. 

Interest  at  the  rate  of  three  and  a  half  per  cent,  on  the  debt  as 
standing  under  the  Convention  of  Pretoria  shall  as  heretofore  be  paid 
to  the  date  of  the  ratification  of  this  Convention. 


Article  VII. 

All  persons  who  held  property  in  the  Transvaal  on  the  8th  day  of 
August  1 88 1,  and  still  hold  the  same,  will  continue  to  enjoy  the  rights 
of  property  which  they  have  enjoyed  since  the  I2th  April  1877.  No 
person  who  has  remained  loyal  to  Her  Majesty  during  the  late  hostili- 
ties shall  suffer  any  molestation  by  reason  of  his  loyalty ;  or  be  liable 
to  any  criminal  prosecution  or  civil  action  for  any  part  taken  in  con- 

U 


3o6  FULL  TEXT  OF 

nexion  with  such  hostilities  ;  and  all  such  persons  will  have  full  liberty 
to  reside  in  the  country,  with  enjoyment  of  all  civil  rights,  and  protec- 
tion for  their  persons  and  property. 

Article  VIIL 

The  South  African  Republic  renews  the  declaration  made  in  the  Sand 
River  Convention,  and  in  the  Convention  of  Pretoria,  that  no  slavery 
or  apprenticeship  partaking  of  slavery  will  be  tolerated  by  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  said  Repubhc. 

Article  IX. 

There  will  continue  to  be  complete  freedom  of  religion  and  protection 
from  molestation  for  all  denominations,  provided  the  same  be  not  incon- 
sistent with  morality  and  good  order  ;  and  no  disability  shall  attach  to 
any  person  in  regard  to  rights  of  property  by  reason  of  the  religious 
opinions  which  he  holds. 

Article  X. 

The  British  officer  appointed  to  reside  in  the  South  African  Republic 
will  receive  every  assistance  from  the  Government  of  the  said  Republic 
in  making  due  provision  for  the  proper  care  and  preservation  of  the 
graves  of  such  of  Her  Majesty's  Forces  as  have  died  in  the  Transvaal ; 
and  if  need  be,  for  the  appropriation  of  land  for  the  purpose. 

Article  XI. 

All  grants  or  titles  issued  at  any  time  by  the  Transvaal  Government 
in  respect  of  land  outside  the  boundary  of  the  South  African  Republic, 
as  defined  in  Article  I.,  shall  be  considered  invalid  and  of  no  effect, 
except  in  so  far  as  any  such  grant  or  title  relates  to  land  that  falls 
within  the  boundary  of  the  South  African  Republic ;  and  all  per- 
sons holding  any  such  grant  so  considered  invalid  and  of  no  effect 
will  receive  from  the  Government  of  the  South  African  Re- 
public such  compensation,  either  in  land  or  in  money,  as  the  Volks- 
raad  shall  determine.  In  all  cases  in  which  any  Native  Chiefs  or  other 
authorities  outside  the  said  boundaries  have  received  any  adequate  con- 
sideration from  the  Government  of  the  South  African  Republic  for  land 
excluded  from  the  Transvaal  by  the  first  Article  of  this  Convention,  or 
where  permanent  improvements  have  been  made  on  the  land,  the  High 
Commissioner  will  recover  from  the  native  authorities  fair  compensation 
for  the  loss  of  the  land  thus  excluded,  or  of  the  permanent  improvements 
thereon. 

Article  XII. 
The  independence  of  the  Swazis,  within  the  boundary  line  of  Swazi- 
land, as  irdicated  in  the  first  Article  of  this  Convention,  will  be  fully 
recognised. 


CONVENTION  OF  LONDON,   1884  307 

Article  XIII. 

Except  in  pursuance  of  any  treaty  or  engagement  made  as  provided 
in  Article  4  of  this  Convention,  no  other  or  higher  duties  shall  be  im- 
posed on  the  importation  into  the  South  African  Republic  of  any  article 
coming  from  any  part  of  Her  Majesty's  dominions  than  are  or  may  be 
imposed  on  the  like  article  coming  from  any  other  place  or  country ; 
nor  will  any  prohibition  be  maintained  or  imposed  on  the  importation 
into  the  South  African  Republic  of  any  article  coming  from  any  part  of 
Her  Majesty's  dominions  which  shall  not  equally  extend  to  the  like 
article  coming  from  any  other  place  or  country.  And  in  like  manner 
the  same  treatment  shall  be  given  to  any  article  coming  to  Great  Britain 
from  the  South  African  Republic  as  to  the  like  article  coming  from  any 
other  place  or  country. 

These  provisions  do  not  preclude  the  consideration  of  special  arrange- 
ments as  to  important  duties  and  commercial  relations  between  the 
South  African  Republic  and  any  of  Her  Majesty's  colonies  or  pos- 
sessions. 

Article  XIV. 

All  persons,  other  than  natives,  conforming  themselves  to  the  laws  of 
the  South  African  Republic  (a)  will  have  full  liberty,  with  their  families, 
to  enter,  travel,  or  reside  in  any  part  of  the  South  African  Republic  ; 
{6)  they  will  be  entitled  to  hire  or  possess  houses,  manufactories,  ware- 
houses, shops,  and  premises ;  (c)  they  may  carry  on  their  commerce 
either  in  person  or  by  any  agents  whom  they  may  think  fit  to  employ  ; 
{d)  they  will  not  be  subject,  in  respect  of  their  persons  or  property,  or 
in  respect  of  their  commerce  or  industry,  to  any  taxes,  whether  general 
or  local,  other  than  those  which  are  or  may  be  imposed  upon  citizens  of 
the  said  Republic. 

Article  XV. 

All  persons,  other  than  natives,  who  established  their  domicile  in 
the  Transvaal  between  the  12th  day  of  April  1877,  and  the  8th  August 
1881,  and  who  within  12  months  after  such  last-mentioned  date  have 
had  their  names  registered  by  the  British  Resident,  shall  be  exempt 
from  all  compulsory  military  service  whatever. 

Article  XVI. 

Provision  shall  hereafter  be  made  by  a  separate  instrument  for  the 
mutual  extradition  of  criminals,  and  also  for  the  surrender  of  deserters 
from  Her  Majesty's  Forces. 

Article  XVII. 

All  debts  contracted  between  the  12th  April  1877  and  the  8th  August 
1 88 1  will  be  payable  in  the  same  currency  in  which  they  may  have  been 
contracted. 


3o8  TEXT  OF  CONVENTION  OF  LONDON,   1884 

Article  XVIII. 

No  gi'ants  of  land  which  may  have  been  made,  and  no  transfers  or 
mortgages  which  may  have  been  passed,  between  the  12th  April  1877 
and  the  8th  August  1881,  will  be  invalidated  by  reason  merely  of  their 
having  been  made  or  passed  between  such  dates. 

All  transfers  to  the  British  Secretary  for  Native  Affairs  in  trust  for 
Natives  will  remain  in  force,  an  officer  of  the  South  African  Republic 
taking  the  place  of  such  Secretary  for  Native  Affairs. 

Article  XIX. 

The  Government  of  the  South  African  Republic  will  engage  faith- 
fully to  fulfil  the  assurances  given,  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  the 
South  African  Republic,  to  the  natives  at  the  Pretoria  Pitso  by  the 
Royal  Commission  in  the  presence  of  the  Triumvirate  and  with  their 
entire  assent,  (i)  as  to  the  freedom  of  the  natives  to  buy  or  otherwise 
acquire  lands  under  certain  conditions,  (2)  as  to  the  appointment  of  a 
commission  to  mark  out  native  locations,  (3)  as  to  the  access  of  the 
natives  to  the  courts  of  law,  and  (4)  as  to  their  being  allowed  to  move 
freely  within  the  country,  or  to  leave  it  for  any  legal  purpose,  under  a 
pass  system. 

Article  XX. 

This  Convention  will  be  ratified  by  a  Volksraad  of  the  South  African 
Republic  within  the  period  of  six  months  after  its  execution,  and  in 
default  of  such  ratification  this  Convention  shall  be  null  and  void. 

Signed  in  duplicate  in  London  this  27th  day  of  February  1884. 

(Signed)       HERCULES  ROBINSON. 
S.  J.   P.   KRUGER. 
„  S.  J.   DU  TOIT. 

„  N.  J.  SMIT. 


[C— 3914.] 


TfRNBULL   AND   SPEARS,   PRINTERS,   EUINBUKGH. 


A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 

AND     ANNOUNCEMENTS    OF 

METHUEN    AND    COMPANY 

PUBLISHERS  :  LONDON 

36  ESSEX  STREET 

W.C. 


CONTENTS 

FORTHCOMING  BOOKS,    . 

PAG 
2 

POETRY,                    .... 

9 

ENGLISH  CLASSICS, 

lO 

ILLUSTRATED  BOOKS,   . 

II 

HISTORY,     .... 

12 

BIOGRAPHY,          .                 ... 

14 

GENERAL  LITERATURE, 

IS 

SCIENCE,                 .... 

18 

PHILOSOPHr,        ,                 .                 „                 J 

19 

THEOLOGY,            •                 .                 .                 = 

20 

LEADERS  OF  RELIGION, 

21 

FICTION,                   .... 

22 

BOOKS  FOR  BOYS  AND  GIRLS,      . 

31 

THE  PEACOCK  LIBRARY, 

32 

UNIVERSITY   EXTENSION   SERIES, 

32 

SOCIAL  QUESTIONS  OF  TO-DAY, 

34 

CLASSICAL  TRANSLATIONS, 

35 

EDUCATIONAL  BOOKS, 

36 

NOVEMBER  1896 


November  1896. 

Messrs     Methuen's 

ANNOUNCEMENTS 


oetry 


RUDYARD  KIPLING 
THE  SEVEN  SEAS.   By  Rudyard  Kipling.  Crown  Zvo.  6j. 
150  copies  on  hand-made  paper.     Deniy  8vo.     2ls. 
30  copies  on  Jaoanese  paper.     Demy  8vo.     425. 
The  enormous  successof '  Barrack  Room  B  Olads' justifies  the  expectation  that  this 
volume,  so  long  postponed,  will  have  an  equal,  if  not  a  greater,  success. 

GEORGE  WYNDHAM 

SHAKESPEARE'S  POEMS.     Edited,  with  an  Introduction  and 
Notes,  by  George  Wyndham,  M.P.     Crown  8vo.     y.  6J. 

[English  Classics. 
W.  E.  HENLEY 
ENGLISH  LYRICS.     Selected  and  Edited  by  W.  E.  Henley. 
Crown  Zvo.     Buckram.     6s, 

Also  15  copies  on  Japanese  paper.     Demy  8vo.     £2,  2s, 
Few  announcements  will  be  more  welcome  to  lovers  of  English  verse  than  the  one 
that  Mr.   Henley  is  bringing  together   into   one   book   the  finest  l>Tics  in  our 
language.     The  volume  will  be  produced  with  the  same  care  that  made  '  Lyra 
Heroica '  delightful  to  the  hand  and  eye. 

•Q' 

POEMS  AND   BALLADS.     By  '  Q,'  Author  of  'Green  Bays, 

etc.     Crown  Svo.     Bzu/cmm.     3^.  61/. 

History,  Biography,  and  Travel 

CAPTAIN  HINDE 

THE  FALL  OF  THE  CONGO  ARABS.  By  Sidney  L. 
IIiNDE.  With  Portraits  and  Plans.  Demy  Svo.  12s.  6d. 
This  volume  deals  with  the  recent  Belgian  Expedition  to  the  Upper  Congo,  which 
developed  into  a  war  between  the  State  forces  and  the  Arab  slave-raiders  in 
Central  Africa.  Two  wliitc  men  only  retiirncd  alive  from  the  three  years'  war — 
Commandant  Dhanis  and  the  writer  of  this  book,  Captain  Hinde.  During  the 
greater  part  ofthe  time  spent  by  Captain  Hinde  in  the  Congo  he  was  amongst 
cannibal  races  in  little-known  regions,  and,  owing  to  the  peculiar  circumstances 
of  his  position,  was  enabled  to  see  a  side  of  native  history  shown  to  few  Europeans. 
Tlie  war  terminated  in  the  complete  defeat  of  the  Arabs,  seventy  thousand  of 
whom  perished  during  the  struggle. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  Announcements         3 

S.  BARING  GOULD 
THE  LIFE  OF  NAPOLEON  BONAPARTE.    By  S.  Baring 
Gould.      With  over  450  Illustrations  in  the  Text  and  13  Photo^.' 
gravure  Plates.     Large  quarto.     365. 

This  study  of  the  most  extraordinary  life  in  history  is  written  rather  for  the  general 
reader  than  for  the  military  student,  and  while  following  the  main  lines  of 
Napoleon's  career,  is  concerned  chiefly  with  the  development  of  his  character  and 
his  personal  qualities.  Special  stress  is  laid  on  his  early  life — the  period  in  which 
his  mind  and  character  took  their  definite  shape  and  direction. 

The  great_  feature  of  the  hook  is  its  wealth  of  illustration.  There  are  over  456 
illustrations,  large  and  small,  in  the  text,  and  there  are  also  more  than  a  dozen 
full  page  photogravures.  Every  important  incident  of  Napoleon's  career  has 
its  illustration,  while  there  are  a  large  number  of  portraits  of  his  contemporaries, 
reproductions  of  famous  pictures,  of  contemporary  caricatures,  of  his  handwriting, 
etc.  etc. 

It  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  no  such  m-agnificent  book  on  Napoleon  has  ever  been 
published. 

VICTOR  HUGO 

THE  LETTERS  OF  VICTOR  HUGO.     Translated  from  the 

French   by   F,    Clarke,    M.A.      In    Two    Volumes.      Demy   Hvo. 

ios.6d.eacL      Vol.  I.      1815-35. 

This  is  the  first  volume  of  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  important  collection  of 
letters  ever  published  in  France.  The  correspondence  dates  from  Victor  Hugo's 
boyhood  to  his  death,  and  none  of  the  letters  have  been  published  before.  The 
arrangement  is  chiefly  chronological,  but  where  there  is  an  interesting  set  of 
letters  to  one  person  these  are  arranged  together.  The  first  volume  contains, 
among  others,  (i)  Letters  to  his  father  ;  (2)  to  his  young  wife  ;  (3)  to  his  confessor, 
Lamennais ;  (4)  a  very  important  set  of  about  fifty  letters  to  Sainte-Beuve ;  (5) 
letters  about  his  early  books  and  plays. 

J.   M.   RIGG 

ST.  ANSELM  OF  CANTERBURY:  A  Chapter  in  the 
History  of  Religion.  By  T-  M.  Rigg,  of  Lincoln's  Inn, 
Barrister-at-Law.     Demy  Svo.     Ts.  6d. 

This  work  gives  for  the  first  time  in  moderate  compass  a  complete  portrait  of  St. 
Anselm,  exhibiting  him  in  his  intimate  and  interior  as  well  as  in  his  public  life. 
Thus,  while  the  great  ecclesiastico-political  struggle  in  which  he  played  so  prominent 
a  part  is  fully  dealt  with,  unusual  prominence  is  given  to  the  profound  and  subtle 
speculations  by  which  he  permanently  influenced  theological  and  metaphysical 
thought ;  while  it  will  be  a  surprise  to  most  readers  to  find  him  also  appearing  as 
the  author  of  some  of  the  most  exquisite  religious  poetry  in  the  Latin  language. 

EDWARD  GIBBON 
THE  DECLINE  AND  FALL  OF  THE  ROMAN  EMPIRE] 
By  Edward  Gibbon.  A  New  Edition,  edited  with  Notes, 
Appendices,  and  Maps  by  J.  B.  Bury,  M.A.,  Fellow.of  Trifiity 
College,  Dublin,  In  Seven  Volumes.  Demy  Zvo,  gilt  top.  '8s.  6d. 
each.     Crown  Svo.    6s.  each.     Vol.  11 


4         Messrs,  Methuen's  Announcements 

W.  M.  FLINDERS  PETRIE 

A  HISTORY  OF  EGYPT,  from  the  Earliest  Times  to 
THE  Present  Day.  Edited  by  W.  M.  Flinders  Petrie,  D.C.L., 
LL.D.,  Professor  of  Egyptology  at  University  College.  Fully 
Illustrated.     In  Six  Volumes.     Crozvn  8vo.     6s.  each. 

Vol.  II.  XVII. -XVIII.  Dynasties.    W.  M.  F.  Petrie. 

'  A  history  written  in  the  spirit  of  scientific  precision  so  worthily  represented  by  Dr. 
Petrie  and  his  school  cannot  but  promote  sound  and  accurate  study,  and  supply  a 
vacant  place  in  the  English  literature  of  Egj'ptology.' — Times. 

J.   WELLS 

A  SHORT  HISTORY  OF  ROME.  By  J.  Wells,  M.A.,  Fellow 
and  Tutor  of  Wadham  Coll.,  Oxford.  With  4  Maps.  Crown  8vo. 
T,s.6J.     3S°pp. 

This  book  is  intended  for  the  Middle  and  Upper  Forms  of  Public  SchWs  and  for 
Pass  Students  at  the  Universities.    It  contains  copious  Tables,  etc 

H.  DE  E.   GIBBINS 
ENGLISH    INDUSTRY:    HISTORICAL   OUTLINES.     By 

II.  deB.  Gibbins,  M.A.  With  slSIaps.   Derny^vo.    los.  6d.    /^.  450. 

This  book  is  written  with  the  view  of  aflfording  a  clear  view  of  the  main  facts  of 
English  Social  and  Industrial  History  placed  ip  due  perspective.  Beginning 
with  prehistoric  times,  it  passes  in  review  the  growth  and  advance  of  industry 
up  to  the  nineteenth  century,  showing  its  gradual  development  and  progress. 
The  author  has  endeavoured  to  place  before  his  readers  the  history  of  industry 
as  a  connected  whole  in  which  all  these  developments  have  their  proper  place. 
The  book  is  illustraied  by  Maps,  Diagrams,  and  Tables,  and  aided  by  copious 
Footnotes. 

MRS.   OLIPHANT 

THOMAS  CHALMERS.  By  Mrs.  Oliphant.  Second  Edition. 
Crown  %vo.     y.  6d.  [Leaders  of  Religion. 


Naval  and  Military 


DAVID  HANNAY 
A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF     THE    ROYAL     NAVY,' from 
Early  Times  to  the   Present  Day.       By    David   IIannay. 
Illustrated.     Demy  8vo.     1 55. 

This  book  aims  at  giving  an  account  not  only  of  the  fighting  we  have  done  at  sea, 
but  of  the  growth  of  the  service,  of  the  part  the  Navy  has  played  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  Empire,  and  of  its  inner  life.  The  author  has  endeavoured  to  avoid 
the  mistake  of  s.-jcrificing  the  earlier  periods  of  naval  history — the  very  interesting 
wars  with  Holl.ind  in  the  seventeenth  century,  for  instance,  or  the  American 
War  of  1779-1783 — to  the  later  struggle  with  Revolutionary  and  Imperial  France. ' 


Messrs.  Metiiuen's  Announcements         5 

COL.  COOPER  KING 
A  SHORT  HISTORY  OF  THE  BRITISH  ARMY.  By  Lieut.- 
Colonel  Cooper  King,  of  the  Staff  College,  Camberley.  Illustrated. 
Demy  Svo.  ys,  6d. 
This  volume  aims  at  describing  the  nature  of  the  difTerent  armies  that  have  been 
formed  in  Great  Britain,  and  how  from  the  early  and  feudal  levies  the  present 
standing  army  came  to  be.  The  changes  in  tactics,  uniform,  and  armament  are 
briefly  touched  upon,  andj  the  campaigns  in  which  the  army  has  shared  have 
been  so  far  followed  as  to  explain  the  part  played  by  British  regiments  in  them. 

G.  W.   STEEVENS 

NAVAL  POLICY :  With  a  Description  of  English  and 
Foreign  Navies.     By  G.  W.  Steevens.     De7}iy  8z>o.    6s. 

This  book  is  a  description  of  the  British  and  other  more  important  navies  of  the  world, 
with  a  sketch  of  the  lines  on  which  our  naval  policy  might  possibly  be  developed. 
It  describes  our  recent  naval  policy,  and  shows  what  our  naval  force  really  is.  A 
detailed  but  non-technical  account  is  given  of  the  instruments  of  modern  warfare — 
guns,  armour,  engines,  and  the  like — with  a  view  to  determine  how  far  we  are 
abreast  of  modern  invention  and  modern  requirements.  An  ideal  policy  is  then 
sketched  for  the  building  and  manning  of  our  fleet ;  and  the  last  chapter  is 
devoted  to  docks,  coaling-stations,  and  especially  colonial  defence. 


Theology 


F.  B.  JEVONS 
AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  HISTORY  OF  RELIGION. 
By  F.  B.  Jevons,  M.A.,  Litt.D,,  Tutor  at  the  University  ofDurliam 
Demy  8vo.     los.  6d. 

This  is  the  third  number  of  the  series  of  'Theological  Handbooks'  edited  by  Dr. 
Robertson  of  Durham,  in  which  have  already  appeared  Dr.  Gibson's  'XXXIX. 
Articles'  and  Mr.  Ottley's  '  Incarnation.' 

Mr.  F.  B.  Jevons'  'Introduction  to  the  History  of  Religion'  treats  of  early  religion, 
from  the  point  of  view  of  Anthropology  and  Folk-lore  ;  and  is  the  first  attempt 
that  has  been  made  in  any  language  to  weave  together  the  results  of  recent 
investigations  into  such  topics  as  Sympathetic  Magic,  Taboo,  Totemism, 
Fetishism,  etc.,  so  as  to  present  a  systematic  account  of  the  growth  of  primitive 
religion  asnd  the  development  of  early  religious  institutions. 

W.  YORKE  FAU3SETT 
THE  DE  CATECHIZANDIS  RUDIBUS  OF.ST.  AUQUS- 
TINE.  "^  Edited,    with  Introduction,    Notes,    etc.,    by   W.    Yorke 
Faussett,  M.A.,  late  Scholar  of  Balliol  Coll.     Crown  8z'o.     y.  6d. 

An  edition  of  a  Treatise  on  the  Essentials  of  Christian  Doctrine,  and  the  best 
methods  of  impressing  them  on  candidates  for  baptism.  The  editor  bestows  upon 
this  patristic  work  the  same  care  which  a  treatise  of  Cicero  might  claim.  There 
is  a  general  Introduction,  a  careful  Analysis,  a  full  Commentary,  and  other  useful 
matter.  No  better  introduction  to  the  study  of  the  Latin  Fathers,  their  style  and 
diction,  could  be  found  than  this  treatise,  which  also  has  no  lackof  modem  interest. 


Messrs.  Metiiuen's  Announcements 


General   Literature 

C.   F.   ANDREWS 
CHRISTIANITY    AND    THE    LABOUR    QUESTION.     By 
C.  F.  Andrews,  E.A.     Croivn  Svo.     2s,  6d. 

R.   E.   STEEL 
MAGNETISM     AND     ELECTRICITY.        By    R.    Elliott 

Steel,  M.A.,  F.C. S.      ^Yith  Illustrations.     CrownZvo.     4s.  6d. 

G.  LOV/ES  DICKINSON 

THE    GREEK   VIEW    OF    LIFE.     By    G.   L.   Dickinson, 
Fellow  of  King's  College,  Cambridge.     Ciorcn  8vo.     2s.  6d. 

[  University  Extetision  Series. 

J.   A.   HOBSON 
THE    PROBLEM    OF    THE    UNEMPLOYED.      By    J.   A. 
IIOBSON,  B.A.,  Author  of  'The  Problems  of  Poverty.'     Crown  2,vo. 
2s.  dd.  [Social  Questions  Series. 

S.   E.   BALLY 
GERMAN    COMMERCIAL    CORRESPONDENCE.      By  S. 
E.  Bally,  Assistant  Master  at  the  Manchester  Grammar  School. 
Crown  8z'o.     2s.  6d.  [  Commercial  Series. 

L.  F.   PRICE 
ECONOMIC  ESSAYS.     By  L.  F.  Price,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  Oriel 
College,  Oxford.     Crown  ?,vo.     6s. 

This  book  consists  of  a  number  of  Studies  in  Economics  and  Industrial  and  Social 
Problems. 


Fiction 


MARIE  CORELLI'S  ROMANCES 

FIRST  COMPLETE  AND  UNIFORM  EDITION 

Large  crown  8vo.     6s. 
Messrs.  Methuen  beg  to  announce  that   they  have  commenced  the  pub- 
lication of  a  New  and  Uniform  Edition  of  Marie  Corelli's  Romances. 
This  Edition  is  revised  by  the   Author,    and   contains  new   Prefaces.      The 
volumes  are  being  issued  at  short  intervals  in  the  following  order  : — 

I.  A  ROMANCE  OF  TWO  WORLDS.      2.  VENDETTA. 
3.  THELMA.  4.  ARDATH. 

5.  THE  SOUL  OF  LILITH.  6.  WORMWOOD. 

7.  BARABBAS.  8.  THE  SORROWS  OF  SATAN. 


Messrs.  Metiiuen's  Announcements         7 

BARING  GOULD 
DARTMOOR  IDYLLS.    By  S.  Baring  Gould.    Cr.  Zvo.    6s. 

GUAVAS  THE  TINNER.     By  S.  Baring  Gould,  Author  of 
'Mehalah,' 'The  Broom  Squire,' etc.     Illustrated.     CroxvnZvo.     6s. 
THE    PENNYCOMEQUICKS.        By    S.    Baring    Gould. 
New  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
A  new  edition,  uniform  with  the  Author's  other  novels. 

LUCAS  MALET 

THE  CARISSIMA.   By  Lucas  Malet.  Author  of '  The  Wages  of 
Sin,'  etc.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
This  is  the  first  novel  which  Lucas  Malet  has  written  since  her  very  powerful  '  The 
Wages  of  Sin." 

ARTHUR  MORRISON 

A  CHILD  OF  THE  JAGO.    By  Arthur  Morrison.    Author 

of  '  Talcs  of  Mean  Streets. '     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

This,  the  first  long  story  which  Mr.  Morrison  has  written,  is  like  his  remarkable 
'Tales  of  Mean  Streets,'  a  realistic  study  of  East  End  life. 

W.   E.   NORRIS 
CLARISSA  FURIOSA.     By  W.  E,  Norris,  'Author  of  'The 
Rogue,'  etc.     Crown  2>vo.     6s. 

L.   COPE  CORNFORD 
CAPTAIN  JACOBUS  :  A  ROMANCE  OF  HIGHWAYMEN. 
By  L.  Cope  Cornford.     Illustratedo     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

J.   BLOUNDELLE  BURTON 

DENOUNCED.    By  J.  Bloundelle  Burton,  Author  of  '  In 
the  Day  of  Adversity,' etc.     Croivn  Svo,     6s. 

J.   MACLAREN  COBBAN 
WILT  THOU  HAVE  THIS  WOMAN?     By  J.  M.  Cobuan, 
Author  of  '  The  King  of  Andaman.'     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

J.  F.  BREWEE 
THE  SPECULATORS.    By  J.  F.  Brewer.     Crozan  Zvo.    6s. 

A.  BALFOUR 
BY  STROKE  OF  SWORD.     By  Andrew  Balfour.    Crown 
'  8vo,    6s. 


8         Messrs.  Metiiuen's  Announcements 

M.  A.  OWEN 

THE  DAUGHTER  OF  ALOUETTE.     By  Mary  A.  Owen. 
Cro7vn  8vo.     6s. 
A  story  of  life  among  the  American  Indians. 

RONALD  ROSS 
THE  SPIRIT  OF  STORM.      By  Ronald  Ross,  Author  of 
'  The  Child  of  Ocean. '     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
A  romance  of  the  Sea. 

J.  A.  BARRY 

IN    THE    GREAT    DEEP  :   Tales   of   the   Sea.     By  J.  A. 
Barry.     Author  of 'Steve  Brown's  Bunyip.'     CjvwnZvo.     6s. 

JAMES  GORDON 

THE  VILLAGE  AND  THE  DOCTOR.     By  James  Gordon. 
Crown  Zvo,  6s. 

BERTRAM  MITFORD 

THE    SIGN   OF   THE    SPIDER.    By  Bertram    Mitford. 
Crown  8vo,     35.  6d, 
A  story  of  South  Africa. 

A.   SHIELD 

THE  SQUIRE  OF  WAN  DALES.    By  A.  Shield.    CrownZvo. 

3J-.  6d. 

G.   W.   STEEVENS 
MONOLOGUES    OF    THE    DEAD.      By  G.  W.   Steevkns. 
Foolscap  Svo.     ^s.  6d. 
A  series  of  Soliloquies  in  which  famous  men  of  antiquity — Julius  Casar,   Nero, 
Alcibiades,  etc.,  attempt  to  express  themselves  in  the  modes  of  thought  and 
language  cf  to-day. 

S.   GORDON 
A  HANDFUL  OF  EXOTICS.     By  S.  Gordon.     Crown  Zvo. 
1$.  6d. 
A  volume  of  stories  of  Jewish  life  in  Russia 

P.   NEUMANN 

THE  SUPPLANTER.     B"  P.  Neumann.    Crown  Zvo.     zs.  6d. 

EVELYN  DICKINSON 

THE  SIN  OF  ANGELS.   By  Evelyn  Dickinson.    CrownZvo. 
3J-.  6d. 

H.  A.   KENNEDY 

A  MAN  WITH  BLACK  EYELASHES.    By  H.  A.  Kennedy. 
Crown  &V0.     y.  6d. 


A  LIST  or 

Messrs.     Metiiuen's 

PUBLICATIONS 


Poetry 


Rudyard  Kipling.  BARRACK-ROOM  BALLADS;  And 
Other  Verses.  By  Rudyard  Kipling.  Ninth  Edition.  Crown 
8vo.     6s, 

'  Mr.  Kipling's  verse  is  strong,  vivid,  full  of  character.  .  .  .  Unmistakable  genius 
rings  in  every  line.' — Times. 

'"Barrack-Room  Ballads"  contains  some  of  the  best  work  that  Mr.  Kipling  has 
ever  done,  which  is  saying  a  good  deal.  "  Fuzzy-Wuzzy,"  "  Gunga  Din,"  and 
"Tommy,"  are,  in  our  opinion,  altogether  superior  to  anything  of  the  kind  that 
English  literature  has  hitherto  produced.'- — Athenc^um. 
'  The  ballads  teem  with  imagination,  they  palpitate  with  emotion.  We  read  them 
with  laughter  and  tears  ;  the  metres  throb  in  our  pulses,  the  cunningly  ordered 
words  tingle  with  life  ;  and  if  this  be  not  poetry,  what  is?' — Pall  lilall  Gazette. 

"Q."    THE  GOLDEN  POMP  :  A  Procession  of  English  Lyrics 
from  Surrey  to  Shirley,  arranged  by  A.  T.  QuiLLER  Couch.    Crown 
Zvo.     Buckram.     6s. 
'  A  delightful  volume  :  a  really  golden  "Pomp." ' — Spectator. 

"Q."    GREEN  BAYS  :  Verses  and  Parodies.     By  "  O.,"  Author 
of 'Dead  Man's  Rock,' etc.     Second  Edition.     Crown  2,vo.     y.6d. 
'  The  verses  display  a  rare  and  versatile  gift  of  parody,  great  command  of  metre,  and 
a  very  pretty  turn  of  humour.' — Times. 

H.  C.  BeecMng.  LYRA  SACRA  :  An  Anthology  of  Sacred  Verse. 
Edited  by  II.   C.   Beeching,  M.A.      Crown  2>vo,     Buckram.     6s. 

'An  anthology  of  high  excellence.' — Athcnceum. 

'  A  charming  selection,  which  maintains  a  lofty  standard  of  excellence.' — Tidies. 

W.  B.  Yeats.  AN  ANTHOLOGY  OF  IRISH  VERSE. 
Edited  by  W.  B.  Yeats.      Crown  8vo.     3^.  6d. 

'  An  attractive  and  catholic  selection.' — Times, 

'  It  is  edited  by  the  most  original  and  most  accomplished  of  modern  Irish  poets,  and 
against  his  editing  but  a  single  objection  can  be  brought,  namely,  that  it  excludes 
from  the  collection  his  own  delicate  lyrics.' — Saturday  Review. 

E.  Mackay.  A  SONG  OF  THE  SEA  :  My  Lady  of  Dreams, 
AND  OTHER  PoEMS.  By  Eric  Mackay,  Author  of  '  The  Love 
Letters  of  a  Violinist.'  Second  Edition.  Fcap.  8vo,  gilt  top.  ^s. 
'  Everywhere  Mr.  Mackay  displays  himself  the  master  of  a  style  marked  by  all  the 
characteristics  of  the  best  rhetoric.  He  has  a  keen  sense  of  rhythm  and  of  general 
balance;  his  verse  is  excellently  sonorous.' — Globe. 
'  Throughout  the  book  the  poetic  workmanship  is  fine.' — Scotsman. 

A  2 


lo  Messrs.  Metiiuen's  List 

Ibsen.  BRAND.  A  Drama  by  Henrik  Iesen.  Translated  by 
William  Wilson.     Second  Edition.     Crown  2>vo.     35.  6d. 

'The  greatest  world-poem  of  the  nineteenth  century  next  to  "Faust."  It  is  in 
the  same  set  with  "Agamemnon,"  with  "Lear,"  with  the  literature  that  we  now 
instinctively  regard  as  high  and  holy.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

"A.  G."    VERSES  TO  ORDER.    By  "A.  G."    Cr.Zvo.    2s.bd. 

net. 
A  small  volume  of  verse  by  a  writer  whose  initials  are  well  known  to  Oxford  men. 
'  A  capital  specimen  of  lijht  academic  poetry.     These  verses  are  very  bright  and 
engaging,  easy  and  sufficiently  witty.' — St.  James's  Gazette. 

F.  Langbridge.  BALLADS  OF  THE  BRAVE  :  Poems  of 
Chivalry,  Enterprise,  Courage,  and  Constancy,  from  the  Earliest 
Times  to  the  Present  Day.  Edited,  with  Notes,  by  Rev.  F.  Lang- 
bridge.  Crown  8vo.  Buckram.  35.  dd.  School  Edition.  2s.  6d. 
'A  very  happy  conception  happily  carried  out.  These  "Ballads  of  the  Brave"  are 
intended  to  suit  the  real  tastes  of  boys,  and  will  suit  the  taste  of  the  great  majority.' 
— Spectator,  '  The  book  is  full  of  splendid  things.' — IVorld. 

Lang  and  Craigie.  THE  POEMS  OF  ROBERT  BURNS. 
Edited  by  Andrew  Lang  and  W.  A.  Craigie.  With  Portrait. 
Demy  ?>vo,  gilt  top.     6s. 

This  edition  contains  a  carefully  collated  Text,  numerous  Notes  critical  and  textual, 
a  critical  and  biographical  Introduction,  and  a  Glossary. 

'  Among  the  editions  in  one  volume,  Mr.  Andrew  Lang's  will  take  the  place  of 
authority.' —  Times, 

'  To  the  general  public  the  beauty  of  its  type,  and  the  fair  proportions  of  its  pages,  as 
well  as  the  excellent  chronological  arrangement  of  the  poems,  should  make  it 
acceptable  enough.  Mr.  Lang  and  his  publishers  have  certainly  succeeded  in 
producing  an  attractive  popular  edition  of  the  poet,  in  which  the  brightly  written 
biographical  introduction  is  not  the  least  notable  feature.' — Glasgow  Herald 


English  Classics 

Edited  by  W.  E.  Henley. 


'  Very  dainty  volumes  are  these  ;  the  paper,  type,  and  light-green  binding  are  all 

very  agreeable  to  the  eye.    Simplex  mundiiiis  is  the  phrase  that  might  be  applied 

to  them.' — Globe. 
'The  volumes  are  strongly  bound  in  green  buckram,  are  of  a  convenient  size,  and 

pleasant  to  look  upon,  so  that  whether  on  the  shelf,  or  on  the  table,  or  in  the  hand 

the  possessor  is  thoroughly  content  with  them.' — Guardian. 
'  The  paper,  tj-pe,  and  binding  of    this  edition   are  in  excellent  taste,  and   leave 

nothing  to  be  desired  by  lovers  of  literature.' — Standard. 

THE  LIFE  AND  OPINIONS  OF  TRISTRAM  SHANDY. 
By  Lawrence  Sterne.  With  an  Introduction  by  Charles 
Whibley,  and  a  Portrait.     2  vols.     ys. 

THE  COMEDIES  OF  WILLIAM  CONGREVE  With' 
an  Ixktroduction  by  G.  S.  Street,  and  a  Portrait.     2  vols.    Js. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  h 

the  adventures  of  hajji  baba  of  ispahan. 

By  James  Morier.    With  an  Introduction  by  E.  G.  Browne,  M.  A. , 
and  a  Portrait.     2  vols.     Js. 

THE  LIVES  OF  DONNE,  WOTTON,  HOOKER,  HER- 
BERT, AND  SANDERSON.  By  Izaak  Walton.  With  an 
Introduction  by  Vernon  Blackburn,  and  a  Portrait.     35.  6d. 

THE  LIVES  OF  THE  ENGLISH  POETS.  By  Samuel 
Johnson,  LL.D.  With  an  Introduction  by  J.  II.  Millar,  and  a 
Portrait.     3  vols.    los.  6d. 


Illustrated   Books 

Jane  Barlow.    THE  BATTLE  OF  THE  FROGS  AND  MICE, 

translated  by  Jane  Barlow,  Author  of  *  Irish  Idylls,'  and  pictured 
by  F.  D.  Bedford.     Small  4^0.     6s.  net. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  A  BOOK  OF  FAIRY  TALES  retold  by  S. 
Baring  Gould.  With  numerous  illustrations  and  initial  letters  by 
Arthur  J.  Gaskin.  Second  Edition.  Crown  %vo.  Buckram,  ds. 
•Mr.  Baring  Gould  has  done  a  good  deed,  and  is  deserving  of  gratitude,  in  re-writing 
in  honest,  simple  style  the  old  stories  that  delighted  the  childhood  of  "  our  fathers 
and  grandfathers."  We  do  not  think  he  has  omitted  any  of  our  favourite  stories, 
the  stories  that  are  commonly  regarded  as  merely  ' '  old  fashioned."  As  to  the  form 
of  the  book,  and  the  printing,  which  is  by  Messrs.  Constable,  it  were  difficult  to 
commend  overmuch.  — Saturday  Review. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  OLD  ENGLISH  FAIRY  TALES.  Col- 
lected and  edited  by  S.  Baring  Gould.  With  Numerous  Illustra- 
tions by  F.  D.  Bedford.  Second  Edition.  Crown  ^vo.  Buckram.  6s, 
'A  charming  volume,  which  children  will  be  sure  to  appreciate.  The  stories  have 
been  selected  with  great  ingenuity  from  various  old  ballads  and  folk-tales,  and, 
having  been  somewhat  altered  and  readjusted,  now  stand  forth,  clothed  in  Mr. 
Baring  Gould'r  delightful  English,  to  enchant  youthful  readers.  All  the  tales 
are  good.' — Guardian. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  A  BOOK  OF  NURSERY  SONGS  AND 
RHYMES.  -Edited  by  S.  Baring  Gould,  and  Illustrated  by  the 
Birmingham  Art  School.  Buckram,  gilt  top.  Crown  ivo.  6s. 
'  The  volume  is  very  complete  in  its  way,  as  it  contains  nursery  songs  to  the  number 
°f  77)  game-rhymes,  and  jingles.  To  the  student  we  commend  the  sensible  intro- 
duction, and  the  explanatory  notes.  The  volume  is  superbly  printed  on  soft, 
thick  paper,  which  it  is  a  pleasure  to  touch  ;  and  the  borders  and  pictures  are,  as 
we  have  said,  among  the  very  best  specimens  we  have  seen  of  the  Gaskin  school.' 
— Birmingltam  Gazette. 


12  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

H.  0.  BeecMng.  A  ROOK  OF  CHRISTMAS  VERSE.  Edited 
by  II.  C.  Beeching,  M.A.,  and  Illustrated  by  Walter  Crane. 
Crown  %vo,  gilt  lop.     ^s. 

A  collection  of  the  best  verse  inspired  by  the  birth  of  Christ  from  the  Middle  Ages 
to  the  present  day.  A  distinction  of  the  book  is  the  large  number  of  poems  it 
contains  by  modern  authors,  a  few  of  which  are  here  printed  for  tlie  first  time. 

'An  anthology  which,  from  its  unity  of  aim  and  high  poetic  excellence,  has  a  better 
right  to  exist  than  most  of  its  fellows.' — Guardian. 


History 


Gibbon.  THE  DECLINE  AND  FALL  OF  THE  ROMAN 
EMPIRE.  By  Edward  Gibbon.  A  New  Edition,  Edited  with 
Notes,  Appendices,  and  Maps,  by  J.  B.  Bury,  M.A.,  Fellow  of 
Trinity  College,  Dublin.  In  Seven  Volumes.  Demy  8vo.  Gilt  top. 
85.  (id.  each.     Also  crown  Svo.     6s.  each.      Vol.  I. 

'The  time  has  certainly  arrived  for  a  new  edition  of  Gibbon's  great  work.  .  .  .  Pro- 
fessor Cury  is  the  right  man  to  undertake  this  task.  His  learning  is  amazing, 
both  in  extent  and  accuracy.  The  book  is  issued  in  a  handy  form,  and  at  a 
moderate  price,  and  it  is  admirably  printed.' — Times. 

'  The  edition  is  edited  as  a  classic  should  be  edited,  removing  nothing,  yet  indicating 
the  value  of  the  text,  and  bringing  it  up  to  date.  It  promises  to  be  of  the  utmost 
v.ilue,  and  will  be  a  welcome  addition  to  many  libraries.' — Scotsman. 

'  This  edition,  so  far  as  one  may  judge  from  the  first  instalment,  is  a  marvel  of 
erudition  and  critical  skill,  and  it  is  the  very  minimum  of  praise  to  predict  that  the 
seven  volumes  of  it  will  supersede  Dean  Milman's  as  the  standard  edition  of  our 
great  historical  classic.'- — Glasgow  Herald. 

'  The  beau-ideal  Gibbon  has  arrived  at  last.' — Sketch. 

'  At  last  there  is  an  adequate  modern  edition  of  Gibbon.  .  .  .  The  best  edition  the 
nineteenth  century  could  produce.' — Manchester  Guardiatt. 

Flinders Petrie.  A HISTORYOF EGYPT, fromthe Earliest 
Times  to  the  Present  Day.  Edited  by  W.  M.  Flinders 
Petrie,  D.C.L.,  LL.D.,  Professor  of  Egyptology  at  University 
College.    Fnlly  Illustrated.    In  Six  Volumes.    Crown  Svo.    6s.  each. 

Vol.  I.  Prehistoric  Times  to  XVI.   Dynasty.      W.  M.   F. 
Petrie.     Second  Edition. 
'  K  history  written  in  the  spirit  of  scientific  precision  so  worthily  represented  by  Dr. 
Petrie    and  his  school  cannot    but  promote    sound    and    accurate    study,    and 
supply  a  vacant  place  in  the  English  literature  of  Egyptology.' — Times. 

FUnders  Petrie.     EGYPTIAN  TALES.      Edited  by  W.  M. 
Flinders  Petrie.     Illustrated    by   Tristram    Ellis.      /«    Two 
Volumes.     Crown  %vo.    3^.  6d.  each. 
'A  valuable  addition  to  the  literature  of  comparative  folk-lore.     The  drawings  are 

really  illustrations  in  the  literal  sense  of  the  \iox<\.'— Globe. 
'  It  has  a  scientific  value  to  the  student  of  history  and  archajology.' — Scotsman. 
Invaluable  as  a  picture  of  life  ia  rulcstii.e  and   Egypt.'— ZJa/'/y  AVifJ. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  13 

Flinders  Petrie.  EGYPTIAN  DECORATIVE  ART.  By 
W.  M.  Flinders  Petrie,  D.C.L.  With  120  Illustrations.  Crown 
Svo.     y.  6d. 

'  Professor  Flinders  Petrie  is  not  only  a  profound  Egyptologist,  but  an  accomplished 
student  of  comparative  archaeology.  In  these  lectures,  delivered  at  the  Royal 
Institution,  he  displays  both  qualifications  with  rare  skill  in  elucidating  the 
development  of  decorative  art  in  Egypt,  and  in  tracing  its  influence  on  the 
art  of  other  countries.  Few  experts  can  speak  with  higher  authority  and  wider 
knowledge  than  the  Professor  himself,  and  in  any  case  his  treatment  of  his  sub- 
ject is  full  of  learning  and  insight.' — Times. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  THE  TRAGEDY  OF  THE  C^SARS. 
The  Emperors  of  the  Julian  and  Claudian  Lines.  With  numerous 
Illustrations  from  Busts,  Gems,  Cameos,  etc.  By  S.  Baring  Gould, 
Author  of  '  Mehalah,' etc.      Third  Edition.     Royal  %vo.     \^s. 

'  A  most  splendid  and  fascinating  book  on  a  subject  of  undying  interest.  The  great 
feature  of  the  book  is  the  use  the  author  has  made  of  the  existing  portraits  of  the 
Caesars,  and  the  admirable  critical  subtlety  he  has  exhibited  in  dealing  with  this 
line  of  research.  It  is  brilliantly  written,  and  the  illustrations  are  supplied  on  a 
scale  of  profuse  magnificence.' — Daily  Clu-onicle. 

'  The  volumes  will  in  no  sense  disappoint  the  general  reader.  Indeed,  in  their  way, 
there  is  nothing  in  any  sense  so  good  in  English.  .  .  .  Mr.  Piaring  Gould  has 
presented  his  narrative  in  such  a  way  as  not  to  make  one  dull  page.' — Athcmeutn. 

A.  Clark.  THE  COLLEGES  OF  OXFORD  :  Their  History, 
their  Traditions.  By  Members  of  the  University.  Edited  by  A. 
Clark,  M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Lincoln  College.    ?>vo.    12s.  Cd. 

'A  work  which  will  certainly  be  appealed  to  for  many  years  as  the  standard  book  on 
the  Colleges  of  Oxford.' — Aihentsum. 

Perrens.     THE   HISTORY    OF    FLORENCE   FROM    1434 
TO  1492.     By  F.  T.    Perrens.      Translated  by  Hannah  Lynch. 
^vo.     I2s.  6d. 
A  history  of  Florence   under   the  domination   of  Cosimo,  Piero,  and  Lorenzo  de 

Medicis. 
'  This  is  a  standard  book  by  an  honest  and  intelligent  historian,  who  has  deserved 
well  of  all  who  are  interested  in  Italian  history.' — Manchester  Guardian. 

E.  L.  S.  Horsburgh.      THE  CAMPAIGN  OF  WATERLOO. 

By  E.  L.  S.  Horsburgh,  B.A.      With  Plans.     Crown  Svo.     $s. 

'A  brilliant  essay — simple,  sound,  and  thorough.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

'  A  study,  the  most  concise,  the  most  lucid,  the  most  critical  that  has  been  produced.' 
— Birmingham  Mercury, 

'  A  careful  and  precise  study,  a  fair  and  impartial  criticism,  and  an  eminently  read- 
able book.' — Admiralty  and  Horse  Guards  Gazette. 

H.  B.George.   BATTLES  OF  ENGLISH  HISTORY.   ByH.  B. 

George,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  New  College,  Oxford.      With  numerous 
Plans.     Third  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
'  Mr.  George  has  undertaken  a  very  useful  task — that  of  making  military  a(Tairs  in- 
telligible and  instructive  to  non-military  readers — and  has  executed  it  with  laud- 
able intelligence  and  industry,  and  with  a  large  measure  of  success.' — Times. 
'This  book  is  almost  a  revelation  ;  and  we  heartily  congratulate  the  author  on  his 
^  work  and  on  the  prospect  of  the  reward  he  has  well  deserved  for  so  much  con- 
scientious and  sustained  labour' — Daily  Chronicle, 


14  Messrs,  Methuen's  List 

0.  Browning.  A  SHORT  HISTORY  OF  MEDIEVAL  ITALY, 
A.D.  1250-1530.  By  Oscar  Browning,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  King's 
College,  Cambridge.  Second  Edition.  In  Two  Volumes.  Crown 
Svo.     ^s.  each. 

Vol.  I.  1250-1409. — Guelphs  and  Ghibellines. 

Vol.  ii.  1409-1530. — The  Age  of  the  Condottieri. 

'  A  vivid  picture  of  media;val  Italy.' — Standard. 

'  Mr.   Browning  is  to  be  congratulated  on  the  production  of  a  work  of  immense 
labour  and  learning.' — Wcst»iinster  Gazette. 

O'Grady.      THE    STORY    OF    IRELAND,      By    Standish 

O'Grady,  Author  of  '  Finn  and  his  Companions.'     Cr.  %vo.     2s.  6d. 

'  Most  delightful,  most    stimulating.     Its    racy    humour,    its    original    imaginings, 

make  it  one  of  the  freshest,  breeziest  volumes.' — Methodist  Tijites. 
'A  sur\ey  at  once  graphic,  acute,  and  quaintly  written.' — Tunes. 


Biography 


R.  L.  Stevenson,     VAILIMA  LETTERS,    By  Robert  Louis 

Stevenson,    With  an  Etched  Portrait  by  William  Strang,  and 

other  Illustrations.    Second  Edition.     CrownZvo.    Buckram.    Is.Gd. 
'  The  Vailima  Letters  are  rich  in  all  the  varieties  of  that  charm  which  have  secured 

for  Stevenson  the  affection  of  many  others  besides  "journalists,  fellow-novelists, 

and  boys."' — The  Times. 
'  Few  publications  have  in  our  time  been  more  eagerly  awaited  than  these  "Vailima 

Letters,"  giving  the  first  fruits  of  the  correspondence  of  Robert  Louis  Stevenson. 

But,  high  as  the  tide  of  expectation  has  run,  no  reader  can  possibly  be  disappointed 

in  tlie  result.' — St.  James's  Gazette. 
'  For  the  student  of  English  literature  these  letters  indeed  are  a  treasure.     They 

are  more  like  "  Scott's  Journal  "  in  kind  than  any  other  literary  autobiography.' 

— National  Observer. 

F.  W.  Joyce.     THE    LIFE   OF   SIR  FREDERICK  GORE 

OUSELEY.  By  F.  W.  Joyce,  M.A.  With  Portraits  and  Illustra- 
tions.    Crown  8vo.     "js.  6d. 

'  All  the  materials  have  been  well  digested,  and  the  book  gives  us  a  complete  picture 
of  the  life  of  one  who  will  ever  be  held  in  loving  remembrance  by  his  personal 
friends,  and  who  in  the  history  of  music  in  this  country  will  always  occupy  a 
prominent  position  on  account  of  the  many  ser\-ices  he  rendered  to  the  art.' — 
Musical  Ne7us. 

'  This  book  has  been  undertaken  in  quite  the  right  spirit,  and  written  with  sympathy, 
insight,  and  considerable  literary  skill.' — Titites. 

T7.  G.  Collingwood.  THE  LIFE  OF  JOHN  RUSKiN.  By 
W.  G.  Collingwood,  M.A.,  Editor  of  Mr.  Ruskin's  Poems.  With 
numerous  Portraits,  and  13  Drawings  by  Mr.  Ruskin.  Second 
Edition.     2  voh.     Zvo.     325. 

■  No  more  magnificent  volumes  h.ive  been  published  for  a  long  time.' — Times. 

'  It  is  long  since  we  had  a  biography  with  such  delights  of  substance  and  of  form. 
Such  a  book  is  a  pleasure  for  the  day,  and  a  joy  for  ever.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

'  A  noble  monument  of  a  noble  subject.  One  of  the  most  beautiful  books  about  one 
of  the  noblest  lives  of  our  century." — Glasgow  Herald. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  15 

0.  Waldstein.  JOHN  RUSKIN  :  a  Study.  By  Charles 
Waldstein,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  King's  College,  Cambridge.  With  a 
Photogravure  Portrait  after  Professor  Herkomer.  Post  8vo.  ^s. 
'A  thoughtful,  impartial,  well-written  criticism  of  Ruskin's  teaching,  intended  to 
separate  what  the  author  regards  as  valuable  and  permanent  from  what  is  transient 
and  erroneous  in  the  great  master's  writing.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

W.  H.  Hutton.  THE  LIFE  OF  SIR  THOMAS  MORE.  By 
W.  II.  Hutton,  M.A.,  Author  of  '  William  Laud.'  With  Portraits. 
Crown  8vo.    ^s. 

'  The  book  lays  good  claim  to  high  rank  among  our  biographies.  It  is  excellently, 
even  lovingly,  written.' — Scotsman. 

'  An  excellent  monograph.' — Ti»tes. 

'  A  most  complete  presentation.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

M.  Kaufmann.    CHARLES  KINGSLEY.    By  M.  Kaufmann, 
M.A.      Cro"un  8vo.     Buckram,     ^s. 
A  biography  of  Kingsley,  especially  dealing  with  his  achievements  in  social  reform. 
'The  author  has  certainly  gone  about  his  work  with  conscientiousness  and  industry.  — 
Sheffield  Daily  Telegraph. 

A.  F.  Robbins.  THE  EARLY  PUBLIC  LIFE  OF  WILLIAM 
EWART  GLADSTONE.  By  A.  F.  Robbins.  With  Portraits. 
Crown  Zvo.     bs. 

'Considerable  labour  and  much  skill  of  presentation  have  not  been  unworthily 
expended  on  this  interesting  work.' — Times. 

Clark  RusseU.      THE  LIFE   OF  ADMIRAL   LORD    COL- 

LINGWOOD.      By  W.  Clark  Russell,  Author  of  '  The  Wreck 

of  the  Grosvenor.'     With  Illustrations  by  F.  Brangwyn.       Third 

Edition.     Croi.vn  %vo.     ()s. 
'  A  most  excellent  and  wholesome  book,  which  we  should  like  to  see  in  the  hands  of 

every  boy  in  the  country.' — Si.  fames' s  Gazette. 
'A  really  good  book.' — Saturday  Review. 

Southey.  ENGLISH  SEAMEN  (Howard,  Clififord,  Hawkins, 
Drake,  Cavendish).  By  Robert  Southey.  Edited,  with  an 
Introduction,  by  David  Hannay.    Second  Edition.     Crown  Svo.    6s. 

'Admirable  and  well-told  stories  of  our  n.ival  history.' — Army  and  Navy  Gazette. 

'  A  brave,  inspiriting  book.' — Black  and  White. 

'The  work  of  a  master  of  style,  and  delightful  all  through.' — Daily  Chronicle. 


General  Literature 


S.  Baring  Gould.     OLD   COUNTRY  LIFE.     By  S.   Baring 

Gould,  Author  of  'Mehalah,'  etc.  With  Sixty-seven  Illustrations 
by  W.  Parkinson,  F.  D.  Bedford,  and  F.  Masey.  Large 
Crown  Svo.  los.  6d.  Fifth  and  Cheaper  Edition,  ds. 
'  "  Old  Country  Life,"  as  healthy  wholesome  reading,  full  of  breezy  life  and  move- 
ment, full  of  quaint  stories  vigorously  told,  will  not  be  excelled  by  any  book  to  be 
published  throughout  the  year    Sound,  hearty,  and  English  to  the  core.' — World. 


i6  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

S.  Baring  Gould,     HISTORIC  ODDITIES  AND  STRANGE 
EVENTS.    By  S.  Baring  Gould.     Third  Edition.    CrownSvo.    6s. 
'  A  collection  of  exciting  and  entertaining  chapters.     The  whole  volume  is  delightful 
reading.' — Times. 

S.  Earing  Gould.    FREAKS  OF  FANATICISM.   By  S.  Baring 

Gould.      Tiiird  Edition.     Crown  "ivo.     6s. 
'  Mr.  Baring  Gould  has  a  keen  eye  for  colour  and  effect,  and  the  subjects  he  has 
chosen  give  ample  scope  to  his  descriptive  and  analytic  faculties.     A  perfectly 
fascinating  book.' — Scottish  Leader. 

S.    Baring  Gould.     A  GARLAND   OF   COUNTRY  SONG  : 

English  Folk  Songs  with  their  Traditional  Melodies.  Collected  and 
.irranged  by  S.  BARING  GouLD  and  H.  Fleetwood  Sheppard. 
Demy  /[to.      6s. 

S.    Baring  Gould.      SONGS   OF  THE    WEST:   Traditional 

Ballads  and  Songs  of  the  West  of  England,  with  their  Traditional 
Melodies.  Collected  by  S.  Baring  Gould,  M. A.,  and  H.  Fleet- 
wood Sheppard,  M.  A.  Arranged  for  Voice  and  Piano.  In  4  I'arts 
(containing  25  Songs  each),  Farts  /.,  //.,  ///.,  3^.  eac/i.  Fart 
IV.,  ^s.  In  one  Vol.,  French  fjiorocco,  l^s. 
'A  rich  collection  of  humour,  pathos,  grace,  and  poetic  fancy.' — Saturday  Review. 

S.  Baring  Gould.   YORKSHIRE  ODDITIES  AND  STRANGE 

E\'ENTS.     Fourth  Edition.     Crozvn  Zvo.     6s. 

S.  Baring  Gould.     STRANGE  SURVIVALS  AND  SUPER- 
STITIONS.    With  Illustrations.    By  S.  Baring  Gould.     Crown 
%vo.     Second  Edition.     6s. 
'  We  have  read  Mr.  Baring  Gould's  book  from  beginning  to  end.      It  is  full  of  quaint 
and  various  information,  and  there  is  not  a  dull  page  in  it. ' — Notes  and  Queries. 

S.    Baring  Gould.       THE      DESERTS    OF     SOUTHERN 

FRANCE.  By  S.  Baring. Gould.  With  numerous  Illustrations 
by  F.  D.  Bedford,  S.  Hutton,  etc.     2  vols.     De>?iy  8vo.     32.?. 

This  book  is  the  first  serious  attempt  to  describe  the  great  barren  tableland  that 
extends  to  the  south  of  Limousin  in  the  Department  of  Aveyron,  Lot,  etc.,  a 
country  of  dolomite  cliffs,  and  caiions,  and  subterranean  rivers.  The  region  is 
full  of  prehistoric  and  historic  interest,  relics  of  cave-dwellers,  of  mediaival 
robbers,  and  of  the  English  domination  and  the  Hundred  Years'  War. 

'His  two  richly-illustrated  volumes  are  full  of  matter  of  interest  to  the  geologist, 
the  archaeologist,  and  the  student  of  hiistory  and  manners.' — Scotsman. 

'  It  deals  with  its  subject  in  a  mauner  which  rarely  fails  to  arrest  attention.' — Times 

R.  S.  Baden-PowelL  THE  DOWNFALL  OF  PREMPEH.  A 
Diary  of  Life  with  the  Native  Levy  in  A.shanti,  1S95.  By  Lieut. -Col. 
Baden-Powell.  With  21  Illustrations,  a  Map,  and  a  Special 
Chapter  on  the  Political  and  Commercial  Position  of  Ashanti  by  Sir 
George  Baden-Powell,  K.C.M.G.,  M.P.     De/ny  8vo.     10s.  6d. 

'  A  compact,  faithful,  most  readable  record  of  the  campaign." — Daily  A'ews. 
'  A  bluff  and  vigorous  narrative.' — Glasgow  Herald. 
'  A  really  interesting  book.' — Yorkshire  Post. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  !/ 

W.  E.  Gladstone.  THE  SPEECHES  AND  PUBLIC  AD- 
DRESSES OF  THE  RT.  HON.  \V.  E.  GLADSTONE,  M.P. 
Edited  by  A.  W.  Hutton,  M.A.,  and  H.  J.  Cohen,  M.A.  With 
Portraits.     Svo.      Vols.  IX.  and X.     \2s.  6d.  each. 

Henley  and  Whibley.  A  BOOK  OF  ENGLISH  PROSE. 
Collected  by  W.  E.  Henley  and  Charles  Whibley.    Cr.  2>vo.   6s. 

'A  unique  volume  of  extracts — an  art  gallery  of  early  prose.' — Bi7~ininghain  Post. 

'An  admirable  companion  to  Mr.  Henley's  "Lyra  Heroica."' — Saturday  Review. 

'  Quite  delightful.  The  choice  made  has  been  excellent,  and  the  volume  has  been 
most  admirably  printed  by  Messrs.  Constable.  A  greater  treat  for  those  not  well 
acquainted  with  pre-Restoration  prose  could  not  be  imagined.' — Athetiautn, 

J.  Wells.  OXFORD  AND  OXFORD  LIFE.  By  Members  of 
the  University.  Edited  by  J.  Wells,  M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of 
Wadham  College.     Cro~vn  ?>vo.     3^.  6d. 

This  work  contains  an  account  of  life  at  Oxford — intellectual,  social,  and  religious — 
a  careful  estimate  of  necessary  expenses,  a  review  of  recent  changes,  a  statement 
of  the  present  position  of  the  University,  and  chapters  on  Women's  Education, 
aids  to  study,  and  University  Extension. 

'  We  congratulate  Mr.  Wells  on  the  production  of  a  readable  and  intelligent  account 
of  Oxford  as  it  is  at  the  present  time,  written  by  persons  who  are  possessed  of  a 
close  acquaintance  with  the  system  and  life  of  the  University.' — Atketueum. 

W.  M.  Dixon,  A  PRIMER  OF  TENNYSON.  By  W.  M. 
Dixon,  M.A.,  Professor  of  English  Literature  at  Mason  College. 
Crown  Svo.     zs.  6d. 

'  Much  sound  and  well-expressed  criticism  and  acute  literary  judgments.  The  biblio- 
graphy is  a  boon.' — Speaker. 

'  No  better  estimate  of  the  late  Laureate's  work  has  yet  been  published.  His  sketch 
of  Tennyson's  life  contains  everything  essential ;  his  bibliography  is  full  and  con- 
cise ;  his  literary  criticism  is  most  interesting.' — Glasgow  Herald. 

W.  A.  Craigie.    A  PRIMER  OF  BURNS.    By  W.  A.  Craigie. 

Crown  Zvo.     2s.  6d. 
This  book  is  planned  on  a  method  similar  to  the  '  Primer  of  Tennyson.'    It  has  also 

a  glossary. 
'A  valuable  addition  to  the  literature  of  the  poet.' — Tintes. 
'  An  excellent  short  account.' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 
'An  admirable  introduction.' — Globe. 

L.  WMbley.  GREEK  OLIGARCHIES  :  THEIR  ORGANISA- 
TION AND  CHARACTER.  By  L.  Whibley,  M.A.,  Fellow 
of  Pembroke  College,  Cambridge.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'An  exceedingly  useful  handbook  :  a  careful  and  well-arranged  study  of  an  obscure 
subj  ec  t . ' —  Tunes. 

'  Mr.  Whibley  is  never  tedious  or  pedantic' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

W.  B.  Worsfold.  SOUTH  AFRICA  :  Its  History  and  its  Future. 
By  W.  Basil  WoRSFOLD,  M.A.      With  a  Map.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'An  intensely  interesting  book.' — Daily  Chronicle. 
-  '  A  monumental  work  compressed  into  a  very  moderate  compass.' — World. 


A3 


i8  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

C.  H.  Pearson.  ESSAYS  AND  CRITICAL  REVIEWS.  By 
C.  H.  Pearson,  M.A.,  Author  of  'National  Life  and  Character.' 
Edited,  with  a  Biographical  Sketch,  by  H.  A.  Strong,  M.A., 
LL.D.     With  a  Portrait.     DemyZvo.     los.  6d. 

'  These  fine  essays  illustrate  the  great  breadth  of  his  historical  and  literary  sy:n- 
pathies  and  the  remarkable  variety  of  his  intellectual  interests.' — Giasg;ow  Herald. 

'  Remarkable  for  careful  handling,  breadth  of  view,  and  thorough  knowledge.' — Scots- 
man. 

'  Charming  essays.  — Spectator. 

Ouida.     VIEWS  AND  OPINIONS.    By  Ouida.     CrownZvo. 
Second  Edition.     6j. 
'  Ouida  is  outspoken,  and  the  reader  of  this  book  will  not  have  a  dull  moment.    The 
book  is  full  of  variety,  and  sparkles  with  entertaining  matter.' — Speaker. 

J.  S.  Shedlock.     THE  PIANOFORTE  SONATA :  Its  Origin 

and  Development.  By  J.  S.  Shedlock.  Crown  Svo.  5^. 
'  This  work  should  be  in  the  possession  of  every  musician  and  amateur,  for  it  not 
only  embodies  a  concise  and  lucid  history  ot  the  origin  ofoneof  the  most  im- 
portant forms  of  musical  composition,  but,  by  reason  of  the  painstaking  research 
and  accuracy  of  the  author's  statements,  it  is  a  very  valuable  work  for  reference.' 
— A  themsum. 

E.  M.  Bowden.  THE  EXAMPLE  OF  BUDDHA :  Being  Quota- 
tions from  Buddhist  Literature  for  each  Day  in  the  Year.  Compiled 
by  E.  M.  Bowden.  With  Preface  by  Sir  Edwin  Arnold.  Third 
Edition,     ibmo,     2s,  6d. 

J.    Beever.       PRACTICAL    FLY-FISHING,     Founded    on 
Nature,  by  John  Beever,  late  of  the  Thwaite  House,  Coniston.     A 
New  Edition,  with  a  Memoir  of  the  Author  by  W.  G.  COLLINGWOOD, 
M.A.     Crown  Svo.     35.  6d. 
A  little  book  on  Fly-Fishing  by  an  old  friend  of  Mr.  Ruskin. 


Science 


Freudenreich.  DAIRY  BACTERIOLOGY.  A  Short  Manual 
for  the  Use  of  Students.  By  Dr.  Ed.  von  Freudenreich. 
Translated  from  the  German  by  J.  R.  AiNSWORTH  Davis,  B.A., 
F.C.P.     Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d. 

Chalmers    MitcheU.      OUTLINES   OF   BIOLOGY.      By   P. 
Chalmers  Mitchell,    M.A.,  F.Z.S.     Ful/y  Illustrated.     Crown 
Svo.     65. 
A  text-book  designed  to  cover  the  new   Schedule   issued   by  the  Royal  College  of 
Physicians  and  Surgeons. 

G.Massee,  A  MONOGRAPH  OF  THE  MYXOGASTRES.    By 

George  Massee.     With  12  Coloured  Plates.     RoyalSvo.     iSs.  net. 

'A  work  much  in  advance  of  any  book  in  the  language  treating  of  this  group  of 

organisms.      It    is   indispensable   to  every   student   of  the   Myxogastres.      The 

coloured  plates  deserve  high  praise  for  their  accur.icy  and  execution.' — Nature. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  19 


Philosophy 


L.  T.  Hobhouse,  THE  THEORY  OF  KNOWLEDGE.  By 
L.  T.  Hobhouse,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Corpus  College,  Oxford. 
Demy  8ve>,  21  s. 
'The  most  important  contribution  to  English  philosophy  since  the  publication  of  Mr. 
Bradley's  "  Appearance  and  Reality."  Full  of  brilliant  criticism  and  of  positive 
theories  which  are  models  of  lucid  statement.' — Glasg'o'w  Herald. 
'  An  elaborate  and  often  brilliantly  written  volume.  The  treatment  is  one  of  great 
freshness,  and  the  illustrations  are  particularly  numerous  and  apt.' — Times. 

W.  H.  Fairbrother.  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  T.  H.  GREEN. 
By  W.  H.  Fairbrother,  M.A.,  Lecturer  at  Lincoln  College, 
Oxford.     Crown  8vo.     35.  6d. 

This  volume  is  expository,  not  critical,  and  is  intended  for  senior  students  at  the 
Universities  and  others,  as  a  statement  of  Green's  teaching,  and  an  introduction  to 
the  study  of  Idealist  Philosophy. 

'  In  every  way  an  admirable  book.  As  an  introduction  to  the  writings  of  perhaps  the 
most  remarkable  speculative  thinker  whom  England  has  produced  Jn  the  present 
century,  nothing  could  be  better  than  Mr.  Fairbrother's  exposition  and  criticism.' — 
Glasgow  Herald. 

F.  W.  BusseU.  THE  SCHOOL  OF  PLATO  :  its  Origin  and 
its  Revival  under  the  Roman  Empire.  By  F.  W.  Bussell,  M.A., 
Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Brasenose  College,  Oxford.  Demy  %vo.  Two 
vol  times.     105.  6d.  each.      Vol.  I. 

'  A  highly  valuable  contribution  to  the  history  of  ancient  thought.'—  Glasgmu  Herald. 

'  A  clever  and  stimulating  book,  provocative  of  thought  and  deserving  careful  reading.' 
— Manchester  Guardian. 

F.  S.  Granger.  THE  WORSHIP  OF  THE  ROMANS.  By 
F.  S.  Granger,  M.A.,  Lilt.D.,  Professor  of  Philosophy  at  Univer- 
sity College,  Nottingham.  Crown  2>vo.  6s, 
The  author  delineates  that  group  of  beliefs  which  stood  in  close  connection  with  the 
Roman  religion,  and  among  the  subjects  treated  are  Dreams,  Nature  Worship, 
Roman  Magic,  Divination,  Holy  Places,  Victims,  etc.  Thus  the  book  is  also 
a  contribution  to  folk-lore  and  comparative  psychology. 
'A  scholarly  analysis  of  the  religious  ceremonies,  beliefs,  and  superstitions  of  ancient 
Rome,  conducted  in  the  new  instructive  light  of  comparative  anthropology.' — 
Times. 


20  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 


Theology 


E.   C.    S.   Gibson.      THE    XXXIX.    ARTICLES    OF    THE 

CHURCH  OF  ENGLAND.     Edited  with  an  Introduction  by  E. 

C.    S.    Gibson,   D.D.,   Vicar   of   Leeds,   late   Principal  of  Wells 

Theological  College.     Iti  Two  Vohirnes.     Demy  %vo.      "js.  6d.  each, 

Vol.1.     Artichs'l.-VIII. 
'  The  tone  maintained  throughout  is  not  that  of  the  partial  advocate,  but  the  faithful 

exponent. ' — Scotsman. 
'  There  are  ample  proofs  of  clearness  of  expression,  sobriety  of  judgment,  and  breadth 

of  view.  .  .  .  The  book  will  be  welcome  to  all  students  of  the  subject,  and  its  sound, 

definite,  and  loyal  theology  ought  to  be  of  gre.at  service.' — National  Observer. 
'  So  far  from  repelling  the  general  reader,  its  orderly  arrangement,  lucid  treatment, 

and  felicity  of  diction  invite  and  encourage  his  attention.' — Yorkshire  Post. 

R.  L.  Ottley.     THE  DOCTRINE  OF  THE  INCARNATION. 

By  R.  L.  Ottley,  M.A.,  late  fellow  of  Magdalen  College,  Oxon,, 
Principal  of  Pusey  House.    In  Two  Volumes.    Demy  ?>vo.     it,s, 

'  Learned  and  reverent :  lucid  and  well  arranged.' — Record. 

'  Accurate,  well  ordered,  and  judicious." — National  Observer. 

'A  clear  and  remarkably  full  account  of  the  main  currents  of  speculation.     Scholarly 

precision  .  .  .  genuine  tolerance   .    .   .    intense  interest  in  his  subject — are  Mr. 

Ottley 's  merits." — Guardian. 

S.  R.  Driver.  SERMONS  ON  SUBJECTS  CONNECTED 
WITH  THE  OLD  TESTAMENT.  By  S.  R.  Driver,  D.D., 
Canon  of  Christ  Church,  Regius  Professor  of  Hebrew  in  the  Uni- 
versity of  Oxford.  Crown  8vo.  6s. 
'  A  welcome  companion  to  the  author's  famous  '  Introduction.'  No  man  can  read  these 
discourses  without  feeling  that  Dr.  Driver  is  fully  alive  to  the  deeper  teaching  of 
the  Old  Testament." — Guardian. 

T.  K.  Cheyne.  FOUNDERS  OF  OLD  TESTAMENT  CRITI- 
CISM :  Biographical,  Descriptive,  and  Critical  Studies.  By  T.  K. 
Cheyne,  D.D,,  Oriel  Professor  of  the  Interpretation  of  Holy  Scrip- 
ture at  O.xford.  Large  crown  Svo.  "js.  6d. 
This  important  book  is  a  historical  sketch  of  O.  T.  Criticism  in  the  form  of  biographi- 
cal studies  from  the  days  of  Eichhorn  to  those  of  Driver  and  Robertson  Smith. 
It  is  the  only  book  of  its  kind  in  English. 
'Avery  learned  and  instructive  work." — Times. 

C.H.Prior.  CAMBRIDGE  SERMONS.  Edited  by C.H.  Prior, 
M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Pembroke  College.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

A  volume  of  sermons  preached  before  the  University  of  Cambridge  by  various 
preachers,  including  the  Archbishop  of  Canterbury  and  Bishop  Westcott. 

'  A  representative  collection.     Lishop  Westcott's  is  a  noble  sermon." — Guardian. 

H.  C.  Beeching.     SERMONS  TO  SCHOOLBOYS.     By  H.  C. 
Beeching,  M.  a.,  Rector  of  Yattendon,  Berks.     With  a  Preface  by 
Canon  Scott  Holland.     Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d. 
Seven  sermons  preached  before  the  boys  of  Bradfield  College. 


Messrs.  Metiiuen's  List  21 

E.  B.  Layard.  RELIGION  IN  BOYHOOD.  Notes  on  the 
Religious  Training  of  Boys.  With  a  Preface  by  J.  R.  Illing- 
WORTH.     By  E.  B.  Layard,  M. A.     i^mo.     is. 

2Dctotional  lBoofe0* 

tVt(h  Full-page   Illustrations.      Fcap.    %vo.      Buckram.      3^.    6^/. 
Padded  morocco,   t^s. 

THE  IMITATION  OF  CHRIST.  By  Thomas  A  Kempis. 
With  an  Introduction  by  Dean  Farrar.  Illustrated  by  C.  M. 
Gere,  and  printed  in  black  and  red.  Second  Edition. 
'Amongst  all  the  innumerable  English  editions  of  the  "Imitation,"  there  can  have 
been  few  which  were  prettier  than  this  one,  printed  in  strong  and  handsome  type 
by  Messrs.  Constable,  with  all  the  glory  of  red  initials,  and  the  comfort  of  buckram 
binding.' — Glasgow  Herald. 

THE  CHRISTIAN  YEAR.  By  John  Keble.  With  an  Intro- 
duction and  Notes  by  W.  Lock,  M.  A.,  Sub- Warden  of  Keble  College, 
Ireland  Professor  at  Oxford,  Author  of  the  '  Life  of  John  Keble.' 
Illustrated  by  R.   Anning  Bell. 

'The  present  edition  is  annotated  with  all  the  care  and  insight  to  be  expected  from 
Mr.  Lock.  The  progress  and  circumstances  of  its  composition  are  detailed  in  the 
Introduction.  There  is  an  interesting  Appendix  on  the  MSS.  of  the  "Christian 
Year,"  and  another  giving  the  order  in  which  the  poems  were  written.  A  "Short 
Analysis  of  the  Thought"  is  prefixed  to  each,  and  any  difficulty  in  the  text  is  ex- 
plained in  a  note. — Guardian. 

'  The  most  acceptable  edition  of  this  ever-popular  work.' — Globe. 

Leaders  of  Religion 

Edited  by  H.  C.  BEECHING,  M.A.      With  Portraits,  crown  Zvo. 

A  series  of  short  biographies  of  the  most  prominent  leaders  ; /' 

of  religious  life  and  thought  of  all  ages  and  countries.  O  /  (^ 

The  following  are  ready —  KJ\ 

CARDINAL  NEWMAN.     By  R.  H.  Hutton. 
JOHN  WESLEY.    By  J.  H.  Overton,  M.A. 
BISHOP  WILBERFORCE.     By  G.  W.  Daniel,  M.A. 
CARDINAL  MANNING.     By  A.  W.  Hutton,  M.A. 
CHARLES  SIMEON.     By  H.  C.  G.  MOULE,  M.A. 
JOHN  KEBLE.    By  Walter  Lock,  M.A. 
THOMAS  CHALMERS.     By  Mrs.  Oliphant. 
LANCELOT  ANDREWES.     By  R.  L.  Ottley,  M.A. 


22  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

augustine  of  canterbury.   by  e.  l.  cutts,  d.d. 

WILLIAM  LAUD.     By  W.  H.  HuiTOX,  M.A 
JOHN  KNOX.     By  F.  M'CUNX. 
JOHN  UO\VE.     By  R.  F.  HORTON,  D.D. 
BISHOP  KEN.    By  F.  A.  Clarke,  M.A. 
GEORGE  FOX,  THE  QUAKER.     By  T.  HoDGKiN,  D.C.L. 
Other  volumes  will  be  announced  in  due  course. 

Fiction 

SIX     SHILLING     NOVELS 

Marie  Corelli's  Novels 

Crouin  Hfc.     €s.  each. 

A  ROMANCE  OF  TWO  WORLDS.     Fourteenth  Edition. 

VENDETTA.     Eleventh  Edition. 

THELMA.     Foicrteenth  Edition. 

ARDATH.     Tenth  Edition. 

THE  SOUL  OF  LILITH.     Ninth  Edition. 

WO RM WO O D.     Eighth  Edition. 

BARABBAS  :  A  DREAM  OF  THE  WORLD'S  TRAGEDY. 

Tvjenly-fijth  Edition. 

'  The  tender  reverence  of  the  treatment  and  the  imaginative  beauty  of  the  writing 
have  reconciled  us  to  the  daring  of  the  conception,  and  the  conviction  is  forced  on 
us  tliat  even  so  exalted  a  subject  cannot  be  made  too  familiar  to  us,  provided  it  be 
presented  in  the  true  spirit  of  Christian  faith.  The  amplifications  of  the  Scripture 
narrative  are  often  conceived  with  high  poetic  insight,  and  this  "Dream  of  the 
World's  Tragedy  "  is,  despite  some  trifling  incongruities,  a  lofty  and  not  inade- 
quate paraphrase  of  the  supreme  climax  of  the  inspired  narrative.' — Dublin 
Review. 

THE  SORROWS  OF  SATAN.     Twenty-niiith  Edition. 

'  A  very  powerful  piece  of  work.  .  .  .  The  conception  is  majiiiificent,  and  is  likely 
to  win  an  abiding  place  within  the  memory  of  man.  .  .  ,  The  author  has  immense 
command  of  language,  and  a  limitless  audacity.  .  .  .  This  interesting  and  re- 
markable romance  will  live  long  after  much  of  the  ephemeral  liter.ature  of  the  day 
is  forgotten.  ...  A  literary  phenomenon  .  .  .  novel,  and  even  sublime.' — W.  T. 
Stead  in  the  Review  of  Reviews. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  23 

Anthony  Hope's  Novels 

Crown  %vo.     6s.  each. 
THE  GOD  IN  THE  CAR.     Sei'enth  Edition. 

'  A  very  remarkable  book,  deserving  of  critical  analysis  impossible  within  our  limit  ; 
brilliant,  but  not  superficial  ;  well  considered,  but  not  elaborated  ;  constructed 
with  the  proverbial  art  that  conceals,  but  yet  allows  itself  to  be  enjoyed  by  readers 
to  whom  fine  literary  method  is  a  keen  pleasure  ;  true  without  cynicism,  subtle 
without  affectation,  humorous  without  strain,  witty  without  oflfence,  inevitably 
sad,  with  an  unmorose  simplicity.'—  The  World. 

A  CHANGE  OF  AIR.     Fourth  Editio7i. 

'A  graceful,  vivacious  comedy,  true  to  human  nature.  The  characters  are  traced 
with  a  masterly  hand.' — Tiincs. 

A  MAN  OF  MARK.     TJiird  Edition. 

'  Of  all  Mr.  Hope's  books,  "  A  Man  of  Mark  "  is  the  one  which  best  compares  with 
"  The  Prisoner  of  Zenda."  The  two  romances  are  unmistakably  the  work  of  the 
same  writer,  and  he  possesses  a  style  of  narrative  peculiarly  seductive,  piquant, 
comprehensive,  and — his  own.' — National  Observer. 

THE    CHRONICLES     OF     COUNT     ANTONIO.        Third 

Edition. 
'It  is  a  perfectly  enchanting  story  of  love  and  chivalry,  and  pure  romance.  The 
outlawed  Count  is  the  most  constant,  desperate,  and  withal  modest  and  tender  of 
lovers,  a  peerless  gentleman,  an  intrepid  fighter,  a  very  faithful  friend,  and  a  most 
magnanimous  foe.  In  short,  he  is  an  altogether  admirable,  lovable,  and  delight- 
ful hero.  There  is  not  a  word  in  the  volume  that  can  give  offence  to  the  most 
fastidious  taste  of  man  or  woman,  and  there  is  not,  either,  a  dull  paragraph  in  it. 
The  book  is  everywhere  instinct  with  the  most  exhilarating  spirit  of  adventure, 
and  delicately  perfumed  with  the  sentiment  of  all  heroic  and  honourable  deeds  of 
history  and  romance.' — Guardian. 

S.  Baring  Gould's  Novels 

Crown  2>vo.     6s.  each. 

•To  say  that  a  book  is  by  the  author  of  "  Mehalah"  is  to  imply  that  it  contains  a 

story  cast  on  strong  lines,  containing  dramatic  possibilities,  vivid  and  sympathetic 

descriptions  of  Nature,  and  a  wealth  of  ingenious  imagery.' — Speaker. 

"That  whatever  Mr.  Baring  Gould  writes  is  well  worth  reading,  is  a  conclusion  that 

may  be  very  generally  accepted.     His  views  of  life  are  fresh  and  vigorous,  his 

language  pointed  and  characteristic,  the  incidents  of  which  he  makes  use  are 

striking  and  original,  his  characters  are  life-like,  and  though  somewhat  e.xcep- 

tional  people,  are  drawn  and  coloured  with  artistic  force.     Add  to  this  that  his 

descriptions  of  scenes  and  scenery  are  painted  with  the  loving  eyes  and  skilled 

hands  of  a  master  of  his  art,  that  he  is  always  fresh  and  never  dull,  and  under 

such  conditions  it  is  no  wonder  that  readers  have  gained  confidence  both  in  his 

power  of  amusing  and  satisfying  them,  and  that  year  by  year  his  popularity 

widens.' — Court  Circular. 

ARM  I  NELL  :  A  Social  Romance.    Fourth  Edition. 
URITH  :  A  Story  of  Dartmoor.    Fourth  Edition. 

'  The  author  is  at  his  best.' — Times. 

'  He  has  nearly  reached  the  high  water-mark  o(  "  Mehalah."  '—Xaiicna!  Obse>~c>. 


24  Messrs.  Metiiuen's  List 

IN  THE  ROAR  OF  THE  SEA.     Fifth  Edition. 

'One  of  the  best  imagined  and  most  enthralling  stories  the  author  has  produced. 
— Saturday  Review. 

MRS.  CURGENVEN  OF  CURGENVEN.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  A  novel  of  vigorous  humour  and  sustained  power.' — Graphic. 
'  The  swing  of  the  narrative  is  splendid.' — Sussex  Daily  News. 

CHEAP  JACK  ZITA.     Third  Edition. 

'  A  powerful  dr.ima  of  human  passion.' — Westminster  Gazette. 
'A  story  worthy  the  author.' — National  Observer. 

THE  QUEEN  OF  LOVE.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  The  scenery  is  admirable,  and  the  dramatic  incidents  are  most  striking.' — Glasgow 

Herald. 
'  Strong,  interesting,  and  clever.' — Westminster  Gazette. 
'  You  cannot  put  it  down  until  you  have  finished  it.' — Punch. 
'  Can  be  heartily  recommended  to  all  who  care  for  cleanly,  energetic,  and  interesting 

fiction." — Sussex  Daily  News. 

KITTY  ALONE.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  A  strong  and  original  story,  teeming  with  graphic  description,  stirring  incident, 

and,  above  all,  with  vivid  and  enthralling  human  interest.' — Daily  Telegraph. 
'  Brisk,  clever,  keen,  healthy,  humorous,  and  interesting.' — A^ational  Observer. 
'  Full  of  quaint  and  delightful  studies  of  character.' — Bristol  Mercury. 

NOEMI  :   A   Romance  of  the   Cave-D wallers.      Illustrated  by 
R.  Caton  Woodville.      Third  Edition. 

'  "  Noemi  "  is  as  excellent  a  tale  of  fighting  and  adventure  as  one  may  wish  to  meet. 

All  the  characters  that  interfere  in  this  exciting  tale  are  marked  with  properties 

of  their  own.      The  narrative  also  runs  clear  and  sharp  as  the  Loire  itself.' — 

Pall  Mall  Gazette. 
'Mr.  Baring  Gould's  powerful  story  is  full  of  the  strong  lights  and  shadows  and 

vivid  colouring  to  which  he  has  accustomed  us.' — Standard. 

THE     BROOM-SQUIRE,       Illustrated    by    Frank    Dadd. 
Third  Edition. 

'  A  straui  of  tenderness  is  woven  through  the  web  of  his  tragic  tale,  and  its  atmosphere 
is  sweetened  by  the  nobility  and  sweetness  of  the  heroine's  character.' — Daily  Xe7vs. 

'A  story  of  exception.ll  interest  that  seems  to  us  to  be  better  than  anything  he  has 
written  of  late.' — Speaker.  '  A  powerful  and  striking  story.' — Guardian. 

'A  powerful  piece  of  work." — Black  and  White. 


[Gilbert  Parker's  Novels 

Cro2vn  ^vo.     6s.  each. 
PIERRE  AND  HIS  PEOPLE.     Third  Edition. 

'Stories  happily  conceived  and  finely  executed.     There  is  strength  and  genius  in  Mr. 
Parker's  style.' — Daily  Telegraph. 


Messrs  Methuen's  List  25 

MRS.  FALCHION.     Third  Edition, 

'  A  splendid  study  of  character.' — AtheniEutn. 

'  But  little  behind  anything  that  has  been  done  by  any  writer  of  our  time. ' — Pall 

Mall  Gazette. 
'A  very  striking  and  admirable  novel.' — St.  James's  Gazette- 

THE  TRANSLATION  OF  A  SAVAGE. 

'The  plot  is  original  and  one  difficult  to  work  out ;  but  Mr.  Parker  has  done  it  with 
great  skill  and  delicacy.     The  reader  who  is  not  interested  in  this  original,  fresh, 
and  well-told  tale  must  be  a  dull  person  indeed.' — Daily  Chro7iiclc. 
'A  strong  and   successful   piece  of  workmanship.     The  portrait  of  Lali,  strong, 
dignified,  and  pure,  is  e.xceptionally  well  drawn.' — Manchester  Guardian. 

THE  TRAIL  OF  THE  SWORD.     Foitrih  Editiojt. 

'Everybody  with  a  soul  for  romance  will  thoroughly  enjoy  "The  Trail  of  the 
Sword."  ' — St.  James's  Gazette. 

'  A  rousing  and  dramatic  tale.  A  book  like  this,  in  which  swords  fl.ish,  great  sur- 
prises are  undertaken,  and  daring  deeds  done,  in  which  men  and  women  live  and 
love  in  the  old  straightforward  passionate  way,  is  a  joy  inexpressible  to  the  re- 
viewer, brain-weary  of  the  domestic  tragedies  and  psychological  puzzles  of  every- 
day fiction  ;  and  we  cannot  but  believe  that  to  the  reader  it  will  bring  refreshment 
as  welcome  and  as  keen.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

WHEN  VALMOND  CAME  TO  PONTIAC  :  The  Story  of 
a  Lost  Napoleon.  Third  Edition. 
'  Here  we  find  romance — real,  breathing,  living  romance,  but  it  runs  (lush  with  our 
own  times,  level  with  our  own  feelings.  Not  here  can  we  complain  of  lack  of 
inevitableness  or  homogeneity.  The  character  of  Valmond  is  drawn  unerringly  ; 
his  career,  brief  as  it  is,  is  placed  before  us  as  convincingly  as  history  itself.  'Ihe 
book  must  be  read,  we  may  say  re-read,  for  any  one  thoroughly  to  appreciate 
Mr.  Parker's  delicate  touch  and  innate  sympathy  with  humanity.' — Pall  Mall 
Gazette. 
'The  one  work  of  genius  which  1895  has  as  yet  produced.' — New  Age> 

AN  ADVENTURER   OF   THE  NORTH:   The  Last  Adven- 
tures of '  Pretty  Pierre.' 

'The  present  book  is  full  of  fine  and  moving  stories  of  the  great  North,  and  it  will 
add  to  Mr.  Parker's  already  high  reputation.' — Glasgow  Herald. 

'The  new  book  is  very  romantic  and  very  entertaining — full  of  that  peculiarly 
elegant  spirit  of  adventure  which  is  so  characteristic  of  Mr.  Parker,  and  of  that 
poetic  thrill  which  has  given  him  warmer,  if  less  numerous,  admirers  than  even 
his  romantic  story-telling  gift  has  done.' — Sketch. 

THE    SEATS    OF    THE     MIGHTY.      Illustrated.      Fourth 

Edition. 

'  The  best  thing  he  has  done  ;  one  of  the  best  things  that  any  one  has  done  lately.' — 
St.  James's  Gazette. 

.'Mr.  Parker  seems  to  become  stronger  and  easier  with  every  serious  novel  that  he 
attempts.  .  .  .  In  "  The  Seats  of  the  Mighty  "  he  shows  the  matured  power  which 
his  former  novels  have  led  us  to  expect,  and  has  produced  a  really  fine  historical 
novel.  .  .  .  The  great  creation  of  the  book  is  Doltaire.  .  .  .  His  character  is 
drawn  with  quite  masterly  strokes,  for  he  is  a  villain  who  is  not  altogether  a  villain, 
and  who  attracts  the  reader,  as  he  did  the  other  characters,  by  the  extraordinary 
brilliance  of  his  gifts,  and  by  the  almost  unconscious  acts  of  nobility  which  he 
performs.  .  .  .  Most  sincerely  is  Mr.  Parker  to  be  congratulated  on  the  finest 
novel  he  has  yet  written.' — Athenceum, 


26  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

'Mr.  Parker's  latest  book  places  him  in  the  front  rank  of  living  novelists.  "The 
Seats  of  the  Mighty"  is  a  great  Look.' — Black  and  White. 

'  One  of  the  strongest  stories  of  historical  interest  and  adventure  that  we  have  read 
for  many  a  day.  .  .  .  Through  all  Mr.  Parker  moves  with  an  assured  step,  whilst 
in  his  treatment  of  his  subject  there  is  that  happy  blending  of  the  poetical  with  the 
prosaic  which  has  characterised  all  his  writings.  A  notable  and  successful  book.' 
— Speaker. 

'  The  story  is  very  finely  and  dramatically  told.  ...  In  none  of  his  books  has  his 
imaginative  faculty  appeared  to  such  splendid  purjiose  as  here.  Captain  Moray, 
Alixe,  Gabord,  Vauban — above  all,  Doltaire — and,  indeed,  every  person  who  takes 
part  in  the  action  of  the  story  are  clearly  conceived  and  finely  drawn  and  indivi- 
dualised.— Scotsman. 

'  An  admirable  romance.  The  glory  of  a  romance  is  its  plot,  and  this  plot  is  crowded 
with  fine  sensations,  which  have  no  rest  until  the  fall  of  the  famous  old  city  and 
the  final  restitution  of  love.' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

Conan  Doyle.  ROUND  THE  RED  LAMP.  By  A.  Conan 
Doyle,  Author  of  '  The  NVhite  Company,'  '  The  Adventures  of 
Sherlock  Holmes,'  etc.  Fourth  Edition.  Crown  Svo.  6s. 
'  The  book  is,  indeed,  composed  of  leaves  from  life,  and  is  far  and  away  the  best  view 
that  has  been  vouchsafed  us  behind  the  scenes  of  the  consulting-room.  It  is  very 
superior  to  "  The  Diary  of  a  late  Physician."  '• — Illustrated  London  N'ews. 

Stanley  Weyman.  UNDER  THE  RED  ROBE.  By  Stanley 
Weyman,  Author  of  '  A  Gentleman  of  France.'  With  Twelve  Illus- 
trations by  R.  Caton  Woodville.    Eighth  Edition.     Crown  ?>vo.    6s.  " 

'  A  book  of  which  we  have  read  every  word  for  the  sheer  pleasure  of  reading,  and 
which  we  put  down  with  a  pang  that  we  cannot  forget  it  all  and  start  again.' — 
IFesimlnster  Gazette. 

'  Every  one  who  reads  books  at  all  must  read  this  thrilling  romance,  from  the  first 
page  of  which  to  the  last  the  breathless  reader  is  haled  along.  An  inspiration  of 
"  manliness  and  courage." — Daily  Chronicle. 

'  A  delightful  tale  of  chivalry  and  adventure,  vivid  and  dramatic,  with  a  wholesome 
modesty  and  reverence  for  the  highest.' — Globe. 

Mrs.  Clifford.  A  FLASH  OF  SUMMER.  By  Mrs.  W.  K 
Clifford,  Author  of  /  Aunt  Anne,'  etc.  Second  Edition.  Crown 
'tivo.     6s, 

'  The  story  is  a  very  sad  and  a  very  beautiful  one,  exquisitely  told,  and  enriched  with 
many  subtle  touches  of  wise  and  tender  insight.  It  will,  undoubtedly,  add  to  its 
author's  reputation — already  high — in  the  ranks  of  novelists.' — Speaker. 

'  We  must  congratulate  Mrs.  Clifford  upon  a  very  successful  and  interesting  story, 
told  throughout  with  finish  and  a  delicate  sense  of  proportion,  qualities  which, 
indeed,  have  always  distinguished  the  best  work  of  this  very  able  writer.' — 
Mancltester  Guardian. 

Emily  Lawless.     HURRISH.     By  the  Honble.  Emily  Law- 
less, Author  of  '  Maelcho,'  etc.     Fifth  Edition.     Crown  ?)V0.     6s. 
A  reissue  of  Miss  Lawless'  most  popular  novel,  uniform  with  '  Maelcho.' 

Emily  Lawless.  MAELCHO  :  a  Sixteenth  Century  Romance. 
]]y  the  llonljle.  Emii.y  LAWLESS,  Author  of  '  Crania,' etc.  Second 
Edition.      Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'  A  really  great  book.' — Spectator. 

'There  is  no  keener  pleasure  in  life  than  the  recognition  of  genius.  Good  work  is 
commoner  than  it  used  to  be,  but  the  best  is  as  rare  as  ever.  All  the  more 
gladly,  therefore,  do  we  welcome  in  "  Maelcho  "  a  piece  of  work  of  the  first  order, 
which  we  do  not  hesitate  to  describe  as  one  of  the  most  remarkable  literary 
achievements  of  this  generation.  Miss  Lawless  is  possessed  of  the  very  essence 
of  historical  genius.' — Manchester  Guardian. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  37 

J.  H.  Findlater.    THE  GREEN  GRAVES  OF  BALGOWRIE. 

By  Jane  H.  FiNDLATER.      Third  Edition.     Crown  %vo.     6s. 
'A  powerful  and  vivid  story.' — Standard. 

'  A  beautiful  story,  sad  and  strange  as  truth  itself.' — Vanity  Fair 
'  A  work  of  remarkable  interest  and  originality.' — National  Observer. 
'  A  really  original  novel.' — Journal  of  Kdiicai ion. 
'A  very  charming  and  pathetic  tale.'- — Fall  Mall  Gazette. 
'  A  singularly  original,  clever,  and  beautiful  story.' — Guardian. 
'  "  The  Green  Graves  of  Balgowrie  "  reveals  to  us  a  new  Scotch  writer  of  undoubted 

faculty  and  reserve  force.' — Spectator. 
'  An  exquisite  idyll,  delicate,  afi'ecting,  and  beautiful.' — Black  and  White. 
'  Permeated  with  high  and  noble  purpose.     It  is  one  of  the  most  wholesome  stories 

we  have  met  with,  and  cannot  fail  to  leave  a  deep  and  lasting  impression.' — 

JVf7tisa^ent. 

E.  F.  Benson.     DODO  :  A  DETAIL  OF  THE  DAY.  By  E.  F. 

Benson.     Sixteenth  Edition,     Crown  8vo,     6s. 
'  A  delightfully  witty  sketch  of  society.' — Spectator. 
'  A  perpetual  feast  of  epigram  and  paradox.' — Speaker. 
'  By  a  writer  of  quite  e,\ceptional  ability.' — Atheneeutn. 
'  Brilliantly  written.' — World. 

E.  F.  Benson.    THE  RUBICON.    By  E.  F.  Benson,  Author  of 

'  Dodo.'     Fifth  Edition.     Crown  8vo.     6s. 
'  Well   written,  stimulating,   unconventional,    and,    in    a    word,    characteristic' — 

liiritmi^hant  Fast. 
'  An  exceptional  achievement ;  a  notable  advance  on  his  previous  work.' — National 

Obse}-ver. 

M.  M,  Dowie.  GALLIA.  By  M^nie  Muriel  Dowie,  Author 
of  'A  Girl  in  the  Carpathians.'     Third  Edition.     Crown  Svo.    6s. 

'  The  style  is  generally  admirable,  the  dialogue  not  seldom  brilliant,  the  situations 
surprising  in  their  freshness  and  originality,  while  the  subsidi.iry  as  well  as  the 
principal  characters  live  and  move,  and  the  story  itself  is  readable  from  title-page 
to  colophon.' — Saturday  Rez'ie%v. 

'  A  very  notable  book ;  a  very  sympathetically,  at  times  delightfully  written  book. 
— Daily  Graphic. 

Ilrs.    Oliphant.      SIR    ROBERT'S    FORTUNE.      By   Mrs. 

Oliphant.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
'  Full  of  her  own  peculiar  charm  of  style  and  simple,  subtle  character-painting  comes 
her  new  gift,  the  delightful  story  before  us.     The  scene  mostly  lies  in  the  moors, 
and  at  tlie  touch  of  the  authoress  a  Scotch  moor  becomes  a  living  thing,  strong, 
tender,  beautiful,  and  changeful.' — J'all  Jl/all  Gazette. 

Mrs.  Oliphant.    THE  TWO   MARYS.    By  Mrs.  Oliphant. 

Second  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
W.  E.  Norris.  MATTHEW  AUSTIN.  By  \\\  E.  Norris,  Author 
of  '  Mademoiselle  de  Mersac,'  etc.    Eotirth  Edition.    Crown  %-i'o.    6s. 
'  "Matthew  Austin  "  may  safely  be  pronounced  one  of  the  most  intellectually  satis- 
factory and  morally  bracing  novels  of  the  current  year.' — Daily  Telegraph. 

W.  E.   Norris,    HIS   GRACE.     By  W.  E.   Norris.     Third 

Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6.s. 
'  Mr.  Norris  has  drawn  a  really  fine  character  in  the  Duke  or  Hurstbourne,  at  once 
unconventional  and  very  true  to  the  conventionjriities  of  life,  weak  and  strong  in 
a  breath,  capable  of  inane  follies  and  heroic  decisions,  yet  not  so  definitely  por- 
trayed as  to  relieve  a  reader  of  the  necessity  of  study.' — Atkenaum.  ■ 


28  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

W.  E.  Norris.    THE   DESPOTIC    LADY    AND    OTHERS. 

By  W.  E.  Norris.     Croivn  Svo.     6s. 

'A  budget  of  good  fiction  of  which  no  one  will  tire.' — Scotsman. 
'An  extremely  entertaining  volume — the   sprightliest  of  holiday  companions.' — 
Daily  Telegraph 

H.  G.  Wells.  THE  STOLEN  BACILLUS,  and  other  Stories. 
By  H.  G.  Wells,  Author  of  'The  Time  Machine.'  Croivn 
8vo.  6s. 
'  The  ordinary  reader  of  fiction  may  be  glad  to  know  that  these  stories  are  eminently 
readable  from  one  cover  to  the  other,  but  they  are  more  than  that  ;  they  are  the 
impressions  of  a  ver>'  striking  imagination,  which,  it  would  seem,  has  a  great  deal 
within  its  reach.' — Saturday  Revie'v. 

Arthur  Morrison.  TALES  OF  MEAN  STREETS.  By  Arthur 
Morrison.     Fourth  Edition.     Ci-owti  %vo.     6s. 

'  Told  with  consummate  art  and  extraordinary  detail.  He  tells  a  plain,  unvarnished 
tale,  and  the  very  truth  of  it  makes  for  beauty.  In  the  true  humanity  of  the  book 
lies  its  justification,  the  permanence  of  its  interest,  and  its  indubitable  triumph.'— 
A  thenisuin. 

'A  great  book.  The  author's  method  is  amazingly  effective,  and  produces  a  thrilling 
sense  of  reality.  The  writer  lays  upon  us  a  master  hand.  The  book  is  simply 
appalling  and  irresistible  in  its  interest.  It  is  humorous  also  ;  without  humour 
it  would  not  make  the  mark  it  is  certain  to  make.' — IVorlii. 

J.   Maclaren  Cobban.      THE   KING    OF    ANDAMAN  :    A 

Saviour  of  Society.     By  J.  Maclaren  Cobban.     Croivn  %vo.     6s  • 

'  An  unquestionably  interesting  book.  It  would  not  surprise  us  if  it  turns  out  to  be 
the  most  interesting  novel  of  the  season,  for  it  contains  one  character,  at  least, 
who  has  in  him  the  root  of  immortality,  and  the  book  itself  is  ever  exhaling  the 
sweet  savour  of  the  unexpected.  .  .  .  Plot  is  forgotten  and  incident  fades,  ami 
only  the  really  human  endures,  and  throughout  this  book  there  stands  out  in  bold 
and  beautiful  relief  its  high-souled  and  chivalric  protagonist,  James  the  Master 
of  Hutcheon,  the  King  of  Andaman  himself.' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

'A  most  original  and  refreshing  story.  James  Hutcheon  is  a  personage  whom  it  Is 
good  to  know  and  impossible  to  forget.  He  is  beautiful  within  and  without, 
whichever  way  we  take  him.' — Spectator. 

'  "The  King  of  Andaman,"  is  a  book  which  does  credit  not  less  to  the  heart  than 
the  head  of  its  author.' — Athenceuiii. 

'  The  fact  that  Her  Majesty  the  (^ueen  has  been  pleased  to  gracefully  express  to  the 
author  of  "  The  King  of  Andaman"  her  interest  in  his  work  will  doubtless  find 
fur  it  many  readers.' — Vanity  Fair. 

H.  Morrah.    A  SERIOUS  COMEDY.    By  Herbert  Morrah. 
Croivn  %vo.     6s. 
'  There  are  many  delightful  places  in  this  volume,  which  is  well  worthy  of  its  title. 
The  theme  has  seldom  been  presented  with  more  fieshness  or  more  force.' — 
Scots7na>i. 

L.  B.  Walford.     SUCCESSORS  TO  THE  TITLE.    By  Mrs. 

Walford,  Author  of  'Mr.  Smith,'  etc.  Second  Edition.  Crown 
Svo.     6s, 

'  The  story  is  fresh  and  healthy  from  beginning  to  finish  ;  and  our  liking  for  the  two 
simple  people  who  are  the  successors  to  the  title  mounts  steadily,  and  ends  almost 
in  respect.  — Scotsman. 

'.The  book  is  quite  worthy  to  ba  ranked  with  many  clever  predecessors.  It  is  ex- 
cellent reading." — Glasgow  Herald. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  29 

T.  L.  Paton.     A  HOME  IN   INVERESK.     By  T.  L.  Paton. 
Croivn  8vo,     6s, 
'A  distinctly  fresh  and  fascinating  novel.' — Jlfouirose  Standard. 
'A  book  which  bears  marks  of  considerable  promise.' — Scotsman. 
'A  pleasant  and  well-written  story.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

John  Davidson.    MISS  ARMSTRONG'S  AND  OTHER  CIR- 
CUMSTANCES.    By  John  Davidson.     Crow7i  ?,vo.    6s. 

'  Throughout  the  volume  there  is  a  strong  vein  of  originality,  a  strength  in  the 
handling,  and  a  knowledge  of  human  nature  that  are  worthy  of  the  highest  praise.' 
— Scotsman. 

J.   B.   Burton.     IN    THE    DAY    OF    ADVERSITY.     By  J. 

Bloundelle  Burton.     Croiun  %vo.     6s. 

'  Unusually  interesting  and  full  of  highly  dramatic  situations.' — Guardian. 
'  h.  well-written  story,  drawn  from  that  inexhaustible  mine,  the  time  of  Louis  XIV. 
—Pall  hiall  Gazette. 

H.  Johnston.     DR.   CONGALTON'S   LEGACY.    By  Henry 
Johnston.     Croivn  Zvo.     6s. 
'  The  story  is  redolent  of  humour,  pathos,  and  tenderness,  while  it  is  not  without  a 
touch  of  tragedy.' — Scotsman. 
A  worthy  and  permanent  contribution  to  Scottish  creative  literature.' — Glasgow 
Herald. 

Julian  Corbett.    A  BUSINESS  IN  GREAT  WATERS.    By 

Julian    Corbett.     Croivn  8vo.     6s. 

'  In  this  stirring  story  Mr.  Julian  Corbett  has  done  excellent  work,  welcome  alike 
for  its  distinctly  literary  flavour,  and  for  the  wholesome  tone  which  pervades  it. 
Mr.  Corbett  writes  with  immense  spirit,  and  the  book  is  a  thoroughly  enjoyable 
one  in  all  respects.  The  salt  of  the  ocean  is  in  it,  and  the  right  heroic  ring  re- 
sounds through  its  gallant  adventures.' — Speaker. 

C.  Phillips  Woolley.    THE  QUEENSBERRY  CUP.    A  Talc 
of  Adventure.     By  Clive  Phillips  Woolley,  Author  of  '  Snap,' 
Editor  of  '  Big  Game  Shooting.'    Illustrated.     Crown  8vo.     6s. 
'  A  book  which  will  delight  boys  :  a  book  which  upholds  the  healthy  schoolboy  code 

of  morality.' — Scotsman. 
'  A  brilliant  book.     Dick  St.  Clair,  of  Caithness,  is  an  almost  ideal  character — a  com- 
bination of  the  mediaeval  knight  and  the  modern  pugilist.' — Admiralty  and  Horse- 
guards  Gazette. 

Robert  Barr.     IN  THE  MIDST  OF  ALARMS.    By  Robert 

Barr.       Third  Edition.      Crown  8vo.     6s. 
'  A  book  which  has  abundantly  satisfied  us  by  its  capital  humour.' — Daily  Chronicle. 
'Mr.  Barr  has  achieved  a  triumph  whereof  he  has  every  reason  to  be  proud.' — Pall 

Mall  Gazette. 

L.  Daintrey.      THE  KING  OF  ALBERIA.     A  Romance  of 
the  Ballvans.     By  Laura  Daintrey.     Crown  8vo.     6s. 

'  Miss  Daintrey  seems  to  have  an  intimate  acquaintance  with  the  people  and  politics 
of  the  Balkan  countries  in  which  the  scene  of  her  lively  and  picturescjue  romance 
is  laid.  On  almost  every  page  we  find  clever  touches  of  local  colour  which  dif- 
ferentiate her  book  unmistakably  from  the  ordinary  novel  of  commerce.  The 
story  is  briskly  told,  and  well  conQe.i\e.d.'— Glasgow  Herald. 


so  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

Mrs.  Pinsent.    CHILDREN  OF  THIS  WORLD.     By  Ellen 
F.  Pinsent,  Autlior  of  'Jenny's  Case.'     Crown  Zvo.     6s. 
'  Mrs.  Pinsent's  new  novel  has  plenty  of  vigour,  variety,  and  good  writing.     There 
are  certainty  of  purpose,  strength  of  touch,  and  clearness  of  vision.' — Atkeneeutn. 

Clark  RusseU.  MY  DANISH  SWEETHEART.  By  W. 
Clark  Russell,  Author  of  '  The  Wreck  of  the  Grosvenor,'  etc. 
lUiist7-atcd.     Fourth  Edition,     Croivn  %vo.     6s. 

G.  Manville  Fenn.  AN  ELECTRIC  SPARK.   ByG.  Manville 
Fenn.    Second  Edition.     Crown  8z'o.     6s, 
A  simple  and  wholesome  storj'.' — Manchester  Guardiati. 

R.  Pryce.    TIME  AND  THE  WOMAN.    By  Richard  Pryce, 

Author  of  '  Miss  Maxwell's  Affections,'  '  The  Quiet  Mrs.   Fleming,' 
etc.     Second  Edition.     Crown  8vo.     6s. 
'  JMr.  Pryce's  work  recalls  the  style  of  Octave  Feuillet,  by  its  clearness,  conciseness, 
its  literary  reserve.' — Aittaiauiii. 

Mrs.  Watson.  THIS  MAN'S  DOMINION.  By  the  Author 
of  '  A  High  Little  World.'     Second  Edition.     Cro2vn8vo.     6s. 

Marriott  Watson.      DIOGENES  OF  LONDON.    By  H.  B. 

Marriott  Watson.     Crown  Svo.     Buckram.     6s. 

'  By  all  those  who  delight  in  the  uses  of  words,  who  rate  the  exercise  of  prose  above 
the  exercise  of  verse,  who  rejoice  in  all  proofs  of  its  delicacy  and  its  strength,  who 
believe  that  English  prose  is  chief  among  the  moulds  of  thought,  by  these 
Mr.  Marriott  Watson's  book  will  be  welcomed.' — National  Observer. 

M.  Gilclirist.  THE  STONE  DRAGON.  By  Murray  Gil- 
christ.    Crowft  Svo.    Buckrajn.    6s. 

'  The  author's  faults  are  atoned  for  by  certain  positive  and  admirable  merits.  The 
romances  have  not  their  counterpart  in  modern  literature,  and  to  read  them  is  a 
unique  experience.' — National  Observer. 

E.  Dickinson.    A  VICAR'S  WIFE.    By  Evelyn  Dickinson. 

Crown  Zvo.     6s. 

E.  M.  Gray.    ELSA.     By  E.  M'Queen  Gray.    Crown  Zvo.    6s. 


THREE-AND-SIXPENNY    NOVELS 

Croivn  Svo. 

DERRICK  VAUGHAN,  NOVELIST.    By  Edna  Lyall. 

MARGERY  OF  QUETHER.     By  S.  Baring  Gould. 

JACQUETTA.     By  S.  Baring  Gould. 

SUBJECT  TO  VANITY.    By  Margaret  Benson. 

THE  MOVING  FINGER.     By  Mary  Gaunt. 

JACO  TRELOAR.     By  J.  H.  Pearce. 


3/6 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  31 

aut  diabolus  aut' nihil.    by  x.  l. 

THE  COMING  OF  CUCULAIN.  A  Romance  of  the  Heroic 
Age  of  Ireland.     By  Standish  O'Grady.     Illustrated. 

THE  GODS  GIVE  MY  DONKEY  WINGS.  By  Angus 
Evan  Abbott. 

THE  STAR  GAZERS.     By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 

THE  POISON  OF  ASPS.      By  R.  Orton  Prowse. 

THE  QUIET  MRS.  FLEMING.     By  R.  Pryce. 

THE  PLAN  OF  CAMPAIGN.     By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 

DISENCHANTMENT.    By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 

MR.  BUTLER'S  WARD.    By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 

A  LOST  ILLUSION.     By  Leslie  Keith. 

A  REVEREND  GENTLEMAN.    By  J.  M.  Cobban. 

A  DEPLORABLE  AFFAIR.     By  W.  E.  Norris. 

A  CAVALIER'S  LADYE.     By  Mrs.  Dicker. 


2/6 


HALF-CROWN      NOVELS 

A  Series  of  Novels  by  popular  Authors. 

1.  HOVENDEN,  V.C.    By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 

2.  ELI'S  CHILDREN.    By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 

3.  A  DOUBLE  KNOT.     By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 

4.  DISARMED     By  M.  Betham  Edwards. 

5.  A  MARRIAGE  AT  SEA.    By  W.  Clark  Russell. 

6.  IN  TENT  AND  BUNGALOW.    By  the  Author  of  '  Indian 

Idylls.' 

7.  MY  STEWARDSHIP.    By  E.  M'Queen  Gray. 

8.  JACK'S  FATHER.     By  W.  E.  NORRIS. 

9.  JIM  B. 

Lynn  Linton.  THE  TRUE  HISTORY  OF  JOSHUA  DAVID- 
SON, Christian  and  Communist.  By  E.  Lynn  Linton.  Eleventh 
Edition.     Post  Zvo.     \s. 


Books  for  Boys  and  Girls      ^\^ 

A  Scries  of  Books  by  well-known  Authors,  well  illustrated.       V_y  / 

1.  THE  ICELANDER'S  SWORD.    By  S.  Baring  Gould. 

2.  TWO    LITTLE    CHILDREN    AND    CHING.     By   Edith 

E.  Cuthell, 


32  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

3.  TODDLEBEN'S  HERO.    By  M.  M.  Blake. 

4.  ONLY  A  GUARD  ROOM  DOG.    By    Edith  E.  Cuthell. 

5.  THE  DOCTOR  OF  THE  JULIET.    By  Harry  Colling- 

WOOD. 

6.  MASTER  ROCKAFELLAR'S  VOYAGE.     By  W.   Clark 

Russell. 

7.  SYD  BELTON  :    Or,  The  Boy  who  would  not  go  to  Sea. 

By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 


3/6 


The  Peacock  Library 

A   Series   of  Books  for   Girls   by   well-known    Authors, 
handsotnely  bound  in  blue  and  silver,  and  well  illustrated. 

1.  A  PINCH  OF  EXPERIENCE.     By  L.  B.  Walford. 

2.  THE  RED  GRANGE.     By  Mrs.  Molesworth. 

3.  THE  SECRET  OF  MADAME  DE  MONLUC.      By  the 

Author  of  '  Mdlc  Mori.' 

4.  DUMPS.     By  Mrs.  Parr,  Author  of  Adam  and  Eve.' 

5.  OUT  OF  THE  FASHION.    By  L.  T.  Meade. 

6.  A  GIRL  OF  THE  PEOPLE.     By  L.  T.  Meade. 

7.  HEPSY  GIPSY.     By  L.  T.  Meade,     is.  bd. 

8.  THE  HONOURABLE  MISS.    By  L.  T.  Meade. 

9.  MY  LAND  OF  BEULAH.    By  Mrs.  Leith  Adams. 

University    Extension   Series 

A  series  of  books  on  historical,  literary,  and  scientific  subjects,  suitable 
for  extension  students  and  home-reading  circles.  Each  volume  is  com- 
plete in  itself,  and  the  subjects  are  treated  by  competent  writers  in  a 
broad  and  philosophic  spirit. 

Edited  by  J.   E.  SYMES,  M.A., 

Principal  of  University  College,  Nottingham. 

Crown  8vo.     Price  {with  some  exceptions)  2s.  6d. 

The  following  volumes  are  ready : — 

THE  INDUSTRIAL  HISTORY  OF  ENGLAND.  By  H.  de 
B.  (JiBRiNS,  M.A.,  late  Scholar  of  Wadham  College,  Oxon.,  Cobden 
Prizeman.  Fourth  Edition.  With  Maps  and  Plans,  3^. 
'A  compact  and  clcir  story  of  our  ndustrial  development.  A  study  of  this  concise 
but  luminous  book  cannot  fail  to  give  the  reader  a  clear  insight  into  the  principal 
phenomena  of  our  industrial  history.  The  editor  and  publishers  are  to  be  congrat- 
ulated on  this  first  volume  of  their  venture,  and  we  shall  look  with  expectant 
interest  for  the  succeeding  volumes  of  the  series.' —  University  Extettiian  JournaL 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  33 

a  history  of  english  political  economy.   by 

L.  L.  Price,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  Oriel  College,  Oxon.    Second  Edition. 

PROBLEMS  OF  POVERTY  :  An  Inquiry  into  the  Industrial 
Conditions  of  the  Poor.     By  J.  A.  Hobson,  M.A.      Third  Edition. 

VICTORIAN  POETS.    By  A.  Sharp. 

THE  FRENCH  REVOLUTION.    By  J.  E.  Symes,  M.A. 

PSYCHOLOGY.  By  F.  S.  Granger,  M.A.,  Lecturer  in  Philo- 
sophy at  University  College,  Nottingham. 

THE  EVOLUTION  OF  PLANT  LIFE  :  Lower  Forms.  By 
G.  Massee,  Kew  Gardens.      With  Illustrations. 

AIR  AND  WATER.     Professor  V.  B.  Lewes,  M.A.    Illustrated. 

THE  CHEMISTRY  OF  LIFE  AND  HEALTH.  By  C.  W. 
KiMMiNS,  M.A.  Camb.     Illustrated. 

THE  MECHANICS  OF  DAILY  LIFE.  By  V.  P.  Sells,  M.A. 
Illustrated. 

ENGLISH  SOCIAL  REFORMERS.    H.  DE  B.  Gibbins,  M.A. 

ENGLISH  TRADE  AND  FINANCE  IN  THE  SEVEN- 
TEENTH CENTURY.    By  W.  A.  S.  Hewins,  B.A. 

THE  CHEMISTRY  OF  FIRE.  The  Elementary  Principles  of 
Chemistry,     By  M.  M.  Pattison  Muir,  ]\LA.     Illustrated. 

A  TEXT-BOOK  OF  AGRICULTURAL  BOTANY.  By  M.  C. 
Potter,  M.A.,  F.L.S.     Illustrated,     y.  6d. 

THE  VAULT  OF  HEAVEN.  A  Popular  Introduction  to 
Astronomy.     By  R.  A.  Gregory.       With  numerous  Illustrations. 

METEOROLOGY.  The  Elements  of  Weather  and  Climate. 
By  H,  N.  Dickson,  F.R.S.E.,  F.R.  Met.  Soc.    Illustrated. 

A  MANUAL  OF  ELECTRICAL  SCIENCE.  By  George 
J.  BURCH,  M.A.      With  numerous  Illustrations,     ^s, 

THE  EARTH.  An  Introduction  to  Physiography.  By  Evan 
Small,  M.A.     Illustrated. 

INSECT   LIFE.     By  F.  W.  Theobald,  M.A.     Illustrated. 

ENGLISH  POETRY  FROM  BLAKE  TO  BROWNING.    By 

W.  M.  Dixon,  M.A. 
ENGLISH   LOCAL   GOVERNMENT.      By  E.   Jenks,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Law  at  University  College,  Liverpool. 


34  Messrs.  Metiiuen's  List 

Social  Questions  of  To-day- 
Edited  by  II.  DE  B.  GIBBINS,  M.A. 

Crown  ^vo.     2s.  6d,  I  /C. 

A  series  of  volumes  upon  those  topics  of  social,  economic,  ^  /  \J 

and  industrial  interest  that  are  at  the  present  moment  fore-  ' 

most  in  the  public  mind.  Each  volume  of  the  series  is  written  by  an 
author  who  is  an  acknowledged  authority  upon  the  subject  with  which 
he  deals. 

The  following  Vohvnes  of  the  Series  are  ready  : — 

TRADE  UNIONISM— NEW  AND  OLD.      By  G.   HowELL, 

Author  of  *  The  Conflicts  of  Capital  and  Labour.'     Second  Edition. 

THE  CO-OPERATIVE  MOVEMENT  TO-DAY.  By  G.  J. 
HoLYOAKE,  Author  of  '  The  History  of  Co-operation.'  Second 
Edition. 

MUTUAL  THRIFT.  By  Rev.  J.  Frome  Wilkinson,  M.A., 
Author  of  '  The  J"riendly  Society  Movement.' 

PROBLEMS  OF  POVERTY  :  An  Inquiry  into  the  Industrial 
Conditions  of  the  Poor.     By  J.  A.  IIobson,  M.A.     Third  Edition. 

THE  COMMERCE  OF  NATIONS.  By  C.  F.  Bastable, 
M.A.,  Professor  of  Economics  at  Trinity  College,  Dublin. 

THE  ALIEN  INVASION.   By  W.  H.  Wilkins,  B.A.,  Secretary 

to  the  Society  for  Preventing  the  Immigration  of  Destitute  Aliens. 

THE  RURAL  EXODUS.    By  P.  Anderson  Graham. 

LAND  NATIONALIZATION.    By  Harold  Cox,  B.A. 

A  SHORTER  WORKING  DAY.  By  H.  DE  B.  Gibbins 
and  R.  A.  IIadfield,  of  the  Ilecla  Works,  Sheffield. 

BACK  TO  THE  LAND  :  An  Inquiry  into  the  Cure  for  Rural 
Depopulation.     By  II.  E.  Mooke. 

TRUSTS,  POOLS  AND  CORNERS  :  As  affecting  Commerce 
and  Industry.     By  J.  Stephen  Jeans,  M.R.I.,  F.S.S. 

THE  FACTORY  SYSTEM.    By  R.  Cooke  Taylor. 

THE  STATE  AND  ITS  CHILDREN.  By  Gertrude 
Tuckwell. 

WOMEN'S  WORK.  By  Lady  Dilke,  Miss  Bulley,  and 
Miss  Whitley. 


Messrs.  Metiiuen's  List  35 

MUNICIPALITIES  AT  WORK.  The  Municipal  Policy  of 
Six  Great  Towns,  and  its  Influence  on  their  Social  Welfare.  By 
Frederick  Dolman. 

SOCIALISM   AND    MODERN    THOUGHT.     By  M.  Kauf- 

MANN. 

THE  HOUSING    OF   THE   WORKING  CLASSES.     By  R. 

F.   BOWMAKER. 

MODERN  CIVILISATION  IN  SOME  OF  ITS  ECONOMIC 

ASPECTS.    By  W.  Cunningham,  D.D.,  Fellow  of  Trinity  College, 
Cambridge. 


Classical  Translations 

Edited  by  H.  F.  FOX,  M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Brasenose 
College,  Oxford. 

Messrs,  Methuen  are  issuing  a  New  Series  of  Translations  from  the 
Greek  and  Latin  Classics.  They  have  enUsted  the  services  of  some 
of  the  best  Oxford  and  Cambridge  Scholars,  and  it  is  their  intention  that 
the  Series  shall  be  distinguished  by  literary  excellence  as  well  as  by 
scholarly  accuracy. 

^SCHYLUS — Agamemnon,  Choephoroe,  Eumenides.  Trans- 
lated by  Lewis  Campbell,  LL.D.,  late  Professor  of  Greek  at  St. 
Andrews.     55. 

CICERO— De  Oratore  I.  Translated  by  E.  N.  P.  Moor,  M.A., 
Assistant  Master  at  Clifton.     35'.  dd, 

CICERO— Select  Orations  (Pro  Milone,  Pro  Murena,  Philippic  ll.. 
In  Catilinam).  Translated  by  H.  E.  D.  Blakiston,  M.A.,  Fellow 
and  Tutor  of  Trinity  College,  Oxford,      ^s, 

CICERO— De  Natura  Deorum.  Translated  by  F.  Brooks, 
M.  A.,  late  Scholar  of  Balliol  College,  Oxford.     3^.  6d. 

LUCIAN — Six  Dialogues  (Nigrinus,  Icaro-Menippus,  The  Cock, 
The  Ship,  The  Parasite,  The  Lover  of  Falsehood).  Translated  by 
S.  T.  Irwin,  M.A.,  Assistant  Master  at  Clifton;  late  Scholar  of 
Exeter  College,  Oxford.     35.  dd, 

SOPHOCLES— Electra  and  Ajax.  Translated  by  E.  D.  A. 
MoRSHEAD,  M.A.,  late  Scholar  of  New  CollegCj  Oxford  ;  Assistant 
Master  at  Winchester.     2j.  6a^„ 

TACITUS— Agricola  and  Germania.  Translated  by  R.  B. 
TowNSHENDj,  late  Scholar  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge.     £.(<.  6^ 


36  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

Educational   Books 

CLASSICAL 
TACITI  AGRICOLA.      With   Introduction,    Notes,   Map,   etc. 
By  R.  F.  Davis,  M.A.,  Assistant  Master  at  Weymouth  College. 
Crown  ?ivo.     2s. 

TACITI  GERMANIA.     By  the  same  Editor.     Crown  8vo.    is. 

HERODOTUS:    EASY   SELECTIONS.      With  Vocabulary. 

By  A.  C.  LiDDELL,  M.A.,  Assistant  Master  at  Nottingham  High 

School.      Fcap.  %vo.     is.  6d. 
SELECTIONS  FROM  THE  ODYSSEY.     By  E.  D.  Stone, 

ALA.,  late  Assistant  Master  at  Eton.     Fcap.  Svo.     is.  6d. 
PLAUTUS  :  THE   CAPTIVI.     Adapted  for  Lower  Forms  by 

J.  H.  Freese,  M.  a.,  late  Fellow  of  St.  John's,  Cambridge.      is.  6d. 
DEMOSTHENES  AGAINST  CONON   AND    CALLICLES. 

Edited  with  Notes,  and  Vocabulary,  by  F.  Darwin  Swift,  M.A., 

formerly  Scholar  of  Queen's  College,  Oxford  ;  Assistant  Master  at 

Denstone  College.     FcaJ>.  Svo.     2s. 

GERMAN 
A    COMPANION   GERMAN    GRAMMAR.       By    H.    DE   B. 

GiBBiNS,   M.A.,  Assistant    Master   at    Nottingham  High    School. 

Crown  Svo.     \s.  6d. 
GERMAN    PASSAGES    FOR   UNSEEN    TRANSLATION. 

By  E.  M 'Queen  Gray.     Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d. 

SCIENCE 
THE.WORLD    OF    SCIENCE.      Including  Chemistry,  Heat, 
Light,  Sound,  Magnetism,  Electricity,  Botany,  Zoology,  Physiology, 
Astronomy,  and  Geology.     By  R.   Elliot  Steel,  M.A.,   F.C.S. 
147  Illustrations.     Second  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d. 

'  Mr.  Steel's  Manual  is  admirable  in  many  ways.  The  book  is  well  calculated  to 
attract  and  retain  the  attention  of  the  young.' — Saturday  Rci'iciv. 

'.  If  Mr.  Steel  is  to  be  placed  second  to  any  for  this  quality  of  lucidity,  it  is  only  to 
Huxley  himself;  and  to  be  named  in  the  same  breath  with  this  master  of  the 
craft  of  teaching  is  to  be  accredited  with  the  cle.Trness  of  style  and  simplicity  of 
arrangement  that  belong  to  thorough  mastery  of  a  subject.' — Parents'  Kevinv. 

ELEMENTARY  LIGHT.     By  R.  E.  Steel.     With  numerous 
Illustrations.     Crown  Svo,     4.s.  6d. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  37 

ENGLISH 

ENGLISH    RECORDS.      A    Companion   to    the   History    of 

England.     By  H.  E.  Malden,  M.A.      Crown  %vo.     1$.  6d. 

A  book  which  aims  at  concentrating  information  upon  dates,  genealogy,  officials, 
constitutional  documents,  etc.,  which  is  usually  found  scattered  in  different 
volumes. 

THE  ENGLISH  CITIZEN:  HIS  RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES. 
By  H.  E.  Malden,  M.A.     i^.  6J. 

'  The  book  goes  over  the  same  ground  as  is  traversed  in  the  school  books  on  this 
subject  written  to  satisfy  the  requirements  of  the  Education  code.  It  would 
serve  admirably  the  purposes  of  a  textbook,  as  it  is  well  based  in  historical 
facts,  and  keeps  quite  clear  of  party  matters.' — Scotsman. 

METHUEN'S    COMMERCIAL    SERIES. 

Edited  by  H.  de  B.  GIBBINS,  M.A. 

BRITISH  COMMERCE  AND  COLONIES  FROM  ELIZA- 
BETH TO  VICTORIA.  By  H.  de  B.  Giebins,  M.A.,  Author  of 
'  The  Industrial  History  of  England,'  etc.  etc.     2s. 

COMMERCIAL   EXAMINATION  PAPERS.      By  H.  de  B. 

GiBBINS,  M.A.       15.  6d. 

THE  ECONOMICS  OF  COMMERCE.  By  H.  de  B.  Gibbins, 
M.A.     IS.  6d. 

A  MANUAL  OF  FRENCH  COMMERCIAL  CORRE- 
SPONDENCE. By  S.  E.  Bally,  Modern  Language  Master  at 
the  Manchester  Grammar  School.     2s. 

A  FRENCH  COMMERCIAL  READER.      By  S.  E.  Bally. 

2S. 

COMMERCIAL  GEOGRAPHY,  with  special  reference  to  Trade 
Routes,  New  Markets,  and  Manufacturing  Districts.  By  L.  W.  Lyde, 
M.A.,  of  the  Academy,  Glasgow.     2^-. 

A  PRIMER  OF  BUSINESS.     By  S.  Jackson,  M.A.     \s.  6d. 

COMMERCIAL  ARITHMETIC.  By  F.  G.  Taylor, 
M.A.     IS.  6d. 


38  Messrs.  Metiiuen's  List 

works  by  a.  m.  m.  st  e  dm  an,  m.a. 

INITIA  LATINA:  Easy  Lessons  on  Elementary  Accidence. 
Secottd  Edition.     Fcap,  %vo.     \s. 

FIRST  LATIN  LESSONS.     Fourth  Edition.     CrownZvo.     2s. 

FIRST  LATIN  READER.  With  Notes  adapted  to  the 
Shorter  Latin  Primer  and  Vocabulary.  Second  Edition.  Crown  8vo. 
is.  6d. 

EASY  SELECTIONS  FROM  CAESAR.  Part  I.  The  Hel- 
vetian War.     iSmo.     is. 

EASY  SELECTIONS  FROM  LIVY.  Part  1.  The  Kings  of 
Rome.     iSmo.     is.  6d. 

EASY  LATIN  PASSAGES  FOR  UNSEEN  TRANSLA- 
TION.    TAird  Edition.     Fcap.  Svo.     is.  6d. 

EXEMPLA  LATINA.  First  Lessons  in  Latin  Accidence. 
With  Vocabulary,     Crown  Svo.     is. 

EA.SY  LATIN  EXERCISES  ON  THE  SYNTAX  OF  THE 
SHORTER  AND  REVISED  LATIN  PRIMER.  With  Vocabu- 
lary. Fojtrth  Edition.  Crown  Svo.  2s.  6d.  Issued  with  the  con- 
sent of  Dr.  Kennedy 

THE  LATIN  COMPOUND  SENTENCE  :  Rules  and 
Exercises.     Crown  Svo.     is,  6d.     With  Vocabulary.     2s. 

NOTANDA  OUAEDAM  :  Miscellaneous  Latin  Exercises  on 
Common  Rules  and  Idioms.  Second  Edition.  Fcap.  Svo.  is.  6d. 
With  Vocabulary,  2s. 

LATIN   VOCABULARIES   FOR   REPETITION  :  Arranged 

according  to  Subjects.     Fourth  Edition.     Fcap.  Svo.     is.  6d. 

A  VOCABULARY  OF  LATIN  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES. 
iSmo.     IS. 

STEPS  TO  GREEK.     iSmo.     is. 

EASY  GREEK  PASSAGES  FOR  UNSEEN  TRANSLA- 
TION.    Fcap.  Svo.     IS.  ed. 

GREEK  VOCABULARIES  FOR  REPETITION.     Arranged 

according  to  Subjects.     Second  Edition.     Fcap,  Sz'o.     is.  6d. 

GREEK  TESTAMENT  SELECTIONS.  For  the  use  of 
Schools.  Third  Edition.  With  Introduction,  Notes,  and  Vocabu- 
lary.    Fcap.  Svo.     2s.  6d, 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  39 

STEPS  TO  FRENCH.     i8mo.     M. 

FIRST  FRENCH  LESSONS.     Crown  Zvo,     is. 

EASY  FRENCH  PASSAGES  FOR  UNSEEN  TRANSLA- 
TION.    Second  Edition.     Fcap.%vo.     is.  6d. 

EASY  FRENCH  EXERCISES  ON  ELEMENTARY 
SYNTAX.     With  Vocabulary.     Cro7vn  8vo.     2s.  6d. 

FRENCH  VOCABULARIES  FOR  REPETITION  :  Arranged 

according  to  Subjects.      Third  Edition.     Fcap.  Zvo.      \s. 

SCHOOL  EXAMINATION  SERIES, 

Edited  by  A.  M.  M.  STEDMAN,  M.A. 
Crown  8vo,     2s.  6d. 
FRENCH    EXAMINATION    PAPERS    IN   MISCELLANE- 
OUS GRAMMAR  AND  IDIOMS.  By  A.  M.  M.  Stedman,  M.A. 
Sixth  Edition. 

A  Key,  issued  to  Tutors  and  Private  Students  only,  to  be  had  on 
appUcation  to  the  Publishers.    Second  Edition.    Crown  8vo.     6s.  n'.t. 

LATIN  EXAMINATION  PAPERS  IN  MISCELLANEOUS 

GRAMMAR  AND  IDIOMS.      By  A.   M.  M.  Stedman,  M.A. 

Fourth  Edition.     Key  issued  as  above.     6s.  net. 
GREEK  EXAMINATION  PAPERS  IN  MISCELLANEOUS 

GRAMMAR  AND   IDIOMS.     By  A.   M.  M.   Stedman,   M.A. 

Third  Edition,     Key  issued  as  above.     6s.  net. 

GERMAN  EXAMINATION  PAPERS  IN  MISCELLANE- 
OUS GRAMMAR  AND  IDIOMS.  By  R.  J.  Morich,  Man- 
chester.    Third  Edition.     Key  issued  as  above.     6s.  net. 

HISTORY  AND  GEOGRAPHY  EXAMINATION  PAPERS. 
By  C.  II.  Spence,  M.A.,  Clifton  Coll. 

SCIENCE  EXAMINATION  PAPERS.  By  R.  E.  Steel,  M.A., 
F.C.S.,  Chief  Natural  Science  Master,  Bradford  Grammar  School. 
In  two  vols.     Part  I.  Chemistry;  Part  ii.  Physics. 

GENERAL  KNOWLEDGE  EXAMINATION  PAPERS. 
By  A.  M.  M.  Stedman,  M.A.  Second  Edition.  Key  issued  as 
above.     7^.  net. 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


AA    001  091  700  3 


^^58  00684  8500 


DT 
766 
W89s 
1897